PROJECT:

R1117/2 - Improvement of Al Mustaqbal

Street - Contract 2

TENDER DOCUMENTS

VOLUME 2 PART 3
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

EMPLOYER ‫المـــالك‬
Roads Department ‫إدارة الطرق‬
Roads & Transport Authority ‫هـيئـة الطرق والمواصــالت‬
P.O. Box 118899 118899 :‫صندوق البريد‬
Dubai, U.A.E ‫ اإلمارات العربية المتحدة‬-‫دبي‬

RTA SEPTEMBER 2024

 PROJECT:
R1117/2 - IMPROVEMENT OF AL MUSTAQBAL
STREET – CONTRACT 2

TENDER DOCUMENTS

GENERAL INDEX

VOLUME 1 TENDER & CONTRACT CONDITIONS

VOLUME 2 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Part 1: ROAD WORKS

Part 2: SERVICES WORKS
Part 3: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 3 BILL OF QUANTITIES

VOLUME 4 TENDER DRAWINGS

 PROJECT: R1117/2 - IMPROVEMENT OF AL MUSTAQBAL
STREET – CONTRACT 2

VOLUME 2 – PART 3
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
CONTENTS

SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

SECTION 4 – CONCRRETE WORKS

4/14 ADMIXTURES (ADDITIONAL SUB-CLAUSES) 2
4/15 CONCRETE MIX SPECIFICATION (REVISE CLAUSED) 3
4/16/7 (ADDITIONAL SUB-CLAUSE) 6
4/17.3 CUBE STRENGTH RESULTS (REPLACEMENT 6
SUB-CLAUSE)
4/20.4 (ADDITIONAL SUB-CLAUSE) 7
4/31 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE
(REPLACEMENT CLAUSE) 7

SECTION 5 – ANCILLARY WORKS

5/14 ROAD SIGNS, DESCRIPTION 3
(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic
Control Devices Manual", Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/15 REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGN MATERIALS 3
(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic
Control Devices Manual", Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/16 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 3
FOR ROAD SIGNS
(Refer to RTA / Roads Department “Dubai
Traffic Control Devices Manual”, Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/17 GUARANTEE OF ROAD SIGNS BY CONTRACTOR 3
(refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic
Control Devices Manual", Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/21 METAL BEAM GUARD RAIL SAFETY FENCING 3
5/32 STEEL AND METALWORK 4
5/33 ALUMINIUM FOR PARAPETS 5

-1-
SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE
5/34 FASTENING FOR ALUMINIUM PARAPETS 5
5/35 PAINT & OTHER PROTECTIVE COATINGS 6
5/36 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE FOR STRUCTURES 7
5/37 RUBBEERISED BITUMEN EMULSION 9
5/38 WATERSTOPS 9
5/39 PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS 10
5/40 COLD APPLIED JOINT SEALANT 10
5/41 BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINT 10
5/42 LOCKABLE MEDIAN BOLLARD 11
5/43 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM FOR THE PROTECTION 11
OF EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES
5/44 BRIDGE BEARING (NEW CLAUSE) 13
5/45 BEDDING MORTAR (NEW CLAUSE) 26
5/46 GRP KIOSK 27
5/48 REINFORCED FILL RETAINING WALL 28
5/57 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGH DURABLE
ROADMARKING/ RED COATING 34
5/58 FLEXIBLE RUBBER BOLLARD 37
5/59 HYDRAULIC PRESSED (WET MIX)
TILES FOR CYCLE TRACK 38
5/60 METALWORK AND GLAZING 40

SECTION 8 – CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/1 DESCRIPTION 3
8/2 MATERIALS 3
8/3 GROUND CONDITIONS 3
8/4 TOLERANCES 3
8/5 PILING METHOD AND PROGRAMME 4
8/6 PILING RECORDS 4
8/7 DAMAGE TO ADJACENT SERVICES AND STRUCTURES 5
8/8 CONCRETE FOR PILES 5
8/9 REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES 6
8/10 BORING FOR PILES 7

-2-
SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE
8/11 DRILLING FLUID 8
8/12 PLACING CONCRETE 10
8/13 EXTRACTION OF CASING 12
8/14 TEMPORARY BACKFILLING 14
8/15 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL 14
8/16 CUTTING OFF PILE HEADS 14
8/17 INTEGRITY TESTING OF PILES 14
8/18 LOADING TESTS 15
8/19 FAILURE OF PILE 16
8/20 RECTIFICATION OF FAILURE 17
8/21 PROTECTION OF PILING FROM CHEMICAL ATTACK 17
8/22 CLEARANCE OF WORKS 17

SECTION 11 – STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

11/1 GENERAL 3
11/2 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PROTECTION 3
AGAINST CORROSION
11/3 AMENDMENTS AND ADDITION TO BS 5400 PART 6 3

SECTION 12 – PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/1 GENERAL 1
12/2 SURFACE PREPARATION – GENERAAL REQUIREMENTS 1
12/3 SURFACE PREPARATION – MATERIALS AND METHOD 2
12/4 PROCEDURES FOR TREATMENT AT JOINTS 6
12/5 PROCEDURES FOR TREATMENT AT AREAS OF 10
MECHANICAL DRAINAGE OR OTHER SURFACE
DEFECTS
12/6 PROCEDURES FOR TREATMENT OF LOCAL FAILURE IN 11
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
12/7 WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS FOR THE 12
SURFACE PREPARATION OF STEEL BY BLAST
CLEANING, ABRADING, DRINDING AND CLEANING

-3-
SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE
12/8 WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS FOR THE SURFACE
PREPARATION OF COATED STEEL WORK BY BLAST
CLEANING, ABRADING, GRINDING AND CLEANING 14
12/9 PAINTS AND SIMILAR PROTECTIVE COATING 15
12/10 TESTINF OF PAINTS 16
12/11 METAL COATING 17
12/12 TESTING OF METAL SPRAY COATING 18
12/13 STORAGE REQUIREMENTS AND KEEPING PERIODS
FOR PAINTS 19
12/14 APPLICATION OF PAINT 20
12/15 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF STEEL AND
FABRICATED STEEL WORK 23
12/16 SURFACE IN CONTRACT WITH CONCRETE 23
12/17 REQUIREMENTS FOR APPROVAL 24
12/18 ACCESS AND LIGHTING 24
12/19 ANTI – SLIP SURFACE DRESSING 24

SECTION 13 – DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/1.0 GENERAL 2
13/2.0 CABLES 6
13/3.0 EARTHING 17
13/4.0 CABLE AND EARTH TESTING AFTER
INSTALLATION 18
13/5.0 DOCUMENTS AND MATERIALS TO BE
SUBMITTED WITH THE OFFER 20
13/6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LED LIGHTING 22
13/7.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD 30
13/8.0 CONTROL SYSTEM 34
13/9.0 METEOROLOGICAL AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS
PREVAILING IN DUBAI 35

-4-
SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

SECTION 14 – FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

14/1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATION 1
14/1.1 REQUIREMENTS 1
14/1.2 EXCLUSIONS 1
14/1.3 GENERALS 1
14/2 PART 2 – SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 3
14/2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 3
14/2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4
14/2.3 AUXILIARY COMPONENTS 5
14/2.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 5
14/2.5 CONTROL PANEL – AUTOPULSE Z-20 AGENT
RELEASING 7
14/2.6 PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRONIC SOUNDER 11
14/2.7 VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 11
14/2.8 AUDIBLE/VISUAL COMBINATION DEVICES 12
14/2.9 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES – GENERAL 12
14/2.10 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATION 13
14/2.11 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC
SMOKE DETECTOR 13
14/2.12 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTOR 13
14/2.13 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE DUCT SMOKE
DETECTOR 13
14/2.14 ADDRESSABLE DRY CONTACT MONITOR
MODULE 14
14/2.15 ADDRESSABLE TWO-WIRE DETECTOR
MONITOR MODULE 14
14/2.16 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE 15
14/2.17 SOLATOR MODULE 16
14/2.18 ABORT SWITCH 16
14/2.19 MAINTENANCE LOCK-OUT SWITCH 16
14/2.20 SELECTOR SWITCH 17

-5-
SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE
14/2.21 WATER FLOW SWITCHES 17
14/2.22 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE VALVE
SUPERVISORY SWITCHES 17
14/2.23 COLOR TOUCHSCREEN REMOTE LCD
ANNUNCIATOR 18
14/2.24 CAUTION AND ADVISORY SIGN 18
14/2.25 SYSTEM AND CONTROL WIRING 18
14/3 PART 3 – TESTING AND DOCUMENTS 19
14/3.1 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECK OUT 19
14/3.2 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS 19
14/3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 20
14/3.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 20
14/3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS 20
14/3.6 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS 21

SECTION 15 – AC SYSTEM
PLEASE REFER TO APPENDIX A

SECTION 16 – FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

16/1 GENERAL 1
16/2 MANUAL FIRE ALARM CALL POINT 1
16/3 OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR 1
16/4 DETECTOR BASE 1
16/5 FIRE ALARM PANEL 2
16/6 FIRE EXTINGUISHING EQUIPMENT 3
16/7 FIRE ALARM CABLE AND WIRES 4
16/8 FIRE ALARM CABLE AND WIRES COLOR CODE 4
16/9 INSTALLATION 4
16/10 FIELD TEST 5
16/11 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) 5
16/12 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 6
16/12.1 GENERAL 6

-6-
SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

16/12.2 SAFETY AND RELIABILITY 6

16/12.3 SYSTEM VARIATIONS 6
16/12.4 ARRANGEMENTS 6
16/12.5 THE RECTIFIER 7
16/12.6 THE INVERTER 7
16/12.7 STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 7
16/12.8 MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH 8
16/12.9 FEEDER SELECTOR SWITCH 8
16/13 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) 8

SECTION 17 – SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

17/1 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT 2
17/1.1 INTRODUCTION 2
17/1.2 CCTV SYSTEM SECURITY COVERAGE 2
17/1.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 2
17/1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 4
17/1.5 VIDEO ANALYTICS 9
17/2 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 15
17/2.1 TESTING PROCESS 15
17/2.2 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 17
17/2.3 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS 18
17/2.4 ISSUANCE OF TAKING OVER CERTIFICATS 18
17/3 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE 19
17/3.1 WARRANTY 19
17/3.2 MAINTENANCE 20
17/3.3 PERIODIC PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 21
17/3.4 RESPONSE AND REPAIR TIME REQUIREMENTS 21
17/3.5 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE 22
17/3.6 SPARES HOLDING 23
17/3.7 MAINTENANCE FACILITIES 23
17/3.8 MAINTENANCE RECORD 23

-7-
SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

SECTION 18 – METAL WORKS

1 MATERIALS 2
2 COMPONENTS 4
3 STEEL WORKS 9

SECTION 19 – MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DESIGN GUIDELINES &

SPECIFICATIONS
PLEASE REFER TO APPENDIX A

FOR PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION OF THE FOLLOWING

PLEASE REFER TO APPENDIX A

• MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

• PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS
• PLUMBING
• DUCTWORK
• INSULATION
• NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
• AIR CONDITIONING & VENTILATION
• CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
• FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
• CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
• SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS/SUMP PUMPS
• AIR-COOLED VRF SYSTEM
• ELEVATORS
• BUILDING MOINTORING MANAGSMENT SYSTEM (BMMS)
• GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 20 – CYCLE DIGITAL DISPLAY COUNTER

PLEASE REFER TO APPENDIX B

SECTION 21 – LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

PLEASE REFER TO APPENDIX C

SECTION 22 – SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

PLEASE REFER TO APPENDIX D

-8-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

Section 4
Concrete Works

-1-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

4/14 ADMIXTURES 2
4/15 CONCRETE MIX SPECIFICATION (REVISED CLAUSED) 3
4/16/7 (ADDITIONAL SUB – CLAUSE) 6
4/17.3 CUBE STRENGTH RESULTS (REPLACEMENT 6
SUB- CLAUSE)
4/20.4 TOLERANCE IN PROPORTIONING THE PATERIALS 7
4/31 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE 7
(REPLACEMENT CLAUSE)

-2-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

SECTION 4 – CONCRETE WORKS

PS 4.14 ADMIXTURES

4.14 The following paragraphs are additional to the requirements of Section 4/14 of the
General Specifications:

1. The use of an admixture containing chlorides, inorganic sulfates or other

corrosive agents will not be permitted.

2. Plasticizers and super plasticizers shall not contain substance, which adversely
affect the durability and performance of the concrete

3. If two or more admixtures are used simultaneously in the same concrete mix,
data including manufacturer’s certificate shall be provided to assess their
interaction and ensure their compatibility.

PS 4.15 CONCRETE MIX SPECIFICATION (REVISED CLAUSED)

4/15.1 Concrete shall be as shown in the table of 4.5. The number of mixes may require to be
increased.

The criteria given in the table are designed to produce concrete of the required strength
and durability.

If the maximum aggregate size is 10mm then the cement content stipulated for the class
of concrete given in table 4.5 shall be increase by 40kg / m3.

-3-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

TABLE 4.5

TABLE OF MIXES

Concrete Max. Min. Max. Characteristics Cube

Class Size Qty of Free Strength
Agg Cement Water/ CCS
Cement
Ratio
7 – days 28-days
mm. kg. per m3 N/mm2 N/mm2

45/20 20 400 0.25 33 45

40/20 20 370 0.475 30 40
37/20 20 350 0.50 26 37
35/20 20 330 0.525 25 35
30/20 20 310 0.55 20 30
25/20 20 275 0.60 16 25
15/20 20 250 0.65 10 15

The CCSs are for concrete which has been cured at a temperature of 23 degrees C ± 2
degrees C, and are the values below which no more than 5% of the test result full. The 7
– days strength shall be used only as a guide.

4/15.2 Concrete shall comply with BS 8110 except where be is 8007 or this specification differs.
Sampling for test purposes shall comply with BS 1881 part 101 (on site) & part 125 (in
laboratory).

If air – entertainment is specified the average air content at the time of placing measured
in accordance with be is 1881 part 106 shall be:

Concrete containing 20mm

Maximum size aggregate 5% + 1%

Concrete for water – retaining shall be water type and shall complied with the
recommendation of BS 8007.

Concrete for paving or precast unit shall be tested to BS 1881 part 118 and shall have
minimum flexural beam strength of 3.5N/mm2 at 28 days. If the concrete has a specified
CCS of 40N/mm2 or greater, then the minimum flexural strength shall be 4N/mm2.

If the concrete specimens are recurred at the highest temperatures or longer failures. Then
BS 1881 part 111 requires, the adjusted CCS shall be calculated as follows:

-4-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

100f/f = A + B log (24D (T+12)/1000}

= adjusted CCS
f = specified CCS
T = curing temperature
D = age at testing in days
A&B = are coefficient given in the following table

The above equation applies only to OPC, MSRCP and SRPC.

Recorded cube strength N/mm2 A B

Less than 15 10.0 67.5

15 to 35 20.0 60.0
Greater than 35 30.0 52.5

These calculations maybe applied for curing at temperatures up to 27 degrees C.

Before placing concrete the contractor shall obtain approval of mixes propose for each
class of concrete and the average target strengths. The mixes shall be design to achieve
the minimum workability for the Contactor to place and compact the concrete with the
equipment proposed for use.

The mean strength shall exceed the CCS by a margin of 1.64 times the standard division
expected from the concreting plan, except that no standard division less than 3.5N/mm 2
shall be use as a basis for designing a mix. Unless otherwise approved standard division
of 7N/mm2 shall be use for initial mixes.

4/15.3 The ultimate compressive strength of the concrete shall be determined on test specimens
obtained and prepared in accordance with B.S. 1881. Part 108.

4/15.4 Mixes for structural concrete shall be designed by the Contractor. The class of concrete
(shown on the drawings) is denoted by the 28 days characteristic cube strength and the
maximum size of aggregate.

4/15.5 the chloride and sulphate levels in the concrete mix shall comply with the following
requirements:

- Maximum Limits of acid soluble Chloride and Sulphate content as a percentage by

Weight of cement in the mix.

-5-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

TYPE OF CONCRETE CHLORIDES SULPHATE

AS C1 AS SO3
ACCORDING TO BS-1881 PART 124

a. For reinforced concrete

Is made with OPC/MSRPC 0.30 3.70
If made with SRPC 0.06 3.70

b. Pre stressed concrete &

Heat – cured reinforced concrete 0.10 3.70

c. For mass concrete

If made with OPC/MSRPC 0.60 3.70
If made with SRPC 0.12 3.70

Note: The OPC and MSRPC cements can also contain chlorides , the relevant standard
BS 12 allows up to 0.1%. Therefore any chlorides content in the cement has to be
taken into account while computing total Cl in the mix. In case the cement
contains the maximum limit of 0.1% Cl, then aggregates, water and admixtures
used for prestressed concrete or heat cured reinforced concrete should be
absolutely free of chlorides.

4/16.7 (ADDITIONAL SUB-CLAUSE)

Where concrete for the present contract is to be obtained from a batching plant for other
sites, the requirements for trial mixes may, with the approval of the Engineer, not be
required subject to the following:

(a) The concrete mix is currently approved at the source Site, and
(b) Trial mix procedures have been undertaken and approved.

Documentation of trial mix procedures, approvals and all cube strength results must be
provided. The cubes strength results from the source site must be used in assessing
compliance with Clause 4/17.3

No concrete shall be sourced from another site where the mix has not met with
the specification requirements of that site until further notice from the Engineer.

4/17.3 CUBE STRENGTH RESULTS

The result will be acceptable if:

i) The average strength determined at the age of 28 days from the sample of three
or more cube test result exceed the specificities CCS by 0.5 times the current
margin or,

-6-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

ii) No individual result of the sample is less than that (Specified CCS minus 3
N/mm2), or
iii) Number of individual results in the sample below specified CCS is not more than
one.

If the above criteria are not satisfied, the unit represented by the sample is questionable
and the following actions may be instructed as appropriate:

i) Cutting and testing cores from placed concrete

ii) Non – destructive testing of placed concrete.
iii) Load testing relevant structural units.
iv) Cutting out and replacing defective concrete.

If the range of individual cube strengths made from the same sample exceeds 15% of the
mean, then the method of making, curing and testing cube shall be checked. In the event
of the sample having a range exceed 20%, then the result shall be unacceptable and the
Engineer may order any of the following actions:

a) Changing the mix.

b) Improving quality control
c) Cutting and testing cores from placed concrete.
d) Non-destructive testing of placed concrete.

n the event of cutting and testing of cores are required, the Contractor shall cut cores
from approved locations and test them to BS 1881 as modified by BS 6089.

PS 4.20 TOLERANCES IN PROPORTIONING THE MATERIALS

Ps 4.20.4 The following paragraph is addition to Section 4/20 of the General

Specifications:

Admixtures – Admixtures shall be measured by volume if in liquid form and by weight if

solid. The measurement shall be accurate to within 3.0 percent throughout the range of
use.

4/31 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE

4/31.1 Any one set of 6 cubes for each class of concrete and for each particular application
represents a maximum quantity of concrete as shown in Table 4.6. The point of sampling
of fresh concrete shall be at delivery into the construction unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer. Each set of cubes shall be made from a separate batch.

4/31.2 Portland Cement: One 2 kg sample for quality test shall be taken from each 1.700 bags or
equivalent weight in accordance with BS EN 196-7.

4/31.3 Water: One 1 gallon sample shall be obtained prior to use from each source and at least
once every week for quality testing.

-7-
SECTION 4 CONCRETE WORKS

TABLE 4.6

SAMPLING RATES

SAMPLING TO
TYPE OF STRUCTURE REPRESENT A
VOLUME OF M3

1. Critical structures
e.g. masts, cantilevers, columns 10

2. Intermediate structures
e.g. beams, slabs, bridge decks 50

3. Heavy concrete construction

e.g. breakwaters, solid rafts 100

-8-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

Section 5
Ancillary Works

-1-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

SECTION 5 – ANCILLARY WORKS

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

5/14 ROAD SIGNS, DESCRIPTION 3
(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic
Control Devices Manual", Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/15 REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGN MATERIALS 3
(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic
Control Devices Manual", Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/16 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 3
FOR ROAD SIGNS
(Refer to RTA / Roads Department “Dubai
Traffic Control Devices Manual”, Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/17 GUARANTEE OF ROAD SIGNS BY CONTRACTOR 3
(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic
Control Devices Manual", Chapter 5 All Clauses)
5/21 METAL BEAM GUARD RAIL SAFETY FENCING 3
5/32 STEEL AND METALWORK 4
5/33 ALUMINIUM FOR PARAPETS 5
5/34 FASTENING FOR ALUMINIUM PARAPETS 5
5/35 PAINT & OTHER PROTECTIVE COATINGS 5
5/36 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE FOR STRUCTURES 6
5/37 RUBBEERISED BITUMEN EMULSION 8
5/38 WATERSTOPS 8
5/39 PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS 9
5/40 COLD APPLIED JOINT SEALANT 9
5/41 BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINT 10
5/42 LOCKABLE MEDIAN BOLLARD 10
5/43 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM FOR THE PROTECTION 11
OF EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES
5/44 BRIDGE BEARING (NEW CLAUSE) 13
5/45 BEDDING MORTAR (NEW CLAUSE) 26
5/46 GRP KIOSK 27
5/48 REINFORCED FILL RETAINING WALL 28
5/57 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGH DURABLE
ROADMARKING/ RED COATING 34
5/58 FLEXIBLE RUBBER BOLLARD 37
5/59 HYDRAULIC PRESSED (WET MIX) TILES FOR CYCLE TRACK 38
5/60 METALWORK AND GLAZING 40

-2-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

SECTION 5 – ANCILLARY WORKS

5/14 ROAD SIGNS, DESCRIPTION

(Refer to RTA / Roads Department “Dubai Traffic Control Devices Manual
Chapter 5 All Clauses)

5/15 REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGN MATERIALS

(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic Control Devices
Manual" Chapter 5 All Clauses)

5/16 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGNS

(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic Control Devices
Manual" Chapter 5 Ali Clauses)

5/17 GUARANTEE OF ROAD SIGNS BY CONTRACTOR

(Refer to RTA / Roads Department "Dubai Traffic Control Devices
Manual" Chapter 5 All Clauses)

5/21 METAL BEAM GUARD RAIL SAFETY FENCING

5/21.1 Safety fencing shall comprise untensioned corrugated rails, channel-

section, posts, blocking-out pieces, nuts, bolts and washers for fixings, and
end anchorage.

5/21.2 Steelwork shall be mild steel Grade 43A to BS 4350, and shall be hot-dip
galvanized after fabricating in accordance with BS 729 to the thickness
shown on the Drawings.

5/21.3 Fencing shall be erected to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the
drawings to produce a flowing alignment. The Contractor shall adjust the
elevation of any rail as required.

5/21.4 The rail section shall be such that when freely supported over a 3 m clear
span, with the road face uppermost, and centrally loaded with a point load
of 1000 Kg, the deflection measured at the centre of the span shall not
exceed 40 mm.

5/21.5 Adjacent rails shall be connected by bolted lap of joints made in the relevant
direction to prevent vehicles striking rail ends.

5/21.6 Guardrail posts may be driven into the ground as detail on the drawings
provided that:

i. The accuracy of placing will permit the rail mounting to be erected

to present a flowing alignment.

-3-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

ii. A representative sampling of driven post selected by the Engineer

shall satisfactorily withstand a test load of 10 KN applied
horizontally at the level of the centre of the rail with adeflection at
that level not exceeding 200mm. Where the previous cannot be met
all posts shall be set into Class 25/20 concrete or as detailed on the
drawings.

iii. Driven posts shall have a protective coating of bituminous paint over
the length which is to penetrate the ground and extend 75mm above
the finished ground level. The bituminous paint shall be of high
quality with excellent adhesion properties. A sample of the paint
together with the manufacturer’s specifications shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to use.

5/21.7 The ends of safety fences shall terminate with a mitered end rail and
anchorage flared away from the line of fence.

5/21.8 Site drilling or cutting of beams and posts not be permitted without
approval. Flame cutting shall not be permitted.

5/21.8 Minor surface damage to steel components shall be repaired by cleaning

with a wire brush to remove all corrosion products, the application of two
coats of rust inhibiting paint, and two coats of approved cold galvanizing
paint or similar over the damaged area,

5/21.10 The horizontal alignment of fences shall not depart from the road alignment
by more than 30 mm overall, and the relative deviation shall not be more
than 10 mm in any two successive rail lengths.

5/21.11 The height of the uppermost edge of the rail shall not depart from the
dimensions shown on the drawing by more than 30 mm, nor shall the
relative deviation from this line be more than 5 mm in any two successive
rail lengths.

5/32 STEEL AND METAL WORK

5/32.1 Steel for the fabrication of bridge parapets and sign gantries shall comply
with the requirements of BS 4, Part 1, BS 5400, BS 4360 and BS 4848 as
appropriate.

5/32.2 Fixing bolts and accessories complying with BS 5400, BS 4190 and BS
4320 2S appropriate.

5/33 ALUMINIUM FOR PARAPETS

5/33.1 Extruded sections shall conform to the following requirements. Posts Alloy
6082 TE to BS 1474 Other Locations Alloy 6082 TF to BS 1474

-4-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/33.2 Casting shall be in alloy LM6M to BS 1490.

5/34 FASTENINGS FOR ALUMINIUM PARAPETS

5/34.1 Holding down bolts shall be of stainless steel A4-80 to BS 6105.

5/34.2 Aluminum parapets in contact with concrete shall have bearing pads of
rubber/fabric, new and un vulcanized.

5/34.3 All other fastening shall be of stainless steel 315S 16 quality to BS 970 Part 4.

5/35 PAINT AND OTHER PROTECTIVE COATINGS

5/35.1 All paints forming any one painting system shall be obtained from one
manufacturer and, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the source
of supply shall not be changed after the Engineer's approval has been
given. Paint snail be supplied in sealed containers of not more than 5
liters capacity and these shall be used in strict order of delivery.

5/35.2 The Contractor shall obtain from the paint manufacturer paint ready for
the use specified under the contract. The paints shall be adequate in all
respects for the purpose intended.

5/35.3 The system of protection for all non-galvanized steel work shall be as
follows;

Prime Coat: Inter zinc QHA 027/028 (or equivalent) minimum dry film
thickness 65 microns.
Second Coat: Intergard EBA 070/EBA 100 JB (or equivalent) natural
M.I.O. minimum dry filter thickness 100 microns.
Third Coat: Intergard EBA 070/EBA 100 JB (or equivalent) silver grey
M.I.O. minimum dry film thickness 100 microns.
Fourth Coat: Intergard EFK 724 (or equivalent) epoxy finish
Grey minimum dry film thickness 50 microns.
Total dry film thickness - 315 microns (minimum).
The coating shall have a minimum adherence to the steel work of 2.5 MPa
when tested with an adhesive tester.

5/35.4 Prior to painting the steel work shall be grit blasted to SA 2-1/2 Swedish
Standard 055900 or by other approved method to equivalent standard.
Before the steel surface shows signs of flash rusting the first coat of zinc
primer shall be applied. If the steel does flash rust then the cleaning
process is to be repeated.

5/35.5 Steel work specified as galvanized shall be hot-dipped galvanized to the

standard required by BS 729.

-5-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

For Testing of Guard Rails, Nuts, Bolts & Washers (Thickness of Coating)
shall be checked with DCL as per BS EN ISO 1461: 1999.

5/36 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES FOR STRUCTURES

Water Proofing Membrane: The following test shall be checked with Dubai
Central Laboratory.

1. Tensile Properties for Water Proofing Materials (Bitumen Sheet) BS

EN 12311-1:2000.

2. Low Temperature Flexibility of Modified Bituminous Sheet

Materials (ASTM D5147 C-11:2002).

3. Compound Stability of Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials

(ASTM D5147 C-15:2002).

4. Tensile – Tear Strength of Bituminous Water Proofing Materials

(ASTM D4073:194R98).

WATERPROOFING BRIDGE DECK SLAB – TYPE 1

GENERAL - TYPE 1
5/36.1 Deck waterproofing shall be composed of a proprietary membrane of a
polyester reinforced, SBS (Styrene-Butadiene Styrene) polymer modified
bitumen sheet prayed or torched applied to primed concrete deck as
detailed on the drawings.

MATERIALS
5/36.2 Membranes shall comply with the requirements of Technical
Memorandum BE 27 (Bridges) Waterproofing and Surfacing of Bridge
Decks and the system shall be certified by the British Board of
Agreement. Materials shall have the following physical properties.

- Minimum thickness 1.5 mm

- Flexibility Over 20 mm dia Mandrel - 20 deg.C

- Longitudinal Elongation at Constant

temperature (20 deg.C, 100 mm/min) 54%
- Longitudinal Eiongation with Thermal
shock (20 deg. C., 100mm1min) 57%
(-10 deg.C., 10 mm/min) 42%

- Longitudinal Tear Resistance at

Constant Temperature (20 deg.C
10C mm/min) 180 N/mm

- Adhesion to Concrete at 20 deg.C > .40 MPa

-6-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

- Puncture Resistance at 20 deg.C.,

500 mm/min. > 800 N

REPARATION OF SURFACE
5/36.3 All concrete surfaces to be waterproofed shall be smooth and free from
projections or holes which might cause puncture of the membrane. The
surface shall be dry and immediately before the application of primer or
membrane, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned oil dust and loose
materials.

5/36.4 Immediately after cleaning and drying of surface, priming should be applied
in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Primer coat shall be
allowed to cure completely before membrane application. Membrane shall
be laid parallel to traffic direction and tangent to the bridge curve in such a
manner that overlaps are never less than the specified width. In all cases
waterproofing shall begin at the low point of the surface to be waterproofed.
End laps should be staggered one meter so that at no point are there more
than three thickness of membrane. It shall be installed with 100 mm side
laps and 150 mm staggered endlaps.

APPLICATION DETAILS
3/36.5 At the edges of the membrane and at any point where it is punctured by
appurtenances such as drains or pipes, suitable provision shall be made to
prevent water from getting between the waterproofing and the waterproofed
surface, as recommended by the manufacturer.

5/36.6 Precautions must be taken to prevent injury to the finished membrane by

any cause.

5/36.7 The bituminous wearing course should be laid as soon as possible after a
minimum period of four hours has elapsed from completion of the
membrane.

WATERPROOFING BRIDGE DECK SLAB - TYPE 2

GENERAL
5/36.8 Type 2 deck waterproofing membrane shall consist of a two part rapid
curing liquid applied system based on methacrylate resins. The complete
system shall comprise of a primer to ensure good adhesion to the substrate,
the membrane and a tack coat to ensure good adhesion to the bituminous
road surfacing. The system must be suitable for use in Dubai. The
temperature of the bituminous surfacing at the time of laying onto the
waterproofing membrane must be according to Clause 3/33.

CERTIFICATION
5/36.9 The Type 2 waterproofing membrane system must hold a British Board of
Agreement Certificate.
-7-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

APPLICATION
5/36.10 Application shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

5/37 RUBBERISED BITUMEN EMULSION

5/37.1 Rubberized bitumen for application to buried concrete surface as detailed

on the drawings shall comply with D.M. 500 and consist of a water bound
emulsion containing not less than 65% of bitumen with fine particles of
rubber dispensed in the bitumen, the consistency being such 'that it can be
applied to the surface by brush at normal air temperature. The rubber
content of the dried film shall not be less than 10%.

5/37.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval three samples in
one liter containers of the rubber bitumen emulsion. The Contractor shall
also submit to the Engineer certificates that the material complies with
requirements of the Specification, and is suitable for the intended purpose.

5/38 WATERSTOPS

5/38.1 Alternatives from those indicated on the drawings will be accepted only if
the Engineer is satisfied that their material and their performance are not
inferior. The waterstop, used must be installed strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer instructions.

5/38.2 Waterstops shall be manufactured either from rubber or from

polyvinylchloride (PVC) at the discretion of the Contractor subject to the
approval of the Engineer. PVC waterstops when tested in accordance with
BS 6480-69, ISO-160-80, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following
properties:

- Tensile Strength 13.78 N/sq.mm

- Elongation at Break 300%
- BS Softness 45
- Specific Gravity 1.3

For rubber waterstops the rubber compound shall comply with U.S. Fed.
Spec. 22R-601 a except ASTlv1 D 395-52 for compression and ASTM
D2240-75 for hardness.

5/38.3 No splices will be permitted in straight strips. Strips and special connection
pieces shall be well cured in a manner such that cross section shall be dense,
homogeneous and free from all porosity, All junctions in the special
connection pieces shall be full moulded. During welding or vulcanizing
periods the joints shall be securely held by Suitable clamps. The materials
at the splices shall be dense and homogeneous throughout the cross section.

-8-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/38.4 If after placing concrete, waterstops are materially out of position or shape
or if voids are found, the surrounding concrete shall be removed, the
waterstop reset, and the concrete replaced, all at the Contractor's expense.

5/39 PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS

5/39.1 Joint fillers in expansion joints for structures shall consist of a compressive
non-extruding board manufactured from bitumen impregnated fibers.

5/39.1 The Physical properties of the material shall conform to the requirement of
ASTM D-1751.

5/40 COLD APPLIED JOINT SEALANT

5/40.1 Cold applied joint sealant shall be a multi-component, gun applied material
a grade suitable for the hot climate with a service temperature of up to 70
degrees centigrade and high resistance to ultraviolet exposure.

5/40.2 The compound shall comply with the priority of latest edition of standard
shall be as follows:-

a. UAE & DM standards

b. International standard such as ISO
c. National Standard such as BSI & DIN
d. Others as stated in this Specification such as ASTM, etc.

5/40.3 The sealant must be suitable for the application whether the joint to be
sealed is horizontal or vertical and with the ability to accommodate and
movement at the joint without rupturing or losing adhesion.

5/40.4 The hardness of the joint sealant shall be no less than 20 on the "Shore A”
scale.

5/40.5 The Contractor shall supply samples together with the manufacturers
literature relevant to any sealant for any application for the Engineers
approval prior to use. Only high quality products with demonstrable
resilience to the local climate conditions shall be approved. If a
Polysulphide based sealant is proposed for locations exposed to biological
attack or wet conditions then, it should have a minimum 40% polymer
content. All polysulphide based sealant must utilize a manganese dioxide
curing system.

5/40.6 The mixing application and curing of the approved sealant shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

5/40.7 The approved sealant shall be delivered to site in sealed containers showing
date of manufacture, batch number and shelf life.

-9-
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/41 BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINT

5/41.1 GENERAL
Expansion joint assembly shall be as shown on the drawing.

Full details of the proposed suppliers with their technical specifications,

maintenance manual, design calculations, covering materials, dimensions
and sizes shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before the
Contractor places an order.

All expansion joints shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer against any

defect in material and workmanship for a period of ten years.

The Contractor shall submit the detailed shop drawings and obtain 'the
Engineer's approval before manufacture is commenced.

During placing and hardening of concrete or mortar under the expansion

joint components, relative movement between them and the supports to
which they are fixed shall be prevented.

Thorma-joints shall comprise Thorma-Joint with EJ 200 binder as

manufactured by Prismo Ltd., of Crawley, West Sussex, UnitedKingdom,
or equal approved.

Elastomeric expansion joints shall be waboflex SR, Type as manufactured

by Servicised Ltd., or equal and approved.

Installation details shall be as shown on the drawings and as otherwise,

recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

5/41.2 All anchoring steel plates, bolts and socket shall be protected against
corrosion.

5/41.3 Joint Installation shall be carried out strictly In accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations and in the presence of the manufacturers
representatives.

5/42 LOCKABLE MEDIAN BOLLARD

5/42.1 Lockable median bollards shall be as shown on the drawings.

5/42.2 Movable bollard and locking mechanism shall be galvanized steel to BS

729 standard and treated with anti-corrosion paint.

5/42.3 Post sleeve shall be 4 mm thick PVC pipe encased with concrete as
approved by the Engineer.

- 10 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/43 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM FOR THE PROTECTION OF

EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES

GENERAL
5/43.1 The coating system shall be an elastomeric system of single component
products, a weather resistant top coat used in conjunction with a penetrating
primer. The Coating shall have the ability to provide in-depth protection for
reinforced concrete structures against corrosion associated with the ingress
of chloride and sulphate ions, carbon dioxide and other air-borne acid gases,
and shall have 'the ability to allow water vapour to escape from the structure.

PRIMER
5/43.2 The primer shall be a low viscosity reactive silane-siloxane/acrylic blend
dissolved in a penetrating organic carrier. The primer shall have the
capability to penetrate and produce a chemically bound Hydrophobic
barrier to prevent the passage of chloride and sulphate ions, The primer
should also be film forming to condition and stabilize the substrate prior to
the application of the topcoat. The primer should be applied in full
accordance with the manufacturer Instructions.

TOPCOAT
5/43.3 The top coat shall be a fibre reinforced pure aliphatic acrylic resin,
decorative, high performance water based, pigmented coating. It shall have
resistance to water, carbon dioxide and other air-borne acids and have the
ability to allow the passage of water vapour from within the structure.

5/43.4 The top coat shall have elastomeric and flexural capabilities and should be
applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Approved
make DURA GARD HY-BUILD, FOSROC or MBT or equal approved

5/43.5 The system will, during trials, display the following properties when applied
in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification to samples obtained
from concrete Made without additives.

Reduction in Water Absorption 82% minimum at 28

days (measured against a control concrete
sample in accordance with ASTM C 642)
Reduction in Chloride Ion 90% minimum at 28 days
Penetration measured in accordance
with ASTM C 1202-97

Water Vapour Transmission > 13g/m2/day

Method of testing and interpretation of
results shall be subject to approval of
Engineer and DCL

Carbon Dioxide Diffusion Equivalent to 500mm

Resistance of 30 N/mm2 concrete
- 11 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

Method of testing shall be subject to

approval of Engineer and DCL

TRIAL PANELS
5/43.6 Prior to applying the system in the works, trial applications shall be carried
out on trial panels made by the Contractor under Clause 4/33. The trials will
demonstrate the method proposed for applying the system, coverage,
coating thickness, colour and final appearance of the coating.
Representatives of the coating manufacturers shall be present at the trials
and the surface preparation and application of the coating shall be carried
out under their direction. The Contractor shall at his own expense surface
coat as many panels as required by the Engineer until a trial panel has been
accepted by the Engineer as satisfactory. The coated panel, when accepted
will form the standard against which the corresponding coating in the works
will be judged. No application of the coating in the works shall be
undertaken until trials have been completed to the Engineer's satisfaction.

INSPECTION OF CONCRETE
5/43.7 The Contractor shall not proceed with the surface finish or making good of
concrete surfaces until he has received the Engineer's Representative's
permission to do so and he shall not apply cement slurry or mortar or any
other coating to the concrete surfaces from which the shuttering has been
struck until the concrete has been inspected and approved by the Engineer's
Representative.

FAULTY CONCRETE WORK

5/43.8 The Contractor shall on the written instruction of the Engineer remove and
reconstruct any such portion of the work which in the opinion of the
Engineer is unsatisfactory as regards quality of concrete, incorrect
dimension of the cast portion, badly placed or insufficient reinforcement,
honeycombing or other such cause as shall render the construction not up
to the standard required and which in the opinion of the Engineer may
prejudicially affect the strength or durability of the construction.

APPROVAL PRIOR TO COATING APPLICATION IN THE WORKS

5/43.9 The Engineer’s approval must be obtained prior to applying the coating
system in the works. Before approval is given the Engineer will need to be
satisfied as to the following:-

i. All construction work in the immediate vicinity of the structure to

be coated has been completed.
ii. The surface preparation of the structure has been completed.
iii. The whole of the structure can be coated in a continuous operation.
iv. Adequate measures have been taken to protect the property of third
parties, including vehicles, from coating splatters.
v. The weather conditions accord with the coating manufacturer’s
directions for coating application.

- 12 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/44 BRIDGE BEARINGS (NEW CLAUSE)

5/44.1 The bearings shall be guaranteed for 10 years and the Contractor shall
provide the guarantee from the bearing manufacturer.

5/44.2 Definitions of bearings types and bearings components shall be in

accordance with BS 5400: Part 9.1.

5/44.3 Well in advance of their scheduled inclusions in the works, the Contractor
shall supply written details of the bearings and method of installation that
the Contractor proposes to use. The information supplied should include
documentation from the bridge-bearing supplier of successful usage in
similar environmental conditions to those experienced in Dubai.

5/44.4 Materials use and tolerances in bridge bearings shall comply with BS 5400:
Part 9.2.

5/44.6 The bearings shall be designed in accordance with BS 5400 Part 9.1 with
the additional analysis required hereunder.

5/44.6 The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer detailed
designed calculations in support of the sizes and quality of each component
of the bearing.

5/44.7 The Contractor shall submit, for the approval of the Engineer, shop
drawings and maintenance manual for the bearings.

5/44.8 The Contractor shall submit of a method of statement for the approval of
the Engineer. The method statement shall include the specification of all
materials, including bedding mortar, the corrosion protective system and the
method of handling, transportation, storage and installation. It shall also
include the replacement scheme of the bearing.

5/44.9 Bridge bearings, including bearing which are not required to provide lateral
restraint, shall be attached to the structure by mechanical fixings. The
friction between the bearing and the superstructure shall not be considered
to assist in resisting horizontal forces.

5/44.10 In addition to the normal material and load test certificates supplied by the
bearing manufacturer, all bearing materials shall be tested for specification
compliance.

5/44.11 Metal bearings shall be test for vertical load equal to one and a half (1.5)
times the specified working load. The test load shall be applied in five
equal increments and the test load held for 1 hour or until deformation
ceases, whichever is the greater.

- 13 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

The load shall then be removed in equal decrements as the load increment.
A second cycle of load increment and decrement shall be applied with the
maximum test load bearing held for 30 minutes. The load deformation graph
shall be plotted for both load cycles and the ‘set’ exceeds a value deemed
to be excessive by the Engineer, the Engineer may require all bearings to be
pre-loaded before installation. At the end of the vertical load test, the
bearing shall be dismantled and the bearing surfaces examined.

5/44.12 Friction test for sliding surfaces shall be performed at constant vertical load
of 50 and 80 percent of the specified load. The horizontal load shall be
applied to obtain a steady rate of movement of one 1 mm per minute to
reach a total movement of 300mm or as directed by the Engineer.

5/44.13 Guide test shall be carried out at constant vertical loads 50 and 100 percent
of the specified load. The horizontal load shall be applied in ten equal
increments to a maximum of a specified guide capacity and held for thirty
30 minutes. The load decrement shall be the same as load increment. Two
load cycles for each test shall be performed. The load deformation graph
shall be plotted for both load cycles. At the end of the guide test, the bearing
shall be dismantled and the bearing surfaces examined.

5/44.14 All testing, including load testing of prototype bearings, shall be carried out
at an approved independent laboratory and will form the basis for approved
of the bearings. The Engineer or his nominated representative one or all of
the test. The Contractor shall arrange the dates and times of test to enable
the Engineer or his representative to attend the tests, the Contractor shall, at
his own cost, arrange of an independent observer approved by the Engineer,
to witness the test.

5/44.15 A report in English prepared by the independent testing body/laboratory

shall be submitted in triplicate. The report shall include photographs and
description of the test rigs, instrumentation and all factual data with a
comparison of test results and the requirements of the specification.

5/44.16 Unless otherwise described in the Contract the surface preparation and
corrosion protection of bearing shall comply with BS 5400 Part 9.2 and BS
5493. The environment should be considered to be exterior, exposed, non-
polluted, coastal atmosphere, and typical time for first maintenance 10 to
20 years.

5/44.17 Installation of bearings shall be carried out by trained personnel.

5/44.18 PTFE Cold Flow Test - Testing of bearing PTFE for the cold flow test shall
be done under minimum temperature of 60 Deg. C, in addition to the
requirement specified in Volume 1 Part 1of the standard specifications.

- 14 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/44.5 Spherical Type Bearings - Guided Expansion and Fixed Bearings

1. General - The Contractor shall furnish and install Spherical type, guided
expansion and fixed bridge bearings at the locations shown on the
Drawings. The bearing assemblies shall be complete and ready for
Installation. The design of spherical bearings shall comply with either
AASHTO LRFD or BS EN 1337 (and applicable European Norms for
requirements for individual components).

Spherical bearings consist of a spherical rotational component, where

typically a stainless-steel convex surface (alternatively made of highly
corrosion resistant sliding alloy) slides against a concave carbon steel plate
covered with a low friction sliding material. This is a compact bearing able
to accommodate larger rotations and vertical loads as it does not depend on
the limitations of an elastomeric element.

Fixed bearings shall allow rotation but no longitudinal or transversal

movement, in the bearing plane.

Expansion and fixed bearings shall be capable of supporting the maximum

total vertical and horizontal loads as shown on the Drawings.

Expansion bearings shall have sliding surfaces made of special sliding

material made of modified Ultra high molecular weight polyethylene
(UHMWPE) or Equivalent improved material and shall be subject to the
requirements of this specification and as shown on the Drawings.

The use of the SSM material as a sliding surface shall be shown to be in

compliance with the necessary European Technical Approval (ETA)
certificates.

The Contractor shall furnish Certified Test Reports, Materials Certificates

and a Certificate of Compliance for each bearing in accordance with the
Engineer’s instructions.

Well in advance of their scheduled inclusion in the Works, the Contractor

shall submit a method statement for the approval of the Engineer including
the specifications of all materials, bedding mortar, the corrosion protective
system, method of handling, transportation. storage and installation. It shall
also include detailed design calculations in support of the sizes and quality
of each component of the bearing. detailed analysis for the stresses in the
base element and in concrete/bearing plinth immediately under the bearing
will also be required to check peak stresses. The Contractor shall provide
shop drawings, maintenance manual and replacement scheme for the
bearings.

- 15 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

The information supplied should include documentation from the bridge

bearing manufacturer of successful usage in similar environmental
conditions to those experienced in Dubai. The bearings shall be guaranteed
for 50 years, and the Contractor shall provide the guarantee from the bearing
manufacturer.

2. Design of Special Sliding Material (SSM) - UHMWPE or equivalent

Wilding surfaces are designed to translate or rotate by sliding of a self-
lubricating Ultra high molecular weight polyethylene surface across a
smooth hard mating surface of stainless steel.

Expansion bearings having sliding surfaces of UHMWPE shall have

provision for rotation or equalization of the stress on the UHMWPE sliding
surface. Rotation shall be considered the sum of live load rotation, changes
in camber during construction and misalignment of the bearing seats due to
construction tolerances. Rotational capability shall not be less than 0.02rad
or as specified on drawings. For calculating total design rotations,
applicable tolerances from AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
(section 14) shall be added to the maximum strength limit state rotation. The
design, materials end construction of the means of equalizing the stress or
provision for rotation in the bearing shall be in accordance with these
specifications and as shown on the approved shop drawings.

The materials performance in service as a "low friction" material shall be

confirmed by a long-term test using an independent testing institute
(Material Testing and Controlling Institution, BBA or MPA Stuttgart, or
similar approved) with the following conditions.

(i) Average test contact pressure 60N/mm2

(ii) Constant test sliding velocity 15mm/s
(iii) Test sliding path 50km

3. Materials

General

• Each batch of material (steel. sliding elements, stainless steel plates,

lubrication, etc.,) need the approval from an approved, independent
testing Authority (Material Testing and Controlling Institution,
BBA or MPA Stuttgart or similar approved), before assembly of the
parts. The bearings shall be fabricated from only new and unused
materials. Reclaimed materials are not acceptable.

• The contractor shall submit test certificates from the approved,

independent testing authority to show that the respective materials
comply with the specified requirements, or a certificate from the
patent holder or designer certifying that the manufactured item
complies in all respects with relevant product specifications.
- 16 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

a) Special Sliding Material (SSM)

The use of the SSM material as a sliding surface shall be shown to be in

compliance with the necessary European Technical Approval (ETA)
certificates. ETA documentation shall be submitted to demonstrate:

• Sliding material with low friction behaviour (µ < 2,0% with

temperature range of -50 to + 70 °C).
• Maximum sliding coefficient during -35°C test shall not exceed µ
< 3,5% over the long term testing distance.
• Because of the hot ambient temperatures, the characteristic
permissible pressure of the sliding material shall not less than:
(I) With room temperature (20°C) fk = 180N/mm2
(ii) With 70°C fk = 90N/mm2

Creep behaviour with both values shall be confirmed by testing at an

independent testing institute (Material Testing and Controlling institution,
BBA or MPA Stuttgart, or similar approved).

A permissible combination of materials of the tribological systems (main

sliding surfaces) adjacent to the convex plate (spherical part) of a spherical
bearing shall consist of SSM (See S4.6.3.5.1) with stored silicone grease
against.

(i) Austenitic steel for the flat sliding surface and

(ii) Highly corrosion resistant sliding alloy MSA for the curved sliding
surface.

Other combinations of materials propose by suppliers which introduce new

untested and unapproved materials apart from the use of stainless steel and
PTFE and other permissible combinations of materials approved for use by
EN 1337-2 will be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to use.

b) PTFE
For PTFE applicable requirements included in design code and in the
relevant section of the General Specifications for Pot Bearings should
be referred.

c) Stainless Steel Sheet - Stainless steel shall conform to EN 10088- 4

grade EN 1.4401 or EN 1.4404 steel and be continuously welded to the
steel plate. Locate the weld outside the contact area with the sliding
material surface.

Face of the stainless steel in contact with the sliding material: bright
annealed mirror (No.8) finish (less than 0.2 µm RMS).

- 17 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

Finishes on curved metallic surfaces shall not exceed 0.4 µm RMS.

d) Structural Steel • All structural steel bearing components including

masonry plate, Bottom plate, top plate, convex plate, and guide key shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM A588:2005.

Steel substrates to which the sliding material is bonded shall be grit

blasted prior to applying the epoxy adhesive. Bond over the entire area
of the sliding material.

Metal to metal contact surfaces within bearings (inclusive of the top and
bottom adapter plates) shall be prepared either by machining or fine
grinding. Machining shall always be carried out after welding has been
finished.

The type and country of origin of the structural steel utilized in the
manufacture of the bearings shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.

Anchor studs, as shown on the approved shop drawings, shall be welded

to the sole plates in accordance with requirements of the AWS Welding
Specification.

Guide Bars: Internal or External Guides should be machined from single

plate. Bolted or welded guides not acceptable.

The friction between the bearing and substructure shall not be

considered to assist in resisting horizontal forces as shown on the
Drawings.

All structure steel shall be covered by an adapted painting system in

marine environment and the manufacturer shall demonstrate by test
report its efficiency, present a list of references of projects with similar
environmental conditions and warranty a durability of minimum 10
years.

The painting system shall be composed at least of:

i. A first layer of 150 µm of aluminium or zinc metallization,
ii. Then layers of epoxy paint with a global thickness of 150 µm.

The painting system shall be in accordance with relevant ASTM or

equivalent standards.

The bearing fixings shall be stainless steel conforming to BS6105 or in

high tensile strength conforming to ISO 898 with hot dip galvanization
protection confirming to ISO 1461.

- 18 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

e) Anchor Bolts • Anchor bolts provided to anchor the masonry plate to

the concrete substructure shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A307 and shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM A153.

f) Highly Corrosion Resistant Sliding Alloy used for the Manufacture of

the Convex Element of Spherical Bearings.

The above material manufactured in accordance with the European

Technical Approval ETA 06/0131 is approved. Alternative equivalent
materials will be subject to the engineer's approval.

The corrosion resistant material shall be approved in the form of a

"Technical Approval" released by the European Organization for
Technical Approvals - EOTA.

The following properties shall be at least equal to that of stainless steel

for the proper functioning of the bearing during its design life.

(i) Hardness of surface.

(ii) Durability of surface. Resistant to wear during life of bridge.
(iii) Frictional resistance with the sliding material.
(iv) Bright annealed mirror (No. 8) finish (less than 0.2 µm RMS) for
the surface in contact with the sliding material.
(v) Capacity to resist vertical loads during bearing rotation.

g) Adhesive Material
• The adhesive material used for bonding the sliding material onto the
steel substrate shall be an epoxy resin satisfying the requirements of
ASTM C 881/C 881M, FEP film or equal, as approved by the
engineer.
• It shall be stable from -40°C to 125°C.
• Care shall be taken to ensure that the adhesive is applied uniformly
over the entire surface of the sliding material so as not to cause an
uneven sliding surface that premature could lead to premature wear.

h) External Seals for Spherical Bearings

• The bearings shall be provided with tight-fitting seals to prevent the
ingress of dust or deleterious matter onto the moving parts. The seals
shall be of an approved type and sufficiently durable to last in excess
of 50 years.

i) Refer POT bearing specification for required PTFE material properties

if used instead of UHMWPE/SSM.

- 19 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

4. Design & Manufacturing Requirements

1. The design should be such that bearings will not suffer damage which
would affect their correct functioning or incur excessive maintenance
costs during their intended life.
2. The minimum vertical load on any bearing shall not be less than 20%
of the maximum vertical design load at the serviceability limit state.
3. The outer plates of bearings should be so proportioned that
concentrated loads are sufficiently distributed to ensure that the
permissible stresses on the adjacent bridge structure are not exceeded,
4. Top and bottom adapter plates shall be provided to allow for simple
bearing replacement.
5. Bearings shall be designed strictly in accordance with the material
manufacture’s specifications and recommendations. Limiting stresses
on the material shall be in accordance with the material manufacture’s
specifications.
6. SSM or any other PTFE replacement materials proposed by the bearing
supplier shall be demonstrated by tests from approved internationally
recognized laboratories to perform at least equal to or better than PTFE
in all aspects of bearing design requirements. All such materials not
covered by design standards shall have ETA certificate at the
applicable temperatures in Dubai (see point 8 below).
7. The performance of the replacement materials shall be demonstrated
with the use of lubricants such as silicone grease and in the absence of
lubricants. Actual friction values shall be considered for the design of
bridge elements.
8. The designer shall account for the high effective bearings temperatures
existing in Dubai in his design of the sliding materials, particularly the
effects of high temperatures on the characteristic compressive strength
and stiffness of the sliding materials. The bearing manufacturer shall
provide experimental evidence of the performance of proposed sliding
materials for temperatures in the range of 30°C to 70°C.
9. The coefficient of friction shall be established using friction tests in
accordance with EN 1337-2 for lubricated and unlubricated sliding
materials. The results of the tests carried out on unlubricated sliding
materials shall be obtained for information only. If an alternative
sliding material is proposed, an ETA shall be submitted to describe the
friction properties and the combination of sliding materials.
10. Bearing manufacturers shall also provide to the engineer the expected
maximum coefficient of friction for bearings which have undergone
extensive wear during the life of the structure.
11. The concave and convex spherical element will be machined from a
solid block of structural and non-corrosive steel respectively.
12. The minimum center thickness of the concave spherical element and
the minimum edge thickness of the convex spherical element shall be
at least 20 mm.

- 20 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

13. Unseating of the curved spherical surfaces relative to each other shall
be prevented by transferring horizontal forces through specifically
designed restraints or by control of the spherical radius.
14. If design performed to EN/ETA, Service temperature of bearings shall
be considered as +70° C for the calculation of special sliding material
design stress values.

5. Testing and Acceptance

a. General - The manufacturer of the bearings shall furnish facilities for

the testing and Inspection of materials and of the completed bearings
at an independent test facility approved by the Engineer, the
representative of independent test facility of shall be allowed free
access to the manufacturer’s plant to apply the approved testing and
inspection plan.

For each bearing, certificate from the approved independent test

facility shall be furnished for approval; testing and Inspection plan for
each bearing shall be included.

b) UHMWPE or Equivalent Material Cold Flow Test - The manufacturer

of the bearings shall demonstrate to the Engineer, by approved methods
of testing, that the cold flow of the UHMWPE or equivalent material
proposed to be used, filled or unfilled, will not deform laterally, by
more than 1.6 mm radially (i.e., diameter of the Sliding Material shall
not increase by more than 3.2mm, under a uniform loading of 40MPa
at temperature of 60°C imposed continuously for a period of not less
than one hundred (100) hours. The dynamic loading shall include the
sliding of the stainless mating surface in a back and forth motion of
25.4mm.

In case the sliding material UHMWPE or equivalent do not satisfy the

above test requirements, contractor will be allowed to confirm the load
on which the material satisfies the Cold flow test requirements and
accordingly the design of the sliding material shall be carried out by
the designer with the FOS of 1.20 to the stress values mentioned in the
above specification. The same should agreed with the engineer and the
client during construction.

c) Test Specimens – After the manufacture of all bridge bearings one

bearing from each load range will be selected at random by the
Engineer for testing in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications 4th ed (2017).

- 21 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

If all tests performed on the selected bearing in a given load range meet
specified requirements, all bearings within that load range will be
acceptable. In the event that any test on a bearing in a given load range
does not meet specified requirements, the tested bearings and all other
bearings in that same load range will be rejected unless each individual
bearing is satisfactorily tested and approved by the Engineer.

d) Proof Load Test - A test bearing shall be loaded to 150 percent of the
bearings rated design capacity and simultaneously subjected to a
rotation range of 0.02 radian (1.146°) or design rotation, whichever is
greater, for a period of one (1) hour. Design rotations are defined as
bearing tolerance required by the design standard (AASHTO LRFD)
plus the maximum strength limit state rotations from the applicable
design loads.

The bearing will be visually examined both during the test and upon
disassembly after the test. Any resultant visual defects, such as
extruded or deformed elastomer, polyether urethan or TFE, damaged
seals or limited rangs, or cracked steel, shall be cause for rejection of
the lot.

e) Testing for Coefficient of Friction - The test shall be arranged so that

the coefficient of friction on first movement, on the fifth and fiftieth
cycles and during sliding can be measured. The test method and
equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

The Static Coefficient of Friction shall be determined at breakaway by

dividing the horizontal force to start motion by the vertically applied
force which shall be equivalent to application pressure. The Dynamic
Coefficient of Friction shall be determined by the same method.

The testing procedure shall be as follows:

i. The bearing shall be loaded with the Maximum Total Load

indicated for the load range and this load shall be applied
continuously for 12 hours immediately prior to measuring the
coefficient of friction.
ii. The bearing load shall be reduced to a Minimum Dead Load
indicated, and the first movement static and dynamic coefficient
of friction for the test bearing shall be determined at a sliding
speed not exceeding 25.4mm per minute.
iii. The bearing shall then be loaded with the Maximum Total Load
and be subjected to 100 movements of the full design relative
movement at a speed of less than 30cms per minute. If the test
facility does not permit the full design movement to be used, the
Engineer may permit a reduced movement to be used, but this
shall not be less than 25.4mm.

- 22 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

iv. The static and dynamic coefficients of friction shall then be

determined again with the bearing loaded with the Minimum
Dead Load.
v. The static and dynamic coefficients of friction between the
polished stainless-steel sliding surface and the SSM bearing
surface when tested as provided herein, at the Minimum Dead
Load, shall not exceed three (3) percent.
vi. In addition to the above requirements, to be acceptable, the
bearing9 shall show no appreciable sign of failure or other
defects.
Bearings represented by the test specimens passing the above
requirements will be approved for use in the structures 6ubject to
on-site inspection for visible defects.

6. Packaging and Identification Marking - Each bearing shall be assembled at

the plant, shall be marked for identification and shall be delivered to the
construction site as e complete unit. Packaging shall be accomplished in
such a manner so as to ensure that the bearings during shipment and storage
will be protected against damage from handling, weather or any other
hazard. Each completed bearing shall have its components clearly
identified, be securely taped or otherwise fastened for shipment and marked
on its top as to location in each structure in the project in conformity with
the Drawings.

7. Bearing Installation - The Contractor shall certify to the Engineer that a

skilled representative of the bearing manufacturer will be available to the
Contractor to give such aid and instruction in the Installation of bearings as
is required to obtain satisfactory results. The CV of this representative shall
be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.

The skilled representative shall be present during the initial installation of

the bearings. The representative shall remain on the job until, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the bearing installation is proceeding smoothly, and the
workmen are familiar with the work required for each installation. The
Contractor shall also arrange to have the representative present at such other
times as the Engineer may request.

Anchor bolts shall be cast monolithically with the substructure concrete by

the use of templates to the exact locations and with bolt projections above
bearing seat precisely as shown on the Drawings and approved shop
drawings.

Bearing grout pads shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and as herein
before specified for “Grout Pads” using an epoxy and quartz sand grout as
recommended by the bearing manufacturer. The top surfaces of the epoxy
grout pads shall be perfectly level and any perceptible deviations from a
straightedge shall be ground level or filled with epoxy mortar and ground
until a true level surface is obtained.
- 23 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

The bearings shall be placed at the time of superstructure form erection and
all temporary restraints shall be removed as directed by the bearing
manufacturer.

The bearings shall be set on the exact alignment as shown on the Drawings
for each location and shall be oriented in the proper direction. Extreme care
shall be exercised in aligning both the base and the upper part of the guided
expansion bearing parallel to the expansion axis of the structure to avoid a
wedging action in the bearing during movements of the superstructure. The
location of the upper part of the bearing shall be adjusted relative to the base
to allow for temperature at the time of erection.

If for any reason the bearings are disa6sembled, reassembly shall be only
permitted in the presence and guidance of the skilled representative of the
bearing manufacturer.

8. Approvals

Prior to manufacturing the bearings and prior to the construction of the

bearing seats, the Contractor shall submit the following information to the
engineer for consideration and approval:

i. The Bearing Manufacturer’s specification containing detailed

information on the design standards, materials, manufacture and
technical data.
ii. The Contractor shall submit a Technical Approval document which will
guarantee the service life of the bearings to be not less than 50 years.
iii. Shop drawings detailing all of the work of this section.
iv. Friction properties based on actual tests at a temperature of 70°C
conducted on relevant materials and all other tests completed in
accordance with the specifications.
v. Design calculations clearly indicating how the bearing, including
attachments, anchorages, etc., satisfies the design criteria indicated on
the Drawings and in the specifications.
vi. Detailed procedures/method statement to be followed during the
installation, replacement and inspection of bearings.
vii. A certificate of compliance from the Bearing Manufacturer of the work
to be done under this section.
viii. The Contractor shall submit evidence of the successful installation and
operation of comparable proprietary bearings to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. These should demonstrate the suitability of the system and
materials proposed, in particular, for heavy traffic and for the aggressive
environment and high temperatures experienced in the Middle East.
ix. The approval of the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility under the Contract for the successful completion of the
work.

- 24 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

x. The bearing manufacturer shall facilitate one or more visits by the

engineer or his representative to his workshop for the purpose of quality
control.
xi. The Engineer may at his discretion select an entire bearing, forming part
of the batch belonging to this contract, for testing in order to ascertain
the bearings compliance with the certificates supplied by the
manufacturer. In such case the contractor shall provide a new bearing at
the scheduled rates tendered /or this contract to replace the bearing being
tested.

9. Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the engineer for approval
which shall include, but not limited to, the following information:

i. Erection drawings, plan, elevations and complete details and sections

showing all materials incorporated in the bearings.
ii. Design calculations for the bearings and the anchorages which will
prove compliance with the standards.
iii. Bearing present details, If applicable.
iv. Protective coating requirements.
v. The attachment details of the sliding material (PTFE, SSM, etc.) to the
steel substrate (guide bar, piston, top plate, etc.).
vi. Attachment details of the stainless-steel plates to the bearing elements.
vii. Bearing seat and all bearing connection and anchorage details.
viii. The location of the top and bottom bearing adapter plates drawn in plan
and in elevation on the deck soffit and on the support, structures
showing edge distances.
ix. The bearing orientation (uni and multi-directional bearings) with respect
to the point of zero temperature movement of the bridge deck or to other
points of reference as indicated on the drawings.
x. A summarized list of all bearings to be installed providing the bearing
identification mark, type, corresponding present design loads and
present.

The drawings and design calculations shall be stamped by an Experienced

Engineer employed by the bearing supplier with at least 10 years of
documented history of bearing design experience.

- 25 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/45 BEDDING MORTAR

5/45.1 Bedding mortar under base plates and bearings shall be a high performance,
dual shrinkage compensated, cementitious high-performance grout
conforming to the requirements of U.S. Corps of Engineers specification for
non-shrinkage grout CRD-C621-82A and ASTM C1107-91 (Type C).

5/45.2 The cementitious shrinkage compensated free-flow grout shall be supplied

as a pre-bagged formulation requiring only the addition of a predetermined
volume of water at site to achieve consistencies as defined in CRD-C621-
82A.
5/45.3 A Volumetric expansion of 2% when measured in accordance with ASTM
C827 shall occur while the grout is in a plastic state. Longer term expansion
in the hardened state shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C1107-
91 to compensate the drying shrinkage.

5/45.4 The cementitious free flow grout shall requirements: conform to the
following

Property Test Method Result

Compressive strength BS 1881 20N/mm2 at 1 day

40N/mm2 at 7 days
60N/mm2 at 28 days
Flexural strength BS 4551 2.5N/mm2 at 1 day
8N/mm2 at 7 days
8N/mm2 at 128 days
Young`s Modulus ASTM C – 469-83 29kN/mm2

5/45.5 All material storage, mixing, application and curing shall be carried out in
strict in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

5/45.6 all contact surfaces must be free from oil, grease, free standing water and
any loosely adherent material. All dust must be removed and bolt holes and
fixing pockets blown and clean from any dirt or debris.

5/45.7 Adequate form work shall be provided in accordance with the relevant
codes of practice. This shall be surely fixed to withstand the hydraulic
pressures of the grout without distortion or movement during placement.

5/45.8 The formwork shall be watertight at all joints between panels and between
the formwork and the existing concrete surface so as to prevent grout
leakage.

5/45.9 The formwork shall be constructed from appropriate materials as agreed

with the Engineer to achieve the required finish.

- 26 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

5/45.10 Formwork surfaces that are to be in contact with the grout shall be treated
with a suitable mould release agent. This shall be used in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations.

5/45.11 A maximum gap width as recommended by the grout manufacturer shall be

maintained between the perimeter formwork and the plate edge to minimize
the area of unrestrained expansion while providing an annular gap of
sufficient width to allow the flow of material.

5/45.12 Sufficient hydrostatic head or pumping pressure shall be maintained to

ensure that the void is filled completely and no air remains trapped.

5/45.13 Where necessary, provision shall be made for controllable bleed points to
prevent air entrapment and enable the flow of the grout to be assessed.

5/46 GRP KIOSK

a) Wall thickness of the GRP kiosk shall be of 6 mm and at points of stress it

shall be a minimum of 9 mm. Ingress protection of the overall GRP kiosk
shall be IP55.The GRP kiosk shall be of half an hour fire rating and
confirming to the terms specified in BS 476: Part 7: 1997 class 2 I DIN 4102
class B2. External finish of the kiosk shall be plain semi-gloss light grey gel
coat finish to RAL 7035. All hardware shall be of grade 316 stainless steel.
Hinges and door restrain for kiosks shall be of robust in design. Lock and
handle shall be heavy duty and approved by the Employer and all locks shall
have common keys. The GRP kiosk shall be fitted with the drawing pocket,
full rain canopy, lifting hooks, long life EPDM gasket and handle (3-point
lock with dust cap).

b) If GRP Kiosk is provided as a room to LV panel the following shall be

considered:

i. The clear space between the front of the control panel and the kiosk
shall not be less than 1500 mm and minimum of 750 mm clear space
on remaining three sides the panel. The GRP kiosk shall be provided
with stainless steel installation skid.

ii. The kiosk shall be supplied with sufficient number of 36,000 BTU/hr.
floor standing split air conditioner with drip trap, supports and
drainpipe, 4 no. 36 W limit switch operated fluorescent lights and
hygrostat operated 2 no. tubular heaters.

iii. The kiosk to have an single lead emergency door with push bar on the
opposite site of the main entrance.

iv. The construction shall be Anti-vandal sandwich construction.

v. The panels are to be stiffened with encapsulated WBP plywood.

- 27 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

vi. The kiosk should have provision for fixing split AC unit, anti-
condensation heater, junction box, smoke detector, beacon, fire
extinguisher, fire alarm etc.

vii. Interior lighting with door operated limit switch.

viii. The u-values of the walls and roof shall be ≤2.2W/m/°C.

5/48 REINFORCED FILL RETAINING WALL

PS 5/48.1 General

This work shall consist of constructing retaining walls using a proprietary

reinforced fill system constructed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
drawings and specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and
dimensions shown in the Contract Documents or as established by the
Engineer. The reinforced fill wall must be designed and constructed by a
special Contractor having a minimum of five years of documented
successful experience in the design and construction of such wall systems.

The Contractor shall provide a complete set of detailed shop drawings,

detailed design calculations according to AASHTO Standard Specification
for Highway Bridges Section 5 and complete specifications of the proposed
wall system for the approval of the Engineer 90 days prior to ordering
materials to construct these walls. Any particular requirements of the
approved detailed Specification for the approved proprietary system shall
override any conflicting or incompatible requirement contained within this
Clause of the Specification.

The Contractor shall provide a maintenance manual for the Reinforced Fill
System.

PS 5/48.2 Design and Specification

The design shall be in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specification

for Highway Bridges Section S. Minim um allowable length of reinforcing
strip shall be 10.7 times the height of the wall (H). The design shall address
the climatic and soil conditions existing in Dubai and provide a minimum
design life of seventy-five, years.

The specifications are presented to the Engineer shall also state any
requirements for additional thickness of reinforcing strips and/or limitations
on the backfill used in the structure to insure the des1gn life. The final
thickness shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

- 28 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

PS 5/48.3 Standards and Codes

The following standards and codes in their latest edition shall be particularly
applied to works covered by this Specification where applicable, together
with any further standards or codes as described within the approved
Specifications for the approved wall system.

BS5400

ASTM

A 36 (AASHTO M4 83) Structural Steel

A 123 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coating on Products Fabricated from Rolled

Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates Bars and Strips A 153 Zinc Coating
(Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

A 325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints including suitable
Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers

A 570 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality

A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

D 1752 Performed Sponge Rubber and Cord Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paying and Structural Construction

BS 1377: Part 2: Test S Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index
of Soils

BS 1377: Part 2: Test 4 Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils PS

The walls shall be designed to withstand all temporary construction loading

PS 5/48.4 Materials

1. General - The Contractor shall make his own arrangements to provide

the face panels, reinforcing and tie strips, fasteners, joint filter and all
necessary attachment as recommended by the Manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer.

2. Concrete Face Panels - Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 4

of the General Specifications, except as specified herein.

a) Reinforcing steel shall comply with Sub-Section 4/7 of the General

Specifications.
- 29 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

b) Concrete Finish - The concrete surface pattern and finish for the exposed
faces shall conform to the plans. The rear face of the panel shall be
roughly screened to eliminate open pockets of aggregate and surface
distortions in excess of 6.5mm. The Color and texture of the finish shall
be approved by the Engineer based on three trial panels rovided by the
Contractor prior to producing the final panels.

c) Tolerances - All units shall be manufactured within the following

tolerances.

• AI dimensions within 15mm

• Angular distortion with regard to the height of the panel shall not
exceed 7MM in 2m

d) Compressive Strength - Acceptance of the concrete face panels with

respect to compressive strength will be determined in accordance
with Section 4 of the General Specifications, except that a minimum of
one set of test cubes shall be taken from each lot of 50 panels or part
thereof.

e) Rejection - Units shall be subject to rejection by the Engineer if not in

conformance with the specifications or if any of the following defect are
evident by visual inspection.

• Defects that indicate imperfect molding.

• Defects indicating honeycombed or open texture concrete.

f) Marking - The date of manufacture shall be clearly scribed on the rear

face of each panel.

g) Handling, storage and shipping - All units shall be handled, stored and
shipped in such manner as to eliminate the danger of chipping, cracks,
fractures and excessive bending stresses. Panels in storage shall be
supported on firm blocking located immediately adjacent to tie strips or
toggles to avoid damage to these tie strips and toggles. Any panels,
including fastening hardware, damaged during handling, storage or
shipping shal] be rejected by the Engineer.

h) Joint spacing and details for expansion, contraction, construction and

control joints in the coping and the concrete barrier parapet shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.

3. Concrete Footings - The class of concrete shall be as shown on the

approved shop drawings and shall conform to Section 4 of the General
Specifications.

- 30 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

4. Steel Reinforcing and Tie Strips - Tie strips shall be shop fabricated of
hot rolled steel confirming to the minimum requirements of ASTM A-
570, Grade 36 or equivalent. Guaranteed anti-corrosion measures are to
be applied and are to be effective throughout the specified design life.

The properties of the backfill material to be used shall be one of the

main factors in determining the strip thickness required to meet the
specified design life.

The tie strips and reinforcing strips shall be cut to length and tolerance
shown on the Drawings and the holes for bolts shall be punched in the
locations shown. All reinforcing and tie strips shall be carefully
inspected to ensure they are true to size and free from defects that may
impair their strength and durability. The Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer with a Certificate of Compliance certifying that these
materials comply with the application specifications.

5. Fasteners - Bolts and nuts shall be high strength conforming to ASTM

A- 325 or equivalent and galvanized in accordance with ASTM AJ53.
They shall be 13 mm (1/2 inch) in diameter, 32 mm (1-1/4) inch in
length with 19 mm (3/4 inch) thread length. The Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer with a Certificate of Compliance certifying that these
materials comply with the applicable specifications.

6. Non-Metallic Friction Ties and Fixings - The reinforced fill wall

structure shall be reinforced with friction strips of polyethylene coated
polyester fiber strips or other material approved by the Engineer.

The reinforcing strips shall have an ultimate strength o/ 50 KN each,

and manufacturer’s test certificates shall be provided to verify this.

Reinforcing strips shall be fixed to the facing panels using stainless steel
or embedded polyethylene coated polyester fiber strips and glass fiber
toggles, unless otherwise noted on the approved shop drawings and in
accordance with approved samples. The Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer with a Certificate of compliance certifying that these materials
comply with the applicable specifications.

7. Joint Filler (For use with Concrete Face Panels)

a) Piller for vertical joints between panels shall be flexible open cell
polyethylene foam strips, unless otherwise noted on the approved shop
drawings.
b) Filler for horizontal joints between panels shall be resin bonded cork
filler conforming to ASTM D 1752 (Type II) unless otherwise noted on
the approved drawings.

- 31 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

8. Select Granular Backfill Material - All backfill material used in the

structure volume shall be free from organic or otherwise deleterious
materials. The plasticity index of the backfill material shall not exceed
6 as determined by BS 1377: Part 2: Test S. Portable water shall be used
in the compaction of backfill material in the area of reinforcing strips.

Otherwise, they shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section

2 of the General Specification.

The range of properties of the backfill material which have been

assumed in the design shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval. These properties shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Section 2 of the General Specification.

The range of properties of the backfill material which have been

assumed in the design shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval. The properties shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:

(i) Electricity resistivity or conductivity

(ii) pH
(iii) content of solute sulfates and chlorides
(iv) Permeability
(v) Angle of internal friction
(vi) Gradation
(vii) Coefficient of UniformityO

These properties shall be monitored during construction to ensure

compliance with the approved property limits.

9. All material used shall be accompanied by material test certificates to

the Engineers approval. The Engineer request that further independent
tests be carried out to verify compliance with the specifications and
design requirements. The costs of all such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.

PS 5/48.5 Construction Requirements

1. Wall Excavation - Structure excavation shall be in accordance with the

requirement of Section 2 of the General Specifications.
2. Foundation Preparation - The foundation for the structure shall be
graded level for a width equal to or exceeding the length of reinforcing
material or as shown on the Drawings. Prior to wall construction, except
were constructed on rock, the foundation shall be compacted with a
smooth wheel vibratory roller.

- 32 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

When concrete face panels are specified, at each panel foundation level
a concrete levelling footing shall be provided as shown on the plans.
The footing shall be cured a minimum of 48 hours before placement of
wall panel.

3. Friction of Concrete Face Panels - Precast concrete panels shall be

aligned vertically using inserts cast into the top edge of panels. Panels
shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts in the sequence shown on
the approved plans as backfill placement proceeds.

As fill material is placed behind a panel, the panels shall be maintained

in vertical position by means of clamps placed at the junction of adjacent
panels and temporary wooden wedges placed in the horizontal or
vertical joint at the function of the two adjacent panels on the external
side of the watt. External bracing may also be required for the initial lift.
Vertical tolerances (plumbness and horizontal alignment tolerances
shall not exceed 25mm when measured along a three meter straight
edge. The maximum allowable offset in any panel joint shall be 25mm.
The overall vertical tolerance of the wall (plumbness from top to
bottom) shall not exceed 25mm per three meter of wall height.

4. Backfill Placement - Backfill placement shall closely follow the

erection of each lift of panels. At each reinforcement level, backfill
should be roughly levelled before placing and attaching reinforcements.
As shown on the shop drawings, reinforcements shall be places
approximately normal to the face of the wall. Backfill shall be placed in
accordance with Section 2 of the General Specifications, except that the
maxim um lift thickness shall not exceed 250mm (loose) and shall
closely follow panel erection. The Contractor shall decrease this lift
thickness if necessary to obtain the specified density. At the end of each
day’s operations, the Contractor shall shape the last level of backfill so
as to permit run-off of rainwater away from the wall face. Backfill
compaction shall be accomplished without disturbance or distortion of
reinforcement and panels. Compaction in a strip one meter wide
adjacent to the backside of the wall shall be achieved using light
mechanical tampers.

- 33 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

PS 5/57 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGH DURABLE

ROAD MARKING/ RED COATING
PS 5/57.1 Introduction
a. This section covers execution of red color coating/ coding on the
asphalt as per the manufacturers standards. However, the works shall be
executed up to the satisfaction of the Employer/ Engineer all in
accordance with the provision of the RTA conditions of contract.
b. The Contractor shall use specialist applicator/ supplier for execution of
this specialist work. The applicator and supplier shall have RTA’s
approval and similar scope experiences.
c. The materials shall be subject to RTA road & facility maintenance
section / Road marking & traffic section’s approvals prior to execution
at the site.
PS 5/57.2 The product description:
a. According to the manufacturers / product data, the requirement is that
permanent marking for very high trafficked roads on existing asphalt
road as well as new asphalt road. The product must be having good
adhesion to the ground.
b. Product accreditation certificates to be submitted & product shall be
comply with special qualities for very hot as well as very cold
application temperatures with lower, respectively higher reactivity.
c. Technical Specification

- 34 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

d. Classifications & Characteristic;

PS 5/57.3 Storage:
Store in tightly closed original containers in a dry, well-ventilated room
at temperatures between +5 °C and +30 °C (41 °F – 86 °F), not directly
on the floor and not in the vicinity of heating radiators. Please note that
the material can show a tendency towards sedimentation during
transportation and storage. In this case, the Contractor shall keep the
material stir until it is homogenous, and it will be ready for use again.
PS 5/57.4 The Application
a. Preparation of Road Surface
The paint shall be applied only on a surface which is clean and dry. It
shall not be laid over loose detritus, mud or similar extraneous matter
or over a thermoplastic marking or over an old paint marking which is
faulty or incompatible with the paint being applied.
Depending on the amount of flux oils contained in new bituminous
surfaces, these may need to be weathered up to 8 weeks before final
application. Especially on hot days sweating of flux oils from fresh
bitumen occurs often. If cold plastic material is applied too early on
fresh asphalts the cured marking can be pealed off. In case of doubt it
is recommend applying a test stripe and try to peel it off after curing (30
min). If peeling off is possible then, hot ambient temperatures should
be avoided and or the road surface needs additional time to be
weathered. A special precationaries to be applied for bitumen-poor
asphalt pavements based on the manufacturerer’s recommendation.
If a primer or undercoat is necessary to ensure proper adhesion of the
marking paint to the road surface without bleeding or discolouration,
the primer or undercoat shall be fully compatible with the marking paint
and the road surface, and shall be applied only if, and at the rate of
application approved by the Engineer.

- 35 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

b. Preparation of Paint
All cold-applied paint shall be thoroughly field mixed before applying in
order to keep the pigments in uniform suspension. The use of thinner
or other additives shall not be permitted unless otherwise agreed to by
the Engineer.
c. Laying of Paint
Markings shall be applied by brush, spray, hand-propelled or self-
propelled machine according to the marking configuration and the type
of paint approved for use or as directed by the Engineer. The rate of
application of paint for each coat shall be that recommended by the
manufacturer and shall produce a minimum total cover rate of
unthinned paint of 0.5 litre per square metre, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer. Where a spray machine is to be used the Contractor
shall not proceed with the marking work until the equipment, method of
application, and rate of application, as established by a test section,
have been approved by the Engineer. When more than one coat is
used, the succeeding coat shall not be applied until the previous coat
has fully set. The work shall be carried out very carefully to a regular
alignment in accordance with the Drawings. Straight edges and
templates shall be used if required by the Engineer. Where applicable
the Ballotini (glass beads) shall be applied to the surface of the paint
immediately application is complete and shall be applied in a controlled
manner by use of a spreading device which will permit an even spread
from a fixed height of between 300mm and 400mm or otherwise as the
Manufacturer may recommend. (A wheel mounted, variable width,
funnel applicator may be suitable). The loss of glass beads after 3
weeks traffic shall not exceed 10 percent of the total applied.
d. Protection of Paint Markings
All markings shall be protected from traffic until they have dried
sufficiently.
PS 5/57.5 Post Application:
After application, quality control shall be made according to EN 1436
and acceptance procedures shall be implemented.
PS 5/57.6 Defective Materials of Workmanship
Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory
manner or to incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location shall be removed,
the road pavement made good and the materials replaced, reconstructed
and/or properly located, all at the Contractor’s expense and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer/ RTA.

- 36 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

PS 5/57.7 Protection of Traffic

The Contractor shall protect pedestrian, vehicular and other traffic adjacent
to the working area against damage or disfigurement by construction
equipment, tools and materials or by splatters, splashes and smirches of
paint or other construction materials and shall during the course of the
work provide and maintain adequate signs and signals for the warning and
guidance of traffic.
PS 5/57.8 Warranty
The manufacturer shall provide on less than three years warantee towards
the product and the applicator shall provide on less than three years from
the Date of Taking Over Certificate for undertaking towards rectification of
defects and damages at the Contractor’s cost.
PS 5/57.9 Final Handing Over:
Prior to final handing over and issue of the defects liability certificate
(performance certificate), the Contractor / applicator shall make an
additional coat of applications including rectifications of damage surfaces
up to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor’s cost.

PS 5/58 FLEXIBLE RUBBER BOLLARD

PS 5/58.1 Introduction
The Flexible Rubber Bollard is an injection molded urethane flexible post
designed to withstand frequent high speed impacts.
PS 5/58.2 Features
- Tapered one piece urethane design.
- Round post design can provide increased visibility in up to 360°
direction.
- Designed to remain flexible over a wide temperature range.
- High intensity, flexible prismatic reflective sheeting standard.
- Standard post colors: white, yellow, orange.
- Standard reflective colors: silver, amber, orange.
- Custom post colors: blue, green, black, red, dark gray, light gray,
yellow green.
- Various heights available.

- 37 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

PS 5/59 HYDRAULIC PRESSED (WET MIX) TILES FOR CYCLE TRACK

PS 5/59.1 Introduction

Cycle track tiles is Hydraulic Pressed (Wet Mix) tiles full bodied (Single
Mix) to avoid delamination.

PS 5/59.2 Surface, Sides & Dimension

Shot blast finish (roughness, exposed aggregate as better aesthetic looking

and straight edge with zero joint for avoiding the rumbling effect while in
motion. (Recommending expansion joint after every 10m lengthwise)
Zero Maintenance -only regular cleaning required.

PS 5/59.3 Manufacturing Process

PLANT
1 No. Single Station - Motherwell Bridge, UK - 400 Ton Press - Simplex.
3 Nos. Three Station- Forest Press Hydraulics, UK - 400 Ton Press -
Duplex.

The following process of production is followed at our plant situated in

Jebel Ali Industrial Area-1. The fully automatic machine from M/s. Forest
Press Hydraulics, UK & Motherwell Bridge, UK, brings out quality
products.

RAW MATERIALS
Raw materials, coarse & fine aggregates are transported to the plant by
trailors and stockpiled. Moisture sensitive materials like cement are stored
in silos.

MIXING
Raw materials, both fine and coarse aggregates are conveyed to the
collection bucket, which introduces the material so collected into the main
mixing plant. Here, the aggregates are mixed along with cement.

BATCHING
After the completion of dry mixing time directly as present according to
the requirement controlled by the automatic hydrometer, water is added.
The mixture is allowed to mix with water for about 25-40 seconds, which
is characterized as the wet mixing time.

MOULDING
The wet mix is delivered to dispenser through moving bucket, which is
measured by volumetric basis from dispenser to mould. The mix easily
runs and fills the mould without any need for vibration and paper or filter
cloth is attached to the die head to prevent the escape of fines. The
concrete when required in the dispenser unit is dropped to mould. At
- 38 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

this stage, the mould table moves to hydraulically press with an applied
pressure of 400 tons, this is assisted by a vacuumed top drainage system.
The pressing duration ranges from 10 to 15 seconds depends on the
characteristics of aggregates and sizes. After completion of the press, the
mould detracts.

CUBING
When the ejector is raised, the product becomes clear of the mould and
contacts the vacuum plate achieving vacuum. The ejector is then lowered
and the carriage traverses over the Pallet conveyor.

STACKING
The roller conveyor supports the pallets during the stacking operation.
After a product has been stacked on the pallet, the conveyor indexes
forward a distance which is controlled by an adjustable timer set by the
Operator to correspond to approximately the thickness of one product.
When the pallet is full, it is moved down the powered conveyor, ready to
be taken away by the fork-lift truck and off-loaded at the curing area.

CURING
All finished materials are kept at the curing area are cured in kraft curing
chamber for 24 hours. After 24 hours they are removed and dry stacked
in open area for dispatch to sites.

SURFACE FINISHING
Shot blasted: Finished products will be cured sufficiently and then taken
to M/s.Schindler, Germany, automatic blasting machine for surface
blasting with steel shots to get the desired finish.

Curling: After shot blasting the same will be curled in automatic M/s.
Schindler, Germany, curling machine to get the desired finish & effect.

Honed/Brushed & Diamond Cut: Finished products will be cured

sufficiently and then taken to M/s.GMM S.P.A, Italy, machine to get the
desired finish & eff etc.

- 39 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

PS 5/60 METALWORK AND GLAZING

PS 5/60.1 GENERAL

The Contractor is required to employ approved specialists to supply, or supply and erect all
metalwork items. Working drawings are to be prepared and issued to the Engineer in
quadruplicate for approval in good time to afford no delay to the project and in no case less
than eight weeks before work needs to be put in hand. No work at site or fabrication in
factory shall commence prior to any approval by the Engineer.

PS 5/60.2 STANDARDS

Materials used in this Section shall comply with British Standards, the British Codes of
Practice, DIN Standards, American Standards and American Society for Testing and
Materials, or Local Authority Standards and Codes whichever are the more stringent.

Applicable provision of the following British Standards shall apply to these works as
follows:‑

1) Mild Steel shall comply with BS 4360, sections generally shall comply with BS 4:
Part 1, hollow sections with BS 4848: Part 2 and angles with BS 4848: Part 4. Steel
plate and sheet shall comply with BS 1449: Part 1 and steel tubes to BS 1775.
2) Stainless Steel Tubes shall comply with BS 3014, and stainless steel plate with BS
1449: Part 2.
3) Aluminum alloy extruded sections shall comply with BS 1161 or BS 1474 and
aluminum alloy drawn tube with BS 1471. Anodizing process when applicable to
comply with BS 3987.
4) Brass work as indicated on the drawings shall comply with the various appropriate
Standards.
5) Fastenings unless otherwise specified shall be of the same metal as the item being
fixed, with matching coating or finish. Wood screws shall comply with BS 1210.
Bolts, Screws and nuts to BS 4190, machine screws and nuts to BS 4138 and
self‑tapping screws to BS 4174.
6) Plugs shall be proprietary fibre plastics or other approved type.
7) Bitumen solution for cold application shall comply with BS 3416, Type 1.

PS 5/60.3 FINISHED COATING

1) General

The finished coating shall be as stated on the Drawings and applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

The colour of the coating shall be selected from available ranges if not stated
elsewhere in these Documents. The Contractor shall offer samples for approval
prior to the final selection and the manufacturer of these elements.

2) Anodised coating

The aluminium anodising shall comply with BS 3987 and be integral color hardcoat
anodising 550kp/mm² hardness, minimum 25 microns thick.

- 40 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

The colour of anodising shall be as described on the drawings. Samples of colour

including limits of colour variation shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval before work commences. The Engineer reserves the right to reject the
products of any supplier who cannot guarantee a reasonable limit of colour
variation, the acceptable limit of variation being at the Engineer's discretion.

3) Polyester powder coating

All aluminium sections that are to receive a polyester powder coating shall be given
a caustic etch followed by an anodix oxide treatment to obtain an architectural class
1 anodic coating. Anodisation should be not less than 20 micron thickness.

All aluminium works shall be finished in coloured electrostatic polyester powder

coating as per DIN standard 53151, 53152, 53153, 53156 or equal and approved to
Ral colour subject to the Engineer's approval. Powder coating of all mild steel
elements shall be as per relevant the British Standard and to the approval of the
Engineer.

4) Epoxy Paint Coating

Unless otherwise stated mild steel shall be spray coated with Epoxy based paint to
be factory applied in two layers, primer coat 0.3 mils dry film thickness and finished
colour coat minimum 1.0 mils dry film thickness, minimum overall thickness of 1.3
mils dry film thickness. Inside corners, channels and the like shall be visually
covered to the extent possible. The Engineer shall select the colour from the range
available.

The coating shall be applied to properly cleaned and pre‑treated galvanised steel
sections. Application shall be by approved applicators and the Contractor shall
provide certified details of same. The pretreatment and application of the coating
shall conform to all ASTM, BS, DIN Standards and the like as stated in the
Supplier's printed Specifications.

5) Coating thickness

As and when instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide certificates
from independent laboratories that the minimum thickness as stated in these
Documents has been applied to all sections. Failure to provide such information
shall result in the complete installation being rejected and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.

6) Dissimilar materials

All aluminium surfaces that are to be in contact with cured concrete, mortar, steel
and other metals shall have the contact surfaces protected wherever they may entrap
moisture or corrosive elements. Metals that are to be in contact with mortar or
concrete shall be protected with a two coat bituminous coating.

Prime paint steel parts of anchors, anchor inserts, reinforcement, supports, and all
parts after field welding or bolting with zinc chromate. Minimum dry film thickness
of 1 mil for zinc chromate.
- 41 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

PS 5/60.4 ALUMINIUM

(i) Generally

All aluminum elements i.e doors, windows, frames, transoms, mullions, etc, where
shown on the drawing shall be manufactured of extruded section of aluminum alloy
to B.S. 1474. Heat treatable free from defects type, 11.9. They shall be supplied by
a manufacturer approved by the Engineer. Fittings shall be aluminum alloy in
accordance with B.S. 1473.

All exposed surfaces shall be light etched and anodised in a satin or matt finish to
the colour indicated on the drawings. The thickness of anodising shall be guaranteed
to be 20 microns (.020 mm) by the manufacturer and shall be polished to a mirror-
like surface.

Aluminum coated materials shall not be permitted in lieu of the aluminum items
specified herein. Samples of the anodized finish must be offered for approval before
proceeding.

All aluminum sections shall present clear, straight and shapely defined lines and
shall be free from defects and imperfections that may impair their strength.

Samples of aluminum shall include a corner joint and glazing gasket.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminum work until
the completion of the Works, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect
condition will be accepted. All hardware, screws, bolts and other necessary
accessories shall be of aluminum or other non- corrodible material and shall match
in colour and consistency the finish of the anodised aluminum.

Where aluminum is in contact with wood, the wood shall be treated with
pentachlorophenol or equal and approved, 5% minimum concentration, followed
with the protective measures described for aluminum in contact with wood or other
absorptive materials.

The aluminum work shall be fabricated and anchored so that work will not be
distorted nor the fasteners overstressed from the expansion and contraction of the
metal.

(ii) Protection

Before shipment from the factory, aluminum surfaces requiring protection shall be
given a coating which will protect the metal during construction. In areas where
appearance of the finish on aluminum items is important a coating of methacrylate
lacquer shall be applied.

Apply two sprayed coats or water-white methacrylate lacquer having a total

minimum thickness of
0.125 mm, which when applied to the aluminum surface shall be capable of
withstanding the action of lime mortar for a period of at least one week in an
atmosphere of 100% relative humidity at 100 degree F and the action or 10% (by
- 42 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

weight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 70 degree F and the action of
atmospheric weathering for a period of 12 months. Alternatively a thick adhesive tape
may be used. The coating or tape shall be applied in the manufacturers plant to the
exposed surfaces of all aluminum components subject to staining from alkaline
mortar and plaster abrasion and other construction abuses.

(iii) Workmanship

The Contractor shall furnish all aluminium units as indicated on the drawings.

Workmanship and installation shall be in accordance with recommended standards

of First Class Aluminium Manufacturers.

The Contractor shall furnish all labour materials and equipment to complete the
aluminium work indicated on the drawings or specified herein to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

Work shall include all parts and accessories for all variations of fabrication
techniques required for a complete installation, caulking, priming and back coating
and shop drawings.

All aluminium work shall be performed in a shop where grade of metal work is of
recognised quality acceptable to the Engineer. All items shall be installed plumb,
straight, square, level and in proper elevation, plane, location and alignment with
other work. All work shall be fabricateded for adjustment to field variations, fitted
with proper joints and intersections and adequately anchored in place.

All workmanship and finishes shall be first class, strictly in accordance with the best
practice. All work shall be complete in every detail. Finished work shall be
approved by the Engineer before the job will be accepted.

Where aluminium surfaces come into contact with metals other than stainless steel,
zinc, white bronze or small areas of other metal compactable with aluminium, they
shall be kept from direct contact with such parts by painting the dissimilar metal with
a primer, followed by one or two coats of aluminium metal and masonry paint of
other approved suitable protective coating, excluding those containing lead
pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall be placed between aluminium and
dissimilar metals. Steel anchors and connecting members shall be hot dip galvanized
or zinc plated after fabrication.

Aluminium in contact with wood or other absorptive materials which may become
repeatedly wet shall be painted with two coats of aluminium metal and monsonary
paint or a coat at heavy bodied bituminous paint. Alternatively paint the wood or
other absorptive material with two coats of aluminium house paint and seal joints
with a good caulking compound.

Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabrication

compounds, moisture, dirt accumulations and other foreign materials to ensure
proper lacquer adhesion.

Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminium work as required by
removing protective tape and other coating, using mild soap or detergent and clear
- 43 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

petroleum spirits. Acid, caustics and abrasives shall not be used. Where cleaners are
used to remove excess sealing compounds care shall be taken to prevent damage to
seal or staining or damage to adjacent work.

iv) Aluminium Windows and Doors

1) General

All windows and doors are to be constructed by approved specialist

suppliers of light, medium or heavy section to suit location, local building
regulations, and particular requirements noted on the drawing as to weight
and profile.

All frames should be made to fit the actual openings with a 5mm clearance
all round. Discrepancies in overall width or height exceeding 5mm will not
be allowed and the frames will be rejected in such cases. Any small
discrepancies shall have the gaps suitably backed and then filled with
gun‑applied water repellant mastic sealant.

All nuts, bolts, washers and screws used for assembly and fixing shall be of
adequate strength for their purpose within the and shall be stainless steel
grade 18/8.

All sealants used in the assembly of, and in the fixing of cladding and
window framing, shall be non‑setting to allow thermal movement without
detriment to those joint sealants used for peripheral caulking and shall be one
part silicone sealant and shall conform to BS 4245. All spliced joints between
mullions will be sealed with an approved silicone product, compatible with
other sealants and packings used.

All ironmongery shall have the same finish as the frames and shall be
approved by the Engineer.

At all opening windows and doors and where there are louvred screens and
doors, a flyscreen shall be provided to the approval of the Engineer,
constructed following the prinicples and specifications as described
elsewhere in this specification.

Glazing sections shall be set in special heat resisting PVC and of channel
type. Separate glazing sections on each side of the glass will not be
permitted.

- 44 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

The following table indicates the basic requirements for window

construction. The weights of framing make no allowance for beads,
glazing bars, opening light framing, coupling mullions or transoms.

Max. super- ficial Max. dimen-

Min. weight of basic
Classification area of window sion either Remarks
frame Kg/m run
way in m² mm

Light 0.60 1 1500

Medium 1.50 5 2500

Medium 2.00 9 3000

Heavy 2.50 12 3500

Heavy 3.00 12 3500 with

door

PS 5/60.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

All materials shall be stored in protected areas on site and shall be fully
protected against the effects of weather.

All materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in a manner
to prevent deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finishes,
and to prevent rusting and the accumulation of mud, dirt or other foreign
matter on the metal work. All such damage and accumulation shall be
corrected prior to erection.

PS 5/60.6 MATERIALS

All materials shall be new stock, free from defects, impairing strength,
durability or appearance and of best commercial quality for each intended
purpose.

Provide all anchors, bolts, sleeves, spigots and other parts required for
securing each item of work of this Section to the construction, including
furnishing to concrete workers all required inserts and sleeves for use in
concrete and furnishing to masons of all anchors, bolts, and other items
required to be built‑in masonry.

All exposed fastenings shall be of the same material finish as the metal to
which applied, unless otherwise noted.

Welding rods shall conform to British Standards and the recommendations

of the metal welding rod manufacturer.

Bolts and nuts where used, shall be in accordance with B.S. 1400 or 1769.
- 45 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

Bolts shall be of sufficient length to show at least one full thread beyond
the nut after tightening. Bolted joints subject to vibration shall be securely
locked.

Washers, where used, shall be in accordance with B.S.4320. The size of

the holes shall not exceed the bolt diameter by more than 2mm.

Crambs, Wall Tiles, Anchors etc.

The cramps for fixing wood frames to walls shall be 200mm long 30mm
wide and 3mm thick and shall have one end bent and twice countersunk
drilled for screwing to the frame and the other end fishtailed for setting into
walling.

All fixing cramps, wall tiles, anchors etc., shall be galvanised mild steel
proprietary type such as Pepcon International (Al Tayer), Harris and Edgar
or equal and approved. The Contractor is responsible for submitting
suitable samples to Engineer for approval.

Galvanised Steel Channels and Chequered Plate

Where Site Electrical Rooms or Substations are required, the Contractor

must allow for all necessary galvanised steel channels and chequered plate
as directed by the Engineer including framing, supports, handrailing etc.,
as necessary.

PS 5/60.7 SHOP PAINTING MATERIALS

Shop paint for ungalvanised ferrous surfaces shall be a high quality, lead
free, rust‑inhibitive primer, as approved by the Engineer.

Shop paint for galvanised metal shall be high quality, zinc rich, metal
primer especially formulated for use on galvanised metal, as approved by
the Engineer.

Shop paint for aluminium shall be Dichromate based primer.

PS 5/60.8 SHOP COATINGS FOR FERROUS AND GALVANISED SURFACES

Galvanising

a) All ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use in addition to
any other interior items specifically so specified, shall be of hot
dip galvanized, including all bolts,

b) Hot‑dip galvanising process shall comply with BS 729 as

applicable. After galvanising, processed items shall be
straightened free of all warpage and distortion caused by the hot
dip process.
- 46 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

c) Galvanised surfaces to receive paint coatings shall be given hot

phosphate (bonderizing) shop pretreatment.

d) Furnish to the Engineer, a certified statement that galvanising and

hot‑phosphate pretreatments comply fully with this Specification.

Shop Painting

a) All materials (plain and galvanised) (including non‑ferrous where

specified for paint finish) under this Section shall be given a shop
coat of primer as specified, using the appropriate primers
specified previously in this Section.

b) Immediately before painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale,

dirt, weld flux, weld spatter and other foreign material with wire
brushes or steel scrappers. Remove all grease and oil by use of
detergent or solvent as recommended by the manufacturer of the
proposed painting system.

c) Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with

manufacturer's printed instructions to dry film thickness
recommended. Apply thoroughly and evenly and work well into
corners and joints taking care to avoid sags and runs.

d) Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete, or to be welded

in the field.

e) After erection, sand smooth and retouch all portions of the shop
coats chipped or damaged during erection, and coat all field welds
and connections with the same paint used for all the shop coat.

f) All aluminium surfaces in contact with cement or concrete

surfaces are to be given two coats of bitumen based paint before
being fitted.

PS 5/60.9 WORKMANSHIP

1) Co‑ordinate and provide details of the work as necessary to ensure

co‑ordination with related building elements and services. Liaise as
necessary to ensure co‑ordination of the work with related building
elements and services, provide fabrication/installation drawings
and other information requested, submit sufficient copies of
drawings, etc., for approval. Make any necessary amendments in
accordance with any comments of the Engineer and without delay
and re‑submit unless it is confirmed that this is not necessary and
submit sufficient copies of final version of drawings, etc., for
distribution to all parties.
- 47 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

2) Take site dimensions and submit Drawings as detailed elsewhere

in these documents, showing elevations, plans and full size
sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed methods of
forming joints, any proposals for fabricating large components in
more than one piece.

3) Prepare control samples as requested and obtain Engineer's written

approval of appearance before proceeding with manufacture.

4) Fabricate metalwork carefully and accurately to ensure compliance

with and performance requirements, using types and grades of
metal appropriate for the purpose. Finished work must be free from
distoration and cracks. Use proprietary products to manufacturer's
recommendations.

5) Pre‑finished metal may be used if the finish complies with this

specification, the methods of fabrication do not damage or alter
appearance at finish and the finish is adequately protected during
fabrication.

6) Cold formed work, use brake presses or cold rolling to produce

accurate profiles with straight arrises. Unless specified otherwise,
mitre junctions of identical sections. Remove all burrs and sharp
arrises which would be visible after fixing or a hazard to the user.
After thermal cutting stainless steel grind off material which is
liable to corrode.

7) When assembled all moving parts must move freely and without
binding.

8) Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and

abrading mechanically or chemically and form bond under
pressure. Use adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations.

9) Mechanical joints shall be tight with no visible gaps. Where screw

heads will be visible after component is fixed, or raised screw heads
would interfere with any moving part of component, use
countersunk machine screws unless specified otherwise.
Mechanical joints of components which will be located externally
shall be bedded in bedding compound, including all mating
surfaces, cleats and other fixings.

10) Thoroughly clean surfaces to be welded and ensure accurate fit

using clamps and jigs where practicable. Use tack welds only for
temporary attachment unless specified otherwise. Make joints with
parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions,
- 48 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

holes, porosity or cracks. Completely remove all traces of flux

residue and slag. Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of
materials which will be self finished and visible in completed work.
Butt welds which will be visible in completed work shall be
finished smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.

11) Metal arc welding shall be to BS 5135 or other methods subject to

approval. Welding of stainless steel shall be TIG welding to BS
3019: Part 2, or other methods subject to approval. Use double
bevel butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds
and any other measures necessary to minimise distortion.

Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to

damage surface finish. Welding of aluminium alloys shall be TIG
welding to BS 3019: Part I, or MIG welding to BS 3571: Part I, or
gas welding to BS 1126, or other methods subject to approval.
Welding of copper alloys shall be fusion welding to BS 1077 for
copper, or other methods subject to approval.

12) Apply metal coatings after fabrication is complete and all fixing
holes have been drilled, unless otherwise, specified. Before
applying coating remove all welding slag, weld spatter, anti‑spatter
compounds, paints, grease, flux, rust, burrs, and sharp arrises and
make good all defects which would show after application of
coating and finish surfaces smooth.

13) Galvanising shall comply with BS 729, sherardising to BS 4921,

zinc spraying of iron and steel surfaces shall comply with BS 2569:
Part I and Vitreous enameling of steel surfaces with BS 3830.
Surfaces of stainless steel, bronze and brass which will be visible
in the completed work shall be finely polished.

14) All sections shall be protected to prevent distortion of metalwork

during transit, handling, storage and fixing and damage to arrises,
projecting features and surfaces which will be exposed in the
finished work. Prevent contact with mud, ashes, plaster and cement
and provide protective coverings as necessary and remove on
completion.

15) Position metalwork accurately, plumb, level and true to line. Fix
securely to prevent pulling away, deflection, or other movement
during use. Do not distort when tightening fastenings and the like.

16) Do not use railings or balustrades as strutting or supports after

fixing for other works. Do not weld, braze or solder on site without
approval.

17) Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness or

- 49 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

metal and details of assembly and supports shall give ample

strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to
exclude water. Do all cutting, punching, drilling and tapping
required for attachment of hardware and of work by other trades.

18) Generally, metalwork shall conform to all Local Authority

By‑Laws, and, in lieu of other specific legal requirements, shall
support any live loads which may normally be imposed plus a
safety factor of 2.5.

PS 5/60.10 INSTALLATION

1) All work shall be installed adjusted by experienced workmen all in

accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and in
full conformity with the approved shop drawings, samples and
other submitted data. Under no circumstances shall materials be
installed on surfaces that contain condensation, dirt, grease or other
foreign encountered materials that would hinder or prevent proper
installation and functioning for the use intended.

2) All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled with proper

and approved provision for contraction and expansion and set in
correct locations as per approved detailed shop drawings, all level,
square, plumb and aligned with other work. All joints between
framing and structural building shall be sealed in order to be
watertight and weatherproof and to satisfy all other requirements of
the Engineer.

3) Frames shall be site verified and manufactured with a maximum

2.5mm tolerance around the opening in the structure. These joints
are to be finished by applying an approved sealant into a
polystyrene foam backing strip.

4) All works are to be fully protected for the duration of the contract
from damage by other trades. The Engineer shall approve the
method of protection.

5) If for any reason final finishes become scratched, abraded or

damaged during transport, delivery, storage or erection, it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to remove or repair those defective
areas or components as directed and to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer.

Repair work shall be identical to the manufacturer's applied finish

with regard to gloss, finish and visual appearance. Field touch up
of painted metalwork is permitted only with the written permission
of the Engineer. Where touch up is not an authorised means of
repair the damaged materials must be replaced by new.

- 50 -
SECTION 5 ANCILLARY WORKS

6) Upon completion of work all protective coverings from all exposed

surfaces shall be removed. All surfaces shall be cleaned using soap
or detergents as recommended by the aluminium manufacturers to
remove sealants, discolouration and any other foreign material.
Defection of any type determined by the Engineer shall be repaired
at the Contractor's expense.

7) Extreme care shall be taken when cleaning the exterior portion to

protect all other adjacent works.

PS 5/60.11 SAMPLES

1) Submit duplicate samples of all finished materials for approval by

Engineer. The samples will show the full range of finishes and
mechanical properties to be expected in the finished product.
Where physical samples would otherwise be too large, examples
will be given that can be readily inspected locally, or the Contractor
will provide facilities for the Engineer's inspection at the
Contractor's expense.

2) Unless specifically called for, size and form of each sample shall be
as directed by the Engineer.

PS 5/60.12 SEALING JOINTS

The Contractor shall ensure that joints are dry and remove all loose material,
dust and grease.

Joints shall be prepared in accordance with sealant manufacturer's

recommendations using recommended solvents and primers where
necessary.

Adjoining surfaces which would be impossible to clean if smeared with

sealant shall be masked. Backing strips shall be inserted in all joints to be
pointed with sealant.

When using backing strips, the Contractor shall not leave gaps and shall not
reduce depth of joint for sealant to less than the minimum recommended by
the manufacturer.

Cavities shall be filled and jointed with sealant in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Sealant shall be tooled to form a smooth
flat bead.

Excess sealant shall be removed from adjoining surfaces using cleaning

materials recommended by the sealant manufacturer and shall be left clean.

- 51 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

Section 8
Concrete Pile Foundations

-1-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

SECTION 8 – CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

8/1 DESCRIPTION 3

8/2 MATERIALS 3

8/3 GROUND CONDITIONS 3

8/4 TOLERANCES 3

8/5 PILING METHOD AND PROGRAMME 4

8/6 PILING RECORDS 4

8/7 DAMAGE TO ADJACENT SERVICES AND

STRUCTURES 5

8/8 CONCRETE FOR PILES 5

8/9 REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES 6

8/10 BORING FOR PILES 7

8/11 DRILLING FLUID 8

8/12 PLACING CONCRETE 10

8/13 EXTRACTION OF CASING 12

8/14 TEMPORARY BACKFILLING 14

8/15 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL 14

8/16 CUTTING OFF PILE HEADS 14

8/17 INTEGRITY TESTING OF PILES 14

8/18 LOADING TESTS 15

8/19 FAILURE OF PILE 16

8/20 RECTIFICATION OF FAILURE 17

8/21 PROTECTION OF PILING FROM CHEMICAL ATTACK 17

8/22 CLEARANCE OF WORKS 17

-2-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

SECTION 8 – CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/1 DESCRIPTION

8.1.1 All pile foundations shall be bored cast-in-place concrete piles and shall be
constructed as indicated on the drawings and in compliance with these
specifications.

8/2 MATERIALS

8.2.1 The materials for the manufacture of the reinforced concrete shall be in
accordance with Section 4 - "Concrete Works".

8.2.2 The temporary steel casings and the permanent casings or liners shall be
cylindrical, of the diameter indicated on the Drawings and shall be of sufficient
strength to maintain shape and location during boring and placement of concrete.
The Casings shall be sufficiently watertight to exclude ground water during
placing of concrete.

8/2.3 In case drilling mud is used, bentonite, as supplied to the site and prior to mixing
shall be in accordance with Specification DFCP 4 of the Oil Companies Materials
Association.

8/3 GROUND CONDITIONS

8/3.1 Factual information and reports on site investigation for the works will be
provided to tenderers. However, in the event that a full report is given including
interpretations, opinions or conclusions, no responsibility is accepted by the
Employer, 8/3.2 The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any
circumstances which indicates that in the Contractor's opinion the ground
conditions differ from those reported in or which could have been inferred from
the site investigation reports or trial pile results.

8/4 TOLERANCES

8/4.1 SETTING OUT

Setting out of the main grid line shall be carried out by the Contractor. The
installation of marker pins at pile positions as required by the Engineer shall be
accurate to 75 mm in any direction. An additional tolerance for a pile head cut off
below ground level will be permitted in accordance with Sub-Section 8/13.8
and/or 8/16.

8/4.2 VERTICALITY
At the commencement of installation, the equipment governing the alignment of
the bored pile, shall be made vertical to a tolerance of within 1 to 100. The
maximum permitted deviation of the finished pill from the vertical is 1 in 75.

-3-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/4.3 RAKE
The equipment governing the direction and angle of rake shall be set to give the
correct alignment of the pile within a tolerance of 1 In 50. The piling rig shall be
set and maintained to attain the required rake. The maximum permitted deviation
of the finished pile from the specified rake is 1 in 25 for piles raking up to 1:6 and
1 in 15 for piles raking more than 1:6.

8/4.4 FORCIBLE CORRECTIONS TO PILES

Forcible corrections to concrete piles to overcome errors of position or alignment
shall not be made. Forcible corrections may be made to otherpiles only if
approved and where the pile shaft is not fully embedded in the soil.

8/5 PILING METHOD AND PROGRAMME

8/5.1 The Contractor shall supply for approval all relevant details of the method of
piling and the plant he proposes to use. Any alternative method to that specified
shall be subject to approval.

8/5.2 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer each day of the intended programme of
piling for the following day and shall give adequate notice of his intention to work
outside normal hours and Public Holidays.

8/5.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed sequence and timing for
boring piles, having regard to the avoidance of damage to adjacent piles.

8/5.4 Any proposals by the Contractor for ground treatment of any nature or for
temporary lowering of the water table by well pointing or any other method shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall however remain
fully responsible for any effects of such ground treatment or control of the level of
water tables upon the existing roads, building and structures in the vicinity of
works.

8/5.5 Any proposals by the Contractor for underpinning, needling and shoring of
existing structures in the vicinity of the works shall be carefully designed by the
Contractor and be subject to approval of the Engineer.

8/6 PILING RECORDS

8/6.1 The Contractor shall keep records as follows the installation of each pile
and shall submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later than
noon of the next working day after the pile was installed. The signed record will
form a record of the work.Any unexpected boring conditions shall be noted in the
records.

Data to be recorded
i. Contract

-4-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

ii. Pile reference number (location)

iii. Pile type
iv. Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter.
v. Nominal diameter of underarm/base.
vi. Standing groundwater level from direct observation or given site
investigation data.
vii. Date and time of boring.
viii. Date of concreting
ix. Ground level at pile position at commencement of installation of pile
(commencing surface),
x. Working level on which piling base machine stands
xi. Depth from ground level at pile position to pile to
xii. Toe level,
xiii. Pile head level as constructed.
xiv. Pile Cut-off level.
xv. Length of temporary casing
xvi. Length of permanent casing.
xvii. Soil samples taken and in situ tests carried out during pile
formation or adjacent to pile position.
xviii. Length and details of reinforcement.
xix. Concrete mix.
xx. Volume of concrete supplied to pile where this can be measured in
practice.
xxi. All information regarding obstruction delays and other interruptions to the
sequence of work.

8/7 DAMAGE TO ADJACENT SERVICES AND STRUCTURES

8/7.1 If damage will be, or is likely to be, caused to mains, services adjacent structures,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for making surveys,
monitoring movements or vibrations, and minimizing avoiding such damage.

8/7.2 The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner and such times so as to
minimize noise and disturbance.

8/8 CONCRETE FOR PILES

8/8.1 Concrete for piles shall be Class 30 or as shown on the drawings and shall be in
accordance with Section 4 of the Specification and the following requirements.

8/8.2 When a designed mix is specified the Contractor shall be responsible for selecting
the mix proportions to achieve the required strength and workability, but the
Engineer will be responsible for specifying the minimum cement content and any
other properties required to ensure durability.

8/8.3 The Concrete shall have sufficient workability to enable it to be placed and
compacted by the methods used in forming the piles.

-5-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/8.4 For piles exposed to potentially aggressive ground o groundwater, approved

measures shall be taken to ensure durability. Reference should be Made to
Building Research Establishment Design 363 published in the U.K. relating to
sulphate attack.

8/8.5 The cement content in any mix shall not be less than 360 kg/CU.m. Where
concrete is to be placed under water or drilling mud by tremie the cement content
shall be not less than 380 kg/CU.m., or where the pile will be exposed to sea
water 400 kg/CU.m.

8/8.6 All concrete aggregates, cement and water shall be sampled and tested as
frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer as detailed under the relevant
clauses in section 4 concrete. work. All test samples shall be supplied by the
Contractor at his own expense.

8/8.7 Trial mixes shall be prepared for concrete in accordance with BS 5328, showing
that the proposed mix proportions and manufacture will produce a concrete of the
strength and quality required, having adequate workability for compaction by the
method to be used in placing. 8/8.8 The Contractor shall keep a detailed record of
the results of all tests on concrete and concrete materials. Each test shall be
clearly identified with the piles to which it relates.

8/9 REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES

8/9.1 The reinforcement for the piles shall conform to the requirement of
SECTION 4 of the specification.

8/9.2 Reinforcement in the form of a cage shall be assembled with additional support
such as spreader forks and lacing, necessary to form a cage which can be lifted
and placed without permanent distortion. Intersecting bars shall be fixed together
by approved means. Hoops, links or helical reinforcement shall fit closely around
the main longitudinal bars and be bound to them by approved wire, the ends of
which shall be turned into the interior of the pile. Reinforcement shall be placed
and maintained in position to specified projection of reinforcement above the final
cut-off level.

8/9.3 The cover to all reinforcement in cast-n-place piles shall be not less than 75mm
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Spacers shall be designed and
manufactured using durable material which will not lead to corrosion ot the
reinforcement or spalling of the concrete cover.
8/9.4 The number of laps in longitudinal steel bars shall be kept to a minimum. Joints in
reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of each bar is effective across the
joint and shall be made so that there is no detrimental displacement of the
reinforcement during the construction of the pile.

-6-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/10 BORING FOR PILES

8/10.1 Prior to boring the Contractor shall check the casing position for each pile during
and immediately after placing the casing, and agree it with the Engineer.

8/10.2 Where the open bore is unstable, temporary casing or bentonites us pension may
be used to support the wall of the bore prior to concreting.

8/10.3 Piles shall not be bored so close to other piles which have recently been cast and
which contain workable or unset concrete that a flow of concrete could be
induced from or damage caused to any of the piles.8/10.4 The Contractor shall
carry out the work in such a manner and at such times as to minimize noise and
disturbance.

8/10.5 Any proposals by the Contractor for ground treatment of any nature or for
temporary lowering of the water table by well pointing or any other method shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall however remain
fully responsible for any effects of such ground treatment or control of the level of
water tables upon the existing roads, buildings and structures In the vicinity of the
Works.

8/10.6 Any proposals by the Contractor for underpinning, needling, and shoring
structures in the vicinity of the works shall be carefully designed by the
Contractor and be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

8/10.7 Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of
uniform cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they
shall be free from internal projections and encrusted concrete which might
adversely affect the proper formation or piles.

8/10.8 Where piles are bored under water or bentonite suspension in an unlined state, the
insertion of a full-length loosely fitting casing to the bottom of the bore prior to
placing concrete will not be permitted.

8/10.9 Where boring takes place through unstable water bearing strata, the process of
excavation and the depth of temporary casing employed shall be such that soil
from outside the area of the pile is not drawn into the pile section and cavities are
not created outside the temporary casing as it is advanced.

8/10.10 Where the use of drilling fluid is specified or approved for maintaining the
stability of a bore, an adequate temporary casing of all shall be used in
conjunction with the method so as to ensure stability of the strata near ground
level until concrete has .been placed. During construction the level of drilling
fluid in the pile excavation shall be maintained within the cased or stable bore so
that it is not less than1.0m above the level of external standing groundwater at all
times In the event of rapid loss of drilling fluid from a pile excavation, the bore

-7-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

shall be backfilled without delay and the instruction of 'the Engineer shall be
obtained before boring at that location is resumed.

8/10.11 All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of bentonite suspension
on the Site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Discarded bentonite
shall be removed from the Site without undue delay. Any disposal of the bentonite
shall comply with the regulations of the RTA / Roads Department.

8/10.12 Pumping from pile bores shall not be permitted unless the bore has been sealed
against further water entry by casing or unless the soil is stable and will allow
pumping to take place without ground disturbance below or around the pile.

8/10.13 For a pile constructed in a stable cohesive soil without the use of temporary
casing or other form of support, the pile shall be bored and concrete shall be
placed without such delay as would lead to significant impairment of the soil
strength.

8/10.14 Each pile bore which does not contain standing water or drilling fluid shall be
inspected directly or indirectly prior to concrete being placed in it. This inspection
shall be carried out from the ground surface in the case of piles of less than
750mm diameter. Torches or other approved means of lighting, measuring tapes,
and a means of measuring vertically shall be provided. For piles of 750mm
diameter or larger, equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to enable his
representative and the Engineer to descend into the bore for the purpose of
inspection, Any method of, descent and the equipment used shall comply with the
requirements of BS 5573.

8/10.15 Completion of boring and where inspection of a dry pile bore indicates the
necessity, loose disturbed or softened soil shall be removed from the bore. Where
pile bores contain water or drilling fluid, a cleaning process shall be employed
before concrete is placed. Large debris/or accumulated sediment shall be removed
using appropriate approved methods, which shall be designed to clean while at the
same time minimizing ground disturbance below the pile bases. Water or drilling
fluid shall be maintained at such levels throughout and following the cleaning
operation that stability of the bore is preserved,

8/11 DRILLING FLUID

8/11.1 Bentonite, as supplied to the Site and Prior to mixing, shall be in accordance with
Specification DFCP 4 of the Oil Companies Materials Association.

8/11.2 A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacture of

bentonite powder, showing the properties of each consignment delivered to the
Site. This certificate shall be made available to the Engineer on request. The
properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent viscosity range (in
centipoises) and the gel strength range (in newtons per square meter) for solids in
water.

-8-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/11.3 Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension
which will maintain the stability of the pile bore for the period necessary to place
concrete and complete construction, The temperature of the water used in mixing
the bentonite suspension and of the suspension when supplied to the borehole,
shall be not lower than 5 deg. C.

8/11.4 Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special precautions

shall be taken to modify the bentonite suspension or prehydrate the bentonite in
fresh water so as to render it suitable in all respects for the construction of plies.

8/11.5 The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling
shall be proposed by the Contractor for approval prior to the commencement of
the work. The frequency may subsequently be varied as required, depending an
the consistency of the results obtained, subject to approval.

Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable
apparatus. The density of freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured
daily as a check on the quality of suspension being formed. The measuring device
shall be calibrated to read to within 5g/L. Tests to determine density, viscosity,
shear strength and pH value shall be applied to bentonite supplied to the pile bore.
For average soilconditions the results shall generally be within the ranges in Table
1.

The tests shall be carried out until consistent working pattern has been
established, account being taken at the mixing process, any blending of freshly
mixed bentonite suspension and previously used bentonite suspension. When the
results show consistent behavior, the tests for shear strength and pH value may be
discontinued, and tests to determine density and, viscosity shall be carried out as
agreed with the Engineer. In the event of a change in the established working
pattern, tests for shear strength and pH value shall be reintroduced for a period if
required.

TABLE 1
Property to be Range of results at Test methods
measured 20 deg. C

Density Less than 1.10g/ml Mud density balance

30-90s or Marsh cone method

Viscosity
less than 20 cP Fann Viscometer
1.4-1oN/Sq.m
Fann Viscometer
Shear strength or
Fann Viscometer
4-40N/Sq.m
pH indicator paper
pH 9.5 – 12 strips
or electrical pH meter

-9-
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

Where the Fann Viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened by a
number 52 sieve (300 u) prior to testing.

8/12 PLACING CONCRETE

8/12.1 The method of placing and workability of the concrete shall be such that a
continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross-section is formed.

8/12.2 The concrete shall be placed without such interruption as would allow the
previously placed batch to have hardened. The method of placing shall be
approved.

8/12.3 The Contractor shall take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of
concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in temporary casing. No soil liquid or
other foreign matter which would adversely affect the performance of the piles
shall be permitted to contaminate the concrete.

8/12.4 Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile bore shall be in accordance
with the standards shown in table 2.The concrete shall be of the workability
approved when in its finial position and shall remain sufficiently workable for all
pile construction procedures to be safely completed.

TABLE 2

Piling Mix Slump

Minimum mm Range mm Typical conditions of Use
Workability
A 75 75-150 Placed into water free
permanently lined bore of
600mm dia. or over, or where
casing level lies below
temporary casing;
reinforcement widely spaced,
leaving ample room for free
movement of concrete
between bars.
B 100 100 – 200 Where reinforcement is not
spaced widely; where cut-off
level of concrete is within
temporary casing; where pile
bore is water-free and the
diameter is less than 600mm.
C 150 150 or more Where concrete is to be
placed by tremie under water
or drilling mud or by
pumping.

- 10 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/12.5 Internal Vibrators shall not be used to compact concrete.

8/12.6 Approved measures shall be taken to ensure that the structural strength of
concrete placed in all piles is not impaired through grout loss, segregation or
bleeding. Concrete shall be directed vertically into the centre of each vertical pile
so that grout is not lost from the initial discharge.

8/12.7 Before placing concrete, measures shall be taken to ensure that there is to
accumulation of silt or other material at the base of the baring, and the Contractor
shall ensure that heavily contaminated bentonite suspension, which could impair
the free flow of concrete from the temie pipe, has not accumulated in the bottom
of the hole.

8/12.8 Concrete to be places under water or drilling fluid shall be placed by tremie and
shall not into the water or drilling fluid. Pumping of concrete may be approved
where appropriate.

8/12.9 A sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring
using an approved sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension
exceeds 1.20 the placing of concrete shall not proceed. In this event the
Contractor shall modify or replace the bentonite as approved to meet the
Specification.

8/12.10 The concrete shall be a rich coherent mix of high workability and cement in
accordance with Subsection 8/8.5 and mix C. Table 2. The concrete shall be
placed in such a manner that segregation does not occur.

8/12.11 The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The
pipe shall extend to the base of the bore and a sliding plug or barrier shall be
placed in the pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete in
the tremie and the water or drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the
concrete which has previously been placed and shall not be withdrawn from the
concrete until completion of concreting. A sufficient quantity of concrete shall be
maintained within the pipe to ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that from
the water drilling fluid. The internal diameter of the pipe of the tremie shall be
mot less than 150 mm for concrete made with 20mm aggregate. It shall be so
designed that external projections are minimized, allowing the tremie to pass
within reinforcing cages without causing damage. The internal face of the pipe of
the tremie shall be free from projections.

8/12.12 No concrete shall be placed until all driving within a radius of 4.5 meters has been
completed, nor until all the shells for any one cluster have been completely
driven. If this cannot be done, all driving within above limits shall be
discontinued until the concrete in the last pile cast, has been set for at least seven
days.

8/12.13 Unless designated as basement piles all piles shall be placed with their tops at
least 1 metre above pile cut-off level in their respective pile caps. All boreholes

- 11 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

except for basement piles or unless otherwise specified, shall be filled with
concrete to the top of the hole so that the Engineer can be assured that all the
bentonite has been displaced by the concrete.

8/13 EXTRACTION OF CASING

8/13.1 Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains
sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted. During extraction
the motion of the casing shall be maintained in an axial direction relative to the
pile.

8/13.2 When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be
maintained within it to ensure that pressure from external water. Drilling fluid or
soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.

8/13.3 The concrete level within a temporary casing shail be topped up where necessary
during the course of casing extraction in such a way that the case of the casing is
always below the concrete surface under the casting of the pile has been
completed.

8/13.4 Adequate precautions shall be taken an all cases where excess heads of water or
drilling fluid could occur as the casing is withdrawn because of the displacement
of water or fluid by the concrete as it flows into its final position against the walls
of the pile bore. Where two or more discontinuous lengths of casing (double
casing) are used in the construction the proposed method of working shall be
approved by the Engineer.

8/13.5 For piles cast in dry bores using temporary casing and without the use of a
permanent lining, pile heads shall be cast to a level above the specified cut-off so
that, after trimming, a sound concrete connection with the pile can be made. The
casing level shall be within the tolerance above the cut-off level shown in Table 3
but shall not be above the commencing surface level. No pile shall be cast with its
head below standing water level unless approved measures are taken to prevent
inflow of water causing segregation of the concrete as temporary Casing is
extracted; and where applicable, the standing water level for each pile shall be
agreed with the Engineer, and this level is to be treated as the cut-off level for the
purpose of calculating tolerance.

8/13.6 For piles Cast in dry bores within the permanent lining tubes or
permanent casings, or where their cut-off levels are in stable ground
below the base of any casing used, pile heads shall be cast to a level
above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming, a sound concrete
connection with the pile can be made. The Casting level shall be within the
tolerance above the cut-off level shown in Table 4, but shall not be above the
commencing surface level.

8/13.7 For piles cast under water or drilling fluid, the pile heads shall be cast to a level
above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming to remove all debris and

- 12 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

contaminated concrete, a sound concrete connection with the pile can be made.
The casing level shall be within the tolerance above the cut-off level shown in
Table 5, but shall not be above the commencing surface level. Cut-off levels may
be specified below the standing groundwater level, and where this condition
applies the borehole fluid level shall not be reduced below the standing ground
water level until the concrete has set.

8/13.8 Where the cut-off level of piles lies at depths greater than 10m below the
commencing surface, than the tolerances given in Tables 3 - 5 will be varied after
discussion with the Contractor and before commencement of the piling to take
account of the special conditions which apply.

8/13.9 During extraction of temporary casings, where circumstances are such that newly
placed unset concrete is brought into contact with external groundwater,
precautions shall be taken to ensure that the internal concrete pressure at all levels
within the pile exceeds the external ground water pressure.

TABLE 3. Casting tolerance above cut-off level for piles cast in dry bore using temporary
casing and without the use of a permanent lining.

Cut-off distance below

commencing surface Casting tolerance above Cut-off Level m
H.m

0.3+H/12+C/8
0.15 – 10.00 where C=length of temporary casing
below the commencing surface *

* If H greater then C thi tolerance is no longer applicable and the

tolerances in Table 4 will apply.

TABLE 4. Casting tolerance above cut-off level for piles cast in dry bores within permanent
lining tubes or pelmanent casings, or where their cut-off levels are in stable
ground below the base of any casing used.

Cut-off distance below

commencing surface Casting tolerance above Cut-off Level m
H.m

0.15 – 10.00 0.3+H/10

- 13 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

TABLE5. Casting tolerance above Cut-off level for piles cast under water or drilling fluid*.

Cut-off distance below Casting tolerance above

commencing surface H.m Cut-off Level m

1.0+H/12+C/8
0.15 – 10.00 where C=length of
temporary casing below the
commencing surface

 in cases where a pile is cast so that the cut-off is within 2 permanent lining
tube, the appropriate tolerance is giver, by deletion of the casing term C/8 in
the table.

8/14 TEMPORARY BACKFILLING

8/14.1 After each pile has been cast, any empty bore remaining shall be protected and
shall be carefully backfilled as soon as possible with the approved materials.

8/15 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

8/15.1 Disposal of excavated material shall be carried out by the Contractor as necessary
to facilitate the works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

8/16 CUTTING OFF PILE HEADS

8/16.1 When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the Contractor
shall take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any
cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an
approved manner to provide 2 full and sound section at the cut-off level.

8/17 INTEGRITY TESTING OF PILES

8/17.1 Where integrity-testing is called for but the method is not specified, the method to
be adopted shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be one of the following.

i. Sonic Method
ii. Vibration Method
iii. Sonic Logging

8/17.2 Other methods may be adapted to the approval of the Engineer and subject to
satisfactory evidence of performance.

8/17.3 In the cast-in-place concrete piles, integrity tests shall not be carried out until 7
days or more have elapsed since pile-casting unless otherwise approved.

- 14 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/17.4 Where the method of testing requires the positioning of sensing equipment on the
pile head, the head shall be clean, free from water, laitence, loose concrete,
overspilled concrete and blinding concrete, and readily accessible for the purpose
of testing.

8/17.5 The testing shall be carried out by an approved specialist firm.

8/17.6 The interpretation, of tests shall be carried out by competent persons and the full
test results and findings shall normally be given to the engineer within 10 days of
the completion of each phase of testing. Full details of the ground conditions and
construction method shall be made available to the specialist firm when required
in order to facilitate interpretation of the tests.

8/18 LOADING TESTS

8/18.1 Each test pile and working pile to be tested shall be loaded axially to 2.0 times
and 1.5 times the working load respectively as specified on the Drawings. The
tests shall not be commenced until the concrete has reached 90% of its testing
strength and shall be maintained on the pile as aforementioned or for such further
period as the Engineer may direct,

8/18.2 Loading tests shall be carried out at the date ordered on individual piles selected
by the Engineer.

8/18.3 Piles selected by the Engineer shall be tested as follows:

i. The test load shall be applied by a method approved by the Engineer and
shall be measured within an accuracy of 2 percent. Settlements shall be
measured within an accuracy of 0.25mm.
ii. The test load and unloading shall be applied in suitable increments and as
smoothly and expeditiously as possible.
iii. The load after each increment shall be kept constant until the rate of
settlement does not exceed 0.25 mm per hour.
iv. The amount of settlement shall be recorded before the next load
increment.
v. The full test load shall be maintained for 48 hours and the total settlement
recorded. The load after each reduction shall be kept constant until the rate
of recovery does not exceed 0.25 mm per hour.
vi. The load after each reduction shall be kept constant until the rate of
recovery does not exceed 0.25mm per hour.
vii. The amount of recovery shall be recorded before the next load reduction.
viii. The Contractor shall, within 24 hours of the completion of the test, submit
to the Engineer for each pile tested graphs showing.
- Load and settlement plotted above and below a common
base line of time.
- Settlement and recovery plotted vertically against a base
line of time.

- 15 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

ix. The settlement of the pile under the test load and the recovery
of the pile after its subsequent removal shall be within the limits
agreed with the Engineer.

8/18.4 The temporary caps will be cut away and the debris removed by the Contractor.

8/18.5 The Contractor shall keep detailed records in collaboration with the Engineer of
the settlement and recovery of the pile as the increment of load are applied and
removed respectively.

8/18.6 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with two copies of his records of each
test.

8/18.7 If the tests indicate that, in the opinion of the Engineer, the piles are unsatisfactory
for the working load, the Contractor shall at his own expense replace the tested
pile in a suitable position and if necessary support to be given to the structure to
be carried.

8/18.8 The Contractor shall bear the cost of any additional work made necessary as a
result of the unsatisfactory pile or piles. The Contractor shall also satisfy the
Engineer that any piles constructed prior and subsequent to the results of the tests
being known are capable of carrying the specified working load. Further tests
shall be carried out, if required by the engineer, and any piles deemed to be
unsatisfactory by the Engineer shall be replaced or augmented by further piles. No
extra cost will be accepted, or extension of time granted in connection with the
foregoing work.

8/18.9 The Contractor shall state in his proposals the measures he intends to take if the
ultimate load of any pile falls to reach the required value under the loading test,
with regard to lengthening, rendering and retesting of the test pile, and also to the
provision of additional piling to augment or replace the tested pile. No extra cost
will be accepted, or extension of time granted in connection with the foregoing
work.

8/18.10 Test piles (≥ 1000 mm in diameter) are to be instrumental by displacement

transducers at the pile head. Dial gauges shall not be used on these piles without
the prior approval of the engineers. Three displacement transducers shall be fixed,
spaced at 120° part. Piles are also to be instrumented with strain gauges. Each pile
is to be instrumented with minimum four levels of strain gauges. First level shall
be near the pile head and last near the pile toe to assess the load transferred to the
pile toe. Each of these levels shall have four strain gauges spaced at 90° apart.
Strain gauges should be accurate to within a tolerance of 1μ strain.

8/18.11 Dynamic (High strain dynamic) pile load test in compression can be carried out
alternatively if any constrains to static pile load test. Subjected to the Client and the
Engineer's approval. The test shall be conducted based on ASTM D4945 method.
Dynamic pile load test shall be carried out a minimum of 5% of total number of
piles.

- 16 -
SECTION 8 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/19 FAILURE OF PILE

8/19.1 A pile shall be considered to have failed when any of the following conditions
apply:
- On completion of a load test, the residual settlement after rebound
- exceeds 6 mm.
- The test load as specified in the contract shall not have been
achieved.
- The maximum settlement exceeds 10 % of the least lateral
dimension of the pile under ultimate load.

8/20 RECTIFICATION OF FAILURE

8/20.1 In the event of a pile falling a load test, notwithstanding any contrary proposals by
the Contractor the Engineer may insist on the following methods of rectification
(as a minimum).
- When a trial pile - an additional trial pile shall be driven as directed
by the Engineer and tested. If this second trial pile fails, the
Engineer shall order such changes in the design of the pile as he
considers necessary.
- When part of the main piling operation - a further pile in the same
group shall be tested. If this second test pile fails, the Engineer
shall order such changes in the design of the pile/pile group as he
considers necessary.

8/20.2 In the case of the first pile of the main piling operation failing a test load, but
subsequent piles passing the load test, a new pile shall be driven to replace the
defective pile in a position agreed by the Engineer at the expense of the
Contractor.

8/20.3 In the event of additional works being carried out as a result of new piles being
required under this Clause, the cost of this additional work will be at the expense
of the Contractor.

8/21 PROTECTION OF PILING FROM CHEMICAL ATTACK

8/21.1 All Piles shall have protective sleeve for a minimum, depth of 3 m below the cut-
off level of the pile. This sleeve shall be plastic or metal bedded in mastic to form
a fully water-proofed seal to the concrete.

8/22 CLEARANCE OF WORKS

8/22.1 Upon the completion of the works the Contractor shall clear away and remove
from the Site all constructional plant, equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, etc.,
and leave the whole of the Site and Works clean and in perfect condition to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

- 17 -
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

Section 11
Structural Steel Work

-1-
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

SECTION 11 – STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS

SUB – SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

11/1 GENERAL 3

11/2 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PROTECTION 3

AGAINST CORROSION

11/3 AMENDMENTS AND ADDITION TO BS 5400 PART 6 3

-2-
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

SECTION 11 – STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

11/1 GENERAL

Unless otherwise described in the Contract, Materials, workmanship, inspection

and Testing, Handling Transport and Erection, Supply, Measurements and
Weighing of Structural Steelworks shall comply with the Specification Clauses of
BS 5400: Part 6 all as amended by clause 9/3.

11/2 Surface Preparation and protection Against Corrosion

Unless otherwise described in the Contract the Surface preparation and corrosion
protection of structural steelwork shall comply with Section 10 of this
Specification.

11/3 Amendments and additions To BS 5400 Part 6:

Contents

Insert in the contents page: -

“3.4.4 Stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers”
“4.17 Weather resistant steel”.
“5.2.3 Testing of bolts, nuts and washers including
HSFG”. Delete from the contents page:-
7.1 Computed Weights’.
7.2 Weight bridge weight!.

Page l
Table 2A Insert additional table title as follows: “2A Preliminary tightening of
nuts”.

Page 2 3.1.1, line 8

Insert additional sentence as follows:”
“The maximum carbon equivalent value for weather resistant Steel shall be
.54%”.

3.1.1 after para 1

Insert additional paras as follows:”
“In BS 4360, the txt of Clause 10.3 shall be deleted and the following Paragraphs
inserted.

Minor surface defect may be removed by the manufacturer by grinding, provided

that thickness is not
reduced locally.

-3-
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

(i) For a thickness up to and including 25mm, by more than 4% below the
minimum thickness, and

(ii) For a thickness over 25mm, by more than that 4% below the nominal
thickness,

Otherwise allowed by Clauses 19.3, 20.3, 21.4 and 21.5 of BS 4360 and, if
appropriate, BS4: Part 1, BS 4848: Part 4 (with a minimum removal of 3mm) (see
also 10.4)

The procedure for the correction of the defects given in BS4360 Clause 10.4.1
shall not be permitted, and the procedure given in Clause 10.4.2 shall only be
carried out with the prior approval of the Engineer.

The Engineer shall in accordance with Clauses 16 and 24 of BS 4360 be allowed

to visually inspect all items, to select and identify all test samples and to witness
all tests”.

3.1.2., line 9

Insert additional sentence as follows:-

“The maximum carbon equivalent value for weather resistant steel shall be 0.54%

3.1.4.1, line 5, 8 and 14

Delete ‘C of DD2F, insert “LI of BS 5996-

3.1.4.1, line 10
Delete ‘DD21’, insert “BS5996”.

3.1.4.2, line 3
Delete ‘DD21’, insert “BS 5996”.

3.4.1., after Para 1

Insert additional para as follows:-

“The chemical composition of bolts and nuts for weather resistant steel shall
comply with ASTM A3 25 TYPE 3Grade A or equivalent “.

Page 3

3.4.2, after para 1

Insert additional para as follows:-

-4-
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

“The chemical composition of washers for weather resistant steel shall comply
with ASTM A 325 Type 3 Grade A or equivalent”.

3.4.3 After para 1

Insert additional para as follows:-

“The chemical composition of high strength friction grip bolts, nuts and washers
for weather resistant steel shall comply with ASTM A325

Type 3 Grade A or equivalent “.

Insert Additional Clause 3.4.4 as follows:-

3.4.4 Stainless Steel bolts, nuts and washers.

Unless otherwise described in the Contract, Stainless steel bolts and nests shall
comply with steel Grade A4 and property class 80 to BS 6105 and washers to BS
1449: Part 2 in the softened condition, grade 316 S 31. The dimensions and
tolerances shall comply with:

BS 3692 for bolts and nuts.

BS 4320 Form C for flat washers.
BS 3410 for taper washers.”
4.2.1, line 2

Delete’4.4.2’ , insert “4.2.2”

Page 4

4.4.5, after para 1

Insert additional paragraphs and table as follows:- “For weather resistant steel,
load indicating bolt heads or washers shall not be used.

Where bolt and nuts in compliance with BS 4395: Part 1 are tightened by the ‘part
turn’ method, the value of bedding torque for the preliminary tightening shall be
as in table 2A

Where bolt or washers with load indicating devices are described in the Contract
or approved by the Engineer, the range of the final average gap for each batch (as
defined in BS 4395) shall be established by testing a minimum of three bolt, nut
and washers assemblies in a bolt load meter, and agreed by the Engineer. The bolt
shall be tightened in two stages, and in sequence and pattern as agreed with the
Engineer, the range of the average gap after initial tightening shall be as agreed by
the Engineer. On final tightening of each bolt and nut, the average gap under the
bolt head or washer shall be within the agreed final range.”

-5-
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

TABLE 2A: Preliminary Tightening Of Nuts

Nominal dia. bolt Bedding torque±10%
Mm Nm
16 80
20 160
22 210
24 270
27 340
30 460

Table 2, column 3, line 1

After ‘BS4064: Part’, insert “Sub clause 2 to 5”

4.4.6 Para 1
Delete the second sentence (Lines 3 – 5)
4.7.1 Para 2, line 4
Delete Clause 23 of BS 5135 1974
Insert “BS 5135”

Page 5
4.7.1, after Para 6
Insert additional paragraphs as follows:-

“Unless otherwise described in the Contract, all butt weld shall be complete
penetration welds made between prepared fusions faces.

In the fabrication of built-up assemblies, all butt welds in each component part
shall be completed, whenever possible, before final assembly.

Temporary welded attachments shall not be used on otherwise un welded

members, unless agreed by the Engineer.

For weather resistant steels electrodes of matching chemical composition to the

parent metal shall be used for butt welds and for the capping runs of multi-run
fillet welds except that, where agreed by the Engineer, basic covered hydrogen
controlled electrodes without weather resisting properties may be used for butt
weds in material 12mm thick or less”

4.7.2, after Para 2

Insert additional paragraphs as follows:-

“Unless otherwise described in the Contract, all butt welds shall be complete
penetration welds made between prepared fusion faces.

-6-
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

In the fabrication of built-up assemblies, all butts welds in each components part
shall be completed, whenever possible, before the final assembly.

Temporary welded attachments not be used on otherwise un welded members,

unless agreed by the Engineer.

4.7.3, after Para 3

Insert additional paragraphs as follows:-

“for welding trials, where galvanizing or other metal coating of the material is to
be applied to a part to a part which is to be subsequently welded in the shop or on
site, the same coating shall be applied to the sample material the procedure trials
are made.

For flame cutting, trials on materials 20mm thick shall be deemed to cover all

Material up to including 20mm thick; trials on material 40mm thick shall be

deemed to cover all material over 20mm thick up to and including 40mm thick:
material over 40mm thick shall be tested for every thickness increment of 10mm”.

4.16, line 3
First sentence, after ‘BS 4360’ insert the following additional wording:-

“as amended by clause 3.1.1”.

Insert additional clause 4.17 as follows:-

4.17 Weather resistant steel.

The top surfaces of all butt welds on bottom flanges of beams shall be ground
flush.

All surfaces shall be maintained free from concrete, mortar, asphalt, paint, oil,
grease and any other debris or contaminants, and where specified, shall be blast
cleaned to assist the formation of a uniform coating. The quality of surface finish
shall be clean steel 2nd quality medium profile in compliance with Clause 10/7.

Faying surfaces of high strength friction grip joints shall be blast cleaned to clean
steel quality medium profile in compliance with Clause 10/7 and so maintained
until assembly.

Concrete piers, abutments and other specified areas shall be protected against rust
staining during construction”.
Page 6
5.2.2, line 2
Delete ‘DD21’, insert ‘BS 5996”

-7-
SECTION 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

Insert additional clause 5.2.3 as follows “5.2.3 Testing of bolts, nuts and washers
including HSFG

The frequency of sampling and testing of high strength friction grip bolts, nuts
and washers shall be in compliance with the appropriate part of BS 4395.

The frequency of sampling and testing of structural steel and stainless steel, bolts,
nuts and washers shall be as defined in BS 4395: Part”.
Page 7
5.5.2. Para 3, line 3
Delete ‘box girder’, insert box girder”.
5.5.2, after Para 3
Insert additional Para as follows:-

“Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, weld defect acceptance levels shall be
in compliance with table 5 of BS 4870: Part 1”

Page 9

6.3.1

Delete txt of clause and insert the following:-

“Appropriate allowances shall be made for deformation due to permanent loads

and the process and sequence of fabrication, eriction and construction, so that the
completed structure conforms to the lines and levels described in the contract”.

7.1
Delete clause

7.2

Delete clause.

Page 15

Table 5, column 3, member Component 4.

Delete ‘G=O’, insert “G=D”.

-8-
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Section12
Protection of Steel Work
Against Corrosion

1
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

SECTION 12 – PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

12/1 General 1

12/2 Surface Preparation – General requirements 1

12/3 Surface Preparation – Materials and Methods 2

12/4 Procedures for treatment at joints 6

12/5 Procedures for treatment at areas of mechanical 10

Drainage or Other surface defects

12/6 Procedures for treatment of local Failure in

Protective coatings 11

12/7 Workmanship standards for the surface Preparation of

Steel by Blast Cleaning, Abrading, Grinding and Cleaning. 12

12/8 Workmanship Standards for the surface Preparation of coated

Steelwork by Blast Cleaning, Abrading, Grinding and Cleaning 14

12/9 Paints and Similar Protective Coatings 15

12/10 Testing of Paints 16

12/11 Metal Coatings 17

12/12 Testing of Metal Spray Coatings 18

12/13 Storage Requirements and Keeping Periods for Paints 19

12/14 Application of Paint 20

12/15 Storage and Transport of Steel and Fabricated Steelwork 23

12/16 Surfaces in Contract with Concrete 23

12/17 Requirements for Approval 24

12/18 Access and Lighting 24

12/19 Anti-slip Surface Dressing 24

2
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

SECTION 12 – PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/1 General

12/1.1 Surface Preparation and protection against corrosion of steelwork

shall be carried out in compliance with the following Clauses and the appropriate
painting schedules.

12/2 Surface Preparation-General Requirements

Shop and Works

12/2.1 Before Blast cleaning or abrading steel surfaces or before over coating painted or
galvanized surfaces, contamination by oil or grease shall be removed by wet
cleaning the affected surfaces as described in Clause 12/3.9. Solvents shall not be
used unless otherwise described in the Contract.

12/2.2 Clean water which does not leave harmful residues on the surface shall be used
for cleaning and rinsing.

12/2.3 Weld spatter shall be removed from accessible areas which are to be galvanized
or protected by metal spray or paint. Firmly adhering weld spatter in the heat
affected zone shall be removed before blast cleaning.

12/2.4 After dry surface preparation of internal surfaces and before any wet cleaning all
dust and debris shall be removed from accessible areas by sweeping and vacuum
cleaning.

12/2.5 Immediately before application of each coat of paint, the Contractor shall ensure
that the surfaces:

(i) Meet the standard of preparation described in the Contract

(ii) Are free from harmful residues, including dust, grit and paint degradation
products
(iii) Are free from detrimental contamination
(iv) Are free from moisture detrimental to the coating to be applied.

12/2.6 Joints, plies and fasteners shall be sealed in accordance with Clauses 12/4.27 and
12/4.28.

12/2.7 Coats of paints shall be free from embedded metallic or other foreign particles
including metallic dust. Deposits of adherent matter on metallic coatings or
painted surfaces shall be cleaned off immediately they occur. Coatings damage in
the process shall be restored.

12/2.8 Unless otherwise described in the Contract, the final shop coats on external
surfaces shall be wet cleaned on site.

3
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/3 Surface Preparation – Materials and Methods Dry Blast Cleaning in Shop

12/3.1 Unless otherwise described in the Contract chilled cast iron grit abrasive
complying with BS 2451 or steel of not less than 40 Hardness Rockwell C and
complying with the size requirements of BS 2451 shall be used.

Abrasive grades shall not exceed the following:

Profile: (see CI, 12/7.1) Fine Medium Coarse
Chilled cast iron grit G 12 G17 G34
Steel shot S 170 S 340 S3 90

12/3.2 Particle size of any abrasive in plant or equipment shall not exceed the maximum
for the relevant grade as specified above.

12/3.3 Before the start of blast cleaning and during blast cleaning the Contractor shall
ensure that the abrasive is free from matter which could leave detrimental
contamination, as defined in clause 12/7.7 on the surfaces to be treated.

Abrading in the Shops or on Site

12/3.4 Any encrusted foreign matter or paint which may be difficult to remove by
abrading alone shall with the Engineers approval be dislodged by scraping, aided
by hand or power wire brushing. This work shall be completed before abrading
the areas so affected.

12/3.5 Abrading shall be carried out using abrasive paper or other material or flexible
abrasive disc mounted on a power driven flexible pad, or a power driven arbor or
spindle-mounted flexible abrasive flap wheel. Abrading tools may be used to
remove weld spatter. Subject to the Engineer’s approval, wet abrading may be
employed for the preparation of finishes over sound undercoats, over unsound
systems over galvanizing, or galvanizing.

12/3.6 All equipment including tools, abrasive sheets, abrasive discs and abrasive wheels
shall be of a type, capacity and in a condition, approved by the Engineer. The
speed of revolution shall be as approved by the Engineer.

12/3.7 A burnished appearance cause by polishing in of paint, rust or dirt will not be
acceptable.

12/3.8 Areas of previously corroded steel ro unsound metal coatings, except galvanizing,
which have been prepared by abrading down to bright steel or bright metal
coating, and blast cleaned where appropriate, shall be protected by the primer and
next two coats of paint before any cleaning down or preparation of adjacent
surfaces.

4
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Wet Cleaning in the Shops or on Site

12/3.9 Wet cleaning shall be carried out by scrubbing with stiff-bristled brush using
water and a cleaning agent. Immediately after cleaning, the surfaces shall be
thoroughly rinsed.

Dry Cleaning in the Shops or on Site

12/3.10 Surface shall be cleaned by scrubbing with a dry stiff-bristled brush.

Dry Blast Cleaning on Site

12/3.11 Only abrasive materials described in the Contract shall be used. In the case of
metallic abrasives sub-clauses 1,2 and 3 of this Clause shall be complied with.
The |contractor shall ensure that the grade and particle shape of non metallic
abrasives are adequate for the purpose intended including sub-clause 3 above.
Non-metallic abrasives shall not be recycled.

Wet Blast cleaning on Site

12/3.12 Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer a low pressure air/ water/ abrasive
system shall be used. The air/ water pressure at the nozzle shall not exceed
14.0kg/cm² and shall be fully adjustable below this level. The system shall
incorporate a mechanical metering device remote controlled by the operator from
the nozzle to enable him to regulate from zero to maximum the quantity of non-
metallic abrasive being fed into the air/water mixture. During abrasive cleaning,
the air, water and abrasive shall be thoroughly mixed and this mixture shall be
projected on to the surface to be cleaned through a single bore nozzle or tube. The
use of an inhibitor during wet blast cleaning or washing is not permitted.

12/3.13 Within 60 minutes of wet blast cleaning, the whole of the cleaned surface shall be
thoroughly washed using the blast cleaning equipment with air and water. Any
further deposits of abrasive on already rinsed surfaces shall be removed in a
similar manner also within 60 minutes of being deposited. AH accumulated
deposits of abrasive and debris on other parts of the structure shall be removed by
the method before the end of the working day. After washing, the surfaces shall
be free from all particles of dust and debris. Test for freedom from detrimental
contamination shall be made after the washing.

Combined Wet/Dry Blast Cleaning on Site

12/3.14 Wet blast cleaning using the low pressure air/water abrasive system in compliance
with sub-clause 12 and 13 of this clause shall be followed, at an interval approved
by the Engineer, by dry blast cleaning in compliance with sub-clause 11 of this
clause of all the previously wet blast cleaned areas.

12/3.15 The specified standard of surface preparation shall have been achieved in full
initially by wet blast cleaning and washing, before any later dry blast cleaning of
the same areas to remove flush rusting or to restore the required standard of
surface preparation.

5
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Other Requirements
12/3.16 When surface preparation is to be carried out by dry blast cleaning and, on
adjacent surfaces, by wet cleaning and or abrading, then unless otherwise agreed
or required by the Engineer, the wet cleaning and any abrading shall be carried
out first.

When combined wet/dry blast cleaning has been specified instead of dry blast
cleaning only. The above sequence may be reversed. On completion of the wet
blast cleaning part of the process, the areas to be abraded shall be cleaned in
compliance with sub-clause 9 of this clause except that for rinsing, the wet blast
cleaning part of the process, and dry abrading shall be carried out after any wet
abrading required and final rinsing. Any prepared dry metal surface shall be
protected from the effects of any further wet method of surface preparation by the
application of the next two coats of paint including stripe coats.

Grinding after Surface Preparation in the shops or on Site

12/3.17 Grinding wheels and discs shall be of the size, shape and grade of coarseness
appropriate to the particular operation. The speed of revolution shall be as
approved by the Engineer.

12/4 Procedures for Treatment at Joints

Fasteners, Joint Material and Parent Material in Joints, Before Assembly or

Welding, In the shops or on Site.

Fasteners, Including Bolts, Nuts and Washers

12/4.1 Surfaces of uncoated fasteners shall be free from all but traces of oil or grease
before assembly.

12/4.2 Unless otherwise described in the contract threaded fasteners at joints in

galvanized steelwork or in galvanized steelwork which is to be painted, shall be
galvanized.

12/4.3 Metal coatings on surfaces or fasteners which are to be painted shall be:
(i) Free from all traces of or grease and then washed with a mordant solution
or
(ii) Treated at the same time as the parent material where fasteners are already
assembled in compliance with sub-Clause 24 of this clause.

Fasteners excluding those in (ii)above shall be pressure rinsed with water and
allowed to dry before assembly or packing for delivery at least one hour and more
than four hours after satisfactory application of a mordant solution.

12/4.4 Fasteners which have become difficult to tighten because of corrosion shall be
replaced or treated as instructed by the Engineer

6
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Joint Material and Parent Material in Joints

12/4.5 The standard of initial blast cleaning of joint material and parent material in joints
shall be at least equal to that for the parent material. Before a joint is made on site,
contact surfaces shall be restored to clean steel, 2nd Quality or to sound coating.

At Joints made with HSFG Bolts 10/4.6

12/4.6 In steelwork painted only overall:

The blast primer applied to the parent material shall be taken 10mm to 15mm
inside the perimeter of the joints. The outer surfaces and edges of site joint
material may, at the opinion of the Contractor, also be given a coat of the blast
primer.

12/4.7 In steelwork metal sprayed at joints only and painted overall

Unless otherwise described in the Contract, the metal spray shall be applied to the
contact surfaces of the joints and to the outer surfaces and edges of joint material.
The metal spray on the contact surfaces of the parent material shall be taken
10mm outside the perimeter of the joints. The blast primer applied to the parent
material shall be taken 10mm to 15mm inside the perimeter of the joints. The
metal spray on the outer surfaces and edges of site joint material shall be given a
coat of sealer.

12/4.8 In steelwork metal sprayed overall and sealed only or painted overall:

Unless otherwise described in the Contract, the metal spray shall be applied to the
contact surfaces of the joints and to the outer surfaces and edges of joint material.
The sealer applied to the parent material shall be taken 10mm to 15mm inside the
perimeter of the joints. The metal spray on outer surfaces and edges of site joint
material shall also be given a coat of sealer.

12/4.9 In steelworks galvanized only or galvanized and painted overall:

All material at joints shall be galvanized when a mordant solution and a first
undercoat are applied before a joint is made they shall be taken 10mm to 15mm
inside the perimeter of the joint, these coats shall also be applied to edges and
outer surfaces of the joint material.

12/4.10 The thickness of a protective paint coat applied to the outer surfaces of joint
material prior to assembly of any HSFG bolted joint shall not exceed 20mm dry
film thickness (dft).

At Non-Friction-Bolted Joints

7
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/4.11 At shop joints in all steelwork other than in galvanized steelwork the blast primer
alone or metal spray plus sealer shall be applied initially to parent and joint
material. Immediately before assembly of a joint which is to be painted the first
undercoat shall be applied to the contact surfaces and the joint made while the
paint is wet.

12/412 At site joints in all steelwork other than in galvanized steelwork unless otherwise
described in the Contract, all surfaces except those of fasteners, shall receive in
the shop protective system which is applied to the parent material.

12.4/13 At shop and site joints in galvanized steelwork mordant solution and shop coats
may be applied to the joint material before or after shop joints are made. When
galvanized steelwork is painted on site mordant solution and paint shall be applied
to joint material after the joint has been made.

At Welded Joints

12/4.14 At shop and site joints in all steelwork surfaces to be welded shall be restored to
clean steel, 2nd Quality or to bright steel and shall be free of any protective or
other coating immediately prior to welding.

Paint Material, Shop Treatment Adjacent to Joints which are to be Assembles or

Welded Later on Site.

At HSFG Bolted Joints

12/4.15 The paint coats with the exception of the primer or first coat of paint shall be
stepped back at 30mm intervals commencing 10mm from the perimeter of the
joints.

At Non-Friction-Bolted Joints

12/4.16 Unless otherwise described in the Contract, shop paint coats are not required to be
stepped back.

At Welded Joints

12/4.17 Metal spray coating shall be kept clear of the weld by a distance of at least 15
times the thickness of the steel in the area to be welded, with a maximum of
300mm from the joint. The restricted area shall be masked during metal spraying.
Galvanizing shall be removed 5mm back from the edges of weld areas. Paint
coats shall be stepped back at 30mm intervals commencing at least 100mm from
the joint, or from the edge of the metal spray starting with the 2nd coat of paint

8
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

At Completed Joints

12/4.18 within 14 days, or such lesser time as directed by the Engineer, of a completed
joint having been passed by the Engineer, exposed surfaces of parent and joint
material shall be prepared in compliance with sub-Clause 19 to 23 of this Clause
and fasteners in compliance with sub-Clause 24 to 26 of this Clause.

At Bolted Joints

12/4.19 In steelwork painted only overall, blast cleaned only or primed surfaces shall be
prepared by dry blast cleaning or as otherwise agreed by the Engineer to restore or
provide the standard of surface preparation, for shop or site work as appropriate,
described in the Contract.

12/4.20 In steelwork metal sprayed at joints only, and painted overall, primed or sealed
metal sprayed coatings shall be prepared by dry blast cleaning or as otherwise
agreed by the Engineer to restore the surfaces to the standard described in the
Contract.

12/4.21 In steelwork metal sprayed overall, and sealed only or painted overall, metal spray
coatings shall be prepared as described in sub-Clause 20 of this Clause.

12/4.22 In steelwork galvanized only galvanized and painted overall the surfaces shall be
free from contamination detrimental to pain coats by wet cleaning.

At Welded Joints

12/4.23 In all steelwork, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, welds shall be prepared
by the methods and to the standards described in the Contract for shop ort sire
works as appropriate. Surfaces of areas adjacent to the weld shall be similarly
prepared.

Surface of Fasteners

12/4.24 Uncoated and temporarily coated fasteners shall be free from all but traces of oil
and grease and blast cleaned to clean steel, 2nd Quality, medium profile, before
painting.

12/4.25 Metal coated fasteners have been treated with mordant solution before assembly
shall be dry cleaned after final surface preparation of the joint and then painted.

12/4.26 Fasteners which are to be metal sprayed after assembly shall be blast cleaned to
clean steel, 1st Quality, medium profile, with chilled cast iron grit.

9
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Sealing at Joints or Plies

12/4.27 Bolted joints or built up sections shall be free from any water which has
penetrated the plies.

When drying out has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer or when
surfaces are dry after surface preparation, fine gaps around the perimeter of joints
or along plies shall be sealed by successive application of undercoat paint. AH
wider gaps shall be sealed with a proprietary sealant compatible with the primer
or undercoats and approved by the Engineer.

Sealing of gaps at Nibs of Load Indicating Fasters or Washers

12/4.28 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer these gaps shall be sealed by brush
application of primer and successive undercoats, of the types on adjacent areas.

12/5 Procedures for Treatment at Areas of Mechanical Damage or Other Surface

Defects.

12/5.1 Score marks and indentations in the surface of a steel substrate or of a metal
coating shall be treated by abrading or grinding to bright steel or bright metal
coating, to produce a surface without sharp edges or abrupt change in contour.
Damage to unprepared surfaces shall be treated before blast cleaning. Unless
otherwise required by the Engineer, a blast cleaning profile shall be restored on
areas to be metal sprayed but not necessarily areas to be painted only. Other
surface defects in the steel substrate, including fissures caused by the removal of
‘hackles’ or inclusions described in Clause 12/7.3, shall be similarly treated
subject to the approval of the Engineer.

12/5.2 In the case of damage to pain coatings only, surface preparation shall be by
abrading or other method agreed with the Engineer. The paint coatings shall then
be restored.

12/5.3 Single pack blast primers may be omitted when an oleo-resinous system is being
restored over a steel substrate.

12/5.4 When an area of metal spray is to be restored after surface preparation by

abrading or grinding, any affected metal spray or exposed steel substrate shall be
dry blast cleaned immediately before further application of metal spray.

12/5.5 In the shops, a damaged metal spray coating, together with any damaged sealer or
paint coats, shall be restored.

12/5.6 On site, with the exception of small areas permitted under sub-Clause 7 of this
Clause, a damaged metal spray coating, together with any damaged sealer or paint
coats shall be restored but with a minimum thickness of 150urn of metal spray.

10
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/5.7 On site, small areas of isolated damage, as agreed with the Engineer, in as metal
spray coating plus paint system, need not be restored; after surface preparation in
compliance with sub-Clause 1 of this clause, the metal spray shall be replaced by
100mm of the first undercoats, omitting the sealer. Adjacent paint coats,
excluding the sealer shall then be restored over the repaired area.

12/5.8 In the shops, in the case of galvanizing only, small isolated areas of in to 40mm²
may, after surface preparation, be repaired with low melting point zinc alloy.
Isolated areas of damage larger than 40mm² in galvanizing which is to be painted
later or which has already been painted may be repaired with low melting point
zinc alloy after surface preparation. Alternatively the whole of the affected area
including exposed steel substrate shall, after surface preparation, be given a coat
of mordant solution which, when wet cleaned in accordance with Clause 10/3.9
and finally dry, shall be over coated with two coats of MIO Epoxy Primer,
medium gray, 2 pack, to a total minimum dft (mdft) of 150urn. The mordant
solution and Epoxy paint shall not be applied over existing paints.

All repair work shall only be undertaken when agreed by the Engineer and shall
be to his approval, otherwise the component shall be regalvanised.

12/5.9 On site, galvanized components found to have minor damage, as agreed with the
Engineer, may be repaired as described in sub-clause 8 of this Clause, otherwise
the components shall regalvanised.

12/5.10 In all cases where paint coats only are to be restored, or metal spray coals
replaced or restored, or galvanizing is to be replaced by paint, the edges of paint
coatings or metal coating adjacent to the affected area shall be beveled back into
sound paint or metal coating. This work shall be carried out before any final blast
cleaning described in sub-Clause 4 of this Clause.

12/5.11 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, mordant solution applied outside the
agreed areas shall be removed immediately by wet cleaning.

12/5.12 In the shops exposure and over coating times shall not exceed those specified in
Clauses.

On site, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, over coating shall be carted
immediately after surface preparation of the affected area and continued as soon
as each coat is dry enough for over coating.

12/6 Procedures for Treatment of Local Failure in Protective Coatings

12/6.1 In the shops failed paint coatings and failed metal spray coatings shall be restored.
Abrading down to sound paint only is permissible. If a metal spray coating is
damaged or reduced to less than 80% of the specified minimum thickness during
abrading, it shall be restored.

11
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/6.2 On site failed paint coatings and metal spray coatings shall be restored except that
abrading down to sound paint or to bright steel and blast cleaning to clean steel,
2nd quality are permissible methods of surface preparation when restoring paint
systems over steel substrate.

12/6.3 In the shops, and on site unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, galvanized
components showing signs of failure of the coating shall be regalvanised. On site,
in exceptional circumstances agreed by the Engineer, defective galvanizing may
be replaced by sealed aluminum metal spray.

12/6.4 In the shops and on site. Failed paint coatings over galvanizing shall be restored.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, surface preparation shall be by
abrading. Areas of sound galvanizing exposed through a paint system shall be
abraded only as necessary to ensure satisfactory application of mordant solution
and paint. If the galvanizing is damaged or reduced to less than 80% of the
specified minimum thickness during abrading, the component shall be
regalvanised.

12/6.5 In all cases of local failure, the extent of the failure and the required surface
preparation shall be agreed with the Engineer. Restoration of protective coatings
shall not be started until the standard of surface preparation, including the
cleanliness of the surface, has been passes as satisfactory by the Engineer.

12/6.6 Clause 12/5.3, 4, 10, 11 & 12 shall be complied with.

12/7 Workmanship Standards for the Surface Preparation of Steel by Blast

Cleaning, Abrading, Grinding and Cleaning

12/7.1 The surface profile to be achieved by blast cleaning, either Tine “Medium” or
“Coarse”, as described in the Contract, shall be within the limits set by the
Surface Profile Comparator for the Assessment of Abrasive blast Cleaned
Surfaces, conforming to International Standard 8503 Part 1.

12/7.2. Blast cleaned surfaces shall be virtually free from sharp spikes of parent metal
defined as ‘rogue peaks’ formed by the impact of abrasive particles and which
project above the blast cleaning profile. Any “rogue peaks’ which in the opinion
of the Engineer would be detrimental to the protective system shall be removed.

12/7.3 “Hackles” and inclusions caused by the rolling process, visible after blast
cleaning, which in the opinion of the Engineer would be detrimental to the
protective system, shall be removed. Affected surfaces shall be prepared by
grinding or abrading to bright steel in compliance with Clause 10/5.1 where
appropriate. Sharp edges shall be rounded. If metal spray is to be applied the
surfaces shall then be blast cleaned.

12
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/7.4 Steel surfaces to be prepared by any of the methods described in the Contract
shall be such that after surface preparation the surfaces shall be free from
detrimental contamination.

10/7.5 Surface preparation by blast cleaning shall be to one or more of the following
standards of visual cleanliness:

(i) ‘Clean steel’ 1st Quality Appearance:

There shall be a blast cleaning pattern overall. The surface profile shall be free
from mill scale, rust and foreign matter when viewed through an X10 illuminated
magnifying glass of a type approved by the Engineer.

(ii) ‘Clean steel’ 2nd Quality

Appearance:

There shall be a blast cleaning pattern overall. The surface profile shall be free
from mill scale, rust and foreign matter when viewed by normal vision.

(iii) ‘Bare Steel’ (blast cleaned or abraded)

Appearance:

The surface shall be free from all rust scale, loose rust and loose mill scale.

12/7.6 After surface preparation by blast cleaning to 1st or 2nd Quality the surface profile
shall be virtually free from embedded abrasive particles when viewed through an
X10 illuminated magnifying glass of a type approved by the Engineer. Surfaces
assessed as unsatisfactory in this respect by the Engineer shall be blast cleaned
again with fresh abrasive. Other abrasive complying with the specification may be
used.

12/7.7 ‘Harmful residues’ or ‘detrimental contamination’

Surfaces shall be deemed to be free from ‘harmful residues’ or ‘detrimental

contamination’ after surfaces preparation when, in the opinion of the Engineer,
any such remaining matter will not reduce the required durability of the specified
protective system.

12/7.8 Bright steel

Surfaces free from defects or prepared to this standard by grinding or abrading
shall have an overall bright appearance.

13
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/8 Workmanship Standards for the Surfac Preparation of Coated Steelwork by

Blast Cleaning, Abrading, Grinding and Cleaning

12/8.1 Before over coating, surfaces shall be free from:

(i) Any visible gloss which may, in the opinion of the Engineer, prevent
adequate adhesion of the next coat.

(ii) Any unsound paint down to sound paint.

(iii) Any unsound paint down to clean steel

(iv) Any unsound paint down to bright steel.

(v) Any unsound paint down to sound metal coaling

(vi) Any unsound paint down to bright metal coating

(vii) Any unsound metal coaling down to sound metal coating

(viii) Any unsound metal coaling down to bright metal coating

(ix) Any unsound metal coating down to clean steel

(x) Any unsound metal coating down to bright steel

(xi) Detrimental contamination

12/8.2 Definition of terms used in describing the above standards of workmanship are as
follows:

(i) “clean steel” as in Clause 12/7.5

(ii) “Bright steel” as in Clause 12/7.8

(iii) “free from detrimental contamination” as in Clause 12/7.7

(iv) Bright metal coating resulting from abrading: The surfaces shall be free
from all corrosion products and of bright appearance overall

(v) “unsound metal coating”, a metal coating showing signs of disruption,

inadequate adhesion or penetration by rust or other corrosion products.

14
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

(vi) “Sound metal coating”, a metal coating which complies with Clause
12/11.2 including such a metal coating which has been blast cleaned but
which has a reduced thickness in accordance with Clause 12/6.1

(vii) “Unsound paint”, paint showing signs of disruption, rusting through,

having inadequate adhesion of covering rust scale, loose rust, loose mill
scale or other detrimental products.

(viii) “Sound paint”, paint which is sound down to a metal substrate.

12/8.3 Definitions of terms used in Clause 12/4, 12/5 and 12/6 are as follows:

(i) “restored” coatings. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, when

paint or similar coatings or metal spray coating are to be restored, the
standard of surface preparation and coating material shall comply with the
original standard. The thickness of any underplaying metal spray or paints
coating which may have been reduced in thickness during surface
preparation shall be brought up to specification.

(ii) “restored” surface preparation. Unless otherwise described in the contract

the original standard shall be obtained. When further metal spray coating
is to be applied, the surface of the existing metal spray coating shall be
restored by dry blast cleaning with metallic grit abrasive to sound metal
coatings.

(iii) “local failure”. An isolated breakdown of a protective coating or system

due to extraneous causes excluding mechanical damage.

12/8.4 Permitted residual metal sprayed aluminum and zinc:

When “clean steel” is exposed through a metal spray coating during remedial
surface preparation, remnants of sound aluminum metal spray coaling may,
subject to the agreement of the engineer, be retained in a blast cleaning profile;
also, subject to the agreement of the engineer, traces of zinc metal may remain
occluded within the surface of a blast cleaning profile after removal of a zinc
metal spray coating.

12/9. Paint and Similar Protective Coating

12/9.1 The team paint in this Specification shall be deemed to refer also to similar
protective coatings including specialist coatings such as grease paints.

15
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/9.2 All paint proposed shall be supported by technical data including, but not
limited to the following:

(i) material type and constituents

(ii) recommended application methods and conditions
(iii) % solids by volume
(iv) Recommended thickness and application rates
(v) Drying and over coating times
(vi) Pot life
(vii) Health and safety precautions
(viii) Evidence of previous use in similar environment

12/9.3 All paints shall be supplied in sealed containers of not more than 5 liters capacity
and these shall be used in order of delivery. Each container shall be clearly
marked on the side to show the mane of the manufacturer registered description of
the material (including purpose, e.g whether primer, undercoat or finish), color,
paint manufacturer’s reference number, batch number and date of manufacture.

12/9.4 The contractor shall ensure that the properties of the paints he has selected are
suitable for the conditions in the shops and on site, including temperature and
humidity, and that he is able to apply the paints satisfactorily to all parts of the
structure in these conditions.

12/9.5 Unless otherwise described in the Contract all paints forming any one protective
system or overlapping systems, shall be obtained from the same manufacturer, as
named in the proposed system submitted by the Contractor. Unless the source of
supply is rejected by the Engineer it shall not be changed once the proposed
system has been submitted for approval.

12/10 Testing of Paints

Provision of Samples

The contractor shall supply 500ml samples, for application control purposes.

The Contractor shall supply 500ml samples of paints for application control
purposes samples when instructed by the Engineer, and only under his
supervision. The samples shall be taken from painter’s kettles or from nozzles of
airless spray guns directly into clean, new 500mm tins which shall be filled and
then sealed and handed to the Engineer. On return of the samples to the
Contractor, the Contractor shall dispatch them immediately to the testing
authority in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions.

16
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/11 Metal Coating

12/11.1 Galvanized Coatings

Galvanized coatings shall, unless otherwise described in the Contract, comply

with BS 729: “Hot-dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles” and with
the following:

(i) Inhibited hydrochloric acid with a strength not exceeding 14% and
within a temperature range of 15° to 25° or inhibited sulphuric acid
with a strength not exceeding 14% and within a temperature range
of 60° C to 80° shall be used for pickling.
(ii) Components shall not be immersed in the pickling acid longer than
is necessary for cleaning the surfaces prior to galvanizing.
(iii) The surfaces of components to be galvanized shall be dried before
immersion in the molten zinc.
(iv) When an aqueous flux is to be used all traces of acid shall be
washed off immediately after pickling.
(v) Galvanized coatings shall be virtually free from imperfections,
including porosity, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(vi) Detrimental surface contamination of galvanized coating which are
to be painted shall be removed by wet cleaning in compliance with
Clause 12/3.9. Te surface shall not receive chromate passivation
treatment.
(vii) Vent holes drilled in hollow section prior to galvanizing shall be
plugged to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

12/11.2 Sprayed Metal Coatings

Sprayed metal coatings shall, unless otherwise in the Contract, comply with
BS2569: Part 1 Sprayed Metal Coating (protection of iron and steel by aluminum
and zinc against atmosphere corrosion) and with the following:

(i) Aluminum coating shall be material GIB with composition in accordance with
BS 1475 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for general engineering
purposes wire, and zinc coating shall be material Zn 3 with composition in
accordance with BS 8436 Ingot zinc
(ii) The thickness of either coating shall be not less than 100mm
(iii) The strength of adhesion of metal spray coatings shall not be less than the
following:

Aluminum 50 kgf/cm2
Zinc 80 kgf/cm2

17
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

(iv) Metal spray coatings shall be applied continuously over each 0.5m2 per gun or
the area of the component whichever is the lesser until; the specified thickness
has been achieved
(v) The procedure for applying metal spray is separate layers described in the
NOTE in Clause 4 and Clause 7 of BS2569 is no permitted.
(vi) All surfaces to be metal spayed, including that of the reference panel
described in Appendix A to BS 2569, shall be blast cleaned with chilled cast
iron grit, and the standard shall be clean steel, 1st Quality medium profile.

12/11.3 Sheradised Coatings

Sheradised coatings shall, unless otherwise described in the contract, comply with
Class 1 table 1 of BS 4921. Sherardised coating on iron and steel articles

12/11.4 Electroplated Coatings

Electroplated coatings shall, unless otherwise described in the contract, comply

with BS3382: Part 1 and 2 “Electroplated Coatings on Threaded Components
(Cadmium on steel Components and Zinc on steel Components), additionally BS
3382 shall be deemed to cover the electroplating of components up to and
including 36mm in diameter,. Electroplated surfaces which are to be painted shall
not receive chromate passivation treatment.

Other Requirements

12/11.5 Before proceeding with the galvanizing process the Contractor shall provide full
details of the surface preparation and coating methods he proposed to adopt and
shall not put the work in hand until the Engineer’s permission has been received.
Such permission shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the
Contract. When instructed by the engineer, similar requirements shall apply in the
case of other metal coating.

12/11.6 When a metal coating is required on only part of a component it shall be a

applied before the rest of the component receives paint.

12/12 Testing of Metal Spray Coatings

12/12.1 At the start of the Contract, and later at intervals specified by the Engineer (with
the exception of coating on steel in bearings, curved surfaces, repairs to
mechanical damage, local failure of metal spray at site joints or areas restored on
site) the Contractor shall demonstrate by means of a pull off test, of a type
approved by Engineer, that the minimum adhesion required is being attained. In
the excepted areas the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
engineer that the adhesion is satisfactory when tested in accordance with BS
2569. Areas affected by the test shall be restored.

18
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/12.2 The pull of test shall be carried out initially on panels 150mm x 150mm x 6mm
which are of the same grade of steel as the parent material and which before glass
cleaning had the same surface condition. The panels shall be blast cleaned and
metal sprayed together with the parent material to the same standard and using the
same techniques.

12/12.3 The Contractor shall make arrangements for the Engineer to witness the
preparation of the panels and all testing. When instructed by the engineer, the
Contractor shall carry out further tests on similarly prepared and metal – sprayed
panels.

12/12.4 If the adhesion requirement on any test panel is not met, the Contractor shall carry
out a farther test on the parent material adjacent to the panel position. In the case
of adhesion failure on the steelwork itself by other method of test, the metal spray
shall be restored top an extent specified by the Engineer and the tests repeated.

12/12.5 If more than two local areas of faulty adhesion occur on any one component, he
whole of the metal spray coating on the component shall be considered as having
failed, and it shall be restored. Clause 12/8.4 is not applicable in the case of
adhesion failure

12/13 Storage Requirements and Keeping Periods for Paints

12/13.1 On delivery to the shop or site, paint shall be unloaded directly into one or more
secure paints stores. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, paint shall be
stored within 100 meters of the painting area. Insulation and means of ventilating
shall be provided as necessary to maintain the temperature of paint stores between
5o C and 27o C.
If at any time or place paint in tins, painters kettles or airless spray containers is
allowed to reach temperature outside the 5% and 27o limits, the paint shall be
discarded and not used for the works. The Contractor shall also implement any
conditional storage restriction recommended by the paint manufacturer.

12/13.2 Unless accepted in sub – Clause 4 of this Clause, paint which has not been used
within the shelf life recommended by the manufacturer or within 12 months of the
date of manufacture, whichever is the lesser, shall be discarded and not used in
the work.

12/13.3 Chemically or moisture cured paints shall not be used after the expiry of the pot
life stipulated by the paint manufacturer. They shall be discarded on expiry of the
pot life or at the end of each working day / night whichever is the less. All other
paints in opened tins or open containers including painters’ kettles shall be
returned to store and keep in sealed containers which not more than 10% ullage.

12/13.4 Exceptionally, and subject to agreement by the Engineer, Oleo-resinous

undercoats and finishes, all Chlorinated Rubber paints (including Chlorinated
Rubber / Alkyd paints), Acrylated Rubber paints and components of Polyamide

19
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

cured Epoxy paints may have their keeping period extended to 24 months
provided that the Contractor returns the paints to the paint manufacturer and
reconstitute the paints as necessary so that such paints are equal in all respect to
the paints described in the Contract.

12/13.5 Each tin of reconstituted paint returned to the shops or sites by the manufacturer
shall have an additional label affixed extended keeping period to (date) the
previous date marking shall remain and not be obscured. Agreement by the
Engineer to extended keeping periods for certain paints does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities as described in the Clause 12/9. Testing in
compliance with Clause 12/10 shall apply to reconstituted paints.

12/14 Application of Paint

12/14.1 Paint shall be supplied from the Contractor’s paint store to the painter ready for
application, the adjustment of formulation permitted being as described in the
Clause 1915.4. Any additional of solvent shall be made in the store in the
presence of the Engineer, and shall not exceed 5% by volume on the paint.

12/14.2 Paint shall be applied only in the surface which have been prepared and cleaned
as described in this Section.

12/14.3 Unless otherwise described in the Contract a coat of paint in the system shall be
applied by one of the following method:

(i) brush
(ii) airless spray
(iii) air pressure spray

12/14.4 Paint shall not be applied under the following conditions:

i) when the relative humidity rises above 70% in an enclosed workshop or

90% on site
ii) during rain, fog, mist or in a dust laden atmosphere
iii) when the amount of moisture likely to be deposited on the surface by
condensation or rain before or after painting, may have a harmful effect on
the paint
iv) when wind borne dust may have harmful effect on the paint.

12/14.5 All shop painting of steel work shall be carried out in the fully enclosed workshop
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.

12/14.6 Before starting the application of coats and as required by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with details of the overall wet film thickness
for each coat he proposes to apply. He shall also provide information as to the
total amount of paint he expects to use for each coat of each system during any
contract for which [procedure trials are required. The calculation of the amount of

20
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

the amount of paint to be used shall be based on the volume solids phis an
allowance for waste.

12/14.7 The following requirements on paint film thickness shall apply:

i) We film thickness gauges shall be used where practicable to check

that the wet film thickness is not less than:

Min dry film thickness (mdffl x 100)

Volume solids %
ii) During the application of paint system the Contactor shall ensure
that the progressive total thickness of the applied coats will allow
the specified minimum total of dft of the system to be attained
without exceeding, overall, the proposed wet film thickness
referred to in sub – Clause 6 of this Clause by more than 20%.
iii) In no case shall the total dry film thickness or paint system or the
mdft of the last undercoat and finish be less than that specified.
iv) The local dry film thickness for any primer shall not exceed the
specified mdft by more than 30% and for other paints by more
than75%.

12/14.8 Each coat of paint of specified system shall satisfactory adhesion as

demonstrated by an adhesion test approved by the Engineer.

12/14.9 Each coat of paint of a specified system at whatever thickness applied

shall be virtually free from surface defects, particularly cratering, pin
holding, blistering, reveling, sagging, bittiness, dry spray and crissing. The
finished system shall have an even and uniform appearance areas shall be
from the same batch.

12/14.10 When required by the engineer, the degree of gloss of the finishing coat
shall be agreed before application. A painted tinplate reference panel,
150mm x 100mm, shall be provided by the Contractor for this purpose.

12/14.11 All successive coats in a system including the stripe coats shall be in
contrasting colors to aid identification.

12/14.12 Two pack chemically cured paints shall not be applied when the steel or
ambient temperatures are below those advised by the paint manufacturer,
nor shall such paints be applied when the temearture is likely to fall below
the advised temperatures during the curing period.

Stripe Coats

12/14.13 Unless otherwise described in the Contract two stripe coats shall be applied to all
welds and all fasteners including washers and to external comers except those of
RHS sections. The first stripe coat, in second undercoat paint shall be applied

21
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

over the primer, sealer or mordant solution the second stripe coat, in second and
third undercoat paint, shall be applied before the last undercoat of the complete
system in the shop or on site as appropriate. The first stripe coat on fasteners
treated with mordant solution shall apply by brush; other stripe coat may be
applied by brush or airless spray appropriate

12/14.14 Square solid infill bars shall, after the second undercoat has been applied, be
given an extra coat of first undercoat in lieu of stripe coats.

12/14.15 clean steel prepared by dry blast cleaning or bright steel prepared by abrading or
by grinding shall be primed within 4 hours.

12/4.16 clean steel prepared by wet blast cleaning only, shall be primed within 4 hours of
being dry enough for painting.

12/4.17 Clean steel prepared by combined wet/dry blast cleaning shall be primed within 4
hours of dry blast cleaning.

12/4.18 Steel or steelwork blast primed at the mills or in the shops shall be overcoated
within 18 weeks. The primed surfaces shall only be exposed outside for a
maximum of 2 weeks of the 8-week period. Prepared surfaces affected by
detrimental contamination or corrosion which in the opinion of the Engineer will
reduce the required durability of the protective system shall be restored when
directed by the Engineer.

12/4.19 Steelwork which has been metal sprayed in the shops shall be primed or sealed
within 4 hours. The next coat shall be applied within 72 hours.

12/14.20 Prepared steel surfaces, unsealed metal spray coatings and undercoats, excepting
final shop undercoat, shall not be exposed outside the shops.

12/14.21 All surfaces treated with mordant solution, except those of fasteners which have
been treated in compliance with Clause 12/4.3, shall, after initial drying, be wet
cleaned in compliance with Clause 12/3.9 and allowed to dry before overcoating.
The first coat of paint shall be applied within 48 hours of surfaces treated with
mordant solution being first dry enough for painting over.

12/14.22 When galvanized steel is to be protected by a paint system, mordant solution shall
be applied not later than 14 days after delivery to site unless otherwise agreed by
the Engineer.

12/14.23 A first shop undercoat shall be overcoated within 72 hours. Unless otherwise
agreed with the Engineer, further shop coats shall be applies within 72 hour
interval per coat.

22
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/14.24 the application of sealant in gaps in compliance with Clause 12/4.27, may be
carried out either before or after application, as appropriate, of the first coat of
paint to be applied to the completed joints or assembled plies.

12/14.25 Prepared steel surfaces and sprayed metal coatings which have been restored, also
paint coats and galvanizing which have been prepared after surface damage or
deterioration shall be overcoated with the primer or first undercoat as appropriate
before the surfaces have been affected by moisture and in any case within 4 hours.

12/14.26 Steel surfaces and metal spray coatings which have been primed or sealed on site
shall have the following coat applied with 7 days the next coat shall be applied
within a further 14 days, or such lesser time recommended by the paint
manufacturer.

12/15 Storage and Transport of Steel and Fabricated Steelwork

12/15.1 Steel awaiting fabrication for the Contract and over coated steelwork shall be
adequately protected from contaminants liable heavy rusting and possibly pitting
of the surface.

12/15.2 Steelwork shall not be loaded for transport until the paint system is sufficiently
hard for handling.

12/15.3 During storage, steelwork shall be kept clear of loose ground and shall be laid out
or stacked so as to prevent water or dirt accumulating on or against any of the
surfaces. Suitable packing shall be placed between layers of stacked steelwork.
When cover is provided it shall be ventilated sufficiently to keep condensation to
a minimum.

12/15.4 Components weighing less than one ton shall be kept in a storage area away from
then-erection point in order to minimize damage to protective coatings.

12/15.5 Lengths of parapet and the like shall be supported on timber, and precautions
taken to prevent damage to their protective coatings and ingress of water. They
shall only be positioned adjacent to their erection point immediately before
erection. If the planned erection time is delayed by more than 72 hours the
components shall be returned to the storage area.

12/15.6 If in the opinion of the Engineer, damage to coating is excessive, or may be

difficult to deal with satisfactorily after erection, the Contractor shall restore the
coatings before erection.

12/16 Surfaces in Contact with Concrete

12/16.1 Unless otherwise described in the Contract, metal spray coatings and all shop
paint coats shall be returned 25mm into the concrete steelwork contact area.

23
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

12/16.2 Where aluminum metal spray, which has been sealed only, is returned into the
contact area, it shall be given a 40mm mdft coat of Zinc Phosphate Epoxy Ester
Undercoat, not later than 48 hours before concreting; application of the paint
outside the contact area shall be prevented, by masking if necessary.

12/16.3 Galvanised coatings shall be applied overall. Unless otherwise described in the
Contract concrete may come into direct contact with the galvanized surfaces.

12/17 Requirements for Approval

12/17.1 As soon as the Contract has been let the Contractor shall submit for approval full
details of the paint system to be used, including documentation of usage in similar
environmental conditions to those in Dubai.

12/18 Access and Lighting

12/18.1 Without prejudice to Clause 37 of the Conditions of Contract, access for

inspection by the Engineer shall be provided and erected by the Contractor. The
access shall be agreed with the Engineer as being adequate in all respects for
inspection purposes.

12/18.2 Manual surface preparation and coaling application work shall not be carried out
when natural light intensity at the workface is less than 500 lux. When the light
intensity falls below this level the Contractor shall install and maintain temporary
lighting which shall provide a minimum light intensity of 500 lux over at least
1.0m² at the workface during the work and also for inspection when required by
the Engineer.

12/19 Anti-slip Surface Dressing

12/19.1 Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, these areas shall be finished with a
3.5mm thick, heavy duty flow applied tar modified epoxy resin based lightweight,
anti-slip surface dressing with the following physical properties:

Property Test Method Result

Specify Gravity - 1.6
Solvent Content - 0%
Cure time (chemical - 48% hours at 20° C
and vehicular)
Spread of flame BS 476 Class 0
Aggregate
Properties BS 812 8.2
Crushing Value BS 812 8
Impact Value BS 812 1.9
Abrasion Value MOHS 9
Hardness 0.4 to 1.0mm
Hardness Partitical Size

24
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

The tar modified epoxy resin slurry shall be a multi-component system, surface
dressed with an inert, hard-wearing aggregate. The system shall provide a
lightweight, flexible, spark resistant, chemical and abrasion resistant surface
treatment.

The surface dressing system shall have proven successful track record of us in
similar applications under local ambient conditions.

12/19.2 The tar modified epoxy resin surface dressing shall be applied to the prepared and
primed susbstrate to a thickness of no less than 3.5mm. A wet film gauge shall be
used to ensure that the minimum thickness is achieved. The surface dressing
aggregate shall be immediately applied by blinding the slurry coat to saturations.

All surface preparation, priming, mixing and application of the surface dressing
system shall be carried out in s strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions by a specialized applicator approved and recommended by the system
manufacturer.

Requirement s for Paint System

Schedule 12/2/1 Pedestrian Fencing (steel alternative)

Environment: (ref. BS5493) Exterior exposed non-polluted coastal

Surfaces to be treated: Fencing
Surfaces preparation: Pickling for galvanizing
Standard:
Coat Shop/site Description mdft(µm)
Metal coating Galvanising 100
1st coat Shop Mordant solution N/A
nd
2 coat Shop Epoxy MIO (see note 1) 125
3rd coat
4th coat
Minimum total dry film thickness (excluding metal coating) 125
Finish colour Black

Note: Epoxy micaceous iron ore, with a minimum of 80% MIO pigment as a percentage of the
overall pigment weight.

25
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Requirement s for Paint System

Schedule 12/2/1
Bridge steelwork
Area A: Exterior main surfaces
except area

Environment: (ref. BS5493) Exterior exposed non-polluted coastal

Surfaces to be treated: Exterior main surfaces except area C
Surfaces preparation: Blast clean with chilled cast iron grit
Standard: Clean steel, 1st Quality, Medium profile
Coat Shop/site Description mdft(µm)
Metal coating - None -
1st coat Shop Epoxy zinc phosphate primer 125
(see note 1)
2nd coat Shop Epoxy MIO (see note 2) 125
3rd coat Site Acrylic urethane gloss 50
4th coat
Minimum total dry film thickness (excluding metal coating) 300
Finish colour To be advised

Note 1: Primer to contain a minimum of 40% Zinc Phosphate pigment

as a percentage of the overall pigment weight.

Note 2: Epoxy micaceous iron ore, with a minimum of 80% MIO

pigment as a percentage of the overall pigment weight.

26
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Requirement s for Paint System

Schedule 12/2/2
Bridge steelwork
Area B: Interior main surfaces

Environment: (ref. Exterior sheltered non-polluted coastal

BS5493)
Surfaces to be treated: Interior main surfaces
Surfaces preparation: Blast clean with chilled cast iron grit
Standard: Clean steel, 1st Quality, Medium profile
Coat Shop/site Description mdft(µm)
Metal coating - None -
1st coat Shop Epoxy zinc phosphate primer (see 125
note 1)
2nd coat Shop Epoxy MIO (see note 2) 125
3rd coat
4th coat
Minimum total dry film thickness (excluding metal coating) 250
Finish colour None Specified

Note 1: Primer to contain a minimum of 40% Zinc Phosphate pigment

as a percentage of the overall pigment weight.

Note 2: Epoxy micaceous iron ore, with a minimum of 80% MIO

pigment as a percentage of the overall pigment weight.

27
SECTION 12 PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION

Schedule 12/1/3
Bridge steelwork
Area C: Paved area of deck and
treads and risers of stairs

Environment: (ref. BS5493) Exterior sheltered non-polluted coastal

Surfaces to be treated: Paved areas
Surfaces preparation: Blast clean with chilled cast iron grit
Standard: Clean steel, 1st Quality, Medium profile
Coat Shop/site Description mdft(µm)
Metal coating - None -
st
1 coat Shop Epoxy zinc phosphate primer (see note 1) 125
2nd coat Shop Surfaces dressing to clause 12/19
rd
3 coat
4th coat
Minimum total dry film thickness (excluding metal coating)
Finish colour Black

Note 1: Primer to contain a minimum of 40% Zinc Phosphate pigment

as a percentage of the overall pigment weight.

28
 Section 13
Deck and Staircase
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

SECTION 13 - DECK AND STAIRCASE

SUB-
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

13/1.0 GENERAL 2

13/2.0 CABLES 6

13/3.0 EARTHING 16

13/4.0 CABLE AND EARTH TESTING AFTER

INSTALLATION 17

13/5.0 DOCUMENTS AND MATERIALS TO BE

SUBMITTED WITH THE OFFER 19

13/6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LED LIGHTING 21

13/7.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD 29

13/8.0 CONTROL SYSTEM 33

13/9.0 METEOROLOGICAL AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS

PREVAILING IN DUBAI 34

-1-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

SECTION 13 – DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/1.1 GENERAL

A. All Distribution boards, cables, nuts and washers, brackets, luminaires,

and appurtenances will be supplied, delivered, installed tested and
commissioned by the contractor, or as itemized in the Bill of
Quantities.
B. The Contractor shall liaise with all sections/departments, Roads
landscaping, street lighting, maintenance department and co-ordinate
his activities where appropriate with the Dubai Electricity and Water
Authority.
C. All stainless-steel components shall be of Grade AISI 316L.
D. Materials and equipment shall be suitable for use under the prevailing
conditions of a harsh marine environment.
E. In calculating the rating of electrical cables, switchgear and all items of
equipment, the necessary derating factors shall be determined and
applied to ensure that the equipment will operate satisfactorily and
meet its design criteria.
F. The electrical supply system shall be 400/230 volts, 3-phase, 4 wire, 50
Hz. Power supply shall be arranged by the contractor including all
necessary cables from DEWA substation to the MDB as per DEWA
Regulation.
All works shall be as per clause B above.
G. Layouts of conduits to be detailed by the consultant. The contractor
shall confirm the detail and submit to the Engineer/RTA for approval
before commencing construction of any structure.
H. The Consultant shall ensure that the project and product’s
specifications are in fully compliance without any deviation from this
specifications prior to forwarding to RTA for approval. Any deviation
should be brought to the notice of RTA, however this doesn’t relieve
the contractor from his liabilities for any deviation from the specs.

13/1.2 Submittals and Samples

13/1.2.1 General

A. Refer also to the requirements of RTA’s Section 1 General.

B. Refer also to the particular requirements of each Chapter.

13/1.2.2 Method Statement

A. Provide a method statement that explains the strategy for the planning
and Execution of the Works on receipt of approved material submittal
stage.
B. The method statement shall include, but not be limited to, programs,
proposals for temporary work and installation sequence plans.
C. Method statements shall include work certified reports verifying
compliance with specified materials and systems.

-2-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

D. All temporary materials on traffic diversions must be complying with

RTA specifications and should be submitted to the Engineer/RTA for
approval. Installations must be done as permanent installation
requirements.

13/1.3 Warranties

13/1.3.1 General

A. Materials, products and systems shall be provided with warranties in

accordance with the RTA requirements, and/or as mentioned under
each material section.
B. Draft copies of manufacturer’s warranty to be attached to all material
submittals that shall document all activities.
C. Warranties and guarantees shall be specific to the performance of the
systems, materials and components and for the period specified.
D. Where manufacturer’s standard warranties, guarantees or both expire
before duration required by the RTA, obtain and pay for extensions.
E. Warranties shall include both material and labor costs.
F. The RTA reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to
products with warranties not in conflict with RTA requirements
G. Warranties shall be provided from both manufacture and local supplier.

13/1.4 Inspections, Testing and Commissioning

13/1.4.1 General

A. Testing shall be undertaken by qualified testing agents/independent

third-party laboratory in accordance with ASTM E329, ASTM E543,
ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077 and ASTM C1093.
B. Inspection agencies shall be in accordance with ASTM D3740 and
ASTM E329.
C. Laboratories and Agents shall be authorized/ accredited to run each
specific test by the international/Regional Governing Authority.
D. Testing equipment shall be calibrated at intervals in accordance with
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

13/1.4.2 Electrical Tests

A. Electrical tests and electrical components shall generally be tested in

accordance with the requirements of BS 7671. Refer to each Chapter
for the particular test requirements of each electrical system.

13/1.4.3 Factory Inspections

A. As required, the Engineer and three engineers from Employer side

shall attend the manufacturer's premises at the Contractor’s cost to
inspect equipment prior to shipment, this should cover the travel,

-3-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

accommodation, and living expenses. Notify the Engineer at least 60

days prior to shipment so that inspection can be arranged.
B. Factory inspections shall be made only after the Manufacturer has
performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests and operations on the
complete system.
C. Approval of equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to
ship the equipment to site and does not constitute final acceptance by
the Engineer/Employer.
D. The items to be inspected shall include all items for the installation
including but not limited to the following equipment:

i. Luminaires
ii. LV and Control Cables
iii. Lighting Cabinets /Distribution Boards
iv. The Scope of Inspection Shall Include Type Tests, Document
Control & Routine Test And Inspections.

13/1.4.4 Factory Tests

A. Prepare test schedules and test record forms for the tests requested in
each chapter, and as specified in the project specification as applicable
to the works. Schedules shall be issued for review prior to the
execution of testing.
B. Provide RTA with details of each testing agent for acceptance.
C. Test procedure and all related forms/documents should be submitted
for approval by the Engineer/Employer.

13/1.4.5 Site Tests

A. Prepare test schedules, test record forms and submit to RTA for
acceptance prior to testing. the test should follow the engineer
test/inspection with result confirming material compliance to
specifications and contract requirements.
B. Provide calibrated test apparatus, including calibration certificates and
conduct the following tests as a minimum:

i. Polarity.
ii. Load balancing of phases.
iii. Verification of phase, neutral and earth identifications.
iv. Verification of labeling, and wire and terminal numbering.
v. Continuity.
vi. Insulation (phase-phase; phase-neutral; phase-earth; neutral-
earth with a 1000V insulation tester).
vii. Insulation shall exceed 10 mega ohm per metre cable length.
viii. Effectiveness of individual electrodes.
ix. Checking of voltages at transformer, switchboards and each
luminaire, and setting of appropriate tappings on control gear.
x. Lighting Measurements.

-4-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

C. Submit the Completed Test Records to The Engineer/RTA For

Acceptance.

13/1.4.6 Commissioning

A. The contractor shall develop and perform commissioning procedures

subject to the Engineer/RTA’s acceptance, including, but not limited
to, the following:

i. Execute/ implement necessary test based on specified/ approved

test plan.
ii. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports in
collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment
installation and recommend corrective action.
iii. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with
construction schedule.
iv. Document all completed works for submission to the RTA.
v. Propose commissioning process test procedures for the
Engineer/RTA’s acceptance.
vi. Complete commissioning process test procedures.

B. Reference Standards

i. The installation shall comply with:

a. Regulation for electrical installation (Seventeen Edition) the

Institution of Engineering Technology (IET).

b. Relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice, or equivalent as

approved by the Engineer.
c. Standards and Recommendations issued by the International
Electro-Technical Committee (IEC).
d. United Arab Emirates Electricity and Water Regulations and Guide
and the general requirements of the local supply authority.
e. Chartered Institution of Building Services Guide Book (IES) for
external lighting.
f. CEI
g. VDE.
h. International Commission of Illumination (CIE) recommendations
on lighting.

ii. All Standards and Codes referred to shall be the latest issue at the time
of invitation to Tender.

C. Main Power Supply

i. The Contractor shall contact the supply authority at an early stage

of the Contract to make all the necessary arrangements for the
power supply.
ii. The supply for the luminaires will be from new distribution boards
located as shown on the Drawings. Power supply to DBs shall be
-5-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

from new, or existing DEWA power supply source as shown on the

drawings.
iii. The supply will be 3 phase and neutral 400/230V, 50 Hz.

D. Check of Equipment Supplied by Others

i. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment supplied by others

forming part of his installation shall be new and in accordance with the
standards required. Any defect must be reported in writing within
seven days of receipt of the equipment in order to allow changes to be
made or replacements instructed by the Engineer.

E. The Following Are The General Conditions Under Which The Cable
Shall Operate:-

i. Electrical energy is generated as three phase alternating current at a

frequency of 50 + 5%.
ii. The working voltage on any of the systems does not normally exceed
fluctuations +10% above the nominal voltage.
iii. The material covered by this specification shall be suitable for
operation during the varying atmospheric and climatic outdoor
conditions in Dubai.

13/2.0 CABLES

13/2.1 Distribution Cables

A. All cables accessories and materials shall be of the best quality and
most suitable for local climatic conditions and shall be such that the
cable shall withstand without damage, any conditions arising from
short circuits, switching operations and sudden variations of load and
voltage as may be met under normal working conditions. The cable
shall be suitable to be buried directly in saline soil. The Contractor
shall submit for approval a sample cut-piece of each type of cable and
one metre length of any cable size with the required embossment. The
materials are to be accompanied by manufacturers’ installation
instructions. This specification provides for manufacturing, testing of
four core power stranded copper conductor XLPE/SWA/MDPE cable,
rated service voltage 600/1000 volts.

13/2.1.1 Sub Station to MDB

A. Cables between sub stations and MDBs shall comply with the
following minimum requirements. Project specific requirements shall
be identified and tabulated for each installation condition:
B. Cable Buildup: Cu/XLPE/PVC/ SWA/ MDPE (ST-7).
C. Voltage rating: 600/ 1000 Volts.
D. Core: 4 cores 50 mm2 and above.
E. Insulation type/ thickness: XLPE.

-6-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

i. The insulation thickness and core insulation colour shall be in

accordance with BS 5467.
F. Temperature rating: 90°C.

13/2.1.2 MDB to Distribution Board

A. Cables between MDB and DB shall comply with the following

minimum requirements.
B. Cable Buildup: Cu/XLPE/ PVC/ SWA/ PVC
C. Voltage rating: 600/ 1000 Volts.
D. Core: 4 cores, 10/ 16/ 25/ 35 mm2.
E. Insulation type/ thickness: XLPE.
i. The insulation thickness and core insulation colour shall be in
accordance with BS 5467.
F. Temperature rating: 90°C.

13/2.1.3 DB to luminaires

A. Cables between luminaire and DB shall comply with the following

minimum requirements. Project specific requirements shall be
identified and tabulated for each installation condition:
B. Cable Buildup: Heat resistant rubber flexible cable rated for 85°C min,
confirming to harmonized code H07 RHF 300/500V grade
C. Voltage rating: 300/ 500 Volts.
D. Core: 3 cores 2.5 and 4 mm2
i. Flexible rubber cable.
E. Insulation type/ thickness: PVC type TM2 complying with the latest
edition of BS 6500:2000, and the Thickness of sheath should comply
with Table 16 of BS 6500: 2000, and cable identification shall be
according to BS 6500:2000.
F. The insulation thickness and core insulation colour shall be in
accordance with BS EN 50525-2-11.
G. Temperature rating: 85°C.
H. Tests on the complete cable shall be carried out according to the
schedules given under Clause 12, 13 and 14 of BS 6007: 2006. Test
Certificates from independent approved authorities/laboratories shall
be submitted with the offer as evidence.

13/2.1.4 Earthing Cable

Earthing cables shall comply with the following minimum requirements. Project
specific requirements shall be identified and tabulated for each installation condition.

A. Cable Buildup: Cu/ PVC, BASEC and ESMA approved.

B. Voltage rating: 450/ 750 Volts.
C. Core: Single core.
D. Insulation type/ thickness: PVC.
i. The insulation thickness and core insulation colour shall be in
accordance with BS 50525-2-31.
E. Temperature rating: 85°C.

-7-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

F. The earthing cable shall run all the way from the source electrical
control cubicle to the last luminaire on each circuit.

13/2.1.5 Warning Tapes

A. Warning tapes that comply with Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA) regulation 1926.956 shall be buried at suitable
level below finished ground level as indicated on the Design Drawings
and directly above each buried cable run/ cable trench/ duct to identify
buried electrical services underneath.
B. Warning tapes shall also comply with DEWA and other regional
requirements.
C. Warning tape shall be red in colour with black inscription of “RTA
lighting LV” cable along with RTA logo.
D. Tape shall be continuous and a minimum of 250mm in width 100
micron thickness, and the warning text shall not fade.
E. Tape material shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation
when exposed to acids, alkalis and other destructive substances in soil.
F. Tape material shall be suitably durable to become visible during
subsequent manual or mechanical earth work operations.

13/2.16 Cable Oversheath Identification

A. The oversheath of each cable shall be engraved or embossed with two

lines of text, as specified below, to identify the cable; cable marking on
MDPE oversheath shall be embossed. Identification shall be in
accordance with BS 5467.

i. First Line:
a. “ROADS AND TRANSPORT AUTHORITY LIGHTING
600/1000 VOLT”.
ii. Second line
a. The second line legend shall be aligned with the first line
along the circumference.
b. The second line shall include the cable manufacturer, year
of manufacture, country, number of cores x conductor cross
section, type and metering length marked at regular
intervals on the sheath, as per the following example:

1. “CABLE COMPANY 2017 UAE 4 x 50 MM2 CU

3955 M” XLPE/SWA/MDPE.

B. The letters and figures shall be upright block characters.

C. The maximum size of the characters shall be 12mm. The minimum
size shall be 15% of the overall diameter of the cable or 5mm,
whichever is greater.
D. The gap between the end of one legend and the beginning of the next
legend shall not be greater than 150mm.
E. Sequential length marking shall be provided on the oversheath of the
cable every 1m.

-8-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/2.2 Cable Submittal Requirements

13/2.2.1 Material

A. Submit manufacturer's test data confirming that the cables meet the
requirement of the Specification.
B. Submit copy of deck /staircase lighting Shop Drawings/Design and
BOQ.

13/2.2.2 Samples of Material

A. 1000mm length of each proposed cable type that demonstrate:

i. RTA outersheath cable identification requirement.
ii. Minimum of 200mm exposed inner cable core demonstrating
compliance with cable core identification and colour
requirements.
B. 1 No. of each cable gland type.
C. 1 No. of each cable lug type.

13/2.3 Cable Testing and Commissioning

13/2.3.1 General

A. Refer also to Section 7A Chapter 1 General Requirements,

B. Cables shall be tested including, but not limited to the following:
i. Earth test.
ii. Polarity test.
iii. Dielectric test.
iv. Conductor resistance test.
v. Tensile strength and elongation test.
vi. Fire test.
vii. Flame propagation test.
viii. Temperature index test.

13/2.3.2 Continuity Test

A. Test shall be carried out to verify the continuity of each conductor,

including the earth continuity conductor of each circuit

13/2.3.3 Insulation Resistance Test

A. Insulation Resistance (IR) test shall be carried out on each section of

the installed cable, including, but not limited to:

i. Phase to phase insulation resistance.

ii. Phase to neutral insulation resistance.
iii. Phase to earth insulation resistance.
iv. Neutral to earth insulation resistance.

-9-
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

B. The resultant insulation resistance for any of the above test

measurements shall not be less than 10 mega ohm per meter cable
length when measured with 1000 volt.
C. While these tests are carried out, a voltage not less than 2.5 times the
normal voltage of the supply shall be applied for the measurement of
insulation resistance.

13/2.3.4 Construction

A. Conductors
i. The conductors shall be stranded plain annealed copper in
accordance with IEC Publication 228: Conductors of Insulated
Cables or BS EN 60228:05.
ii. The conductors shall comply with the test requirements
mentioned at Clause 9 of BS EN 60228:05 and test certificates
from independent authorities / labs. shall be submitted.

B. Insulation

i. The insulation shall be XLPE complying with BS 5467:2016, BS

7655-1.2006and BS 6899 1991 in addition to IEC Publication
502 :04 Table III.
ii. Test Certificates from independent accredited bodies / authorities
to be submitted prior to delivery to site.
iii. The insulation thickness shall comply with BS 5467:2016 Clause
6, Table 16.
iv. Core insulation colors shall be Red-Yellow-Blue-Black.
v. The insulation shall meet the Test Requirements mentioned in the
following standards:-

(1) Section three of IEC Publication 502:04.

(2) Clause 20 of BS 5467:2016 relating to compatibility.
(3) Clause 5 of BS 6746:2003.
(4) BS EN 60811-1-3:2012
(5) BS 6234:1987
(6) Clause 5, Table 5 of BS 5467:2016 relating to insulation.

C. Bedding

i. The inner sheath shall be black extruded PVC bedding complying

with the requirements of BS 5467:2016 and BS 6746:1990 for
type 9 compound or IEC Publication: 502:04

D. Fillers and Binders

i. Non hygroscopic synthetic fillers to be applied integrally with the

bedding in accordance with BS 5467:2016 Clause 8 and IEC
Publication: 502 to form a compact and circular cable.
ii. The fillers and binders shall comply with the compatibility test
given in Clause 20.1 of BS 5467:2016.

- 10 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

E. Wire Armour

i. The armour shall consist of a single layer galvanised steel round

wires of appropriate size mentioned in Table 16 of BS
5467:2016, and IEC Publication 502. The armour wires must
cover the entire periphery of the inner sheath as per BS
5467:2016.

F. Armour Tests

i. Samples of galvanised steel armour wires shall be tested for

mechanical strength and electrical resistance in accordance with
BS 5467:2016, and BS EN 10257:2011, respectively.
ii. Testing requirements for zinc coatings on steel wire and for
quality requirements shall comply with BS EN 10244:2009. Test
Certificates from independent approved authorities/laboratories
shall be submitted prior to delivery to site.

G. Oversheath

i. The oversheath shall be MDPE (Medium Density Polyethylene)

type TS2 complying with BS 6234:1987.
ii. Thickness of oversheath should comply with BS 5467:2016, table
16 or IEC Publication 502.

H. Testing of Cables

i. Tests on the complete cable shall be carried out according to the

schedules given in Table 5 under Clause 15 of BS 5467:2016.
Test Certificates from independent approved authorities /
laboratories shall be submitted prior to delivery to site.

13/2.4 Earth Cable

A. This specification provides for manufacturing and testing of single

core stranded copper conductor PVC cable (non-armoured). The cable,
in general, shall comply with BS 6004:2012.
B. Construction

i. Conductor
a. The conductors shall be stranded plain annealed copper in accordance
with IEC Publication 228: Conductors of Insulation Cables or BS EN
60228:05.
b. The conductor shall comply with the test requirements mentioned at
Clause 9 of BS EN 60228:05 and test certificates from independent
authorities / laboratories shall be submitted.

ii. Insulation

- 11 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

a. PVC insulation complying with the requirements of BS 6746:1990 for

type 9 compound Radial thickness of insulation and outer diameter
according to table 1 of BS 6004:2012.

b. Compliance to the requirements shall be checked with the appropriate

tests listed in table 8 of BS 6004:2012. Test Certificates from
independent approved bodies/ laboratories shall be submitted prior to
delivery to site.
c. Insulation Colour : Yellow-Green.
C. Cable Identification

i. The oversheath may be provided with a non-erasable print along two

lines with the following legend, complying with BS 5467:2016 or
where PVC oversheath is used, embossing process must be applied.

a. First Line: ROADS AND TRANSPORT AUTHORITY LIGHTING

600/1000 V
1. The letters and figures shall be upright block characters. The
maximum size of the characters shall be 13 mm and the minimum
size 15% of the approximate overall diameter of the cable or 5 mm
whichever is greater. The gap between the end of one legend and
the beginning of the next shall not be greater than 150 mm.

b. Second Line:
1. “XXXX 19XX UAE 4 x XX MM CU 3955 M”

2. This shall be equally spaced with the first line along the
circumference. An identification of the manufacturer, year,
country, number of cores x conductor cross section, type and
metering length shall be marked at regular intervals on the sheath.
This shall not affect the spacing between repetitions of the legend
for the voltage designation.

D. Sealing and Drumming of Cables

i. Before dispatch, the manufacturer shall cap the ends of all cables so as
to form a seal to prevent the ingress of water during transportation.

ii. All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals,
labels or other proof of origin intact. The labels and seals shall be
retained for inspection by the Engineer.

iii. Each drum length of cable shall be allotted a distinctive and separate
reference number. This number shall appear on the Test Sheets
covering the respective length of cable and shall also be clearly marked
on the cable drum. All cables shall be capped on the drum to prevent
the ingress of water.

- 12 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/2.5 Cable Installation

13/2.5.1 General

A. The arrangements of cables and all methods of installation shall be

subject to approved shop drawings by the Engineer/RTA.
B. Cables shall be installed in one length from terminal point to terminal
point. The radius of each bend or change in direction of the route of
any cable shall not be less than the minimum stated in paragraph 59 of
the current issue of DEWA, the IET Regulations, the relevant BS
specifications, or the cable manufacturer's recommendations,
whichever is the greater.
C. Multi-core cables carrying alternating current for three phase working
shall be laid strictly in accordance with the IET Regulations.
D. The Contractor shall lay in the trench along with the power cable a
single core copper earthing cable the earthing cable shall run all the
way from the MDB pillar to the last luminaire on each circuit.

Power Cable Earth Cable

4x10mm2 1x10mm2
4x16mm2 1x16mm2
4x25mm2 1x16mm2
4x35mm2 1x16mm2
4x50mm2 1x25mm2
4x70mm2 1x35mm2
4x95mm2 1x50mm2
4x120mm2 1x70mm2
4x150mm2 1x70mm2
4x240mm2 1x120mm2
4x300mm2 1x150mm2

13/2.5.2 Cables Laid Directly in the Ground

A. The Contractor shall excavate trenches along approved cable routes to

the minimum depths shown on the detailed drawings.
B. All loose rock, stones and other sharp materials shall be removed from
the trench
C. The Contractor shall supply washed sieved sand and cable warning
tapes. He shall supply and lay these materials along the trench route as
specified in the drawings.
D. The Contractor shall lay, level and compact clean sand in the bottom of
the trench to a depth of 75 mm before laying the cables. AFTER laying
the cables he shall then cover them with a further 75 mm of clean sand,
level and compact. The backfilling of the trench, including the laying
of PVC warning tape, shall then be completed in accordance with
Clauses 6/60.2.20.
E. The Contractor shall leave for future use in cable trench loops of one
meter cable at the entry and exit duct of each foundation.

- 13 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/2.5.3 Cables Laid in Ducts

A. Conduits shall be uPVC and comply with BS 4607, be suitable for the
climatic conditions. Conduit joints shall be cemented. During
construction conduits shall be protected to prevent movement, ingress
of moisture and dirt, and damage. Any open ends shall be capped to
keep out dirt and moisture. Conduits shall be installed in straight runs,
level, and parallel or perpendicular to the structure, and to avoid the
spread of fire and ingress of moisture. Conduits shall be installed with
all requisite accessories. Internal burrs shall be removed from the
conduit ends.

B. Draw boxes shall be uPVC (or accepted alternative) with an Ingress

Protection rating of IP67. Draw boxes shall be installed in accessible
locations at least every 50 m and between every two right angle bends.
Gasketted lids shall be provided where exposed to dust or moisture. At
structural expansion joints maintain continuity with flexible conduit
within a larger sleeve. Provide conduit bends without deformation.
Provide draw-wires in conduits for future services and in conduit for
services to be installed by other parties.

C. Where cables cross under roads and paved areas they shall be drawn
into uPVC ducts provided complete with temporary tapering uPVC
end caps of suitable diameter to prevent the ingress of soil into the
ducts.
i. The removal of temporary plugs, rodding and cleaning of the ducts
shall be carried out by the Contractor. The ducts shall be sealed with
foam or other suitable sealing material after the cables have been
drawn through.

13/2.5.4 Cables in Concrete Trenches

A. Cables in concrete trenches shall be installed in a support system

comprising moulded reinforced nylon hooks and clamps attached into
a heavy gauge galvanised steel channel fixed to the walls by stainless
steel Grade AISI 316L cast -in ragbolts or by stainless steel grade AISI
316L threaded studs grouted into percussion-drilled holes with
polyester resin anchor grout

13/2.5.5 Cables in Saddles

A. Where cables are required to be fixed in saddles, PVC sheathed copper

fixing saddles shall be used. Saddles shall be fixed with stainless steel
grade AISI 316L the PVC saddle sheath which would allow galvanic
action between the saddle and its fixing.

B. Runs shall be neat and free from kinks, care being taken in the routing
to avoid risk of damage to or interference with other equipment.

- 14 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/2.5.6 Cables in Trays/Trunking/Conduits

A. The system of wiring shall be as follows:

B. Single core cables installed in high impact, heavy duty conduit or laid
in stainless steel or galvanized sheet steel trunking as appropriate.
Wiring shall not be bunched and tied within trunking.
C. Inside areas with false ceilings the whole of the installation above false
ceiling level shall be in surface mounted GI trunking, surface mounted
GI or UPVC conduits, or cast-in PVC conduits.
D. Trunking shall be used only as the primary means of small wiring
distribution. Individual conduit runs for each circuit emanating from
the distribution board will be permitted. Final circuit management up
to the distribution board shall be by trunking.
E. Sub-distribution multi-core cables run on a system of cable tray and
ladder as appropriate.
F. Multicore cables run on cable tray or ladder fixed to the structure or
hung from the ceiling slab soffit as appropriate.
G. Joints in wiring cables will not be allowed in any part of the system.
H. All wires/cables connection to switches, sockets, circuit breakers etc.
shall be carried out using suitable lugs or cable ends.
I. The number of wires/cables run in conduits/trunkings shall be in
accordance with the IEE regulations.
J. Trunking and Conduit shall be sized in accordance with BS7671, and
main runs shall allow for at least 40% spare installation capacity for
future extensions. All circuits shall be complete with a green/yellow
circuit protective conductor. The minimum size of conduit used shall
be 20mm.
K. Where Conduits must be concealed within the building fabric, they
shall be concealed within block-work walls and concrete slabs as
necessary.
L. Cable trays shall be heavy duty, stainless steel or hot-dipped
galvanized steel, with return edge flange for internal and external
services. They shall be sized by the Contractor in order to give
adequate support for the number of cables to be carried in line with
manufacturers recommendations and shall give sufficient space
between cables to avoid de-rating due to grouping.
M. Contractor to submit cable tray/ladder loading calculations for the
worst cases for approval of Engineer. Sunshade shall be provided for
external applications.
N. Cable gland shrouds shall be manufactured from PCP material. PVC
shrouds will not be accepted. Shrouds shall be provided on all cable
glands.
O. The minimum size of wiring for lighting and small power circuits shall
be 2.5 mm² and 4 mm² respectively.
P. Conductor colour coding shall be as per BS7671 requirements or as per
local authority standards (if different).
Q. Cables and wiring shall be adequately sized by the contractor to
comply with BS7671. Due regard must be taken of voltage drop and
protection considerations and also of de-rating factors associated with
grouping of cables, ambient conditions and methods of installation.

- 15 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

Any cable sizes shown on the tender drawing are indicative and for
tender purposes only, it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to
check and size the cables for acceptance by the Engineer as necessary.
R. Where cable runs, conduit and trunking pass through fire barrier walls
and partitions, they shall be sealed against smoke and fire by a
proprietary material having third party verification of performance.
Cable trunking shall also be sealed inside at the point where it passes
through the barrier with the same material.
S. Adequate allowance for expansion shall be made in all conduits,
trunking and tray-work runs, where they cross building expansion
joints or are subject to wide fluctuations in ambient temperature.

13/2.6 Termination of Cables

A. Any type of cable joints is not allowed.
B. All cables shall be colour-coded in accordance with the IET
Regulations. In the final sub-circuits, cores shall be identified by the
colours red, yellow or blue as appropriate. Tapes and sleeves will not
be permitted.
C. The Contractor shall allow for at least 100 mm of the cable to be cut
off immediately before the termination is made. This requirement shall
apply to all cable ends.
D. All cable ends are to be sealed against the ingress of water, deleterious
matter, etc., in case of cables not sealed 100 mm to be cut off
immediately before the termination is made.

13/3.0 EARTHING

13/3.1 Earthing System

A. Contractor shall install an earthing system to all DBs and MDBs as

shown on the Drawings. The earth installation shall in general be in
accordance with British Code of Practice CP 1013, and in accordance
with the requirement of Dubai Electricity & Water Authority and the
DEWA.
B. Where the requirements of the DEWA and Guide differ from those of
the IET Regulations, the former shall prevail.
C. Electrodes shall consist of 15 mm minimum diameter hard drawn
copper rod driven vertically to a minimum depth of 3.0 m. Rods shall
be complete with hardened steel tip and driving cap. Rods shall be
capable of being extended in lengths, as necessary, by the provision of
permanent screw mechanisms.
D. A PVC coated earth continuity conductor of 70 mm2 cross-section
copper cable shall be inserted between the earthing stud in the pillar or
lighting column and the earth electrode. The connection of the copper
tape cable to the earth electrode shall be made by means of a suitable
copper conductor clamp. After final acceptance tests, the connection
shall be wrapped in petrolatum impregnated tape.

- 16 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

E. The earthing conductors shall have a minimum current carrying

capacity in accordance with CP 1013.
F. Each electrode shall be driven to a depth such that it penetrates the
summer water table by minimum of 2 metres.

13/3.2 Earth Electrode Terminations

A. Every connection of an earthing leads to an earth electrode shall be

made in a pit measuring approximately 300 mm x 300 mm x 200 mm.
The connection shall be soundly made by use of hard soldered joints,
or clamps. All earth electrodes and earthing leads shall be of copper.
B. The contractor shall ensure that throughout the installation all metallic
parts of all equipment, other than current-carrying conductors, are
bonded to form a continuous path by way of connecting the armouring
(or earth conductors) of the local authority's cables at MDBs etc.
C. After installation, the pit shall have a removable cover.

13/4.0 CABLE AND EARTH TESTING AFTER INSTALLATION

A. After cable laying and installation of earthing systems but prior to

energizing of the lighting column the Contractor will perform the
following tests:-

13/4.1 Continuity of Conductors

A. A test shall be made to verify the continuity of each conductor,

including the earth continuity conductor of each circuit.

13/4.2 Insulation Resistance Test

A. This test will be applied to each section of cables and will comprise
of:-
i. Phase to phase insulation resistance.
ii. Phase to neutral insulation resistance.
iii. Phase to earth insulation resistance.
iv. Neutral to earth insulation resistance.
B. The resultant insulation resistance for any of the above measurements
shall not be less than 10 mega ohm per metre cable length and
measured with 1000 volt.
C. For these tests, a voltage not less than 2.5 times the normal voltage of
the supply shall be applied for the measurement of insulation
resistance.

13/4.3 Earth Resistance Test

A. To be performed with specific calibrated earth resistance metre. The

resistance of any point in the earth continuity system of the installation

- 17 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

to the main earth electrode shall not exceed 1 ohm, and the resistance
to earth at this termination shall not exceed 0.5 ohm.
B. Inspection certificates, completed by the Contractor shall be generally
in accordance with IET regulations.
C. Brand type and calibration report of test equipment used for testing the
electrical installation by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
D. These calibration reports are to be submitted to the Roads & Transport
Authority Street Lighting Section and Maintenance Section along with
the test results prior to the commencement of the maintenance period.
E. Owing to the highly corrosive nature of the sub-soil at certain locations
the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority shall be consulted regarding
the metal to be used for the earth termination.
F. Earth and Insulation test to be witnessed by the Engineer/RTA.

Environmental Conditions

A. The used materials shall be manufactured and installed to suit the

following environmental conditions for the Emirate of Dubai:

i. Maximum ambient Temperature: 55°C.

ii. Minimum ambient temperature: 1°C.
iii. Ambient temperature: 50°C.
iv. Incident light intensity (energy: 780m/W/cm2).
v. Light intensity (measured under the sun): 100,000 Lux.
vi. Maximum metal surface temperature: 85°C.
vii. Minimum barometric pressure: 998 mbar.
viii. Maximum barometric pressure: 1030 mbar.
ix. Average barometric pressure: 1015 mbar.
x. Ambient humidity: 100%.
xi. Minimum ambient humidity: 20%.
xii. Maximum wind velocity: 160 km/h.
xiii. Wind gust factor: 1.3.
xiv. Average yearly rainfall: 80 to 150mm.

Corrosion

A. All works shall be classed as being installed in external, directly

exposed environments and use materials that inherently resist corrosion
and salinity or be of material grades and/ or finished to resist corrosion.
B. Protect materials against corrosion due to exposure to seawater, non-
saline water, soil, high humidity, low or high temperatures, chemical
acids and alkalis, abrasion and impact, fungi and bacteria.

Deflections

A. The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is
detrimental to any element of the works.

- 18 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

Movements

A. The works shall resist applied static and dynamic loads likely to be
encountered without causing permanent deformation of components or
the failure of systems, materials or seals and shall transmit such loads
safely to the points of support.

Seismic Performance

A. The works shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions as

determined according to ASCE/ SEI 7 for each installation condition.

Thermal Performance

A. The works shall accommodate local thermal movements exerted due to

climatic conditions

Moisture Resistance
A. The works shall not suffer temporary or permanent deformation nor
any reduction in performance due to changes in the moisture content of
nents, resulting from variations in the moisture content of the air.

Fire Performance

A. Materials shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with

low flame spread characteristics and shall not produce excessive
quantities of smoke or toxic gases under combustion, confirmed by
testing in accordance with the appropriate parts of BS 476, unless
otherwise stated.

13/5.0 DOCUMENTS AND MATERIALS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH

THE OFFER

13/5.1 Documents to be Submitted with the Offer

A. The manufacturer shall supply following technical documentation and

information for each type of luminaires for the approval of the
Engineer. The approval of the Engineer does not absolve the
Contractor of the contractual obligations regarding the performance
and compliance to the specification requirements.
i. Catalogue sheet of the luminaire
ii. Driver Data sheet
iii. LED Chip data sheet
iv. Mounting Instructions
v. LM79
vi. LM80, TM21
vii. IP Test
viii. ROHS Certificate
ix. EMC Test Certificates

- 19 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

x. Safety Test reports

xi. ENEC test certificates
xii. Photobiological Test reports
xiii. SDCM Clarification
xiv. Driver test certificates
xv. Computer calculation printout showing the illumination overall
uniformity Ratio (UO
xvi. Total weight of the luminaire (with lamp and control gear)
xvii. Power factor of one complete luminaire (under normal working
conditions)
xviii. Total electric consumption of the luminaire, including control
gear losses.
xix. Rated lumen output of the lamp under nominal conditions
xx. Luminous flux variation with the main voltage
xxi. Make and type of ballast and capacitors separately with their
electrical characteristics, eg. Impedance, power factor,
Temperature rise ( t), max. temperature (tw) and power losses.
xxii. The contractor shall submit with his tender full details of areas
using the same type of luminaires in the Middle East and Gulf
Area.
xxiii. A computer program according to CIE standard on USB ports
compatible should be supplied and the matrix program for the
offered luminaire.
xxiv. The contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval
dimensional drawings of the control gear arrangements
showing the exact positions of chokes and capacitors within the
lantern.

13/5.2 Materials to be Submitted with the Offer

A. The contractor shall submit along with the offer 5 sets of luminaires of
each type to equip 5 mast for examination and photometrical test on
site.
B. The materials to be accompanied by manufacturer's assembling and
erection instruction.
C. The contractor shall carry out site testing after installation work is
completed for photometric performance in accordance with the
contract specification requirements. All the test shall be carried out in
the presence of the Engineer. The luminance measuring device shall be
provided by the Engineer.
D. The final acceptance of any submitted offer shall be strictly depending
on the photometric and electrical performance test on site.
E. Standards:

i. BS 4533 (superseded by BS EN 60598-1:2015): Luminaires.

General requirements and tests
ii. BS EN 60598 2-3:2015- Luminaires. Particular requirements.
Luminaires for road and street lighting
iii. BS EN 12373-1:2001 (superseded by BS EN ISO 7599):
Anodizing of aluminium and its alloys. General specifications for
anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium
- 20 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

iv. BS 1470 (superseded by BS EN 515/ 485/ 573): Aluminium and

aluminum alloys. Wrought products. Temper designations
v. BS EN 60922:97,IEC 60922:97 (superseded by BS EN 61347:
2015): Lamp control gear. General and safety requirements
vi. BS 6500:2000 (superseded by BS EN 50525:2011): Electric cables.
Low voltage energy cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V (U0/U).
vii. General requirements
viii. BS EN 60598.P1,2: Luminaires. General requirements and tests
ix. IEC 60598 P2,3 :93
x. BS 5489 2013: Code of practice for the design of road lighting.
Lighting of roads and public amenity areas
xi. BS 5225: Part 1 (superseded by BS EN 13032-1:2004): Light and
lighting. Measurement and presentation of photometric data of
lamps and luminaires.
xii. BS 5101 (Part 1) and (Part 2) (superseded by BS EN 60061-1 and
2): Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of
interchangeability and safety. Lamps caps
xiii. BS EN 60068:2014: Environmental testing. General and guidance

13/6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LED LIGHTING

13/6.1 General

A. The Design, Specification, Calculation, Manufacturing, Testing,

Shipment, Installation and Performance of LED lighting system (or
other equally sustainable technology) shall be in accordance with the
applicable requirements of RTA and International electrical and
lighting Standards for electrical distribution works, except as specified
herein.
B. The luminaires designed to operate continuously at the specified
ambient temperature and humidity with special attention given to the
effects of direct sun-exposure during the day. In addition, the
occasional sandstorms and dusty weather in designing the luminaire
body.
C. The manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to this Specification and
the performance of their luminaire under all the required design
conditions.
D. The Engineer shall ensure following during the design: integration,
coordination, functionality and accessibility of these services. It shall
be the Consultant’s/Contractor/supplier responsibilities to bring the
system to the design & operating and maintenance conditions.
E. The luminaires for deck and staircase lighting shall be so chosen to
meet all the technical criteria as outlined in the document.

13/6.2 Applicable Standards & Guidance Documents:

A. The following standards or its equivalent International approved

similar should be followed:

- 21 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

i. IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) -

Lighting Handbook 10th Edition.
ii. CIE (International Commission on Illumination)
iii. IESNA RP-08 (reaffirmed 2005) - Roadway Lighting.
iv. CIE 115 -2010 – Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian
Traffic.
v. IESNA RP-19-01 - Roadway Sign Lighting.
vi. IESNA RP-20-98 - Lighting for Parking FacilitiesCIE 129 –
Guide for Lighting Exterior Work Areas.
vii. IESNA DG-19-08 - Design Guide for Roundabout Lighting.
viii. IESNA TM-16 -05 - Technical Memorandum on Light
Emitting Diode (LED) Sources & Systems.
ix. IESNA DG-4-03 - Design Guide for Roadway Lighting
Maintenance.
x. IESNA RP-16-10 - Nomenclature & Definitions for
Illuminating Engineering.
xi. IES/IESNA LM-79-08 - Approved Method: Electrical and
Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.
xii. IES/IESNA LM-80-08 – Approved Method for Measuring
Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
xiii. IESNA LM-82-12 - Approved method of measuring LPW @
50°C.
xiv. IESNA LM-84-14- Approved method for de-rating values of
LED systems.
xv. IESNA LM-85-14-
xvi. IEC 60529 or EN 60 529 (IP) and EN 50 102 (IK) - Degrees of
Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code for ingress
protection and IK Code for Mechanical Strength)
xvii. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 - American National
Standard for Chromatically of
xviii. Solid State lighting products.
xix. BS EN 62471:2008 or ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3-07 -
Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems.
xx. EN 60598-parts 1, 2-1 & 2-3 (Electrical safety) General and for
Road Lighting Luminaires.
xxi. EN 61547, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 & EN 55015 –
xxii. Electromagnetic Compatibility (Immunity Requirements,
harmonics Requirements, Flicker Requirements & Radiated
and Conducted Emissions respectively)
xxiii. CIE 126-1997 Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow and
IESNA TM-10 Addressing Obtrusive (Urban Sky Glow and
Light Trespass) in conjunction with Urban Lighting.
xxiv. JEDEC - Joint Electron Device Engineering Council.
xxv. ASTM - American Society for Testing of Materials.
xxvi. ASTM B 117-07a - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray
(Fog)
xxvii. Apparatus, 2007 or
xxviii. ISO International Organization for Standardization.

- 22 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

xxix. ISO 9227 - Corrosion tests in artificial atmospheres (Salt spray

tests, 2006)
xxx. IEC 60068- Environmental testing -
xxxi. ANSI C82.77-2002 - Harmonic Emission Limits & IEEE Std
519 1992
a. Harmonic Limits.
xxxii. EN61547 or FCC part 15 Class B ANSI C63-4:2009 UL8750,
UL 1012 AND UL935 CAN/CSA-C22-2 NO.0 CSA-C22-2
No. 250 and/or NO.
xxxiii. 167.1 EN61347-1-2-13 Safety and EN61000-3-2 Surge
Protection subject to: IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002 scenario I
category C-Low minimum 250 strikes REACH complaint.

13/6.3 LED Luminaires Technical Specification ( for Deck and Staircase):

13/6.4 Characteristics of HP LED Chips:

A. The light source shall be LED package chip with single Diode, high
brightness white light emitting Diodes (LEDs) at 4000K/3000K
arranged in arrays to provide the required lighting output. The colour
temperature can vary as per RTA request and project requirement.
B. The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer of LEDs with proven
past performance in accordance with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-
2008 – (American National Standard for Chromaticity of Solid State
Lighting Products) or similar approved International Standard.
C. At least 15 years experiences delivering HP LED chips to outdoor
applications
D. Chips shall only be from Macadam Ellipse max. Steps 5 Bins.
Therefore, 4000K +/- the defined ranges for step five by
ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377- 2009.
E. The CRI ≥70.

13/6.5 LED Chips Technical Requirements:

A. The following requirements / documentation shall provide. (Note:

Issue separate supporting documents if required).

i. Operating temperature rating shall be between – 10°C and

minimum
ii. +105°C at a minimum 90% Relative Humidity (RH). Storage (i.e.
non- operating / daytime) temperature: all LED components shall
be designed to tolerate between – 40°C and minimum +105°C at a
minimum 90% Relative Humidity (RH).
iii. Correlated colour temperature (CCT): 4000K shall be required and
3000K as per RTA request SCDM max. step five Macadam
Ellipse. Colour rendering index (CRI): ≥ 70 (CIE1937)
iv. Manufacturer shall submit reliability reports from third party
laboratory/Lab (Stress test/methodology) indicating that the
manufacturer of the LED (chip, diode or package) has performed
Joint Electron Devices Engineering Council (JEDEC), or
equivalent recognized council.
- 23 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

v. Reliability tests on the LEDs from accredited third party lab to be

provided.
vi. Factory pre-release test reports shall be provided from the LED
manufacturer duly complying with JEDEC JESD22-A108C, or
equivalent, for operating life tests at 105°C ambient temperature
and for humidity and salt atmosphere corrosion tests.
vii. Standards and tests used must be stated.
viii. IESNA LM-80/ CIE TC2-50 test reports run for 3 different temp. at
least for 10000hrs.
ix. IESNA/ANSI TM-21 reported lifetime for 10000hr.

13/6.6 LED Drivers Technical Requirements:

A. The following requirements / documentation shall be provided. (Note:

Issue separate supporting documents if required).

i. Drivers shall be IP 66 encapsulated type.

ii. Drivers shall be 1-10v dimmable and preset programmed for timed
dimming
iii. Case (Tc°C) Temperature rating max. of +80°C and at a minimum
95% Relative Humidity (RH).
iv. Driver shall have some means of built-in overheat thermal
protection in the form of automatic dimming or stepping/holding
down of the driver current where temperature exceeds operational
limits.
v. Thermal cut-off devices which turn the fixture completely off shall
not be accepted.
vi. The Driver and driver output current shall be fully tested and
compatible with the exact LED chips/engine of the luminaire.
vii. All information provided and the cost analysis/payback
calculations shall be calculated with the exact drive current
including the calculation for the life cycle, and resultant increase or
decrease of the energy consumption if applicable.
viii. Input voltage; capable of 120-270 volt, Universal Type single
phase.
ix. Power supplies can be UL Class 1 or II output or similar European
CE or International equivalent.
x. x. Surge protection shall be tested in accordance to the
requirements of IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario I Location
Category C minimum
xi. 250 strikes up to 10kV - 10kA via a Surge Protection Device or
International equivalent. External surge protection to be provided
and shall act before the internal surge device,
xii. Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L: ≥ 0.90.
xiii. Drivers shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 18 non-consumer
RFI.EMI standards or equivalent.
xiv. Drivers shall be RoHS Compliant.
xv. Drivers shall have a total individual luminaire Harmonic Distortion
(THD) of ≤ 20% in accordance with ANSI C82.77 (2002).
However the Contractor shall measure, the harmonic at the supply

- 24 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

point (LV side of the distribution substation) after the installation

of all the LED lights and adopt harmonic compensation method
using static harmonic filter to limit the total harmonics distortion
in the supply voltage to maximum 5% as per IEEE 519 Regulations
and as per DEWA regulations. Driver safety shall meet UL8750,
UL 1012 AND UL935 CAN/CSA-C22-2 NO.0 CSA- C22-2 No.
250 and/or NO. 167.1 EN61347-1-2-13 Safety and EN61000-3-2
EMC and Immunity shall meet EN61547 or FCC part 15 Class B
ANSI C63-4:2009
xvi. Driver forward current should be of max. 530ma, other higher
current could be accepted under strict conditions related to thermal
management issues. Driver should be constant voltage.
xvii. At least 15 years experiences delivering drivers to outdoor
manufacturers.

13/6.7 Whole Luminaire Requirements

A. The following requirements / documentation shall be provided. (Note:

Issue separate supporting documents if required) Physical description
of lighting fixture including dimensions.

i. Details of the driver(s) including, manufacturer, driver efficiency,

catalogue code, certifications and input wattage. Documentation of
the expected useful lifetime including the testing and calculation of
useful life. Verification of site lighting performance as defined by
performance methods are used, the interpolation between the three
sets of LM-80 data, TM21 and ISTMT results must be show up.
ii. Safety certification and file number as required for the luminaire
family that shall be listed, labelled, or identified as per the National
electric code (NEC).
iii. Applicable testing bodies are determined by:

a) The US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as

National
b) Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include CSA
(Canadian Standards Association)
c) ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory)
d) UL (Underwriters Laboratory)
e) CE Conformance European
f) NVLAP or ANSI/ISO/IEC 17025/2005 P.T. o Any third party
approved buddy

13/6.8 Mechanical Part:

A. Housing: The housing shall be made of extruded Aluminium with

IK07. The luminaire to be rigid in case of Deck Lighting and flexible
in case of Handrail/Staircase lighting

- 25 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

B. Refractor: Tempered glass of IK07 and or PMMA or PC with min

IK09 subject to IEC62262:2002 clause 5& 6 All synthetic materials
shall be 100% UV Stable and scratch resistant.
C. Yellowish factor and aging factor needed for any given
plastic/PMMA/PC materials.
D. Ingress Protection: min IP 67 for whole luminaire subject to IEC
60529
E. ROHS Complaint: system should be of ROHS complaint and free of
mercury and any hazards materials such as but not limited to lead, etc.
F. Vibration: Should meet 3G vibration on three axis 100000 cycle as per
C136.31-2010.
G. Salt Spray test: Paint should be of corrosion resistance polyester paint
powder with min 2mil thickness subject to ASTMB117 &
ASTMB4587 and should exceed rate of six for ASTMD1654 after
minimum 2000hrs. (Third party test certificate is needed for the fitting
housing from inside and out).
H. Hardware’s: all hardware’s items including but not limited to nuts,
screws, clamp, etc must be of stainless steel material of grade 316L.
I. The luminaire shall be provided with a heavy-duty rugged cast
aluminium adjustable slip fitter mountable to suit the proposed pole.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the LED fitting manufacturer and
pole manufacturer to make sure complete compatibility of the
products.
J. Fittings must be designed in a way to prevent accumulations of sand,
dust, debris or others on its surfaces either from top or down.
K. Normal maintenance procedures will be followed to clean fittings once
every 2 years, no special requirements to perform cleaning by using
water while fittings rest on poles, glass and painting powders should be
treated in a way to ease the removals of sand, dust, debris, etc.
L. Snap lock connectors to be provided for daisy chain connections using
leader and jumper cables.
M. For LED strips Multiple cable lengths suitable for a variety of layouts,
Constant torque locking hinges for simple and consistent position
control from various angles.

13/6.9 Electrical, Operation and Safety Part:

A. Safety test reports: Should be submitted subject to IEC 60598-1:2014,

IEC 60598-2-3:2002 or UL safety Certificates and ENEC certificate
for European based products or UL stating file nos. for American
based products.
B. Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) and system immunity test
reports: should be submitted subject to EN 55015:2006 & A1:2007 &
A2 2009, EN61 000-0- 2:2006 &A1:2009 & A2:2009, EN61 000-
303:2008 and On Immunity EN61547:2006 A2:2009 or same as per
FCC equivalent.
C. Fittings should have ENEC certificate or UL listing (ENEC or
UL1598/UL8750.
D. Photobiological Safety: The Manufacturer/Supplier shall ensure
luminaire complies with Photobiological Safety of lamps and lamp

- 26 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

systems in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 62471:2008 or

ANSI/IESNA RP-27. 3-0.
E. Provide proof of testing and compliance to the standards along with
certification provided to prove the fixture classed as “Exempt” or Risk
one. Working Conditions: The luminaire fitting shall operate at 50°C
ambient temperature as designated ambient temperature and can stand
@ 80°C as storage temperature @ 95%RH. The dedicated luminaire
expected useful life (lightoutput) shall be based on ambient
temperature of 50°C.
F. The above-mentioned details are different from LM-82-12 and LM-79
test reports should be provided.

13/6.10 Photometric Performance and Thermal Management Part:

A. Photometric performance:

i. System Efficiency: The optimum efficiency of the luminaire shall

be as following:

a) Minimum luminaire efficacy shall be ≥ 80llm/W at designated

ambient temperature of 50°C. and defined storage temperature
of 80oC.
b) This is as total system design (Deliver) Lumen Output (lm)
over total system circuit watts (cct) at minimum 50°C
Operating outside Ambient Temperature and minimum 95%
(RH) Relative Humidity.
c) Luminaire Maximum % Direct Up light shall be as per CIE
126- 1997 and ZERO at 0 degree tilting.
d) Providing the correct lumen output (120 LPW at 50°C) at
figures for 50°C ambient temperature operation of the
luminaire/system shall be by LM-82-12 Test report run by
accredited NVLAP or ISO17025 lab.
e) If necessary in some laboratories, they can consider running
test for the whole luminaire out of LM-82 scope. (RTA needs
to see system flux @ 50oC to compare results with LM-79
results).
f) The Storage Temperature must be of 80°C and valid for the
whole system.
g) A minimum lifetime of 60000hr to L70 at designated ambient
temperature as well as storage temperature shall be met
h) Optical Control: The luminaire shall be fitted with optical
refractors, diffusers, lenses and/or reflectors.
i) IESNA LM-79 reports shall be submitted for the luminaire
photometric files used in the lighting calculations as per IESNA
LM-79 test or CIE 127:2007 & CIE 15:2004 & CIE TCI:59.
j) SDCM: max. of step 5 for whole system ( not only one
module), range of colours to be as defined by ANSI for step5.

- 27 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/6.11 Thermal Management:

A. The LED modules shall be mounted on heavy-duty heat sinks (only

Aluminium with less copper content is acceptable) to ensure excellent
heat dissipation.
B. The design of the heat sinks shall be such that there is a direct thermal
path from the led junctions to the atmosphere to provide a thermal
transfer effect throughout the life of the luminaire.
C. The heat sinks shall be design by lighting manufacturer to enable the
luminaires to work efficiently in UAE/Dubai climatic conditions.
D. The luminaire shall demonstrate ventilation arrangement allowing heat
to dissipate to the atmosphere.
E. The luminaire shall be design in a way to prevent collection of debris
on the heat sinks by proven and stated means.
F. Thermal management test report: ISTMT (In Situ temperature
measurements test report) run under UL 1598 from accredited
laboratory representing worst-case scenario of Ts/s and Tc/s (should be
using thermal camera shots during test).

13/6.12 Useful Lifetime Calculations Method:

A. In site performance, method shall be only used and accepted.

B. ISTMT reports at 50°C shall be defined separately in case of different
fittings sizes. TM-21 Reported (Not Calculated) shall be shown for
different Tsp run at 10000 hours. LM-80-2008 Test results Shall be
provided and accepted.
C. Quadratic Interpolation curves shall show up lumen Maintenance over
50K hours, as well as defined Tsp as shown in ISTMT report, LM-80-
2008 and TM-21 reported.
D. Reported lifetime shall be provided for L70 (10k) 60000 hours at 50oC
ambient temperature.
E. LLD shall be from 25°C to 50°C at 60000 hours.

13/6.13 Test Requirements

A. Full products inspection will be run by dedicated people set by RTA

to check every step on production line as well as assembly before
delivery
B. Factory inspection to be carried out by Supplier/Manufacturer
including but not limited to, Transportation, air tickets, factory
inspection cost, any additional test certificates needed,
accommodation, local transportation in each destination.
C. The LED lighting supplier shall demonstrate lighting calculations and
attach correlated IES files for certain photometric used within lighting
design including different optics calculations until reach optimum
solution using Only DIALUX lighting calculations given lighting
parameters.

i. Required Lighting Levels:

- 28 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

a) Unless otherwise mentioned, LED lighting suppliers shall

follow BS 5489, and project design requirement and
given parameters. The open and closed pedestrian decks
shall be lit to the lighting levels based on nature of the
deck (open, closed, partially closed). The staircases shall
be lit for uniform lighting of every step and ramp.

b) A maintenance factor of 0.8 shall be used on all lighting

calculations; also supplier need to submit lighting
calculations at MF of 1 represents the day one
measurements shall be submitted along with 0.8
calculations.

ii. Warranty:
a) Comprehensive 10 years warranty and 5 years warranty
for deck and strip lighting respectively shall be given for
the whole system including but not limited to LED
modules, Driver, wiring connections, Housing, glass
cover, hardware’s, painting, corrosion, etc.

b) 10 years and 5 years warranty shall be given for

maintained lighting levels for deck and strip lighting
starting from commissioning date assuming the
measurement for 1st 2 years each 1000 hours will be
done by supplier (a record of the measurement will be
kept at RTA, consultant side to assess effected values).

c) In case of lighting values fall down below maintained

values, a corrective action must be taken by supplier at
site to the satisfaction of consultant/ RTA.

13/7.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

13/7.1 Description

A. The work of this Section is integral with the whole of the Contract
Documents and is not intended to be interpreted outside that context.
B. Coordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this
Section.

13/7.2 Description of Work

A. This Section shall include all labour, materials and accessories for the
complete performance of all distribution boards in accordance with the
Specifications and Drawings.

13/7.3 Related Sections

A. Section 16 General Electrical Requirements

- 29 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/7.4 Applicable Standards Referred To In This Section

A. (BS 5486 PT. 11, PT. 12 Particular Requirements for

HRC Fuses, Miniature Circuit Breaker Boards.
B. BS EN 60898, IEC 157-1A Miniature Circuit Breakers.
C. BS 4293 Current Operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker.
D. BS 6231 PVC Insulated Cable for Switchgear and Control Gear
Wiring.
E. BS EN 60529-1, IEC 529 Degree of Protection for Enclosures.

13/7.5 Submittals

A. Submit fully detailed specifications for the enclosures and components

of distribution boards with relevant sheets of manufacturer’s
catalogues.
B. Submit confirmation that proposed boards comply with relevant
Specifications, Drawings and Schedule of Points.

13/7.6 General

A. Distribution boards shall be provided to serve lighting, fans, socket

outlets and other appliances. Board shall be arranged in banks of
ways, as indicated on the schedule of points.
B. Distribution boards shall be flush mounted type, surface mounted type,
or mounted in motor control centres, as indicated. The boards shall be
totally enclosed, dust protected, vermin proof type. Distribution boards
installed in all plant rooms and other general areas shall be IP65 and
shall be corrosion resistant. Enclosure shall be of glass fibre reinforced
polycarbonate, with transparent polycarbonate cover.
C. When installed in air-conditioned electrical/MCC rooms, enclosure
shall be fabricated from robust galvanised sheet, fully rust-proofed,
stove enamelled, of minimum thickness 1.5mm and shall be protected
to IP32 for internal use, with neoprene gaskets for the doors.
D. The distribution boards shall be provided with fixed cover and a
hinged door with padlock, which can be opened about 120 Degree
without any obstruction and with conduit knockouts from the top and
bottom. The hinged door with a lock and key shall be integral part of
the fixed cover.
E. The cabinet shall be constructed so that it is necessary to open the door
to operate Miniature Circuit Breakers or ELCB. Access to interior
components and internal wiring shall be gained by removing a separate
barrier within the enclosure.
F. All distribution boards shall be controlled by an adequately rated ON
load isolator, or circuit breaker to interrupt the supply to the entire
distribution board.
G. A circuit label shall be provided to indicate the area served by each
M.C.B.

- 30 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

13/7.7 Busbars

A. Shall be of appropriate current carrying capacity, at least equal to the

rating of the main incoming isolator or circuit breaker.
B. Shall be of high electrical conductivity copper.

13/7.8 Moulded Circuit Neutral Connector Block

A. Shall be of ample size to ensure a separate way is available on the

connector block for the neutral conductor of each circuit.

13/7.9 Miniature Circuit Breakers (Mcb)

A. The M.C.B. shall comply with BS EN 60898 Part 1 and amendments

and shall be of category M6 Type 3.
B. The M.C.B. shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the
breaker on a faulty circuit and shall be engraved to indicate “ON/OFF”
position and rated current.
C. Trip Settings: As indicated on schedule of points.
D. Shall have a minimum symmetrical RMS interrupting capacity of 6
kA.
E. Shall have the thermal overload trips to operate at 125% rated current
and instantaneous magnetic trip to operate at:
i. 500% rated current for single pole breakers. ii 800% rated current
for triple pole breakers.
F. Shall be arranged so that it is possible to replace three single phase
units with one three phase unit.
G. Triple pole miniature circuit breakers shall have inherent
characteristics, to prevent single phasing and shall be fully suitable for
motor duty

13/7.10 Current Operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (Co-Elcb)

A. Current operated earth leakage circuit breakers shall provide accident

protection, by interrupting dangerous contact with voltage, which may
be present in faulty electrical equipment as a result of frame faults,
insufficient insulation or misuse.
B. The ELCB shall also provide a high degree of protection against earth
leakage, fires and electric shock and can withstand at least 6kA. The
breakers shall generally comply with BS 4293, 1983 and the
recommended specification CEE 227 of the IEC on Rules for the
approval of electrical equipment.
C. The breaker shall consist of a core balance transformer, a tripping coil
with contact assembly, main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, a test
button and a trip free mechanism, all enclosed in a robust body of all
insulated material.

- 31 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

D. Degree of Protection against earth leakage throughout the electrical

installation shall be as indicated on the Drawings
E. The breaker protecting lighting and/or power circuits shall be mounted
in the panel board enclosure.

13/7.11 Contactors

A. Lighting Contactors
i. The contactors shall be single coil, electrically operated,
mechanically held (latch type) and shall be rated for Tungsten,
LED,Fluorescent or discharge lighting load.
ii. Contactors rating and number of poles: as indicated in the
Schedule of Points.
iii. Operating coil: suitable for 220 V, 50 Hz. supply. Continuous
rating without overheating or noise
iv. Main Contacts: double break silver-to-silver type protected by
arcing contacts.
v. Contacts: self-aligning, renewable from the front panel.
vi. Solenoids: shaded pole pattern of such construction that
lamination noise is eliminated.
vii. Control of contactor: by remote push switches, as indicated. A
manual operating never shall also be included.
viii. Lighting contactor’s controlling lighting circuits of distribution
boards shall be mounted in the board enclosure.

13/7.12 Installation

A. Distribution boards shall be supplied and installed as indicated on the

Drawings, as approved by the Engineer.
B. Distribution boards shall be located as indicated on the Drawings. The
top end of the distribution board shall not be higher than 180cm above
finished floor level.
C. The distribution board shall be properly earthed by connecting an
earthing conductor from the main distribution earth bus bar to an earth
connector, welded to the metallic framework.
D. Drawings showing the proposed distribution boards construction and
layout, including a diagram of all internal connections on which the
proposed identification markings for all cables and terminals are
shown, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, before
construction commences.

13/7.13 MCBs

A. MCBs shall be 35mm symmetrical rail mounted type and available in

one, two, three or four poles version.

- 32 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

B. MCB operating mechanism shall be effectively sealed and terminal/

exposed parts shall be protected against unintentional contacts. MCBs
shall be suitable for minimum 10,000 operation.
C. MCB shall have accessories like auxiliary contact, signal auxiliary
contact, shunt trip, under voltage release, over voltage release, motor
operator and auto reclosing shall be available as per the requirements.

13/8.0 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The switching of the lighting luminaires shall be through an automatic

control arrangement comprising of an astronomicial timer and selector
switch.
B. The luminaires may be dimmed to time settings for energy
conservation.
C. Astronomical time switch:
i. The cabinet shall be equipped with an astronomical of the
following specification:
ii. The astronomical time switch for the control cabinet shall
operate from a supply voltage of 220/230 volts.
iii. Two LED’s should be provided to show the switching point
and the relay status. The relay shall have a built in on delay of
approx. 8 seconds and off delay of approx. 40 seconds.
D.
i. Supply voltage: 230V
ii. Frequency: 50/60Hz
iii. Consumption: Ca. 1,1 W
iv. Contact rating: Changeover Contract
v. Accuracy: ±1s/d
vi. Terminal capacity single strand – 1,5 to 4mm
vii. Additional switching times: 2-6 years
viii. Battery reserve: Resolution 1o
ix. Position finding: Max. 50 m
x. Control line length: 230V AC/ca 2mA 120V
xi. Control signal: AC/ca 2mA 24V AC/ca
2mA≥20ms
xii. Control impulse: -20°C to +60°C
xiii. Storage ambient: -20°C to +55°C
xiv. Working ambient:

E. Selector switch:

i. A selector switch for performing the following functions shall be

provided in the cabinet.
a) Auto

- 33 -
SECTION 13 DECK AND STAIRCASE

b) ON
c) OFF
ii. A selector switch for connecting the traffic signal out-going MCBs
to selected phase shall be provided.

13/9.0 METEOROLOGICAL AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS

PREVAILING IN DUBAI

A. The average prevailing local conditions at Dubai City shall be assumed

as follows:

Max. Ambient Temperature 52 Deg. C

Min. Ambient Temperature 1 Deg.C
Design Ambient Temperature 50 Deg.C
Max. incident light intensity (energy) 780 mW/cm2
Light intensity (measured under the sun) approximately 50,000 Lux
Max. metal temperature under sun 85 Deg.C
Min. Barometric Pressure 998 mb
Max. Barometric Pressure 1030 mb
Average Barometric Pressure 1015 mb
Max. Ambient Humidity 100%
Min. Ambient Humidity 20%
Design Ambient Humidity 80%
Max. Design Wind Velocity 160 km/hr.
Average yearly Rainfall 80 mm

- 34 -
 Section 14
FM 200 System
Specification
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

SECTION 14 – FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

SUB-
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

14/1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATION 1

14/1.1 REQUIREMENTS 1

14/1.2 EXCLUSIONS 1

14/1.3 GENERALS 1

14/2 PART 2 – SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 3

14/2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 3

14/2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4

14/2.3 AUXILIARY COMPONENTS 5

14/2.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 5

14/2.5 CONTROL PANEL – AUTOPULSE Z-20 AGENT

RELEASING 7

14/2.6 PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRONIC SOUNDER 11

14/2.7 VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 11

14/2.8 AUDIBLE/VISUAL COMBINATION DEVICES 12

14/2.9 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES – GENERAL 12

14/2.10 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATION 13

14/2.11 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC

SMOKE DETECTOR 13

14/2.12 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTOR 13

14/2.13 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE DUCT SMOKE

DETECTOR 13

14/2.14 ADDRESSABLE DRY CONTACT MONITOR

MODULE 14

14/2.15 ADDRESSABLE TWO-WIRE DETECTOR

MONITOR MODULE 14

14/2.16 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE 15

-1-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

14/2.17 SOLATOR MODULE 16

14/2.18 ABORT SWITCH 16

14/2.19 MAINTENANCE LOCK-OUT SWITCH 16

14/2.20 SELECTOR SWITCH 17

14/2.21 WATER FLOW SWITCHES 17

14/2.22 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE VALVE

SUPERVISORY SWITCHES 17

14/2.23 COLOR TOUCHSCREEN REMOTE LCD

ANNUNCIATOR 18

14/2.24 CAUTION AND ADVISORY SIGN 18

14/2.25 SYSTEM AND CONTROL WIRING 18

14/3 PART 3 – TESTING AND DOCUMENTS 19

14/3.1 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECK OUT 19

14/3.2 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS 19

14/3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 20

14/3.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 20

14/3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS 20

14/3.6 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS 21

-2-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

SECTION 14 - FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

This specification outlines the requirements for a “Total Flood” Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System with automatic detection and control. The work described in this
specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary, and items required to complete and test the fire suppression system.

14/1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS

The design, equipment, installation, testing, and maintenance of the Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set forth
in the latest edition of the following codes and standards:

• National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) No. 2001 – Clean Agent Fire
Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA No. 70 – National Electrical Code
• NFPA No. 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
• Factory Mutual Approval Guide
• UL Listings
• Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

The standards listed, as well as all other applicable codes, standards, and good
engineering practices, shall be used as “minimum” design standards.

14/1.1 REQUIREMENTS

The suppression system installation shall be made in accordance with the drawings,
specifications, and applicable standards. Should a conflict occur between the drawings
and specifications, the specifications shall prevail.

14/1.2 EXCLUSIONS

The work listed below shall be provided by others or under other sections of this
specification:

120 VAC or 220 VAC power supply to the system control panel.

Interlock wiring and conduit for shutdown of HVAC, dampers, and/or electric power
supplies, relays, or shunt trip breakers.

Connection to local/remote fire alarm systems, listed central alarm station(s), or

sprinkler pre-action/deluge valve actuation.

14/1.3 GENERAL

14/1.3.1 MANUFACTURER

The manufacturer of the suppression system hardware and detection components shall
have approval in DCD

The name of the manufacturer shall appear on all major components.

-1-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

All devices, components, and equipment shall be the products of the same
manufacturer.

All devices, components, and equipment shall be new, standard products of the
manufacturer’s latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended.

All devices and equipment shall be UL Listed and FM Approved.

Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike.

14/1.3.2 INSTALLER

The contractor shall have enough experience to install, test, and maintain fire
suppression systems.

When possible, the installing contractor shall employ a NICET certified special
hazard designer, Level II or above, who will be responsible for this project.

The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the

installation of automatic Clean Agent, or similar fire suppression systems in strict
accordance with all applicable codes and standards.

The installing contractor must have a minimum of 5 years experience in the design,
installation, and testing of Clean Agent, or similar fire suppression systems. A list of
systems of a similar nature and scope shall be provided on request.

The installing contractor shall show evidence that his company carries a minimum $2
million liability and complete operations insurance policy. These limits shall
supersede limits required in the general conditions of the specifications.

The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a clean agent recharging
station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to recharge the
largest Clean Agent system within 24 hours after a discharge. Include the amount of
bulk agent storage available.

The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the Clean

Agent system equipment so that immediate replacement parts are available from
inventory. The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

14/1.3.3 SUBMITTALS

The installing contractor shall submit the following design information and drawings
for approval prior to starting work on this project:

Field installation layout drawings having a scale of not less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) = 1 ft
0 in. (0.3 m) or 1:100 detailing the location of all agent storage containers, nozzles,
pipe runs including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull
stations, abort stations, audible and visual alarms, etc.

-2-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders, special
sealing requirements, and equipment shutdown.

Separate layouts or drawings shall be provided for each level, (i.e. room, under floor,
and above ceiling) and for mechanical and electrical work.

A separate layout or drawing shall show isometric details of agent storage containers,
mounting details, proposed pipe runs and sizes, and symbol legend.

Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices, and include point-to-
point conduit runs, and a description of the method(s) used for detector mounting.

Provide an internal control panel wiring diagram, which shall include power supply
requirements and field wiring termination points.

Separate drawing providing symbol legend to identify all symbols used.

Annunciator wiring schematics and dimensioned display panel illustration shall be

provided. (Optional device)

Complete hydraulic flow calculations, from a UL Listed computer program, shall be

provided for all engineered Clean Agent systems. Calculation sheet(s) must include
the manufacturers name and UL listing number for verification. The individual
sections of pipe and each fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be
identified and included in the calculation. Total agent discharge time must be shown
and detailed by zone.

Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into consideration
the power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices, and auxiliary components
under full load conditions.

A complete sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm devices,

shutdown functions, remote signaling, damper operation, time delay, and agent
discharge for each zone or system.

Submit drawings, calculations, and system component data sheets for approval to the
local fire prevention agency, owner’s insurance underwriter, and all other authorities
having jurisdiction before starting installation. Submit approved plans to the Architect
Engineer for record.

14/2 PART 2 – SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

14/2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The system shall be a Total Flood FM-200 Fire Suppression System shall be from an
approved supplied Manufacturer

The system shall provide the FM-200 fire extinguishant minimum design
concentration of 6.7% (UL) or 7.17% (FM) by volume for Class A hazards and a
minimum of 8.97% by volume for Class B hazards, in all areas and/or protected
spaces, at the minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area.
-3-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

For Class C hazards, a minimum design concentration of 7.2% (UL) or 8.1% (FM) by
volume shall be provided. System design shall not exceed 10.5% for normally
occupied spaces, adjusted for maximum space temperature anticipated, with
provisions for room evacuation before agent release.

The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and electrical
installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, FM-200
agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release and abort stations, audible
and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls, shutdowns, alarm interface,
caution/advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other
operations necessary for a functional, UL Listed and FM Approved FM-200 Clean
Agent Fire Suppression System.

Provide 2 inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall be made at 6
month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into normal service.

The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected
spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the “hold” period, which is a
minimum period of 10 minutes or a time period sufficient to allow for response by
trained personnel.

The FM-200 system shall be automatically actuated by either counting zone detection
or cross-zoned detection methodology. Smoke sensors / detectors shall utilize
photoelectric technology and/or Aspiration Smoke Detectors (ASD) for very early
warning smoke detection. Smoke detectors and ASD sample points shall be installed
at no more than 250 ft2 (23.2 m2) of coverage per detector. When using analog
addressable sensors or ASD detectors offering pre-alarm thresholds, further system
design consideration is suggested for providing very early warning detection which
can offer extended investigation time prior to suppression agent release. In all cases,
the compatibility listings of the detectors for use with the control unit should be
observed. The system shall require two detectors in alarm prior to automatic agent
release.

Both Photoelectric and ASD type smoke detectors can be combined in the releasing
process, using one of following methods:

• 1st alarm ASD / 2nd alarm ASD

• 1st alarm ASD / 2nd alarm Photoelectric Detector
• 1st alarm Photoelectric Detector / 2nd alarm Photoelectric Detector

14/2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

Activation of any single detector in any detection zone shall:

• Cause a first-stage alarm.

• Energize a lamp on the activated detector and identify detector on the display
of the control panel (and remote annunciator, if included).

Note: The shutdown of electrical equipment will be optional based on requirements

of the local AHJ or applicable standards.

-4-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Activation of a second smoke detector shall:

• Transmit an alarm signal to remote monitoring or building alarm panel.

• Cause a second-stage (pre-discharge) Audio/Visual alarm to operate.
• Operate auxiliary contacts for air conditioning shutdowns and automatic
dampers.
• Initiate a programmable pre-discharge time delay (FM-200 agent release).

Upon completion of the time delay the FM-200 system shall:

• Cause a discharge alarm to be activated.

• Operate auxiliary contacts for emergency power off of all electrical equipment
(excluding lighting and emergency circuits for life safety).
• Activate visual alarms (strobe) at protected area entrance.
• Energize control solenoid for FM-200 container, releasing gaseous agent into
the protected area.

14/2.3 AUXILIARY COMPONENTS

Double action manual releasing stations shall be provided at each exit of the protected
area, and shall, when activated, release the FM-200 agent and cause all audible /
visual alarms to activate. In addition, activation of the manual releasing stations shall
cause immediate shutdown of air and power circuits.

Abort station shall be provided at each exit of the protected area, and shall, when
operated, interrupt the pre-discharge time delay of the FM-200 agent and emergency
power-off functions. The abort station shall be momentary devices (dead-man)
requiring constant pressure to maintain contact closure.

Note: Manual Releasing Station activation shall override any abort station. Abort
station operation shall be per IRI and FM guidelines.

14/2.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

14/2.4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The FM-200 Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products
of the supplier’s latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. When
one or more pieces of equipment must perform the same function(s), they shall be
duplicates produced by one manufacturer.

All devices and equipment shall be UL Listed and FM Approved.

14/2.4.2 FM-200 AGENT STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION

Each system shall have its own supply of clean agent.

The system design can be modular, central storage, or a combination of both design
criteria.

-5-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines.

Each supply shall be located within the hazard area, or as near as possible, to reduce
the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.

Each container shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide visual
and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low-pressure switch shall be
wired to the control panel to provide an audible and visual “Trouble” alarms in the
event
the container pressure drops below 290 psi to 294 psi (19.9 psi to 20.3 bar). The
pressure gauge shall be color coded to provide an easy, visual indication of container
pressure.

Each container shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates
before the internal pressure exceeds 774.5 psi (53.4 bar) ± 5%.

Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided within the manufacturer’s guidelines

to distribute the FM-200 agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be
designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution:

Nozzles shall be available in 3/8 in. through 2 in. pipe sizes. Each size shall be
available in 180° and 360° distribution patterns.

Ceiling plates can be used with the nozzles to conceal pipe entry holes through ceiling
tiles.

Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s requirements, NFPA 2001 and approved piping standards and
guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using
accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported
and anchored at all directional changes and nozzle locations:

Before assembly, all piping shall be reamed, blown clear, and swabbed with suitable
solvents to remove burrs, mill varnish, and cutting oils.

All pipe threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to the male
thread only.

14/2.4.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS – GENERAL

All control systems shall be UL Listed and FM Approved, and shall be utilized with
listed or approved compatible operating devices, and shall be capable of the following
features:

• Ground fault indication

• Supervised detection circuit(s)
• Supervised alarm circuit(s)
• Supervised release circuit(s)
• Supervised manual release circuit (if applicable)
• Supervised primary power circuit

-6-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

• Battery standby
• 4.3” color touchscreen LCD operator interface and LED indicating lamps
• Key lock steel enclosure
• Programmable time delay
• Programmable detection logic
• Microprocessor based logic
• History buffer

14/2.5 CONTROL PANEL – AUTOPULSE Z-20 AGENT RELEASING

CONTROL PANEL

The Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be an AUTOPULSE Z-20 control panel
with the capability of protecting up to 20 hazards. The panel shall contain a Central
Processing Unit (CPU) with integral 8 amp power supply which is rated to provide 8
amp for “Special Application” appliances including suppression release peripherals
such as horns, strobes and horn/strobes and rated to 6 amp for “regulated 24 VDC”
appliance power. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of
equipment used to make up the system: addressable and conventional initiating
devices, addressable modules, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.

14/2.5.1 System Capacity and General Operation

The control panel shall provide up to a 250 addressable point capacity with the
capability of expansion to 3 loops.

The system shall include 4 Class B programmable notification appliance circuits rated
at 3 A each.

The control panel and remote annunciator (optional) shall include a full featured,
intuitive color touch screen display capable of supporting up to two languages. The
menu-driven interface shall provide color coded system status LEDs, allow for direct
control of the fire alarm system and also allow for quick access to more detailed
system information.

The control panel shall provide the following features:

• Drift Compensation to extend detector accuracy over life.

• Sensitivity Test meeting requirements of NFPA 72.
• Maintenance Alert to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust
accumulation.
• System Status Reports to display, export to USB device (or print if optional
RS232 module is provided).
• Rapid manual station reporting (under 2 seconds).
• Non-Alarm points for general (non-fire) control.
• Periodic Detector Test conducted automatically by software.
• Pre-alarm for advanced fire warning.
• Counting/Cross Zoning with the capability of: counting 2 detectors in alarm, 2
software zones in alarm, or 1 smoke detector and 1 thermal detector in alarm.
• March time and temporal coding options.
• Walk Test
-7-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

• Check for 2 detectors set to same address.

The real time clock may also be used to control non-fire functions at programmed
time-of-day, day-of-week, and day-of-year.

• Day/Night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.

• Device Blink Control for sleeping areas.
• Discrete status LEDs for Alarm, Priority 2, Supervisory, Trouble, Alarm
Silenced and AC power indications plus three additional programmable LEDs
with associated control switches with provisions for custom labels.
• The control panel shall be capable of coding Notification circuits in Slow
March Time (20 BPM), Fast March Time (120 BPM) and Temporal Code
(NFPA 72).

14/5.2 Central Microprocessor

The microprocessor unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control all external
interfaces with the control panel. It shall include system program storage in non-
volatile memory for building-specific program storage, and a "watch dog" timer
circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure.

The microprocessor unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs for
specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Such
control- by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory and
shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs.

The microprocessor unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of
system displays and history file.

14/2.5.2 Display

The touch screen display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the
system operator.

The display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all
addressable and conventional detectors, addressable modules, and software zones.

The display shall by a 4.3 inch color touch screen display.

14/2.5.3 Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)

The SLC interface called an IDNet+ circuit, shall provide power to and communicate
with up to 250 addressable points which can include Photoelectric or Thermal
detectors along with all monitoring and control points. This can be accomplished
over one to three SLC loops and shall be capable of NFPA 72 Class A or B wiring.

The loop interface board(s) shall receive and process information from all detectors to
determine whether normal, alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions exist for each
detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity
level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation
of dust in each detector. The information shall also be used for automatic detector
-8-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.

The detector software shall meet NFPA 72, requirements and be certified by UL as a
calibrated sensitivity test instrument.

The detector software shall allow manual or automatic sensitivity adjustment.

Enclosures:

The control panel shall be housed in a UL listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-
flush mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant
prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.

The door shall provide a key lock and include a glass or other transparent opening for
viewing of all indicators.

All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so they will not be
affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864.

Optional modules shall be available for NFPA 72 supervising station and public
emergency alarm reporting systems. The control panel shall have the ability to meet
the latest requirements of UL 864 for delayed AC fail reporting.

14/2.5.4 Power Supply

The power supply shall operate on 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and shall provide all
necessary power for the control panel. The power supply shall have a 6 A output
rating which provides current for special application devices, IDNet devices, module
currents and auxiliary output currents. When NACs are controlling regulated 24 DC
appliances, total NAC current available shall be 3 A.

It shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual-rate charging
techniques for fast battery recharge.

It shall provide an earth detection circuit capable of detecting earth faults on I/O
modules field wired circuits connected to power supply.

It shall be power-limited using Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) resistors and

solid state circuits.

14/2.5.5 Field Wiring Terminal Blocks

For ease of service, all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall have sufficient capacity
for 18 to 12 AWG wire.

14/2.5.6 Field Programming

All programming shall be accomplished through a standard PC laptop.

All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.

-9-
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

The programming function shall be enabled with a password that may be defined
specifically for the system when it is installed. Three levels of password protection
shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One level is used for status level
changes such as zone disable or manual on/off commands. A third level (higher-level)
is used for actual change of program information.

A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors.

For flexibility, an off-line programming function with batch upload/download shall

also be available.

14/2.5.7 Specific System Operations

Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the
sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the
system keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window.

Alarm Verification: Verification is implemented using zones with 512 zones

available. The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 5 to 30 seconds
and each zone shall be able to be selected for verification. The control panel shall
keep a count of the number of times that each zone has entered the verification cycle.
These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.

Point Disable: Any device in the system may be Enabled or Disabled through the
system keypad.

Point Read: The system shall be able to display or print the following point status
diagnostic functions:

• Device status.
• Device type.
• Custom device label.
• View analog detector values.
• Device zone assignments.
• All program parameters.

System Status Reports: Upon command from a system operator, a status report will be
generated and printed listing all system status provided an optional RS232 card is
installed. The report must also be exportable to a USB device on the Z-20 USB port.

System History Recording and Reporting: The control panel shall contain a history
buffer that will be capable of storing up to 2000 events (1000 alarm and 1000
trouble). Each of these activations will be stored and time-and-date stamped with the
actual time of the activation. The contents of the history buffer may be manually
reviewed, one event at a time, exported to a USB device or printed (if optional RS232
module is provided) in its entirety.

The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory
for history storage are not acceptable.

- 10 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The control panel shall automatically

interrogate each intelligent smoke detector and analyze the detector responses over a
period of time.

If any intelligent smoke detector in the system responds with a reading that is below
or above normal limits, the system will enter the trouble mode and the particular
detector will be annunciated on the system display. This feature shall in no way
inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system nor shall it require any special
hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.

Pre-Alarm Function: The system shall provide 2 levels of pre-alarm warning to give
advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully field
adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second
level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays. The system
shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre-alarm
level to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms.

Software Zones: The control panel shall provide 512 programmable software zones.
All addressable devices may be field programmed to be grouped into these zones for
control activation and annunciation purposes.

14/2.5.8 Batteries

Batteries shall be 12 volt (2 required).

Batteries shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than
24 hours in standby plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.

Batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level
checks, refilling, spills and leakage shall not be accepted.

14/2.6 PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRONIC SOUNDER

Electronic sounders shall be UL Listed and FM Approved and operate on 24 VDC

nominal.

Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools to
choose 1 of 8 tones with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 ft
(3.0 m) from the device.

Electronic sounders shall be flush or semi-flush mounted as shown on plans.

14/2.7 VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

Strobe lights shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.

Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA as defined in UL standard 1971
and shall meet the following criteria:

- 11 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

The strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971 and devices shall be
multi-candela 15 cd – 110cd and higher intensity if required by the plans.

The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.

The appliance shall be placed 80 in.(to the bottom of the appliance) to 96 in. (to the
top of the appliance) above the finished floor within the space.

14/2.8 AUDIBLE/VISUAL COMBINATION DEVICES

Audible/visual combination devices shall meet the applicable requirements of Section

3.5 listed above for audibility.

Audible/visual combination devices shall meet the requirements of Section 3.6 (listed
above) for visibility.

14/2.9 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES – GENERAL

Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means using dip switches.

Detectors shall be intelligent and addressable, and shall connect with 2 wires to the
fire alarm/release control panel signaling line circuits.

Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs.
Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions indicating that the detector is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LEDs shall be
placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition
has been detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector LEDs shall
be optional through the system field program. An output connection shall also be
provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.

Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set through the control panel and shall be
adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may
be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.

Using software in the control panel, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their
performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity
test requirements of NFPA Standard 72.

The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with
tamper-proof feature. An optional base shall be available with a built-in (local)
sounder rated at 85 dBA minimum.

The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm
condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at
the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command
from the control panel.

Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall
use to identify the type of device (PHOTO or THERMAL).
- 12 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

14/2.10 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATION

Addressable manual pull station shall, on command from the control panel, send data
to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. They shall use a key operated
test-reset lock and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they
cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.

All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a
key-type reset.

Manual stations shall be clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover.
The word AGENT shall appear on the front and both sides of the stations.

Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as shown on

the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 in. (1.1 m), nor more than 48 in. (1.2
m) above the finished floor.

Operation shall require 2 actions.

14/2.11 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE

DETECTOR

The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principle to measure smoke
density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density.

14/2.12 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTOR

Heat detectors shall be analog addressable devices rated at 135 °F (57 °C) and have a
rate-of-rise element rated at 15 °F (9.4 °C) per minute. It shall connect via 2 wires to
the control panel signaling line circuit. Up to 159 intelligent heat detectors may
connect to one SLC loop.

The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused by a
fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing
the analog level of such thermal measurements.

An optional, intelligent heat detector shall be available for applications which do not
require a rate- of-rise element.

14/2.13 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR

In-duct smoke detector housing shall accommodate an intelligent photoelectric sensor

which provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel.

When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the control panel and
appropriate action is taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the
rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the
duct system.

- 13 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

14/2.14 ADDRESSABLE DRY CONTACT MONITOR MODULE

Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone
of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the
control panel SLC loops.

The monitor module shall mount in a 4 in. (102 mm) square, 2 1/8 in. (54 mm) deep
electrical box.

The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be
provided that shall flash under normal conditions indicating that the monitor module
is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature
package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 in. x 1-1/4 in. x ½ in. (69.9 mm x 31.8 mm x
12.7 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED.

14/2.15 ADDRESSABLE TWO-WIRE DETECTOR MONITOR MODULE

Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone
of conventional two-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry
contact device).

The two-wire monitor module shall mount in a 4 in. (102 mm) square, 2 1/8 in. (54
mm) deep electrical box or with an optional surface back box.

The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED
shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions indicating that the monitor
module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

14/2.15.1 Smoke Detectors

Smoke detectors shall be 24 VDC and shall be UL Listed and FM approved.

Each detector shall include a visual status indicator, provide remote LED output, and
include a built-in test capability.

The sensitivity shall be factory set per UL 268.

The detector cover and screen shall be easily removable for field cleaning.

A special vandal-resistant locking screw shall be provided to lock the head to the
base.

The head-to-base connection shall be made by use of bifurcated contacts. Terminal

connections to the base shall be of the screw type that are accessible with the base
installed on the mounting box.

Where specifically identified on the contract drawings, detector bases shall

incorporate a relay with Form C contacts rated at 1 amp at 120 VAC and 2 amps at 28
VDC.
- 14 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Photoelectric-type smoke detector shall be light reflective type and compatible with
the AUTOPULSE control system. The detector shall have an LED in its base which is
illuminated in a steady-on mode when in alarm and pulse mode when in standby.

Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset switch.

The design of the photoelectric detector compensating circuits shall provide stable
operation with regard to minor changes in temperature, humidity and atmospheric
conditions.

Photoelectric-type smoke detector with heat detector shall be light reflective type and
compatible with the AUTOPULSE control system. The detector shall have an LED in
its base which is illuminated in a steady-on mode when in alarm and pulse mode
when in standby. Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset
switch.

14/2.16 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation
of one conventional Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) of compatible, 24 VDC
powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. For fan shutdown and other
auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract
relay.

The control module shall mount in a standard 4 in. (102 mm) square, 2 1/8 in. (54
mm) deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted back box.

The control module NAC circuit may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B)
with up to 1 amp of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation,
or as a dry contact (Form C) relay.

The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements
and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same
time on the same pair of wires.

Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power loop from the
main control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply.

The control module shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and
shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify
the type of device. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions
indicating that the control module is operational and is in regular communication with
the control panel.

A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test the module without opening or
shorting its NAC wiring.

The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a
minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.

- 15 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

14/2.17 ISOLATOR MODULE

Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits

on an SLC loop. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors
that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. At least
one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building.

If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit

(disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator
module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.

The isolator module shall not require any address-setting and its operations shall be
totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after
its normal operation.

The isolator module shall mount in a standard 4 in. (102 mm) deep electrical box or in
a surface mounted back box.

It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational
and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected
and isolated.

14/2.18 ABORT SWITCH

The abort switch shall be used where an investigative delay is desired between
detection and actuation of the fire suppression system.

This switch shall be a momentary contact "dead-man" type switch requiring constant
pressure to transfer one set of contacts. Clear operating instructions shall be provided
at the abort switch.

This switch shall be rated for 2 A resistive @ 30 VDC.

The terminal connections shall be of the screw type.

14/2.19 MAINTENANCE LOCK-OUT SWITCH

The maintenance lock-out switch shall be used where it is desired to disable the fire
suppression system during routine maintenance.

This switch shall be key operated allowing removal of the key only in "Normal"
position. A red indicator lamp shall be included on the switch assembly to be
illuminated when in the "Lock-Out" position. The control unit is used to indicate a
supervisory condition when in the "Lock-Out" position.

The switch shall include 1 set of normally open and 1 set of normally closed control
contacts rated for 2 A resistive @ 30 VDC.

The terminal connections shall be of the screw type.

- 16 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

14/2.20 SELECTOR SWITCH

The selector switch shall be used where a connected reserve is required.

This switch shall be key operated allowing removal of the key in either the "Main" or
"Reserve" position.

This switch shall be rated at 28 VDC @ 1.1 amp make/break or 6 amp continuous
carry.

The terminal connections shall be of the screw type.

14/2.21 WATER FLOW SWITCHES

Flow switches shall be integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard

type.

Flow switches shall have an alarm transmission time delay that is conveniently
adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30 or 45 seconds.

Flow switches shall be located a minimum of 1 ft (0.3 m) from a fitting that changes
the direction of the flow and a minimum of 3 ft (0.9 m) from a valve.

14/2.22 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE VALVE SUPERVISORY

SWITCHES

Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, or zone control valve, and
each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch.
Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with
supervisory switches.

Each Post Indicator Valve (PIV) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a
supervisory switch.

The switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the
valve and adjusted to operate within 2 revolutions toward the closed position of the
valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance
from its normal position.

The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing that shall

provide a 3/4 in. tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for
attachment to the valves.

Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel.

The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause switch
operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.

Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section and
installed by mechanical contractor.

- 17 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

114/2.23 COLOR TOUCHSCREEN REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR

The remote annunciator shall provide a 4.3” color touchscreen LCD display that is
identical to the control panel user interface. The annunciator shall be capable of
displaying a custom background image when the system status is normal.

The annunciator shall provide; a local sounder; discrete status LEDs for Alarm,
Priority 2, Supervisory, Trouble, Alarm Silenced and AC power indications; and three
programmable LEDs with associated control switches with provisions for custom
labels. A lamp test feature shall be available from the display menu.

The remote annunciator shall provide access to all system status information, controls,
diagnostics, and reports that are available on the control unit user interface. Protected
access shall be provided to the following operator control functions and diagnostics;
Alarm, Priority 2, Supervisory and Trouble Acknowledge; Alarm Silence; and System
Reset; Hardware Reset; Point Disable/Enable; Annunciator Sounder Silence, Clear
History Logs; Panel Setup; and System Diagnostics. Protection against unauthorized
use shall be provided via a passcode, keyswitch, or both.

The annunciator shall have the capability to support up to two languages with the
ability to toggle between languages using one of the programmable control switches
on the annunciator.

The annunciator shall connect to a two-wire Remote Unit Interface (RUI). The two-
wire RUI connection shall be capable of distances of up to 2,500 feet (762 meters).

The system shall support up to 6 remote color touchscreen LCD annunciators.

14/2.24 CAUTION AND ADVISORY SIGNS

Signs shall be provided to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of the
FM- 200 agent equipment supplier:

Entrance sign: 1 required at each entrance to a protected space.

Manual discharge sign: 1 required at each manual discharge station.

Flashing light sign: 1 required at each flashing light over each exit from a protected
space.

14/2.25 SYSTEM AND CONTROL WIRING

All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.

All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT or conduit) and must
be installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.

All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. Runs
of conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, and
installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.

- 18 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color-coded
wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points, and shall be free
from shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings), and crosses
between conductors.

Final terminations between the control panel and the system field wiring shall be
made under the direct supervision of a factory-trained representative.

All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals in a neat and workmanlike

manner to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725 and Article 760,
except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72.

Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province, and/or country codes.

The complete system electrical installation and all auxiliary components shall be
connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

14/3 PART 3 – TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION

14/3.1 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT

After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked
out, inspected, and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures and NFPA standards:

All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and
installation.

All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity, and resistance to
earth.

The complete system shall be functionally tested in the presence of the owner or his
representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be
operational at least 5 days prior to the final acceptance tests:

Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended

procedures, and test values recorded.

All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and visual
devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function as
required and designed.

Each control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble condition
into the system.

14/3.2 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS:

Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to
each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall include control panel
operation, manual and (optional) abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory
procedures, auxiliary functions, and emergency procedures.
- 19 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

14/3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation
and maintenance instruction manuals, Four copies of the instruction manuals shall be
provided for each system to the owner. All aspects of system operation and
maintenance shall be detailed, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all
circuits, a written description of the system design, sequence of operation and
drawing(s) illustrating control logic, and equipment used in the system. Checklists
and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques, maintenance
operations and procedures shall be included in the manual.

14/3.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide 4 copies of
system “As-Built” drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation
details, including all equipment locations (i.e.: control panel(s), agent container(s),
detectors, alarms, manuals, and aborts, etc.) as well as piping and conduit routing
details. The drawings shall show all room or facilities modifications, including door
and/or damper installations completed. One copy of reproducible engineering
drawings shall be provided reflecting all actual installation details.

14/3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

At the time “As-Built” drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted,

the installing contractor shall submit a “Test Plan” describing procedures to be used to
test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all
tests to be performed, and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be
employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation
requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the owner and shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been
approved.

The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and
intended.

All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation, solenoid and manual actuation,
HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices, and manual override
of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and battery
power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.

A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to determine

the presence of openings which would affect the agent concentration levels. The
test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-tec Corp. Door Fan system, or equivalent,
with integrated computer program. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA
2001, Appendix C.

If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist, which would result in
leakage and/ or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the
general contractor, or his sub-contractor, or agent.
- 20 -
SECTION 14 FM 200 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

The general contractor shall be responsible for adequately sealing all protected
space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The installing contractor shall inspect all work
to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed.

THE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE

RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUCCESS OF THE ROOM PRESSURIZATION
TESTS. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with these
specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to determine
and correct, the cause of the test failure.

The installing contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests, at no

additional cost to the owner, until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful
test results shall be submitted to the owner for record. Upon acceptance by the owner,
the completed system(s) shall be placed into service.

14/3.6 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS

The installing contractor shall provide 2 inspections of each system, installed under
this contract, during the one-year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the
6 month interval, and the second inspection at the 12 month interval after system
acceptance.

Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and

the recommendations of NFPA 2001.

Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) operation shall be submitted to the owner

upon completion of each inspection.

- 21 -
 Section 16
Fire Alarm &
Extinguishing System
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

SECTION 16 – FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

SUB-
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

16/1 GENERAL 1

16/2 MANUAL FIRE ALARM CALL POINT 1

16/3 OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR 1

16/4 DETECTOR BASE 1

16/5 FIRE ALARM PANEL 2

16/6 FIRE EXTINGUISHING EQUIPMENT 3

16/7 FIRE ALARM CABLE AND WIRES 4

16/8 FIRE ALARM CABLE AND WIRES COLOR CODE 4

16/9 INSTALLATION 4

16/10 FIELD TEST 5

16/11 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) 5

16/12 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 6

16/12.1 GENERAL 6

16/12.2 SAFETY AND RELIABILITY 6

16/12.3 SYSTEM VARIATIONS 6

16/12.4 ARRANGEMENTS 6

16/12.5 THE RECTIFIER 7

16/12.6 THE INVERTER 7

16/12.7 STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 7

16/12.8 MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH 8

16/12.9 FEEDER SELECTOR SWITCH 8

16/13 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) 8

-1-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

SECTION 16 – FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

16/1 GENERAL

The Contractor shall arrange for an approved Sub-Contractor who shall be on the list
of Approved Contractors, to supply, install, wire and commission the complete
manual/automatic fire alarm system comprising manual fire alarm call points, alarm
bells and sounders, smoke and heat detectors and control panels as indicated on the
drawings.

The fire alarm system equipment shall be selected from equipment approved by the
Fire Department. The system shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the
recommendations of an approved international standard. The wiring shall be 1.5 mm2
MICC/PVC for bell and battery circuits.

16/2 MANUAL FIRE ALARM CALL POINT

Manual fire alarm call points shall consist of a die cast plastic cover locked in position
with screws. The enclosure shall house a micro switch. The micro switch plunger
shall bear onto an inset break glass panel fixed into the cover. The call point shall be
arranged for surface mounting. The cover and the enclosure shall be self coloured red.

The words “BREAK GLASS FOR ALARM” shall be printed on the frangible glass.
A testing facility using a special key shall be provided to enable the call point to be
tested without breaking the glass and the frangible glass shall be covered with plastic
film to prevent injury when the glass is broken. The mounting height shall be 1500
mm above finished floor level.

The switching unit contacts shall be gold or silver plated or an alloyed metal which
will not corrode when left unattended in a highly polluted environment. Contact
blades and other metal parts of the switching unit shall also be constructed from
plated or alloyed metal which will not corrode when left unattended. Contacts shall be
normally open or normally closed to suit the alarm monitoring system. The voltage
and current rating of the contacts shall be marked within the enclosure.

The call point shall comply with an approved international standard Specification for
manual call points.

The call point shall be resistant to the ingress of dust and water and shall be suitable
for operation in the environmental conditions at the site of installation.

16/3 OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR

Optical smoke detectors shall comply with an approved international standard and
approved by Dubai Civil Defence.

16/4 DETECTOR BASE

An operation indicator lamp of the light emitting diode type and a time delay unit to
override spurious alarms shall be fitted to the base.

-1-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

16/5 FIRE ALARM PANEL

The fire alarm panel shall be wall mounted adjacent to the motor control centre. The
fire alarm system shall protect risk areas within the premises by giving warning of a
fire condition relayed by an automatic detector or by the operation of a break glass
callpoint.
Operation of an individual detector is to be displayed by an indicator fitted into the
base of the detector. This indicator will illuminate when its detector goes into alarm.
Fixed temperature heat detectors will not have this local indication facility. Upon
receipt of an alarm, the control units shall perform the following actions:

a) Illuminate fire zone detector

b) Activate alarm warning devices within the building

c) Operate internal fire sounder

d) Operate ancillary devices as appropriate

Alarm warning devices shall be de-activated by operation of the “Silence Alarms”

switch. The internal sounder will continue to operate and the fire indicators remain lit
until the key switch controlled push switch is operated. This should only be achieved
if the alarm initiating device is no longer in alarm.

Reset of the controller, after the fire incident has been investigated, will be achieved
by operation of the “Reset” switch.

The enclosures of the panels shall be fabricated from sheet steel, minimum thickness
1.5 mm and shall be provided with a hinged lockable door. Protection to an approved
international standard shall be provided.

The control unit should be designed to comply with the compulsory requirements of
an approved international standard, relating to “Automatic fire alarm systems in
buildings, control and indicating equipment”.

Alarm panels shall as a minimum requirement be equipped with the following:

a) Mains supply on indicator

b) DC supply on indicator

c) DC supply faulty indicator

d) Alarm indicator for each zone

e) Alarm accept push-button to acknowledge fire alarm signals, silence external

audible alarms and energise as internal bleeper unit.

f) Reset push-button to restore monitoring systems to the quiescent condition

g) Integral sealed battery and trickle battery charger where appropriate

-2-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

h) Alarm transmission facilities via the telephone alarm system

i) Terminations for incoming and outgoing wiring systems

j) Voltage free normally closed circuits which shall open in the event of an alarm
to shutdown ventilation and air conditioning equipment in the immediate
vicinity.

k) Suitable fault indication both visual and audible.

Alarm indicators shall be of the light emitting diode type. Indicators shall be provided
in pairs for each function.

Alarm panels shall continuously monitor all alarm circuits, including wiring and
control devices. When a fault monitoring circuit has been energized it shall not reset
until the fault condition is cleared.

Batteries shall be of the sealed lead acid type and shall have a capacity capable of
maintaining the system in normal working condition for at least 24 hours without
recharging and subsequently to operate in the alarm condition for at least one hour.

Battery charging to be of sufficient capacity to power the system whilst recharging a

fully discharged battery. The battery shall be fully charged within 8 hours.

Monitoring circuits shall utilise solid state components. Output relay contacts shall be
gold or silver plated and shall be rated for the circuit conditions into which they
operate.

Alarm bells shall be of the gong type with a minimum diameter of 200 mm. They
shall be continuously rated and be mounted 2200 mm above finished floor level.

Bells shall be marked with the words “FIRE ALARM”.

16/6 Fire Extinguishing Equipment

The Contractor shall supply and install in the respective positions:

2.5kg hand held CO2 operated for extinguishers and 4.5 kg hand held dry powder
type fire extinguisher, suitable for Class A, B and C fire risks, flammable liquid, and
fires from electrical sources. The extinguisher shall comprise a light alloy or steel
cylinder finished in blue epoxy resin fitted with a controllable brass valve with
pressure gauge or aluminum head cap for CO2 operated cylinders. Valves to be fitted
with safety pin lever.

All equipment supplied shall be suitable for the high temperatures, humidities, and
dusty atmospheres experienced in Dubai, with a minimum jet range of 5-7m
discharging in approximately 15 secs.

All equipment supplied under this section shall be obtained from a company regularly

-3-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

engaged in the manufacture and supply of fire protection equipment. It shall

essentially be a duplicate of equipment that has been in satisfactory use for not less
than five years prior to the bid date and be supported by an approved service
organisation capable of carrying out regular inspection and maintenance of fire
protection systems.

All portable fire extinguishers shall be manufactured in accordance with an approved

international standard and are to be wall mounted on secure brackets with the base
approximately 760 mm above floor level.

Fire extinguishing devices shall be clearly and indelibly labelled with clear
instructions for their use in English, Arabic and pictorial form.

16/7 Fire Alarm Cable and Wires

All equipment and devices shall be wired and connected by fire retardant cables of
minimum cross sectional area of 1.5mm² for detector circuits and 2.5mm²for bell and
battery circuits. The cable outer sheath shall be flame retardant.

All cables shall be installed on cable trays or conduits and fastened suitably. All fire
alarm wiring shall be completely segregated from all other wiring in the plant.

16/8 Fire Alarm Cable and Wires Color Code

a) Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as

follows:
i. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Brown for phase, Blue for
neutral and Green and Yellow for earth.
ii. Initiating Device Circuit: Brown, Blue.
iii. Detector Power Supply: Brown, Blue or as specified
iv. Signal Device Circuit: Blue positive, white negative or as
specified.
v. Door Release: Brown, Blue or as specified.
vi. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, Orange or as specified.
vii. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, White or as specified.

16/9 Installation

a) Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

local authority regulations.

b) Install manual station with operating handle 1.4m above finished floor
level.

c) Install audible and visual signal devices 2.3m above finished floor
level.

-4-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

d) Mount end-of-line device in control panel or box with last device or

separate box adjacent to last device in circuit as specified.

e) Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 40kg pulling
force.

f) Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler

flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system
control panels, duct smoke detectors and other devices as specified.

g) Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72E, BS 5839 or

other approved standard.

16/10 Field Tests

a) Test in accordance with NFPA 72H, BS 5839 or other approved standard

as directed by the Engineer and Department of Civil Defence.

b) The manufacturer's representative or their certified technician to supervise

installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing and
commissioning.

16/11 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A 2.5 KVA UPS system shall be installed within the MDB in a separate compartment
together with its battery bank. A distribution board to receive and distribute the power
to critical equipment shall also be included either within the UPS or outside the UPS
in the control room. Batteries shall be sized to provide an autonomy of 3 hours.
Batteries shall be stationary and sealed, maintenance free, Ni-Cd type installed in a
separate rack/cabinet.

This specification gives the minimum technical requirements for an AC Uninterrupted

Power Supply unit (AC-UPS). The purpose of the unit is to supply uninterrupted
230V, 1 phase with a constant frequency of 50 Hz to Distribution Section
transformers 24 hours a day for 365 days a year. Battery backup shall be for 3 hours.

The basic AC-UPS system shall be composed but not limited to the following
components:

• rectifier/charger
• 1 battery bank;
• inverter
• static bypass switch.
• manual bypass switch
• distribution section

Unless specified otherwise, the AC-UPS shall conform in design, construction,

material and Performance to the latest editions of the IEC codes and standards.
Further to the international standards, the AC-UPS shall in any case conform to the
local standards and/or regulations, if these are higher, more stringent or of special
nature.
-5-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

The panel shall be designed for an ambient temperature of 45 deg. C even if it is to be

installed in air- conditioned rooms.

16/12 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

16/12.1 General

The design of the AC-UPS shall be based on achieving the following minimum
lifetimes.

• 20 years for the rectifier, inverter, static bypass-switch and auxiliaries;

• 15 years for nickel cadmium acid battery cells.

Capacitors of the electrolyte type shall maintain their capacity within the specified
tolerances for at least 10 years.

16/12.2 Safety and Reliability

• The equipment shall be of a standard, well set and proven design which
ensures maximum safety to personal, maximum service reliability and
economic operation for an operational lifetime of at least 20 years.

• Design and construction shall be simple and provide good accessibility to

components and parts.

• All equipment and parts shall be brand new and unused, of current
manufacturers, of modern design and of the highest industrial grade, free from
all defects that might effect the performance of the unit.

• Capacitors of the electrolyte type shall be non-toxic and free from any PCB's.

16/12.3 System Variations

The input voltage of the AC-UPS, with rectifier disconnected, will be sinusoidal
according to IEC 60146. The input voltage is 230 Volt, 1 phase, 50 Hz, which will not
exceed the following values:

• static ± 10 %
• dynamic + 16 % ; - 20 %
• spikes 2 kV
• frequency ± 5 %
• Output Voltage 230V, 1phase, 50HZ

16/12.4 Arrangements

The equipment shall comprise but not limited to the following items:

• feeder selector switch

-6-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

• constant voltage, current limiting rectifiers

• battery banks
• inverters
• static bypass switch
• manual bypass switch
• transformers if required.
• distribution section as part of the charger cubicle.
• auxiliary equipment
• microprocessor for overall operation and control

16/12.5 The Rectifier

The output of the rectifier shall supply the power requirement of the load via the
inverter and at the same time maintaining the battery in the float-mode.

If there is an AC-supply failure the battery will take over the power requirement of
the load via the inverter for not less than the specified time.

If the AC-supply is restored, the rectifier will then recharge the battery and at the
same time supply the power requirement of the load. The rate of recharging the
battery shall be sufficient to restore it to a capacity that is capable to fulfill the power
requirement of the load in case again an AC-supply failure may occur. The recharging
has to take place within a specific time limit mentioned in the data sheet.

16/12.6 The Inverter

The inverter converts the input DC voltage into an AC output voltage. The output
voltage to the requirements is 230 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz.

The dynamic output voltage variations shall not exceed ± 10 % of the rated output
voltage in case of an instantaneous load variation of 100 %. The steady state output
voltage variation shall not exceed ± 5 % of the rated output voltage in case of a load
variation of 100 %, the steady state output voltage shall be restored within 0.1 sec.

The waveform of the output voltage shall be sinusoidal according to IEC 60146 with a
relative harmonic content not exceeding 5% under linear load conditions and 10%
under non-linear load conditions.

The variations in the output frequency shall not exceed the rated output frequency by
± 2%. It is recommended that the inverter is of the pulse width modulation (PWM)
type regarding the low harmonic distortion level in the supply output of the inverter.
(Valid for switching frequencies over 700 Hz).

16/12.7 Static Transfer Switch

A no-break static transfer switch, programmable for sense and transfer time and return
transfer time delayed, shall be incorporated as part of the AC-UPS.

It will provide automatic bypass to the alternate supply system in case of inverter
malfunction or system overload. The total sense and switch transfer time shall not be

-7-
SECTION 16 FIRE ALARM & EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

more than ¼ cycle. When the load and inverter return to the normal operating range,
the static transfer switch shall automatically retransfer the load back to the inverter.

A continuity monitor shall be provided which will test that the switching devices in
each pole of the static switch control.

If the test fails it shall signal the control circuit to transfer the load to the alternate
position. If neither the inverters nor the alternate source is available, it shall
disconnect the load thereby further protecting the load from being burned up due to
the possible application of half wave AC.

The Contractor should ensure that the functioning of the switch shall not affect the
normal functioning of the control system.

16/12.8 Manual Bypass Switch

A manual bypass switch shall be provided as part of the AC-UPS.

It will be so arranged as to isolate the UPS from the load, permitting maintenance and
testing to proceed on the UPS, without disturbance to the load.

16/12.9 Feeder Selector Switch

A feeder selector switch shall be provided as part of the AC-UPS. It shall be so

arranged that in case of emergency a backup feeder can be selected as power supply
to the AC- UPS.

16/13 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

HMI shall be 15” TFT color screen with high resolution and pre-programmed to
provide a basic graphical display of the process. Real-time numeric display of process
variables and alarm messages shall be available. All process control functions shall be
accessible for the operator from the HMI. The application program shall be stored in
Non-volatile Memory.

Each HMI shall provide as minimum facilities with the following functions:

• Real-time operation.
• Direct memory access.
• Real-time clock.
• ‘Watchdog’ timer.
• Memory protection.
• Error checking in all data transfers
• Trends & storage
• Alarms History
• Alarm banner

-8-
 Section 17
Security CCTV
Performance Requirements
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 17 – SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

SUB-
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE

17/1 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT 2

17/1.1 INTRODUCTION 2

17/1.2 CCTV SYSTEM SECURITY COVERAGE 2

17/1.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 2

17/1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 4

17/1.5 VIDEO ANALYTICS 9

17/2 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 15

17/2.1 TESTING PROCESS 15

17/2.2 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 17

17/2.3 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS 18

17/2.4 ISSUANCE OF TAKING OVER CERTIFICATS 18

17/3 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE 19

17/3.1 WARRANTY 19

17/3.2 MAINTENANCE 20

17/3.3 PERIODIC PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 21

17/3.4 RESPONSE AND REPAIR TIME REQUIREMENTS 21

17/3.5 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE 22

17/3.6 SPARES HOLDING 23

17/3.7 MAINTENANCE FACILITIES 23

17/3.8 MAINTENANCE RECORD 23

-1-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 17 - SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

17.1 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

17.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The following sections of this document provide the minimum performance requirements
that the Contractor must adhere to when designing and implementing the Foot bridges
CCTV security systems.

All CCTV security systems installed under this contract must be operated and controlled
by an appropriate and approved Management Control System. The RTA reserves the right
to demand the use of an alternative Management Control System, where they identify that
the Contractor’s proposed system does not meet all RTA requirements.

The Contractor must also demonstrate that systems commissioned during the
implementation stage of the project achieve all of these minimum performance
requirements.

17.1.2 CCTV SYSTEM SECURITY COVERAGE

1. Footbridges Entry/Egress Points (Staircase) - surveillance at all access

points shall achieve Identification (200ppm) equipped with Facial
Recognition analytics.

2. Lifts – surveillance within the lifts shall achieve Identification (200ppm)

equipped with Facial Recognition analytics.

3. Lifts Lobby - surveillance covering lifts Lobby areas shall achieve

Identification (200ppm) equipped with Facial Recognition analytics.

4. Footbridges ramps – surveillance along footbridges ramps shall achieve

Recognition (100ppm) for the full length of the bridge.

5. Security equipment Room - surveillance of the access door shall achieve

recognition (100ppm).

17.1.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

17.1.3.1 Conops

The Contractor must submit a surveillance coverage matrix for Footbridges RTA
infrastructure as part of the design process and submit this for approval by RTA corporate
security& control section.

-2-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

The Concept of Operations (CONOPs) for Video Surveillance will be based upon three
core functions of Monitoring, Assessment and Investigation as identified below.

17.1.3.2 Video Monitoring

Video surveillance will be used extensively for pro-active monitoring of Footbridges RTA
infrastructure by RTA corporate security& control. The Contractor must therefore ensure
that the extent of coverage, imaging performance, quality of live viewing and ease of
navigation between cameras, are suitable for this role.

17.1.3.3 Video Assessment

The second function of the Video Surveillance System will be to provide an Assessment
capability following an alarm trigger from another sub-system, or from video analytics-
based detection. As identified earlier, it will be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure
that, to the fullest extent possible, the Footbridges integrated CCTV security system is
‘Event-Driven’ in order to minimise the requirement for manual operator monitoring.

Therefore, it will be necessary to ensure that all potential areas where an alarm event could
occur, have the appropriate level of surveillance coverage to allow an immediate
assessment to be made.

Furthermore, the system should provide automatic image switching and display to the point
of alarm, as well as pre- and post-alarm recording at full frame rate and resolution.

17.1.3.4 Video Investigation

The third core function of the system will be that of Video Investigation, whereby recorded
video will be utilised to establish the cause of security incidents that have already occurred,
identify potential suspects, facilitate post-incident analysis and provide evidential material
in support of subsequent prosecution.

In order to achieve the required capability, the Contractor must provide both high quality
recorded imagery, as well as the intelligent video search and synopsis capabilities
necessary to provide an efficient means of analysis. Furthermore, the system must be able
to output and manage evidential material to the required local (Dubai Police) and
International standards.

The above functions will primarily be achieved via the use of fixed camera surveillance
coverage of the Footbridges and supporting infrastructure; PTZ cameras may be used in a
supporting secondary role where additional coverage is required to fulfil the Performance
Requirements identified below.

-3-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

17.1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

17.1.4.1 Camera Operational Requirements

Every camera that will be used for Footbridges will have a clear Operational Requirement
that identifies the specific function and purpose of the device and video output.
The contractor will be responsible for documenting and maintaining these operational
requirements, which are set out in the following table (examples in Italics).

Table 1: Camera Operational Requirements

4. Purpose
2. Activity 3. Target Type
Detect
1. Location Intrusion Person
Monitor
Zone Sabotage Multiple Persons
Recognise
Asset Theft Vehicle
Identify
Violence Object
Number Plate

5. Target Speed 6. Event Trigger 7. When Monitored

8. Where Monitored
Walking Video Analytics 24/7
Local
Running Intrusion Alarm Operational Hours
EC3
Stationary Access Control Device Alarm Only
RTAHQ CSC
Variable Other Sensor No Live Monitoring

9. System Response 10.Operator Response 11. Recording 12. Retrieval

Pre/Post Alarm Buffer Monitor Retention Time Archive only
Visual Alert Alert Supervisor Quality Intelligent Search
Audible Alert Alert Authorities Frame Rate Facial Recognition
Auto Track Target Implement SOP Metadata Export

These operational requirements will subsequently be used to identify specific performance

requirements necessary to achieve the above operational use factors. The range of potential
Performance Requirements that must be addressed are stated in the sections below.

17.1.4.2 Target Image Height

Referencing various Target Image Heights defined as 1.6 meter (i.e. the percentage of the
vertical screen that a human-sized target occupies within the image) provides a useful
means to help ensure that the video surveillance system provides video images capable of
achieving various operational requirements.

This is particularly important for Video Assessment capability given that the operator may
not have time to take advantage of digital zoom or playback. The concept of Target Image
Height is illustrated in the following diagram:

-4-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

Figure 1: Example Target Image Heights

The camera acceptance test must be conduct be using a standard target like the rotiken.

The following table identifies the Target Image Height reference levels that must be utilised
in video surveillance design for Footbridges CCTV system, along with corresponding
Operational Requirements and example applications.

Table 2: Target Image Heights and Example Applications

Target
Image Pixels Per Example
Category Operational Requirement
Height Meter Applications

An observer should be able to monitor the

number, direction and speed of movement
Monitor & of people across a wide area, providing
5% 10
Control their presence is known to him; i.e. they do
not have to be searched for.
After an alert an observer would be able to - Bridges Virtual 5m
search the display screens and ascertain Perimeter
Detect 10% 20 with a high degree of certainty whether or - Building Façade
not a person is present.
Viewers can say with a high degree of - Footbridges ramps
certainty whether or not an individual - Security equipment
Recognise 50% 100 shown is the same as someone they have Room
seen before. Alternatively, a vehicle
number plate should be identifiable.

-5-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

Picture quality and detail should be - Lift

sufficient to enable the identity of an - Lift Lobby
Identify 120% 200
individual to be established beyond
reasonable doubt.

17.1.4.3 Resolution (Pixels Per Meter)

The above table also includes an equivalent target resolution in Pixels Per Meter (PPM).1
This can be used as an alternative reference for High Definition or Megapixel Video
Cameras, where the additional resolution may allow the same Operational Requirements
to be achieved using a smaller Target Image Height; due to the cameras ability to capture
significantly more detail (pixels) within the scene, which subsequently allows areas of the
image to be enlarged within the monitoring application, without compromising image
quality (This is typically referred to as a ‘Digital Zoom’ function and is in contrast with an
Optical Zoom whereby a motorised lens is used to zoom in on a subject).

The use of smaller Target Image Heights than those outlined in the above table may be
acceptable for a small number of cameras under the following circumstances:

1. Cameras images are used primarily in a Video Investigation role where digital
zoom can be applied to achieve the same level of detail at lower Target Image
Heights.
2. Images are used in circumstances where the operator has time to digitally zoom in
to the live image whilst the target is still within the field of view – for example
whilst subjects are in a queue or similar static position.

However, where cameras also need to perform a live Video Assessment/Alarm

Verification role, the minimum Target Image Height reference levels must be achieved to
ensure that the detection function can be maintained in real-time.

17.1.4.4 Live and Recorded Video Frame Rates

The Video Surveillance System must provide the following minimum frame rates based on
the PAL video standard:

1. Live Video: 25 frames per second (FPS) for all live video transmitted to the local
monitoring station.

2. Recorded Video: 12 FPS for all standard recorded video (non-alarm conditions).

3. Alarm Video: 25 FPS for all recorded alarm video, including 2 minute pre-alarm
and 15 minutes post alarm.

1
PPM is calculated by dividing the horizontal camera resolution in pixels by the width of the video scene
in meters.

-6-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

The system must be capable of outputting separate live and recorded video streams, either
directly from the camera of via the Video Management System. In addition it must be
possible to output a third stream to the OCC at a range of user-selected frame rates from 1
to 25 FPS, as instructed by the RTA based upon available backhaul bandwidth.

17.1.4.5 Video Recording

All video images may be required for use in a Video Investigation role and therefore must
be recorded in sufficient resolution for use as investigative and evidential material. this is
considered to be a minimum of 1080p resolution.

Recorded video will be retained on live/fast storage for a period of 31 days and
subsequently moved to slow/archived storage for a minimum retention period of 3 months
before being overwritten, with the exception of Video Alarm Data, which will be retained
for a minimum of 1 year. The Contractor must implement redundant / failover video storage
via one of the following methods:

1. Use of RAID 5/6 storage AND use of failover Application Servers

2. Use of failover storage AND failover Application Servers

The Contractor must provide automatic synchronisation between failover servers, either
via use of a separate synchronisation server, or via virtualisation.

17.1.4.6 Evidential Handling

The Video Surveillance System for Footbridges must provide the following capabilities in
order to allow the secure control and export of evidential material:

1. Tagging of recorded video that will be used for evidential purposes.

2. Digital watermarking and time stamping of evidential video.
3. Secure export process requiring administrator privileges.
4. Digital export log that provides a clear audit trail of the export process.
5. It must have the capabilities of fast footage export of converted videos or in raw
format provided the video player software.

17.1.4.7 Video Management System

The Video Management System provided by the contractor must be capable of the
following minimum functions:

1. Processing of multiple live and recorded video streams.

-7-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

2. Local recording and playback (via NVR application) and central recording and
playback at the EC3 & RTAHQ CSC. Video downloads must be strictly controlled
by a nominated person within the OCC only.
3. Integration of alarm event data from other local sub-systems including Video
Analytics, Intrusion Detection, Access Control, Public Address, and Fire Systems.
4. Provide a central alarm stack such that all main sub-system alarms can be monitored
from within the VMS application.
5. Provide automatic image switching and display of cameras associated with alarm
locations.
6. Provide the capability to automatically increase recording frame rate and resolution
in response to alarm events.
7. Provide a Graphical User Interface (GUI) with embedded Footbridges maps that is
capable of displaying interactive sensor icons with activate / deactivate controls,
alarm events and device tags.
8. Support Integration with the existing/new VMS and PSIM systems deployed at
theEC3 & RTAHQ CSC.

17.1.4.8 Facial Recognition Requirements

Facial Recognition will be applied to surveillance camera feeds at Footbridges CCTV

System and therefore the Contractor must ensure that all cameras used at designated
capture points, including station/ footbridges entrances and ticket counters, meet the
following additional criteria:

1. Captures the frontal area of the face with a maximum operational tolerance of +/-
15 degrees yaw or pitch and 20 degrees roll. The height of the camera and distance
to the person at the target capture point will determine whether or not this is
achieved, as shown below:

Figure 2: Facial Recognition Field of View Requirements.

2. Utilise cameras with a minimum resolution of 1.3 Megapixels (1280x1024).

-8-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

3. Use Camera/Lens Field of View (FoV) combinations that provide images with a
minimum of 100 pixels between the pupils of a subject standing at the capture point.
4. Provide the ability to stream live and recorded images at 25 fps.
5. Provide ONVIF compliance for integration of video feeds into third party facial
recognition server applications.

17.1.5 VIDEO ANALYTICS

17.1.5.1 Conops

In addition to traditional electronic sensors used to generate alarms, Video Analytics will
be used in selective areas of Footbridges RTA infrastructure in order to further reduce the
requirement for manual monitoring of video surveillance systems and aid security
personnel in detecting and investigating potential security breaches. There will be three
primary categories of video analytics utilised as part of the security function, as identified
below.

1. Intrusion Detection: this will consist of various rules capable of alerting operators
to potential intrusions into restricted areas.
2. Behavioural Analytics: this will include more complex cognitive rules that alert
operators to suspicious behaviour in public areas of the station.
3. Investigative Analytics: this will include tools for the intelligent searching of
recorded video, via the application of metadata to create an automated visual
database of events.

The use of video analytics for Footbridges CCTV system will initially be focused towards
high-risk areas and associated critical assets rather than on all camera feeds.

The following section identifies the specific type of analytic rules and performance
requirements that the contractor must deliver.

17.1.5.2 Performance Requirements

17.1.5.2.1 Intrusion Detection

The contractor will provide a Video Analytics solution that can perform the following
intrusion detection functions on selected camera video images:

1. Tripwire Detection – creation of a virtual tripwire within the video scene, which
generates an alarm when crossed by a target object such as a person or vehicle.
2. Area Detection – creation of a virtual detection zone within a three-dimensional
space, which generates an alarm when a target object enters.

-9-
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

The contractor’s video analytics solution for the above intrusion detection functions must
provide a minimum of 95% Probability of Detection (PoD) against all types of intrusion,
with a maximum Nuisance Alarm Rate (NAR) of 1 per camera per 48 hours.

17.1.5.2.2 Behavioural Analytics

The contractor will provide a Video Analytics solution that can perform the following
behavioural detection functions on selected camera video images:

1. Abandoned Vehicle – creation of an alarm when a vehicle is stationary in a target

zone (such as illegally parked adjacent to the building façade) AND where the
driver then exits the vehicle.
2. Abandoned Object – creation of an alarm when an object is abandoned in or
around the Bridges areas.
3. Loitering Detection – creation of an alarm when people remain in one area for an
unnecessary period of time.

The contractor’s video analytics solution for the above behavioural detection functions
must provide a minimum of 90% Probability of Detection (PoD) against all types of
incidents, with a maximum Nuisance Alarm Rate (NAR) of 1 per camera per 24 hours.

17.1.5.2.3 Investigative Analytics

The contractor will provide a Video Analytics solution that can perform the following
investigative functions in relation to recorded video images from all cameras:

1. Define areas of interest and areas of exclusion within the video scene.
2. Define and search by objects of interest, including attributes of colour, size,
direction and speed.
3. Provide a video synopsis function where original video duration is automatically
reduced by applying attribute filters.
4. Allow objects of interest to be tagged and annotated.
5. Provide case management and user access control.
6. Provide secure export of original video footage.

The investigative analytics solution must be integrated with the Video Management System
to provide a seamless operator interface.

17.1.5.2.4 System Architecture

- 10 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

A central server-based Video Analytics solution is the preferred systems architecture in

order to provide the flexibility to apply detection rules to different cameras in future.
However, for those cameras acting in a dedicated intrusion detection role, camera-based
analytics will be acceptable providing that the camera utilises dedicated on-board GPU
hardware for processing.

The contractor’s proposed server-based analytics solutions must be capable of processing

video from all types of camera implemented for the Footbridges CCTV project, as well as
other types of cameras as may be required in future, whereby they conform to open protocol
standards such as ONVIF.

17.1.5.2.4 Alarm Filters

All Video Analytics solutions provided by the Contractor must have the following alarm
filter options as a minimum:

1. Time of Day/Week/Month
2. Direction of Travel
3. Object Size/Type
4. Object Speed

The contractor will be required to configure all video analytics rules in such a manner as
to ensure that all of the above performance requirements have been met in full, and in
compliance with RTAs requirements, which may only be defined in full during the
commissioning process. The contractor must also provide full training to RTA staff to
allow the video analytics to be set up by RTA staff in future. Additional support or training
must be provided by the Contractor as necessary throughout the maintenance period.

17.1.5.2.5 Network design considerations

Video traffic demands high bandwidth and should be isolated from other traffic physically.
Security network should be totally isolated from the operation network and dedicated only
for the security application.

The contractor will be required to consider the following aspects during the network
design:

• The ability to prioritize data packets for services that are more time-critical, such
as achieved with the Quality of Service (QoS).
• Avoidance of the cascade type of CCTV failure that could lead to undesired
bandwidth saturation.
• Ensuring that switching of networks must not interrupt the recording of CCTV data
for more than one second.

- 11 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

• Capability to detect network failures and report network malfunctions to the

onboard diagnostics system so that corrective actions can be undertaken as quickly
as possible.
• Ensuring that the design of the systems will respond well to emergency situations.
For example, the queuing of passenger emergency calls must be well coordinated
with the CCTV system to prevent overflow of the network by streaming all
passenger emergency intercom cameras at once

17.1.5.2.6 Recorder security

Steps must be taken to ensure the physical security and integrity of the system’s recording
device. Placement of the recording device in a restricted-access location, such as a locked
cabinet or room. Note that proper environmental controls must be implemented according
to the manufacturer’s specifications. For example, NVRs and hard drives require adequate
airflow to prevent overheating.

17.1.5.2.7 Outdoor housing

Outdoor housing to be include thermostatically controlled heaters and fans, window

wipers and washers, sun shields and shrouds.

17.1.5.2.8 Minimum Technical Performance for NVR

Deep Learning and Analytics

• Face pictures library management
• Face pictures comparison and alarm linkage actions
• Search by picture
• More precise human body recognition and analytics based on deep
learning algorithm
• Video structure analysis: extract features of the human body and vehicle
for quick search
• Extracts the moving targets from the video and play in the live view
screen
• HDD data smart release to maintain longer saving time of important data
• Video abstract playback to view target of interest in the video

HD Video Output and Decoding

• Support H.265+ decoding format
• Up to 20-ch decoding at 1080p resolution
• HDMI1 and HDMI2 outputs provided
• HDMI1 output at up to 4K (4096 × 2160) resolution

Storage and Playback

• Full channel recording at up to 12 MP resolution

- 12 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

• Up to 8 TB capacity for each HDD supported

• HDD hot swap with RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, RAID6 and RAID10
storage scheme configurable
• 16-ch synchronous playback at 1080p resolution

17.1.5.2.9 Minimum Technical Performance 2 MP VF Dome Network Camera face

capture camera

• 1/1.8” Progressive Scan CMOS

• 1920 × 1080 @ 60fps
• 2.8 to 12 mm
• Color: 0.002 Lux @ (F1.2, AGC ON)
• H.265, H.265+, H.264, H.264+
• 140 dB WDR
• IR range: up to 50 m for 2.8 to 12 mm lens
• Alarm I/O
• IP67, IK10
• High accuracy face detection and capture, which adopts new face
detection and tracking and grading algorithms powered by deep-learning
technology
• Perimeter protection, based on deep learning powered target detection and
classification algorithms, supports line crossing, intrusion, region
entrance, and region exit
• Five defined streams and up to five custom streams
• Built-in microSD/SDHC/SDXC card slot, up to 256 GB

17.1.5.2.10 Minimum Technical Performance for 2 MP VF Bullet Network

Camera face capture camera

• 1/1.8” Progressive Scan CMOS

• 1920 × 1080 @ 60fps
• 2.8 to 12 mm
• Color: 0.002 Lux @ (F1.2, AGC ON)
• H.265, H.265+, H.264, H.264+
• 140 dB WDR
• IR range: up to 50 m for 2.8 to 12 mm lens
• Alarm I/O
• IP67, IK10
• High accuracy face detection and capture, which adopts new face
detection and tracking and grading algorithms powered by deep-learning
technology

- 13 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

• Perimeter protection, based on deep learning powered target detection and

classification algorithms, supports line crossing, intrusion, region
entrance, and region exit
• Five defined streams and up to five custom streams
• Built-in microSD/SDHC/SDXC card slot, up to 256 GB

17.1.5.2.11 Minimum Technical Performance for 2 MP Box Network Camera face

capture camera

• 1/1.8” Progressive Scan CMOS

• 1920 × 1080 @ 60fps
• 2.8 to 12 mm
• Color: 0.002 Lux @ (F1.2, AGC ON)
• H.265, H.265+, H.264, H.264+
• 140 dB WDR
• Alarm I/O
• IP67, IK10
• High accuracy face detection and capture, which adopts new face
detection and tracking and grading algorithms powered by deep-learning
technology
• Perimeter protection, based on deep learning powered target detection and
classification algorithms, supports line crossing, intrusion, region
entrance, and region exit
• Five defined streams and up to five custom streams
• Built-in microSD/SDHC/SDXC card slot, up to 256 GB

17.1.5.2.12 Minimum Technical Performance for 2 MP VF ANPR Bullet Network

Camera

• 1/1.8" progressive scan CMOS

• Full HD1080p video, up to 60fps
• 2.8 to 12 mm and 8 to 32 mm motor-driven lens optional
• 140dB WDR
• Auto-iris, DC drive
• Color: 0.002 Lux @(F1.2, ADC On)
• H.265, H.265+. H.264, H.264+
• IR range: up to 100 m (-IZS)
• White light range up to 30m(-LZS)

- 14 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

• 3D DNR/Defog/EIS/HLC/BLC
• IP67, IK10
• License plate recognition
• Support vehicle speed under 120km/h (74.6mi/h)
• Up to 10000 whitelist and blacklist

17.2 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS

17.2.1 TESTING PROCESS

The principal phases in the acceptance testing process shall be as follows:

• Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT);

o Independent Laboratory Tests;

o Factory Production Tests;
o Factory System Tests;

• Site Acceptance Tests (SAT);

o Commissioning of Outstation Equipment;

o Commissioning of In-station Equipment;
o Integration Tests

• Reliability Test.

17.2.1.1 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)

These tests are to be performed at the Contractor's factory, or other approved locations,
before any equipment is shipped to Dubai.

The tests are intended to demonstrate that the hardware and software comprising the system
are in compliance with the Specifications and function together as an integrated system.

Tests shall be conducted by an independent, qualified, testing laboratory on a

representative sample of each lot of manufactured outstation equipment prior to shipment.
The size of the sample shall be subject to the approval of the Client.

The environmental conditions to be tested are identified in Section 1.8 of these Particular
Specifications and all the Outstation equipment are subject to this requirement.

- 15 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

The System Design Document shall identify the test laboratory or laboratories proposed to
be used. The test laboratories shall be subject to the approval of the Client, as shall the test
procedures used by the independent testing laboratory.

The Contractor shall provide the Client with certified copies of test results for all tests
conducted at Independent Laboratories as part of Factory Acceptance Tests.

17.2.1.2 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT) and Integration Tests

These tests cover all Outstation and In-station system components being provided as part
of this project, in their installed locations, including all materials furnished and installed.
Complete functionality shall be tested as defined in the System Design Document and as
specified in the Particular Specifications.

17.2.1.3 Reliability Test

Following the successful completion of the Integration Tests, a 12-week Reliability Test
shall be conducted. During this period the complete system shall operate with the specified
level of functionality and reliability and shall operate to the satisfaction of the Client
without unresolved, intermittent or sporadic failures.

RTA reserves the right to terminate the Reliability Test, in the event that major faults are
identified with the deployed system, or RTA is not able to utilize the system to the required
functionality. The Reliability Test Period of 12 weeks will restart from zero after
rectification of the major fault.

All defects detected during or subsequent to the Reliability Test shall have been rectified
and successfully passed their tests prior to the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.

17.2.1.4 Contractor's Test Procedures

The Tenderer shall thoroughly describe his approach to each phase of acceptance testing
in his Proposal.

Detailed FAT and SAT test procedures and schedules shall be finalized by the Contractor
following the System Design Document stage of the Contract. The final test procedures
shall follow the scope and intent of the tests defined herein but shall be expanded in detail
and grouping to conform better to the Contractor's equipment and in-house test procedures.
The Contractor shall not alter the basic testing sequence of Factory and Site Acceptance
Tests.

The Contractor shall submit detailed test procedures to the Client for approval at least four
(1) weeks prior to the scheduled test date. Tests shall not commence without written
approval from the Client for the proposed test procedures.

- 16 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall provide all equipment and materials necessary to conduct all tests,
including all test equipment.

The Tenderer shall indicate in the Proposal the estimated time required for each test phase
specified herein. The Tenderer shall also describe in his Proposal any additional acceptance
tests considered necessary and shall indicate an estimate of the time required for any
proposed additional tests.

17.2.2 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

Two types of system documentation are to be supplied by the Contractor, namely:

• Standard Documentation; and

• Project Documentation.

17.2.2.1 Standard Documentation

The manufacturer's standard documentation shall be provided for all items of standard, off-
the-shelf hardware and software supplied for the system.

The Contractor shall provide such documentation in binders.

Standard System Documentation shall be submitted at the time of installation on-site of the
appropriate equipment.

All Standard Documentation shall be supplied as a minimum of three (3) copies.

17.2.2.2 Project Documentation

Documentation shall be produced by the Contractor as part of each component element of

the Works. It shall be prepared in a form that can be issued at various points in the Contract
in draft or intermediate form, until finalized as As-Built by the Contractor.

A modular system of developing Project Documentation shall be proposed and described

by the Tenderer.

The proposal shall include provision of resources to produce documentation throughout the
Contract. Sections issued during the Contract will be regarded as in draft form.

The issuance of Project Documentation is required throughout the Contract to fully inform
the Client of the system being implemented, even if several revisions are necessary for
particular documents.

- 17 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

Project Documentation shall be prepared in a form suitable for inclusion in the relevant
final manuals. This method will save effort and maintain familiarity of the Client's staff
with the information presented.

All Project Documentation shall contain a complete subject index with appropriate cross-
references to other manuals.

Project Documentation includes System Hardware and Software Manuals, As-built

drawings, Detailed Operator's Handbook, Detailed Engineer's Manual, Maintenance
Manual, etc.

All Project Documentation shall be supplied as a minimum of five (5) copies.

17.2.3 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall conduct training courses for the RTA's staff. Training courses shall
be designed to ensure that the RTA's staff achieves a full knowledge and appreciation of
the design, operation and maintenance of the equipment and software being supplied as
part of this project.

Training sessions shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Client prior to the issuance
of the Taking-over Certificate.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of suitable training facility, training
documentation, appropriate System equipment and teaching staff.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary meals during any
continuous training sessions extending from morning until late afternoon. All trainings
shall take place in Dubai.

The courses shall be a combination of lectures and demonstrations and shall provide
practical (hands-on) training and experience, as appropriate to the specific training course.

The Contractor shall provide a detailed program of training and a syllabus for each course
for the approval of the Client within the System Design Document period of the Contract.
The information shall include tentative dates for courses, locations, an outline of topics and
names of instructors.

17.2.4 ISSUANCE OF TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE

Upon completion of Final Acceptance Test activities to the satisfaction of the Client and
upon compliance with all other specified requirements, the Taking-Over Certificate will be
issued.

- 18 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

Upon issuance of this certificate, the Defects Liability Period of the Contract and First Year
of Maintenance shall commence.

- 19 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

17.3 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

17.3.1 WARRANTY

17.3.1.1 Scope and Intent

The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive warranty of all components and system,
including software provided under this contract. The scope of the warranty shall provide a
comprehensive on-site warranty, which covers materials and workmanship, such that
equipment and systems continue to meet their performance measures as set out in the
contract.

The intent of these warranty requirements is to influence design of equipment and services
to provide the Client with a system with a minimum design life of fifteen years. Given the
functional nature of these system specifications and the system design latitude permitted
to encourage the application of state-of-the-art advances, these guarantees are considered
minimum assurance that sound design practices shall be used.

The Contractor shall guarantee that all articles of equipment, including all parts thereof,
are of first quality throughout and comply in all respects or are fully equal to standards
called for in the specifications. The Contractor shall further guarantee all equipment, and
all parts thereof, against any defects of workmanship, construction, and materials and shall
guarantee to repair or replace, without cost to the Client, any article that has become
defective, and not proven to have been caused by negligence on the part of the user.

17.3.1.2 Warranty Periods

The Warranty Period of one year shall begin upon commencement of the Defect Liability
Period and continue until issuance of the Defect Liability Certificate.

17.3.1.3 Contractor’s Responsibilities

The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing and/or replacing all hardware and systems
supplied under the Contract. The Contractor shall also bear the total cost of delivery and
transportation costs related to the repair of the supplied equipment during the terms of the
guarantee as detailed in this section. The Client shall reserve the sole right to determine
unsuitability of the supplied equipment within the warranty period.

The Contractor shall determine appropriate failure rates and repair times for all equipment
supplied under this Contract. Based on these rates, the Contractor shall provide the
necessary spare materials, components, and/or parts to ensure the continued proper
operation of the CCTV System. These materials and components shall form the basis for
the spares-holding requirement and shall include both local repairs and repairs that may
require shipment to the factory.

- 20 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

In the event of failure on the part of the Contractor to replace or put in first-class condition
any such equipment/sub-assemblies within thirty (30) calendar days from the date of
notice, the Client may have the work done by others and charge the cost to money due, or
that may become due to the Contractor, or if there be no money due, the Contractor shall
agree to pay such costs.

17.3.2 MAINTENANCE

17.3.2.1 Maintenance Duration of Three (3) Years

It is required that the various equipment and components making up the CCTV system be
maintained to a high level of operational integrity by the Contractor for a period of three
(3) years following the successful completion of the Reliability Test and Issuance of Taking
Over Certificate. This section describes the required functions and performance standards
expected for maintenance of the CCTV system.

In addition to maintenance during the three-year period specified above, the Contractor
shall be fully responsible for all maintenance activities for the period between installation
of equipment and issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate. All costs incurred by the
Contractor for maintenance prior to the Taking-Over Certificate shall be considered to be
included in the costs for the associated components.

Following completion of the specified three-year maintenance period, the Client may
request the Contractor to provide maintenance services for additional years. Annual
increases in rates for maintenance beyond the third year shall be limited to a maximum of
five (5) percent per year.

17.3.2.2 General Requirements

A complete program of weekly, monthly and quarterly routine preventive maintenance and
repair functions must be provided to maintain the system components in proper operations.

Maintenance and repairs shall include all such instances that require such activities
including ordinary equipment and/or hardware failures and damages caused by outside
agencies. These maintenance and repair functions are considered a part of the general
responsibility of the Contractor and will not be a separate rate pay item.

Certain items and/or components, however, may be subject to damage and/or destruction
by forces outside the Contractor's direct control. Cabinets, poles and support structures and
other items that cannot be effectively protected from outside interference must be properly
restored to their original condition by the Contractor, even when damaged by forces outside
his control. Under such circumstances, the Client will reimburse the Contractor for the
costs involved from the agency and/or person responsible for such damages.

- 21 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

17.3.3 PERIODIC PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

In order to ensure the maximum utilization of the system and its components, the
Contractor shall undertake a program of preventive maintenance. This program requires
the periodic inspection, cleaning, lubricating or other recommended preventive
maintenance activities regarding each component of the CCTV System.

The preventive maintenance program for in-station equipment shall be accomplished on a

monthly, quarterly or semi-annual basis or less as recommended by the manufacturer.
Preventive maintenance activities regarding all electrical and electronic outstation
equipment shall be provided on a monthly basis, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Outstation hardware items such as poles should be scheduled on an annual basis. Activities
relating to outstation hardware preventive maintenance include such tasks as inspection,
cleaning, painting and repair.

The Contractor shall maintain a log of all preventive maintenance activities undertaken. A
copy of the log shall be provided to the Client at monthly intervals.

The Tenderer shall submit with his Proposal a detailed outline of the anticipated periodic
maintenance activities and schedule (frequency) for the CCTV System.

17.3.4 RESPONSE AND REPAIR TIME REQUIREMENTS

System elements are divided into a number of categories, in order to describe response
and repair requirements, as follows:

• Critical In-station Equipment;

• Non-critical In-station Equipment;
• CCTV Equipment;
• Outstation Equipment;
• Communications Network; and
• Applications Software.

The Tenderer, in his response, shall identify his “critical” and “noncritical” components.
Critical components shall be those components that impact the ability for staff to monitor
and operate the CCTV system.

The Contractor shall make available adequate levels of personnel, equipment, test facilities
and repair facilities, including necessary transportation and mobile workshops, to achieve
the minimum response and repair time requirements.

The response and maximum continuous outage times indicated in this table include normal
periods (0600-2200) as well as night response times. Fridays and official holidays will use
right response times.

- 22 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

The Tenderer should indicate any suggested changes to these response times and
procedures in his Proposal, along with any explanatory information that is required.

Exhibit 6.1
Minimum Maintenance Response and Repair Requirements
Response Time Maximum Continuous Outage
Normal Night Factor Normal Availability
Item Night (Hrs)
(Hrs) (Hrs) (%) (Hrs) Ratio
Critical Instation
1 6 95 3 12 99
Equipment
Non-critical Instation
2 12 90 24 48 98
Equipment

CCTV Equipment 2 12 95 6 36 99

Outstation Equipment 2 12 90 24 36 99

Communications
1 6 95 24 36 99
Network

Applications Software 1 6 95 3 12 99

In the above Exhibit, the following notes apply:

Night - “Night” encompasses the period between 22:00 and 6:00 daily. Response times for
Night also apply all day on Fridays and on official national holidays.

Response Time - The time allowed from notification of a fault until a Contractor's
representative is at the scene of the fault.

Factor (%) - The percentage of times that the Contractor is expected to conform to the
Stipulated Response Time for each specific fault category.

Maximum Continuous Outage - The maximum continuous number of hours that it is

permitted for an item to be out of service, excluding the period from 22:00 to 06:00.

Availability Ratio - A ratio relating the serviceable time for an equipment item to the
serviceable plus out-of-service time.

Ratio = (Serviceable Time x 100) / (Serviceable Time + Outage Time)

17.3.5 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE

The Contractor shall make available the necessary personnel, equipment and spare
components to effect repairs to any system component on an emergency basis. Traffic
accidents and other extraordinary events that demolish or otherwise render inoperable

- 23 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

system components, including poles and support structure, are considered to fall under this
category. The Tenderer shall identify in his proposal the magnitude and nature of such
events that he anticipates and plans for.

17.3.6 SPARES HOLDING

The Contractor shall maintain an adequate level of spare equipment and components in
Dubai to meet the specified maintenance requirements at all times. The minimum amount
of spares holdings shall be determined by a combination of the MTBF for the individual
component, the number of units in the system and the anticipated order and delivery time
for replacement units.

The Tenderer shall include in his Proposal a list of all equipment items to be included in
the system down to the circuit board level. The MTBF rates for each of these items shall
be indicated, along with the number of units in use. At a minimum, the Contractor is
required to maintain spare component assemblies equal to a four-week supply at the
indicated MTBF rates and the number of units in use. The Tenderer shall provide a
complete listing of the anticipated spares holdings in his Proposal.

Components below the circuit board or assembly level must be maintained at a level equal
to the anticipated number of failures during the order and delivery time of the components.

The Contractor shall submit an updated list of proposed spare equipment and components
to the Client for approval. This list shall be submitted a minimum of 4 weeks before
commencement of the Defect Liability Period.

17.3.7 MAINTENANCE FACILITIES

The Contractor shall establish and maintain the necessary physical facilities to allow the
timely completion of the required maintenance duties. This shall include, but will not be
limited to, the following: office and working space, test equipment, tools, rolling stock,
mobile workshops and spare components and assemblies.

Test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to allow the complete testing and
diagnosing of problems relating to CCTV equipment. Test equipment shall also be
provided to allow the testing and diagnosing of electronic circuit problems on the
component circuit boards contained within the devices of the system.

All test equipment used by the Contractor shall have current calibration certification
available for inspection by the Client.

17.3.8 MAINTENANCE RECORDS

The Contractor shall keep an accurate and detailed record of all maintenance activities.
Standard forms shall be developed to serve as a basis for the recording system.

- 24 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

17.3.8.1 Maintenance Forms

Data items, which should be included in the forms for the various maintenance activities,
are listed below. Additional information felt to be necessary should also be included. The
forms shall be subject to approval of the Client.

Daily Maintenance
• date;
• time and source of notification of a fault;
• fault reported;
• time of arrival at location of reported fault;
• fault discovered;
• disposition of fault;
• identification of equipment and components replaced;
• time spent on the fault;
• identification of further action required; and
• personnel conducting maintenance.

Periodic Preventive Maintenance

• date;
• location;
• check list of activities to be performed;
• identification of faults discovered;
• action taken;
• identification of equipment and components replaced;
• time spent;
• identification of further action required; and
• personnel conducting maintenance.

Emergency and Other Maintenance

• This form shall contain the same listing of items as the Daily Maintenance form.
Additionally, it should contain the reason for the emergency repair and the person
authorizing said repairs.

17.3.8.2 Inventory Records

The Contractor shall maintain a complete inventory of CCTV system equipment,

components and assemblies, including spares holdings in Dubai. These records shall be
kept up-to-date daily. Each item of inventory used shall be cross-referenced to the
maintenance report and the location where the item was used.

- 25 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

When a shipment of components, assemblies etc. is received, the inventory records shall
be updated to reflect the items received.
An inventory record shall also be maintained that indicates the date each item was ordered
and when it was received.

17.3.8.3 Maintenance Reports

The Contractor shall submit to the Client a detailed monthly report of all maintenance
activities and a summary of updated MTBF rates for all items maintained on inventory. An
annual report shall also be provided. These reports shall include; but will not be limited to,
the following;

• computer failures and rates;

• peripheral device failures and rates;
• outstation failure rates, by type of device;
• emergency repairs effected;
• summaries of other failures and rates.

These reports should also include any suggestions and/or recommendations for
improvements to the maintenance procedures and programs.

The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Client on the format and
content of all Maintenance Reports.

The reports shall be given as per the Client’s system using a performance indicator
technique to show the Contractor’s performance. These indicators include:

• Response Time
• Outage Type
• Time to Repair
• Availability Ratio

17.3.8.4 Maintenance Records Storage

All maintenance activity records and inventory records shall be stored in a computerized
database at the Contractor's maintenance facility. A copy of these records shall be
transmitted electronically to the Client as they are updated, in a format approved by the
Client.

The Contractor shall provide an electronic mechanism to access the CCTV system data in
order to ascertain operational and failure status, and shall provide RTA staff with on-
demand access to maintain reports, as well as the ability to issue work orders to the
Contractor.

- 26 -
SECTION 17 SECURITY CCTV PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS

The format and content of the maintenance database shall be subject to the approval of the
Client.

The maintenance database shall be the property of the Client, who shall have the right to
use it for any other purposes or to continue using it, if CCTV maintenance activities are
subsequently performed by other contractors.

The Contractor shall provide training, documentation, source code, and a licensed copy of
the maintenance database software to the Client for the Client’s use.

- 27 -
 Section 18
Metal Works
 SECTION 18 – METAL WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 18 – METAL WORKS ................................................................................................. 2

1 MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................... 2
2 COMPONENTS .................................................................................................................. 4
3 STEELWORK ..................................................................................................................... 9

-1-
 SECTION 18 – METAL WORKS
1 MATERIALS

1.1 General Provisions

(I) When a precise grade or alloy of metal is not specified the Contractor shall obtain the
metal from an approved specialist supplier or fabricator who shall be informed by the
Contractor of the particular application of the metal within the Works and it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to obtain the correct material suited to its application in the
Works.
(iii) All materials and components shall be the best of their respective kind, to the dimensions
shown on the drawings and where applicable sections shall be in accordance with the
relevant BS, DIN or approved equivalent standard.

1.2 Steel
(i) Where the terms "steel" or "mild steel" are used it shall mean steel to BS 4: 1, BS 1449,
BS 4360 or BS 4848 and shall be Grade 43a unless specified otherwise.
(ii) Stainless steels shall be austenitic non – magnetic steel unless specified otherwise and
shall be in accordance with BS 1449; Part 2 and BS 3100: 18/10/3 Chromium – nickel
– molunclenum group (BS Type 316) and finish shall be as specified. (e.g. Dull Polish,
Mirror Polish etc).

1.3 Aluminium
(i) The term "aluminium" shall mean `wrought aluminum alloys for general engineering
purposes' in accordance with the BS 1470 - 1475 series and `cast aluminum' shall be
aluminum cast by permanent mould or gravity die techniques to BS 1490 using LM6
alloy.

(ii) Fittings shall be aluminum alloy in accordance with BS 4951 the latest edition.
(iii) All exposed surfaces shall be polished to a mirror – like surface, free from defects, and
shall be light etched and anodized in a satin or a Matt champagne or silver or bronze or
brown finish as shown on drawings and as directed in writing by the Engineer.
(iv) Aluminum shall be treated to comply with BS 1615, and BS 3987, to provide an
anodization not less than 20 microns thickness.
(v) All aluminum sections shall present clear straight and sharply defined lines and shall
be free from defects and imperfections that may impair their strength.
(vi) All screws, bolts and other necessary accessories shall be of aluminum or other non-
corrodable material and shall match in color and consistency the finish of the anodized
aluminum.
(vii) Aluminum elastic glazing beads shall be provided to all windows and doors, which are
assembled by pressure to fit with the relevant groove in the profile.
(viii) The glazing bars shall be threaded or interlaced at points of intersections and machine
tenoned to frame.
(ix) The Contractor shall submit samples of components to the Engineer for approval
together with test certificates which show that the components possess the following
characteristics.

Mechanical Properties :
Cupping test to DIN 53156 9 mm
Bend test to DIN 53152 Less than 5 mm
Reverse impact to ASTM 27944-69 100-150 cm/kg

-2-
 Indentation hardness to DIN 53153 More than 100
Pencil hardness 2H
Cross cut test to DIN 53151 Gt.0

Continuous Heat Resistance :

After 1000 hours at 120 Deg.C Slight yellowing of white shades

Chemical Resistance :

Test Medium Time Result

Premium petrol (gasoline) 10 minutes No change

Ethanol 10 minutes No change
Toluene 10 minutes No change
Butyl acetate 10 minutes No change
Trichloroethylene 10 minutes Softening
Acetone 10 minutes Softening
Hydrochloric acid, 10% 4 weeks No change
Sulphuric aid, 10% 4 weeks No change
Acetic acid, 10% 4 weeks No change
Soda solution, 1% 4 weeks No change
Nitric acid, 1% 4 weeks No change
Fuel oil 4 weeks No change
Ammonia, 10% 4 weeks No change
Caustic soda lye, 10% 4 weeks Detached

Corrosion and Weathering Test :

Humidity test to DIN 50017 on zinc phosphated No change after 500 hours.
steel sheet
Salt spray test to ASTM B 117 on zinc No loss of adhesion after 20
phosphated steel sheet rounds
Weathering in Florida (USA) and industrial
Excell
ent results climate

1.4 Brass and Copper

(i) In addition to specified surface finishes, the Contractor shall where adequately treat
or seal the permanently hidden parts of metalwork from deterioration and corrosion
(excluding standard hollow sections).

(ii) Mill finish aluminum will not be accepted unless specified or to the Engineer's written
approval or to be subsequently decorated.

1.5 Bolts and Nuts

Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of BS 4190 : ISO metric black hexagon bolts,
screws, and nuts.
1.6 Washers

-3-
 Plain washers shall be made of galvanized steel. Taper or other specially shaped washers shall be
made of steel or malleable cast iron and shall conform to the requirements of BS 4230, Metal
washers for general engineering purposes.

1.7 Galvanized Steel Pipes

Galvanized steel pipes shall confirm to the requirements of BS 1387, ISO “Medium Series”.

1.8 Protective Coatings and Finishes

(a) Primers
Section of primers shall be in accordance with BS 5493 and shall comply to BS 2523,
BS 3098 or BS 4652.
(b) Galvanizing
Where steel is referred to as `galvanized', galvanizing shall be applied by Hot Drip
process to BS 729 and BS 2989 and unless specified otherwise shall be 85 microns (6.0
g/m2)
(c) Anodising
(i) Where indicated on the drawings or specified elsewhere aluminium shall be anodised in
accordance with BS 1615 Grade AA25 and BS 3987 to the colour and finish approved
by the Engineer.
(ii) Anodising shall be by the "Anoloc" process to give 25 micron minimum depth.
(iii) Sections shall be anodised before cutting into length to suit the fittings dimensions.

(d) Polyester Powder Coating

(i) Powder coatings shall comply to BS 6496 or BS 6497 as applicable to the material to be
coated.
(ii) Polyes`ter powder coating shall be to a minimum film thickness of 100 microns and
carried out by an approved specialist to the specified colour.
(iii) Steel to receive polyester powder coatings shall be first galvanized in accordance with
Clause 1.5(b) above.
(iv) Aluminium sections to receive polyester powder coatings shall be first cleaned,
degreased and primed with two-pack etch primer.

(v) As far as possible the assembled units as a whole shall be coated to avoid joint heat
build-up, scratches, touching up joints, etc. Powder coating shall be carried out in a well
established factory fully equipped for such works and shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.

(e) Painting
When described on the drawings/schedules painting of metalwork shall be in accordance
with Section N of this specification.

2 COMPONENTS

2.1 General Requirements

(i) All components shall be obtained from an approved supplier/fabricator and the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a complete set of shop drawings. Drawings
must be submitted at least 4 weeks before starting fabrication, showing elevations, plans
and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed methods of forming joints, any
proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.
(ii) The design of metal components shall comply with the requirements of BS 4479 in as much

-4-
 as they are applicable to the specific component, and where a British Standard exists for
that component it shall also be complied with.
(iii) The shop drawings referred to in 2.1 (i) above shall conform to the design, dimensions and
general descriptions as shown on the drawings/schedules and as specified.
(iv) After finalization of all details, prepare control samples as requested and obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding with manufacture.
(v) All fixings shall be of materials compatible with the component being fixed and where
dissimilar metals are used adequate precautions, such as coating or sleeving, shall be taken
to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
(vi) All nuts and bolts shall be adequately protected from corrosion and all exposed bolts
including Carpenters and Joiners metalwork are to be capped with an approved dome
headed nut.

2.2 Aluminium Windows, Doors and Screens

(i) Aluminium windows shall be manufactured to BS 4873 and tested to BS 4315 Part b comply
with severe exposure rating as defined in BS 6375 Part 1.
(ii) The Contractor shall obtain from the window manufacturer all design calculations in respect
of wind loading for external windows and screens and submit them to the Engineer for
approval.
(iii) Aluminium framed sliding glass doors shall be in accordance with BS 5286.
(iv) Glazing shall be installed at the factory at the time of manufacture in accordance with
Section M of this specification.
(v) All fixings, ironmongery, locks and locking devices, fly screens, glazing, weather stripping
etc, necessary for the proper and intended function of the component shall be included with
the component and shall be allowed for within the Contractors Tender.
(vi) Ironmongery to such fabricated components shall be comparable to the ironmongery used
elsewhere and suited to the proposed operation of the component and the component shall
be suitably strengthened, lapped and modified to receive the ironmongery.
(vii) When shown on the drawings/schedules or specified, particular requirements for
ironmongery and any other integral parts of the component shall be included.
(viii) All frames, angles, channels and the like shall be non-ferrous and fixed with countersunk
aluminium screws or as indicated on the drawings/schedules all of which shall be finished
to match exactly the colour and finish of the adjacent aluminium components and sections
or to the specified finish colour.
(ix) All aluminium windows, doors, frames etc shall be factory assembled and reinforced
according to the drawings, complete with hinges, glazing gaskets and anchors. The only site
work allowed on aluminium units is fixing in position and glazing. The finished surfaces
shall present a clear surface free from alloy defects, scratches, or other surface blemishes.
(x) All aluminium windows, doors, etc. shall be provided with necessary ironmongery required
for its efficient functioning. Ironmongery shall be in conformity with that specified under
“CARPENTRY AND JOINERY” and shall be coordinated and integrated to merge with
the overall system.

2.3 Substrate
The flexible substrate is a durable, flexible, translucent, dimensionally stable material consisting of a
polyester scrim embedded between two layers of white pigmented vinyl specially formulated to accept
the decorative graphics material.
The flexible substrate manufacturer must give written approval of compatibility of the substrate with
the decorative material used, and must warranty against failure of the substrate due to chemical
incompatibility with the graphic material and the materials used to transfer the graphics onto the
substrate.
Typical characteristics of the flexible substrate are :

-5-
 Property English Units Metric Units

Temperature stability - 20o F to 170o F 29o C to 77o C

Light Transmission 28 % ± 2 %

28 % ± 2 % (Opacity)

Strength Tear Weft 85 lbs / in min 15

kg / cm min Tear Warp 113

lbs / in min 10 kg / cm min

Tensile Weft 150 lbs / in min 26.6 kg / cm min

Tensile Warp 150 lbs / in min 26.6 kg / cm min

Seam Strength 50 lbs / in min 9 kg / cm min

Thickness 0.021” ± .001” 0.05 ± .0025 cm

Weight 1.22 lbs / sq.yd 670 gms / sq.m.

Dimensional Stability 1/32” Shrinkage 0.26 cm Shrinkage

max, per 12” max. per 1 m.

Impact Resistance No penetration

Flammability Self – Extinguishing – Does not

Support combustion U. L.

Recognized

Whiteness Index (Ref.) WI=103 a*=-1.65,

CIELAB L*=-90.20

Colour (reflective) b*=2.82

-6-
SECTION 18 METAL WORKS

2.4 Workmanship

2.4.1 General
(i) All metalwork shall be undertaken in accordance with sound engineering and smithy
practice and as much metalwork as possible shall be undertaken in properly equipped
workshops with site work restricted to fixing and other operations that cannot be
undertaken prior to delivery to site.
(ii) All finished components shall be wrapped, taped or otherwise protected with non-
absorbent coverings and delivered to site at a time to eliminate or reduce to a minimum,
storage on site prior to fixing.
(iii) Protective coverings shall be sufficiently removed for jointing, assembly and fixing
purposes and afterwards replaced.
(iv) After erection all metalwork with applied finishes shall be adequately protected from
any damage and any such work which is scratched, marked or damaged in any way shall
be suitably repaired if appropriate, to the Engineer's approval or, if so instructed by the
engineer, replaced at the Contractor's expense.
(v) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer evidence that the thickness of
protective/decorative coatings are not less than as specified and in cases of doubt the
Engineer may instruct the Contractor to send sample pieces to independent testing
laboratories and the cost of all such testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

(vi) All window, door, screen, and other like frames shall be made to allow a 5 mm
tolerance all round the opening in the structure and junctions shall be finished off by
applying an approved sealant onto a closed cell polystyrene foam backing strip or as
otherwise shown on drawings or specified.
(vii) Discrepancies in overall width or height exceeding 5 mm will not be allowed and where
such discrepancies occur the frame will be rejected.
(viii) Welding shall be undertaken in accordance with the appropriate British Standard for the
type of metal being joined.
(ix) Aluminium fixed against or into cementitious materials or stone/brickwork shall be
adequately protected by plastic spacers/sheeting or two coats bituminous paint applied
to the fixed face of the component.

2.4.2 Steel Elements

All steel parts shall be accurately set out, cut, framed, assembled and executed using proper bolts or
welding electrodes. All cut parts shall be saw cut, no oxygen burning shall be permitted except for
pipe supports. All welding shall be electrical welding,, clean and of proper workmanship. All cut parts
and welded section shall be ground even and filed smooth with rounded edges.

All steel members in contact with the soil shall be painted with two (2) coats of protective asphalt
paint. All doors, frames, staircases, etc. shall be given at least one (1) coat of approved rust inhibiting
primer before delivery to site.

Frames for doors and windows shall be provided with not less than (3) adjustable type anchors on each
jamb, minimum distance between anchors shall be eight hundred (800) mm.

All joints shall be machined to a close fit and all pins and screws shall be countersunk and dressed
flush after assembly.

-7-
SECTION 18 METAL WORKS

Forging shall be sharp and true. Curves, intersections and members of the same size shall be halved
together.The plain surfaces shall be smooth, free from warp or buckle. Moulded members and mitres
shall be clean, cut straight and true. Construction joints shall be welded their full length and cleaned
off flush on exposed surfaces.

All work shall be erected plumb and true to lines and rigidly secured to walls, floors or ceilings as
shown on drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Ironmongery for steel doors, etc. shall be as specified under “CARPENTRY & JOINERY”

2.4.3 Aluminium
The Contractor shall furnish and install all aluminium units as indicated on the drawings.
Workmanship and installation shall be in accordance with recommended standards of first class
aluminium manufacturers.
All aluminium work shall be performed in a shop where the grade of metal work is of recognized
quality acceptable to the Engineer. All items shall be installed plum, straight, square, level and in
proper elevation, plane location and alignment with other work. All work shall be designed for
adjustment to field variations, fitted with proper joints and intersections, adequately anchored in
place, strictly in accordance with best practice.
Aluminium for arches shall be extruded from soft aluminium sections to achieve the required radius
as stipulated and detailed in the drawings. Tenderers are contractually required to submit, for
Engineer‟s approval, a sample of the proposed section together with all relevant and necessary data.
Where aluminium surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc, white bronze
or small areas of other metals compatible with aluminium surfaces, they shall be kept from direct
contact with such parts by painting the dissimilar metal with a prime coat of zinc chromate primer or
other suitable primer, followed by one or two coats of aluminium metal and masonry paint or other
suitable protective coating, excluding those containing lead pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or
gasket shall be placed between aluminium and dissilar metals. Steel anchors and connecting members
shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication.
Aluminium surfaces in contact with lime mortar, concrete, plaster or other masonry materials, shall
be painted with alkaline- resistant coatings such as heavy – bodied bituminous paint or water – white
methacrylate lacquer.
Aluminium in contact with wood or absorptive materials which may become repeatedly wet shall be
painted with two coats of aluminium metal and masonry paint or a coat of heavy – bodied bituminous
paint. Alternatively paint the wood or other absorptive material with two coats of alumiuium house
paint and seal joints with a good quality of caulking compound.
Where aluminium is in contact with treated wood, wood shall be treated with pentachlorophenol, 5%
minimum concentration or approved equal, followed with the protective measures described for
aluminium in contact with wood or other absorptive materials.
The aluminium work shall be designed and anchored so that the work will not be distorted nor the
fasteners overstressed from the expansion and contraction of the metal.
Before shipment from factory, aluminium surfaces requiring protection shall be given a coating
which will protect the metal during construction. In areas where appearance of the finish on
aluminium items is important, a coating of methacrylate type lacquer shall be applied as specified
hereinafter.
Apply two sprayed coats of water – white methacrylate lacquer having a total minimum thickness of 0.015
mm, which when applied to the aluminium surface shall be capable of withstanding the action of lime
mortar for a period of at least one week in an atmosphere of 100% relative humidity at 40 degree

-8-
SECTION 18 METAL WORKS

centigrade, the action of 10% (by weight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 20 degree centigrade,
and the action of atmospheric weathering for a period of 12 months.
The coating shall be applied in the manufacturer‟s plant to the exposed surfaces of all aluminium
components subject to staining from alkaline mortar and plaster, abrasion and other construction
abuses. Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabrication compounds,
moisture, dirt, accumulations and other foreign materials to ensure proper lacquer adhesion.
Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminium work as required by removing protective
tape orther coating, using mild soap or detergents and clear petroleum spirits.
Acids caustics and abrasives shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove excess sealing
compounds care shall be exercised to prevent damage to seals or staining or damage to adjacent
work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminium work until the completion of
the works, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect condition shall be accepted.

2.5 Access Hatch Rooflights

(i) Access hatch rooflights shall be obtained from an approved supplier and installed
strictly in compliance with manufacturer‟s instructions.
(iii) They shall be delivered to site as a complete assembly and include an opening glazing
unit hinged to the frame with rigid aluminium stays and locking collars securing the
hatch in the open position. The unit shall be hand operated with internal and external
opening handles.
(iii) They shall comprise an aluminium frames proprietary factory made unit, shall be fully
weatherproof and include all flashings and gaskets as integral.
(iv) The units shall be domed of double-skinned insulated construction in wire reinforced
opal diffusing PVC, fully UV resistant, with Class 1 surface spread of flame rating
according to BS 476 Part 7 1971 and graded self-extinguishing according to BS 2728
1970, test method 508A.

2.6 Extruded Aluminium Expansion Joints

Extruded aluminium expansion joints shall be of a proprietary make, and of types as indicated on
the drawings complete with all fixings and fixtures, from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
Extruded aluminium expansion joints shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer‟s instructions.
Floor and wall joints shall be sealed with an elastomer filled proprietary joint seal with extruded
aluminium retaining profiles on each side securely bolted to the structure. Retaining profiles shall
be set below the plaster or screed so that only the elastomer and the edges of the profiles show.
Joint width shall be 20 mm and the joint cover shall be capable of absorbing ± 35% free movement
of the joint width. All corners, cross connections, curbs, tee joints or other special accessories shall
be shop fabricated.

3 STEELWORK
(i) All steelwork shall be provided and fixed complete with all plates, cleats, bolts, etc., cut
to lengths and sizes and drilled as shown on the Drawings. Steelwork generally shall
comply with BS 4 part 1, BS 2994 or BS 4848 Part 4.
(ii) Rag bolts and nuts shall be mild steel to BS 1494 Part 2. Black bolts shall comply with
BS 4933 and washers to BS 4320.

-9-
SECTION 18 METAL WORKS

(iii) The steel sections where specified to be factory rustproofed shall be rust-proofed by hot
dip galvanizing, metalizing or sheradizing process. The rust – proofing shall be sufficient
to withstand the 72 hours salt – spray test as provided for in BS 5466 : If the rustproof
coating suffers any damage during the progress of work, the damaged part shall be re-
coated to a minimum of the original thickness to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.1 Fabrication
(i) All fabrication and welding shall comply with BS 449 Part 2.
(ii) Welding shall be carried out by skilled operatives with proven qualifications and
experience in using the same electrode, class and welding positions which will be required
in the work and shall comply with BS 1856. The competence of all welders shall be tested
in accordance with the relevant BS.

3.2 Priming
All steel items which are not galvanized or zinc coated are to be primed with a coat of
approved rust- proofing primer. Items which have been primed before delivery to site should
immediately be touched up with similar primer and every effort made to protect the members
from damage during fixing. All structural steelwork is to be adequately protected from the
effects of the weather before fixing.

3.3 Workmanship for Steel

(i) All steelwork including connections shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with
the appropriate BS to the tolerance specified.
(ii) All holes shall be drilled to the appropriate size for the type and diameter of bolt being
used. For HSFG bolts the clearance shall not exceed 2 mm, except where oversize holes
are required for tolerance reasons and in this case special oversize washers will be
supplied.
(iii) All bolts shall have steel washers between the nut and the member being fixed. The head
and nut of all bolts shall have taper washers as necessary to give a bearing without bolt
distortion. When load indicating washers are used the load indicating device shall bear
against a hardened steel washer of the head or the bolt.
(iv) Site connections will be formed with HSFG or black bolts, to BS, of such size and quality
to carry the loads required unless specified otherwise.
(v) Stud welding and shot fired fastenings will not be allowed unless authorized in writing
by the Engineer subsequent to satisfactory performance tests and trials. Contact faces
between members which are to be formed with HSFG bolts shall be cleaned and left
unpainted, unless otherwise directed, and after fabrication the surfaces protected until
time of assembly. Contact faces between normally bolted connections are cleaned and
protected locally with red lead paint.

3.4 Welding
(i) All welding at works shall be carried out in accordance with BS requirements. All
welding operatives employed shall be tested and qualified welders in accordance with
BS recommendations and the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, if required,
evidence of qualification.
(ii) All welded connections shall be accurately made and the joint faces formed in
accordance with BS for metal type and thickness as appropriate and any necessary pre-
treatment due to metal thickness or type shall be undertaken. All welding electrodes shall

- 10 -
SECTION 18 METAL WORKS

be of the appropriate type to be compatible with the metal being welded.

3.5 Inspection
The Engineer may employ, to act on his behalf, an Independent Weld Inspection Company
to carry out regular inspections and nondestructive, and visual examinations, whilst the
fabrication and erection are in progress to ensure compliance with the Specification and BS
requirements and an adequate standard of workmanship and supervision for the works.
The Contractor is to allow unrestricted access and facilities at his works or those of his sub-
contractors or on site for authorized personnel to carry out inspection procedures on behalf
of the Engineer, in respect of the fabrication, erection and or welding of the Steelwork.

3.6 Stability
All erected steelwork shall be true to line, level and plumb, and securely bolted and fixed
with temporary bracing to resist safely all loads from erection procedures and or all
accidental and natural forces which may occur. All connections shall be permanently
bolted when the members are fixed true to line, level and plumb.

3.7 Steelwork Supply and Erection

(i) The Contractor will supply all bolts and fixings to be cast into the substructure in time
to comply with the program, together with detailed setting out drawings showing the size
and location of all items. The Contractor will supply and erect all steelwork and handover
completed and approved as required by the constructionprogram. (ii) All steelwork
supplied to site prior to erection shall be clearly marked for identification and stored
so as to prevent loss, damage or corrosion, (due to climatic conditions) of any sections,
parts, bolts, fittings, including deterioration of protective painting or other protective
coatings. Any such loss or damage shall be made good by the Contractor at no extra cost.

3.8 Protection
(i) The Contractor will be responsible for all preliminary cleaning and priming at works
prior to delivery and all making good of the initial protective film on site due to damage
in transit or during erection prior to handing over of the steelwork.
(ii) In addition all site bolted or welded joints shall after erection be painted as the remainder
of the steelwork. Where load indicating washers are used with HSFG bolts particular
care is to be taken to fill and seal the gap between the washer and the fittings created by
the indicating nibs.
(iii) All types of paint of protective medium are to be used and applied to the steelwork in
accordance with the appropriate section of BS and CP requirements and the
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for the type of paint or material being
employed and also the type and workmanship for cleaning and preliminary protection.

3.9 Galvanized Protection

(i) Steelwork shall be hot dipped galvanized under factory conditions after preparation for
installation in accordance with BS 729 unless otherwise stated.

All steelwork after fabrication is to be cleaned by picking and subsequently hot dip galvanized in
accordance with the BS to give a minimum coating thickness of 100 micron.

3.10 Design

- 11 -
SECTION 18 METAL WORKS

(i) The Engineer will supply the Contractor with the information and drawings he requires
preparing and completing his shop drawings. The Contractor shall,unless otherwise
specified, prepare and check shop drawings incorporating sufficient information for the
proper fabrication of the steelwork.

(ii) In the event of any contradiction or ambiguity in the information or drawings supplied by
the Engineer becoming apparent the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer
and obtain from him written clarification.

(iii) The Contractor shall check dimensions and prepare shop drawings for the steelwork. The
Contractor shall be responsible, unless otherwise specified, for the design and sufficiency
of the structural steelwork. Where certain sections of the work have been designed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall check and verify the sufficiency of the design and take full
responsibility for it.

(iv) Before commencing fabrication the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer
in writing for all shop drawings. This approval will signify verification of the correct
interpretation by the Contractor of the Engineer's requirements but shall not signify
approval of the dimensions. Notwithstanding such approval the Contractor shall be
entirely responsible for the accuracy of the shop drawings, the correctness of detail and
the proper design of connections and joints. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with
complete sets of working drawings.

(v) Structural metalwork items included in this project are entirely the design responsibility
of the sub-contractor.

(vi) All structural steelwork shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of BS 449,
"The use of structural steelwork in building" and other standards specified therein. The
Contractor shall carry out his design calculations accordingly and shall submit such
calculations for checking by the Engineer if requested to do so.

- 12 -
APPENDICES
 Appendix A
Mechanical and Electrical
Design Guidelines and
Specifications
R1117 Improvement of Al
Mustaqbal Street
Mechanical and Electrical
Design Guidelines and
Specifications

Submitted to:

May 2024
Revision 0
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 2

2 DESIGN DESCRIPTION 9
3 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 12
4 PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS 18
5 PLUMBING 45
6 DUCTWORK 59
7 INSULATION 65
8 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 73
9 AIR CONDITIONING & VENTILATION 75
10 CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS 92
11 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 97
12 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 118
13 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS/SUMP PUMPS 127
14 AIR-COOLED VRF SYSTEM 131
15 ELEVATORS 137
16 BUILDING MOINTORING MANAGSMENT SYSTEM (BMMS) 143
17 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 150
18 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SECURITY SYSTEM
(to be included from RTA specs)

• RTA APPROVED CCTV SYSTEM VENDOR LIST 417

Page 1 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL

1.1 General

Please note that the Employer Requirements is the main document to meet
the Project Requirement. The Guidelines and Specification in this document is
only to provide guidance on the minimum requirements to the Project. The
Contractor shall include for the design, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the Mechanical and Electrical Services detailed in the Contract
Documents.

The Contractor shall include for Client staff training in the operation and
maintenance of the works.

The Contractor shall include for promptly rectifying defects during the
maintenance period.

All works of a temporary or permanent nature which are by implication

associated with the works specified and required by accepted standards
(latest edition) of good practice and customs of the trades to be employed by
the contractor and which are necessary and essential to render the
Mechanical and Electrical Installations complete shall also be included and
allowed for in the Tender.

Any item in any section of the specification shall apply equally and wherever
appropriate to any item in any other section.

1.2 Responsibilities

The Contractor shall bring to the Engineers attention any queries or

discrepancies in the tender documents prior to submitting his tender.

No claims for additional money or time will be entertained by the Engineer after
award of the Contract.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the works are completed
in accordance with the Employer Requirement, contract documents and the
construction program. He shall be responsible for ensuring that all working
drawings, materials and labor are in place, to complete the works to the
specified quality and on time.

Approvals given by the Engineer do not relieve the Contractor of his

contractual responsibilities.

The Contractor shall be responsible for design and final verification of the
works to ensure that the works meet the project objective.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all required design calculation
and reports, which will include concept, preliminary and detail design stage. It
is the responsibility of the Contractor to timely incorporate/substantiate the
comments raised by the Engineer and the Employer in each stage of the
design before moving to the next stage of the project.

Page 2 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The Contractor shall be responsible for liaison with the local statutory
authorities to ensure that electricity, water, fire, drainage, cooling etc.
interfaces are incorporated in the works.

The Contractor shall obtain all necessary local authority completion certificates
prior to the practical completion certificate being issued.

1.3 Coordination

The Contractor shall coordinate the works in conjunction with Architectural,

Civil, Structural, Electrical, Instrumentation, and ICA -ITS drawings.

The Contractor shall ensure that all plant offered is of latest models, suitable
for its purpose and that it can be accommodated and supported in the
positions shown.

1.4 Regulations and Standards

The works shall be installed, tested and commissioned in accordance with

latest issue of:

Local Building Regulations

Local Water Authority Regulations
Local Electricity Authority Regulations
Local Drainage Authority Regulations Local Fire Authority Regulations
Local Fire Authority Construction
Regulations British Standards International Building Code
Chartered Institution of Building Services recommendations
NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA 14 - Standard for installation of standpipe, private hydrant and hose
systems
NFPA 10 - Standard for portable fire extinguishers
NFPA 20 - Standard for installation of stationary pumps for fire protection.
NFPA 22 - Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection.
NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances.
NFPA 502 – Standard for Road Tunnels, Bridges, and other Limited Access
Highways
NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice 2018
DM green building regulations.
ASHRAE Codes

The Contractor shall bring to the Engineers attention, prior to submitting his
tender, in writing, any discrepancies between the Contract Documents and the
above, no claims for money or extension of time shall be entertained for such
discrepancies after award of Contract.

Page 3 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1.5 Health and Safety

The Contractor shall be responsible for all health and safety issues relating to
the works.

The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer, a Health and Safety
plan. The plan shall cover:

• Risk assessment of all work.

• Provide information to employees about identified hazards.
• Details and records of staff training.

The approved health and safety plan shall be displayed on the Contractors
notice board at all times.

The Contractor shall train his staff in the use of fire extinguishers, first aid, safe
use of ladders and scaffolds.The Contractor shall ensure that his staff and
official visitors to the site are provided with:

• Safety Helmets
• Safety Shoes
• Eye Protection
• Ear Protection
• Safety Harnesses
• As indicated by the work situation.

The Contractor shall use 110 volt tools and lamps, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.

Contractor shall insure and achieve suitable air quality during construction and
prior of occupant as required in DM green building regulations item
401.02 and 401.06, including the certification and tests.

1.6 Quality Assurance

The Contractor shall maintain a quality assurance system. As a minimum the

Contractors quality assurance shall include the following:

Design drawings submittal schedule

Working drawing submittal schedule
Material procurement schedule
Testing and commissioning results
Site marked up working drawings,

1.7 Materials

All materials and equipment shall be new and shall be manufactured under ISO
9000, or equivalent. At any time materials which are identified as of inferior
design or make, or which are considered as unsuitable for the proposed
application shall be rejected by the Engineer, and such items shall be at once
removed from the site and correct materials shall be provided entirely at the
Contractors expense.

Page 4 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

All Contractor selected equipment shall be subject to the Engineer’s/Employer

approval in all respects and the Contractor shall provide all relevant
information, samples and the like necessary to fully inform the Engineer. All
plant and equipment selected shall be robust and durable, suited to continuous
running in whatever the range of ambient conditions those are likely to occur in
its vicinity.

All materials shall be selected using the following criteria: Local availability of
spare parts and after sales service for 15 years after Defect Liability Period.
Local availability of technical support- (Must have Manufacturer’s Authorized
Technical Representative with proven record of relevant Training and
experience)

Standardization of manufacturers to ease and minimize spares stock.

Maximizing intervals of routine maintenance and minimizing maintenance down

time. The Contractor shall only select equipment from manufacturers who
have a full local representation and who would be in the case of specialized
equipment, capable and prepared to offer long term servicing and
maintenance agreements should the Client so wish.

The Contractor shall include in the tender for the provision of materials and
equipment, etc. as specified herein. The Engineer may reject any items with
which he is not satisfied, and his decision shall be final and binding.

All materials shall be transported to site and stored on site in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions. All critical equipment which are prone to
damage due to local ambient conditions must be stored in in-site air-
conditioned stores.

The Contractor shall provide documentary proof that all computerized

equipment incorporated in the works have been checked that they are
unaffected by the millennium bug.

1.8 Workmanship

The Engineer shall reject any part of the installation which, in his opinion, is not
properly erected or installed by reason of poor workmanship and such parts
shall be made good to the best accepted standards, entirely at the Contractors’
expense.

Unless approved by the Engineer, all Contractors operatives shall be in the

direct employment of the appointed Contractor. No work shall be sub-
contracted without the Engineer’s prior written approval.

1.9 Design and Working drawings

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, all drawings detailing
the works including, Concept Design, Preliminary Design and Detail Design.
All drawings lists must be approved by consultant and must be submitted with
the project closure hand over documents.

The working drawings shall be prepared using latest version of microstation.

.

Page 5 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The working drawing numbering system and title block shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval prior to submission of any shop drawing.

All dimensions on the working drawings shall be to the Systems International

(SI).

The drawing symbols shall follow approved International Standards.

1.10 Submittal Procedure

Within two (2) weeks of award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for approval a drawing schedule, the schedule shall detail the
following:

Drawing title Drawing Scale First issue date

Requested approval date Approval status

Within two (2) weeks of award of contract the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for approval a material approval schedule, the schedule shall detail
the following:

Item reference number Item description

First submittal date
Requested approval date Required on site date Approval status
Order date Shipping date On site date

The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of the material submittal to the
Engineer for approval; the submittal shall be accompanied by an approved
approval form.

Each material submittal shall be complete with the following:

• Material submittal approval form
• Manufacturer’s Original Catalogue detailing the offered product, clearly
marked up to show the offered item and model no.
• Full and detailed, clause-wise specification compliance statement.
• A detailed “Schedule of Materials” proposed for approval indicating, Type,
size, rating, weight, location of use, quantity and material of construction.
• Sample of offered item, if the item is visible to the occupants of the project,
as directed by Engineer/Client.

The Submission of Material submittals shall be scheduled by Contractor to

meet the overall project schedule, allowing sufficient time for Engineer’s and
Client’s review, manufacturing, shipping, installation, testing and
commissioning period etc.

1.11 Testing and Commissioning

The Contractor shall test and commission the works to the approval of the
Engineer. The mechanical works shall be tested and commissioned in
accordance with the BSRIA and NFPA, ASME, NEC commissioning codes to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Fire pumps shall be tested to NFPA 20

Page 6 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

procedure and as per Dubai Civil Defense Requirements. Drainage Pump

stations and Drainage system shall be tested as per DM requirements.

The Contractor shall use an approved independent specialist commissioning

engineer for the following mechanical services. Under no circumstances will
the Engineer allow the Contractor to use his own staff for the following
mechanical services:

• Drainage pumps
• Fire pumps
• Fire Protection System
• HVAC Balancing

Commissioning shall be defined as the advancement of an installation from the

state of static completion to full working order to specified requirements.
Commissioning includes the setting to work and regulation of an installation
and its coordinated relationship with other services.

The Mechanical services Subcontractor shall record the results of all checks
and measurements during commissioning and hand a copy to the Engineer as
part of the “hand-over” information. The Test Report format shall be submitted
to the Engineer and Client for approval, prior to starting of any tests.

The Engineer on completion of the Mechanical Services Sub-Contractor’s

commissioning or concurrently with the Mechanical Services Subcontractor,
will carry out acceptance tests on the installation. The Mechanical Services
Subcontractor shall allow for attending during these tests.

The Mechanical and Services Sub-contractor shall allow adequate time in his
program of works for both his commissioning activity and for the Engineers
acceptance tests.

Under no circumstances will the Engineer allow the Contractor to use his own
staff for the following Mechanical Services instead Contractor has to use
qualified third party consultants:

HVAC air balancing, Chilled water balancing, Automatic controls

Capital plant such as chillers, pressure vessels, and water treatment plant,
Fire fighting and protection systems

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his “close-down”
program for the works. The program shall address the following as a minimum:

Start of testing and commissioning date Completion of testing and

commissioning date Water on date
Drainage operation date Fire protection on date
Date and duration for each plant’s testing and commissioning

The Contractor shall submit the Engineer for approval, a detailed method
statement for each testing and commissioning activity.

Page 7 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The Contractor shall ensure that he gives the Engineer at least two (2) working
days written notice of any tests requiring witnessing.

The Contractor shall maintain written records of all tests.

Successful test records shall be counter signed by the Engineer and bound into
the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Upon completion of the testing and commissioning the Contractor shall

demonstrate to the Engineer the following:

Volume flow rates in accordance with the Contract Documents Temperatures

in accordance with the Contract Documents Humidity in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Noise levels in accordance with the Contract Documents
Correct control of all plant and equipment.
Automatic control system Fire protection system
Specialist systems.

The contractor shall conduct where required by consultant or client a vibration

test , ultra sound test and thermal test etc., during factory test and during
testing and commissioning .

1.12 Record Drawings

The Contractor shall maintain, on site, a paper print copy of each approved
“Construction Issue” working drawing. The drawing shall be marked up by the
Contractor with any site changes. The drawing shall form the basis of the
projects record drawings.

Each record drawing shall be marked “As built” as well as the completion date.

1.13 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The Contractor shall provide detailed operation and maintenance manuals.

The manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, draft manuals
shall be submitted before the Practical completion of the project. The Testing
and Commissioning results may be subsequently added to the draft manual.
The draft manuals shall be retained on site until the final manuals are approved
by the Engineer.

Four copies of the manuals shall be required from the Contractor. The manuals
shall be bound into A4 size plastic ring binders with front covers providing the
necessary information in the following format:

(a) Front Cover – Title Volume Number

Example – Mechanical Operating and Maintenance Manual – Volume 1
(b) Project Title and Address
Client name and address Contractors name and address
Architect / Engineers names and addresses Completion date

Page 8 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) Table of Contents

i. Scope of works Contents
Detailed description of all mechanical works carried out on the project
ii. Operation of Plant / Equipment Contents
Brochures / Technical data of all plant / equipment for all systems
including:

Startup instructions for each system Shut down instruction for each
system
Schedules of plant / equipment with reference to drawing number

iii. Maintenance of Plant / Equipment Contents

Test Sheets – with contents page

(d) Commissioning certificates – with contents page Completed log sheets

(e) As Built Drawing – Schematic valve charts for each plant room and service
shaft. These are to show valve identification and isolation sequence, one
copy is also to be located in each plant area.

Drawings – with contents page (Drawings have to be a separate volume

number) Spare maintenance log sheets.

1.14 Spares and Tools

The Contractor shall hand over the following spares and tools:

Manufacturers recommended spares and tools for all equipment’s and diesel
driven plant for two year operation unless otherwise specified.

Four (4) number manhole keys Two (2) sets of valve keys
One (1) spare belt for each belt driven item.
One (1) set of bearings for each type of pump and fan.
One (1) year supply of chemical for water treatment systems
One (1) set of spare sprinkler heads and tools in a lockable box in accordance
with LPC regulations

2 DESIGN DESCRIPTION

2.1 Design Criteria

The Contract Documents have been prepared using the following design criteria.

2.2 External Design Conditions

The external design conditions for this project are:

Summer: 50º C DB and 36º C WB

Winter: 8º C DB and 8º C WB (no winter heating)

Page 9 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2.3 Internal Design Conditions

The internal design conditions for this project are:

Offices and Dry Bulb Wet Bulb Noise Level Outside

Hall
(º C DB) (º C WB) (NR) 35-40 (I/s) 5-6
23±1 15.71

2.4 System Temperatures and Pressures (indicative only)

Scheduled below are the Mechanical Services temperatures and pressures:

System Temperature (º C) Pressure

(kpa)

Chilled Water Flow 6.5 200

Chilled Water Return 15.0 200
Cold Water Service 25.0 350
Hot Water Service 55.0 350

2.5 Electric Supply

The declared electric supply for the project is 400 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz all
equipment incorporated in the works shall be suitable for this voltage.

2.6 Statutory Authorities

Scheduled below are the Statutory Authority names: 2.6.1

Service Name

Water/Electricity Dubai Electricity and Water Authority

Drainage Dubai Municipality Drainage Department
Fire Dubai Civil Defense Department

The equipment shall be construct as per DM green building regulation latest,

contractor to provide equipment, material with fully comply with DM green
building regulation.

The equipment installation and construct shall be as per fire and life safety
code 2011 and its latest edition and Dubai civil defense regulations, contractor
to provide all design, equipment, material with fully comply with Dubai civil
defense regulations.

Note: The Contractor shall visit the site, survey thoroughly all the existing
installations to confirm that all existing services re-routing/re-location/interface
with existing services are included in this contract and bring to the notice of the
Engineer during tender if any discrepancy. No claims shall be entertained later.

Page 10 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2.6.2 Drainage

Soil and waste connections will be taken from within the building to the DM
gravity collection system .

2.6.3 Drainage Storm

Rain water outlets shall be taken to DM storm water drain for the Building.

2.6.4 Domestic Water Service

Hot and Cold water supply system including storage tanks, Sandwich Panel
construction room, and accessories, domestic water booster pumps and
controls, and distribution services to sanitary fittings and other utilities to
Ancillary Buildings. Hot water supply system including hot water heaters and
distribution services to sanitary fittings and other utilities to the Ancillary
Buildings.

2.6.5 Chilled Water Service

Distribute chilled water from the nearest District Cooling Network located in the
vicinity of the project.

2.6.6 Fire Pump Station Service

From the pump room located in the Stake Holders Building sites a pipe work
distribution network to supply wet fire standpipe system shall be provided

2.7 Fire Fighting Wet Stand Pipe

Fire Fighting Wet Stand Pipe will be installed on both sides within the sidewalk.
The exact location shall be decided on site and approved by the Civil Defense
Department. A water connection shall be taken from the Fire water pump
station which is to be located near the nearby Building. This Fire Water pump
station shall have its own Fire Water storage tank. The Fire water storage tank
shall be sized to be suitable to supply water for fire fighting for one hour. The
water supply to the Fire water storage tank shall be from nearest Irrigation
water or DEWA Water main, subject to the approval. The continuous pressure
required in the wet standpipe shall be 100 PSI (6.9 bar) at each fire hose. Both
the Main fire water pumps shall be electric motor driven.

The Electric supply shall have a Diesel Generator back up, to provide power in
case of DEWA Mains failure. A jockey pump will maintain the system under
pressure at all time. The 6.9 bar pressure shall be maintained at the farthest
point of the fire fighting system. Fire water pipe shall be of HDPE and Hot Dip
Galvanized internally and externally and painted with Epoxy powder Red color
from outside, with UL approval. The complete fire water system shall be
designed as per NFPA 502 Regulations, NFPA 14 Regulations and as per
Dubai civil Defense requirements.

Page 11 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2.8 Fire Hose Reel Service

An automatic wet standpipe system will be installed in each pedestrian bridge.

One 65mm hose valve and one 25mm hose valve connected to the standpipe
and a 4.5kg dry powder fire extinguisher and 5 kg CO2 extinguisher shall be
located in each Fire Hose Cabinets (FHC). FHC shall be installed recessed in
the pedestrian bridge wall at the locations so that each point of the protected
area will be at 45m distance from the FHC.

Whenever available pressure would exceed 100 PSI, a pressure reducing valve
shall be installed on the connection line. A pressure gauge shall also be
provided at each FHC to indicate the available pressure.

Two Fire Department Siamese connections will be located at each end of the
pedestrian bridge.

Provide all necessary piping, valves, Air release valves, drain valves, tees, and
connections from the Fire water pump station to the fire hose cabinets, within
the Ancillary Buildings .

3 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1 General

This section is not intended to delegate functions nor to delegate work and
supply to any specific trade, but rather to generally designate a basic unit of
work.

3.2 Definitions

The definition of a technical word or phrase used in these subsections shall be

the commonly understood interpretation and meaning as established by the
codes and regulations governing the trade referred to, as established herein.

“Provide” shall mean design, supply, install, connect, and test.

3.3 Scope of Work

Work includes mechanical systems as specified in the Contract.

The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services to
complete the works of all mechanical systems.

3.4 Contract Drawings

As mentioned elsewhere.

3.5 Measurements

The Contractor shall prepare accurate measurements of the building for

preparation of drawings and rough-in and laying-out of mechanical products
and systems by actual site measurements, and/or from the architectural
drawings.

Page 12 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

3.6 Qualification of Tradesmen

The Contractor shall maintain at the site, at all times, qualified personnel and
supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, supervising, testing, and
adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.

The supervising personnel and their qualifications are subject to the approval of
the Engineer.

3.7 Supports, Anchors, and Sleeves

The Contractor shall supply and erect any special structure required for
installation of equipment supplied under this section. Structures shall be
adequate to support the weight of equipment involved without sagging or
bowing.

The Contractor shall supply anchors and bolts, templates and/or accurate
dimensions, as well as equipment to be built in or measurements to allow for
same, as and when required. Sleeves shall be set, and services installed
promptly in advance of concrete pouring or similar work.

3.8 Standard of Products

Products are specifically described and manufacturers named in this

specification in order to establish a standard of materials and workmanship and
not for the purpose of limiting other manufacturers.

3.9 Codes, Standards, and Regulations

The Contractor shall ensure the products and installation meet the
requirements and specification of latest recognized published standards, as
noted herein. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall comply fully with
requirements of the approved international standards.

Products shall be selected on the basis of performance, durability, ease of

service, and availability of spare parts.

3.10 Drawings

Each mechanical shop drawing submitted shall carry the following information
as applicable:
(a) Manufacturer’s name and model number.
(b) Supplier’s name.
(c) Shipping and working weight.
(d) Performance characteristics.
(e) Dimensions.
(f) Materials used in manufacture.
(g) Subcontractor’s approval stamp.
(h) Contractor’s approval stamp.
(i) Project number.
(j) Specification section and clause number and title.

Page 13 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Should the above requirements not be complied with, shop drawings will be
rejected without further consideration.

The Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer’s installation directions to aid in

properly executing the work. Two copies of such directions shall be submitted
to the Engineer prior to installation for use in inspecting the work.

The Contractor shall bind one complete set of corrected shop drawings in each
operating and maintenance instruction manual.

3.11 Test Reports

The Contractor shall submit product factory test reports when requested for
review, or a minimum of four weeks prior to installation of the product.

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 15 days prior to a product
factory test being performed. The Engineer shall be given the opportunity to
witness the tests at his discretion.

Independent testing agency test reports, as may be directed by the Engineer,

shall be submitted and approved before material is shipped from
manufacturer’s work.

The Contractor shall submit, to the Engineer, copies of inspection and

completion certificates.

3.12 Certificates

The Contractor shall apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits, licenses,
inspections, examinations, and fees required.

The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of all work by the authorities having
jurisdiction over the work. On completion of the work, the Contractor shall
present to the Engineer the final unconditional certificate of approval of the
authorities.

Before starting any work, the Contractor shall submit the required number of
copies of drawings and specifications to the authorities for their approval and
comments. The Contractor shall comply with any changes requested as part of
the Contract, but notify the Engineer immediately of such changes, for proper
processing of these requirements. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish any
additional drawings, details, or information as may be required.

3.13 Letters of Satisfaction

The Contractor shall submit originals of letters from the manufacturers, of

products listed, indicating that their technical representatives have inspected
and tested their respective products and are satisfied with the methods of
installation, connection, and operation.

These letters shall state the names of persons present at the time of testing,
the methods used, a list of functions performed and the location and room
number where applicable.

Page 14 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

3.14 As-Built Drawings

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer, detailed drawings showing

dimensions of concealed or buried services at key points of every run in relation
to the structure and building. The drawings shall record elevations of the
underground services in relation to the ground-floor level of the building or
finished grade.

The drawings shall indicate exact locations of services left for future work, if
any, and show dimensions to any work embedded in the structure. They shall
also indicate the exact locations of access panels and junction points.

3.15 Coordinated Construction Drawings

The Contractor shall submit for approval, installation, interference, and setting
drawings, dimensioned and in the correct scale as may be required or
requested to make clear the work intended or to show its relation to adjacent
work or the work of other trades. The Contractor shall not proceed with work in
new areas until approval of such drawings has been obtained.

3.16 Instructions to Department’s Staff

The Contractor shall obtain, in writing from the Engineer, a list of the
Department’s representatives qualified to receive instructions and then instruct
the Department’s representatives in the operation and maintenance of all the
systems and equipment.

The Contractor shall arrange and pay for services of service consultants and
other manufacturers’ representatives required for instruction on specialized
portions of the installation.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, at the time of final inspection, a
complete list of systems stating the following for each system:

(a) Date instructions were given to the Department’s staff.

(b) Duration of instruction.
(c) Names of persons instructed.
(d) Other parties present, manufacturer’s representatives, consultants, etc.
(e) Signature of the Department’s staff stating that they properly understood the
system installation, operation, and maintenance requirements and have
received the requested number of operating and maintenance manuals and
record drawings.

3.17 Trial Usage

The Department has the privilege of trial usage of mechanical systems or parts
thereof, as soon as the Contractor agrees that said work is completed, for the
purpose of testing and learning operational procedures.

The Contractor shall carry out the trial usage over a length of time deemed

Page 15 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

reasonable by the Engineer at no extra cost. The Contractor shall provide

labour and materials for operation of equipment for each trial period.

Trial usage shall not be construed as acceptance by the Department.

3.18 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The Contractor shall assemble four manuals containing maintenance and

operating instructions for each piece of equipment and systems requiring
service. The manuals shall be bound in a hard cover three-ring binder of
suitable size and indexed.

Maintenance and operating instructions shall include the following information:

(a) Description of equipment/systems.

(b) Operation of equipment.
(c) Maintenance of equipment.
(d) Servicing of equipment.
(e) Diagrams of systems.
(f) Approved shop drawings of equipment/systems.
(g) Performance characteristics for actual equipment supplied (data shall refer
to and identify specific model in service and shall not be general advertising
data).
(h) Spare parts list.
(i) Names and addresses of all firms responsible during the guarantee period
and spare parts suppliers.
(j) Test Reports.
(k) Certificates and warranties.
(l) Letter of satisfaction, where applicable.
(m) As Built drawings of equipment/systems.
(n) calculation note.

One copy of the manual shall be submitted to the Engineer for review, and
three final copies shall be submitted to the Department during the instruction
period. The Contractor shall allow four weeks prior to the instruction period to
review and process the final copies of the manuals.

3.19 Workmanship

Only first-class workmanship will be accepted, as regards to safety, efficiency,

durability, and neatness of detail.

The Contractor shall obtain general arrangement details from the Drawings and
dimensions of finished work from dimensioned Drawings showing the actual
location of services and equipment in areas where space is critical.

3.20 Fabrication and Manufacture

The Contractor shall remove materials condemned by the Engineer as not

approved for use and install suitable materials in their place.

Page 16 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The Engineer may reject proposed equipment when, in his opinion, service of
the equipment and availability of necessary spare parts would not be
satisfactory.

3.21 Product Identification

All major mechanical system products shall have the size, rating, or class, and
manufacturer’s name clearly marked on a securely fastened nameplate.

3.22 Inspection and Tests

The Contractor shall conduct performance and operating tests for each system
or equipment unit, in the presence of the Engineer and a representative of any
agencies having jurisdiction.

Works to be concealed shall remain uncovered until the required tests and
inspections have been completed, but if the construction schedule requires it,
the Contractor shall arrange for tests on parts of the system.

The Contractor shall give written notice in ample time to all concerned of the
date when tests will be conducted, and inspection is required.

3.23 Installation Access

The Contractor shall ensure that suitable access is provided when required at
any stage of construction, into and within the building, for the unloading and
maneuvering of equipment to the final location. The Contractor shall ensure
that, on completion of the installation work, suitable access is provided to all
equipment and devices with freedom from interferences caused by other
equipment provided or installed.

3.24 Adjusting and Protection

At completion of the installation, the Contractor shall clean equipment, adjust

and regulate control and protection devices, lubricate mechanical equipment,
and leave all systems in perfect order and ready for operation. The Contractor
shall provide the protection required to prevent loss of, or damage to, the
equipment during the progress of construction, and replace, at no cost to the
Department, equipment or parts thereof which become damaged, lost, or
stolen, up to the date of acceptance of the completed work by the Department.

The Contractor shall be careful not to spill, drop, or store oil on the floor surface
at any time. Operations requiring the use of oil, such as pipe cutting and
threading or machining, are to be performed so that floors are protected by the
use of oil-drip panels under machines, plywood sheets placed on floors, and/or
plywood partitions erected around machines to avoid splashing on floors and
walls.

3.25 Maintenance and Service

(a) General.
The Contractor shall maintain in full working order and service all electrical

Page 17 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

and mechanical equipment supplied and installed under the Contract for the
time period as stated in the Contract, beginning from the preliminary
handing over date until final handing over of the project.
The items to be maintained and serviced shall include, but not limited to, all
equipment associated with the standby power systems, electrical and
lighting systems, elevator system, air-conditioning and ventilation system,
fire fighting and fire protection system, water services, drainage services,
irrigation system, and fountains with all necessary components furnished
and installed under this Contract.

The Contractor’s responsibilities shall include but not necessarily be limited

to the following:

1. Maintenance, service, and operation of all plant and equipment

according to manufacturer’s standard procedures.
2. Supply and installation of all spares and consumables for maintenance
and breakdown. Spares provided for maintenance and service shall be
in addition to the items supplied and handed over to the Department as
part of the Contract.
3. Adjustment of regulating valves and any other appurtenances as
required to perform the systems fully in accordance with the specification
and manufacturers recommendations.

(b) Measurement and Payment.

Measurement and payment for the Item Maintenance and Service shall be
considered priced in the contract and shall be considered as full
compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and appurtenances
as required for the operation and maintenance of all electrical and
mechanical systems within the limits of this contract for a period say stated
in the contract beginning from the preliminary handing over date until the
final handing over of the project, as specified and as directed by the
Engineer.

4 PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS

4.1 Pipework – General

Subsequent clauses of the section detail general requirements for pipework

installations.

4.2 Steel Pipes

Steel Pipes shall be shall be manufactured to the following standards:

Sizes up to and including 150mm diameter, BS EN 10255: 2004

Sizes greater than 150mm diameter, BS 10216-1:2002, BS10217-1:2002.

Steel pipes shall be supplied with either screwed or plain ends for welding as
required, if galvanized it should be hot dipped, be complete with plastic end
caps and shall be marked with identification colour bands indicating the grade
of pipe.

Page 18 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The Engineer shall reject any pipe lengths that in his opinion are rusty.

4.3 Copper Pipes

Copper pipes shall be of shall be manufactured in accordance to BS 2871: Part

1 Table X.

All copper tube shall be suitably treated for the removal of carbon deposit left
by the drawing lubricant.

All tubes and fittings shall bear an appropriate mark to indicate that it has been
manufactured in accordance with the provisions of the specified BS.

Copper pipes buried in walls shall be plastic coated.

4.4 uPVC Pressure Pipes

uPVC pressure pipes shall be of unplasticised polyvinyl chloride manufactured

to BS3505 : 1986 and shall be class “E” unless otherwise indicated.

4.5 uPVC Soil Pipe and Fittings

Above ground uPVC soil pipe and fittings shall be manufactured to BS 4514 :
2001.

4.6 ABS Pipe and Fittings

Acrylonite Butadiene Styrene (ABS) pipe and fittings shall be manufactured to

BS 5255

4.7 uPVC Underground Drainage Pipe and Fittings

Below ground uPVC drainage pipe and fittings shall be manufactured to BS

4660: 2000.

4.8 Butt Welded Fittings

Butt welding fittings shall be manufactured to BS EN 10253-1:1999 and shall be

manufactured from carbon steel.

Butt welding fittings shall have a wall thickness the same as the pipe.

4.9 Wrought Steel Pipe Fittings

Wrought steel pipe fittings shall be manufactured to BS EN 10241:2000.

4.10 Copper Capillary and Compression Fittings

Capillary fittings for use with copper pipe shall be manufactured to BS 864: Part
2: 1983 and the joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions with regard to cleaning, tinning, flux and application of heat.

Page 19 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Compression fittings for use with copper pipe shall be of an approved

manipulative type manufactured to BS 864: Part 2: 1983, Type A or Type B as
specified for the service concerned.

All necessary copper to iron adaptors for connections to valves and other
equipment shall be provided.

All capillary or compression fittings shall be of gunmetal or other zincless alloy

to prevent dezincfication. Solder shall be zinc free. Where pipework is to be
chromium plated, chromium plated compression fittings shall be used and shall
be Type A.

4.11 PVC Pressure Fittings

Solvent welded fittings for PVC water pipe shall be manufactured to BS EN

1452 parts 1-5:2000 Mechanical joints and fittings for PVC water pipe shall be
BS EN 1452 parts 1-5:2000 and shall be of the lock ring type.

4.12 Polyethylene Fittings

Fittings for use on polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured to BS 5114: 1981.

Chromium Plating

Where chromium plated pipe is specified all valves, fittings, clips etc. shall also
be chromium plated.

All chromium plated equipment shall be properly stored and protected, and
damage to such equipment no matter how slight will result in such equipment
being rejected by the Engineer.

4.13 Pipe Jointing Generally

Pipe jointing shall be carried out by suitably skilled and experienced personnel
in accordance with the best practices and the manufacturers recommendations.

The Contractor shall verify that all pipe joints specified in subsequent sections
and jointing methods and systems adopted are suitable for the operating
pressures, surge pressures and test pressures applying to each system.

The Contractor shall allow for all supports, anchor guides etc., over and above
those specified or detailed that may be additionally necessary to suit a
particular jointing methods or system.

4.14 Screwed Pipe Jointing

Screwed joints for steel pipes shall be made in accordance with BS 21: 1985.

Screwed joints for copper pipes shall, unless otherwise specified, be made in
BS 21: 1985.

The joints shall be lean threaded, pulled up tightly and made with P.T.F.E.
(polytetrafluoroethylene) tape applied with care in the manner specified by the

Page 20 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

manufacturer.

When for the purpose of threading, pipes are held in a vice, care shall be taken
to ensure that the pipe surface is not damaged. Any pipework so damaged
shall not be incorporated in the works.

For galvanized tube care shall be taken to ensure that threads are carefully cut
so that the number of exposed threads is minimized. Exposed threads shall
receive a coat of protective red oxide paint after each joint has been made.

If the bead of a fitting is damaged during the installation the fitting shall be
replaced.

4.15 Welded Pipework

Pipework for welding shall be supplied with plain ends and the bores at the end
of adjacent pipes are to be matched on site and beveled to an 80 degree
included angle or bevel, except for pipe sizes 12 to 50 mm which shall be
square ends for butt welding.

All welding shall be carried out by welders holding a current recognized

certificate of competency for each method of welding, which shall be submitted
to the Engineer for examination and approval. Welds made without this
provision will be rejected. Pipes up to 150 mm the metal-arc process shall be
used. Electrical welding by the metal-arc process shall be in accordance with
BS 2971: 1991 Class II and the recommendations of the Institute of Welding,
using covered electrodes to BS 69: 1986. No backing rings are to be used and
joints shall have external reinforcement. Earthing clips shall be of steel and are
to be attached to the pipe itself, earthing from pipe fixings will not be permitted.

Arrangements shall be made for the provision of an electrical supply for

welding; or alternatively, for the supply of an appropriate portable generator.
Any charges so incurred shall be deemed to be included in the Tender.

Oxyacetylene welding of joints shall be in accordance with BS 1821 and with

the publication “Welding of Mild Steel Pipes 1970” published by the Heating &
Ventilating Contractor Association and in accordance with BS 1724: 1990.

All welded joints are to be stamped in a suitable position adjacent to the weld,
to enable the identity of the welder to be established. The identification coding
shall be made available to the Engineer prior to the commencement of
installation. The Engineer shall have the authority to request that 2% of all
welds be cut out for routine examination and testing, such test will be applied to
any welded joint at the discretion of the Engineer. Where specific defects are
suspected the 2% limit will not apply.

The Engineer or his representative shall be present when welds are to be cut
out and to witness such tests that may be considered necessary to ensure that
the full bore of the pipe is maintained at each welded joint.

Bending tests, micro-etching tests and any other methods of testing may also
be requested if considered necessary by the Engineer and will be carried out in
accordance with BS EN (1320:97&910:96). The entire cost of cutting out,

Page 21 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

testing and reinstatement shall be included in the Tender. After inspection of

any necessary tests, all welded joints shall be protected by one coat of red
oxide paint.

If any such weld is found to be inferior and not up to the standard required, two
further welds by the same welder shall be similarly tested and if these also are
found to be unsatisfactory then the welder shall be taken off the pipeline and all
welds made by him shall be cut and remade: the entire cost of the cutting out,
reinstatement, testing and painting shall be at the Contractor’s own expense.

4.16 Flanged Joints

All flanges for use with steel pipes shall be manufactured from mild steel in
accordance with BS EN 1514:97 and to the Table appropriate for the system
pressure, but never less than Table E.

Flanges for use with copper pipes shall be manufactured from bronze or
gunmetal to BS EN 1092:02 and to the Table appropriate for the pressure
specified.

Flanges for welding shall be plain faced slip on back type flanges.

All flanges joints shall be flush and truly aligned and shall employ full faced
corrugated metal rings coated on both sides with an approved jointing
compound.

Flanges other than mating flanges for certain specialized equipment shall be
drilled to the appropriate Table for the service concerned and secured with the
necessary bolts, nuts and washers.

All bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal headed bright steel in accordance with BS
4882 : 1990, no more than two threads shall project beyond the nut.

For the purpose of cold-draw for expansion compensators, high tensile steel
bolts shall be used.

4.17 Pipe Sleeves and Plates

Sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through walls, floors, beams,
fittings and waterproof membranes.

Split sleeves shall not be used, the sleeves shall be of the same material as the
pipe passing through or rigid PVC which may be used when the operating
temperature of the pipe is below 100ºC. The internal diameter of the sleeve
shall not be less than 13 mm and not more than 25 mm larger than the external
diameter of the pipe. Where pipe sleeves pass through walls or floors which
form a fire barrier, the sleeve shall be of the same material as the pipe and the
space between the sleeve and the pipe passing through the sleeve shall be fire
stopped with an approved fire-resistant packing.

Sleeves through bearing walls and footings shall be packed with flexible foam
and the ends sealed with bitumen.

Page 22 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

All sleeves shall protrude not less than 2 mm and not more than 3 mm proud of
the finished floor or wall surface.

Flashing sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through waterproof

membranes. Flashing sleeves shall be provided with an integral flange to which
a flashing shield can be clamped or welded. The shields shall be of aluminum
and shall extend not less than 200 mm from the sleeve in alldirections.

The shield shall be sealed to the pipe with waterproof material and mastic
compound.

Where pipes pass through floors and ceilings they shall, unless otherwise
specified, be provided with chromium plates, rolled steel, hinged floor plates of
the set-screw pattern.

Where possible, pipes shall be spaced to accommodate the entire floor plates,
but where the available spacing is inadequate and necessitates the cutting of
the plates to prevent overlap, and then each plate shall be cut by an equal
amount to give a symmetric appearance.

4.18 Erection of General Service Pipework

All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and tidy appearance; arranged
to follow the contour of walls and other structural members of the building. It
shall give maximum headroom and avoid the obstruction of windows and
doorways. Pipework shall be installed with the consideration for the location of
other services with which its arrangement shall be coordinated; allowance
should also be made during its erection for the thickness of insulation thereon.

Whenever possible pipework outside plantrooms shall be installed in the false

ceilings or purpose made ducts.

Vertical pipes are to be plumb and shall be fixed with 25 mm clearance

between the finished face of the wall and the pipe or insulation thereon, and the
thickness of plaster or other wall finish should be ascertained for this purpose.

Horizontal pipes near floors are to be located with at least 65 mm clearance

between the finished floor level and the pipe or insulation thereon, and for this
purpose skirting heights and floor finishes shall be ascertained.

Pipes shall be erected with continuous gradients rising in a suitable direction to

clear air and where a horizontal pipe reduces in size in the direction of an
automatic air vent it shall be provided with an eccentric reducing fitting.

The gradient shall be appropriate to the service concerned and unless

otherwise indicated on the drawings is to be as follows:

Service Gradient

Circulated systems (main) 1 in 500

Circulated systems (branches) 1 in 250 Hot Water Supply (mains)
1 in 500 Hot Water Supply
(branches) 1 in 250 Cold Water Supply 1 in 700

Page 23 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

All bends required for expansion purposes and all swan necks, offsets and
springs are to be formed by the use of a suitable bending machine or by heat
treatment. Heat treatment shall not be employed for galvanized pipe. Bends,
springs and offsets for copper tube may be formed using bending springs.
Pipework shall generally be set around all piers and columns, around steelwork
and other projections beyond the face of walls and partitions, and where walls
reduce in thickness; whether so indicated on the drawings or not and no extras
shall be allowed.

Changes of direction so formed shall be made with a minimum loss of local

pipe wall thickness and the diameter of the pipe shall be maintained. Crinkled
and scored work will be rejected. Cutting and shutting will not be permitted
unless approved by the Engineer or his representative.

The center line radius of bends, sets, springs etc., shall not be less than three
times the nominal bore of the pipe for pipes up to and including 160 mm
diameter, and three and a half times the bore larger than 160 mm diameter.

Where two or more pipes change direction together, the pipes shall be installed
at a constant spacing before and after the bend.

All pipework valves, fittings etc., shall be free from corrosion and internal
obstruction and the ends of all lengths, and cuts from standard lengths, shall be
trimmed square and reamed to the full bore of the pipe to remove burrs; the
swarf shall be cleared from the pipe.

Joints will not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, ceilings or other
equally inaccessible positions. All pipework, valves, fittings and equipment
forming the general installation shall be erected in a manner that will permit
easy dismantling and convenient accessibility for future repairs and
replacements for items of plant. Flanged or union connections shall be provided
at valves and at suitable intervals to facilitate erection of the pipework.
Particular attention is drawn to welded pipework where sufficient flanged joints
shall be provided to limit the length of pipe sections for convenient handling.

Connections to equipment shall be arranged by flanges or unions to facilitate

ease of removal.

Connections of up to 50 mm diameter shall be made with unions.

Bends and tees shall be of easy sweep or pitcher pattern wherever possible,
appropriate, and convenient. The use of bushes and hexagonal eccentric
reducing nipples are not to be used unless authorized by the Engineer or his
representative. Square tees and round elbows shall be used for thermometer,
thermostat, gauge and drain connections and air vents. Round elbows may be
used where pipework is exposed in rooms and where the use of an easy sweep
bend would throw the center of the pipe beyond an acceptable distance from
the wall. No elbows will be allowed on fire service systems where all changes of
direction shall be by means of standard bend springs or long radius bends.

Flat seated unions shall not be used; unions shall have bronze conical seats
ground in. All pipe systems shall be thoroughly flushed out when the installation

Page 24 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

has been completed.

All steel pipework in small channels which are to be provided with permanent
floor covering, and pipework where encased or otherwise make inaccessible
within the building structure, shall be performed with welded joints.

All internal pipework and supports, other than galvanized or copper shall be
cleaned and painted one coat of red oxide paint to afford protection during the
course of erection. The paint shall be applied immediately after the pipework
has been installed.

All pipework in channels which are to be sealed shall be covered in dry sand
unless otherwise specified.

All external pipe supports shall be galvanized.

Special care is to be observed to prevent dirt and rubbish entering the open
ends of pipes during erection, and the open ends are to be temporarily fitted
with plastic or metal caps, plugs or blank flanges during the progress of the
work.

Improvised plugs of wood, rag or paper shall not be used.

In the event of failure to comply with this instruction the Engineer shall order
pipework to be dismantled and cleaned internally to the extent which he may
consider necessary; at no cost to the Client.

A valve terminating a disconnected pipe is not considered satisfactory to

prevent the entry of rubbish. The open end of the valve shall be fitted with a
plug or flange as stated above. All ferrous pipework and fittings other than
galvanized shall be protected by one coat of red oxide paint and this paint shall
be applied as the work progresses.

All pipework not insulated shall be painted one coat of red oxide paint and two
coats of grey gloss paint.

Refer to relevant sections for detailed painting specification.

4.19 Erection of Fire Service Pipework

Unless otherwise indicated Fire services pipework shall be erected in

accordance with NFPA 14 and as required by UAE fire and life safety code
2018.

4.20 Erection of Sanitary Plumbing Pipework

Sanitary plumbing pipework systems shall be installed and tested in

accordance with BS 5572: 1994.

All pipework joint shall be as specified elsewhere.

Vertical pipework shall be fixed at each floor level and at least one intermediate
point between floors with either cast in holderbats or floor clamps. Horizontal

Page 25 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

pipework shall be fixed at not less than 1000 mm centers with Holderbats or
pipe hangers of mild steel drilled and fixed into concrete soffits or otherwise to
an approved detail. All drainage pipework where appropriate shall be supported
on either cantilever or gallows brackets constructed from a minimum of 40 mm
x 40 mm x 6 mm mild steel angle screwed and bolted to the structure with at
least 2 x 12 mm pre-drilled fixings. Connections to traps are to be made with
approved disconnecting unions.

ABS pipes are to be supported with either ABS saddle clips, or two piece ring
clips at the following spacing:

Pipe Size Maximum Support Spacing

Horizontal Vertical

32 – 38 mm 0.5 m 1.2 m
40 – 50 mm 0.5 m 1.2 m

NOTE: These figures are the maximum spacing and it is the Contractor’s
responsibility to ensure that pipes are properly and securely fixed.

ABS tubes passing through floors or walls are to be sleeved with a pipe
generally of the next layout size. Joints between ABS and uPVC are to be
made with an appropriate approved connector.

Main soil and waste pipes are to be fixed to give a constant gradient.

Branch waste pipes are to be fixed to give a constant gradient to BS 5572:1994

(formally CP304) where applicable.

Soil and waste pipes shall be swept in the direction of flow to enter the main
horizontal or vertical soil or waste pipe at a minimum angle of 92.1/2% and a
maximum of 135º.

All pipes where used with bends or machine pulled bends shall be free from
throating, flattening or rippling and the bore and thickness shall be maintained
throughout.

Pipes passing through flat roofs are to have vent pipe roof connections with
raising pieces to give a maximum height above roof level of 450 mm.

All vents shall be fitted with either uPVC or copper wire balloons.

Vent pipes shall be carried out in full bore and terminate 450 mm above roof
levels, or not less than 900 mm above the head of any window opening,
ventilated roof light or HVAC air inlet with 5, 000 m horizontal distance.

Access shall be provided at the foot of each stack and at various points
throughout the system to enable adequate maintenance to be carried out.

The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary access points are provided and
that builders work access doors are correctly located in relation to pipe access
points in order that maintenance may be efficiently and adequately carried out.
Pipe and junction access doors shall be positioned on top of horizontal pipes

Page 26 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

unless accessibility is limited because of ceiling framing, in which case side

access door branches are to be used. On no account shall access doors be
fitted on the underside of horizontal pipe runs.

Cleaning eyes shall be of circular pattern of brass with screwed cap and fibre
washers. All cleaning eyes shall be eased and well greased before being
tightened.

4.21 Sanitary Plumbing Fittings

Sanitary fittings and appliances shall be as indicted in drawings.

All copper traps and wastes where exposed to view shall be chromium plated.

Use fixtures and chrome fittings of the same range and manufacture in any one
group, to ensure matching of profiles, colour etc. All fixtures supplied shall be
certified FIRST QUALITY products of the manufacturer. These shall be free of
defects like warping, cracks, chipping, discoloration, etc. All fixtures supplied
shall have true roughing in dimensions, as in published catalogues. All copper
alloys used in the manufacture of chrome fittings shall be dezincification
resistant types.

Submit product data, samples and roughing in details in accordance with the
provisions of relevant Section. Submit colour schemes and samples in
coordination with the tiling works.

Refer to drawings for details of selection of sanitary fixtures. Compare type,

profiles and colour for the purpose of alternatives or substitutions.

Refer to architectural documents for colour schemes. When coloured sanitary

fixtures are specified, the colour shall be finalised in coordination with other
finishing elements in the wet areas. Refer to architectural documents for details
of toilet and bathroom accessories.

4.22 Supports for General Service Pipework

All necessary brackets, clips, hangers, and other pipe supports including
necessary bolts, nuts, washers, backing plates, screws and plugs which shall
be provided for the fixing and alignment of pipework and shall be approved by
the Engineer.

All additional secondary steel works necessary to support pipework shall be

supplied and fitted by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Engineer.

All chilled water, water service and hose reel pipework shall be supported at the
maximum centers given in the schedule included in Table B15.3 of the CIBSE
Guide.
In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single support the spacing
shall be selected shall be selected for the shorter interval. Under no
circumstances shall one pipe be supported from another pipe. All supports for
steel pipes shall be of ferrous material and shall be galvanized where used with
galvanized pipe.

Page 27 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Spacing of pipe supports on fire service pipework shall conform with the LPC
regulations.

All supports for copper pipes shall be of polished brass where exposed to view;
elsewhere, they shall be of either cast brass or galvanized with rubber insert.
Within room all wall brackets supporting pipework shall be of school board
pattern.

All supports shall be adequate, firmly and duly fixed and shall not promote
vibration.

Where piping is to be supported from concrete construction suitable inserts

shall be provided for placing I the formwork before concrete is poured. The
inserts shall be of cast iron or mild steel and of a type to receive bolt heads or
nuts after installation. They shall permit adjustment of the bolts in a horizontal
direction.

Where copper or steel piping is normally exposed to view in occupied spaces,

the supports shall be spaced at intervals 75% of those listed in Table B15.3 of
the CIBSE Guide, or as specially detailed elsewhere in this Specification or on
the drawings.

Where pipework is connected to vibrating plant the pipe supports shall where
necessary be of the spring or vibration isolated type for a given distance away
from the connection commensurate with the natural dampening effect of the
pipe. The deflection of the anti-vibration support shall be adequately allowed for
such that no undue load is imposed on other supports or connections.

All supports shall be selected and fabricated to allow for thermal movement of
their associated pipe and where applicable vapour sealed insulation system.

All brackets shall be painted with a primer coat and tow coats of red oxide on
steel and galvanized iron.

4.23 Expansion

All pipe fixings are to be located in such a manner as to permit complete

freedom of movement of the pipework for expansion and contraction and to
direct its movement for the purposes of compensating for expansion.

Wherever possible, provision for expansion and contraction of piping shall be

made by changes in direction. In other cases, adequate expansion loops or
expansion fittings shall be provided. Expansion loops when required shall be
formed with welded bends.

The loops shall be shop manufactured and annealed after welding.

Connections to the mains shall be with flanges. Each leg of the loop shall be
pulled cold to approximately 50% of the estimated expansion on each leg.

Where necessary, further expansion compensation devices shall be provided

and installed in accordance with their manufacturers recommendations. Such
devices shall include:

Page 28 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(a) Axial compression bellows comprising single-wall stainless steel bellows

with horseshoe convolutions with welded, flanged or screwed connections.

(b) Articulating compensators of stainless steel shall be to 17.10.

The selection of compensators, loops, offsets and the like shall take due
account of the system pressures and their arrangements relative to anchor
points shall take account of the thrust forces exerted by pipe expansion and
contraction and the effects of such forces on the anchor points and the
structure to which it is fixed.

To prevent undue stressing of flanges due to cold draw, long flange bolts shall
be used initially and shall be pulled up in pairs diametrically opposed until the
joint is finally made when the bolts may be replaced one at a time by one of the
correct length.

Where the Tender drawings do not indicate expansion compensating loops,

offsets, devices, anchors, guides etc., the Contractor shall make due allowance
for all these in his Tender and for all calculations, selection design and
positioning of expansion facilities to the Engineer’s approval.

4.24 Anchors and Guides

Anchors shall be provided as required. Their construction generally shall

comprise heavy steel straps, lugs or flanges welded to the pipe and drilled
where necessary for the reception of bolts for clamping to suitable purpose
made mild steel channel or British Standard beam anchor supports suitably and
rigidly secured to the building structure in a manner to resist any longitudinal
movement of the pipework without damage to the building structure. All welds,
bolts etc., at pipe anchors shall be adequate to resist the thrust imposed. These
shall be protected after manufacture by galvanizing the completed assembly
before installation.

4.25 Headers

Where indicated on the drawings, headers shall be provided for various

services. They shall be of neat construction with welded flanged ends and
provided with all necessary welded flanged stools to suit the sixes and positions
of connections.

The stools shall be of sufficient length to clear the thickness of any insulation
thereon and permit the insertion of flange bolts. All spare outlets which may be
specified shall be provided with valves appropriate to the service concerned
and such spare valves shall be blanked off with plugs or blank flanges as may
be appropriate.

4.26 Underground Pipework

Services laid in the ground shall be installed with care and in such a manner
that pipework and fittings shall not be damaged due to ground movement.
Consideration shall be given, particularly for non-metallic pipes, to the depth at
which the pipe shall be laid, depending upon the size of the pipe, the location,
width of trench and the class of bedding upon which the pipe will lie.

Page 29 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Steel pipes shall receive a coat of primer and two coats of red oxide protective
paint, and all metal pipes shall be wrapped with Denso tape prior to back-filling.

Buried cold water pipes shall be not less than 900 mm below finished ground
surface level.

Where pipes pass under roadways carrying vehicles, they shall be located
within sleeves or conduit. After the pressure test, concrete anchor and thrust
blocks are to be poured and the size and position of all block shall be adequate
and suitable to prevent pipe movement.

All detachable and flanged joints shall be protected with thick bitumen, special
care being taken to apply a liberal coating to screwed ends and exposed
portions of bolts.

Excavation, bedding, pipelaying and back-filling to be carried in accordance

with the following clause.

4.27 Underground Drainage

All drains shall be installed in accordance with BS EN 752 parts 1-4 at even
gradients, in straight lines within preformed trenches trimmed to the depths and
falls as indicated on the drawings.

Pipe trenches for plastic drain pipes shall be as narrow as possible at pipe
crown level, but never less than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300 mm.
In wide trenches, a narrow sub trench shall be formed to achieve this condition.

Drains shall be laid on a bed of granular material comprising approved gravel

graded between 5 mm and 10 mm and free from dust. The bedding material
shall be well compacted and shall cover the full trench width. The minimum
bedding depth shall be 100 mm. Where any drain system is run below the
ground water level the bedding depth shall be at least 150 mm and shall
include a temporary drain to sump for dewatering if necessary.

Where the crown of the pipe is less than 150 mm from the underside of the
concrete slabs, the pipe shall be surrounded in concrete.

Where drains are run under roadways or under areas where vehicles can be
expected to pass over them, they shall be laid such that their crown is at least
900 mm below ground level. Where the depth of cover indicated is less than
900 mm, drains shall be encased in concrete with a minimum thickness in any
direction of 150 mm. Where flexible jointing is used on drainage systems the
concrete encasement shall be sectionalized to match the drain jointing with a
20 mm minimum thickness of a compressible material used as a permanent
shutter between sections to permit movement at joints.

In all cases the pipes shall be laid direct on the bedding and the use of bricks,
blocks, battens or the like to bring the pipeline to gradient will not be permitted.
Side filling for flexible pipes shall be of the same material as used for the
bedding and shall be placed and compacted in layers of 100 mm to a minimum
height of 100 mm above the crown of the pipe.

Page 30 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Side filling for rigid pipes except as otherwise stated shall be of selected
excavated material with stones of over 25 mm size removed. The side fill shall
be placed and compacted in layers of 150 mm to a minimum depth of 300 mm
above crown.

Back filling shall be of selected excavated material placed and compacted in

layer of 300 mm up to ground level.

Concrete surrounds and back filling shall not be carried out until the drain has
been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer. Any defects after testing
shall be made good and retested at the Contractors expense.

The Contractor shall ensure that prior to backfilling all timber, metallic or
concrete temporary supports are removed.

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer when initial side filling of jointed pipes
is complete to allow him opportunity to inspect, carry out random checks and to
observe tests.

To allow for possible differential movement, rigid pipes shall incorporate a

flexible joint in each section of the pipeline within 150 mm of where the drain
leaves any building or connects with any manhole wall or other structure.
The next length of pipe away from the structure shall be kept to a maximum of
600 mm in length and shall have flexible joints at both ends.

All jointing shall be carried out at its final position in dry conditions; any ground
water in the trench shall have been pumped away. No joint shall be made
under water.

When drain pipes enter manholes below the ground water level the pipe shall
be complete with integral puddle flange.

Drains shall be inspected and tested in accordance with BS EN 752 parts 1-4
and any additional testing which may be required by the Local Authority.

Manholes and inspection chambers shall be to BS EN 752 parts 1-4 of the size
and type indicated elsewhere. Blockwork manholes shall be constructed of 200
mm thick solid loadbearing concrete blocks of sulphate resisting quality and
jointed in cement mortar (1:4) on a bed of sulphate resisting cement.

In-situ concrete manholes shall be of a minimum thickness of 200 mm and the

concrete shall be to BS 8110 reinforced as necessary and all of the type shown
on the appropriate civil engineering drawings and details.

Sizes junctions and invert levels shall be as detailed on the drawings.

Benching shall be constructed in concrete grade 20 (20) SRC and channels,

branches and benching shall be finished in 75 mm granolithic concrete
composed of three parts of approved local hard stone chipping crushed to pass
a 6 mm mesh screen in the clear and graded down to, but excluding dust, and
free from organic impurities to one part cement by volume, mixed with water to
form a homogeneous mass. The granolithic shall be finished with a smooth

Page 31 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

even surface true to radius, line and level and shall be kept well watered for
ten days after laying.

Branch inverts shall be at the center line of the main channel. In the case of
manholes where level inverts are required as shown on the drawings, channels
and channel bends and junctions shall be as shown on the drawings.

Galvanized malleable steel step irons for use in manholes shall comply with BS
1247:1990. Manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1994 Part 1.

Petrol/oil interceptors shall be to BS EN 752 parts 1-4 and shall be of the

prefabricated type incorporating three separation chambers. The units shall be
manufactured from filament wound GRP.

4.28 Drain Points

Adequate provisions shall be made for emptying sections of all services as

required for maintenance purposes whether indicated on a drawing or not.

Particular attention should be paid to the requirements of the Local Water

Authority with respect to the provision of drain taps.

Particular attention shall be paid to the requirements of the Local Fire Authority
and the LPC regulations with respect to the provision of drain taps on fire
service pipework systems.

All cylinders, coils and pumps together with all low points of pipework within
plantrooms shall be provided with drain cocks.

All other low points shall be provided with drain taps.

Drain taps shall also be provided on the flow and return of all sub-circuits
provided with isolating facilities and shall be located on the isolated side of the
valves.

Drain cocks shall be in accordance with BS 2879: 1980.

Schemes involving external distribution mains below ground level are to be

provided with ample sized dirt pockets to which the drain cock shall be
provided. Underground mains shall be provided with a 54 mm gland cock with
hose union outlet at the lowest position for the purpose of flushing out.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and positioning of all drain
points.

4.29 Automatic Air Admittance Valves

They shall be provided at the end of a drainage run to prevent siphoning of WC

integral traps.

The valve shall have an ABS inner body and UPVC outer body. The internal
rubber seal diaphragm shall be in accordance with BS 2494:1990 and a
corrosion resistant spring to BS EN 10270-1:2001.

Page 32 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

4.30 Air Vents

Air vents shall be provided at all high points in the pipework, whether indicated
on the drawings or not. Large diameter automatic air vents shall be provided at
all primary venting position, such as plantrooms and at the head of vertical
risers.

Air bottles shall be provided at all venting points. Heating and cooling coils on
air handling units, fan coils and ductwork systems, in addition to all high points
of pipework which require venting, shall be provided with 6 mm diameter air
cocks unless some other form of venting is specified or has been indicated on
the drawings.

For coils and similar cased appliances, the air cock shall be located for
convenient operation external to the outer casing.

Air bottles shall be formed from pipe of equal bore to the pipe being vented and
of length equal to the bore plus 150 mm. Each air bottle shall be provided with
a 6 mm vent pipe welded into the top and terminating in a conveniently
accessible position, approximately 1,600 mm above floor level, with a 6 mm
lockshield needle valve.

The needle valve shall be provided with a 6 mm tailpiece with mitred end.

Each automatic air vent shall be preceded by a lockshield pattern stop valve,
and the discharge from the air vent shall be 12 mm copper pipe terminating
with an open discharge in a position to be agreed over a conveniently located
drain, gulley or sump.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and positioning of all air
vents.

4.31 Float Valves

Equilibrium Type (For Panel type GRP Water Tanks): Bronze construction,
angle pattern, equilibrium type float valve with flanged inlet; complete with
brass/stainless steel float rod and copper float.

For fire water supply break tank provide a float valve, which maintains a
constant level in the tank by admitting flow into the tank in direct proportion to
the flow out of the tank.

The main valve installed in the supply line and a float operated pilot control
installed at the high liquid level in the tank. Provide connection between the float
control and the valve with suitable tubing as per manufacturer’s
recommendation. The main valve shall be single seated hydraulically operated
diaphragm type valve. The pilot control is a direct acting float valve, which
closes when the float rises.

Pressure class PN16

Fluid TSE
Main body and cover material Cast iron ASTM A-48 (or
equivalent)

Page 33 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Main valve trim Bronze ASTM B-61(or equivalent)

Pilot control system cast bronze
Control piping copper tubing (size as per
manufacturer’s recommendation)

4.32 Valves and cocks – General

Valves and cocks shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and of the
sizes given. They shall be in accordance with the types specified.

All valves and cocks shall be located in an accessible position for operational
and maintenance purposes.

Valves and cocks for use on hot and cold water services shall comply with the
regulations and requirements of the Local Water Authority, no extras shall be
allowed for any charges for testing and stamping of valves and cocks which
may be required.

Valves and cocks up to and including DN 50 mm shall, unless otherwise

specified be of bronze construction, screwed in accordance with BS EN 10226-
1, pressure/temperature rating at least PN 20.

Valves and cocks of DN 65 mm and over shall, unless otherwise specified be of

cast iron construction, flanged in accordance with BS EN 1092,
pressure/temperature rating at least PN 15.

All flanged valves and cocks shall be provided with the necessary counter
flanges drilled to suit, complete with corrugated jointing rings and bolts.

Generally all principal circuits and sub-circuits of each system (other than open
circuit system) together with elements such as heating and cooling coils shall
have gate valve on the flow and a double regulating valve on the return, located
such that complete isolation is obtainable. In certain instances, as shown on
drawings flow regulation is required.

The valves used for this purpose shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall
include for visual indication of shut off or lockshield type with dust cover. All
other valves shall be of the hand wheel pattern.

The types of isolating pressure systems such as cold water service the isolating
valves shall be stopcocks. DN 65 mm and over isolating devices on open circuit
systems shall be sluice valves.

4.33 Automatic Air Valves

Automatic Air Valves shall have a bronze body with bolted cover and a 9 mm
top outlet. They shall each incorporate a suitable float mounted on a stainless-
steel spindle terminating in a needle valve for closure against a stainless steel
seating at the outlet.

For low pressure systems the valve shall be provided with a test cock and a
brazed float, but for medium and high pressure systems the float shall be of
stainless steel.

Page 34 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Automatic air valves for low pressure systems shall incorporate an internal ball
check valve at the inlet to prevent air entry to the system.

Automatic air valves for the cold water services shall be to the approval of the
Local Water Authority complete with lock bronze shield valve and screwed in
accordance with BS21.

4.34 Globe Valves

Globe valves shall be in accordance with either BS 5154: 1991 (Bronze valves)
or BS 5150 : 1990 (Cast Iron valves).

Refer elsewhere in the specification for temperature/pressure rating, material

and connection requirements.

Globe valves shall have spherical metal disk, outside screw rising stem,
screwed-in bonnet, ventilated hand wheel and repackable non-asbestos gland
packing.

Cast iron valves shall be provided with bronze trim.

4.35 Balancing Valves

Balancing valves shall be Y-pattern, double regulating globe valve type to BS

7350 with characterized throttling disk.

The valve opening position shall be locked with an Alan key and rendered
tamper proof by means of a wire seal.

Refer elsewhere in the specification for temperature/pressure rating, material

and connection requirements.

The valve body shall be fitted with two double seal pressure test cocks to
enable the pressure drop across the valve to be measured.

Valves shall be suitable for the service that they serve

(a) Brass to BS 2872 CZ132 will be for use in an aggressive environment and
not subject to dezincification
(b) Bronze to BS 1400 LG2
(c) Cast Iron to BS 1452 grade 220
(d) Stainless steel to BS 970316 S11/S13

4.36 Ball Valves

Ball valves for feed and expansion tanks and storage tanks up to 230 litres
actual shall be of the “Portsmouth” type with nylon seats conforming with BS
1212 Part 1: 1990 or Part 2: 1990 Diaphragm type (brass body)”, floats shall be
copper, with brazed seams to BS 2456 : 1990.

For storage tanks exceeding 230 litres actual capacity ballvalves shall be of the
equilibrium type with bronze body and screwed connections up to and including

Page 35 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

50mm bore.

Equilibrium type ballvalves shall have gunmetal faced valve and seating, with
the valve mounted on a forged bronze spindle and sliding freely in a gunmetal
lined cylinder guide, floats shall be copper, with brazed seams to BS 2456 :
1990.

4.37 Bib-taps

Bib cocks shall be in accordance with the BS 1010: 1973.

They shall be provided with hose union nosepiece and hand wheel operated.

4.38 Check Valves

Check valves shall be in accordance with either BS 5154: 1991 (Bronze valves)
or BS 13789: 2002 (Cast Iron Valves).

Refer elsewhere in the specification for temperature/pressure rating, material

and connection requirements.

Check valves shall be complete with a corrosion resistant return spring, making
them suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.

4.39 Cast Iron Plug Valves

Plug valves shall be glandless of the lubricated parallel type with limit stops and
with rectangular ports. Each valve shall be provided with an indicating plate and
quadrant. Plug valves 150mm diameter and over shall be operated by means of
a Capstan wheel worm gearing and mitre gearing to suit the position of the
valve. All other plug valves shall be provided with a malleable iron standard
wrench set screwed to the plug stem. Plug valves shall be screwed or flanged
whichever is specified for the pipe size concerned. Cast Iron to BS 1452 grade
220 and shall comply with BS 5417.

4.40 Double Regulating Valves

Double regulating valves shall be Y-pattern, double regulating globe valve type,
with characterized throttling disk.

The valve opening position shall be locked with an Alan key and rendered
tamperproof by means of a wire seal.

Refer elsewhere in the specification for temperature/pressure rating, material

and connection requirements.

(a) Brass to BS 2872 CZ132 will be for use in an aggressive environment and
not subject to dezincification.
(b) Bronze to BS 1400 LG2
(c) Cast Iron t BS 1452 grade 220
(d) Stainless steel to BS 970316 S11/S13

Page 36 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The valve body shall be fitted with two double seal pressure test cocks to
enable the pressure drop across the valve to be measured.

4.41 Pressure Differential Regulating Valves

Pressure differential regulator shall be of the spring loaded diaphragm type with
piston plug and double-seated valve. Refer elsewhere in the specification for
temperature/pressure rating, material and connection requirements.

These shall be suitable for use on the service to which they are applied.

(a) Brass to BS 2872 CZ132 will be for use in an aggressive environment and
not subject to dezincification.
(b) Bronze to BS 1400 LG2
(c) Cast Iron t BS 1452 grade 220
(d) Stainless steel to BS 970316 S11/S13

4.42 Gate Valves

Gate valves shall be in accordance with either BS 5154: 1991 (Bronze valves)
or BS EN 1171:02 (Cast Iron valves).

Refer elsewhere in the specification for temperature/pressure rating, material

and connection requirements.

Gate valves shall have solid wedge disks, non-rising stem, screwed-in bonnet,
ventilated hand wheel and repackable non-asbestos gland packing.

Where applicable the valves can be resilient seated with disc fully encapsulated
in EDPM rubber.

Cast iron valves shall be provided with bronze trim.

4.43 Gland cocks

Gland cocks shall be of gunmetal with solid taper plug and two bolt oval gland,
and where used for emptying or drain purposes, they shall, unless situated on
permanent drain or emptying pipes, be provided with serrated hose union
tailpieces. These shall comply with the requirements of BS 2879.

4.44 Fixed Orifice Double Regulating Valves

Fixed orifice double regulating valves shall comprise matched double regulating
valve and metering station orifice.

The Contractor shall ensure that they are installed with the manufacturer’s
recommended straight length of up and downstream pipe.These shall be in
accordance with the requirements of BS 4504.

4.45 Relief Valves

Relief valves shall be of the full bore, bronze body, PN20, enclosed spring

Page 37 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

loaded, with padlocked rotateable easing lever, with a discharge pipe to a point
agreed with the Engineer.

Relief valves shall be tested at the manufacturers works in accordance with BS

EN ISO 4126:04 and unless otherwise indicated they shall be set to operate
10% over normal working pressure.

4.46 Sluice Valves

Cast iron sluice valves shall be in accordance with BS 5163: 2004. They shall
have open and shut indications, a bronze non-rising spindle, a solid wedge with
renewable gunmetal rings on valve and seat and lubricated hemp gland
packing.

4.47 Stopcocks

Stopcocks for water services shall be in accordance with BS 1010: 1973 Part
2. They shall have screwed or capillary ends to suit the associated pipework
and unless otherwise specified, shall have crutch handles. Stopcocks for wash-
down or similar services exposed to unauthorized interference shall be provided
with lockshield and loose keys and where stopcocks are located beneath
ground level they shall have square spindle caps for extended keys.

Stopcocks situated at the base of rising mains services to roof shall be of the
combination or brazier type incorporating a drain tap.

4.48 Three Way Gland cocks

Three way gland cocks on common relied pipes shall be heavy pattern,
gunmetal closed bottom type with solid taper plug and T ports and with two bolt
oval glands. They shall be suitable for the service and size concerned. These
shall comply with the requirements of BS 2879.

4.49 Pressure Reducing Valves

Pressure reducing valves shall be of the variable input constant output pressure
type and capable of complete closure in a no flow condition to prevent pressure
equalization.

The downstream pressure settings shall be capable of being adjusted.

All pressure reducing valves shall have cast iron bodies and gunmetal internal
valves, guides, rings, piston rings and piston rings and junk rings, bronze liners,
leather cups and face rings and stainless steel indicator rods with all other
components of suitable non-corroding materials.

The relay system shall comprise bronze body, diaphragm guide, support and
piston, stainless steel spindle nylon valve face, synthetic reinforced rubber
diaphragm and steel spring.

The relay system shall have isolating cocks, bronze bodied orifice/strainer units
and copper strainers. All pressure reducing valves shall be flanged to the
appropriate Table in accordance with BS 10, and sized as appropriate to their

Page 38 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

duty.

4.50 Strainers

Up to and including DN 50 strainers shall be manufactured from bronze and

shall be of the ‘Y’ type with bolted cap, PN 25 temperature/pressure rating.

Above DN 50 strainers shall be manufactured from cast iron and shall be for the
‘Y’ type bolted cap or basket type, PN 16 temperature/pressure rating and shall
be complete with drilled and tapped caps complete with drain cocks.

Strainers shall be provided with a medium grade screen sized such that in their
clean condition the maximum pressure drop at the design flow rate shall not
exceed 6 kPa. For chilled water the mesh shall be stainless steel and for water
services the mesh shall be copper.

4.51 Water Storage Tank Level Indicators / Controllers

(a) Resistive type level transmitter housed in custom fabricated, 100mm (4 in.)
diameter PVC pipe housing with 50mm (2 inch) diameter flanged side
connections at the top and bottom of the tank side. The transmitter
assembly shall be threaded onto a blank flange at the top of the housing,
drilled and tapped to size.

(b) Remote indicator panel, containing the following:

1 Mains Isolator interlocked with the door.

2 Remote indicator.
3 240 / 110 volts transformer of appropriate rating.
4 Set of terminals/relays for inter connection with the filtration transfer
sets, Building automation system and remote alarms.
5 Externally mounted alarm bell.

(c) Alarm bell of weatherproof construction, mounted on the external wall at

1250mm (8 ft) above finished floor level at the tanker fill point, wired to the
indicator panel.

(d) The following functions shall be accomplished:

1 Water level indication (dial shall be calibrated in cu. meter and imperial
gallons).
2 High / low water audio-visual alarms at the indicator panel.
3 High water audible alarm at the tanker fill point.
4 Low water cut out of filtration transfer sets.
5 On site adjustment of alarm set points.
6 Indication of power supply availability to the panel.
7 Provision for hook up with the Building Automation System for critical
alarms.

(e) Conduiting and Wiring

Page 39 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1 Heavy duty galvanised iron conduits (surface mounted) and painted.

Sheet steel trunking shall be used for wiring.
2 Stranded copper (1.5 mm2), PVC insulated wires with crimped on
sheathed terminal lugs, shall be used for all interconnecting wiring.
Joints shall not be allowed in a single wire length. Terminals shall be
numbered, using slip-on ferrules for quick identification.

4.52 Vacuum Breakers

(a) Chrome plated brass, atmospheric type with flat pipette type, rubber discs
and hose thread outlet.
(b) Bronze body, pressure type with heat resistant disc opening to atmosphere
at less than 12mm (1/2-inch} mercury vacuum.
(c) Install vacuum relief valves at inlet to all central water heaters (install in line
check valves at inlet of wall mounted water heaters).

4.53 Automatic Relief Valves

(a) Pressure Valves:

1. Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim, with pipette type manual
actuator lever. The unit shall be preset and sealed at the factory. The
label shall contain the manufacturer's name, serial no., maximum
working pressure and set pressure.

(b) Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves:

1. Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim, one ceramic coated
temperature sensing element and pipette type manual actuator lever.
The unit shall be rated for relieving the maximum heat input to the water
heater and preset and sealed at the factory. The label shall contain the
manufacturers name, serial no., maximum working pressure and
temperature, set pressure and temperature and relieving capacity in
BTU/hr.

(c) Provide automatic pressure and temperature relief valves on all central
electric water heaters.
(d) Provide pressure relief valves on unit electric water heaters.
(e) Provide bypass type pressure relief valves between discharge and suction
manifolds of pressure controlled booster sets.
(f) Pipe the discharge of water heater relief valves to safe locations, to prevent
injury to personnel.

4.54 Automatic Pressure Reducing Valves

(a) Constant Pressure Control Valves for Booster Pump Sets

1. Pilot operated type of globe pattern cast iron construction with bronze
trim, for performing the following functions.
•Maintain a constant down stream pressure, regardless of
fluctuating demand.
(b) Shut off the pump set in the event of very low upstream pressure, created

Page 40 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

by rupture of piping or similar run off conditions.

(c) The valve shall have flanged ends and the assembly shall be complete with
size adjustment spools, dielectric flange unions etc.

4.55 Automatic Air Vents

(a) Bronze body with non-ferrous float and internal working parts. Construction
shall be “take apart” type, for easy maintenance. Outlet shall be tapped for
connection to drain line.
(b) Provide automatic air vents on top of all central electric water heaters, as
detailed.
(c) Provide automatic air vents at system high points, as indicated on drawings.

4.56 Water Hammer Arrestors

(a) Air chambers: Fabricated from copper pipes of line size (minimum 25mm (1
inch diameter) and 300mm to 450mm (12 to 18 inches) long.
(b) Provide air chambers at the topmost junction of all cold water, hot water and
hot water return risers, connected to pressurized systems.

4.57 Hose Bibs and Hydrants

(a) Hose bibs: Chrome plated brass, globe type with integral vacuum breaker
with 12mm (1/2 inch) male threaded inlet and 19mm (3/4 inch) hose thread
outlet. The valve operation shall be by loose keys where required. The inlet
shall be of male thread with wall flange.
(b) Hydrants: Hose bibs as above in cast brass housing suitable for recessed
installation. The door of the housing shall be lockable with the same key as
the hose bib.
(c) Wash Down Stations: Bronze body, piston operated valve with stainless
steel trim; complete with stainless steel hose rack and 15 meters long (50
feet) high pressure hose and trigger controlled, two position jet and spray)
nozzle. The assembly shall be suitable for 1034Kpa (150-psig) working
water pressure.
(d) Provide hose bibs with operating handles or with loose operating keys as
appropriate.

4.58 Valve and Cock Keys

Two complete sets of appropriate keys or wrenches shall be provided to fit

each size of lockshield valve, air valve, drain tap, plug cock etc, and the keys
shall be handed to the Employer’s representative. A timber board with the
necessary hooks for the key shall be provided in each plant room.

4.59 Testing of Pipework

All pipework shall be tested hydraulically after assembly on site and before any
insulation is applied or pipework made inaccessible by building cladding, to a
pressure equal to twice the working pressure. If the working pressure is greater
than 600kpa the test pressure may be one and a half times the working

Page 41 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

pressure.
The minimum test pressure for water pipes shall be 700 kpa.

Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out by means of a purpose made test
pump, which shall be locked after the desired pressure is obtained.

The test pressure shall be registered at the lowest part of the system being
tested and maintained for a period of two hours during which time all parts must
remain completely watertight and no pressure loss is indicated on the test
guage. In the case of Fire Mains wet rises and Hosereel supplies, the pressure
test shall be maintained for 24 hours. Any leakage must at once be made good
and the pressure test repeated until the desired test conditions are maintained.
During this period all welds on steel pipe shall be well hammered. Any defects
shall be made good and the relevant section shall be re-tested all at the
Contractor’s expense.

Boilers, Chillers, Pumps and any other ancillary items of equipment which may
be liable to damage by the test pressure, shall be isolated or suitably protected
during the test, and all necessary precautions shall be taken. Any damaged
equipment shall be replaced.

In order not to delay the building operations sections of the pipework may be
pressure tested independently as the work progresses. All necessary plugs,
caps or blank flanges shall be provided for testing and these shall be removed
after the pressure tests have been approved.

A test certificate shall be issued for each section of the pipwork satisfactorily.

4.60 Testing of Internal Plumbing & Waste

An air test shall be applied at a pressure equal to 380 pa and shall system
pressure shall remain constant for a period of not less than three minutes. The
water seals of all sanitary appliances which are installed shall be fully charged
and a test plug shall be inserted into the open ends of the pipework to be
tested, each plug being sealed with a small quantity of water.

In addition to a test for air or water tightness, every discharge pipe installation
shall be tested for stability of the trap seals on the system. When subjected to
the appropriate discharge tests every trap must retain not less than 25 mm
water seal. Each test shall be repeated three times, traps being recharged
before each test and the maximum loss of seal in any one test should be taken
as the significant result.

The number and type of sanitary fittings to be discharged simultaneously shall

be as detailed in BS 6465: Part 1: 2006.

4.61 Testing of Overflow Pipework

Overflow pipework shall be tested by flushing the pipework for a period of 5

minutes to simulate an overflow condition, during which time the pipework shall
be inspected for leakage.

Page 42 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

4.62 Testing of Condensate Drains

Condensate drains shall be tested by introducing water into a vertical pipe in

the drip tray beneath each cooling coil and flushing the pipework for a period of
5 minutes during which time the pipework shall be inspected for leakage. The
vertical pipe shall be 500mm above the horizontal pipe run and the total run will
be temporarily plugged where it enters the vertical drainage stack, when the
horizontal pipework is proven to be full of water all joints are to be examined for
weeping.

4.63 Testing of Underground Drainage Systems

Testing and inspection shall be in accordance with the procedures set down in
BS EN 752. All items of the drainage system shall be inspected and tested
including gravity drains, ancillary works, drainage pumping mains and
apparatus.

The test procedure shall include:

Pre-test safety checks, soundness checks, cleansing Pipe bore checks

First stage testing, immediately before the work is covered up although in the
case of pressure mains after anchors have been formed and pipework
adequately weighted between joints.

Final testing prior to handover including commissioning of pumped systems

and equipment.

Hydraulic tests on gravity systems shall comprise a minimum head of 1.5 kPa
at the high end and a maximum of 4.0 kPa at the low end sustained for a
period of 30 minutes whereby the loss of water shall not exceed the
acceptance criteria stated in BS EN 752 parts 1-4.

Hydraulic tests on a drainage pumping mains shall comprise a minimum test

pressure of not less than 1.5 x the ‘no flow head pressure’ of the pump or 2.0 x
the maximum pressure capability of the pump in the case of positive
displacement pumps, or in the case of a pipeline subject to surge pressures
exceeding either of the above criteria a value to be agreed with the Engineer in
excess of the maximum calculated surge pressure condition. The test pressure
shall be maintained for 30 minutes during which time there shall be no loss of
water.

All work shall be tested as specified and to the satisfaction of the Engineer
before refilling of excavation is commenced.

The Contractor shall provide clean water and all assistance and appliances for
testing during the progress of the work and for the independent final tests.

Testing will not be considered valid unless it is witnessed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall locate and remedy all defects before further pipe laying
proceeds, and shall repeat the test until a satisfactory result is obtained. Where
a length of pipe under test terminates at a manhole, the restriction on further

Page 43 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

pipe laying will not apply.

The Contractor shall provide and fix testing branches and bends as required
and shall seal off or remove them as described by the Engineer.

4.64 Cleaning and Painting at Completion

At completion of the work all rubbish and superfluous materials shall be cleared
away and the whole of the apparatus shall be left clean and in working order.

All pipe, fittings, valves and other items of equipment are to be clean and any
grease, dirt, metal cuttings, sludge etc., which may have accumulated during
the work shall be removed. Any discolouration or other damage to parts of the
building, its finishes or furnishings shall be made good without additional cost to
the Employer. All pipework, fittings, valves, plant etc., or insulation applied shall
be painted, other than where specifically stated to the contrary.

4.65 Water Treatment against Bacteria

As a protection against the introduction of sulphate reducing bacteria into the

heating and cooling systems during their installation, the apparatus shall, after
the specified flushing out, be dosed during the refill with dichlorophene at the
rate of 40 parts per million by weight.

4.66 Water Treatment and Sterilization of Hot and Cold Water Systems

Hot and cold water service pipework systems shall be disinfected in accordance
with BS 6700 : 1997, clause 13.9.

After disaffection the Contractor shall obtain samples and submit them to be
analyzed and cultured. The Contractor shall submit duplicate copies of
certificates of acceptance as hot and cold water.

The systems, shall be repeatedly flushed with clean water before final analysis
to remove all traces of free chlorine. The acceptance certificate must state
residual chlorine content.

4.67 Labels and Identification

All valves controlling mains and sub-circuits for all services shall be labeled
before the works are commissioned in accordance with a schedule of valves
which shall correspond with valves indicated upon the final as-installed
drawings and any circuit control diagrams considered necessary.

The labels for valves shall be brass or Traffolyte plastic 80 mm by 40 mm with a

hole 10 mm from one end. A short length of brass chain with a ring at each end
shall be used to permanently attach the labels to each valve.

The labels shall be stamped or engraved with letters and numbers not smaller
than 10mm high. Each label shall indicate the type of service and the valve
reference number which shall agree with a schedule of valves which shall be
prepared for each service. The schedule shall comprise the valve reference
number, the function of the valve and its location. In addition to the schedule a

Page 44 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

schematic diagram of each service shall be prepare indicating the position and
reference number of each valve. The schematic diagram shall clearly indicate
the location of each valve in the building.

The schedules and schematic diagrams shall be framed and glazed and hung in
the relevant plant room; an alternative method may be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Duplicate copies of the schedules and schematic
diagrams shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

Motors, starters and switchgear shall have labels of “Traffolyte” with white
lettering on black background. The labels are to be screwed to the front of
starters and isolators and shall indicate the service.

Similar labels shall be affixed below each instrument on the instrument panel
and shall indicate the purpose of the instrument and the respective boiler, tank
or other appliance to which its recordings are applicable. Each fan, pump or any
item of plant shall bear a metal label giving the maker’s name, date of
manufacture and serial number, test and working pressures, duty, horsepower,
phasing, number of cycles per second, speeds, BS number for the standard to
which the item of plant conforms, and all relevant performance data as
appropriate to the item of plant to enable easy identification at a later date.

An engraved label shall be fixed to each filter stating the maximum permissible
pressure drop. In addition to the maker’s label each item of plant shall be fitted
with a further label identifying the equipment in relation to the Schedules of
Plant in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.

All labels shall be engraved in English and Arabic.

4.68 Guards for Moving Parts

All exposed driving belts, shafts, pulleys and other moving parts shall be
provided with suitable guards constructed from stout woven wire mesh of
suitable gauge, adequately braced and firmly fixed in a manner to allow for
ease of removal and freedom from vibration. Guards shall be provided with
75 mm diameter openings with removable covers opposite rotating shaft
centers for the purpose of tachometer readings. Guards and supports shall be
galvanized or suitably protected.

Couplings shall be protected by means of galvanized sheet steel cover fixed to

allow ease of removal.

5 PLUMBING

5.1 Scope of Work

The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, equipment, tools,

appurtenances, services, and temporary work for the project and complete the
water services and plumbing systems all in perfect working order to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and service authority. This work shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:

Page 45 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(a) The procurement and installation of the water supply line from DEWA valve
chamber to the water storage tank.
(b) Cold water supply system including storage tanks and accessories,
domestic water booster pumps and controls, and distribution services to
sanitary fittings and other utilities.
(c. Hot water supply system including hot water heaters and distribution
services to sanitary fittings and other utilities.
(d) Soil and waste systems inside toilet rooms which discharge from sanitary
fittings and other utilities and floor drains, etc., into the under slab sanitary
discharge system.
(e) Stormwater system inside the bridge levels that discharges from floor
drains, through pipe fittings.
(f) Vacuum breakers, trap primers, hydrants etc. shall be tested and certified
for conformity with the requirements of relevant standards.
(g) Water hammer arrestors shall be tested and certified for conformity with
relevant standards.
(h) Pressure relief valves and pressure and temperature relief valves shall be
tested and certified for conformity with the requirements of relevant
standards.
(i) The construction of the specialties shall be of corrosion resistant materials
like cast iron, stainless steel or dezincification resistant copper alloys
(bronze, brass).
(j) All castings used in the construction of the drainage specialties shall be of
good quality, without blow holes or inclusions and shall be finished smooth,
by sand or shot blasting. All these castings shall be given appropriate
coatings, internally and externally, at the factory.
(k) Flashing clamps, where used, shall be non-puncturing type and shall be
fixed by corrosion resistant fasteners. Drainage flanges shall have seepage
holes to conduct away the water collected.
(l) As far as practicable, items of similar nature shall be products of the same
manufacturer.
(m) Use heavy duty gratings / covers in areas subjected to vehicular traffic.
(n) Testing of the above systems, equipment with controls and other devices, to
demonstrate that the entire installation is in perfect working order.
(o) Preparation of all design and shop drawings, material submittals, reports,
and O & M manuals as necessary.
(p) Submit product data, samples and installation details under provisions of
relevant Section.
(q) Submit selection criteria and ordering schedule, listing types against use
and location.

All equipment and materials shall be new, bearing stamped ratings as required,
and must be approved by the Engineer prior to installation.

Provision of water meter chamber, meter, valves, and connection to DEWA

main and all associated fees, notices and application for connection shall be

Page 46 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

carried out by others, under Section VII, Water Works, of the Standard
Specifications. The Contractor shall include for all necessary coordination with
the responsible parties.

5.2 Pipe and Fittings

See relevant Clauses.

5.3 Booster Pump Sets Package

The Pump Manufacturer assembled booster package pump sets for

transferring cold water and supplying pressure water to all sanitary appliances’
drainage shall consist of fully automatic booster pump sets as follows.

(a) Pumps: Vertical multistage, centrifugal type of 2900-rpm speed. Materials of

construction shall be as follows. All wetted areas of cast iron parts shall be
nickel-plated.

1. Impellers… ........................ Stainless steel Grade 315.

2. Shaft… .............................. Stainless steel Grade 329.
3. Stage pieces… ................. Stainless steel Grade 315.
4. Base and head… .............. Stainless steel Grade 315.
5. Seal .................................... Mechanical.

(b) System piping shall be Stainless Steel 316 with welded joints. Manifold
ends shall be flanged.
(c) Valves: All Cast Iron Butterfly valves with SS 316 disc at suction and
discharge of each pump and stainless 316 wafer type self-closing (non-
slam) check valve at discharge of each pump.
(d) Base frame: Fabricated stainless steel 304, with resilient mounting for
pumps, where required.
(e) Relief valve: Provide suitable bypass pressure relief valve from discharge to
suction manifolds, to prevent pump operation at shutoff head.
(f) Accessories: Compound gauge at suction manifold and pressure gauge at
discharge manifold, flexible connections at suction and discharge
connections.

(g) Pump motor and control panel: See relevant Section for details.
(i) Finishing: The assembly shall be given two coats of primer and one coat of
gloss enamel at the factory.

(j) Capacity: See drawings, for types and capacities.

The pumps shall be supplied complete with all necessary pipework, valves,
control panel, controls, wiring, etc., so as to require only inlet and outlet piping
connections and electrical supply. Storage tank for the booster pumpset
package to be of polyethylene construction, complete with accessories.

Pipe work supplied with the unit shall be copper complying with BS 2871, Table
X.

All other components and materials shall comply with the relevant section of
this specification.

Page 47 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The pumps shall incorporate silent, pump discharge, nonreturn valves.

A low-level cut out shall be provided in the reservoir, set to cut out the pumps
when the water level drops to 150 mm above the pump-suction line.

The membrane pressure vessel shall be sized as shown on the Drawings. The
vessel shall incorporate a manhole, a drain valve, a relief valve, a sight gauge,
and all necessary air and water connections. Capacity to be suitable for limiting
number of pump starts to 15 per hour.

The pressure sensor located in the pump discharge header or pressurization

tank shall, switch on the duty pump depending on the pressure drop within the
header.

All equipment shall have labels attached permanently, indicating Name of

manufacturer, Model No. and Serial No., Certified ratings. and Maximum
operating parameters.

Packaged pump sets shall be assembled and tested at the manufacturers or

licensees own premises. Furnish copy of manufacturing license along with
material submittal, where appropriate.

Submit product data and installation drawings and instructions in accordance

with relevant section. Submit certified pump performance characteristics with
selection plotted. Submit manufacturer's / independent laboratory's test
certificates, confirming that the equipment construction and performance meets
or exceeds the specified requirements. Submit data on equipment dimensions,
service connections, operating weight etc.

The control panel shall be manufactured to comply with IP45 standard and shall
include for each pump: power-on lights, run and trip lights, HAO selector
switches, duty selector switches, an isolator, and line and control circuit fuses.

The panel shall incorporate audio and visual alarms for high and low water
levels and overflow of the domestic water reservoirs, together with an alarm
silencing button. A common repeater alarm shall be installed in the control
room.

All pumps shall be “on line” and the lead/lag sequence of the pumps shall
change for each operation.
5.4 Potable Water Roof Storage Tanks

Tanks shall be of Polyethylene insulated construction with suitable accessories.

Components installed within water tanks shall be of corrosion resistant material,

like stainless steel or dezincification resistant copper alloys.

The tank assembly shall be complete with structural steel base, ladders, level
indicator, vents (two no. per compartment), hinged and lockable access
manhole, overflow and drain fittings etc. Suitable GRP shed shall be provided
for the Potable water tanks. The joints shall be sealed with non-toxic, age proof
gasketting and the tank assembly shall be capable of withstanding a deflection

Page 48 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

of 5 (five) mm in the base slab without leaks or damage.

Suction Strainers

Suction strainers shall be installed on all supply connections from water storage
tanks, with bend down elbows in low-level connections. Bronze/fabricated
copper suction strainers shall be used for copper piping. Cast iron suction
strainers shall be used for steel piping.

Structural Base for Manufactured Water Storage Tanks

The Contractor shall coordinate with the building works and ensure the
sufficiency of dimensions of the reinforced concrete structural base, to suit the
requirements of the tank manufacturer. Necessary information in respect of the
allowable deflections of the tank base shall be furnished, to check the integrity
of the reinforced concrete base, to suit the tank.

Testing and Commissioning

The inside of the tank shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, washed down with
water and drained. The tank(s) shall be disinfected along with the disinfections
and flushing of the water supply piping. Water samples shall be analysed and
results submitted to the Engineer, prior to Handing Over.

5.5 Floor Drain in Finished Area (FD-1)

Floor drain FD-1 shall have a cast-iron body with an integral trap and flashing
collar and 150-mm by 150-mm square nickel-bronze top strainer grate, equal to
J. R. Smith.

5.6 Floor Drain in Parking Garage Area (FD)

The parking garage floor drain shall have an epoxy Duco coated cast iron body
and flashing collar with a 300-mm by 300-mm square heavy-duty tractor
ductile-iron grate and sediment bucket with lift bar equal to J. R. Smith.

5.7 Trench Drain (TD) (Ramps and Entry/Exit Points)

Trench drains shall be 300-mm width by 150-mm depth, heavy-duty epoxy-

coated cast-iron body with a ductile-iron grate. The length of drain shall be as
indicated on the Drawings. A catch basin with a galvanized trash bucket shall
be provided at the outlet of the trench drain. Trench drains shall be equal to
J.R. Smith.

5.8 Rainwater Inlet: Sidewall (RD)

A scupper drains with a cast-iron body, flashing clamp, and loose-set grate
shall be provided. The outlet shall be at an angle of 45° and the grate shall be
the angle type, equal to J. R. Smith.

5.9 Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers

A high-hazard, reduced-pressure, backflow preventer shall be provided

Page 49 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

between supplies to irrigation or fountains and the potable water lines to isolate
from potable water. The unit shall contain two check valves and a pressure-
differential relief valve. It shall also have two 1/4-turn, full-port, resilient-seated,
bronze ball-valve shut offs, one before and one after the device with a strainer
and ball type test cocks.

Construction shall be included, but not be limited to:

(a) Connection size to suit the application.
(b) Bronze body.
(c) Replaceable seats.
(d) Stainless steel trims.

Backflow preventers shall be equal to Watts model No. 909.

5.10 Cleanouts (C.O.)

Cleanouts on exposed pipes shall comprise an 85.5° cleanout branch,

complete with UPVC threaded cover. Cleanouts on pipework enclosed within
risers or other inaccessible locations shall have an access panel provided
within the building fabric to gain full access to the cleanout location.

Where cleanouts are provided on buried pipework, a 45° cleanout branch shall
be used which shall be extended up to the floor/ground level and a cover
provided.

Floor cleanout covers shall be manufactured from Duco-coated cast iron. The
cover shall be adjustable, utilizing a Speedi-set gasket. The closure plug shall
be from ABS plastic and be complete with a gasket to form a gas-tight seal. Set
screws shall be from stainless steel.

In unfinished (parking) areas, the cover top shall be round with a scoriated finish
and be of the nontilt tractor type. This type of cleanout cover shall be equal to J.
R. Smith). In tiled areas, the cover top shall be manufactured from nickel-bronze
alloy and shall be square with recess suitable to receive a floor tile. This type of
cleanout cover shall be equal to J. R. Smith. In terrazzo tiled areas, the cover
shall be manufactured from nickel-bronze alloy and shall be square with a
recess suitable to receive a terrazzo tile. This type of cleanout cover shall be
equal to J. R. Smith.

5.11 Rainwater Inlet Flat Roof (RD-1)

The rainwater inlet shall be a promenade deck drain with 14-inch diameter duco
cast-iron body, perforated stainless-steel extension and flashing clamp, equal to
J. R. Smith.

5.12 Planter Drain (PD)

Duco-coated cast-iron body and flashing collar with cast iron dome and
stainless steel mesh screen, similar to J. R. Smith.

5.13 Water Hammer Arresters

Water hammer arresters shall be precharged stainless-steel bellows in a

Page 50 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

stainless-steel casing sized according to the manufacturer’s recommendations

and equal to J. R. Smith “Hydrotrol”.

5.14 Hose Bib in Parking Areas

The hose bib shall be a 20 mm (3/4”) bronze, angle, hose, and gate valve, with
a rubber composite disc similar to Crane No. 58.

5.15 Electric Hot Water Heaters

Electric water heaters shall be provided in accordance with the sizes and
capacities shown on the drawings. Water heaters shall be of the glass-lined,
horizontal type suitable for mounting above a suspended ceiling.

They shall incorporate magnesium rods for cathodic protection. The inlet to
each water heater shall incorporate a combination isolating valve, non return
valve, pressure and temperature relief valve, and drain, piped to the nearest
floor drain.

5.16 Tank Overflow Pipes

The Contractor shall provide and install tank overflow pipes for each cold water
storage tank, which shall terminate at the nearest sump as indicated on the
drawings.

The Contractor shall provide for each overflow pipe, a stainless- steel insect
screen at the termination point.

5.17 Water Meter

The water meter shall be provided in accordance, Water Works of the Standard
Specifications.

5.18 Central Cartridge Filters

(a) Type: Synthetic, disposable media, pressure

(b) Function: Turbidity removal to 5 microns filtration fineness in once-through
application.
(c) Construction: Rated 1034 kPa (125 Psi) stainless steel shell, dished cover
with quick release clamp and air release valve port, welded inlet and outlet
pipes with threaded/flanged ends/ports for differential pressure sensors and
clean and dirty water sampling cocks, integral supports.
(d) Accessories: Air bleed valve, differential pressure indicator.

5.19 Terminal Filters (for drinking water)

(a) Type: Ceramic cartridge with activated carbon fill for removal of taste, dirt,
bacteria, odour and sub-micron filtration of dirt and bacteria.
(b) Construction: Moulded clear plastic body and opaque plastic cover with
threaded connection and threaded inlet and outlet ports.

Page 51 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) Accessories: Mounting bracket, chrome plated brass wall unions at inlet and
outlet; outlet piping concealed in the wall; ball type isolating valve at the
inlet and a bib tap above the deck for outlet.
(d) Installation: Under counter with concealed discharge piping and outlet valve
above deck.

5.20 Unit Electric Water Heaters

(a) Type: Vertical, wall mounted, storage type.

(b) Storage section: Rated 1034 kPa (125 psi), glass lined steel shell, insulated
with minimum 25 mm (1 inch) thick high density fibre glass or polyurethane
foam, enclosed in sheet metal jacketing.
(c) Connections for cold water inlet, hot water outlet, temperature and pressure
relief valve and drain valve.
(d) Anodic protection: Extruded magnesium anode attached to shell.
(e) Recovery section: Immersion type element assembly with screw in type,
copper faced heat resistant plastic base. Heating element shall be made of
nickel chromium wire embedded in magnesium oxide and sheathed in
copper / incolloy tubes. Watt density shall not exceed 7.75 /11.63 watts /
sq.cm (50 / 75 watts / sq.inch) copper / incolloy.
(f) Thermostat: Provide immersion I surface type thermostat with an operating
range of 20 deg. C to 90 deg. C.
(g) Accessories: Pressure and temperature relief valve, high temperature limit
cutout, drain valve etc.
(h) Capacity: See schedules on drawings, for selection and capacity ratings.

5.21 Valves

(a) General
All valves from 1/4” to 2” shall be bronze valves and valves 2 1/2” or larger
shall be cast iron as per the following specification.
(b) Gate Valves. All bronze gate valves shall comply with BS 5154, PN20,
Series B, and have a screwed bonnet, and a non rising stem. Ends shall be
screwed with BS 21 taper thread (ISO R7). Valve-pressure rating shall be a
minimum of 20 bar (at between -10 °C and 100 °C) and shall be equal to
Crane.
All cast-iron gate valves shall comply with BS 5150, PN16 with an inside
screw, a non rising stem, and zinc-free bronze trim. Ends shall in be flanged
in compliance with BS 4504, Table 17.11 and shall be equal to Crane.
(c) Globe Valves. All bronze globe valves shall comply with BS 5154, PN20,
Series B, and have a screwed bonnet. Ends shall be screwed with BS 21
taper thread (ISO R7). The valve-pressure rating shall be a minimum of 20
bar (at between -10 °C and 100 °C) and shall be equal to Crane.
All cast-iron globe valves shall comply with BS 5152, Class 125, and have
an outside screw and yoke, a rising stem, and zinc-free bronze trim. Ends
shall be flanged in compliance with BS 1560, Section 3.2 and shall be equal
to Crane.

Page 52 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(d) Ball Valves. All bronze ball valves shall comply with BS 5750, Part 1, PN25,
with lever operation, bronze body P.T.F.E. (polytetrafloruoethylene) seat
and packing and bronze or DZR (dezincification-resistant) brass ball. Ends
shall be screwed BS 21 taper thread (ISO R7). Valve-pressure rating shall
be a minimum of 25 bar (at between -10 °C and 100 °C) and shall be equal
to Crane.
(e) Butterfly Valves. All cast-iron butterfly valves shall comply with BS 5155,
PN16, with flangeless, wafer type, gearbox/handwheel. Valves shall be SG
iron body and disk with black high-nitrile rubber body lining, 17/2 Cr/Ni
stainless-steel shaft and shall be equal to Crane.
(f) Check Valves. All bronze check valves shall be of the swing type and shall
comply with BS 5154, PN25, and Series B with screwed bonnet suitable for
horizontal and vertical mounting. Ends shall be screwed BS 21 taper thread
(ISO R7). Valve-pressure rating shall be a minimum of 25 bar (at between -
10 °C and 100 °C), and shall be equal to Crane.
Cast-iron valves shall be swing type in compliance with BS 5153, PN16,
with bolted bonnet, and zinc-free bronze trim, suitable for horizontal or
vertical mountings. Ends shall be flanged to BS 4505 PN6. Valve pressure
rating shall be minimum of 6 bar (at between –10 °C and 120 °C), and shall
be equal to Crane.
(g) Strainers. All bronze strainers shall be Y-type, PN32, series B, with screwed
cover, 17.8 stainless-steel screen, 26 s.w.g. (steel wire gauge) with 0.8-mm
perforations. Ends shall be screwed BS 21 taper thread (ISO R7). Valve-
pressure rating shall be a minimum of 32 bar (at between -10
°C and 100 °C) and shall be equal to Crane.

All cast-iron strainers shall be Y-pattern, PN16, with bolted cover, 17.8
stainless-steel screen with 1.6-mm perforations. Ends shall be flanged in
compliance with BS 10, Table F, but drilled in compliance with BS 4504
Table 17.11. Pressure rating shall be a minimum of 14 bar (at between - 60
°C to 65 °C) and be equal to Crane.
(h) Float Valves. Float valves shall be full-bore, bronze, equilibrium type,
incorporating a copper ball float. The connection shall be flanged in
compliance with BS 4504, Table 17.21 or in compliance with BS 10, Table
E. Pressure rating shall be a minimum of 10.3 bar (at 71 °C).

5.22 Pipe Installation

The Contractor shall install cold water main from DEWA Street main to storage
tank.

The Contractor shall install all piping promptly, temporarily capping or plugging
open ends as work progresses and in a manner to conserve space for other
work.

All piping shall be installed free from traps.

The Contractor shall inspect each piece of pipe, tubing, fittings and equipment
for defects and obstructions, and promptly remove all defective material from
job site.

Page 53 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Insulated pipes shall be installed with sufficient clearance to permit insulation to

be applied continuously and unbroken around pipe.

Dissimilar metals shall be separated from direct contact with each other by
gaskets and dielectric couplings. Metal screws and clamps shall be of same
metal and finish as materials supported.

Drain valves shall be installed at low points and air vents at high points on all
piping.

All sanitary pipework shall be installed in accordance with BS 5572.

5.23 Equipment Selection

(a) Select all pump motors for the maximum loading of the selected impeller.
(b) Select all pumps, with operating points within 20% on either side of the
maximum efficiency point.
(c) In so far as possible, do not select the maximum and minimum impeller
sizes for unit pumps.
(d) Use coded colours for finishing equipment of different services.

5.24 Equipment Installation

Unless otherwise indicated, manufactured products shall be installed in

accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

Equipment shall be accurately set, plumbed, and leveled; and shall be installed,
positioned, and located to allow proper and sufficient space for service,
maintenance, and adjustment.

Ensure that the doorways and other accesses to technical areas are amply
sized, to allow for the movement of equipment. Provide hooks, rails or other
provisions, to allow for hoisting or movement of equipment. Furnish data on
heat loss to surroundings from equipment located in air conditioned areas, to
HVAC trade. Furnish data on required power supply to electrical trade.

Provide clearances around equipment for operation, maintenance and

ventilation. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions in all respects. Attach
lifting devices to equipment only at designated points. Do not drop or subject
assemblies to any kind of shock.

5.25 Testing

Prior to covering over, furring in, or placement of insulation, the Contractor shall
test all pipework using the air test as described in BS 5572. All pressure-
sensitive devices shall be removed prior to tests.

5.26 Flushing of Piping

All water piping shall be flushed with water at a flow rate sufficient to produce a
velocity of 2.0 metres per second to 2.5 metres per second. The flow rate shall

Page 54 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

be maintained until all dirt is thoroughly flushed out of the system.

5.27 Pipe Disinfection

The Contractor shall furnish all material, labour, and equipment necessary to
perform the work to comply with the required DEWA standards for chlorine
residual and bacteriological tests.

All domestic water piping shall be disinfected after flushing by introducing a

solution of chlorine (minimum strength 55 ppm) and ensuring that it is evenly
distributed throughout the system.

A residual of chlorine of not less than 10 ppm will be required in the water after
24 hours, unless otherwise directed by DEWA.

The Contractor shall test the initial and residual chlorine concentrations and
submit a report, providing test results, to the Engineer for his approval.

When the required chlorine residual is obtained, the system shall be flushed as
described above until all excess chlorine is removed. Flushing shall continue
until the chlorine content is equal to that of the water being used for flushing.

Water containing high concentrations of chlorine shall be flushed into the

sanitary sewers system.

The Contractor shall obtain water samples for bacteriological testing. These
samples shall be sent to a recognized laboratory for testing and the results shall
be submitted to the Engineer and DEWA for approval.

Piping shall not be put into service until the results are acceptable to the DEWA.

5.28 Installation of Sanitary Fixtures and Fittings

(a) Fixtures and fittings shall be placed in final position and connected
complete.
(b) Ensure that all the fixtures are located in a manner that enhances the usage
of each fixture. Unless otherwise stated, allow for the following minimum
spacing between fixtures.
1. Centre line of wash basin to centre line of bidet / watercloset - 60 cm.
2. Centre line of bidet to centre line of watercloset - 60 cm.
3. Centre line of bidet / watercloset to wall -40 cm.
4. Centre line of wash basin to wall -45 cm.
(c) Locate the supply angle valve, hose bibs, fixture traps etc. at wall tile lines.
Install these symmetrically on the fixture centre line.
(d) Recess shower edges into the wall finish. Tiling must start over the edge of
these fixtures.
(e) All fixtures shall be fixed firmly to the floor / wall with accessories supplied
by the manufacturer. Use chrome plated brass cap nuts for fixing screws.

Page 55 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(f) All ferrous accessories used for the installation of sanitary fixtures shall
have factory applied anti-rust treatment.
(g) Provide chrome plated brass escutcheon plates on chrome fittings fixed on
the wall.
(h) Refer to schedules on drawings for roughing-in details.
(i) Mount fixtures at the following heights above FFL, unless otherwise dictated
by selection.
1. Water closet. 38 cm to top of bowl rim.
2. Bidet. 38 cm to top of bowl rim.
3. Urinal. 55 cm to top of bowl rim.
4. Washbasin. 78 cm to top of bowl rim.
5. Flush valves. 28 cm above top of bowl rim.
6. Shower fixing valves. 90 cm above FFL.

5.29 Location of Cleanouts

Cleanouts shall be installed in a horizontal branch at intervals not exceeding

30.5 m for pipes larger than 100 mm and 15.2 m for pipes 100 mm or less.

Cleanouts shall be provided in every rainwater, soil, or waste stack. The

cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack.

Cleanouts shall be installed on fixture drains of sinks such that the fixture drain
is no more than 6.0 m from a cleanout.

Every cleanout shall be made with a barrett-type fitting that has a bolted cover
plate and gasket, a fitting that has a threaded plug, or a cleanout ferrule that is
installed on a Y.

Where the Y is extended it shall be extended without a change of direction of

more than 45°.

Cleanouts shall be equal in diameter to all pipes less than 100-mm diameter
and at least 100-mm diameter for pipe sizes larger than 100 mm.

Cleanouts shall be located such that the opening is readily accessible and has
sufficient clearance for effective rodding and cleaning.

Cleanout covers shall match the floor or wall finish in which they are installed.

5.30 Arrangement of Vent Pipes

All vent pipes shall be installed without depressions in which moisture can
collect and shall be graded and connected such that moisture can drain back to
the drainage system.

All vent pipes shall be connected directly from their lower ends to outside air.
Vent pipes shall be installed vertically unless approved otherwise by the

Page 56 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Engineer.

Where a vent pipe is to be connected to a nominally horizontal soil or waste

pipe, the connection shall be made above the horizontal centre-line of the soil or
waste pipe and extended directly to the nearest wall or vertical member.

Where a vent pipe is to be connected to another vent pipe, the connection shall
be located at least 80 mm above the floor-level rim of any fixture that is served
by either vent pipe.

Connections between a yoke vent and vent stack or branch vent shall be
located at least 80 mm above the flood level rim of every fixture in the storey in
which the connection is made.

The upper ends of all vent pipes that do not terminate in open air shall be
connected to a vent pipe or venting system that does terminate in open air.

The upper end of every vent pipe that is terminated in open air shall be
extended through a roof.

Where a vent pipe is terminated in open air, the terminal shall be located as
follows:

(a) At least 915 mm above or 3.7 m in any direction from any air inlet, window,
or door.
(b) At least 2.1 m above or 3.7 m in any direction from a roof that is used for
other than weather protection.
(c) Except for a fresh air inlet, at least 2.1 m above the ground.

Where a vent pipe passes through a roof, it shall be terminated at least 915 mm
above the roof.

5.31 Arrangement of Potable Water System Piping

Every fixture supplied with separate hot and cold water controls shall have the
hot water control on the left side and the cold on the right.

Piping shall be graded such that any part of the system can be drained. If it is
not practical to avoid a trap or a sag in a pipe, provision shall be made to drain
it.
5.32 Measurement and Payment

Measurement and payment for various plumbing works included in the Bills of
Quantities will be at the rate per unit included therein for the respective item,
which rate shall be considered as full compensation for the materials, labour,
tools, equipment, and appurtenances required to furnish and install the
respective item.

Each item in the Bills of Quantities shall also include price for all items
mentioned in Section “Mechanical General Requirements” and, “Mechanical
Basic Material and Methods” of the Standard Specifications for Parking
Structures, whether such items are specifically mentioned in the Bills of
Quantities or not.

Page 57 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

For all plant or equipment requiring an electrical supply, the provision and
installation of wiring or cabling, (including terminations) from the local isolator to
the equipment shall be included as part of the rate for the equipment in the
mechanical Bills of Quantities. The isolator and incoming cabling shall be
included as part of the electrical Bills of Quantities. All wiring shall comply fully
with the electrical specification and local regulations, as applicable.

Payment for the domestic booster-pump set shall include for the complete
packaged set with anti-vibration mountings, flexible connections, control panel,
repeater panel, piping, valves, strainers, pressurization tank, and
instrumentation. Any remote control items such as repeater panel and
pressurestat with wiring shall also be included in the rate.

Payment for the drainage pumps shall include the complete pump set with
flexible connections, control panel, repeater panel, piping, valves, level
switches, interconnecting wiring between panels, and instrumentation.

Payment for hot water heaters shall include flexible connections, all associated
valves, relief-valve piping, and any access panels required for maintenance
access.

Payment for copper pipework shall include for all fittings such as bends, tee,
outlets and unions, all supports and anchors, insulation and finishes, all
connections to equipment, outlets and valves (including flanges and unions), all
chromium plating (where required), chrome-plated stopcocks, air vents, drain
cocks, dirt pockets, puddle flanges, and any other appurtenances required to
form a complete installation. Mainline valves have been measured separately,
the rate for which shall include supports, insulation, and any access panels
required in the building fabric.

Payment for float valves shall include the strainers immediately preceeding the
valve.

Payment for polyethylene pipework with PVC sleeve shall include all fittings
such as bends, tees, unions, connectors, flanges, all supports and anchors,
puddle flanges and any other appurtenances required to form a complete
installation.

Payment for floor drains, planter drains, trench drains, rainwater inlets, and floor
cleanouts shall include all flashing collars, screens, gratings, sediment buckets,
sumps, and pipe connectors to form a complete installation to manufacturer’s
recommendations, where applicable.

Payment for drainage pipework shall include all joints, fittings such as bends,
tees, branches, all supports, line cleanouts, sealing rings, ‘O’ rings, and/or
adhesive to form a complete installation.

Payment for cleanouts shall include any access panels required in the building
fabric.

Payment for UPVC pipework shall include all fittings such as bends, tees,
unions, connectors, flanges, all supports and anchors, connections to

Page 58 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

equipment, air vents, drain cocks, dirt pockets, puddle flanges, and any other
appurtenances required to form a complete installation. Valves are measured
separately.

Payment for hose bibs shall include connection to piping system and fixing to
the building fabric.

Payment for petrol interceptors shall include formation of the chambers,

connection of pipework and provision of the covers.

Payment for pressure reducing manholes, shall include formation of the

chambers, connection of pipework and provision of covers.

6 DUCTWORK

6.1 Ductwork General

Subsequent clauses of the section detail general requirements for ductwork

installations.

6.2 Galvanized Steel Ductwork

Galvanized steel ductwork shall be constructed from strip mill cold reduced
sheet steel continuously hot dip galvanized to BS 2989 : 1982, Grade Z2
Coating Type G275, and shall be fabricated in accordance with the
recommendations in the HVCA Specifications issued by the Heating and
Ventilating Contractors Association, ESCA House, 32/34 Palace Court,
Bayswater, London W2 4JG.

Ductwork shall be classified in accordance with DW143 Table 1 into low,

medium and high pressure classes and the fabrication, material and test
specifications appropriate to each class shall apply in this specification
accordingly.

The constructional requirements of DW 143 tables 5, 6, 7 and 8 shall be seen

as minimum standards and sheet thicknesses and intervals between joints and
stiffeners shall be selected with care and regard to the often stringent acoustic
control criteria applying in some areas of the building.

6.3 Ductwork Fittings

Bends, branches, tees, transformations and other fittings shall be constructed

from the same material and to the same thickness as the associated straight
ductwork and shall conform to the standard of fittings prescribed in the
appropriate HVCA Specification for the ductwork material concerned. In all
cases the larger dimension of rectangular ducts shall determine the sheet
thickness and standard of stiffening to be used for the fitting.

Proprietary turning vanes not local manufacture shall be incorporated as

necessary within the standard bends but where the ductwork is internally
insulated, the recommended spacing of the vanes shall be relative to the
internal surface of the lining.

Page 59 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

6.4 Erection of Ductwork – General

The fabrication of all ductwork and fittings shall be executed in a neat and
competent manner by a manufacturer experienced in this class of work. It shall
be true to size and free from sharp edges and projections both internally and
externally.

All items shall be suitable in every way for the design velocity and pressure
conditions and shall comply with all specified tests. Ductwork dimensions
shown on the drawings represent the net free internal sizes, exclusive of all
excrescence’s or linings and shall be provided as such. Due allowance shall be
made to maintain the free area where insulation is to be provided internally.

Ductwork shall be installed to give maximum headroom and with due

consideration for the location of other services with which its arrangement shall
be coordinated. Allowance shall be made during its erection for the thickness of
any insulation thereon and for the application of same.

All ductwork and connections shall be adequately braced and stiffened where
necessary to prevent sagging, drumming and vibration.

The air leakage limits set down in DW143 Table 2 shall not be exceeded and
aggregate total leakage from any whole system shall not exceed 5% of the
total design airflow volume.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary arrangements and

dimensions of ductwork on site and all holes required in walls and floors for the
ducts and fixings including details of timber frames which may be necessary.

All builders work in connection with, associated with or affected by the

ventilation services shall be satisfactorily completed before the permanent
erection of ductwork is carried out. All openings in the ductwork shall be
protected during its erection by means of polythene or other suitable sheeting,
to prevent the ingress of dust and dirt resulting from the building operations,
and all sheeting shall be removed prior to the commissioning of the plant.
In addition, the exterior and the interior of all ductwork shall be cleaned prior to
commissioning.

6.5 Erection of Metal Ductwork

All stiffeners and angle frames for steel ductwork shall be manufactured from
galvanized sections, and where cut shall be cold galvanized after manufacture.

For external ductwork, including ducts situated on a roof, steel ducts shall be
not less than 1.6 mm thick.

All longitudinal seams for metal ductwork shall be of an approved type and
shall be grooved and sealed at not more than 60 mm centers. Joints in
rectangular metal ducts with the longest side equal t or greater than 600 mm
shall be angle flanged with bolts at 150 mm centers, and with the duct ends
swaged into the angle joints which shall be sealed with a suitable gasket or
sealant.

Page 60 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The duct shall be riveted to the flange with rivet spacing not more than 60 mm
centers. Additional flanged joints shall be provided where necessary to
facilitate erection of the ductwork and disconnection for maintenance purposes.

All site joints for metal ductwork, other than flanged joints, shall be properly
swaged plain slip type with the inside lap in the direction air flow and shall be
riveted or jointed with self-tapping screws at not more than 60mm centers. All
such joints shall be sealed and rendered airtight with a suitable sealant.

Metal duct connections to masonry shafts and other builders work openings
shall be made with angle flanges screwed to a hardwood frame fixed to
grounds set in the masonry, and with the duct extended to form a tailed entry.

In the case of fire damper connection to fire barrier walls or floors, the flanged
connection shall be made to a metal companion flange provided with a suitable
sealing gasket.

Where a metal duct passes through a wall, roof or other building structure, it
shall be isolated from the structure by a layer of bituminous felt over which
shall be superimposed a 25 mm thick layer of mineral wool flexible slab to
which the opening shall be made good.

This does not apply to fire dampers which shall be built in.

All screws, bolts and nuts used for erection of the ductwork shall be sheradized
or similarly protected.

All cut edges and other exposed metal shall be painted two coats of red oxide
or zinc chromate paint before erection; and after erection, unless special
protection is specified for the service concerned, all rivets, bolts and nuts and
other exposed metal shall receive two coats of the same protective paint.

6.6 Supports for Ductwork

All necessary ductwork supports shall be provided and fixed to the building
structure and all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, screws, plugs shall also be
provided.

Supports shall comply with the recommendations given in the appropriate

HVCA Specification and shall generally comprise galvanized mild steel
sections and drop rods assembled in a suitable manner to permit adjustment
for height and alignment of the ducts. Vertical ductwork shall be supported by
the stiffening angles or angle flanges wherever possible, additional supporting
angles being provided on the ducts if found necessary.

The spacing of ductwork supports shall be in accordance with HVCA

Specification DW 143. all ductwork shall be supported at branch connections;
and where items of equipment occur within ductwork distributions, additional
support shall be provided as necessary.

All ductwork shall be supported in such a manner that no weight is imposed

upon the plant to which it is connected.

Page 61 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

All mild steel sections used for the construction of duckwork supports shall be
galvanized and painted with suitable zinc rustproofer. Welded work to be
galvanized after manufacture shall be zinc sprayed or otherwise rustproofed in
a suitable manner.

An approved insulation shall be provided between the ductwork supports to

isolate the duct from the building structure. Supports for insulated ducts with a
vapour barrier shall be constructed in accordance with Method 2 as defined in
the HVCA Specification DW 143 with supports external to the insulation and
vapour seal membrane. These supports shall be carried around into the
vertical to prevent crushing of the duct finishes.

6.7 Flexible Joints

Flexible joints shall be provided on the inlet and outlet connection to each fan,
on ducts crossing building expansion joints and elsewhere in the ductwork if so
indicated on the drawings or where necessary to meet the requirements of the
noise and vibration control.

Flexible joints shall consist of, or be protected by, a material having a fire
protection period of at least 15 minutes when tested in accordance with BS.
476 Part 8 : 1972.

The material shall be of glass fibre cloth type; canvas will not be accepted, and
the length of the joints from metal to metal edge shall not be greater than 250
mm or less than 150 mm.

In cases where excessive noise breakout through flexible connections may

cause the noise design criteria to be exceeded, a heavy duty acoustic material
shall be used to wrap the joint.

The ductwork shall not impose any load of the flexible joint.
6.8 Non Metallic Flexible Ducts

Where flexible connections are indicated or required between rigid ductwork

and particular components or items of equipment the internal diameter of the
flexible connection shall be equal to the external diameter of the ductwork and
of the spigot to the item served; and unless otherwise specified or indicated on
the drawings shall not exceed six diameter in length, with a maximum of 3,500
m. This shall be installed to minimize bending of the duct, if the offset is to
acute to achieve this then the ductwork will be modified at the contractors own
expense to comply to the satisfaction of the engineer.

The connection shall be non-metallic in accordance with HVCA Specification

Dw 143 and shall be constructed of material rated at not less than Class 1,
without treatment, when tested for flame spread in accordance with BS. 476 :
Part 3.

Flexible connections shall be suitable for an opening temperature range of –

18ºC to 120ºC.

Non-metallic flexible connections shall comprise a liner and cover or tough,

tear resistant, glass fibre, plastic proofed fabric reinforced with a bonded

Page 62 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

galvanized spring steel wire helix between the liner and cover, and an outer
helix of glass fibre cord or equal bonded to the cover.

6.9 Metallic Flexible Connections

Where flexible connections are indicated or required between rigid ductwork

and particular components or items of equipment the internal diameter of the
flexible connection shall be equal to the external diameter of the ductwork and
of the spigot to the item served; and unless otherwise specified or indicated on
the drawings shall not exceed six diameters in length, with a maximum of 3,500
m. This shall be installed to minimize bending of the duct, if the offset is to
acute to achieve this then the duct work will be modified at the contractors own
expense to comply to the satisfaction of the engineer.

The connection shall be metallic in accordance with HVCA Specification DW

143 and shall be constructed of material rated at not less than Class 1, without
treatment, when test on flame spread in accordance with BS 476 : Part 3.

Flexible connections shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of -

18ºC to 120ºC. Metallic flexible connections shall comprise a spirally wound
rigid metal section, interlocked to give a bendable duct and manufactured from
stainless steel, aluminum, or aluminum coated steel, and lined internally and/or
externally with plastic material, all as specified for the section concerned.

6.10 Access Openings

Access openings shall be provided in the ductwork at suitable positions for the
purpose of inspection and servicing of the plant and equipment.

An access panel shall be provided at each change of direction for cleaning

purposes; and adjacent to all volume control dampers, isolating dampers, fire
dampers and all temperature and air flow detection devices for maintenance
and replacement purposes. Access panels shall also be provided for
inspection, maintenance and lubrication of all fans.

Subject to the restrictions imposed by duct dimensions, access panel openings

should not be smaller than 375mm x 300mm nor larger than 450mm x 450mm
and shall be provided with an 25mm x 6mm mild steel flat welded frame
(galvanized after manufacture) riveted to the duct with the inside edge of the
frame flush with the duct opening.

Access panels shall be of 1.2 mm thick galvanized sheet steel with a 25mm x
6mm thick approved sealing gasket fixed around the edge with a suitable
adhesive to form an airtight seating against the duct frame. They shall be
provided with a central handle and shall be provided with a central handle and
shall be secured with turn buckles at not more than 150mm centers.

Access door shall be provided wherever the access opening is required to

permit full bodily entry of personnel or where renewable equipment contained
within the ductwork system cannot easily be withdrawn or replaced through the
preferred opening sizes given for an access panel.

Page 63 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Access doors shall be provided for at least the following purposes;

Maintenance and cleaning of enclosed fans.

Maintenance and renewal of filter elements, cooling coils and related items.

Access doors for sprays, humidifiers and cooling coils shall incorporate a 6 mm
clear glass panel 200 mm wide by 400 mm high mounted in a frame with a
waterproof rubber seal.

Access doors shall be 500 mm wide with a preferable maximum height of

1.350m and shall be constructed form galvanized sheet steel 1.6 mm thick
reinforced by turned edges to form a door and to secure a 25mm slab of
aluminum faced glass fibrewithin the duct. The openings in the duct shall be
reinforced with a mild steel channel frame (galvanized after manufacture) equal
to the thickness of the door and riveted to the duct. The access door shall be
provided with a suitable sealing gasket, brass hinges, and a clamping latch
operated by handles from both sides of the door.

Where ducts are to be thermally insulated, the frame of access doors or panels
shall be extended beyond the face of the duct using a hardwood timber frame
or other approved means by a measurement equal to the finished thickness of
insulation and arranged so that the insulation can be dressed into the frame.
The insulation finish and any vapour seal shall be carried over the timber frame
and sealed. Access covers in such applications shall be dished to contain the
required insulation thickness and vapour sealed overall.

Access doors on insulated ductwork shall be of the double skin insulated type.

Hand holes to permit jointing to duct sections in awkward situations may b

provided at the engineers discretion but shall be kept to a minimum and made
as small as possible. They shall be rendered airtight with sealant and securely
covered.

6.11 Test Holes

Test holes shall be provided where necessary in main ducts and in all branch
ducts having the diameter or larger dimension greater than 300mm. Test holes
shall be 25mm diameter and shall be provided as near as possible to the
junction of the branch. Locations of these points shall be confirmed to the
engineer by the contractors commissioning engineer with the work shop
drawings. Hinged plug caps shall be provided and all holes shall be sealed at
the completion of the testing and commissioning.

6.12 Testing Ducting

All medium and high pressure ductwork systems as defined by DW 143 shall
be tested for air leakage.

The Engineer reserves the right to require up to 25% of the low pressure
ductwork systems of his selection to be tested for air leakage. Should any one
of the low pressure system tests indicate an air leakage above the prescribed
limit the Engineer will call for all low pressure systems to be so tested and no

Page 64 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

claim in respect of such further tests will be allowed.

The test procedure and equipment shall be as defined in HVCA Specification

DW 143 and Guide DW 143 and shall be agreed in detail before hand with the
Engineer.

If a first test produces leakage in excess of the permitted maximum, the section
shall be released and retested until a satisfactory result is achieved. If at the
time of witnessing the test it is apparent that excessive additional sealing of
seams or joints has been done in order to meet the required leakage level, the
section of ductwork under test shall not be counted as part of the tested
ductwork except where the whole of the ductwork is required to be tested.

Seven days clear notice of any test shall be given to the Engineer in writing so
that, where he deems necessary, the Engineer or his representative shall
witness the test. The test rig and all necessary blanks for the purpose of
sealing the ductwork under test shall be provided, and blanks shall be removed
after the test has been approved for each section of the ductwork.

A test certificate shall be issue for each section of the ductwork satisfactorily
tested. Standard test certificates shall be issued by the Engineer’s and each
certificate submitted shall clearly state the information required on the
certificate. Constant air volume boxes or any other ancillary items of equipment
which may be liable to damage by the test pressure shall be isolated during the
test and all necessary precautions shall be taken. Any damaged equipment
shall be replaced.

7 INSULATION

7.1 Insulation General

Subsequent clauses of the section detail general requirements for insulation,

refer to the particular specification for project specific requirements.

The Insulation shall be as per UAE fire and life safety code 2018 chapter 10
and DM Green building regulations.

7.2 Workmanship

Before insulation is applied pipework and ductwork shall be clean, free from
rust and erected in accordance with good practice with proper clearance to
permit the application of insulation. All pipes and ducts shall be insulated
independently and no two shall be lagged together. Wherever possible the
space between finished surfaces shall not be less than 25 mm. All the required
heat test, pressure tests, and air leakage test shall have been satisfactorily
carried out and approved, and existing pipework and plant shall be suitably
protected, before insulation work may commence.
In order not to delay building operations where pipework or ductwork will
eventually be encased or made inaccessible within the building structure, if
necessary, sections of the installation shall be insulated independently as the
work proceeds.

Skilled labour only shall be used and the materials and workmanship shall be

Page 65 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

of the highest quality.

7.3 Scope

All pipework and ductwork conveying fluids at a temperature which could be

equal to or less than the surrounding ambient wet bulb temperature in its
extreme worst case shall be thermally insulated and finished with a vapour
barrier. Thermal insulation shall be applied to the systems and be of the type
set down in the Schedule of Thermal Insulation at the end of this Section.

Thermal insulation shall be applied to, but not limited to, the following systems:-

Condensate drain lines

Drinking water pipework (other than buried pipework) Chilled water pipework
Hot water service, water heaters AC refrigeration pipes

Supply air ductwork including ductwork conveying air at external ambient

conditions through air-conditioned spaces

Return and extract air ductwork other than ductwork which due to the nature of
the systems can only under all circumstances convey air at the same
temperature as the surrounding ambient

7.4 Application of Insulation to Pipework

All thermal insulation shall be applied where specified and in accordance with
the Schedule of Insulation in a careful and efficient manner to give a smooth,
homogenous and cleanable surface and to present a neat and symmetrical
appearance. Rigid sections shall be concentric and accurately matched for
thicknesses. Damaged ends will not be accepted and any irregular or badly
finished surfaces shall be stripped and re-lagged to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

At bends, tees etc, the sectional insulation shall be formed into neat segments.
The sections of insulation shall be carefully butted together to ensure the
absence of gaps in the insulation and to prevent voids forming between the
insulation and the pipework.

All insulation shall be fixed with a suitable adhesive applied over the whole of
the surface to which the insulation is to be applied.

All joints shall be adequately sealed.

Flanges and valves up to and including 65 mm nominal bore on pipework

where vapour seals are not specified and excluding heating pipework shall not
be insulated. The insulation and finish or cladding shall be neatly terminated at
the flange or valve.
On heating pipework and all other pipework specified as requiring insulation
but not vapour sealing.

On all sizes of pipework where a vapour seal and insulation are specified, the
pipe applied insulation shall terminate at a load bearing insulant of the same
type as specified for pipe support points and the vapour seal and insulation

Page 66 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

finish shall be dressed down to the bare pipe 50 mm either side of valves or
flanges.

An aluminum or stainless steel box shall be fitted over valves and flanges. The
box shall include as an integral part, sleeves of the same material as the box
which shall overlap the vapour sealed load bearing insulant on the adjoining
pipework on each side and fit closely about it. The space between the sleeve
and the overlapped insulation and its finish shall be filled with an approved
sealant. The sleeved valve/flanged box shall be lined with aluminum foil, the
whole space between the uninsulated pipe, valve/flange shall then be filled with
a closed cell polymer injected foam insulant suitable for a temperature range of
-20º C to +110º C. The foamed insulation shall terminate at the top of the valve
bonnet and any surplus foam shall be wiped clean. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the injected foam does not impede the valve operation. Valve
spindles, handwheels and the like shall be contained in a removable section of
the valve box permitting access to handwheels. The handwheels and spindles
shall be wrapped with an adhesive closed cell insulating tape as a primary
precaution. A loose mattress of insulation shall then be inserted in the cavity
between the removable valve box section and hand wheel/spindle and a
vapour barrier of aluminum foil shall be applied over the loose insulation
mattress.

Oversized pipe supports shall be used on pipes where a vapour seal is

specified. At support points the specified pipe insulant shall be replaced by a
load bearing insulant of incompressible hardwood or other approved material.
The insulation shall be contained with a load bearing sleeve of glass shall
extend beyond either end of the load bearing insulation and be arranged to go
over the adjoining pipe insulant and its vapour seal. The space between the
vapour seal and the sleeve shall be completely filled with a suitable mastic
compound to maintain the integrity of the vapour barrier. The load bearing
insulant shall be of the same overall outside diameter as the adjoining pipe
insulation and vapour seal and of a length suitable to support the pipe at any
position that it may take up relative to its support under thermal or other
movement and in any case not less than twice the width of the support. Where
low frictional support points are required, PTFE pads shall be used. The
method of insulating and vapour sealing pipework at anchor points shall be to
the approval of the Engineer. Particular attention shall be paid to sealing all
such points against water vapour ingress.

The vapour barrier shall be extended to the pipe surface every 4.0 m on
vertical risers, so that any failure in the vapour barrier can be easily identified.

Where foamed plastic pipe insulation is specified it shall generally be of the slit
type. All joints shall be closed and sealed with adhesive as recommended by
the manufacturer of the insulation after its application and the butt joint shall
receive a final seal of pressure sensitive self adhesive tape.

Foam insulation exposed to sun light shall be protected by an approved UV

finish.

Insulation of fittings shall be formed by mitre cut straight sections.

Valves on foamed plastic insulated pipework shall be insulated with self

Page 67 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

adhesive insulation tape with similar characteristics to the foamed plastic

insulation. The tape shall be 50 mm wide by 3 mm thick and shall be built up to
a thickness equal to that for the adjoining pipework. At pipe supports loading
bearing non-compressible insulation sections of the same appearance as the
adjoining insulation shall be provided.

7.5 Application of Insulation to Ductwork

The insulation shall be of rigid slab type cut to fit such that top and bottom
pieces overlap the sides. The insulation shall be bonded to the ductwork with
an approved adhesive applied in 150 mm wide bonds at no greater than 300
mm intervals. The fixing of side and underside insulation sections shall be
reinforced by means of spot welded nails or self adhesive nails secured with
spring loaded washers at appropriate intervals.

All ductwork insulation exposed to view in plantrooms, risers, and like areas
shall have its corners reinforced by stiff cardboard angles fixed firmly to the
insulation by adhesive.

The insulation shall then be covered by glass scrim cloth treated against fungal
attack and securely fixed by means of a suitable adhesive.

Flexible connections shall not normally be insulated. Where test holes are
provided the insulation shall be beveled to form a neat access hole 75 mm in
diameter around the test hole.

Access doors is insulated ducts shall be of the double skin insulated type.

Where a vapour seal has been specified for the insulation the vapour seal shall
be continued around the termination of the insulation in order to preserve the
integrity of the vapour seal. Furthermore, the ductwork supports shall not be
connected to the ductwork stiffening or flanges but shall incorporate an
insulator to which the insulation and vapour barrier shall abut and maintain the
continuity of the vapour barrier.

The supporting insulator shall be incompressible and consist of hardwood,

rotproof softwood or other approved material.

Below ground builders work ducts shall be insulated externally by means of an

approved closed cell impermeable polymer insulant applied in the form of
slabs.
The Contractor shall ensure that the vapour barrier is carefully sealed where it
abuts grilles and diffusers.

7.6 Tests for Thermal Insulation

Thermal insulation when delivered to site and prior to installation the Engineer
may request the following tests:-

(a) Thickness – (as delivered and as installed)

(b) Uniformity of thickness
(c) Bulk density

Page 68 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(d) Thermal conductivity

(e) All as laid down in BS 1588, BS EN 12664, 12939, 12667:01, and BS 2972:
1989. Materials which do not conform to the relevant British Standards will
be rejected.

No insulation shall vary from the specified thickness by more than 10%.

To verify that the correct thickness has been installed the Contractor shall cut
out up to 5 sections of each type and thickness of insulation specified on each
service as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall allow for the cost of
cutting out and making good in his tender. Should such cutting out shown that
the insulation is in anyway inadequate further test sections shall be cut out as
directed by the Engineer. In the event of this insulation being inadequate or
unacceptable to the Engineer the whole of the insulation or such parts as the
Engineer shall identify shall be cut out and all such sections re-insulated to this
approval.

7.7 Vapour Barriers

Where specified, vapour barriers shall be applied to thermal insulation to

prevent condensation occurrence on cold surfaces. Vapour barriers shall be
continuous in all respects and shall have a permanence not exceeding 0.04
g/mNs at any point along its length.

Before application, the cloth shall be treated with an approved fungicide, to

prevent mould growth. The cloth shall have a 50 mm overlap.

After a 24 hour period two further coats of a vinyl vapour barrier with a water
vapour transmission of 0.04 perm at 0.38 mm dry film thickness shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The vapour
barrier shall be continued around end termination of insulation including where
the normal insulant terminates at valve and flange boxes, pipe and duct
supports and the like to preserve the integrity of the integrity of the barrier and
to provide sectional barriers to prevent any condensation that may for any
reason form in a section of insulation from spreading unduly.

The vapour seal shall be continued over flanges and at any point where the
vapour seal will be interrupted by such as thermostats an approved sealant
material shall be applied to provide a flashing around the projection through the
insulation. This also applies to valves and the flashing shall be provided at the
top of the valve bonnet.

7.8 Painting Metal Parts

All paint shall comply with the appropriate BS and each type shall be selected
for its use and position.

The choice and use of paints, or other materials, shall comply in all respects to
the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

The manufacturer shall be consulted concerning the necessary preparation of

the surface, and the Mechanical Services Sub-Contractor shall allow for
conforming to such instructions.

Page 69 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The finished painted sections of installation shall be inspection by the Engineer

on completion.

(a) Where installed internally all brackets; once free from rust and scale, are to
be painted with one coat of red primer before erection (a works primer coat
is accepted in lieu if touched up where cut or damaged), and on completion
of the work, but before the lagging is put on, the following shall also be
painted one coat of black heat resisting paint:

1. All brackets in plant rooms.

2. All brackets in any type of duct, walkway, void and ceiling void.
3. All brackets in areas that are not to be decorated as part of the building
contract. (Brackets in decorated areas will be further painted as part of
the building contract)

(b) Where installed internally the following, once free from rust, scale and
lagging waste, are to be pained with a primer coat (red oxide on steel and
galvanized iron, and Chromate primer on copper and gunmetal) and two
coats of inspection quality and colour heat of inspection quality and colour
neat resisting paint:

1. All un-insulated parts of services and plant remaining, where such

sections of the services and plant are insulated and painted in
accordance with the painting and insulation clause.

2. All un-insulated services and plant in ducts, walkway ducts, voids and
ceiling voids. This also applies to ducts that run externally to buildings.
3. All un-insulated services and plant in rooms (which include service
spaces and tank rooms).

7.9 Identification of Pipework and Ductwork

All pipes whether insulated or not shall be identified by code indication colour
bands in accordance with BS 1710: 1984.

Colour bands shall not be provided on pipes which are to be painted to match
internal decorations.

Ductwork shall be identified by code indication colour bands in accordance with

HVCA Specification DW 142.

In addition to the identification band coding all services shall be legibly and
neatly marked with black letters a light background is used and white letters
where a dark background is used and appropriately coloured triangles to
indicate the direction of flow as follows:

Chilled Water F & R CHW

Outside Air OA
Return Air RA
Exhaust Air EA
Supply Air SA
Mains Cold Water Service MCW

Page 70 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Cold Water Service CWS

Boosted Cold Water BCW
Hot Water Services HWS
Fire Water Services FWS
Irrigation Water Services IWS
Refrigeration Pipe RP

7.10 Aluminum cladding

Aluminum protective cladding shall be formed from either 0.6 mm stucco finish
or 0.8 mm thick plain aluminum sheet with overlap joint secured with pop rivets.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no damage to the insulation surface or its
outer finishes occur in this process. Where pipework is located in a particularly
vulnerable position or so as to obstruct normal man access such that it may be
climbed 1.0 mm stainless steel cladding shall be provided in lieu of the
specified aluminum for the entire section.

Where flanges, valves, unions, etc., have to be insulated the cladding shall
take the form of demountable casings fabricated from 0.6 mm stucco finish or
0.8 mm aluminum sheeting.

7.11 Insulation Materials – General

Thermal insulation shall comply with the requirements of BS 5422 and CP

3005. Materials and finishes shall be inherently proof against rotting, mould
and fungal growth and attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respects
be suitable for continuous use throughout the range of operating temperatures
and within the environment indicated.

Materials and finishes shall be asbestos free.

Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any
building shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 4, be classified
non-combustible. Alternatively, all thermal insulating materials used within any
building shall be non-combustible with a facing of combustible material
providing the facing is no more than 0.8 mm thick and it has a Class 1 Surface
Spread of Flame when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 7. Thermal
insulating materials used within any building shall be free from substances
which in the event of a fire would generate appreciable quantities of smoke,
noxious or toxic fumes. When requested by the Engineer, evidence of fire
classification, obtained from an approved testing laboratory, shall be provided
by the Contractor in order to certify that materials comply with this clause.

7.12 Glass Fibre Insulation

Glass fibre insulation shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.04 W/mº
C, approximate density 65 kg/cum and shall be in accordance with the
provisions of BS 3958.

Glass fibre insulation in the form of rigid slabs shall be resin bonded.
Glass fibre insulation for pipes including fittings, shall be applied as rigid
preformed sections factory covered with strong glass scrim cloth with 50 mm
end and side overlaps which shall be neatly fastened down with a suitable

Page 71 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

adhesive and , unless additional external cladding is specified, shall be

secured with non-ferrous straps at intervals not exceeding 450 mm.

7.13 Mineral Wool Insulation

Mineral wool insulation shall be manufacturer from rock drawn out in long fine
fiber’s and made up to the form required. Rockwool mineral insulation shall
have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.05 W/m/C and shall be in
accordance with the appropriate parts of BS 3958.

Flexible mineral wool mattresses shall have a density of approximately 32

kg/cum. Rigid mineral wool slabs shall be bonded with a temperature resistant
resin and have a density of approximately 48 kg/cum. Rigid mineral wool
preformed pipe insulation shall have a density for 110 – 160 kg/cum and shall
be bonded with a temperature resistant resin.

7.14 Insulation of Air handling Units

All air handling units shall be of the double skin casing type with 50 mm of
incombustible mineral wool insulation having a density not less than 50 kg/m3
contained between to give the same coefficient of heat transmission as the
insulation specified for the adjoining ductwork.

7.15 Miscellaneous Plant Insulation

All plant shall be insulated as required by this Specification or as otherwise

necessary or desirable.

In general the manufacturer’s standard insulation type and finish will ordinarily
suffice subject to the approval of the Engineer and its compliance with the
general terms of the insulation specification.

Insulation Schedule
Service Insulation Insulation Insulation Finish
Service Location
s Size Type Thickness
Chilled water PIC foam Vapor barrier and
External 15 to 40 30
sections Aluminum cladding
Chilled water PIC foam Vapor barrier and
External 50 to 80 38
sections Aluminum cladding
Chilled water PIC foam Vapor barrier and
External >80 45
sections Aluminum cladding
Chilled water Conceale PIC foam
15 to 40 25 Vapor barrier
d sections
internally
Chilled water Conceale PIC foam
> 40 32 Vapor barrier
d sections
internally
Chilled water PIC foam Vapor barrier and
Plantroom 15 to 40 25
sections Aluminum cladding

Page 72 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Insulation Schedule
Service Insulation Insulation Insulation Finish
Service Location
s Size Type Thickness
Chilled water PIC foam Vapor barrier and
Plantroom > 40 32
sections Aluminum cladding
Condensate Taped, sealed and
External All Foam plastic 10
drains weather finish
Condensate Concealed
All Foam plastic 10 Taped and sealed
drains internally
Condensate Taped, sealed and
Plantroom All Foam plastic 10
drains Aluminum cladding
Cold water
All All None - -
service
Fire protection
All All None - -
Concealed
Hot water All Fiber glass 25 Wear coating
internally
service rigid
sections
Hot water Fiber glass
Plantroom All 25 Aluminum cladding
service rigid section
Supply, return
and exhaust air Fiber glass Vapor barrier and
External All 25
dusts sections Aluminum cladding
Supply, return
and exhaust air Concealed Fiber glass
All 25 Vapor barrier
dusts internally sections
Supply, return
Rigid fiber
and exhaust air Vapor Aluminum
Plantroom All glass 25
dusts barrier and cladding
Supply, return
and exhaust air Concealed Fiber glass
All 25 Vapor barrier
dusts internally sections
Supply, return
and exhaust air Vapor Aluminum
Plantroom All Rigid fiber 25
dusts barrier and cladding
glass

8 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

8.1 Noise and Vibration Control General

Subsequent clauses of the section detail general requirements for noise and
vibration control, refer to the particular specification for project specific
requirements.

8.2 Air Handling and Ductwork Systems – Airborne, Regenerated and

Breakout Noise

The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting sound attenuators suitably

matched to their associated fan or other noise source to provide sufficient

Page 73 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

dynamic insertion loss to meet the noise design criteria.

Sound attenuators shall be provided where shown on the drawings and as

necessary to prevent transmissions of fan or plant noise and break-in noise.

Cross-talk attenuators shall be provided as indicated or as necessary on

ductwork or return air openings passing through full height permanent
partitions to prevent the passage of speech between private areas and
adjacent rooms.

The Contractor shall in the selection of grilles, diffusers, dampers, ductwork

fittings and the like, take particular care to ensure that regenerated turbulent
noise does not exceed the specified levels.

Where a duct or section of ductwork is liable to excessive noise break-in on its

attenuated side or excessive noise break-out prior to its attenuator and so fort
the Contractor shall increase the sound reduction index of the duct wall to a
suitable value either by increasing the duct wall thickness or by the application
of sound flanking insulation.

The Contractor shall allow for lining all ducts including builders work ducts
where necessary to provide additional attenuation or to prevent the formation
of standing waves and the like.

8.3 Attenuators

Attenuators shall be cased in galvanized mild steel of at least the same gauge
as the adjoining ductwork and otherwise as necessary to suit their purpose.
They shall be provided with mating flanges which shall be riveted to the
ductwork at intervals not exceeding 60mm centers. The duct ends shall be
swaged into the joint which shall be sealed with a suitable gasket or sealant.
Flanges shall be bolted together at not more than 150mm intervals.

Attenuator splitters shall be suitable vermin-proof, rot-proof and non-

combustible tested to BS 476 Part 4: 1970, material contained behind a scrim
or liner to prevent airborned fibre entrainment. The splitters shall be designed
for low pressure loss.

Attenuators shall be suitably supported.

8.4 Acoustic Duct Lining

Acoustic lining of ductwork, including builders work ducts and plenums shall be
applied, where necessary to achieve the required acoustic performance.

Acoustic lining shall be vermin proof, rot proof and noncombustible tested to
BS 476 Part 4: 1970 and shall be fixed to ductwork in an approved manner. It
shall be contained behind a suitable scrim or liner to prevent airborne fibre
entrainment.

8.5 Vibration Control

The Contractor shall provide all means necessary to isolate all vibrating plant,

Page 74 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

equipment, associated system components and the like to the minimum

standards set down in the schedule of isolation Efficiencies or as otherwise
necessary.

All vibration control components and its selection shall be based on ASHRAE
handbook and related ASHRAE code and standard latest edition.

The Contractor shall allow for the design, selection and provision of, necessary
(and regardless of whether indicated on the drawings or not):

Antivibration mountings, floating floors, plinths, inertia blocks, etc. Flexible pipe
and ductwork connections and couplings spring mounted pipe and duct
hangers and supports. Ductwork stiffeners and bracing. Water hammer/shock
arrestors and all such items as may be necessary.

The Contractor shall take due regard in his selection of all related factors likely
to affect the performance of his proposed antivibration items including the
behavior of the supporting structure under the appropriate forcing frequency,
the compound effect of series coupled anti-vibration mounts, near synchronous
beat frequencies, harmonic affects and the like.

9 AIR CONDITIONING & VENTILATION

9.1 Air Conditioning & Ventilation – General

Subsequent clauses of the section detail general requirements for air

conditioning & ventilation systems.

All HVAC systems shall be as per DM green building regulations and ASHRAE
90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low - Rise Residential Buildings.

ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.

ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment

9.2 General Description

This section covers all the prime air movement apparatus in relation to the
types of air-conditioning and ventilation systems.

The drawings indicate the location of units and their purpose.

9.3 Split System Air Conditioning Units

Air-cooled condensing units shall be complete with hermetic compressors, air

cooled condensers, safety and operating controls and refrigerant piping.

Units shall comply with ARI Standard 210. The unit’s efficiency shall be a
minimum of 9.5 EER using the T1-ARI 210/240 test procedure or 6.6 EER using
T3-ISO 5151 test procedure, ASHRAE 90 latest and DM green building
regulation. Units shall have the specified design capacities. The evaporator
units shall be completely matched with the condensing units. cooling capacity
shall be based on actual capacity not nominal.

Page 75 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

All acoustic and thermal insulation including facings and adhesive shall be fire-
resistant and conform to the requirements of the local authorities.

The noise output of the units shall not cause the specified noise levels within
the conditioned spaces to be exceeded.

The casing shall make the units fully weatherproof for outdoor installation and
shall be suitable for saline and marine conditions.

The electrical supply to each unit shall be from the local distribution panel in
compliance with the requirements of DEWA. The unit shall be factory wired and
incorporate starters and a control circuit to permit remote starting.

A refrigerant pipework system shall be supplied between the air cooled

condensing unit and the direct expansion cooling coil on split systems. The
system shall be complete with pipework, fittings, controls and protection devices
and designed in accordance with ASHRAE standards. The system shall be
completely charged with refrigerant.

Gauges of sheet metal specified herein, refer to U.S. standard gauges and are
the minimum permissible thicknesses.

Units and components within shall be bonded for grounding, to meet the safety
standards for servicing required by UL and NEC. Unit shall be suitable for fresh
air as mention in drawings.

Assembly

Split system air conditioning units shall be provided complete with house
keeping pads for outdoor condensing unit, vibration isolators, mounting brackets
and bolts, support for indoor unit, refrigeration and condensate drain piping and
controls. The condensing unit shall be mounted as shown on the Project
Drawings or approved by the Engineer. The units shall operate on 400V, 3
phase 50 Hz system.

Cabinets shall be constructed from galvanised steel with epoxy coat finish.
Indoor section of the cabinet shall be lined with fibreglass insulation. Indoor
coil drain pan shall be constructed from heavy gauge galvanised steel.
Electrical cable inlets shall be furnished in cabinet for wiring entry with sealant
and proofing.

A complete factory sealed refrigeration system shall be provided, consisting of:

compressor, outdoor coil and fan, indoor coil and blower,

The compressor shall be hermetically sealed, suction cooled, overload

protected and equipped with internal pressure relief valve and shall be internally
protected from excessive current and temperature.

Both indoor and outdoor coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins, machine
fitted to copper tubes and tested under pressure to ensure leak proof
construction. The coil assembly shall be provided with a corrosion resistant
baked-on coating applied at the manufacturer's works so as to provide
increased resistance to attack by saline and marine atmosphere.

Page 80 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
25mm frame filters with washable or vacuum cleanable polyurethane shall be
provided. Contractor shall provide one set of spare filters for each indoor unit.

Where equipment is indicated or specified to be hung from ceiling or roof

construction, the Contractor shall provide all necessary hanger rods in the size
and quantity required by the equipment and all necessary supplemental
structural steel sections, securely fastened to the building construction.

Where equipment or duct supports are indicated or specified to be wall-

mounted, the Contractor shall provide all necessary brackets, constructed of
structural steel shapes and securely anchored into the building construction.

The contractor shall provide all necessary refrigeration copper tubing for
interconnecting piping between indoor and outdoor units. The sizes of
refrigerant liquid and suction lines shall be as recommended by AC unit
manufacturer having connection sizes matching the unit connections.
Refrigeration tubing shall have continuous thermal insulation closed-cell type of
minimum thickness 15mm designed for temperature range –200C to +800C.

The condensate drain piping shall be minimum 25mm uPVC, draining each
indoor unit cooling coil to sanitary sewer. An emergency overflow drain pipe
shall be provided under units mounted in MCC (motor control centres) rooms.
The pan shall be piped to the nearest drain outside the MCC room.

Each AC unit shall be controlled by a single stage, cooling only, room

thermostat. The thermostat shall be line voltage 240-V single phase, 50 Hz, of
range +150C to +550C, differential 200C fixed, having electrical rating
matching that of AC unit requirements for controls.

Fan coil units shall be self-contained, incorporating 3 speed fans, cleanable

filter, cooling coil and 2-way control valve operated by a room thermostat. A fan
speed control selector with 'off' position shall be located with the room
thermostat. The FC units shall incorporate all necessary protection devices, the
electrical supply shall be arranged to be from the distribution board.

The fan coil units shall be selected to satisfy the design conditions when
operating at medium speed. A condensate drain and running trap shall be
provided from each fan coil unit, with the minimum seal depth of the trap equal
to the pressure generated by the fan.

Equipment Coating

All air conditioning equipment mounted outdoors, or installed in locations

subject to corrosion, attack by saline and marine conditions shall be protected
accordingly. The entire operation shall be performed in a filtered dust-free
atmosphere. Strict quality control is to be maintained with quality control
tabulations made for each process step. These reports initialed by quality
control personnel of the applicator, shall be furnished to the Engineer for
approval, before shipment.

Coating of Cabinets and Other Components: For the cabinet, frame, motors,
compressors, tubing, etc., all surfaces are to be cleaned as above and any rust,
welding flux or residue of any kind shall be removed by light sand- blasting. The
surface of the factory-applied enamel is to be treated to remove gloss with a
prep solution made for the purpose.

Page 81 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

A wash primer is to be applied to all bare metal surfaces (including galvanised

surfaces). All surfaces (excepting fin, fan blade and plastics) are to be coated
with urethane or equivalent, to a minimum thickness of 6 mils. The colour is to
be light grey. Curing shall be to a high-gloss finish. Decals and nameplates are
to be masked off, or removed and replaced. The unit shall be touched-up after
it is re-assembled to make certain that no scratches remain.

Controls

A complete control system for the air conditioning system shall be furnished
and installed. The controls shall be the manufacturer's standard control
package for the specified unit.

Wall mounted manufacturer supplied controller shall be installed at a height of

1350mm (4'-6") above the finished floor unless otherwise specified. Controls to
be mounted on walls shall be coordinated, such that all required conduit and
wire shall be installed inside masonry from above suspended ceilings to
control unit.

All AC units shall be operated as duty and standby with change over control
panel.

Installation

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as approved by the

Engineer.

Coordinate installation of units with architectural, mechanical and electrical

work.

All refrigerant tubing and electrical interconnections between the outdoor

mounted condensing units and the room mounted fan coil units shall be
supplied and installed. The installation shall be carried out in a neat and
workmanlike manner and shall be unobtrusive, whilst remaining readily
accessible for maintenance.

Room mounted fan coil units shall be mounted in the positions as directed by
the Engineer. These units may be tiered if necessary, not more than two units
being allocated to any one tier. Air cooled, outdoor condensing units shall be
mounted around the periphery of the building, in the positions as directed by
the Engineer. All necessary epoxy/poweder coated mounting brackets and
supports to be supplied.

9.5 Refrigerant
The Contractor shall leave the refrigeration systems with full charges of
refrigerant and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of
refrigerant in the systems for a period of 2 (two) years from date of Substantial
Completion. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur during the
guarantee period, Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and recharge system
to a full charge of refrigerant at no cost to the Client.

Page 82 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
Service

Contractor shall provide a written service contract to the Client which shall
provide monthly service inspection and maintenance for the air conditioning
systems, for 2 (two) years from the date of Substantial Completion and final
acceptance of the air conditioning in the Contract. If, during this time interval,
replacement of any parts, cleaning, oiling or maintenance of the various pieces
of equipment is necessary for proper and continued functioning of this system,
this service will be provided at no charge to the Client. Full charges of
refrigerant shall be maintained, and any leaks which might occur during this
time shall be repaired.

Monthly service shall include checking and adjusting all drives, lubrication of
equipment as required, changing/cleaning air filters, checking general operation
of the entire air conditioning system, and making adjustments as required for
proper system operation. Checking all drain pans and drain lines from air units
and clean as required. Storage of extra filters and installation as required above.

After each monthly inspection, a complete written report of the findings,

corrections and maintenance performed upon the entire system shall be given
to the Client.

9.6 Fan Coil Units

Provide and install as indicated on the drawings refrigerant direct expansion

fan coil units, with net cooling duties as detailed in schedules of the
specification.

Each unit shall comprise fan, and filter enclosed in a heavy gauge galvanised
sheet steel casing with manufacturer's standard finish. The casing shall
incorporate supply duct spigot and return air plenum or where appropriate,
supply and return air grilles, together with insulated drain tray. The free
standing units will be finished in baked enamel or similar standard finish.

Filters shall be washable type arranged for bottom withdrawal.

Filters shall have a minimum efficiency of 92% when tested to BS 2831 using
Test Dust No.2.

Each unit shall be provided with a trapped condensate drain connected into a
common drain and run to a discharge point as indicated on the drawings.

Fans shall be of the forward curved centrifugal DIDW type direct driven by an
internally mounted motor wound for a 220/240 volts single phase 50 Hz.
electric supply, and with sealed-for-life bearings.

9.7 Extract Fans

Provide and install extract fans as indicated on the drawings with the
scheduled duties.

Page 83 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Extract from toilets shall be by means of twin fan cabinet units. Each unit shall
consist of a casing constructed from galvanised or plastic coated steel sheet
enclosing twin centrifugal fans direct or belt driven by separate electric motors.
Motors for direct driven fans shall be suitable for a 220/240 volt single phase
50 Hz. supply and for belt driven fans shall be suitable for a 400/415 volts three
phase 50 Hz. supply. Motors shall have sealed for life bearings.. All units shall
incorporate back- draught shutters.

All scheduled fan duties are based on air quantities required at the room
outlets and due allowance must be make in fan selections for duct leakage.

The external fan resistance shall be calculated by the Contractor taking into
account the resistance of ductwork. attenuators, grilles etc.

9.8 Attenuators

The attenuators shall be tested in accordance with BS 4717.

All materials used shall comply with the relevant parts of BS 476.
Attenuator casings shall be constructed to the same pressure classification as
the adjacent ductwork.

Casings shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel with 40 mm flanges.

The acoustic material shall be faced inorganic, incombustible non- hygroscopic

mineral fibre and shall be retained by means of galvanized expanded metal.

Attenuators shall have side liners and failings as standard.

Each attenuator shall be installed so that it is not bypassed by untreated

ductwork.

9.9 Roof Mounted Extract Units

Roof mounted extract units shall be installed in the locations shown on the
Contract Documents

For ducted systems they shall comprise direct drive mixed flow fans mounted
in low contour weatherproof housings arranged for curb or purlin mounting as
appropriate.

The housings shall be constructed from heavy gauge aluminium alloy finished
in polyester powder paint or molded in fire retardant glass-fibre reinforced
resin.

The assembly shall conform in all respects with the testing to BS 848 and BS
3638. Matched silencers shall be provided subject to confirmation of noise
levels by the contractor.

An access panel shall facilitate access to the interior for maintenance.

The fans shall be single inlet high performance mixed flow type manufactured

Page 84 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

in aluminium alloy and dynamically balanced. Asymmetric blade spacing shall

be incorporated to reduce noise levels.

Motors shall directly drive the fans and shall have sealed for life bearings.
Electrical supply shall be single phase.

Twin fan units on toilet and kitchen extract systems shall incorporate duty and
standby fans within the same housing.

Automatic changeover shall be initiated by flow sensors mounted in the ducts

and a controller shall provide duty sharing of the fans at regular timed intervals.

All fans shall be heavy duty type suitable for marine weather and continue
operation.

9.10Local Wall Mounted Fans

Local wall mounted fans shall be installed in the locations shown on the
Contract Documents. Wall and window mounted extract fans shall be capable
of the duty as shown in the Contract Documents.

The fan unit shall consist of a propeller fan housing, back draught shutters and
discharge grille. Construction shall be of high quality moulded plastic.

Operation shall be through a local on/off switch.

Fan motors shall be totally enclosed in aluminum alloy case and shall be
protected by a thermal overload cut-out.

Motor bearings shall be self-aligning oil impregnated porous bushes with ample
oil reservoir.

Electrical supply shall be single phase.

9.11Stair Pressurization Fans

Roof-mounted stair pressurization fans shall be double- width, double-inlet

centrifugal type, housed within a louvred aluminum penthouse. Access shall
be via a hinged cover. Fan wheels shall be of the backward curved type,
statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be totally enclosed type, with
type F insulation. Fan shafts shall be sized such that first critical speed is 25
percent above operating speed. Bearings shall be ball or roller type mounted
in pillow blocks with grease fittings. Minimum life in excess of 200,000 hours
at maximum operating speed. Supply-air fans shall bear the AMCA Certified
Ratings Seal for performance and shall be equivalent to type LSF as
manufactured by Greenheck. Each fan shall be provided with a motorized
inlet damper.

9.12Package System Air Conditioning Units 9.18

General Requirements

Air-cooled condensing units shall be complete with hermetic compressors, air

cooled condensers, safety and operating controls and refrigerant piping.

Page 85 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Units shall comply with ARI Standard 210. The unit’s efficiency shall be as per
ASHRAE 90 latest and DM green building regulation.

Units shall have the specified design capacities. cooling capacity shall be based
on actual capacity not nominal.

The safety controls shall protect the unit from, low suction pressure and high
condenser pressure.

The units shall be provided with direct driven, propeller type fans arranged for
vertical discharge. All acoustic and thermal insulation including facings and
adhesive shall be fire-resistant and conform to the requirements of the local
authorities.

The noise output of the units shall not cause the specified noise levels within
the conditioned spaces to be exceeded. The casing shall make the units fully
weatherproof for outdoor installation and shall be suitable for saline and marine
conditions.

The electrical supply to each unit shall be from the local distribution panel in
compliance with the requirements of DEWA. The unit shall be factory wired and
incorporate starters and a control circuit to permit remote starting.

A refrigerant pipework system shall be supplied between the air cooled

condenser and the direct expansion cooling coil. The system shall be complete
with pipework, fittings, controls and protection devices and designed in
accordance with ASHRAE standards. The system shall be completely charged
with refrigerant.

Units and components within shall be bonded for grounding, to meet the safety
standards for servicing required by UL and NEC.

Unit shall be suitable for fresh air as .

9.19 Assembly

The air conditioning units shall be provided complete with house keeping pad,
refrigeration and condensate drain piping and controls. The unit shall be
mounted on a concrete pad suitably located, as approved by the Engineer.
The units shall operate on 400V, 3 phase 50 Hz system.

Cabinets shall be constructed from 18 gauge (1.20 mm) galvanised steel with
epoxy coat finish. Evaporator section of the cabinet shall be lined with fibreglass
insulation. Indoor coil drain pan shall be constructed from heavy gauge
galvanised steel. Electrical cable inlets shall be furnished in cabinet for wiring
entry with sealant and proofing.

Page 86 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

A complete factory sealed refrigeration system shall be provided, consisting of:

compressor, condenser coil and fan, evaporator coil and blower, hi- capacity
drier, suction and discharge line service guage portsand a full operating charge
of refrigerant.

The compressor and control box shall be located in a separate compartment of

the cabinet, isolating them from the weather and also keeping the sound level at
a minimum. Control box shall be located for service access, with all controls
factory installed and wired.

The compressor shall be hermetically sealed, suction cooled, overload

protected and equipped with internal pressure relief valve and shall be internally
protected from excessive current and temperature.

Both evaporator and condenser coils shall be constructed of aluminium fins,

machine fitted to copper tubes and tested under pressure to ensure leak proof
construction. The coil assembly shall be provided with a corrosion resistant
baked-on coating applied at the manufacturer's works so as to provide
increased resistance to attack by saline and marine atmosphere.

25mm frame filters with washable or vacuum cleanable polyurethane shall be

provided. Contractor shall provide one set of spare filters for each unit.

Package units shall have spring and neoprene vibration isolators, secured by a
isolator with minimum deflection under load, unless internally isolated. In this
case provide neoprene pads of required thickness between the unit and
mounting platform or housekeeping pads.

Where equipment or duct supports are indicated or specified to be wall-

mounted, the Contractor shall provide all necessary brackets, constructed of
structural steel shapes and securely anchored into the building construction.

The condensate drain piping shall be minimum 25mm uPVC, draining each unit
cooling coil to sanitary sewer..

Each AC unit shall be controlled by a single stage, cooling only, room

thermostat. The thermostat shall be line voltage 240-V single phase, 50 Hz, of
range +150C to +550C, differential 200C fixed, having electrical rating matching
that of AC unit requirements for controls.

The units fan shall be self-contained, with temperature control, cleanable filter,
cooling coil and operated by a room thermostat. A fan speed control selector
with 'off' position shall be located with the room

Page 87 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

thermostat. The units shall incorporate all necessary protection devices, the
electrical supply shall be arranged to be from the distribution board. The units
shall be selected to satisfy the design conditions when operating at medium
speed. A condensate drain and running trap shall be provided from each fan
coil unit, with the minimum seal depth of the trap equal to the pressure
generated by the fan. Anti-vibration mountings and flexible connections shall be
provided for each unit.

9.20 Equipment Coating

All air conditioning equipment mounted outdoors, or installed in locations

subject to corrosion, attack by saline and marine conditions and shall be
protected accordingly. The entire operation shall be performed in a filtered
dust-free atmosphere. Strict quality control is to be maintained with quality
control tabulations made for each process step. These reports initialed by
quality control personnel of the applicator, shall be furnished to the Engineer
for approval, before shipment.

Coating of Cabinets and Other Components: For the cabinet, frame, motors,
compressors, tubing, etc., all surfaces are to be cleaned as above and any rust,
welding flux or residue of any kind shall be removed by light sand- blasting. The
surface of the factory-applied enamel is to be treated to remove gloss with a
prep solution made for the purpose. A wash primer is to be applied to all bare
metal surfaces (including galvanised surfaces). All surfaces (excepting fin, fan
blade and plastics) are to be coated with urethane, to a minimum thickness of 6
mils.

Curing shall be to a high-gloss finish. Decals and nameplates are to be

masked off, or removed and replaced. The unit shall be touched-up after it is
re-assembled to make certain that no scratches remain.

9.21 Controls

A complete control system for the air conditioning system shall be furnished
and installed. The controls shall be the manufacturer's standard control
package for the specified unit.

Wall mounted manufacturer supplied controller shall be installed at a height of

1350mm (4'-6") above the finished floor unless otherwise specified or indicated
on the Drawings. Duct mounted controller shall also provided as approved by
the Engineer, Controls to be mounted on masonry walls shall be coordinated,
such that all required conduit and wire shall be installed inside masonry from
above suspended ceilings to control unit. All AC units shall be operated as
duty and standby, with automatic change over panel.

Page 88 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

9.22 Installation

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as approved by the

Engineer. Coordinate installation of units with architectural, mechanical and
electrical work.

The installation shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike manner and
shall be unobtrusive, whilst remaining readily accessible for maintenance.

9.23 Refrigerant

The Contractor shall leave the refrigeration systems with full charges of
refrigerant and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of
refrigerant and oil in the systems for a period of 2 (two) years from date of
Substantial Completion. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur
during the guarantee period, Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and
recharge system to a full charge of refrigerant at no cost to the client.

9.24 Service

Contractor shall provide a written service contract to the client which shall
provide monthly service inspection and maintenance for the air conditioning
systems, for 2 (two) years from the date of Substantial Completion and final
acceptance of the air conditioning in the Contract. If, during this time interval,
replacement of any parts, cleaning, oiling or maintenance of the various pieces
of equipment is necessary for proper and continued functioning of this system,
this service will be provided at no charge to the Cliet. Full charges of
refrigerant shall be maintained, and any leaks which might occur during this
time shall be repaired.

Monthly service shall include checking and adjusting all drives, lubrication of
equipment as required, changing air filters, checking general operation of the
entire air conditioning system, and making adjustments as required for proper
system operation. Checking all drain pans and drain lines from air units and
clean as required. Storage of extra filters and installation as required above.

After each monthly inspection, a complete written report of the findings,

corrections and maintenance performed upon the entire system shall be given
to the client.

DUCTING AND FITTINGS

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of ductwork and

accessories.

All ductwork and distribution accessories delivered to Site shall be new and
indelibly stamped to identify different grades, materials and manufacturers.

Galvanized steel ductwork shall be constructed from strip mill cold reduced
sheet steel continuously hot dip galvanized Grade Z2 Coating Type G275, and
shall be fabricated in accordance with the recommendations in the HVCA

Page 89 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Specifications issued by the SMACNA.

Ductwork shall be classified in accordance with DW143 Table 1 into low,

medium and high-pressure classes and the fabrication, material and test
specifications appropriate to each class shall apply in this specification
accordingly. The constructional requirements of DW 143 tables 5, 6, 7 and 8
shall be seen as minimum standards and sheet thicknesses and intervals
between joints and stiffeners shall be selected with care and regard to the often-
stringent acoustic control criteria applying in some areas of the building.
All materials used to include ductwork, insulation, adhesives, flexible
connections, sealant and fibreglass boards shall fully comply with the following
standards:

SMACNA: HVAC Duct Construction Standards, metal and Flexible and

Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards.

HVAC, DW/144: Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork, Low, Medium and
High Pressure/Velocity Air Systems.

The ducts that are used for normal air conditioning and ventilation system are
termed non-fire rated ducts.

The zinc coating shall not be damaged during fabrication and installation. The
construction shall comply with SMACNA. Bends and branch vanes, dampers
etc. shall be of the same material as used for the ducts.

All duct sections shall be joined as per DW/144 and SMACNA requirements. All
nuts, bolts and washers shall be galvanized. Duct sizes shall be selected on the
basis of maximum pressure drop of 1.25 Pa/m of duct. The recommended
maximum velocity in ducts is 7m/s in public area.

All air ductwork passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be sleeved. All air
conditioning ductwork shall be insulated to control condensation.

The ducts shall be properly and correctly constructed with all necessary
accessories to minimize waste of energy and pressure losses due to eddies,
vortices etc. and shall not create, amplify or transmit any noise or vibration.

Internal roughness and obstructions to air flow (other than dampers, splitters,
vanes etc.) shall not be accepted for ductwork constructed from sheet materials.
Sharp edges or corners on the outside of ductwork, fittings and supports shall
not be accepted.

Steel metal duct sizes shown on the Drawings are clear internal dimensions and
allowance shall be made for insulation where applicable.

Provide splitter dampers, complete with adjusting handle or similar device to all
branches of the supply air ducts to regulate air flows along the main duct and
the branch ducts, whether they are specifically shown on the Drawings or not.

Provide opposed blade type volume control dampers to all branch ducts.

Provide fire dampers as require by the fire strategy plan. Fire damper

Page 90 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

construction shall comply with the requirements of NFPA and local authorities.

Installation

Provide complete ductwork systems and ensure that the installation can be
adjusted to the designed flow rates.

Check all the Drawings provided in regard to structural requirements and other
finishes before detailing the ducting system. Allowance shall be made for the
detailed development and on-site coordination.

Duct sizes given on the Drawings are clear internal dimensions and allowance
shall be made for insulation where applicable.

Replace damaged ductwork and other appurtenances.

Provide supports, fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel, for the proper

installation of ducts in accordance with DW/144. Hanger rods shall be 10 mm in
diameter, depending on size of duct. All such hangers shall be provided with
screwed lengths on lower end for adjustment of ducting runs to level. All nuts
shall be provided with washers and with lock-nuts, and projecting ends of bolts
shall be cut off.

Supports shall not be riveted or bolted to the air ducts.

Install dampers and splitters in a manner so that they can be adjusted at any
time after completion of the work.

Internal roughness, sharp edges or obstructions to air flow shall not be allowed.

External edges and corners formed from cleated joints shall be neatly dressed
down with air tight joints.

Hangers and Supports

All ductwork shall be securely supported by hangers, brackets and other

appropriate forms of support according to the HVAC publications. Noise and
vibration must not be transferred to the structure or any other element through
hangers and brackets.

Supports shall be located close to all dampers, diffusers and other in duct
equipment.

All hangers and supports shall be clear of duct insulation.

During construction the duct openings shall be temporarily closed with covers to
avoid debris entering ducts.

Access Doors

Access doors shall be installed at every air chamber, filter section, fire damper,
automatic damper, valves, temperature control equipment, filters, fan bearings,
entering side of cooling coils, to permit inspection operation and maintenance.

Page 91 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Access doors required in building construction shall be shown on shop

drawings.

Access doors in ductwork, casings, or sheet metal partitions shall be of double

construction with insulation of the same general character as adjacent sections
of ductwork, of not less than 22 gauge sheet metal. All fittings and screw shall
be made of brass or galvanized steel.

All doors shall be hinged with two hinges, and two latches shall be used on
doors over 200 mm x 200 mm or larger.

Where it is impractical to use hinged doors, such as in false ceiling spaces,

access doors shall be fixed in position with hard chromium wedge type
fasteners on opposite sides.

THERMAL INSULATION

Thermal insulation shall be provided for all air conditioning ductwork. Thermal
insulation shall comply with the requirements of BS 476.

Thermal insulation materials shall conform to the fire property requirements of

one of the following standards:

Flammability – BS 476 Part 4 - Non-combustibility test for materials.

Flammability – BS 476 Part 6 - Method of test for fire propagation for products
BS 476 Part 7 - Method of test to determine the classification of the surface
spread of flame of products criteria, Class 1.

Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proof against rotting, mould
and fungal growth and attack by vermin and in all respects be suitable for
continuous use throughout the range of operating temperatures and for the
environment conditions.

All insulation shall be applied so as to give an acceptable looking smooth

surface of uniform thickness.

Insulated pipes and ducts shall be supported on the outside of the insulation,
with load spreading metal plates of suitable size and thickness between the
insulation and supports to prevent the insulation being crushed. The insulation
at the support points shall be of heavy density load bearing form in pre-formed
or slab sections made to the same thickness and external finish as the adjacent
pipe or duct insulation. At all points of support, both insulation and outer
covering shall be continuous and shall not be punctured or fouled by the
supports. The insulation at supports shall be material of sufficient compressive
strength to take the loads transmitted to the supports. The load-bearing
insulation shall be extended on each side of the supports.

Where ductwork insulation material is hardboard, moulded section or slab type,

the insulation material shall be provided with factory backed vapour barrier of
aluminium foil.

Page 92 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Duct Internal Lining:

Acoustic duct internal lining shall be provided after the machine inlet for 3
meters. The material used for acoustic duct internal lining shall be
incombustible, non-hygroscopic, vermin proof and moisture proof. It shall be
25mm thick with 48kg/cum density.

The lining shall comply with BS 476 Part 6 and the requirements of DCD,
including the associated fasteners, adhesives, tapes etc.

The duct internal lining shall be fixed to the duct with 100 % coverage of fire-
resistant adhesive. The liner shall also be additionally secured with mechanical
fasteners on maximum 400 mm centres on all sides.

Mechanical fasteners which pierce the ductwork will not be accepted. No

damaged materials shall be used.

For duct bends installed with internal lining, the lining shall be a minimum of 25
mm thick, 48 kg/m3 fiberglass with protecting surfaces.

The duct lining shall extend for at least 3 m on both arms of the elbow.

Motorised Volume Damper

All motor operated dampers shall be suitable for installation in either a vertical
plane or a horizontal plane as shown on the Drawings.

The dampers shall be operated by pneumatic or electric actuators as shown on

the drawings and shall be readily assembled on Site from modular panels. Each
motor operated damper panel shall be of the multiple-parallel-blade type, with
an independent channel frame; and shall be factory-assembled complete with
frames, blades, shafts, bush, seals, linkage, and all accessories required to
erect the panels into composite dampers. Motor operated dampers shall be
provided with all structural support members and hardware required for
installation as indicated on the Drawings with additional framing or trims as
required to complete the installation.

Spring-return type damper actuator shall be provided either to open or close

damper as required in the event of power failure. The position of each damper
on power failure is indicated, as applicable, on the Drawings.

Fire Damper

Fire dampers shall be provided in air ducts in the following locations:

Wherever a non-fire rated duct passes through an element which is expressly

built for the purpose of preventing the spread of fire
Any other locations specified

Fire dampers used singly or in combination shall have an overall fire rating not
less than that as required and, in no circumstances, not less than that for the
wall or floor slab in which they are located. Fire dampers shall be constructed of
either a corrosion resistant material be galvanized or otherwise treated to

Page 90 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

minimize corrosion. A fire damper installation frame shall also incorporate

provision for expansion within the surrounding structure together with masking
flange for building into the structure.

Fire Dampers shall be supplied with all necessary fixing frame work for their
installation.

Each fire damper casing shall be clearly marked with a permanent indication of
the correct fixing attitude of the damper, the direction of air flow and the side at
which the access/maintenance opening is located.

Gravity operated multi-bladed fire dampers shall not be used in vertical ducts.
Gravity operated single bladed dampers may be used for horizontal ducts.
Means shall be provided to ensure reliable and positive closure when operating
in maximum air flow rate conditions.

Unless otherwise specified, each fire damper shall be held in the open position
by a corrosion resistant retaining device, incorporated a fusible element, which
shall operate at temperature of 74 °C. The fusible link shall be arranged in an
exposed position and upstream of the damper.

Fire dampers shall be located in such a position and be of a type which

facilitates periodic manual release and resetting for testing purposes.

Fire damper casings shall be flanged to suit the ductwork which they are fitted
and the cross-sectional area shall not be less than that of the ductwork.

Blades and fusible links shall be accessible for servicing through air-tight
inspection doors placed upstream or downstream of the air path, whichever
provides the better access. Proprietary fire dampers shall be DCD approved.

Grilles and Diffusers

All grilles and diffusers shall be of dry powder coated aluminium unless
otherwise specified.

All supply, return and exhaust diffusers shall be complete with opposed blade
dampers, suitable for mounting with appropriate diffuser and shall be fitted with
concealed adjustment devices.

Each supply air grille shall be complete with an opposed blade damper.

The drawings show provisional locations of diffusers and grilles but in each
instance, outlets shall be installed in accordance with the final detail drawings
and reflected ceiling plans.

Velocities, net airways and distribution patterns shall give satisfactory air
distribution and temperature equalization, be free of draughts, stratification or
noise nuisance. Make final adjustments to air patterns when balancing.
Supply and Return Air Grilles

Double deflection supply air grilles/registers shall be tapped from side or bottom
of ducts with provision for tamper-proof adjustment of air pattern spread along

Page 91 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

its width. Adjusting tool shall be provided by the manufacturer.

Provide grilles/registers to meet the size and capacities as shown on the

Drawings. Provide gaskets to obviate air leakage.

Provide transition pieces as shown on the Drawings required to connect ducts

to grilles and registers.

Grilles and registers shall be factory assembled with opposed blade volume
control dampers operable through the grille face. The adjustment shall be by a
key through the face of the register and the volume control damper shall be
group-operated or opposed blade type. The operating mechanism shall not
project through any part of the register face.

Diffusers constructed of extruded aluminium shall be powder coated.

All grille cores shall be capable of being removed easily from the ductwork for
access to dampers.

All edges exposed to view shall be rolled or otherwise stiffened and rounded. All
edges shall be equipped with airtight, sealing strips to prevent leakage. The
register rings or frames shall be compatible with the ceiling construction in
which they are installed.

Aluminium Cladding

Aluminium protective cladding shall be formed from either 0.6 mm stucco finish
or 0.8mm thick plain aluminium sheet with overlap joint secured with rivets.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no damage to insulation surface or its outer
finishes occur in this process.

Vibration Isolators:

The Contractors shall provide all means necessary to isolate all vibrating plant,
equipment, associated system components and the like to the minimum
standards set down in the schedule of isolation Efficiencies or as otherwise
necessary.

The contractor shall allow for selection and provision of necessary antivibration
mounting, floating floors, plinths, inertia blocks etc. Vibration pads shall be
provided to all AC Equipment’s for isolating Vibration.

Flexible duct work connections, duct hangers and supports shall be provided for
isolation of Vibration from Equipment to the Duct System.

10 CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS

10.1 General

Subsequent clauses of the section detail general requirements for chilled water
system.

Page 92 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

10.2 Not Used

10.3 Pipework Fittings and Valves

All chilled water pipework, fittings and valves shall conform with the clauses in
“PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS”.

All pipework up to and including 150 mm nominal bore shall be to BS 10255

“heavy” gauge, seamless, black mild steel.

All pipework of above 150 mm nominal bore and above shall be to BS 3601. All
steel pipework of 65 mm bore and above and all sizes of steel pipework in
ceiling voids and concealed locations shall be welded with butt welded fittings.

All other steel pipework in the range 15 mm to 50 mm nominal bore shall have
screwed malleable iron fittings.

10.4 Circulating Pumps

All circulating pumps shall be of the centrifugal, single stage, direct coupled
type, conforming to DIN 24255. The pumps and the dive motors shall be
suitable for Variable Speed drive with isolated bearings. The circulating pumps
shall be on duty/standby basis.

The pump volute, back pull out bearing housing and gland box shall be
constructed from cast iron to BS 1452 GR260. Vertical Inline pumps are also
acceptable.

The impeller shall be constructed from gunmetal to BS 1400. The drive shaft
shall be constructed from high tensile steel.
The drive shaft sleeve shall be constructed from stainless steel to BS 970.

The bearings shall be of the heavy duty, deep grooved ball type and shall be
sealed for life.

The gland seals shall be mechanical, self adjusting bellows with a long life
ceramic seat. The volute shall be fitted with replaceable wear rings.

The casing shall be designed to allow for the removal of the impeller without
disturbing the pipework.

The pump and drive motor shall be mounted on a common base plate.

Unless otherwise indicated the drive motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled,
IP 54, Class “F”, 1450 rpm.

10.5 Chilled Water Pressurization Plant

Chilled water make-up and pressurization sets shall be provided as indicated in

the Contract Documents.

They shall be sized to cater for expansion and contraction of the chilled water
system, whilst ensuring that the systems are always sealed and pressurized.
Page 93 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
Units shall be of the pre-charged spill tank type system.

The unit shall be of the packaged type, consisting of chassis, pumps (Duty and
Standby), pressure vessel, spill tank, valves, pipework, fully integral controls,
with steel cubicle with rigid doors. The whole unit shall be delivered to site pre-
charged and fully assembled.

The pumps shall be of the single stage or vertical multi-stage centrifugal type
with close coupled TEFC induction motors running at 2,900 rpm. Pump bodies
shall be cast iron or stainless steel with internals of stainless steel and bronze,
fitted with mechanical seals.

10.6 Chilled Water Treatment

Before commissioning, the system shall be flushed by a pre-operational

cleaner which shall be circulated around the system for at least ten hours
before flushing.

After flushing, the chemical treatment shall immediately be applied and shall
comprise control agents against algae, fungi, bacteria, corrosion, scale and
organic fouling. The Contractor shall provide sufficient chemicals for the entire
12 months defects liability period.

The Contractor will note that the optimum level of 0.7 +/- 0.5 pH is the
acceptable datum to aim for any other reading will be rejected and the
treatment will be repeated.

For manually dosed systems chemical dosing equipment shall comprise a

dosage pot installed across chilled water flow and return headers. The dosage
pot shall be of welded mild steel construction suitable for a working pressure of
100 kPa and shall have a capacity of 5 litres.

The pot shall be equipped with conical funnel, non-return valve, air release
cock and drain valve.

Automatic chemical dosing systems shall comprise of the following:-

Conductivity meter for measurement of the water and initiation of the dosing
equipment.

Automatic dosing control system.

50 litre capacity polythene chemical dosing tank complete with suitable dosing
pump and low level chemical shut-off switch.

A 5 litre capacity chemical feeder for periodic additions of biocide to control

microbiological activity in the closed circuit.

A chemical test kit for use by the Client’s operators.

Upon completion of the chemical cleaning the Contractor shall take a sample
of the chilled water and have it tested by an independent laboratory for free
iron and suspended solids. If the results of the analysis indicate the presence
of free iron and suspended solids the chemical cleaning shall be redone at the
Contractors expense.

Page 94 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

11 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

11.1 Scope of Work

The Contractor shall include in his tender for the complete design, supply ,
installation, testing and commissioning of the systems to the standard and
approval of local Civil Defense. The MEP Sub-contractor shall include for all
labor, materials, tools and tackle, complete with all supports and fixings back
to approve building structural members.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all dimensions and location of other
services, and the correct setting out of the installation.

All fire fighting equipments shall be UL listed and / or FM approved and shall
be approved from Dubai Civil Defense.

All fire fighting equipments shall be installed and tested by approved Dubai
Civil Defense specialist company.

11.2 Fire Protection – General

A Civil Defense approved specialist contractor shall be responsible for the

compliance of the fire protection installation with the current rules of NFPA 14
– Standpipe, NFPA 20 – Fire Pumps, and the requirements of the local Civil
Defense.

Fire system in different locations of the Pedestrain Bridge/Ancillary Building

including the following:

(a) Landing Valves

(b) Hose Reels
(c) CO2 Fire Extinguishers
(d) Dry Chemical Powder Fire Extinguishers
(e) Foam Trolley

Fire Water Pump Station including but not limited to the following:

(a) Main Fire pump complete with its Electrical Panel and Controllers,
(b) Jockey Pump complete with its electrical panel and controller,
(c) Fire Water Tank- with two partitions.
(d) Inlet and Outlet valves, PRVs, Air Release valves, Drain Valves.
(e) Submersible Pump, Controller, piping, valves, etc. for the Underground Fire
Water Pump station.
(f) Pressure Switches, Level Switches, Flow meters, Valve Position switches
for remote monitoring, all associated cables, instruments, supports, etc. to
fully meet NFPA 20 regulation requirements.

The following standards will be applicable for this specification and contractor
scope of work:

Page 95 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(a) UAE fire and life safety code of practice latest.

(b) NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
(c) NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
(d) NFPA 14 National Fire Protection Associations, Standard for the Installation
of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems.
(e) NFPA 20 National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Installation
of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection.
(f) NFPA 88A National Fire Protection Association Standard for Parking
Structures.
(g) NFPA 92A Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
(h) NFPA 101 National Fire Protection Associations, "Life Safety Code",
(i) NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
(j) Dubai Civil Defense (DCD) requirements. Which consider the authority
having jurisdiction for life safety.

11.3 Pipework

The main header / riser be as shown in drawings:

150mm, diameter constructed form Galvanized Steel to ASTM A53, Sch.40,

GRD b screwed and socketed Fittings for 2” diameter and below shall be
150lbs. Malleable Iron and for 2½” diameter and above shall mechanical
grooved fittings.

HDPE High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes and fittings to ISO 4427 type
PE 100.

A 25 mm diameter automatic air valve shall be fitted at all high nodes of the
system.

All pipes to be selected according the expected pressure and temperature. All pipes
shall be UL/FM approved and shall carry the UL/FM stamp on the materials.

11.4 Fire Hose Cabinets

Fire cabinets shall be provide where shown on the drawings in accordance with
this specification.

The fire hose cabinet shall be made of 1.5mm stainless steel mirror type 316L
grade 7 sheet, the color of the mirror shall be decided upon the approval of the
consultant. The cabinet shall be either wall-mounted type or recessed type as
shown on the drawings.

Cabinet shall manufacture by ISO9001 manufacturing company and duly

certified e.g. LPCB and others.

11.5 Hose Reels

The hose reel drum shall be installed in a cabinet made of stainless steel 316,
mirror type supported with reinforced support arm, which shall be chrome
plated and swing through 180 degrees. Welding of any part on cabinet front

Page 96 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
shall not be allowed. The hose shall be made up of red, seamless reinforced
with double synthetic textile yarn layer. The working pressure of the hose shall
be 20 bar minimum and bursting pressure shall be 50 bar. The hose reel shall
be in accordance with BS EN 671:01 and AS 1221; the hose shall be wound
on a fabricated steeldrum with circular side plates. The hose reel shall turn on
automatically when 1.5 to 1.8 meters of hose is withdrawn from the reel/drum.

The hose nozzle shall be chrome-plated brass, (Jet/Spray/Shut Off) nozzle.

The fire hose cabinet shall include a dry chemical fire extinguisher of the ABC
type as specified hereafter. The contractor shall furnish a certificate from the
original manufacturer of reel and cabinet.

Provide and install as indicated on the drawings automatic recess cabinet

swinging hose reels. The reels shall comply with BS EN 671:01 and comprise
a reinforced rubber hose, 30m long x 25mm diameter, suitable for a working
pressure of 10 bar, coiled on a revolving drum. The outer end of a hose shall
be fitted with a “shut-off” control nozzle. The inner end of the hose shall be
connected through the reel to the water supply.

Each hose reel shall be installed and tested to BS EN 671:01 and shall deliver
not less than 0.4 l/s when the two topmost reels are in use simultaneously
providing a jet of approximately 6m in length. Pressure reducing devices shall
be provided whenever necessary to limit the pressure to 6.9 bar.

The reels shall incorporate a valve that automatically turns on the water supply
when more than approximately 3m of hose is unreeled, and shuts off again
when the hose is re-wound onto the reel. A manual shut-off valve of the wheel
type shall also be installed on the service pipe at each hose reel.

An inspection plate shall be supplied with each reel indicating the method of
use in English and Arabic.

The hose reels shall be of a make, approved by the Ministry of the Interior Civil
Defense Department, and shall be supplied through an authorized agent.

Hose reels shall comply with BS 5306 and have an effective arc of operation of
not less than 30m. The hose should be of 25mm internal diameter rubber fire
hose reinforced with double braiding and 30m long. The nozzle shall be of high
impact plastics, jet spray/shut off.

Cabinet type hose reels shall be of the automatic swinging type mounted 1.5m
from floor level and provided with a local isolating valve. Where cabinet
mounted hose reels shall also be suitable for recessed fitting.

Surface type hose reels shall be automatic non-swing pedestal type complete
with local isolation valve, double concave roller hose guide.

Pipe work fittings, hangers, etc. are to be as detailed. Pipework shall be to

ASSTM A53, Sch.40, Grd.B galvanized. Brief operating instructions should be
clearly displayed on or by each hose reel e.g. “TO OPERATE

(a) RUN OUT HOSE

(b) TURN ON CLOCK AT NOZZLE

The hose reels shall be suitable for working pressures up to 6.9 bar (100 PSI)
and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Page 97 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Landing Valves

Landing valves shall be installed on the standpipe system for the use of Fire
brigade as shown on the drawings. Landing valves shall be oblique pattern
brass chrome plated globe valves, high pressure type to BS 5041 with 65mm,
diameter, bore fitted with 65mm. Instantaneous female coupling to conform to
BS 336 and a brass chrome plated blank cap secured by a suitable length of
chain. The landing valve shall have 65mm Dia. Flanged inlet for attachment to
the dry riser. The valve shall be equipped with spindle not less than 22.2 mm
diameter and fitted with a brass chrome plated hand wheel of about 150mm.
Diameter. Marked with OPEN and CLOSED directions. Opening shall be anti-
clockwise. The whole valve fittings shall be sound construction and
hydraulically tested to a pressure of 20.7 bar.

11.6 Not Used

11.7 Inlet Breeching Valve

The inlet breeching piece shall be of horizontal pattern having a 100mm

flanged outlet and two / four 65mm instantaneous male inlets complete with
blank caps and chains. A non-return (check) valve shall protect the inlet. The
coupling shall comply with BS336.

The breeching piece shall be equipped with a 25mm drain valve to drain the
riser. Al enclosed in an approved stainless steel (AS 304) flush box with wired
glass glazed front panel and:

(a) Conspicuously indicated by the words “FIRE BRIGADE – WET MAIN

INLET” or WET RISER INLET” in block letters on the inner face of the
glass, both on English and Arabic.
(b) Fastened only by means of a spring lock, which can also be operated from
the inside without the aid of a key after the glass, have been broken.
(c) Made large enough for hose to be connected to inlets even if the door
cannot be opened and the only means of access is by breaking the glass.

The box should be constructed in accordance with BS 3980 with minimum

dimensions 700mm x 1400 mm x 300 mm.

The box shall be built into the structure with a fall of one in 12, from the rear of
the base to the front of the base.

11.8 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Provide and install fire extinguishers as indicated on the drawings.

Extinguishers shall be of the following sizes:

(a) Carbon Dioxide Portable Extinguisher

(b) Dry Chemical Powder
(c) Foam Fire Extinguisher

The physical dimensions of the extinguishers shall be such that they housed
within the cabinet if necessary.

Page 98 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

11.9 Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguisher

The cylinder shall be seamless and extruded of high graded steel to withstand
a test pressure of 250 bar. The extinguisher shall comply with BS EN 3 1-6:96.
The temperature range for safety operation shall range from – 20 to 60 degree.

The extinguisher shall be electroplated PVC resin coated to resist corrosion.

The suction tube shall be aluminium.

11.10 ABC Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher

It shall comply with BS EN 3 1-6:96. The extinguisher shall have minimum

working pressure of 14 bar. The temperature shall range from –20 to 60
degree. The extinguisher must have a plastic base. It must be coated. The
suction tube shall be made of aluminium.

Fire extinguishers shall be to the approval of the Ministry of the interior, Civil
Defense Department and shall be purchased through an authorized agent.

11.11 Fire Pumps

The Contractor shall provide and install a complete pressure boosting system,
comprising electrically driven main pump, stand-by pump, and an electrically
driven Jockey pump. The pumps shall be of the type indicated in the
Equipment Schedule and shall have a characteristic as defined by NFPA-20
regulations for the hazard being protected.

(a) The Jockey pump should start due to pressure drop in the system through
pressure switch. In case the water demand exceeds the supply capacity of
Jockey pump the main pump should start through the pressure switch to
meet the water demand.

(b) Fire Pump Design:

Pump shall be designed to deliver specified flow when operating against a

TDH as per equipment schedule. The pump shall also deliver not less than
150% of rated capacity at a pressure not less than 65% of rated pressure.
Unit provided under provision NFPA-20, 1993 paragraph # 1-5. Unit
pressure shut-off head shall not exceed 140% of rated pressure.

(c) Construction

The pump casing shall be of extra heavy cast iron, with minimum tensile
strength of 30,000 lbs and shall be split parallel to the shaft. Bearing
housing supports, suction and discharge flanges shall be cast, bored and
machined integrally with the lower half casing. Upper and lower half casings
shall be dowelled and bolted together. Removable upper half casing must
permit inspection or removal of the entire rotating assembly without
distributing the piping. Flanges shall be No. 125 ASA Flat Face Suction and
No.250 ASA Flat Face Discharge.

The impeller shall be of Bronze enclosed single opposed suction type both
statically and hydraulically balanced. The impeller shall be keyed to a steel

Page 99 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(416 Stainless steel) shaft.

The pump shall be equipped with Bronze renewable throat bushings, casing
rings, and interstage channel ring to reduce casing wear and maintenance
costs. The casing rings and channel rings shall be held by antirotational
pins to permit easy re-installation and reduce down time. Impeller wear
rings are optional and will be of Bronze material. The rotating element shall
be mounted in grease lubricated ball bearings (when temperatures rise
above 225 deg F, Water jackets shall be added). Heavy cast split glands
shall be furnished on each stuffing box design for easy removal for packing
inspection and maintenance. Various mechanical seals can also be
installed. Heavy fabricated steel base (with drip lip) to mount the pump and
driver shall be furnished. Flexible shaft coupling shall be furnished to
connect the driver pump. Coupling shall be enclosed in (standard) coupling
guard.

(d) The pump set shall be equipped with:

i. A pressure relief valve should be UL/FM approved. The valve opens

quickly to relive excess pressure in the system and maintains a
constant pressure in the fire pump discharge, regardless of flow rate
through out the system. It should contain pilot system to maintain a
fixed relief pressure with high accuracy and dependability, eliminating
the typical leakage and jamming problems found in mechanical, spring
loaded relief valves.

ii. Flow meter unit shall be provided on the discharge line in order to check
the capacity of the pump set for details of the flowmeter see Section PS
10/26.

The pump bearings shall have an L-10 rating of not less than 50000 hours
based on load ratings and fatigue life. The shaft shall be sealed with a
stuffing box and packing with external water-seal piping. The stuffing box
glands shall exert uniform pressure on the packing.

Bearing housing supports, and suction and discharge flanges shall be

integrally cast with the lower half of the casing. Removal of the upper half of
the casing must allow the rotating element to be removed without
disconnecting the suction and discharge flanges.

Replaceable shaft sleeves shall be furnished and are to be of a corrosion

resistant material. The shaft sleeves shall be held in position by the impeller
key and locked in position by a separate threaded sleeve nut.

Water slingers of corrosion-resistance material shall be provided to seal the

bearings at their inner ends.

The pump casing shall be hydrostatically strength tested to a minimum of

16 bar, or not less than twice the maximum shut-off pressure.

(e) Engine

The engine(s) shall be a diesel engine, UL labeled and or FM approved,

Page 100 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

dual battery, automatic operation, rated as per equipment schedule. The

engine shall be derated 3% for every 1000 feet above 300 feet ASL
elevation, and 1% for every 10 degrees above 77 degrees F (25 degrees
C) ambient temperature.

The engine shall be of adequate horsepower to be non-overloading

throughout the pumps maximum design requirements.

The engine shall be equipped with an engine “Hot Start”, battery charger,
dual battery contactors capable of mechanical operation to energize the
starting motor in the event of control circuit failure, and an emergency
manual fuel solenoid valve.

The engine shall be 24 volt operation.

The following engine accessories shall be included and supplied by the

Pump Manufacturer:

1. Heavy duty commercial lead acid batteries for dual operation.

2. Battery rack.
3. Battery cables and acid.
4. The muffler shall be residential type.
5. Flexible exhaust connector.
6. Heat exchange piping supplying water from the pump to the engine
per NFPA Pamphlet 20.

(f) Controller

The controller shall be an automatic engine controller with built-in battery

charger, weekly test start, test solenoid, and pressure recorder, it shall meet
the criteria set forth in this specification.

The controller shall be designed in a modular fashion such that optional

equipment may be easily field installed with plug-in devices.

Two independent built-in battery chargers with separate AC input fuses or

circuit breakers, DC output fuses or circuit breakers, and charging circuits
shall be provided.

A 7-day spring wound pressure recorder with 6 inch charts shall be

provided. All local visual alarms shall be indicated on individual back lit
lenses. Engine failure alarms shall be red, pump room trouble alarms shall
be amber, and auto on shall be green.

The controller shall provide audible and visual indication as well as

individual remote contacts for the following alarm conditions:

(a) Low engine oil pressure

(b) High engine water temperature
(c) Failure to start
(d) AC or charger failure (no audible)
(e) Battery 1 failure

Page 101 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(f) Battery 2 failure

(g) Overspeed shutdown
(h) Low fuel level
(i) Low pump house temperature
(j) Relief valve open

A large 2 inch operator shall be provided on the main selector switch.

Two voltmeters and ammeters shall be provided, one for each battery bank.

All relay contacts shall be gold flashed and rated for 10 amps. A vibrating alarm
bell with a 6-inch gong shall be provided.
A Y-strainer shall be provided after the pressure switch connection and before
the drain valve solenoid.
The controller enclosure shall be constructed in accordance with NEMA 12
requirements.

(g) Ancillary Equipment

1. Automatic stop
2. Electric motor lockout
3. power failure start

(h) Motor

Comply with PS 10

(i) Jockey Pump

The Jockey Pump shall be centrifugal close-coupled vertical type,

mechanical sealed, cast iron suction & discharge chambers, with stainless
steel impeller(s), shaft, & wet parts. Designed for the duty as per equipment
schedule with vertical open-drip proof motor. The Jockey Pump Controller
shall be with fusible disconnect, “Hand-Off-Automatic” selector switch and a
pressure switch. The minimum enclosure rating shall be NEMA Type 2,
Driptight.

(j) Field Acceptance Test and Performance

The Pump Manufacturer or its designated representative shall be present

for the field acceptance test. The pump, motor, and control shall meet the
intent of the specifications and outlines set forth by NFPA Pamphlet 20.

11.12 Inspectors Test Valves

The MEP Sub-contractor shall supply and install inspectors test valves in
accordance with the NFPA 20 requirements.

11.13 Cleaning and Testing

Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings,

Page 102 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

valves and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stowed in
suitable racks. All such items shall be maintained under weatherproofed cover
to be supplied by the MEP sub-contractor until they are ready for incorporation
in the works. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment
and components are kept clean and dry.

Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests
and entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and
externally.

All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any items of plant, which could
be damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The fire protection system shall be tested in
accordance with the NFPA codes and the relevant standards, with particular
reference to the following:

All testing shall be performed under the work of his section. All services
required for testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this section. The MEP
subcontractor shall notify the Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to testing.

The Fire Protection Piping System shall be tested hydrostatically for not less
than 2 hours and at one time the system pressure without any leaks, as
directed by the Local Fire Department.

If the systems are tested in sections, the connection to the previously tested
section shall be included.

All tests that may be required by the local fire authorities shall be performed
under the work of this section in the presence of their representative if so
required.

All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found,
at no cost to the Client. Functional tests of all water flow alarms are a
responsibility of the works of this Section.

When the various systems are completed, operation tests shall be run on all
equipment to demonstrate proper operating conditions. These tests shall be
run under the observation of the Inspector and the Client’s Operating Engineer.
The Client’s Operators shall be instructed during this period. Operation tests
shall be performed under the work of this Section.

Cost of repair any damages to the building construction occasioned by pipe

leaks or defective materials shall be borne under the works of this Section, at
no cost to the Client. All corrective works hall commence immediately after
damage occurs.

11.14 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System

General
The Computer Room, Telecommunications Room and electrical Room or as
indicated by DCD shall all be protected with a Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
System.

Page 103 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The Contractor shall employ a specialist manufacturer approved from civil

defense to design and install the clean agent fire extinguishing system to the
approval of the UAE department of Civil Defense.

11.13.1 Design Codes

The clean agent fire extinguishing system shall comply with the latest edition of
the following standards:

NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Fighting Systems NFPA 72

- National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 75 - Standard for Protective Signals UAE Fire and Life
Safety Code of Practice latest.

11.13.2 Submittals

The specialist installer shall prepare detailed installation drawings for each
area indicating the agent storage tanks , location of all plant and equipment,
pipe runs including sizes and lengths, controls panels including terminal writing
ports, detectors, conduit runs, manuals all stations, abort stations, audible and
visual alarms, etc.

The specialist installer shall provide auxiliary details and information such as
hydraulic flow calculations from a UL listed computer program, maintenance
panels, door holders special sealing requirements, operation and control
documentation, damper operation, alarm devices, shutdown functions, remote
signaling and agent discharge times.

11.13.3 System Description and Operation

The system shall provide a clean agent agas (FM 200) concentration of 7% by
volume, minimum.

Each systems hall be actuated by a combination of ionization and / or optical

some detectors installed at maximum coverage of 25m2 per detector. In both
room and sub-floor/false floor or protected area. Detection shall be wired to
provide a double knock signal using cross-zone detection method of operation.

The automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follow:

• Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system shall:

Illuminate a WARNING lamp on the control panel Energize an alarm bell
and visual indicator
• Actuation of a second detector; within the system, shall:

Illuminate a PRE-DISCHARGE lam on the control panel Energize an alarm

horn
Start the time delay sequence Enable the system abort sequence
Shut down the HVAC system and / or close dampers Close all doors to the
protected.

Page 104 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

• After completion of the time delay sequence the agent shall be discharged
and the following shall occur:

Illuminate a SYSTEM FIRED lamp on the control panel

Energize visual indicator outside the hazard in which the discharge
occurred. Energize the SYSTEM FIRED audible device

The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devises

located at exit of each area. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the
operation of the second detector described in the above except the time delay
and abort functions shall be by-passed. The manual discharge station shall be
of the electrical actuation type and shall be supervised at the control panel.

Include in addition to the above the following features in a single enclosure.

3 Audible circuits
Diagnostic LED’s for easy trouble shooting
Solid state filed programmable time delay 0 to 60 seconds. Protective covers
over high voltage terminals
Connections to power a remote annunciation Agent cylinder isolating switch
Cross-zone principle of agent discharge.

11.13.4 Manual Release Switch

This is a dual action device for manual discharge of the agent. The manual
actuation shall by pass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the
system discharge and shall initiate all the alarm and shut down functions.

11.13.5 Abort Station

An abort stations hall be located next to each manual release switch and shall
be monitored by the control panel. Upon activation of the abort switch a signal
shall be generated at the main control panel producing a visual indication.

11.13.6 Audible and Visual Alarms

Provide 150mm diameter bell, alarm horn and visual alarm strobe lamp with
label attached to strobe lens.

11.13.7 Caution / Advisory Signs

Provide, in Arabic and English, signs are required to comply with NFPA and
Local Civil Defense recommendations at each entrance to the protected areas,
for all manual discharge stations and for each strobe light.

11.13.8 Fire Doors to Protected Areas-

Provide automatic self-closing fire doors at all exits to the protected area. Each
door leaf shall be provided with an electrically actuated magnetic door holder
and door return device.

The exit doors shall close automatically upon receiving a signal from the
control panel. Each door shall also close manually.

Page 105 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

11.13.9 Wall Penetrations

Seal all openings in walls, floors and ceilings within each protected area with 2
hours service for all fire protection equipment and devices.

11.13.10 Pipe and Fittings

Pipes shall comply with NFPA 2001, section 2-2.3, seamless mild steel
schedule 40 to ASTM (A53) Grd. B, Non-metallic pipes shall not be allowed.
Pipe’s fittings shall comply with NFPA 2001, section 2-2.3, malleable iron rated
at 20 bar to ASTM A-197. All fittings shall be threaded.

11.13.11 Gas Cylinders

Gas cylinders shall be Bureau Veritas approved. The cylinders shall be

manufactured from high strength alloy steel, confirming to SPFA 2001 for
refillable steel gas cylinders and tested to a pressure of 70 bar.

11.13.12 Agent Cylinder Arrangement

Provide for each protected area a separate cylinder bank as required complete
with independent discharge pipework arrangements.

11.13.13 Discharge Nozzles

Provide and install gray anodized aluminium agent discharge nozzles providing
a full 3600 discharge pattern. The specialist shall determine the number of
nozzles required.

11.13.14 Smoke Detectors

Provide and install suitable smoke detectors as detailed earlier in this section.

11.13.15 Fire-Detection Cables

Fire-detection cabling shall be red PVC sheathed MICC and shall be run
surface clipped as recommended by the manufacturer.

11.13.16 Control Cabling

All inter-communication and control cable shall be run in fire rated cable and
conduit system.

11.13.17 Control Cable

Each protected area shall be provided with a dedicated control panel providing
the functions as outlined above.

Each panel shall be wall mounted and constructed from 18 gauge sheet steel
with epoxy paint finish. The cabinet shall be suitable for electrical circuits
complete with all safety features as described in the electrical specification.

Page 106 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Each panel shall be provided complete with a self contained 24 volt DC

emergency power pack rated at 6 amp hours including battery charger and
rechargeable batteries.

11.13.18 Cleaning and Testing

Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings,
valves and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stowed in
suitable racks. All such items shall be maintained under weatherproofed cover
to be supplied by the MEP sub-contractor until they are ready for incorporation
in the works.

Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and

components are kept clean and dry.

Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests
and entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and
externally.

All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any items of plant, which could
be damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The fire protection system shall be tested in
accordance with the NFPA codes and the relevant standards, with particular
reference to the following:

All testing shall be performed under the work of his section. All services
required for testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this section. The MEP
subcontractor shall notify the Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to testing.

The Fire Protection Piping System shall be tested hydrostatically for not less
than 2 hours and at one time the system pressure without any leaks, as
directed by the Local Fire Department. If the systems are tested in sections, the
connection to the previously tested section shall be included.

All tests that may be required by the local fire authorities shall be performed
under the work of this section in the presence of their representative if so
required.

All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found,
at no cost to the Client. Functional tests of all water flow alarms are a
responsibility of the works of this Section.

When the various systems are completed, operation tests shall be run on all
equipment to demonstrate proper operating conditions. These tests shall be
run under the observation of the Inspector and the Client’s Operating Engineer.
The Client’s Operators shall be instructed during this period. Operation tests
shall be performed under the work of this Section.

Cost of repair any damages to the building construction occasioned by pipe

leaks or defective materials shall be borne under the works of this Section, at

Page 110 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

no cost to the Client.

All corrective works hall commence immediately after damage occurs.

All rooms shall be successfully tested by specialist approved civil defense

contractor for Integrity and Air tightness Requirements as per UAE fire and life
safety code of practice latest.

11.15 Sprinkler Installation

General

The contract includes for the design, supply and installation, commissioning
and testing of a complete Wet Pipe Automatic Sprinkler System as shown on
the drawings.

The sprinkler system shall comply in every respect with the Rules for Automatic
Sprinkler installation issued by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-
13) or the approved Ruling Organizations. The system shall also comply with
the requirements of the local Fire Authority, together with any particular
requirements of U.A.E. Civil Defense Department.

The design and installation shall be carried out by a specialist sub-contractor

approved by the Civil Defense Department and shall employ the computer
method of predicting flow rates and sizing pipe work together with all hydraulic
calculations. The layout shown on the drawings is indicative only.

11.15.1 Design Details

The Contractor is required to complete: the hydraulic calculation to determine

the pipe size beyond the hazard classification back to Alarm Valve.

11.15.2 Ancillary Equipment

The installation shall be complete with all necessary valves, pressure gauges,
alarms, proving equipment, etc, as required by NFPA-13 Standards.

All zone or sectional valves hall be provided with monitor switches to indicate
closure. The switches shall be inter-connected with the fire alarm panel.

Zoning of the sprinklers shall be similar to that of the fire alarm system.

11.15.3 Hazard Classification

The sprinkler system shall be designed as per NFPA-13 installation of Sprinkler

System requirements and UAE Fire and Life Safety Code latest.
11.15.4 Sprinkler Heads

The sprinkler heads shall be of the spray pattern installed in an upright position
or pendent as may be required. Sprinkler in false ceilings shall be concealed to
ceiling and to architects approval.

The Design Criteria for all sprinklers such as K-factor, type and operating

Page 111 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

temperature shall be submitted for approval.

A set of 24 spare sprinkler heads shall be provided and located in a cabinet

adjacent to the alarm valve chamber together with 6 number sprinkler spanners
for use in removing and installation of the heads.

a) Installed in areas with false ceiling: Concealed Sprinkler

Silhouette sprinklers consisting of a unique 2 piece base and cover
assembly with a pendant sprinkler. The base elements shall be suitable
for accommodating the pendant sprinkler and shall also orient the
sprinkler in the ceiling opening. The silhouette cover shall snap onto the
sprinkler deflector by a heat sensitive memory, which releases during a
fire.

b) Installed in areas without false ceiling: Pendant Sprinkler

Glass bulb sprinkler head rated for 680C (1550F), ½” orifice and ½” NPT
inlet chrome plated.

c) Horizontal Side Wall Sprinkler

Shall be flush, low profile, fusible solder automatic sprinklers designed for
installation along with a wall or lintel, supplied along with a clamp on
escutcheon plate finished in a color to architect’s approval. The sprinklers
and lines shall not be spaced too close together in order to prevent an
operating sprinkler form wetting and hereby delaying operation of adjacent
sprinklers.

In locations where sprinkler heads are liable to be operated or damaged by

accidental blows, stout metal guards should protect them: care being taken to
ensure that the normal operation of the sprinkler head in the event of fire is not
thereby impeded. The contractor shall supply adequate quantity of spare
sprinkler heads of the correct temperature rating to the employer for use during
an emergency.

Finish of sprinklers shall be to the approval of the architect.

Sprinkler Head Guards

Sprinkler head guards hall be fitted to all sprinklers. The guards shall be
constructed form metal and shall be of a pattern approved by the Fire Insures.

11.15.5 Control Valve Set

A control valve set shall be provided for each sprinkler system zone and shall
comprise:

Sprinkler stop-valve of cast iron construction fitted with an indicator showing

“OPEN” and “CLOSE” positions, and complete with padlocked securing straps.
The vale shall be mounted on the incoming side of the alarm valve.

Alarm valve fixed above the main stop valve, on the main supply pipe and
before any connection is taken off.

Page 112 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Alarm devices, including water motor alarm gong, pressure switch. Facilities for

testing to suit Fire Services Department requirement.

Dial pressure gauges suitable for the water pressures above and below the
alarm valve shall be fitted to the alarm valve set. Each gauge shall be so
arranged that it can be easily removed for testing and checking without shutting
down the water supply.

Retarding device of approved design to obviate false alarms due to mains

pressure variations where necessary or where indicated.

11.15.6 Stop Valves

All stop valves fitted to the installation shall be so constructed that in order to
shut the vale the spindle must turn clockwise. The hand wheels of all stop
valves shall be clearly marked to indicate which direction the wheel is to be
turned to close the valve.

An indication shall also be provided which shows whether the valve is open or
shut.

Each main stop valves shall be secured open by a padlock or riveted strap.

All stop valves shall confirm to |BS 1218, NFPA, or equivalent International
Standard.

11.15.7 Air Valves

These valves shall be of a type approved by UL/FM and confirm to NFPA-13.

11.15.8 Water Motor Alarms

The sprinkler system shall be fitted with an approved water motor alarm, which
shall be located at a distance not exceeding 25m from the alarm valve, and at
a height not to exceed 6m above the alarm valve.

The pipe work and fittings used shall be galvanized and to the sizes
determined by the NFPA-13. The pipe work shall be arranged to drain through
a fitting having an orifice not exceeding 3mm in diameter.

The orifice plate may form an integral part of the fitting but shall be
manufactured from a non-ferrous material to prevent the hole from becoming
blocked by corrosion or foreign matter.

A 15 mm test valve shall be installed on the installation side of each alarm

valve.

11.15.9 Electric Alarm Pressure Switches

Electric alarm pressure switches shall be installed in the system and they shall
be mounted on a vertical branch pie at least 300mm long.

Page 113 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The pressure switch may be of the diaphram bellows or bourdon tube operated
type, and shall be sufficiently sensitive to operate when only on sprinkler is
discharging. The pressure switch shall be provided with volt free contracts to
facilitate monitoring by a Building Management System, ad wired to the main
fire alarm panel. The pressure switches shall be of a type that is approved by
the NFPA.

11.15.10 Pressure Gauges

Pressure gauges shall be fitted to meet the requirements of the LPC. Pressure
gauges shall confirm to BS 1780 or equivalent International Standard. The
maximum reading of the scale shall be 150% of the maximum system pressure
and each scale shall have divisions not exceeding 0.2 bar.

11.15.11 Fire Service Inlet

A Fire Service Inlet shall be fitted to the sprinkler systems in accordance with
MFPA regulations or as directed by the Local Fire Authority.

11.15.12 Location Plan

The MEP sub-contractor shall provide and fix in an approved position a plan of
the risk upon which shall be clearly indicated the location of the main stop
valves.

11.15.13 Indicator Plates

Location plates shall also be fixed on the outside of the Tank Room walls
adjacent to the sprinkler chamber. The location plate shall bear the following
words in raised letters:

11.15.14 Sprinkler

Stop Valve Inside

The letters shall be a minimum height of 35mm.

The location plate shall be of cast iron constructed with raised figures and
letters. The figures and letters shall be painted white on a flame red
background. The alarm valve shall be suitably identified.

11.15.15 Valves Labels And Charts

The MEP sub-contractor shall label each stop valve. The number shall relate to
a framed glass covered valves chart to be supplied and installed in each
sprinkler chamber. The charts shall indicate the function of the valves and shall
be to the FSD and Engineers approval.

No two valves on the system shall bear the same number.

11.15.16 Drain Lines

All drain lines from test valves, drain down points etc. shall discharge over
suitable and proper drain vent. Each drain vent shall be connected to a 50mm

Page 114 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

galvanized mild steel heavy quality drain line which shall discharge over a
suitable gully.

All drain vents, pipe fittings, and support clips used for the drain lines shall be
galvanized.

11.15.17 Sprinkler Pumps

The MEP Sub-contractor shall provide and install a complete pressure boosting
system, comprising electrically driven main pump, diesel driven stand-by pump
and electrically driven Jockey pump. The pumps shall be of the type indicated
in the Particular Specification and shall have a characteristic as defined by
NFPA-20 regulations for the hazard being protected.

11.15.18 Inspectors Test Valves

The MEP Sub-contractor shall supply and install inspectors test valves in
accordance with the NFPA 13 requirements.

11.15.19 Sprinkler Indication Panel

The MEP sub-contractor shall provide a dedicated sprinkler indication panel for
the complete sprinkler installation which shall have the following facilities:

Schematic diagram showing locations of all major items of plant, i.e. pumps,
control valves, sectionalisation valves, electric alarm pressure switches, etc.

Each item shall be clearly engraved in the National Language and English.

Each main pump shall have the following indications:-

Amber Lamp : For fault alarm

Red Lamp : For fire alarm
Green Lamp : For correct system status

The Jockey pump shall have the following indications

i Green Lamp : For pump running
ii Amber Lamp : For fault alarm
Each control alarm pressure switch shall have the following indications: i
Green Lamp : For valve open
ii Amber Lamp : For fault alarm, valve

Each electric alarm pressure switch shall have the following indications:- i
Amber Lamp : For fault alarm
ii Red Lamp : For fire alarm

All fault and fire alarm signals shall be sent to the main fire alarm panel and / or
Central Building Management System as required.

11.15.20 Water Supplies

Water storage facilities shall be provided to suit the given hazard rating which

Page 115 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

shall be calculated on the maximum water flow and time at this flow rate as
indicated by NFPA-20 regulations.

Water tanks shall be provided with a deep suction pit to prevent pump
cavitations and to make full use of the stored volume.

11.15.21 Inspectors Test Valves

The MEP Sub-contractor shall supply and install inspectors test valves in
accordance with the NFPA requirements.

11.15.22 Firefighting Indication Panel

The MEP sub-contractor shall provide a dedicated indication panel for the
complete fire fighting installation which shall have the following facilities:

Schematic diagram showing locations of all major items of plant, i.e. pumps,
control valves, sectionalisation valves, electric alarm pressure switches, etc.
Each item shall be clearly engraved in the National Language and English.

Each main pump shall have the following indications:-

Amber Lamp : For fault alarm
Red Lamp : For fire alarm
Green Lamp : For correct system status

The Jockey pump shall have the following indications

i Green Lamp : For pump running
ii Amber Lamp : For fault alarm

Each control alarm pressure switch shall have the following indications:
i Green Lamp : For valve open
ii Amber Lamp : For fault alarm, valve

Each electric alarm pressure switch shall have the following indications:-
i Amber Lamp : For fault alarm
ii Red Lamp : For fire alarm

All fault and fire alarm signals shall be sent to the main fire alarm panel and / or
Central Building Management System as required.

11.15.23 Fire Pump Set

Provide and install a complete Fire Pump Set, which shall serve the wet riser
system, comprising electrically driven main pump, diesel driven stand-by pump
and jockey pumps. The main and stand-by pump shall be of end suction
centrifugal type, capable of delivering the scheduled duties. The appropriate
flow rate for engine and pump cooling shall be added to the net duties given.

Each pump shall be fitted with automatic air release valve, discharge pressure
gauge + valve and suction compound pressure/vacuum gauge + valve.

Page 116 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The jockey pump shall be capable of a duty of scheduled duties. Each pump
shall be of the high efficiency vertical multi-stage type direct driven by a 2900
rpm totally enclosed electric motor with class “F” installation and wound for a
400 volts 3 phase 50 Hz. Power supply.

The pump sets shall be manufactured, assembled, tested and supplied by an

approved Manufacturer.

All fire pump used shall be approved from Dubai Civil Defense, the pumping
unit shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and FM approved shall meet
all requirements of the National Fire protection Association, Pamphlet No. 20.

The pump shall be given a complete performance test at the factory with
positive suction pressure as per NFPA 20 requirements.

11.15.24 Controls

The Diesel, Electric and Jockey pumps shall be controlled individually with
each having a pressure switch connected to the fire main header via a 15mm
diameter tube.

All pressure switch pipeworks shall be arranged with a test valve and an
upstream drain valve assembly.

The Diesel and Electric pumps shall also be fitted with a back flow by pass and
non-return valve to allow either or both pumps to operate even if the test valve
is inadvertently left isolated.

Each pump set shall have its own individual control panel complying with
requirements of the relevant LPC documents.

The automatic electric motor controller shall be UL listed and FM approved

specially for fire pump service and meet the requirements of NFPA 20.

11.15.25 Ancillary Equipment

The installation shall be complete with all necessary valves, pressure gauges,
alarms, proving equipment, etc, as required by the NFPA-20 rules

All zone or sectional valves shall be provided with monitor switches to indicate
closure. The switches shall be inter-connected with the Fire alarm panel.

11.15.26 Approval

Upon completion of the systems, the specialist contactor and MEP contractor
shall furnish the client a certificate of approval from legally constituted
authorities having jurisdiction, or in lieu thereof, a certified copy of the same.

11.15.27 Operating Instruction

Upon completion and approval of the systems, the MEP sub-contractor shall
provide an experienced Engineer to instruct the client’s operators in all details
of operating and maintaining the system.

Page 117 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The MEP sub-contractor shall provide three (3) sets of type written operation
instruction, parts list and service manuals for all equipment, wiring diagrams,
control diagrams and test reports, suitably bound. SIGNAGE

Drain valves, test valves, control valves, shall be fitted with approved enameled
signs indicating their use.

11.15.28 Record Drawings and Manuals

The MEP sub-contractor shall hand over prior to the completion of the
works the record drawings and manuals in accordance with contract
specifications and requirements.

12 CONTROL SYSTEM (LOCAL & REMOTE) EQUIPMENT

12.1 Description

This Section includes control equipment for systems and components.

The overall system shall be connected and generate the below I/O for RTA
remote monitoring system :

Elevator return to ground level in case of fire.

Lift Emergency Power Drive.
Lift Link, Alarm, Position. Water in elevator pit .
Lift disturbance alarm.
Passenger stuck alarm.
Corridor lighting failure.
Fire Alarm Panel.
Fire common fault .
Incoming power - RYB status. AC power Failure /trip.
Door Contact status.
UPS status.
Inspection/maintenance mode.
Temperature status
Other control or monitoring points as required by the client

12.2 HVAC terminal equipment (Fan-coils, etc.)

May be controlled by local controllers, and by the central system.

12.3 Local packaged HVAC equipment.

Will be controlled by local electric controls and remote.

12.4 Not Used

12.5 Quality Assurance

Page 118 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(a) Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature
control systems and shall be manufacturer’s latest standard design that
complies with the specification requirements.
(b) Install system using competent workmen who are fully trained in the
installation of temperature control equipment.
(c) Single source responsibility of supplier shall be the complete and proper
operation of the BAS and control system and shall include proper calibration
of each component in the entire system.
(d) Supplier shall have an in-place support facility within UAE with technical
staff, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic
equipment.
(e) Design and build all system components to be fault-tolerant.

1. Satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated

voltage and at plus 3 Hertz variation in line frequency.
2. Static, transient and short-circuit protection on all inputs and outputs.
3. Protect communication lines against incorrect wiring, static transients
and induced magnetic interference.
4. Network-connected devices to be A.C. coupled or equivalent so that
any single device failure will not disrupt or halt network communication.
5. All real time clocks and data file RAM to be battery-backed for a
minimum 72 hours and include local and system low battery indication.
6. It must be possible to receive and print out alarms at a central
7. Location even when the workstation at that location is non-operational
or taken out of service for periodic maintenance.

12.6 Submit three complete sets of documentation.

(a) Manufacturer’s Product Data:

All equipment components

(b) Design and Shop Drawings:

1. System wiring diagrams with sequence of operation for each system as

specified.
2. Submit manufacturer’s product information on all hardware items along
with descriptive literature for all software programs to show compliance
with specifications.
3. System configuration diagram showing all panel types and locations as
well as communications network and workstations.

12.7 Technical Proposals

(a) Technical proposals shall be prepared in accordance with these

specifications. The technical proposal shall include the following
data/information as a minimum. The order of listing here is not intended to
indicate, nor should it be constructed to indicate, the relative importance of
the data/information:

Page 119 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
1. Information on organizational capability to handle this project
(management, personnel, manufacturing, single source responsibility,
etc.).
2. Information on training program to demonstrate specification
compliance.
3. System Configuration as Proposed:
i Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with
location and type of all control panels.
ii Describe system operation, functions and control techniques.
iii Modularity.
iv Provisions against obsolescence due to technological
advancement.
4. Technical data to support the information on the hardware
configuration above.
5. Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energy
management software provided for this project.
6. A signed certificate stating the Contractor “has read the performance
and functional proposal will comply with all parts of the specification.”
7. Other requirements for inclusion in the technical proposal are located
throughout this specification.

12.8 Not Used

12.9 Automatic Controls

(a) Water Chillers.

Water chillers shall operate under the dictates of their own controls to
maintain the specified leaving water temperature. Chiller controls shall be
interlocked with water flow detectors and the chilled water pump panel to
inhibit operation in case of low water flow volume.

The water chillers shall be equipped with a programmable, microprocessor

based control panel, providing the user with full operating details of each
refrigerant circuit, via an LCD display. The processor will enable the user
and maintenance staff by way of different level security codes, to reset
control and alarm set points, accept and reset alarms, modify the
compressor loading sequence, superheat settings etc. The panel shall be
equipped with an audible and visual alarm.

(b) Chilled Water Pumps

The chilled water pumps shall be provided with a local control and starter
panel. Separate sections shall house controls and motor starter equipment.
The panel shall be a wall mounted steel enclosure to IP-54 standard,
finished with epoxy powder coating and fully labelled. Motor starters shall
comply with P2405.23. Each pump shall be provided with an on/off/auto
selector switch. A duty selector switch shall provide selection of duty pump.
With both pumps in the auto position, failure of the duty pump, shall
automatically start the standby pump. Each pump shall be provided with
run and trip lamps, ammeter and hours run counter.

Page 120 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
The panel shall be provided with a common power on lamp, voltmeter with
phase selector and door interlocked isolator.

(c) Chilled Water Pressurization Unit. The chilled water pressurization set shall
be equipped with its own integral control panel for control of duty/standby
pumps in accordance with line pressure. A duty selector switch shall be
provided along with pump fail indication, high water pressure alarm and low
water pressure alarm.

(d) Fan Coil Units. Chilled water fan coil units shall be provided with a
combined wall mounted thermostat and 3-speed controller with “off” switch.
The thermostat shall operate a two position, electrically operated 3-way
valve on the chilled water return line. A regulating valve shall be provided in
the bypass line to ensure chilled water flow volumes remain constant with
the control valve in either the full flow or bypass positions.

(e) Air Handling Units. Air handling units shall be provided with a local control
and starter panel. Separate sections of the panel shall house controls and
motor starter equipment. The panel shall be a wall mounted steel enclosure
to IP-54 standard, finished with epoxy powder coating and fully labelled.

Motor starters shall comply with Section.

Fan motor shall be provided with an on/off/auto selector switch on the face
of the panel. In the auto position, the fan shall start under the dictates of a 7
day, 24 hour, electronic, programmable time clock provided within the
panel. Run and trip lamps shall be provided on the panel along with an ‘air
flow fail’ lamp to be activated via a pressure differential switch located
between the fan inlet and outlet ducts. The panel shall be provided with
power on lamp and door interlocked isolator.

The controls section shall house an electronic proportional controller with

setpoint, proportional band, dead zone and switching differential
adjustments. The controller shall receive an input signal from a duct
mounted thermostat and shall output a proportional signal to an electronic
3-way chilled water modulating flow valve. The valve shall be sized to
provide a CV value similar to the chilled water coil. A regulating valve in the
coil bypass shall ensure chilled water flow remains stable at all valve
positions.

(f) Room Thermostats.

1. Thermostats shall be electronic sensing, resistance type and sensing

systems shall be fully transistorized. They shall have on/off, 3 speed
and temperature adjustment controls.
2. Thermostats in public areas shall be tamperproof. Provide a guard for
each thermostat located in unfinished areas and in areas where the
thermostat is subject to damage.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, mount room thermostats at 1.5m above the
finished floor level.

Control wiring shall be fully coded and identified and installed in conduit
to the standards of the electrical specification requirement.

Page 121 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(g) Duct Thermostats.

Thermostats indicated in ductwork shall be remote indicating gauges

housed in the control cabinets with sensing bulbs located at the points
where the Thermostats are indicated.

1. Air-Flow Switches. Each supply fan and each extract fan shall be
equipped with an air-flow switch which shall indicate to the ventilation
control panel. If fans are required to start either manually or
automatically and air flow is not confirmed within 60 seconds of the
starter closing an alarm shall be initiated and air-flow fail lamp
illuminated for the fan concerned.

All stair-pressurization fans shall be equipped with air-flow switches.

These will initiate an air-flow fail alarm if air flow is not confirmed within
60 sec. of the requirement to start.

2. Fan Start/Stop Sequence.

i. When a fan is required to start the following sequence shall be

initiated.
• Open motorized damper. A limit switch indicates to the MCC that
damper is 100 percent open, and allows fan to start.
• If air flow not confirmed within 60 seconds, initiate alarm (visual
and audible) at the VCIP.

ii On shutdown, the following sequence shall be initiated:

• Stop fan
• Damper closes

3. Control System Flow Diagrams and Component Control Cabinets.

i Each automatic control system shall include a coloured flow diagram
on a framed, substantial board, with transparent plastic face
indicating the direction of air flow, the location of all instruments, the
sequence of operations and settings, and parts list.
ii Control elements, electric switches, thermometers, pressure gauges,
control gauges, and other such components shall be located in
unitized control cabinets, each labeled with engraved Lamacoid
nameplates to correspond to the flow diagrams.
iii The flow diagrams and cabinets shall be grouped and mounted in the
Control Room.

12.10 Valves and Actuators

12.11 Electric Motors

Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating

action or 2-position action.

12.12 Valves up to 40mm Nominal Diameter

All valves up to 40mm Nominal Diameter to be of the threaded type, with gun
metal bodies. Plug and spindles to be made from stainless steel. A neck to be
provided for fitting of the actuator to the valve via a threaded coupling. A

Page 122 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
manual adjusting knob to be fitted and the valve/actuator assembly to be made
without any special tools or adjustments required. Valves to be suitable for
mounting in any orientation except upside down.

Specifications

Nominal stroke: 5.5 mm Operating pressure: 16 bar (Max.)

Permissible fluid temperature: 5 - 120º C Leakage rate: 0 to 0.02 of KV

value Connections: To ISO 228/1 and ISO 7/1

12.13 Valves over 40mm Nominal Diameter

All valves over 40mm (inclusive) to be of the flanged type with cast iron bodies.
Spindles to be from stainless steel and the bodies to be from GG.20 cast iron or
equivalent. The parabolic control plug to be made from brass or gun metal. All
valves to be fitted to the main system with counter flanges and gaskets. All
valves used for chilled water systems are to be protected against corrosion
from condensation by means of two layers of paint and suitable lagging. Valves
to be suitable for mounting in any orientation except upside down.

Specifications
Nominal stroke: 20mm for up to DN 80 40mm for DN 100 – 150

Opening pressure: 10 bar maximum Permissible fluid temperature:0 - 120º C

Leakage: 0 – 0.05% of KV value Flange dimensions:To ISO 7005
12.14 Actuators for valves up to 40mm Nominal Diameter

All valves up to 40mm nominal diameter to be fitted with electric actuators with
spring returns of equal percentage or linear flow characteristic. Actuators to be
maintenance free with reversible motors and with stroke indication. If fitted, the
gear train to be of blocking-proof design which can be easily disengaged. A
facility on the housing to provide selector plug for linear or equal percentage
flow characteristic.

All housings covers knobs etc. to be manufactured from corrosion resistant

materials and all terminals connections to be inside the housing. Terminal entry
to be via a purpose made gland.

Specifications

Operating voltage 24 V A.C. ± 20% Mode of control: 1 – 10 V D.C Stroke: 5.5

mm nominal Running time: 35 seconds (maximum) Spring return time: 8
seconds (max.) Nominal force: 300 N.

12.15 Actuators for Valves over 40mm Nominal Diameter

All valves of 40 mm and over to be fitted with electrohydraulic or equivalent

actuators with reversible motor action. The actuators to have the facility of
selecting either an equal percentage or linear flow mode of operation. A spring
return to be fitted in case of a power turn off with an adjustable stroke limiter.

A manual-automatic selector switch and a stroke indication to be fitted as

standard. All actuators to be able to be assembled with their corresponding
valves without any special tools or adjustments.

Page 123 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

All actuators to be manufactured from corrosion resistant materials and all

terminal connections to be inside the housing. Cable entry to be via purpose
made gland.

Specifications

Operating voltage: 24 V A.C. ± 20% Mode of control: 0 – 19 V D.C.

Stroke: 20mm for valves up to DN 80 40mm for valves over DN80

12.16 Air Damper Actuators (For VAV Units)

VAV terminal units will be equipped with Pressure Independent Control.

12.17 Sensors

12.18 Room Temperature Sensors

Where indicated room temperature sensors are to be provided for input to the
terminal equipment controllers. Each sensor will incorporate a thermistor
element, and a connection for a plug-in-portable operator’s terminal, for access
to the controller.

(a) Each sensor to facilitate the following:

1. A set point adjustment dial
2. Thermometer
3. An override switch

(b) These facilities to provide:

1. A convenient accessible communication with its controller for command
or system troubleshooting.
2. The occupant to be able to determine and adjust the area’s
temperature.
3. The override switch to enable the occupant to reset the space to
occupied control during the unoccupied cycle for a period of time.
No calibration adjustment to be possible.

12.19 Remote Sensing Units

Where indicated a remote sensing unit to be provided for an output signal to

the equipment controller. This signal to be used in order to

Deliver the selected set point or as position signal. The output range to
correspond to the setting range.

Act as a priority selector is a signal is supplied to its input. The unit is to be

provided with facility to receive an alternative signal, compare it with the set
signal and select the higher value for processing to its controller.

Specifications
Operating voltage: 24 V A.C. ± 20% Input signal: 0 – 10 V D.C.
Output signal: 0 – 10 V D.C.

Operating temperature range: -15 to +50º C

12.20 Differential Pressure Detectors

Page 124 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Where indicated differential pressure detectors are to be provided. The

reading is to be converted by a built-in amplifier into 0 – 10 V.D.C. signal.

Housing to be in corrosion resistant materials. All connecting terminals to be

located under the housing covers with cable entries through purpose made
glands.

Specifications
Operating voltage: 24V A.C. ± 20% Output signal: 0 – 10 V D.C.
Static pressure range: As required
Medium temperature: 50º C Max.
Permissible operating temp: - 25 to 65º C
Vibration and corrosion resistant, for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as
required:

12.21 Resistance Temperature Detectors

Platinum.

12.22 Humidity Sensors

Thin film capacitance sensor element.

12.23 Duct Mounted Detectors for Temperature and Relative Humidity

Where indicated, a duct temperature or relative humidity detector is to be

provided, for a temperature or relative humidity measurement and to process it
into an active output signal to its controller.

The detector to consist of housing and an immersion rod.

The rod to contain either a capacitive humidity sensor or nickel sensing

element. These sensors to be protected from the handling medium via a rod
mounted filter. The immersion rod and housing to be rigidly connected and
manufactured from a corrosion resistant material.

Mounting to be via a mounting flange which may be adjustable and all terminal
connections to be inside the housing. Cable entry to be via a purpose made
gland.

12.24 Not Used

12.25 Flood sensor

Flood sensor shall be provided in elevator pit and interfaced with RTA
monitoring system , the sensor shall be of 316LSS / plastic for wetted parts.

The sensor shall be suitable for Hazardous Locations, the operating

temperature shall be -20°C to +55°C, the unit shall have Protection Class IP66.

Page 125 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

13 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS/SUMP PUMPS

13.1 Scope of Work

(a) This Section specifies the requirements for manufacture and installation of
Submersible Pumps as per equipment schedule.

13.2 Submittals

(a) Comply with relevant specifications.

13.3 Quality Assurance

(a) Each pump shall be capable of continuous vibration-free running when

operating over the entire range of flows and be designed to give a
continuous falling head/quantity characteristic to allow stable operation.
(b) The Contractor shall include for the design and installation of all pipework
supports and thrust supports for pipework etc. under his supply.
The Contractor shall provide all fixing brackets and holding down bolts for
the pump installation as per pump Manufacturer requirements.
(c) Pumps shall be of substantial construction and suitably stiffened to
withstand shock and abrasive action. Casing shall be subject to a
hydrostatic pressure test at 150% of the pump shut-off head.
(d) Waterways through the pumps shall be smooth in finish and free from
recesses, obstructions and casting flashes.
(e) Pumps and motors shall be fitted with suitable eyebolts or brackets for
lifting.
(f) Warranty
1. Comply with relevant specifications.
(g) Shop test
1. Comply with relevant specifications.

13.4 Delivery, Storage, Handling

(a) Comply with relevant specifications.

(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
relevant specifications.
(c) Protect pumps and motors stored on site from weather and moisture by
maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering.

13.5 Products: Submersible/Sump Pumps

Submersible/Sump pumps shall be direct driven, single stage, vertical spindle,

centrifugal, driven by squirrel cage induction motors, running at a speed not
exceeding 1500 rpm. The pumps shall be designed for permanent wet
installation with a suspension device. It must be designed and constructed
specifically for this purpose to a minimum of IP68. The pumps shall be
automatically and firmly connected to the discharge connection, guided by no
less than two guide bars extending from the top of the station to the discharge
connection. There shall be no need for the personnel to enter the wet-well.
Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished
by a machined metal-to-metal watertight contact or with O-ring gasket.

Page 126 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
Motors shall be sufficiently cooled by the surrounding environment or pumped
media. Larger pumps shall be supplied with duplex stainless steel cooling
jacket.

All seal materials shall be compatible with and resistant to the fluid being
handled. There shall be two back-to-back mechanical seals provided to seal off
the motor from the pump. The upper seal shall be oil lubricated, its rotating
component shall be of carbon whilst its fixed component, like both parts of the
lower seal, shall be made from tungsten carbide or silicon.

The Pump shaft and motor shaft shall be the same unit. Couplings shall not be
acceptable.

Bearings shall be capable of taking the static weight of the rotating parts and
any thrust produced by the operation of the pump. Bearings shall be of the
antifriction type designed for B10 life of 50 000 hours per NFBMA test
procedures. The bearing between the motor rotor and the impeller shall be
lubricated by an internal oil supply, which shall also serve to cool shaft seals.

The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced, double shrouded

non-clogging or vortex design having a long throughlet without acute turns. The
impeller shall be capable of handling solids, selected for maximum hydraulic
efficiency, thus, reducing operating costs. The impeller shall be retained with an
Allen head bolt and shall be capable of passing min 25 mm diameter solid,
unless specified otherwise.

Pump casing shall be single-piece non-concentric design with smooth

passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the impeller.

Replaceable wear rings shall be provided for the casing and/or impeller as per
Engineer’s approval. Wear rings shall be constructed of suitable wear resistant
material of minimum 300 Brinell hardness.

A guide railing system, where applicable, shall be provided to ensure simple

and effective removal and reinstallation of the pump set. The system shall be
two guide bars, vertical over its entire length, be retained at the bottom by
fixings forming part of the discharge connection and at the top by a
bracket/access frame arrangement. The access frame shall be drilled for lifting
chain support brackets and motor cable support clips. The works shall include
all of this equipment and all necessary brackets; clips; fixings and packing. A
lifting chain shall be supplied with each pumping set connected to an eye
mounted on the site of the pump withdrawal opening. A discharge connection
shall be provided such that the pump can readily be raised from within the

Page 127 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

sump without first undoing nuts and bolts or any other fixing arrangement. The
pump shall be automatically coupled to the delivery pipework, by its own
weight, during the lowering operation.

13.6 Products: Not Used

13.7 Products: Electrical Construction

The pump motor shall be rated for a minimum margin on absorbed power of
10% based on maximum absorbed power at maximum design discharge and
suitably de-rated for continuous operation in a 55 deg. C ambient temperature.

Motor shall be squirrel cage, induction, and shall have permanently lubricated
bearings and mechanical seal. Motor shall have lower ball bearing for thrust
that shall be capable of taking drive shaft-weights where necessary and upper
sleeve bearing for radial loads.

Motor shall be housed in oil-filled watertight Submersible/Sump casing. Motors

shall be NEMA design B. Degree of protection against ingress of solid particles
and water shall be IP 68 minimum complying with BS EN 60034-5 (EN 60529).

Motor shall be constructed with insulation of class F material, complying with

specification standard BS EN 60085:04. The temperature rise shall be limited to
class B insulation (80 deg. C rises) providing required margin to operate at an
ambient temperature of 50 deg. C. Motors shall be suitable for hazardous area
class 1, Division 2, Group D as per NFPA 70.

Motors shall be rated to operate without overloading under all pump-operating

conditions, from essentially no head to shut-off head and from continuous
operation to 15 start-stop cycles per hour minimum.

Power and signal cables shall be connected to the motor through a watertight
terminal box, sealed from the motor. Cables shall be brought out directly from
the well in un-jointed run. Cables shall be securely anchored to the wellhead so
as to avoid any stress, the anchor being capable of ready release.

Cables shall be flexible in construction. Cables shall be EPR (Ethylene-

Propylene-Rubber) insulated, Poly-chloroprene sheathed. Insulation grade shall
be 600/1000V. Cable conductor shall be tinned, annealed, stranded and shall
comply with BS 6007:06. Cables shall normally terminate directly between the
motor and the motor control cubicle.

If required, due to the longer distance between the pump-motor and motor
control cubicle a junction box shall be provided out side the well, for splicing the
motor cables with the circuit cable.

The junction box shall be weatherproof and of protection class IP 56 minimum.

If a plug-socket connection arrangement is provided, it shall not be possible to
energize the power supply cable when the plug and socket is disconnected.
Cable between the junction box and the motor control cubicle shall be
XLPE/SWA/PVC type.

Page 130 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

13.8 Products: Controls

The controls for the pumps shall be as indicated in Section PS 10.

13.9 Note Used

13.10 Examination
(a) Verify that dimensions are as illustrated by the manufacturer.
(b) Verify that proper power supply is available.

13.11 Installation
(a) Install in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions.
(b) Co-ordinate installation of components of the pump, gauges valves and
appurtenances.

13.12 Demonstration
(a) Specifications Contract Closeout, Starting of Systems. Demonstrating
installed work.
(b) Submit integrated step-by-step test procedure for approval 30 days prior to
start of demonstration.
1. Arrange meeting prior to demonstration with representatives of the
Owner and Engineer.
2. Perform visual inspection and overall review of system installed.

13.13 Site Testing and Inspection

(a) Comply with relevant specifications.

13.14 Spare Parts

(a) Furnish Employer with the following extra parts for each pump:
1. one complete set of bearings
2. one complete set of mechanical seal
3. one set of wear rings

(b) Furnish Employer with the following extra parts for each pump type:

1. 10 percent (minimum 1) of impeller for each duty point

2. 10 percent (minimum 1) of pump shaft
3. 10 percent (minimum 1) of each type of motor contactor used
4. 10 percent (minimum 1) of each type of motor circuit protector used
5. 10 percent (minimum 2) of each type of fuse used
6. 10 percent (minimum 2) of each type of motor overload relay used
7. 10 percent (minimum 2) of each type of auxiliary relay used
8. 10 percent (minimum 1) of each type of level switch with cable used
9. 10 percent (minimum 1) of each type of control power transformer used
10 20 percent (minimum 2) of each type of light bulbs used
11 10 percent (minimum 2) of single pole MCB used for control circuit

Page 131 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

13.15 Manufacturer’s Services

(a) Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect final installation and supervise

initial operation.
1. Provide Manufacturer’s certificate as specified in relevant
specifications.
2. Engineer to receive certificates prior to field-testing the equipment.

(b) Manufacturer’s representative shall instruct plant personnel or proper

operation and maintenance procedures.

1. Provide training for at least 4 hours.

2. Conduct training as specified in relevant specifications

14 AIR-COOLED VRF SYSTEM

14.1 General

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, set to work and
commission the VRF Variable Refrigerant Flow systems or VRV system and
equipment as detailed in this section of the specification, as shown on the
Tender drawings and listed in the Schedule at the end of this section.

14.2 Description of system

Cooling is to be provided by utilizing the Air-cooled VRF modular systems

comprising a number of external condensing units connected via refrigerant
pipework to internal direct expansion fan coil units.

14.3 System Features

The VRF system will control flow of refrigerant through the fan coil units, by
means of an electronic expansion valve fitted in each indoor unit.

The equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for the manufacture of the

compressor, refrigerant oil and refrigerant used within the system to maintain
integrity of design and optimize efficiency and reliability of equipment.

The VRF system will have the ability to sustain refrigerant piping lengths with a
level difference as shown in the drawings, between fan coil units and
condensing unit if the outdoor unit is located above the highest level indoor
unit. An option shall be available to increase the level difference of the pipe
work between fan coil units and condensing unit if the outdoor unit is located
above the lowest level indoor unit.

Each independent system shall be capable of having total length of refrigerant

pipe work installed as shown in the drawings.

The VRF system shall operate with Refrigerant R410A or other environmental
friendly refrigerator as per DM green building regulations.

Page 132 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The equipment manufacturer shall be fully certified and registered to comply in

the areas of UAE, CE, Eurovent, ISO9001 and ISO14001.

All equipment shall be run tested in accordance with the following procedures
prior to leaving place of manufacture.

• A check test carried out on the refrigerant piping to detect obstacles

• The pipework shall be tested to 38 bar.
• Electronic leak testing shall be carried out to ensure maximum system
refrigerant containment.
• System vacuum test.
• Electrical tests shall include flash testing at 1440V AC to ensure that
current leaks above 5mA are detected, megger test at 500V DC to
ensure resistance levels are above 10 mega Ohm and earth continuity
tests.
14.4 VRF Outdoor Units

The units shall be air-cooled type incorporating heat exchanger coils

manufactured from copper tubes and aluminum fins, factory treated to reduce
the effect of atmospheric corrosion suitable for Dubai weather.

The unit casing shall be manufactured from polyester powder coated baked
enamel finish sheet steel in order to have a high corrosion resistance and to
protect against salt laden environment close to where the units may be
installed. The air outlet shall have plastic coated wire guards.

Prior to delivery to site, each condensing unit shall be clearly identified with
nameplate, securely attach on each condensing unit showing manufacturer
name, serial and model number.

Condensing unit noise level shall not exceed 70dBa. Condensing unit shall be
tested as per AHRI standard.

The outdoor units shall have inverter driven compressor (Variable Frequency
Drive Compressors Scroll Compressors), electronically controlled and capable
of changing speed linearly to follow the variation in cooling requirements.

The unit shall offer EER of 3.5 and above as per ASHRAE ambient conditions,
DM green building regulations, and comply with Emirates Authority for
standardization& metallurgy.

The outdoor units shall be selected at Outdoor temperature of 46 Deg. C DBT

and can operate up to 50 deg C with degrading and indoor units on-coil
temperature shall be as per fan coil unit schedule drawing.
.
The compressor shall be scroll type with fixed and orbiting scrolls. The low
pressure refrigerant shall be fed directly into the scroll and the discharge
refrigerant shall cool the motor windings and place the compressor shell under
discharge pressure.

The access to the internal components for maintenance purposes shall be by

Page 133 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

removable panels.

The outside unit shall be connected to max allowed indoor units as per
manufacturer recommendations, the total cooling load shall be suitable to total
connected fan coil unit capacity with safety factor, selection shall according to
manufacturer’s software, the software shall be certified.

High capacity units shall have two scroll compressors, and will be capable of
operating on one compressor under emergency condition in case the one
compressor fails.

The lubrication oil of the compressor shall be fed through the centre of the
crankshaft and then across the complete area of the scrolls from the centre
outwards to ensure the complete contact area is positively lubricated
maximizing compressor efficiency and minimizing wear and tear.

Condensing unit oil control shall be through oil separators and oil return control
logic.

The outdoor unit fan motor shall be hi efficiency BLDC motor of insulation class
B and shall operate electronically by sensing operational temperatures,
pressures and ambient temperature and monitoring the dictates of the indoor
units.

The units shall be complete with VFD compressor, electronic expansion

valve(s), oil separator(s), suction accumulator, high pressure switches, inverter
driven fan motors, safety thermostat, over current relay, inverter overload
protection, fuses, necessary solenoid valves, liquid shutoff valves, gas line shut
off valves, short re-cycling guard timer and all necessary sensors for optimized,
safe and trouble free operation.

The condensing unit fan shall be propeller type. The fan will be capable of
overcoming of external static pressure. The units shall be capable of being
combined to provide multi systems using combinations of two or three outdoor
units connected to give the capability of higher capacities.

Condensing unit casing thickness shall be min 0.8 mm. The outdoor unit casing
shall be weatherproof with epoxy coated galvanized steel. The cabinet shall be
exterior enamel paint finish and weather resistant. The fins shall be coated with
hydrophilic coating to avoid corrosion and marine weather.

All refrigerant connections both internal within the unit and the external
connections to the indoor units shall be brazed.

The unit shall be capable of carrying out automatically the calculated required
additional refrigerant charge necessary to operate the system within its
optimum efficiency. This cycle shall be completely automatic and provide a
warning to the service technician to indicate when charging has been
completed or the charging cylinder is empty.
The refrigerant cycle shall not rely upon float valves, level switches or weighed
input of the refrigerant.

The automatic refrigerant charging and containment check facilities shall be

Page 134 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

capable of being used at any time during the life of the system for any
alterations or service operations which may be required.

The condensing unit coil shall be pressurized 38 bar for a period of 24hours, all
the condensing units shall be factory tested.

14.5 Indoor Units

Indoor FCU shall comprising of filter, cooling coil and fan assemblies capable
of required duties when running at a fan speed to meet the acoustic
requirements of this specification. Acoustic figures for each unit shall be
provided to the engineer before the units are ordered.

Unit shall be selected to meet required duty and noise levels when operating
on medium speed, all the FCU’s shall be factory tested. FCU testing shall be
tested as per AHRI standard.

• FCU shall be certified for IEC 60335 standard or equivalent.

• FCU motor shall be 3 speeds, Hi efficiency Brushless DC (BLDC)
motors with Class E insulation.
• FCU fan shall be forward curve, Centrifugal fan.
• Prior to delivery to site, each fan coil unit shall be clearly identified with
nameplate, securely attach on each FCU showing manufacturer name,
serial and model number., fixed to a non-removable panel on the unit,
so as to be clearly visible when viewed from below the unit.
• FCU drain pan shall be polyethylene, 22 mm thick PS self- extinguishing
of 30 expansion ratio.
• FCU casing thickness shall be 0.8 mm for VRF indoor unit. Material
shall be Galvanized steel.
• FCU noise level shall not exceed 50dBa.
• FCU coils shall be tested at low pressure & high pressure test to a
maximum of 40 bar.
• FCU fan material shall be engineered hard plastic.
• Fresh air unit where required it coil shall be treated to be suitable for
outside air.
• The condensate shall be drained from the unit using suitable tube and
run directly to a main drainage point. A drain trap shall be fitted to
compensate for negative air pressure.

14.6 Ducted type fan coil unit:

The ducted fan coil unit, its fan external static pressure should be suitable to
calculated pressure at highest speed. However, the unit static pressure can be
adjusted (at various speeds) to match the static pressure of the duct connected
to that unit.

Where required a condensate lift pump shall be provided within the unit and
shall be capable of discharging above the drain outlet.

The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel plate and shall be

Page 135 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

fully insulated. All insulated shall be as per UAE fire and life safety code latest.
. Facility shall be provided for duct connection for introduction of fresh air to the
unit and branch ductwork from the unit. The return air to the unit shall be
through the back of the unit as standard.

The heat exchanger coils will be manufactured from copper tubes and
aluminum fins. It shall have electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant
flow rate in response to the load variation in the conditioned space. The
expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerized PID control
system to maintain correct room temperature.

14.7 Wall Mounted Type Fan Coil Unit:

The unit casing shall be manufactured from heat resistant plastic. The casing
color shall be White. The back plate and the support frames shall be
manufactured from galvanized steel plate.

The fan shall be multi blade cross flow type, statically and dynamically
balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation.

The heat exchanger coils will be manufactured from copper tubes and
aluminum fins. It shall have electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant
flow rate in response to the load variation in the conditioned space.

The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerized PID

control system to maintain correct room temperature.

The air filters shall be incorporated within the unit and shall be washable resin
net type.

14.8 Fresh Air Indoor Unit

The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel plate with internal
insulation. The fresh air shall be introduced through the back of the unit as
standard.

The fan shall be centrifugal fans with the dual suction multi blade type,
statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free
operation.

The motor shall be three speed BLDC motor with insulation class E.

The filter shall have a minimum average arrestance efficiency of 90 % to

ASHRAE 52.1 (MERV 5).

The heat exchanger coils will be manufactured from copper tubes and
aluminium fins. The coil shall be 3 row coil with fin pitch of 2.0 mm.

It shall have electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in

response to the load variation in the conditioned space.

The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerized PID

control system to maintain correct room temperature.

Page 136 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

14.9 Refrigerant Pipework

The interconnecting refrigerant piping shall be manufactured from seamless

quality phosphorous dioxide soft/medium drawn copper to BS2781 Part II
ASTM, DIN 1754/8905, fully tested by the eddy current method, dehydrated
and capped.

The copper tubing shall be of a suitable thickness to be capable of

withstanding pressure test as detailed in the current revision of BS/EN378.

The copper tubing shall be suitably selected with a wall thickness capable of
withstanding the system operating pressures on Refrigerant R410A, all as
described within the outdoor unit’s installation manual.

Pipework shall be supported and not secured at regular intervals not exceeding
1.5m.

Preferably to create a method of adequate support and containment, piping

should be laid on suitably supported galvanized tray, insulated and held in
position with plastic coated steel banding.

Due care and attention shall be taken at all times to allow pipework to freely
expand and contract naturally.

Copper pipe joints shall be silver brazed connection made under nitrogen flow
while brazing. The copper pipe shall be pressurized to 38 bar for a period of
24hours.

All the copper pipes shall be pressure tested at 1.5 times of working pressure.

14.10 Condensate Pipework

Condensate pipework shall be installed by the approved Installer in accordance

with supplier’s Design and Installation Instructions and the unit’s installation
manual.

14.11 VRF Control system

The VRF control system will analyze the data from VRF equipment
continuously and in most of cases will alert before the equipment actually
breaks down. In this way, most of the failures can be predicted and possible
down time reduced to an absolute minimum.

In the unlikely event of a problem occurring, the system should be capable of

generating error messages and useful data related to error, which will be
communicated to control room, and will inform regarding the nature of the
problem and will help them towards the next step of solving the problem.

The system will continuously check the cleanliness of the system filters and
heat exchangers. Furthermore, it has to manage a wide range of data (like

Page 137 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

pressures, temperatures, running hours, etc.) in order to let VRF equipment run
as efficiently and trouble free as possible. This will also prevent equipment
from consuming too much energy.

The system should be designed to make sure that equipment is operating

properly, and does not operate for long under adverse conditions.

This optimization will extend the lifespan of VRF equipments.

The continuous monitoring of VRF equipment should provide with periodical

updates. These reports should provide operational information before or after a
breakdown.

At the end of each year of monitoring, the system should provide

recommendations for possible improvements, air conditioners running
information and other necessary data should be continuously communicating
with remote monitoring centre, operating information is analyzed, and
necessary steps are initialized to prevent break downs and/or quick
determination of causes of failure.

15 ELEVATORS

15.1 General

The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission and hand over the
complete elevator installation as specified

Note: Tests applicable for the system based on relevant standards.

The elevator system shall be equipped with gearless traction machinery with
permanent magnetic synchronous motor, elevator cars, solid state control
systems and all other equipment and accessories required to provide a
complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical transport system.

All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical
system of the building, as specified under electrical section.

All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under

prevailing environmental conditions at site.

The contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance of the

elevator for a period of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the engineer
of the complete elevator installation and shall include for cleaning, oiling and
inspection of the elevator and all the associated equipment at periods of one
month and to include for all emergency calls throughout the 24 hours of the day
through the failure of the elevator to operate normally.

A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the engineer immediately after

each monthly inspection and cleaning and greasing

Page 138 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive
immediate attention on the day of the notification.

15.2 Traction Machine

The elevator shall be equipped with variable voltage and variable frequency
controlled gearless permanent magnetic synchronous motor, having smooth
speed time characteristics.

All rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth
running.

All the rotating electrical machinery shall be fitted with microtherms, to provide
overload protection.

The winding insulation levels of the motors shall be of insulation class ‘b’.

The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive vvvf unit will control the
motor speed using a microprocessor.

The VVVF system will be provided with a converter which performs ac-to-dc
conversion and an inverter which is designed to invert dc to three-phase
variable voltage variable frequency ac. The inverter will give an output of
sinusoidal current with zero [0] through fifty [50] hertz by application of pulse
width modulation technology.

The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in
accordance with speed command signal which is performed by a
microprocessor in the elevator controller.

Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the VVVF unit
and the motor of the traction machine to stop the elevator when one of the
following conditions occurs:

Phase reversal, phase failure, failure of supply voltage, overcurrent,

overheating of thyristor and transistor, operation of any safety device.

15.3 CONTROL SYSTEM

The control system will consist of the VVVF motor drive unit and a
computerized controller. a computer-controlled regulator will control the car
speed by comparing the actual car speed detected by a pulse-rotary encoder
with an ideal speed pattern generated by a microprocessor.

While the car is accelerating, the ideal accelerating pattern will be generated by
the microprocessor to obtain the smooth and optimum acceleration.

While the car is decelerating, the microprocessor will calculate and provide the
ideal speed pattern to obtain the comfortable and stable riding performance.

At landing, a smooth landing pattern will be generated by a microprocessor,

and as soon as the car has stopped, the mechanical brake will be applied to
hold the car.
Page 140 of 417
 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The control system shall have provision to capture all the regenerative power
including braking power. The control system should be suitable to recover all
the possible energy recovery, thereby reducing the energy consumption.

15.4 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT

A) GUIDE RAILS

For smooth running of the counter weight and the elevator car, guide rails with
steel tee sections shall be installed, covering the entire height of the elevator
shaft. the rails shall rest on the hoistway pit to prevent exerting any physical
forces on hoist way ceiling or walls of the building.

Proper expansion joints shall be provided to withstand forces created on

temperature variations.

B) Hoisting Ropes

Bright steel wire ropes with fibre cores of adequate cross-section manufactured
or steel wire ropes with adequate cross-section, manufactured.

C) Governor Rope

These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes. the two ends shall be
securely linked to the car and attached to the safety gear operating level. The
governor ropes shall be tensioned by a weight-loaded device located in the pit.

D) Counterweight

Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to balance the
weight of the car and the specified capacity.

The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately machined and designed to

provide very high safety factor. a toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted to
the top of the plunger to withstand the impact of the steel buffer plates mounted
on the underside of the car and the counterweight. an oil gauge shall be
provided to check the oil level.

15.5 Travelling Cables

The travelling cables shall be 450V/750V grade multi-core with stranded high
conductivity copper conductors, especially designed for elevator duty. these
cables shall be properly supported by retaining straps and individual cable
clamps.

15.6 Safety Equipment

The gradual type safety system, comprising of a close loop roping system,
over-speed centrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc. shall be provided.

The operation of the system shall be such that if the car over speed in the
downward direction, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. it
shall, in sequence, cut off the motor power supply, apply normal brakes and
engage the safety gear gibes when the safety gear gibes engage with the car
guides. it shall apply a constant retarding force to bring the car to a gradual and

Page 141 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
smooth stop within defined limits.

Re-setting of the safety devices to be provided.

A) Over Travel

Over travel limit switches shall be provided at the top and bottom of the
terminal landings to disconnect the power supply and apply brakes to bring the
car to safe stop position in the event of an over travel in either direction.

15.7 Fireman Emergency Operation

When the fireman's switch activated during a fire, all calls are cancelled and the
designated car returns immediately to a specified floor. to facilitate rescue
afterwards, the car responds only to car calls

15.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

Self contained, non-maintained emergency light, with a trickle charger.

15.9 OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATORS

A) Car Operating Panel

The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:
Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with
acknowledge light for each button.
- Emergency call button.
- Door open and door close buttons.
- Intercom station.
- Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.
- VOIP Communication
- Braille Type Control Buttons
15.10 Electrical Installation of Elevators

General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried out as specified in

the electrical specifications. SS 316 trunking shall be used wherever possible
instead of multiple conduits. SS 316 conduits and flexible conduits shall be
used between trunking and apparatus.

Earthing of all the equipment shall be carried out as specified in electrical

specification and as per IEE regulations.

Page 142 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Distribution equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and
circuits. these shall include overload protection, short-circuit protection, single
phasing protection, etc. as appropriate.

15.11 Particular Technical Specification

A. Main Specifications
Type : Electric Elevator (Machine Room Less)
Standard : EN 81-20, EN 81-50 and IBC
No. of Stops 2
No. of Opening : 2 (Same/Opposite line as per site condition)
Floor designation : 1M / sec.
Drive Controls : VVVF (Variable Voltage Variable Frequency) Inverter
Operation : Full Selective Collective Arrangements.
Total Travel : As per site condition

B. The machinery to be gearless, three phase synchronous motor with

integrated traction sheave. The sizes of the elevator are as follows:

C. Door type : Heavy Duty Glass door.

D. The car to have LED lighting with SS 316 hand rails on B and D walls with
HR61- tube D38. The elevator shaft will be transparent/partially
transparent on all sides making passenger movement visible.
E. The following control system accessories shall be provided in the elevator:
F. Alarm bell, at main floor
G. Elevator announcer
H. Advance door opening
I. Car Emergency Lighting,
J. CCTC camera in car
K. Emergency Battery dry, Automatic Landing, Operation, Electric Power
Regenerative Unit
L. Fire Detection
M. Fireman drive
N. Emergency intercom car which has to be linked to RTA control room.
O. Elevator link, alarm, mode signals, position binary
P. Lock with Emergency Opening Devices
Q. Through type car, shaft door on same level(s), one set of car button (braille
readable).
R. Signages/label in/out of the lifts will be decided in coordination with RTA
Traffic and Maintenance department.
S. Cabin interior paneling to RTA standards and approvals.

Voltage supply : 3 Phase. 400 V, 50 HZ.

Voltage Fluctuation : -6% to +10% from the rated voltage
Frequency Variation : ±1% from the rated frequency

Page 143 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

T. Cabin:

Cabin Type : Heavy Duty Tempered Glass enclosed shaft

Cabin Side Walls : Stainless Steel – SS 316 with guarantee of non-
corrosion.
No. of door : 2 nos – Type: 2 panel center opening
Cabin rear Wall : Tempered glass with trims finished in hair line
stainless steel 316
Cabin Ventilation : Air conditioned.
Finishes : Hairline finish in stainless steel 316.
Flooring : 20mm recess to be provided to RTA standard
Ceiling : As per the Manufacturer standard design
Lighting : LED Lighting.
Handrail : SS 316 to be provided.

U. Doors:

i. Car Doors
Type : 2 Panel center Opening
Finish : Tempered Glass.
Door safety : Infrared light beam for full length of door to detect
passenger or object
Operating type : VVVF (Variable Voltage Variable Frequency) inverter
control

V. Car Operating Panel (COP):

Finish : Hairline finish

Push Button Type : Micro Buttons (self-illuminating) with Barile
Typing.
Located on the side wall of the cabin
Intercom Unit & Overload : To be Provided.
indicator
Display Units : Dot Matrix display indicating the direction
of travel and the floor

W. Landing Call Stations ( HOP):

Type of Push Buttons : Micro Buttons (self-illuminating).

Daily Units : Dot Matrix display indicating the direction of
travel and the floor.
Face Plate : Hairline finished with Vertical combined unit.

X. Jambs:

Ground Floor : Narrow jambs hairline finish in stainless steel

Typical Floor : Narrow jambs hairline finish in stainless steel.

Y. Operational & Safety Features:

Emergency Lighting : To be Provided

Page 144 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Intercom : Two way telephone system for

communicating with the intercom phone to be
installed and to be connected to RTA

Star Safety System : In case of power supply failure, this device

will bring the elevator to the nearest floor by
power supply from standby batteries and the
doors will automatically open to allow the
passengers to come out.

Alarm Bell : A DC alarm bell to be provided

Firemen Emergency : When the fireman's switch, located at the

Elevator main floor is activated during the
emergency or fire, all landing calls are
cancelled and the elevator returns to a main
floor immediately and shutoff.

Overload safety device : Overload safety device with alarm and

indication to be provided.
Safety gear : Progressive safety gear activated by the
over speed governor

Buffer : Oil Type

16. BUILDING MOINTORING MANAGSMENT SYSTEM (BMMS)

16.1 GENERAL

The objectives and key features of the telemetry system will be as follows:

A. The monitoring and remote control of automatically operating plant from a

central point.

B. To provide operational data for both normal and fault conditions including the
initiation of alarms in order to minimize the frequency of visits and to provide a
prompt response to faults.

C. To collect, store and process operational data for management purposes The
system shall make use of the public telephone network, if available or through
GPRS.

The Contractor will be provided with outline requirements for the system and
will be required to then offer detailed proposals and specifications for the plant
and equipment to be supplied.

The specifications, plant and equipment etc. shall be subject to the approval of
both the Employer and the Engineer. During the commissioning/start up period
of the system it will be necessary to provide appropriate training and instruction
in the operation and maintenance of the system for the Employer's operations
staff.

Page 145 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

16.2 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS (RTU’S)

16.2.1 GENERAL

The remote terminal units shall be of modular construction and housed in wall
or floor mounting cabinets dust and damp proof to IP 54. The cabinets shall
house the local UPS or battery backup supply and marshalling terminal section
for interfacing and connection with the master station, communication links and
field equipment. Where transducer remote electronic equipment is provided eg
ultrasonic level measuring devices may be incorporated within the remote
terminal unit cabinet. Cabinet and panel arrangements shall be submitted for
approval by the Engineer.

16.2.2 FUTURE EXPANSION

Sufficient plug in modules shall be provided and wired to terminals ready to

accept future signals of up to 25% or a minimum of one module, for each
remote terminal unit.

Each remote terminal unit shall be able to accept at least two or more I/O
modules of each type without requiring replacement of the original equipment.

16.2.3 HARDWARE

Each controller shall be mounted in an IP 54 enclosure and constructed to

allow easy replacement and maintenance modules. Particular attention shall be
given to the ability of the remote terminal unit and its enclosure to withstand the
harsh environment prevailing in Dubai, UAE.

The remote terminal units shall be intelligent devices that can collect data,
generate alarms, perform process and control functions. The microprocessor
based remote terminal unit will be the main device used to control loops in
each process or plant area. The remote terminal units shall be able to receive
analogue and digital inputs from the filed, perform processing and alarm
checking, perform the algorithms controls and output to various equipments.

Each remote terminal units shall be sized for controlling the required
inputs/outputs and future expansion.

The program and data held within the memory shall remain intact and error free
if all external power is removed from the remote terminal unit for a minimum
period of two weeks.

The Contactor shall supply UPS and/or batteries for each RTU with enough
capacity to maintain full power to the RTU for 4 hours after a power failure. The
UPS system shall be integral to the RTU. The batteries shall be of a sealed
maintenance free type.

All field connections shall be made in terminal blocks located for easy access.
They shall be clearly marked and identified. Terminals carrying voltages in
excess of 24V shall be fully shrouded. All terminals shall be of the flip up
isolator type with test points.

Page 146 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The connection to other devices will use modules ASCII or remote terminal
units protocols as standard, however details of other protocols available are to
be included within the tender, Each remote terminal unit shall support peer to
peer communications, either directly or via the Master Station System.

LED’s indicating status of input and output digital signals shall be provided on
the input/output modules.

RTU’s shall be configured such that a single RTU or RTU module failure will
not interrupt or degrade plant monitoring and control functions.

Surge protection shall be provided in accordance with the latest BS/IEC

requirements.

16.3 REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT SOFTWARE

The RTU shall be capable of processing locally input plant information before
transmitting it to the master station.

The software programs shall be written such that they facilitate easy alterations
and additions. Structured programming techniques shall be followed and
accompanied by flow diagrams.

The programs should be extensively annotated and be self-documenting. The

system shall be supplied with programs that use a high level language for the
operators work stations.

Total internal scan time interval for all inputs and outputs in an RTU shall not
exceed 1sec.

The RTU shall operate on a report by exception basis. The RTU’s shall have
sophisticated in built control facilities to permit control loop configuration using
simple building blocks. These blocks shall sequence control, three term control
and other control routine components as required.

The RTU shall be capable of routine signal processing including integration,

summation, subtraction and tantalization of one or more inputs. Control loops
shall incorporate deviation and rate of change alarms, bumbles transfer facility,
set point and output high and low limits.

The RTU shall be capable of executing sequential control logic Programming of

sequential control shall be by means of high level functions block language or
ladder diagram format as part of an integrated package.

The RTU’s shall be standalone capability able to continue monitoring plant and
executing control loops if the communication link to the master station fails. In
the event of such a failure the RTU shall log all alarms and required analogues
until all the tool memory is filled. When the communication link is restored the
RTU will automatically upload the logged data to the archiving system.

The RTU’s shall have a watchdog function and full self-diagnostics capable of
detecting and reporting faults to the master station and displayed locally. The

Page 147 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Contractor shall program the RTU’S fully under this Contract. It shall be
possible to modify the programs remotely by downloading from the master
station.

It shall be possible to initial a current retrieval on demand, from the master

station, leaving the original RTU data contents intact for routine up-loading

16.4 COMMUNICATIONS LINKS

16.4.1 Communication Standards

Transmission of data shall conform to a recognized Consultative Committee for

International Telephone and Telegraphy (CCITT) standard.

The data transfer system shall be self monitoring such that any equipment or
line failure shall be displayed at both ends. The protocol used shall safeguard
against false data transmission, allow for error detection, recovery, failure
detection and initiate switchover the redundant data highway. A diagnostic
routine shall be included to monitor the highway performance. Data protocol
and diagnostics shall be fully documented.

Within the confines of the pump station site a hard wired serial communications
link shall be utilized.

16.4.1.1 Inputs/Outputs

General

All process I/O and plant interface boards shall comply with the following:

a) Plant wiring terminations shall accommodate a minimum of 1.5mm2 cross-

section conductor. Terminals shall be of the test disconnect type to permit
ease of signal isolation and loop monitoring for commissioning and
maintenance purposes.

b) Hot removal of I/O modules shall be possible without special tools. Digitals
inputs shall meet the following requirements:

i. All digital inputs shall be optically isolated.

ii. All alarm and state indication shall be from dry contacts. Filter circuits
and software debounce techniques shall be provided.
iii. Contact operation shall be fail safe as follows:

(1) Alarms: in the healthy condition the contracts shall be closed with
the relay coil energized: in the alarm condition the contacts shall
be opened with the relay energized.
(2) States: contacts shall be open with relay coil de-energised in the
off condition and closed in the on condition.
(3) Two bit digital eg valve position: One contact shall close when the
plant is in one state and a second contact shall close when the
plant is in the opposite state.

Page 148 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

16.4.1.2 Analogue Inputs

Independently configured channels shall be in the range 4-20 mA, 1-5 V d c, 0-

1 V dc., 0.5 V dc., All analogues cables shall be screened and segregated from
other cables. A clear earth shall be provided for signal which shall be separate
from the system main earth.

Input impedance shall be greater than 1 M for voltage inputs. ADC conversion
at ten times per second shall be 12 bit, system accuracy + 0.2% of span.

16.4.1.3 Digital Outputs

All digital outputs shall be optically isolated and matched to the new and
existing plant requirements.

16.4.1.4 Analogue Outputs

In general all analogue outputs shall be 4-20 mA or 1-5 V dc., selectable and
drive a maximum loop impedance of 60 for current outputs and 2000 for
voltage outputs.

The signal earth shall be separate from the system main earth. DAC
conversion shall be of 12 bit, system accuracy + 0.2% of span.

16.5 POWER SUPPLY

The power supplies shall conform the following:

a. Be comprised of standard available units.

b. Have adequate input/output fuse protection.
c. Have short circuit protection and current limiting facilities.
d. Derated to allow for future expansion to improve the reliability, and help
increase the mean line between of the units. With all the expansion
described in this specification, the loading on the power supplies shall not
exceed 70% of their total capacity.
e. Module failure shall be indicated at the remote terminal unit and Master
Station.
f. Failed module shall be removed without disconnecting system power or
affecting control.

16.6 FACTORY INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

16.6.1 General

Before dispatch from the manufacturers’ work each item of hardware software
and related components shall be tested in accordance with the relevant British
Standard or Code of Practice. In the absence of British Standard or Code of
Practice these shall be performed in a manner subject to the approval of the
Engineers and witnessed and approved by the Engineer or his representative.

The equipment shall be inspected to ascertain compliance with the function

design specification satisfactory finish hand workmanship. Relevant functional
tests shall be carried out with simulated inputs/outputs as necessary.

Page 149 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The simulation equipment necessary shall be provided by the Contractor as

part of the Works. The work system tests shall take place according to the
approved program at least notice shall be in writing of the date of the proposed
works/factory acceptance.

In the event of testing and inspection being carried out at a subcontractor’s

work, the Contractor’s representative shall accompany the Engineer or his
representative.

16.6.2 Factory Acceptance Tests

A test plant shall be produced by the Contractor which shall indicate a logical
step by step schedule comprising step, action and reaction.

All hardware including spares shall be required to pass an agreed preliminary

hardware performance test to ensure known hardware operability before
software testing beings.

Functions testing using the systems software shall be comprehensive

Simulation of the inputs and responses from equipment operation shall be as
realistic a reproduction as possible of Site conditions.

The means of fault detection and diagnostic provided by the system software
shall be validated. This will involves making provision for including a sufficient
variety of faults and out- of-range conditions in the system to ensure the
detection processes are adequately tested.

16.7 IMPLEMENTATION

16.1 Installation

The Employer will use their best endeavors to allow the Contractor an
uninterrupted installation and commissioning programme. However, they
reserve the right at all items to take full control of the Site where necessary.

The Contractor shall include for the supply of all spanners, keys, special tools,
gauges and all other electronic and calibration tools required for the efficient
installation testing, commissioning and operation of the plant.

16.2 Training

A. Introduction

These clauses supplement the requirements of earlier clauses mentioned

herein. The system specialist shall conduct training courses for personnel
selected by Employer. Training shall be conducted by personnel employed by
the system specialist fully conversant with the system supplied. They shall
have demonstrable experience and training in developing and implementing
instructional courses.

The entire cost of the complete training program, except per diem expenses for
Employers personnel to attend the training program, shall be responsibility of

Page 150 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

the system Specialist and shall be included in the contract price.

The system specialist shall submit information on the training program for
approval prior to shipment of the equipment. This submittal shall include course
outline, time required, courses schedule, sample coursebook and instructor
qualification information for each level. The system specialist shall provide a
coursebook on each course available to every person taking the courses listed
herein. The coursebook shall be of sufficient detail to enable trainees at a later
date review in detail the major topics of the course.

The training times shall be scheduled by the Employer in advance so as not to

disrupt the Employer’s ability to operate the plant.

B. Operation and Maintenance Training

Training shall be provided for the Employer’s personnel on operations and

maintenance of all components. The training program shall be divided into
segments and shall consist of at least five, eight hour working days in length for
each segment.

The maintenance training program shall be developed for personnel that have
some electronics maintenance and repair experience and a general knowledge
of computer systems, but shall not assume any familiarity with the specific
hardware furnished. The following subjects shall be covred as a minimum.

a. System architecture and layout

b. Hardware components
c. Module switch settings
d. I/O modules
e. Power supplies
f. Data highway
g. Programme connections
h. RTU programming and diagnostic techniques
i. Battery replacement and recording
j. PC and workstation familiarization and maintenance
k. Troubleshooting
l. Disassembly
m. Cleaning
n. Component replacement
o. reassembling

The operation training program shall include the following topics as a minimum.

a. Power up bootstrapping and shutdown of all hardware devices

b. Interpretation of all standard displays
c. Appropriate actions for software and hardware error occurrences
d. Use of operator interface displays and keyboards
e. Use of printer including replenishment of supplies
f. Manual data entries
g. Creation and editing of graphic operator display screens
h. Loading of any required software into the system
i. Data base creation and editing C Site Inspection and Testing

Page 151 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The Client & Engineer or their representative shall attend the inspection and
tests before setting of work.

These tests shall be carried out after commissioning and be a repeat of the
functional tests performed at the system specialist premises. This shall include
operating the equipment in a variety of modes and sequences determined by
the site inspection and testing documents.

After commissioning and site inspection and testing the equipment shall be set
to work by the Contractor in agreement with the Engineer. Setting to work
includes connecting to the master station and operating the plant but not
repeating the site acceptance tests.

17 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

17.1.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section specifies the requirements in general for supply and
installation of electrical equipment, items, accessories etc. for a
complete operational system as a part of the Project.

17.1.2 REFERENCES

(a) All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall
conform to the latest standards.
(b) The design, equipment and installation requirements shall comply with
the latest editions of standards and recommendations laid down by
the following:

1. Regulations for Electrical Installations as issued by the Dubai

Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA).
2. Regulations for Electrical Installations as issued by the Institution
of Electrical Engineers (IEE), London (for points not included in
DEWA Regulations).
3. Recommendations for Lighting Installations as issued by DEWA
and the Chartered Institute of Building Services, London.
4. Standards relating to Electrical Installations and equipment as
issued by International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and
British Standards Institute (BSI).
5. Regulations for telephone system installation as issued by Etisalat.
6. National Electrical Code issued by National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA), USA.
7. Rules of the Dubai Civil Defense Department for Fire Alarm
Installations.
8. NFPA-70-National Electrical Code issued by NFPA, USA.
9. NFPA-502-Standard for Road Tunnels, Bridges and other limited
access Highways, issued by NFPA, USA.

Page 150 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

10. NFPA-20-Standard for Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps.

(c) Where two or more applicable standards and/or the Specifications are
in conflict, the most stringent shall apply.

17.1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) The Electrical Installation Contractor, herein referred to, as the

'Contractor' within this Section and others under 17.1 of this
specifications shall carry out all electrical works complete in
accordance with the requirements of the Project Documentation.

(b) The electrical Contractor shall be a specialized Contractor for

Electrical Works and shall have documented experience of at least 5
years of similar projects.
(c) The scope of work shall include but not be limited to:
1. The supply and installation of all services, equipment,
components, accessories and fittings required for the operation of
the facility to the extent specified and detailed on the Drawings
and Specifications including maintenance after provisional
handover.
2. Builder's work in connection with the Electrical Installations,
including supply, necessary inserts and sleeves.
3. Any work which can be reasonably inferred as necessary for the
safe, satisfactory operation of each system, whether such work is
specified or shown on drawings or not
4. The supply and installation of cables, conduits, boxes and
termination points, for the motors, starters, controls and the like for
the Control Equipment, Ventilation and Air-conditioning and
Plumbing services.
5. Arranging for installation of permanent Electrical supply by the
Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA), and carrying all
necessary approvals, site inspection and obtaining tariff meters.
6. Attending upon the DEWA installing mains power supply and
carrying out insulation tests, primary and secondary injection tests.
7. Arranging and carrying out all necessary approvals with the Dubai
Civil Defense Department for the Fire Alarm System, extinguishing
and protection systems.

(d) The Scope of Work under this project shall include the following major
elements of work.

1. Supply and installation of LV switchboards and motor control

centers as detailed in the Section 17.20 and 17.21 and as per
drawings.
2. Supply and installation of all Fire resistant low smoke power,
control, Communication and signal cables from MCC, MLDB, MDB
and LDB to various electrical equipment, motors, distribution
boards, control panels, local control stations, light fittings, process
equipment, etc. to make the electrical system complete in

Page 151 of 417

Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

all respects. This shall also include all the cable trays, conduits,
GRP/ uPVC ducts, concrete pull pits, cable support systems,
trenches, etc. required for proper installation of all the cables.

i. Power cables inside pedestrian bridges shall be

XLPE/SWA/PVC-FRLS in general, unless another type
is required by design/installation constraints.

3. Supply and installation of general 220V, single phase and 3 Phase

socket outlets, and combined single phase and three phase
sockets outlets, located internally and externally.
4. Supply and installation of earthing and lightning protection system
for complete plant, buildings and facilities, including earth pits, grid
conductors, test points, etc. to achieve the specified earth
resistance.
5. Supply and installation of telephone system including junction
boxes, outlets, cables, conduits chambers etc. Exposed
conduiting is not acceptable in any part of the contract.
6. Supply and installation of local control stations, emergency stop
PB station for all motors, process equipment as specified and as
shown on the drawings.
7. Supply and installation of weatherproof junction boxes including
isolators, for each Submersible/Sump pump, fans, monorail hoist
and any other motor having its cable supplied fixed to motor and
supplied as a complete unit.
8. Supply and installation of air-conditioning for the MCC/Control
room.
9. Supply and installation of power cables (XLPE/SWA/PVC)
between LV switchboards and the MCC panels.
10. Supply, Installation, Testing and commissioning of Fiber Optic and
or Copper Cables required for communication including all the
transceivers, connectors, patch cords, at both ends, slice
chambers, etc. complete to achieve the specified communication
network functionality.
11. Supply Installation, Testing and commissioning of Fire Detection
and alarm System.
12. Testing, commissioning of all electrical equipment and supply of
as-built drawings, O&M manuals for the complete electrical
installation.
13. Thermographic survey of plant after completion of installation.
14. Minor Civil works in addition to the work specified above, required,

Page 152 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

for completion of electrical installation shall also be included.

17.1.4 APPLICABILITY

(a) Clauses to specify general electrical requirements and standards of

workmanship for the machinery and installations are applicable where
appropriate except where particularly re-defined in the individual
installation specification clauses.

17.1.5 MAINS ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

(a) The Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) will provide the
electricity supply unless it is specified to be connected from the
existing sources in the project area. The exact characteristics,
including fault levels, shall be obtained from the Department and
suitably rated equipment shall be provided in full compliance with their
specific requirements. For bidding purposes, the supply characteristics
shall be taken as follows: -

1. High Voltage (H.V.) - 11,000 Volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 50 Hz.

2. Low Voltage (L.V.) - 400 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz.
3. Voltage - +/- 10 percent
4. Frequency - +/- 2 percent

(b) Phase rotation of supply to BS 158.

(c) Neutral: Solidly grounded at transformer location.
Grounding system: TNS.
(d) For the purpose of fault withstand rating, the prospective fault level is
to be assumed at 400V as 43kA (31 MVA) for 1 second, or for 11kV
as 25kA (450 MVA) for 3 seconds duration.
(e) Obtain confirmation from the Supply Authority of the size and number
of cables they will provide to Main Switchboards. Allow for adequate
and appropriate cable glands, lugs and boxes.
(f) Provide liaison with Dubai Electricity and Water Authority in
accordance with project co-ordinations.

17.1.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

(a) The climate in Dubai in the summer months is hot and humid and a
humidity of 100 percent at 50 degree Celsius has been recorded.
(b) Climate

1. violent sand and dust storms of several hours duration occur and
even on comparatively still days, fine dust is carried in suspension
in the atmosphere.
2. all apparatus and equipment shall, therefore, be so designed and
constructed that they operate satisfactorily and without any
deleterious effect for prolonged and continuous periods in the

Page 153 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

conditions stated above and at the following ambient temperature

conditions:

maximum sun radiation temperature in summer - 85 °C

maximum ambient temperature in summer - 55 °C
average max. ambient temperature in summer - 50 °C
minimum ambient temperature in winter - 10 °C
altitude of Dubai may be taken as - sea level

(c) The temperatures quoted above make no allowance for heat

generated from equipment itself or from any other equipment in the
vicinity.
(d) The capacity and ratings of all electrical equipment and materials
given are, unless otherwise indicated, for Dubai climatic conditions as
stated in Clause A above. Provide the basis of the derating factors
applied in each case.
(e) Where specific sizes are indicated e.g. cable sizes, due allowances
have been made in the design for the climatic conditions of Dubai and
derating has been applied.

Where no ratings or sizes are indicated for components and other

accessories, supply equipment, which will give trouble free service in
the ambient conditions stated above.

17.1.7 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS - DUBAI ELECTRICITY AND WATER

AUTHORITY (DEWA)

(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the latest

Regulations issued by Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA),
and for implementing them. Normally, the requirements of DEWA
Regulations shall take precedence over the requirements of this
specification. However, when the requirements of this specification
exceed those of DEWA Regulations, this specification shall govern, at
the discretion of the Engineer who will make the decision.
(b) The Contractor shall be totally responsible for the following activities
associated with DEWA approvals, and clearance for connection:

1. Establishing DEWA requirements for submittal of documentation to

DEWA.
2. Producing the required documentation to the satisfaction of
DEWA.
3. Obtaining DEWA approval for cable (supply) entry, Substations,
Civil works completion, Load schedule approvals, panel layout
approvals, etc.
4. Obtaining DEWA approval on all relevant documents.
5. Arranging survey, inspection and obtaining DEWA approval of the
electrical installation.
6. Obtaining DEWA clearance for connection.

Page 154 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) The equipment shall be designed and installed in accordance with the
16th Edition of the IEE Regulations.
(d) A front clearance of minimum 900mm shall be provided between the
MCC panel largest door opened at right angle and any wall or
immovable structure.

17.1.8 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Kilowatt-hour meters for loads less than 50kW (100Amp) shall be
directly connected. For loads more than 50kW the kilowatt-hour
meters shall be connected through current transformers (CT). The
technical specification shall be similar to those as required by Dubai
Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA). The current transformer ratio
shall be from one of the following, depending on the connected load:

1. 2000/5
2. 1000/5
3. 300/5
4. 200/5
(b) Indicating Ammeters and Voltmeters shall have full-scale deflection to
240 degree.
(c) Phase failure protection shall be provided in the Incoming circuit.
(d) Test switches shall be provided for indicating lamps.
(e) Regulated battery chargers shall be included at RTU and PLC
locations.
(f) A Beacon Alarm lamp (outside the plant room or external kiosk) shall
be provided at plant location to indicate emergency situation.
(g) Secondary/integral Distribution Boards shall be provided with fixed
type busbars and not combed type.
(h) Automatic transfer switch and Main transfer switch (ATS/MTS) shall
be installed inside generator control cubicle.
(i) Grounding resistance for lightning protection system shall not exceed
10 ohms.
(j) An over all power factor correction capacitor bank shall be provided
for smaller inductive loads, instead of individual load. The capacitor
bank shall be connected on the load side of the incomer circuit
breaker and prior to the plant protection equipment. Over all correction
shall not be less than 0.93.
(k) No less than 60cm space shall be provided behind and on sides of
floor mounted monitoring and control panels.
(l) All outdoor switches and outlets shall be metallic, dust and water-
proof; ingress protection minimum to IP 65.
(m) Emergency push-buttons for installation inside wet well, shall be
water-proof and protected to IP 68.

Page 155 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(n) The finished paint color for plants and equipment shall be in
accordance with 18 E 51 of BS 4800.
(o) All outdoor equipment and panels shall be provided with sunshade as
per the requirement of the manufacturer.

17.1.9 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

(a) Motor
Motor output ratings as indicated on the drawing or elsewhere are
approximate. Motor rating shall cover the full operating range of the
pump without being overloaded at any stage. Motors shall be rated
according to pump shaft power requirement as per the pump
manufacturer, derated for ambient condition, shall have 1.15 service
factor, 10 percent spare capacity and other requirements as per this
section. Protection and control equipment shall be rated accordingly.
(c) Power Connection

Power connection to existing or new installations shall be arranged in

coordination with DEWA. Provide cable entry facilities for source
cables as per DEWA requirement. Diversion of power connection to
the refurbished installations shall be coordinated with the Municipality
Agricultural Section.

(d) Power connection charges

The connection charges payable to DEWA include provision of new

cable and cost of laying by DEWA contractor. An item has been
included in the respective BOQ for payment of these charges.
Contractor is fully responsible to liaise with the DEWA and arrange for
effecting connection to each of the specification. All necessary
drawings shall be prepared and provided to DEWA for approval of
cable entry, power connection, inspection and testing of installations
as required by the authority. The scope shall include the following
items as a minimum:

1. Preparation of site location map showing the location of load point.

2. Arrange cable entry approval from DEWA.
3. Coordinate with DEWA surveyor to decide on the supply cable
route.
4. Coordinate with DEWA contractor for laying of supply cable.
5. Prepare Design and Shop drawings and arrange for approval from DEWA.
6. Liaise with DEWA for power supply connection, inspection and
testing of installation.
7. Payment of connection charges and commissioning of power
connection including tariff metering.
8. All other necessary activity required for power supply connection
and commissioning of the plant.
The BOQ item on the connection charges payable to DEWA shall
include the cost for such services.

Page 156 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(e) Cable works

Provide fire resistant heavy-duty steel return flange type Perforated or

Ladder type cable trays (minimum thickness of 2mm) with cover for
laying of cables. The trays shall be supported by suitable “foot”
(spacer and support) to provide ventilation from the bottom side and
avoid contact with floor. The cable trays shall be Stainless Steel SS
316L with high resistance to corrosion. All hardware, such as inset
elements, bolts, nuts, screws, pins etc. shall be SS316L. The
complete cable tray and support system shall be of one manufacturer
and shall include factory made trays, tray fittings, support brackets,
hangers etc. Flange depth for the trays shall be minimum 50mm.
Rung spacing for Ladder type trays shall be maximum 300mm. Cable
Trays installed inside the Cable trenches can be Fire Resistant GRP.
However all the Cable trays inside the driveway shall be SS 316L
material. All Supports shall be SS316L only.

(f) Civil works

The Contractor shall take into account of all the civil/mechanical works
associated with installation of MCC panels, indoor and outdoor cabling
works, entry ducts, relocation/refurbishment of MCC panels or cable
trench modification in the project sites including removal of existing
facilities, if any.

(g) MCC panel inside GRP kiosk (when specified)

MCC panel shall be constructed to ingress protection of IP54. Overall

protection for GRP kiosk housing for the MCC panel, for outdoor
installation either directly under the sun or when installed under a
sunshade shall provide a protection to IP 55 (minimum) class. Provide
minimum 750 mm space to the back and on sides of the MCC panel to
the kiosk wall. Contractor shall provide dimensional drawing for the
MCC layout including the GRP kiosk, where applicable, and
coordinate to provide space in the site layout plan.

(h) MCC panel – circuits for future use

Where shown on the drawing for future connection or spare or when

designated item to be connected is not presently available, provide all
equipment and material inside the panel connected up to the terminal
block, properly arranged for easy connection to the future plant.
(i) Air conditioning of MCC, kiosk and control room

Provide split type air conditioning for cooling of the MCC panel as
required. The design shall provide effective cooling to all the
controllers and efficient air-circulation ensuring temperature and
humidity as specified in mechanical equipment specifications.

(i) When specified, GRP kiosk to house the MCC panel for outdoor
installations, provide FCU inside the housing and place the

Page 157 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

condensing unit outside.

(j) The cooling requirement shall be based on the heat developed by the
speed controllers, installed equipment and as recommended by the
panel manufacturer.
(k) Provide proper sealing to the exiting pipes suitable for the IP
requirements as specified.

(l) Submit calculation to justify the proposed cooling capacity.

17.1.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

(a) All electrical equipment shall meet the overall project requirements.

17.1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

(a) All electrical equipment shall match the overall project performance
requirements.

17.1.12 WORKMANSHIP

(a) The entire work provided in this specification shall be constructed and
finished in every respect in a workmanlike and substantial manner.
The Contractor shall provide the system in accordance with the best
trade practice and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(b) Keep others fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all
openings required for apparatus and give full information sufficiently in
advance of the work so that all openings may be built in advance.
Provide and install all sleeves, supports, etc., hereinafter specified or
required.
(c) Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus as to
the proper method of installing and connecting same. Obtain all
information from others, which may be necessary to facilitate work and
the completion of the whole Project.
(d) Provide the services of an experienced foreman, who shall be
continuously in charge of the erection of the electrical work, together
with all necessary skilled workmen, helpers and laborers, required to
properly unload, transfer, erect and connect up, adjust, start, operate
and test the system.
(e) Before installing any work, verify that it does not interfere with
clearance required for other work. Notice of adverse conditions shall
be forwarded in writing to the Engineer before any work in question is
installed. If notification is not made, and work installed causes
interference with the contemplated design, make such changes in his
work as directed by the Engineer to permit the installation of all work
of the Project, at no additional cost to the Client.
(f) Raceways shall be run as straight and direct as possible in general

Page 158 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

forming right angles with or parallel with walls or piping and neatly
spaced, with risers erected plumb and true, maintain a clearance of at
least 25 mm between finished coverings and adjoining work.
Approved ceiling height shall be obtained from Architectural Drawings.
(g) All equipment and accessories shall operate without objectionable
noise or vibration. Should operation of any of the equipment or
systems produce noise or vibration which is, in the opinion of the
Engineer objectionable, make change in equipment and do all work
necessary to eliminate the objectionable noise or vibration at no
additional cost to the Client.

Wherever possible services shall not cross expansion joints. Where

this is unavoidable the services shall accommodate the design
movement without damage, by use of approved expansion
couplings/flexible conduit arrangement.

17.1.13 EXISTING SERVICES

(a) The contractor is deemed to have visited and inspected the site to
familiarize himself with the existing site conditions and services at
tender stage.
(b) The contractor shall obtain the existing services record drawings from
DEWA and various utility services departments (i.e. Etisalat, Town
Planning Services Department, etc).
(c) Co-ordination between Design and Shop drawings, work on site and
existing services shall be carried out by the Contractor.
(d) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damages to the
existing services including repairs, and penalties imposed by the
concerned parties etc and for removing any site obstacles such as
underground cables, pipes, civil works etc. which is obstructing his
work on site.
(e) The Contractor shall also be responsible for liaison with DEWA and
Etisalat and all other government utility departments to disconnect the
existing services supply to the existing site prior to demolishing.

17.1.14 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

(a) The indication and/or description of any item on the Drawings or in the
Specification, unless otherwise specifically stated, imply an instruction
to supply and fix such items.
(b) Notes on Drawings referring to individual items of work take
precedence over the Specification.
(c) Drawings show the general run of cables, raceways, etc. and the
approximate location of equipment and utilities; symbols and
schematic diagrams are of no dimensional significance. Obtain from
the Engineer dimensions not shown on, or which cannot be
determined from Drawings. Do not scale drawings to obtain locations.
(d) Notify the Engineer of conflicting requirements. Where departures
from the drawings are deemed necessary, details of such departure
and reasons thereupon shall be submitted to the Engineer for

Page 159 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

approval.
(e) No such departure shall be made without prior written approval of the
Engineer.

17.1.15 DESIGN AND SHOP DRAWINGS - SUBMITTALS

(a) The term 'shop drawings' includes fabrication, erection, layout and
setting out drawings; manufacturer's standard drawings, schedules;
descriptive literature, illustrations, catalogues and brochures;
performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams and other
drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment,
raceway systems, control systems and methods of construction as
required to show that materials, equipment and systems and position
thereof, conform to the Contract Documents. The term 'manufactured'
applies to standard units usually mass-produced. The term
'fabricated' means items specifically assembled or made out of
selected materials to meet individual design requirements.
(b) Shop drawings shall establish actual detail of all manufactured or
fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining work, amplify
design details of electrical equipment in proper relation to physical
spaces in the structure, and incorporate minor changes of design or
construction to suit actual conditions.
(c) The Contractor shall submit for approval, and obtain in due time to
conform to the Contract Program, all shop and installation drawings
based on the design drawings approved by the DEWA and all other
relevant Municipality and Government Authorities.
(d) The Contractor, after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and
submit shop drawings submittal schedule within 30 days of Contract
Award. Shop drawings shall be submitted with such promptness as to
cause no delay in his own work or to any other Contractor. No
extensions of time will be granted because of failure to have shop
drawings submitted in ample time to allow for processing, in
accordance with the submittal schedule.
(e) Provide shop drawings, to a scale not smaller than the corresponding
layout drawings, showing the following and obtain approval before
commencing work:

1. exact runs and sizes of conduits, ducts, cables, cable trays and
trunking.
2. layout drawings for each separate electrical installation showing
the actual locations of points, suitably identified, the locations of
switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers and distribution
boards, details and types of fittings.
3. plans showing the equipment assembly, space requirements,
clearances and locations for cable entrances and anchor bolts.
4. elevations showing all parts, devices, components and
nameplates, positions and arrangements of the equipment. Show
as many elevations as necessary to clearly depict component and
device arrangements.
5. schematic diagram indicating load schedule, e.g., power splited to

Page 160 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

phases, status of operation (standby, duty), rated current,

equipment type, size of cable, derating factor, voltage drop in the
cable.
6. schedules of points, indicating how the various outlets are
connected to the distribution boards, size of circuit wiring, the
rating of the protective device and the type and size of appliance
of fitting.
7. schematic diagram of connections of distribution boards, and
equipment to main switchboards showing sizes of feeders, etc..
8. schematic and elementary wiring diagrams, of each unit of each
equipment, showing numbered terminal points, numbered wires
and numbered interconnections to other equipment and remote
devices.
9. connection wiring diagrams, of each unit of each equipment,
showing numbered terminal points, numbered wires and
numbered interconnections to other equipment and remote
devices.
10. complete catalogue information of all parts and components of
electrical equipment.
11. all cable routings and layouts for the different electrical services,
feeders and branch circuits showing routes, sizes and types of
cables.
12. any other data necessary for the proper maintenance of the
installations.

(f) Drawings shall be ISO standard size A1. Shop drawings and samples
shall be properly identified with the name of the Project, the
Contractor, the Sub-Contractor and the date, and signed by
Contractors Authorized Engineers.
(g) Final co-ordination of electrical works with mechanical, structural and
architectural work shall be carried out from complete shop drawings
and sufficient time shall be allowed for co-ordination and checking of
shop drawings and calculations after shop drawings are submitted.
(h) Individual shop drawings shall be submitted following the distribution
of the co-ordination drawings and shall bear a stamp indicating that
the work has been coordinated with other trades.
(i) The Engineer's review and approval of shop drawings submitted by
and approved by the Contractor is for general conformance with the
design concept and information given in the Contract Documents
and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any
deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The
Engineer's review and approval shall not be construed as a
complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility
for error of any sort in shop drawings or schedules, or from the
necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract
Documents which may have been omitted on the shop drawings.
The Engineer's review and approval of a component item shall not
indicate review and approval of the complete assembly in which it
functions.

Page 161 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.1.16 PROGRESS DRAWINGS - SUBMITTALS

(a) Provide and keep on the job at all times, one complete and separate
set of blackline prints of the electrical work on which shall be clearly,
neatly and accurately noted, promptly as the work progresses, all
architectural and electrical changes, revisions and additions to the
work. Whatever work is installed otherwise than as shown on the
Contract Drawings, such changes shall be noted.
(b) Indicate daily progress on these prints by coloring in the various
conduits, ducts, trunking, cable trays, fixtures, and apparatus and
associated installation works erected.

17.1.17 AS BUILT DRAWINGS - SUBMITTALS

(a) The contractor shall provide the as built drawings, as approved by the
engineers, in DXF format or Micro-station DGN format, in CD-ROM.
The drawings shall be submitted not later than 2 months after
completion of the Project, or putting into operation, whichever is
earlier. An additional, 5 sets of hard copy of all relevant drawings,
which will be required for operation and maintenance, shall be
supplied in bound book forms immediately after the commissioning of
the Project.

(b) The contractor shall supply, operation and maintenance manuals in

original, from the manufacturer in bound book forms, at least 2 weeks
prior to commissioning of the equipment. These shall also be supplied,
in computer diskettes, based on popular Microsoft window based
publishing software programs, along with the as built drawings as
mentioned above. Provide manuals as per the requirement of project
specifications.

17.1.18 BUILDERS WORK

(a) Lay electrical works in advance of pouring concrete slabs and

construction of walls. Obtain Engineer's approval before commencing
builder's work in connection with electrical installation. Related co-
ordinated shop-drawings shall be submitted for approval as per the
related clause 1.15 of this section. Materials approval shall be
obtained as per procedure detailed in clause 1.31 below. The
contractor shall make it certain that drawings properly co-ordinated
with other works are submitted immediately after signing of the
contract and approval of drawings and the materials are obtained at
least one month prior to the commencement date of the construction.
(b) Check with other trades to ensure equipment and material can be
installed in space provided.
(c) Provide other trades with information necessary for them to execute
their work.
(d) Details on drawings, which are specific regarding dimensions and
locations, are for information purposes. Co-ordinate with other trades
to ensure work can be installed as indicated.

Page 162 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.1.19 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Store documents separate from those used for construction.

1. Protect from deterioration and loss.
2. Store in a secure, fire resistant location.

(b) Keep documents current throughout the construction period.

1. Do not conceal Work until “As Built” information has been
recorded.

(c) “As Built” (Record) Drawings

1. Maintain a blue line or black line set of prints of all Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
2. Keep drawings clean and undamaged.
3. Mark up drawings to show actual installation if different from that
shown on the Contract Drawings.

a. Mark up changes using a red erasable pencil.

b. Show “as built” condition fully and accurately.

4. Mark up drawings to show new information of importance which

was not shown on either the Contract Drawings or the Shop
Drawings.
a. Give particular attention to concealed work that will be difficult
to measure or record at a later date.

5. Note related variation order numbers, as applicable, next to the

mark up.
6. Submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, project
title, Contractor’s name and address, itemised list of documents
and the Contractor’s signature.

17.1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Provide operating data for all equipment specified in all Sections of
PS10 specifications.
1. Comply with submittals requirement in this section and in General
Conditions of Contract.
a. Submit four sets prior to final inspection.

2. Index and present data in a three-ring side binder with durable

plastic cover.
3. Present data on A4 size paper, minimum 80 gram.
4. Separate data by process system.
a. Process systems are defined by the process and
instrumentation diagrams included with the Contract Drawings.
(b) Provide the operating data identified below for each equipment item in
the stated specification divisions.

1. The data shall be obtained with the equipment operating under

design conditions and while handling the process fluid or material

Page 163 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

specified.

2. No readings shall be taken until the equipment has operated as

specified, for at least one hour.
a. Description of material handled.
b. Material or fluid delivery rate.
c. System operating temperature and pressure.
d. Motor operating speed.
e. Motor current draw under normal operation and under starting
conditions.
f. Bearing operating temperatures.
g. Vibration levels for equipment items with specified vibration
limits.
h. Noise levels for equipment items with specified noise limits.

17.1.21 QUALITY ASSURANCE

(a) Only manufacturers operating under an accredited ISO 9000 Quality

System shall be considered
(b) Manufacturers shall have a minimum 5 years manufacturing
experience with the type of equipment being proposed.
(c) Supply equipment and materials from the recommended
manufacturers as per General Conditions of Contract or as approved
by Employer/Engineer during construction.
(d) Prior to the despatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, in sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives
to inspect and test the equipment or witness the test, if so desired.

1. All notification shall be made by written “Inspection Request”.

Inspection requests shall be developed in a format acceptable to
the Engineer and shall include at least the following information.

i Space for serial number

ii Contract or project number
iii Contractors name, Consultants name, Clients name
iv Discipline (civil, structural, mechanical, electrical, architectural,
other)
v. Inspection or test description
vi Facility and location

vii Scheduled time and date for inspection

viii Signature block for contractor with submission time and date
ix Evaluation block for Engineer with date and time inspected,
results of inspection/test (pass, fail, not ready), permission to
proceed (yes or no) and Engineer’s signature block
x Area for general comments

Page 164 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineers office, but the

original must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.

2. Minimum notification time shall be as follows:

i. 48 hours within Dubai city and surrounding areas.

ii. 72 hours for other areas within UAE.
iii. 2 weeks outside UAE.

(e) Contractor’s Quality PLAN (QP)

1. General Requirements
2. The Contractor’s Quality Plan shall designate all Quality Control
Procedures, Method Statements (Work Instructions), Inspection &
Test Plans, Inspection & Test Records, Laboratory Procedures
and/or other Quality Documents necessary to ensure compliance
with all aspects of the contract documents.
3. As a minimum, the QP must include the following:

i. The approved Quality Organization Plan along with all QA/QC

staff qualifications.
ii A list of all Quality Control Procedures to be utilised and a
schedule for their submission.
iii A list of all Method Statements (work instructions) to be utilised
and a schedule for their submission.
iv A list of all Inspection and Test Plans to be utilised and a
schedule for their submission.
v A list of all Inspection and Test Records to be utilised, to
document compliance with the contract documents.
vi A list of all tests to be conducted on site or in the site
laboratory.
vii A list of all laboratory procedures and a schedule for their
submission.
viii A list of all inspect and tests to be conducted at various
manufacturers facilities and laboratories.
ix A list of all tests to be conducted at government laboratories.
x A list of all tests to be conducted at independent (commercial)
laboratories.
xi A list of all activities proposed for independent inspection
agencies.

(f) Quality Control Procedures (QCP’s)

1. The Contractor shall develop and implement Quality Control

Procedures, in a format acceptable to the Engineer, to prevent
non-compliances from being incorporated into the permanent
works. QCPs must also be developed to identify and document
those non-compliances which do occur and track them until

Page 165 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

corrective action has been taken and preventive measures are

implemented
2. As a minimum, Quality Control Procedures shall be submitted to
govern the following activities:

i. Submittal review, submission and tracking.

ii Material receivable, inspection and storage.
iii Field testing on site.
iv Non-conformances.
v Document control.

(g) Method Statement (Work Instructions)

1. The Contractor shall submit method statements, in a format

acceptable to the Engineer, for all major activities such as,
surveying, dewatering, excavating, trenching, pipelaying,
backfilling, concrete works, coating application, membrane
application and others as designated under the subtitle
“Submittals” in various sections of this specification.
2. In addition to providing a step by step description of the work (in
sequential order), method statements shall also clarify the
following:

i. Scope of work covered

ii References (other MS, procedures or standards)
iii Subcontractors utilised
iv Products required
v Tools and equipment required
vi Prior activities to be completed
vii Personnel required and designated responsibilities
viii Safety Hazards and Precautions to be taken
ix Quality Control Measures (if not governed by a QCP)
x Procedure (step by step sequence of work)

(h) Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs)

1. The Contractor shall develop and submit Inspection and Test

Plans, in a format acceptable to the Engineer, for all major
activities encountered during the course of the works such as, pipe
laying and testing, construction of manholes or chambers,
equipment installation and commissioning and other as necessary,
to ensure that all inspections and tests are conducted to confirm
compliance with the contract documents.
2. The Inspection and Test Plans shall be developed to monitor all
activities on a step by step basis, in sufficient detail to indicate the
following:

Page 166 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

i Type of Inspection required (surveillance, witness, hold point,

etc)
ii Type and frequency of test required
iii Acceptance or rejection criteria
iv Reference to records which document compliance
v Mechanism to identify which inspections/tests will be verified
by the Engineer or independent inspection agency.

(i) Inspection and Test Records (ITRs)

1. The Contractor shall develop and submit Inspection and Test

Records, in a format acceptable to the Engineer, to document all
inspections and tests listed on the Inspection Test and Plans.
2. The ITRs shall indicate the results of all the inspections and tests
as compliant or non-compliant for a given area, structure or
piece of equipment and reference all related inspection or test
documents which verify compliance.

17.1.22 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

(a) To be attended and coordinated with other contractors.

(b) The agenda for the Pre-Construction meeting shall be provided by the
Engineer, a minimum of 3 working days before the meeting and shall
include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Contractor’s general obligations

2. Contractor’s organisation plan for the project including:
• Names and titles of all persons authorised by the Contractor to
represent and execute documents for him, with samples of all
authorised signatures.
• Name, address and telephone number of all those authorised
by the Contractor to act for him in emergencies.

3. Communication channels and procedures.

4. Project Meeting Schedule.
5. Construction schedule including the sequence of critical work.
6. Contract documents including distribution of required copies.
7. Submittal processing including forms and procedures.
8. Payment application forms, procedures and the revised progress
schedule reports to accompany the applications.
9. Field order and variation order processing.
10. Rules and regulations governing performance of the Work
including:
a. Construction permit requirements, procedures and posting.
b. Procedures concerning the installation of Work on public or
private property not owned by the Ministry.
c. Access and rights-of-way furnished by the Ministry

Page 167 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

d. Contractor’s provisions for barricades, traffic control, utilities,

sanitary facilities and other temporary facilities and controls.
e. Inspector and his duties.
f. Construction surveyor and initiation of surveying services.
g. Testing laboratory or agency and testing procedures.

11. Project Sign Board for the Ministry.

12. Safety and first aid.
13. Site security.
14. Contractor’s Quality Control Program.
15. Construction equipment and methods proposed by the Contractor.
16. Miscellaneous project requirements such as housekeeping etc.
17. Monitoring and reporting procedures for work progress, project
costs, materials, labour and plant/equipment procurement, etc.
18. Contractor mobilisation and use of the project site.
19. Other administrative and general matters, as needed.

17.1.23 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site as specified in

project specifications.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under this section.
(c) Equipment and materials shall be delivered, handled and stored
according to the recommendation of the manufacturer along with the
following provision.

1. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be

performed in a manner to avoid product damage.
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting purposes. Steel
chains, ropes, clamps or cables shall not be allowed for lifting
purposes. Steel chains or ropes may be used for securing
equipment during transport or storage provided protective padding
or timber block is utilized.
3. Do not store directly on ground. Provide adequate timber blocking
for sufficient support.
4. Cover as required and as directed by the Engineer.
5. Visually inspect all equipment on delivery and report any damage
to the Engineer

Any equipment damaged upon delivery, storage or handling,

installation shall be marked and set aside.
Proposals for repair of any damaged equipment shall be submitted in
writing to the Engineer for approval.
No repairs to damaged equipment shall be attempted without the

Page 168 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Engineer’s approval.
Any damaged equipment deemed unsuitable for repair by the
Engineer shall be removed from site and replaced at the Contractor’s
expense.

17.1.24 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.1.25 SEQUENCING

(a) Sequence work under the provisions of overall project program.

17.1.26 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

(a) General
1. The Contractor shall co-ordinate construction activities included
under various Sections of these Specification, to ensure efficient
and orderly installation of each part of the Works.
2. The Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included
under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent
upon each other for proper installation, connection and operation.

a. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on

installation of other components, either before or after its own
installations, detailed design and construction activities in the
sequence required to obtain the best results, must be
scheduled.
b. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of
different components to assure maximum accessibility for
required maintenance, service and repair.
c. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled
for later installation.
d. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each
party involved, outlining special procedures required for
coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports
and attendance at meetings.
e. Prepare similar memoranda for the Engineer and separate
contractors, where coordination of their work is required.

3. The full time Mechanical & Electrical co-ordinator employed by the

Contractor, shall be responsible for all co-ordination activities as
follows.

(a) Co-ordinate all electrical, instrumentation, automation activities

with that of other disciplines and divisions in the specification.
(b) Co-ordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals
and for delivery of products.
(c) Co-ordinate meetings among those parties concerned with the
work to establish and maintain co-ordination, progress
schedules and to resolve any co-ordination matters. Engineer

Page 169 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

shall be invited to attend all co-ordination meetings. Engineer

may/may not attend the meetings. Minutes of all co-ordination
Meetings shall be sent to the Engineer and all other concerned
parties.
(d) Participate in progress meetings report on progress of work
and any required changes in schedules.
(e) Follow up submittals and procurement process.
(f) Prepare co-ordination drawings indicating best sequence of
installation and identifying potential conflicts.

(b) Scheduling

1. Co-ordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities, to avoid conflicts and
ensure orderly progress of the work. The scheduling shall conform
to the requirements of General Conditions of Contract. All
schedules shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval.

a. Such activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Preparation of schedules of submittals, procurement and

construction.
• Schedule of off-site activities.
• Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
• Delivery and processing of submittals.
• Progress meetings
• Project Close-out activities.
• Requested time adjustment schedules.

(c) Drawings

1. Prepare and submit shop drawings where close and careful co-
ordination is required for:

i Installation of products
ii Materials fabricated off-site by separate entities
iii Where limited available space necessitates maximum
utilization of space for efficient installation of different
components.

2. Drawings shall indicate:

i Interrelationship of components detailed on separate shop

drawings.
ii Required installation sequences.
iii Comply with general requirements contained in Section 01300
- "Submittals".

3. Take special care and precautions for specific coordination

Page 170 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

requirements for plant, equipment and other electromechanical

installations, specified elsewhere or otherwise required.

(e) Specifications

1. The arrangement of the Specifications into Divisions, Sections,

Clauses, Sub-Clauses and paragraphs, shall not control the
division of work among Sub-Contractors, nor establish the extent
of work to be performed by any particular trade or Sub-Contractor.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of

all Works including that required between different trades and
different Sub-Contractors, Suppliers, Utility Agencies,
Governmental Authorities, etc.

17.1.27 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

(a) Provide products, spare parts and maintenance materials as specified

in the technical Sections of this specification.

1. Include itemised list of all items furnished, describing each item

and citing the appropriate specification section and paragraph.
2. Package each item for long term storage.
3. Mark or tag each item for easy identification.

(b) Deliver items to the project site.

1. Inventory items with the Engineer, and obtain a receipt prior to
final payment.

(c) Provide complete listing of all consumable stores and spare parts
used by the Contractor during the maintenance period.

17.1.29 EXTRA MATERIALS

(a) Furnish under provisions of this section.

17.1.30 PROGRAMS

(a) The Contractor shall produce a work program based on CPM or Bar-
chart form indicating the time required for various operations to
complete the Project in time. The following points shall be highlighted
in the program:

1. mobilization
2. drawings/submittals
3. approvals
4. equipment deliveries including delivery periods from supply
sources external to the UAE
5. first fix
6. cabling

Page 171 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

7. main/sub-main distribution equipment

8. second fix
9. fixing of light fittings
10. testing
11. commissioning and handing over

17.1.31 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL APPROVALS

(a) Approval of materials and equipment shall be based on latest

manufacturer's published data.
(b) Complete and detailed information of all materials and equipment to
be incorporated in the work shall be submitted. Submit detailed
description and specifications, catalogues cuts, installation data,
diagrams, dimensions, controls and any other data required to
demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. Each item
submitted shall be referenced to the applicable paragraph in the
Specification.
(c) At the request of the Engineer, submit a sample of any equipment or
material for further study before approval. Where the Engineer
requires samples, the period required to obtain the sample will be
taken into account when scheduling approvals.
(d) Only approved materials shall be employed at the site. All materials
installed, which are not approved, shall be removed and reinstated by
approved ones.
(e) Time periods for equipment and materials approvals shall be
scheduled and approved prior to commencing of the work.

17.1.32 SUBSTITUTIONS

(a). Contractor must submit requests for substitution with 60 days of

starting the Contract.

1. After that date, substitutions will only be considered when a

product becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor.
2. Document each request with complete data substantiating that the
proposed substitution complies with the Contract Documents.
(b). Requests for substitutions will only be considered if the Contractor:

1. Has investigated the proposed product and has determined that it

meets or exceeds, in all respects, the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as the specified
product.
3. Will coordinate the installation requirements of the substitution and
will make all changes necessary for the Work to be complete in all
respects.

i. Cost of such changes shall be at the Contractor’s sole

expense.

4. Waives any claims for additional costs which may subsequently

Page 172 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

become apparent.

(c). Substitutions will not be considered when:

1. Substitution is indicated or implied on shop drawing or product

data submittals without separate written request complying with
the above requirements.
2. When acceptance will require substantial revisions to the Contract
Documents.

(d). The Engineer will determine the acceptability of the proposed

substitution and will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection in
writing within a reasonable time.
(e). Only one request for substitution will be considered for each product.

1. When a substitution is not accepted, the Contractor must provide

the specified product.

17.1.33 PROTECTION

(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until
finally inspected, tested and accepted. Materials and equipment,
which are not immediately installed after delivery to site, shall be
stored carefully. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or
plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
(b) Protect work and material of other trades from damage that might be
caused by his work or workmen and make good damage thus caused.
(c) Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel
safety.
(d) Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 220 VOLTS" or with appropriate
voltage in English and Arabic.
(e) Arrange for installation of temporary doors for room containing
electrical distribution equipment. Keep these doors locked except
when under direct supervision of an electrician.

17.1.34 QUALITY OF STAFF/PERSONNEL

(a) The electrical services installation shall be carried out in a professional

manner by experienced and qualified personnel.
(b) Electrical contractor shall be to the classifications required by DEWA
and shall carry a valid license.
(c) Prior to the commencement of works the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer of his intended site staffing levels.
(d) The Contractor shall appoint one graduate Electrical Engineer full time
with 5 years experience in similar works and qualified staff/personnel
for the supervision of the Electrical Installation Works.
(e) The name, qualifications and experience of the nominated engineers
shall be submitted to the engineer for approval within 15 days of the
receipt of the order to commence the works.

Page 173 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(f) An Electrical Foreman of 10 years experience in similar projects

should be full time available on site for direct follow up and
implementation of the electrical works.
(g) Qualified and Experienced Electricians shall be available on site to
carry out the works in accordance with the program.
(h) The Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide
information and documentation as may be necessary to establish the
validity of any individual persons proficiency and effect their removal
from site should they prove to be unsatisfactory.

17.1.35 PRODUCTS - LABELS/CIRCUIT LISTS/CABLE IDENTIFICATION

(a) For substations, switchgears, switchboards, motor control centers and

panel boards:
1. engraved lamacoid name plates, black with minimum 6 mm high
white lettering.

(b) For Distribution Boards and Circuit Breakers:

1. where individually enclosed or in substations, switchgears,
switchboards, motor control centers and panel boards without
doors: engraved lamacoid nameplates, black with 3 mm high white
lettering.
2. in panel boards with doors: directories mounted inside transparent
plastic covers in metal frames.

(c) Wiring Identification:

1. identify wiring with permanent indelible, wrap-around, identifying
markings, either numbered or colored heat shrinkable tube or
ferrules, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch
circuit wiring.
2. maintain phase sequence and color coding throughout.
3. color code to standards above as specified elsewhere.
4. use color-coded wires in communication cables, matched
throughout system.

(d) Conduit and Cable Identification:

1. color code conduits and metallic sheathed cables.
2. code with plastic tape or paint and points where conduit or cable
enters wall, ceiling or floor, at 15 m intervals.
3. colors to be 25 mm wide prime color and 20 mm wide auxiliary
color to standards above.
4. number code, per Circuit Schedule, all feeder and branch circuit
cables at both connection points and in manholes, handholes, pull-
boxes and junction boxes with fiber or non-ferrous metal tags,
fastened with non-ferrous wire.

(e) Device Plates:

1. or Device Plates of local toggle switches, toggle switch type motor
starters, pilot lights and the like, whose junction is not readily

Page 174 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

apparent: plates to be engraved with 3 mm high letters describing

equipment controlled or indicated.

(f) For Busbars:

1. phase identification letters shall be stamped into the metal of the
busbars of each phase of the main buses in each substation,
switchgear, switchboards, motor control center and panel
board in addition to color identification
2. Letters shall be visible without disassembling current carrying
supporting elements.

(g) For Doors:

1. where switchboard rooms, cable chambers, metal screened
spaces and the like contain electric power cables, bus bars or
equipment operating at voltages exceeding 600 V: enameled
sheet metal, red on white, reading "Danger - High Voltage".

(h) For Rooms:

1. to switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces
assigned to electrical equipment, and the like: enameled sheet
metal, red on white, reading "Electrical Equipment Room - No
Storage Permitted".
(i) Languages:
1. nameplates with directional, operational or warning labels shall be
in Arabic and English.

17.1.36 SAMPLES

(a) The term ‘samples’ includes natural materials, fabricated items,

equipment, devices, appliances, or parts thereof as specified and
other samples as may be required to determine whether kind, quality,
construction, workmanship, finish, color and other characteristics of
materials conform to requirements of the Contract Documents.
(b) Samples shall establish kind, quality and other required characteristics
of various parts of the work. Indicate details of construction,
dimensions, capacities, weights and electrical performance
characteristic of equipment or material.
(c) Samples and sample board should be prepared and identified by the
manufacturer and stamped/engraved with make, type, Cat No. and
size marking should be indelible and legible.

17.1.37 QUALITY OF MATERIALS

(a) Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for products

furnished under this Contract. However, such guarantees shall be in
addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities, which manufacturers
and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
(b) All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under
this Contract shall carry standard warranty against all defects in
materials and workmanship. Any faults due to defective or improper

Page 175 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

material, equipment, workmanship or Contractor's design which

develop shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of the
Contractor, including all other damage done to areas, materials and
other systems resulting from this failure.
(c) Guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient capacity to
meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as
indicated.
(d) Upon receipt of notice from the Engineer, of failure of any part of
system or equipment during the period of maintenance, the affected
parts shall be replaced.

17.1.38 EQUIPMENT DUTIES AND RATINGS

(a) Power ratings shown for the proposed equipment are in accordance
with the best information available to the Engineer and are to be
considered as minimum ratings. In the event equipment items
proposed by the Contractor should require motors with different power
rating than shown, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to furnish
circuit breaker, starting equipment, feeder and branch circuits,
conduits, and accessories etc. as required to comply with the electrical
code and prevent excessive voltage drop without added cost to the
Client.
(b) Where equipment to be furnished is installed in an existing enclosure
or adjacent to existing equipment, the Contractor shall field check the
dimensions of existing equipment, location of conduits, etc., and shall
familiarize himself with all existing conditions and difficulties to be
encountered in performing such work.
(c) Degree of protection for all electrical equipment, unless indicated
otherwise, shall be as follows:
1. IP 54, enclosure for indoor equipment
2. IP 55, enclosure for outdoor equipment
3. IP 65, for outdoor push buttons and switches
4. IP 67, push buttons in the dry well
5. IP 68, submersible equipment

(d) All external equipment shall be corrosion proof and of metallic

construction.

17.1.39 SEGREGATION OF SERVICES

(a) Electrical services shall be segregated as specified throughout the

installation to obviate the following;
1. electrical interference from one circuit to another
2. a fault on one circuit affecting another
3. unnecessary fire damage
4. difficulties in circuit identification
5. voltage limits for general safety
6. difficulties in removal and/or maintenance.

Page 176 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) All raceways shall be kept clear of other services except where
intentionally earthed or bonded. Generally, raceways shall be kept
150 mm away from and above hot water and 75 mm away from other
services.
(c) Unless specifically indicated otherwise, normal, emergency, low
voltage cables and wiring shall be segregated throughout the
installation generally in the following manner:
1. armored and sheathed cables: Where more than one tray has
been specified or is necessary to accommodate the number of
cables on a run, where practical, segregation shall be achieved by
dedicating each tray to either normal or emergency services.
Where normal and emergency cables have to run together in
trays, ducts or trenches, they shall be formed in two groups, one
normal and one emergency. Divider on cable trays shall be
provided. Power, control and signal cables shall be laid separate.
2. insulated conductors: Insulated conductor circuits shall, where
possible, be segregated throughout by enclosing in separate
conduits, trunking or trunking compartments.

(d) Fire Alarms:

1. fire alarm cables shall be segregated from other services
throughout and be either armored and sheathed cable, or
insulated conductors enclosed in conduit or trunking, as indicated
on the drawings.

(e) Telephone cables:

1. telephone cables shall be segregated from other services
throughout and enclosed in conduit or trunking, as indicated on the
drawings.

17.1.40 EXECUTION - POLARITY

(a) The polarity of all apparatus used for the Works specified shall be
arranged as follows when apparatus is viewed from the front:

1. for two pole apparatus the phase or “live” pole at the top (or left
hand side) and the '“neutral or earthed” pole at the bottom (or right
hand side). On plug and socket outlets.
2. the polarity shall conform to BS 196, BS 546, or BS 1363 as
appropriate.
3. for three or four pole apparatus the phases in order red, yellow,
blue and neutral reading from top to bottom or left to right in the
case of vertical and horizontal layouts respectively.

(b) All cables shall be so connected between main switchboards,

distribution boards, plant and accessories so that the correct
sequence of phase colors is preserved throughout the system.
(c) All cable cores shall be identified with phase colors. Where more than
one phase is incorporated on a common system in one room then the

Page 177 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

live cores shall be red, yellow, blue, as appropriate, and fittings and
switch accessories shall be permanently labeled and segregated in
accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.

17.1.41 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY OF THE INSTALLATION

(a) Procedure for the Survey

1. After completion of Installation and commissioning of the plant,
and when the plant is operating under normal operating conditions,
the Contractor shall carry out a complete Thermographic Survey
using Infra-Red Devices. This survey shall be part of
commissioning checks.
2. The Thermographic Survey shall be carried out on MCCs, Panels,
Distribution Boards, Cables, Motors, Pumps, Mixers, and all
electrical equipment, etc. as a minimum.
3. For MCCs a detailed survey shall be conducted for Busbars,
Busbar Joints, Incomer Cable terminations, Outgoing Motor
Terminations, Circuit Breakers, Contactors, Isolators, Thermal
Overload Relays, Fuses, etc.
4. For Motors, and associated driven equipment, survey shall be
conducted on bearings, windings, couplings, etc. as a minimum.
5. Electrical equipment under survey, shall be operating at more than
60 % of its rated capacity. Electrical Load shall be verified by using
clamp on meters, or the ammeters installed in the respective
panels.
6. While making outdoor measurements, adequate correction factors
shall be used for the prevalent wind speeds at the time of survey.
7. The Infra Red Scanners/Detectors used for the survey shall have
following features as a minimum.

i. Shall be approved Infrared Scanning device designed to

measure temperature or detect significant deviations from the
normal values.
ii. High Measurement Accuracy, + 2 Deg C. or better across the
full screen.
iii. Very Large Dynamic range.
iv. High Image stability.
v. On Board storage of full color thermal TIFF images along with
the temperature data.
vi. Thermal Image recording- 10 MB PCMCIA Card.
vii. On-Board Color LCD Display, with bargraph for temperature
display.
viii. Auto and Manual temperature range setting.
ix. Shall use long Wavelength (8 to 10 m) Infra-Red radiation.
x. Proven Track Record of use in industrial applications for
Thermographic surveys, in typical hot and humid climate in

Page 178 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Dubai region.
xi. Fully automated report generation- the scanning device shall
generate its own reports, which shall be attached with the main
reports.
xii. Facility for direct connection to a PC.

8. Provide services of a qualified and approved, independent testing

agency to perform the testing, in co-ordination with the Electrical
Contractor.
9. Provide Calibration reports of the testing device. Calibration
Records shall be submitted prior to testing.

(b) Report and Corrective Actions: -

1. A detailed report containing color Photographs and the

assessment of each section of the plant shall be submitted for
review of the Engineer. This report shall contain details such
as Measured Temperature, Average Expected Temperature,
deviation from expected value, emissivity values, probable
reasons for excessive temperatures, and recommendations for
corrective actions.
2. Each report shall contain two photographs, one normal
equipment photograph, and another Thermographic
Photograph, to make an assessment of location of the hot
spots.
3. If abnormalities such as Hot Spots are detected, which
represent Incorrect Installation, Termination, Overloading,
Operation, etc. the Contractor shall carry out modifications.
4. Another Thermographic Survey shall be conducted after
corrective actions by the contractor to demonstrate a defects
free Installation. The reports of this subsequent survey shall
include notations of deficiencies detected and remedial actions
taken.
5. All reports with the color photographs shall be handed over to
the Clients for their future use. Reports shall be submitted on a
floppy / CD along with hardcopies as per the contract
documentation requirements.

17.1.42 FIRE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(a) Establish from Architectural Drawings where fire and smoke barriers
exist, and make adequate provision of fire and smoke barriers in and
around trunking, conduits, cables, etc., where they pass through floors
and fire rated walls, and where protection systems are installed pack
space between wiring and sleeve full with Fire Retardant Material and
seal with caulking.
(b) The Contractor shall ensure that this work is carried out such that the
integrity of any such fire barrier is properly maintained where pierced
by electrical services.

Page 179 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) The contractor shall put the notice for electrical shock treatment in
details with sketches and instructions as per standard procedures.
The notice shall comply with the requirement of the DEWA in content
and format. However, this should include the following as a minimum:

ACT IMMEDIATELY
• safeguard yourself.
• switch off current or break electric circuit.
• use or stand on some dry non-conducting material to remove the
CASUALTY from cable or source of electricity.

• start artificial respiration and call for Medical Aid.

TREATMENT FOR ELECTRIC SHOCK: ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION

(KISS OF LIFE, MOUTH-TO-MOUTH METHOD)
• lay the casualty on back and if possible on a table.
• kneel or stand near to the casualty’s head.
• remove any obstruction from the mouth.
• support the nape of the neck and press top of the head so that it is
tilted backwards.
• open your mouth and take a deep breath, pinch the casualty’s
nostrils with your fingers. Seal your lips round his mouth and blow
into his lungs until the chest rises.
• remove your mouth and watch the chest falls.
• repeat and continue inflation at your natural rate of breathing.
Continue to give artificial respiration until natural breathing is
restored or until the medical aid arrives.
• when the casualty is breathing, place in recovery position, lying
and resting on the side. Remain with and watch casualty closely.

17.1.43 SAFETY INTERLOCKS

(a) A complete system of interlocks and safety devices shall be provided

as necessary for the safe and continuous operation of the plant in
order to provide for the following:

1. safety of personnel engaged on operation and maintenance of the

plant.
2. correct sequence of operation of the plant during start up and shut
down.
3. safety of the plant when operating under normal or emergency
conditions.

(b) Interlocks shall be preventive and not corrective.

(c) The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of interlocking
schemes for the approval of the Engineer.

Page 180 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(d) Locks for interlocking purposes shall be of the figure lock type.
(e) No spare or master key shall be provided, unless specified.
(f) Device items are to be arranged to ensure that there is no danger of
interchange with existing locks on other units.

17.1.44 SPARE PARTS

(a) General:
1. provide sufficient spare parts as follows. Submit to the Engineer a
list of all spare parts to be required for a further two years
operation from the date of issue of the Maintenance Certificate.
2. spare parts required include but not necessarily limited to those
listed below, provided specified in the Project Documentation or
where quantities for each item or equipment is recommended by
the manufacturer.
3. spare parts to be delivered to central stores.

(b) Main Low Voltage Boards:

1. two percent spare moulded case circuit breakers of all different

frame sizes, but in any case not less than 2 nos. circuit breaker of
each size.
2. five percent spare indicating lamps (minimum 50) for each
indicating lamp in the switchgear.
3. one set of tools required for switchgear maintenance.
4. provide complete spare parts as recommended by the
manufacturer for different sizes of ACB. Include in the
recommended list of spare parts.

(c) Switchboards, Motor Control Centers and Distribution Boards:

1. five percent (minimum 2 sets) spare combination magnetic motor

starters.
2. five percent (minimum 2 units) spare circuit breakers for each
rating of each MCCB.
3. five percent (minimum 2 units) spare HRC fuses for each rating.
4. five percent (minimum 2 units) spare of load break switch
(isolators) of each size.
5. five percent (minimum 2 units) spare of current operated ELCB of
each size.
6. five percent (minimum 2 units) spare of ammeter of each rating.
7. five percent (minimum 2 units) spare of voltmeter of each rating.
8. provide complete spare parts as recommended by the
manufacturer for different sizes of ACB. Include in the
recommended list of spare parts.
9. provide complete spare parts as recommended by the

Page 181 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

manufacturer for different sizes of VFD. Include in the

recommended list of spare parts.
(d) Disconnecting Switches:

1. five percent (minimum 2) spare switch of each size.

(e) Circuit Accessories:

1. plug fuses - furnish ten percent (minimum 2 sets)) of the number of

each size and type of fuses installed, but in any case not less than
six fuses of each sizes.
2. wall switches - provide five percent (minimum 5 units) of the
number of each size and type of wall switch installed.
3. socket outlets - provide five percent (minimum 5 units) of the
number of each size and type installed.
4. lamps - provide five percent (minimum 2 units) lamps of each size
and type for indicating panels and pilot lights installed for different
systems.
5. FCU – provide five percent (minimum 2 units) FCU with thermostat
of each size and type for air conditioning system installed for
different systems.

(f) Lighting Fixtures:

1. two percent (minimum 2 sets) of the total quantity of each type of

lighting fixture. This quantity shall not be less than one fixture of
each type.
2. additional diffusers for five percent (minimum 2) of the total
quantity of each type of lighting fixture provided with acrylic, plastic
or glass enclosures. Diffusers shall be identical to those of the
installed fixtures. This quantity shall not be less than two diffusers
of each type.
3. ten percent (minimum 10 units) spare lamps of each wattage of
different type.
4. five percent of the total quantity of control gear (ballast) of each
type and size but in no case less than 2 ballast of each size and
type.
5. five percent (minimum 2 units) spare of photocell.

(g) Lighting Distribution Board Spares

1. Contactors of each rating- 5 % of Total Quantity (Minimum 2 nos of
each rating)
2. Dimming Controllers- 10 % of total quantity of each type and rating
(Minimum 2 nos. of each rating)
3. PLC input Output Modules- 10 % of Total quantity of each type and
rating (Minimum one module of 16 Inputs/outputs).

(h) The tenderer shall submit with his offer detail prices of the spare parts
he is required to provide, as specified above, under the Contract
indicating the quantity and the unit rate of each item. The tenderer

Page 182 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

shall specify the quantity of spares based on the percent as indicated

above. The cost of these items is deemed to be included in the
contract price.

17.1.45 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

(a) General Requirements

1. Preparation for final acceptance shall include at least the following

activities.
i. Preparation of Final Account.
ii Handover of site to the Ministry.
iii Obtaining “No Objection” letter from the Ministry.
iv Issue of Provisional Acceptance Certificate.
v Issue of Final Acceptance Certificate.

(b) Prerequisites for Hand-Over

The Contractor shall complete the following:

1. Submit Final Account, complete with associated releases,

consents and supporting documents.
2. Submit final manufacturer certifications, guarantees, warranties
and similar documents.
3. Submit clearance certificates and approvals from government
authorities as necessary to connect the Works to the permanent
power supply.
4. Submit occupancy permits, operating certificates, final inspection
and test certificates and similar releases enabling full and
unrestricted use of the Works.
5. Submit “As Built” (record) drawings, final operation and
maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys and similar physical items.
6. Make final changeover of locks and deliver keys to the Engineer.
7. Complete start-up, testing of systems and training of the Ministry’s
operations and maintenance personnel.
a. Submit equipment operating data as well as all test reports and
test data required under the Contract.
8. Dismantle and remove temporary facilities and services from the
project site.
a. This includes utilities, construction tools, buildings and facilities,
mockups and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning.
10. Repair and restore exposed finishes which have been marred or
otherwise damaged.
11. Submit all spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment.
12. Submit an itemised list of all contract deviations and non-
conformances.

Page 183 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

a. Include a detailed plan to correct each deviation and non-

conformance.

Notify the Engineer that a part of the Works or Works is ready for the
Taking-Over inspection.

1. Include the itemised list of deviations and non-conformances in the

notification letter.

(c) Prerequisites for Final Inspection

Contractor shall complete the following:

1. Submit last outstanding list of deviations and non-conformances
complete with associated or corrected submittals.
• State that each item has been corrected or otherwise resolved
for acceptance.

2. Submit the Engineer’s and Contractor’s list of deficiencies from the

Handing-Over inspection.
• State how each item has been corrected or otherwise resolved
for acceptance.

3. Submit final meter readings for all utilities, a measured record of

stored fuel and chemicals and similar data as of the time of final
completion.
4. Submit complete listing of all consumable stores and spare parts
used by the Contractor to service the electro-mechanical works
throughout the maintenance period.
5. Complete submittal of record documents.

6. Notify the Engineer that a part of the Works or Works is ready for
the final inspection.
• Include the itemised list of deviations and non-conformances in
the notification letter.

(d) Project Closeout Procedures

1 Comply with specified and contractual procedures necessary for

issuance of the “Taking-Over Certificate” and “Taking Over
Certificates” for part of the Works.

2. When Contractor considers Work or part of the Works has reached

final completion, submit the following:
3. Certificate stating that:
i Contract Documents have been reviewed.
ii Work has been inspected.
iii Work is complete and meets the requirements of the Contract
Documents.

4. Provide all submittals required by governing authorities.

5. Submit a Final Statement of Accounts, giving total adjusted
Contract Sum, Previous Payments, and the Sum Remaining Due.

Page 184 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.1.46 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

(a) The Client reserves the right to videotape and audiotape the
instruction with no extra cost to Client.
(b) Size of the class shall not exceed 15 people.

(c) The Contractor shall develop individual training courses for each
system identified on the Contract Process and Instrumentation
Drawings (P&ID’s).
1. Separate training sessions shall be provided for operations,
maintenance and electrical/instrumentation personnel.
(d) The Contractor shall develop and submit the curriculum to the
Engineer for approval.
1. Establish curriculum level for high school graduates with trades
qualifications.
2. Perform a task and skills analysis, identifying the requirements for
proper operation, maintenance and repair of the system and of all
its components.
3. Perform a training analysis identifying:
i Tasks requiring training.
ii Logical order of presentation.
iii Objectives of each training segment.
iv Methods for measuring achievement of objectives for each
segment.
v Include tests with at least 15 questions on each outline topic.
(e) Prepare an instructor’s manual, including notes to the instructor, for
each training session.
1. The manual shall address:
i Session objectives.
ii Session outline.
iii Session application.
iv Instructor qualification and knowledge requirements.
v List of tools and supplies required for instruction.
vi. Include safety and standby equipment.
vii Student and course evaluation forms.
viii Audio/visual resources or reproductions.
ix. Session tests and a grading guide.
• References to the source of answers shall be provided in
the course material.
x. Additional notes such as references, review questions,
demonstration techniques, class exercises, coordination with
other sessions and achievement measurements.

(f) Instruction Times

1. Normal working hours.

2. Saturday through Wednesday except local holidays.

Page 185 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

3. Provide a 10 minute break after each hour of instruction.

(g) Minimum Curriculum Requirements
1. Theory of operation and control.
i Include both classroom and “hands on” training.
2. Use of the Operation and Maintenance Manual, including the
location of information.
3. System layout.
4. Wiring, instrumentation and controls.
5. Control sequence and logic.
6. Normal and emergency operating procedures.
7. Basic and advanced operation and maintenance.
8. Equipment/instrument adjustment and calibration.
9. Site walk-through, to locate and identify equipment.
10. Preventive maintenance.
11. Major maintenance.
12. Safety.
13. Trouble-shooting.
14. Use of special tools.
15. Operation and maintenance supplies.
16. Spare parts.

17.1.47 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

The Contractor in association with his subcontractor, supplier and

manufacturer of electrical items covered under this section shall include
all aspects of quality assurance and provide performance verification for a
continuous period of 90 days after completion of installation. Written
consent of Client and Engineer shall be obtained prior to starting of
performance verification test.

The performance verification shall demonstrate the reliability of

equipment/system without any failure of components or equipment during
this period. This performance verification test will be witnessed by the
Client and Engineer.

In the event of failure during this period, the demonstration shall be

extended for a further period of 90 days.

The performance period shall be applicable for individual items and

systems as a whole.

17.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

17.2.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section specifies the low voltage circuit breakers including air
circuit breaker (ACB), moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), miniature
circuit breaker (MCB) and earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) to be
used in motor control center panel, factory built assembly panel,

Page 186 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

distribution board etc. This shall be read in conjunction with other

related sections of the specification and contract drawings.

17.2.2 REFERENCES

(a) All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall
conform to the latest standards.

(b) The design, equipment and installation requirements shall comply with
the standards and recommendations laid down by the following:

1. EN 60898 - Specification for circuit breakers for over current

protection for household and similar
installations.
2. EN 60947 - Specification for low-voltage switchgear and
control gear, Part 2 - Circuit breakers.
3. Approved equal American Standards.

17.2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) All low voltage circuit breakers shall be housed in control boards,
which comply with the requirements of 17.21 and 17.20 and provided
with cable boxes complete with glands of suitable size for the
accommodation of the incoming and outgoing cables entering from
below.
(b) Circuit breakers of 600-amp rating and above shall be horizontally
isolated, horizontal draw-out pattern, air break type (ACB). The closing
and tripping mechanism shall be as detailed in the relevant clauses or
schedules. The circuit breaker closing mechanism shall be provided
with a handspring charging. Circuit breakers below 600 amps. shall be
of the moulded case pattern except where otherwise shown on the
drawing.
(c) Circuit breakers shall be designed and constructed such that
inspection maintenance and replacement of the main fixed and
moving contacts shall be easily possible on site. Manufacturer's
detailed instructions shall be incorporated in the maintenance
manuals. Breakers requiring their complete return to the
manufacturers for service will not be acceptable.
(d) All circuit breakers shall be provided with interlocks to ensure that: -

1. Circuit breaker cannot be plugged in or isolated when it is closed.

2. The circuit breaker cannot be closed until it is fully plugged in or
completely isolated.
3. The circuit breaker cannot be, closed in the service position
without completing the auxiliary circuits between the fixed and
moving positions.
4. Only one incoming supply can be energized at any one time where
more than one supply is available.
5. Any other interlocking shall be provided as necessary to ensure
the safe operation and maintenance of all electrical equipment
provided under the Contract.

Page 187 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.2.4 SUBMITTALS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.

17.2.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

(a) Only manufacturers operating under an accredited ISO 9000 Quality

System shall be considered.
(b) Manufacturers shall have a minimum 5 years manufacturing
experience with the type of equipment being proposed.
(c) Prior to the despatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, in sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives
to inspect and test the equipment or witness the test, if so desired.

1. All notification shall be made by written “Inspection Request” in

accordance with Section 17.1.

i. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineers office, but the

original must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.

2. Minimum notification time shall be as follows:

i. 48 hours within Dubai city and surrounding areas.

ii. 72 hours for other areas within UAE.
iii. 2 weeks outside UAE.

17.2.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.

17.2.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1.

(c) Equipment and materials shall be delivered, handled and stored

according to the recommendation of the manufacturer along with the
following provision.

Page 188 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be

performed in a manner to avoid product damage.
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting purposes. Steel
chains, ropes, clamps or cables shall not be allowed for lifting
purposes. Steel chains or ropes may be used for securing
equipment during transport or storage provided protective padding
or timber block is utilized.
3. Do not store directly on ground. Provide adequate timber blocking
for sufficient support.
4. Cover as required and as directed by the Engineer.
5. Visually inspect all equipment on delivery and report any damage
to the Engineer.

(d) Any equipment damaged upon delivery, storage or handling,

installation shall be marked and set aside.
(e) Proposals for repair of any damaged equipment shall be submitted in
writing to the Engineer for approval.
(e) No repairs to damaged equipment shall be attempted without the
Engineer’s approval.
(f) Any damaged equipment deemed unsuitable for repair by the
Engineer shall be removed from site and replaced at the Contractor’s
expense.

17.2.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.2.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

(a) Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

(a) Furnish under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.13 PRODUCTS - AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(a) Air Circuit Breakers shall conform to EN 60947-2 and shall have
breaking capacity of 50 kA symmetrical for 3 seconds at 380 Volts.
Utilization category A as per EN 60947-2 (AC3 as per IEC 947-4-1).
(b) The Air Circuit Breakers (the conventional type and not moulded case
circuit breaker) shall be 500 V, 50 Hz, triple pole with neutral link for
incoming and outgoing ACB; or four poles for incoming (where earth
leakage protection is specified on both incomers) and bus tie ACB as
shown on the Drawings. They shall be air break, trip free, draw-out
type with mechanical and electrical ON/OFF indicators.

(c) Where air circuit breakers are to be electrically operated by automatic

motor wound spring mechanism, a standby manual-operating handle
shall be provided for operating the circuit breaker in case of power or

Page 189 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

motor failure.

(d) The air circuit breaker shall be provided with over current, short circuit
and earth fault protection having the following characteristics:

1. adjustable long time delay current setting (50 % - 200 %) with

varied tripping time
2. adjustable short time delay current setting (200 % - 800 %) with
variable tripping time.
3. instantaneous tripping for heavier over current adjustable from
400 % - 1600 % of base current.
4. adjustable earth fault trip current setting (20 % - 80 %) with
variable tripping time.

(e) The circuit breaker shall have three position on the draw-out
mechanism, namely service position where all main and auxiliary
contacts are made, test position where main contacts are open but
auxiliary contacts are closed and isolated position where all contacts
are open. An indicator shall clearly show these positions and
provisions shall be made for locking the breakers in any position.
ON/OFF indicator shall be provided.

(f) Mechanical Interlocks shall be provided to prevent withdrawing or

inserting of the breaker when it is ‘ON’. Any attempt to do so shall trip
the breaker automatically.

(g) The withdrawable part of the circuit breaker shall be effectively

connected to earth through scraping contacts that shall make before
and break after the main and auxiliary contacts.

(h) The moving contacts comprising the main and arcing contacts shall be
of the spring loaded, self-aligning type. The arc contacts shall be
arranged to make before and break after the main contacts.

(i) Each ACB shall be included but not limited with following components
and accessories:
1. Auxiliary Contacts
2. Arc Chutes
3. Folding Extension Rail
4. Charging Handle
5. Open and Close Push-buttons
6. Over Current Trip Indicator
7. Key lock on Trip Button
8. Spring charge motor when required
9. Spring Charge Condition Indicator
10. Breaker Position Indicator
11. Making Current Release
12. Automatic Shutters for the B/B Terminal
13. Carriage for every size of ACB exceeding 25 KG in Weight
14. Operation Counter

Page 190 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

15. Shunt trip mechanism.

(j) The Main Incoming Circuit Breakers shall be provided with cable
terminal boxes to suit the incoming cables from the transformer/source
supply.

(k) Circuit breakers shall be tropicalized to operate continuously in an

ambient temperature of 55 °C and high relative humidity.

(l) Type test certificate for each size of circuit breakers and MCCB from
an internationally recognised testing authority acceptable to the
Engineer shall be provided.

17.2.14 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(a) MCCB’s shall be of the type, four pole for incoming from DEWA with
DG set and triple pole with neutral link for incoming and triple pole for
outgoing operation or as indicated. Utilization category A as per EN
60947-2 (AC3 as per IEC 947-4-1).
(b) MCCB Shall have a combination of thermal and magnetic tripping
giving an inverse time delay protection against sustained overloads
and instantaneous tripping under heavy overloads and short circuits.
Unless otherwise stated in the particular specification or drawings,
MCCB shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 25 kA.
(c) Tripping due to overload or short circuits shall be clearly indicated by
the handle assuming a position mid-way between the manual ON and
OFF position.
(d) Breakers shall have a quick make, quick break over-center switching
mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that
contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal
current.
(e) Latch surfaces shall be polished.
(f) Poles shall be constructed to open, close and trip simultaneously.
(g) Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible.
(h) Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case to IEC No.
157 - 1A, suitable for installation inside switchboards.
(i) Non-interchangeable trip breakers shall have the trip unit sealed.
(j) Breakers with earth leakage relay protection shall be provided with
shunt trips.
(k) Frame sizes shall be as per manufacturer’s standard size and as
approved by the Engineer.
(l) Each MCCB shall be complete with 2 N/O and 2 N/C spare auxiliary
contacts (10A, 240v rating) in addition to those required for the
contract
(m) Shunt trip mechanism when required for emergency or manual
opening operation

17.2.15 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(a) These shall be suitable for the type of load they feed. MCBs shall

Page 191 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

comply with EN 60898, Type C of EN 60898, unless otherwise shown

on the drawing.
(b) These shall be suitable for the load they feed, and shall have short
circuit rating of 6 to 10 kA, unless shown otherwise on the Project
Drawing.
(c) They shall be fault rated so that fuse backup protection is not required.
(d) They shall include the following minimum features:

1. magnetic and thermal trip elements.

2. trip-free mechanisms.
3. locking of facilities with detachable proprietary brackets and clearly
marked ratings.

17.2.16 MCB/ELCB

(a) Combined MCB/ELCB units shall be provided for final circuits

supplying socket outlets, circuits running outdoor, water heaters and
water pumps.
(b) The units shall have trip sensitivity of 30 mA or as indicated.

17.2.17 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ELCB)

(a) Current operated earth leakage circuit breakers shall provide accident
protection by interrupting dangerous contact with voltage which may
be present in faulty electrical equipment as a result of frame faults,
insufficient insulation or misuse.
(b) The ELCB shall also provide a high degree of protection against earth
leakage, fires and electric shock and can withstand at least 9 kA or as
indicated in the Project drawings. The breakers shall generally
comply with BS 4293, 1983 and the recommended specification CEE
227 of the IEC on Rules for the approval of electrical equipment.
(c) The breaker shall consist of a core balance transformer, a tripping coil
with contact assembly, main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, a test
button and a trip free mechanism all enclosed in a robust body of all
insulated material.
(d) Degree of Protection against earth leakage throughout the electrical
installation shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise
indicated, ELCB shall have 30 mA trip settings.
(e) The breaker protecting external lighting and power outlet circuits shall
be mounted inside the panel board enclosure.

17.2.18 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing and analysis under this section - General Equipment
Provisions.
(b) All circuit breakers shall be subject to the following witness tests to EN
60947 or other approved equivalent standard for voltages up to and
including 1000 Volts:

1. Routine tests including H.V. pressure test, Milli-volt drop tests and

Page 192 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

mechanical tests.
2. Operation of D.C. closing coil and satisfactory closing of the circuit
breaker with the voltage on the coil between 85 per cent of it’s
rated voltage and 110 per cent of it’s rated voltage.
3. Satisfactory shunt opening release of the circuit breaker with the
trip coil energized to between 50 per cent and 110 per cent of its
rated voltage.
4. Interchangeability of identically equipped withdrawable circuit
breakers and checking of all mechanical and electrical interlocks.
5. Type Test Certificates giving records of performance for identical
circuit breakers shall be made available.

17.2.19 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.2.20 PREPARATION

(a) In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

17.2.21 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Install work in accordance with regulatory requirements.

17.2.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.23 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.24 DEMONSTRATION

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.25 TRAINING

(a) Provide training to Client staff under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.2.26 MAINTENANCE

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.3 FUSE SWITCHES

17.3.1 SUMMARY

Page 193 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(a) This section specifies the fuse switches to be used in motor control
center panel, factory built assembly panel, distribution board etc. This
shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings.

17.3.2 REFERENCES

(a) All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall
conform to the latest standards.

(b) The design, equipment and installation requirements shall comply with
the standards and recommendations laid down by the following:

1. BS 88/BS EN 60269 – Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and

including 1000 V ac and 1500 V dc.

2. BS EN 60947-3 – Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors

and fuse-combination units.

17.3.3 SUBMITTALS

(a) Submit under provisions of this section.

(b) Submit under provisions of section 17.1.
(c) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.

17.3.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.3.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

(a) Only manufacturers operating under an accredited ISO 9000 Quality

System shall be considered.

(b) Manufacturers shall have a minimum 5 years manufacturing

experience with the type of equipment being proposed.

(c) Prior to the despatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, in sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives
to inspect and test the equipment or witness the test, if so desired.

1. Notification shall be made by written “Inspection Request” in

accordance with Section 17.1.
i. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineers office, but the
original must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
2. minimum notification time shall be as follows:

Page 194 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

i. 48 hours within Dubai city and surrounding areas

ii. 72 hours for other areas within UAE
iii. 1 week outside Dubai.

17.3.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.

17.3.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
this section.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under this section.
(c) Equipment and materials shall be delivered, handled and stored
according to the recommendation of the manufacturer along with the
following provision.

1. transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be

performed in a manner to avoid product damage.
2. only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting purposes. Steel chains,
ropes, clamps or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes.
Steel chains or ropes may be used for securing equipment during
transport or storage provided protective padding or timber block is
utilized.
3. do not store directly on ground. Provide adequate timber blocking
for sufficient support
4. cover as required and as directed by the Engineer.
5. visually inspect all equipment on delivery and report any damage
to the Engineer.

i. Any equipment damaged upon delivery, storage or handling,

installation shall be marked and set aside.
ii. Proposals for repair of any damaged equipment shall be
submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval.
iii. No repairs to damaged equipment shall be attempted without the
Engineer’s approval.
iv. Any damaged equipment deemed unsuitable for repair by the
Engineer shall be removed from site and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.

17.3.9 PRODUCTS - FUSE SWITCHES

(a) Fuse switches shall comprise flush mounted heavy duty composite air
break switches and fuse units complying with BS EN 60947– 3 and
fitted with fuses to BS 88/BS EN 60269 and shall be rated and
equipped as per the requirement of the equipment to protect.
Switches shall be suitable for AC23–B utilization category conforming
to IEC 947– 4–1. Composite units shall be contained within an

Page 195 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

enclosure of metal and shall be fitted with an earthing terminal or

equivalent to enable the enclosures to be earthed irrespective of any
means of connection such as is provided for attaching armoring or
other metallic covering of the cable supplying the composite unit.
(b) The enclosure shall be so constructed that the cover cannot be
opened until the switch is fully opened and the construction shall be
such that when the cover is opened a competent examiner can
override the interlock and operate the switch. After such operation the
cover shall be prevented from closing with the switch position indicator
in a false position.
(c) Switches shall be provided with mechanical ON/OFF indicators and
operating handles.
(d) Means shall be provided for locking the switch in the OFF position
only.

17.3.10 FUSES

(a) Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, IEC 269, BS 88 or other

approved standard, Class as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and to meet Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
(DEWA) regulations.
(b) Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-
phase voltage.
(c) The fuse shall either include a suitable fuse carrier or it shall be
capable of isolation. If the fuse carrier is included it shall be such that
when it is being withdrawn or completely withdrawn, the operator is
fully protected from accidental contact with any live metal of its fuse
link fuse contacts and fixed contacts.
(d) Fuse/links shall be fixed inside cubicles with sufficient spacing to
facilitate easy fuse/link withdrawal.
(e) If the fuse is capable of isolation it shall be so interlocked with the
switch that isolation is complete before the fuse enclosure can be
opened further. The switch shall be prevented from closing while the
fuse-cover is open.
(f) Motor Load Feeder Switches and Branch Circuits:
Conforming to one of the following as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and to meet Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
(DEWA) regulations:

1. NEMA Class M
2. NEMA Class J time delay
3. IEC 269
4. BS 88
(g) Small Power Branch and Control Circuits:
Conforming to one of the following as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and to meet Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
(DEWA) regulations:

1. NEMA Class G
2. IEC 269
3. BS 88

Page 196 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.3.11 FUSE LINKS

(a) All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge pattern to BS 88/BS EN 60269.

(b) Fuse holders and fittings shall be made of moulded plastic insulating
material of an approved make. Ceramic materials will not be
accepted. Fuse fittings shall be fully shrouded and it shall be possible
to change the fuses without danger of contact with live metal.
(c) When incorporated in distribution boards fuse fittings shall have basic
sizes of 16, 32, 63, 100 and 200A and the fuse holders shall be able
to accept fuse links of that rating on any BS rating down to the next
basic size.
(d) Fuses and links in the same circuit shall be mounted above each other
in separate rows and shall not alternate in the same row.
(e) Fuse holders and links shall be colored black, and link holders and
carriers white.

17.3.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing and analysis under Section 17.1.

17.3.13 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.3.14 PREPARATION

(a) In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

17.3.15 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Install Work in accordance with regulatory requirements.

17.3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.3.17 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.3.18 DEMONSTRATION

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.3.19 TRAINING

(a) Provide training to Client staff under provisions of Section 17.1.

Page 197 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.3.20 MAINTENANCE

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4 MOTOR STARTERS

17.4.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for motor starters in general and as
required to be supplied for the project.
(b) The motor starters as required, are to form part of a Motor Control
Center and as such circuit connections, protection devices and the like
shall be provided in the scope of starters as specified in this Section.

17.4.2 REFERENCES

(a) BS EN 60439 -
Specifications for low voltage
switchgear and control gear
assemblies.
(b) BS EN 60947-4 - Contactors and motor starters.
(c) Approved equal American Standards.

17.4.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) The starter as required are to form part of a motor control center
(MCC) and as such circuit connections, protection devices and the like
shall comply with BS EN 60439. The starters shall comply with BS EN
60947-4. The cubicles shall be easily accessible for maintenance
purposes and shall be damp-proof and dust-proof.

(b) The starter manufacturer shall coordinate with the motor control center
manufacturer to ensure provision of adequate space, ventilation
requirements etc. for trouble free operation of the starters.

17.4.4 SUBMITTALS
(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:
1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the

Page 198 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Engineer’s comments.
(c) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.

17.4.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4.7 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.

17.4.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing of Motor Starters under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.

17.4.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1 – Provisions
for Electrical Requirements.

17.4.11 PRODUCTS - MOTOR STARTER

(a) General

The motor starter shall be of rating to carry the full load current of its
rated duty at its most severe load conditions. All starters shall be
capable of at least 20 starts per hour at 100 percent full load torque.

(b) Motors and Starters

1. motors up to 2.2kW (3 HP) shall use the following starting method:-

i. DOL starting having a starting current not greater than 6 times

full load current (FLC).

2. motors bigger than 2.2kW (3 HP) and up to 37kW (50 HP) shall
have their starting current restricted to 4 times FLC and shall use

Page 199 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

one of the following starting methods or as shown in the drawing: -

i. Solid state reduced voltage starting (SOFT) having torque

characteristic suitable for the application.
ii. Rotor resistance starting.
iii. Auto-transformer staring.
iv. Star-delta starting.
3. motors bigger than 37kW (50 HP) shall have their starting current
restricted to 2.5 times FLC and shall use one of the following
starting methods as shown in the drawing: -

i. Solid state reduced voltage starting (SOFT) having torque

characteristic suitable for the application.
ii. Rotor resistance starting.
iii. Auto-transformer staring.
iv. Star-delta starting.

17.4.12 STARTER TYPES

(a) Starters shall be selected from one of the following types: -

1. Direct On Line (DOL)

i. TP contactor for switching direct-on-line (DOL) in accordance

with BS EN 60947-4 and fitted with auxiliary contacts.

2. Auto Transformer

i. For autotransformer starting, magnetically operated starting

accelerating and running contactors shall be provided
operating under solid state or electronic timing devices. The
autotransformer shall limit the starting current to 4 times full
load current (FLC) with 60 percent, 70 percent and 80 percent
tapping.

3. Soft Reduced Voltage Starting ('soft' starting)

i. For Solid State Reduced voltage starting a micro-processor

based electronic logic module shall be provided with 3
pole, 6 thyristor (SCR) full wave power section together
with the following features: -

1. Turn on current adjustment - 100 to 400% FLC.

2. Pulse start adjustment - 0 to 2 seconds.
3. Adjustable current ramp time - 2 to 30 seconds.
4. Starting current limit adjustment - 100 to 400% FLC
5. Over temperature protection.
6. Fan assisted cooling above 11 kW.

ii. The starter shall be provided with two sets of contactors,

one of which shall bypass the soft starter when the
motor has reached full speed. Sufficient logic and
relays shall be provided to achieve this without high

Page 200 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

transients and to prevent contactor flutter.

iii. A membrane key pad and display shall be provided to

adjust all the above parameters, and also capable of
inputting trip states to check the operation of the contactors
and soft starter.

4. Star-Delta Starting (YD)

i. Star-delta starters shall be provided with contactors as for DOL

starters, arranged in such a manner to ensure the star
contactor opens before the delta contactor closes.
ii. The period of running in star and the transition time shall be
controlled by adjustable solid-state type timers.
iii. For closed transition type star-delta starters, further
requirements shall be wire wound porcelain core resister
banks of sufficient thermal rating to allow three (3) consecutive
starts of 30 seconds starting period followed by a 15 minutes
rest and another 30 seconds starting period. Resistance value
shall be chosen to give high starting current with low transient.
Starter cubicles incorporating resistor banks shall be well
ventilated with vermin proof and dust ventilation louvers.

(b) Accessories:

1. contactors shall be selected for AC3 duty. The duty current shall
be at the mid point of the operating range of the contactor.
2. motors will be required to operate in a predetermined sequence
and starters shall include suitably rated auxiliary contacts/relays.
3. components of the starter shall have been type tested and ASTA
certified to achieve Type 2 co-ordination in accordance with IEC
947.
4. volt-free changeover contacts shall be wired down to outgoing
terminals for remote indication of the plant status information
specified. As a minimum requirement running/stopped,
healthy/fault indications shall be provided for each motor drive.
5. analogue signals specified shall be wired down to outgoing
terminals. Analogue signals for such indication shall be 4-20mA,
fully floating, and capable of driving into a load of up to 500 ohm.
6. outgoing terminals for remote indication and control shall be
continued to telemetry cubicle if provided, or otherwise they shall
be located in the common control cubicle.

17.4.13 STARTER COMPONENTS

(a) Each starter shall be housed in a separate compartment, which shall

contain the following: -

1. one triple pole MCCB externally operated and interlocked with the
cubicle door. There shall be provision for padlocking in the OFF
position.
2. one Starter as below.

Page 201 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

3. one Motor Protection Relay for protection against:

i. overcurrent
ii. unbalance
iii. single phase
iv. earth fault
(b) For motors 11 kW and above, the relay shall be electronic and provide
display indication of:
1. relay settings
2. percent of FLC that the motor is taking
3. continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
4. thermal capacity used during start of motor
5. if tripped, how much time before restart to take place
6. stall or short circuit trip
7. earth fault trip
8. starting
provide overload relay having current/time characteristic at its
setting (hot/cold for the thermal overload) to match with the motor
manufacturers thermal stability time/current characteristic curve.
Consideration must be given to the required method of starting
(DOL, auto transformer etc.).

(c) 1 No. communications capable, Intelligent Motor Protection

Relay/Motor Manager as specified in this section.
(d) Set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary
indication and control sequence.
(e) Set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote controls
and indications.
(f) Set of terminals for remote lock-off stop push buttons.
(g) One 220/110V 50 Hz double wound single-phase transformer with
earth screen and of suitable capacity to supply all control circuit and
pilot lamp requirements. The control and pilot lamp circuits shall be
fuse protected on both poles. The transformer secondary side shall
be center tapped and earthed via a removable bolted earth link. The
transformer primary side shall be supplied through a suitably rated
fuse and neutral link via auxiliary contacts of the main fuse switch with
a suitably wired switch marked "TEST"/"NORMAL" for the purpose of
conducting live functional tests to the control circuit whilst the main
fuse switch is isolated. The switch shall be mounted to prevent the
closing of the cubicle door with the switch in the "TEST" position.
(h) One anti-condensation heater (off when starter contactor is closed).
The heater shall be separately fused, controlled by a hygrostat type
switch with reasonable setting range (50-100 percent) which operates
when the preset value of %RH is exceeded above dew point.
(i) Set of power factor correction capacitors with separate fuses and
contactors for all drives above 11 kW, to give a power factor of not
less than 0.93.
(j) Provide set of relays/auxiliary contactors, terminals, etc. required to
provide protection for each submersible pump against leaking of liquid
into sealing/stator housing.

Page 202 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(k) Following equipment shall be mounted on the door of each starter

unit: -
1. One ammeter with suppressed scale to read running and starting
current.
2. “RUNNING” (Red) and “AVAILABLE” (green) indicating lamps.
3. One pilot lamp to indicate "MOTOR FAILED" (Amber).
4. One. "HAND/OFF/AUTO" selector switch.
5. Set "START/STOP" push buttons.
6. Lamp test push button.
7. One externally operated overload reset push button.
8. One running hour counter reading to 9999 hours.
9. One 6 digit Operations Counter to count the number of starts.
10. One duty/standby label.
11. Provide individual indication lamp for each separate motor fault
condition.

17.4.14 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS

(a) All the starters and main Incomer breakers shall have electronic solid
state, multifunction, microprocessor based relays with communication
capabilities. These relays shall perform all the functions such as
Status Indications, Motor parameter monitoring, allow for local and
remote control, protective functions, and shall provide diagnostic
information about the motor and the relay itself. All Intelligent MCCs
and LV switchboards shall be time synchronized with the SCADA.
SCADA will be the master clock.

The details of the functions to be carried out by the motor protection

relay/ motor manager are as follows.

1. Signals /Information to be provided for each motor starter

i. Indications to be provided at the Starter Module (on front door)
and at the Operator Station through SCADA.
• Running,
• Stopped,
• Tripped,
• Auto /Manual Mode selected.
• Emergency Stop P.B. activated.
• “Test” Position of Main Switch.
• Phase currents indication on the front door of the starter
module.

b. Commands from the operator station and from the Starter Module.
1. .Start / Stop Command.
2. Fault Reset at Starter module, at the System Engineer’s station
and Electrical Engineer’s station.
c. Monitoring Functions: -
Following parameters shall be available for monitoring at the Operator
workstation and Electrical Engineer’s station.

1. Phase Currents,

Page 203 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2. Average Current,
3. Full Load Current.
4. Current Imbalance percent.
5. Percent Thermal capacity utilized / available.
6. Power Factor,
7. Voltage,
8. Running Hours.
9. Trends, Graphic Displays for monitored parameters

d. Protective Functions:-

Following Protective functions with programmable trip level, warning

level and time delay shall be available at the System Engineer’s
Workstation and at the dedicated Electrical Engineer’s Station.
1. Thermal Overload- Trip Class adjustment.
2. Under load,
3. Jam protection,
4. Stall Protection,
5. Current Imbalance,
6. Phase Loss,
7. Zero Sequence ground fault,
8. Start Limitation,
9. Under voltage Protection,
10. PTC Thermister input,

e. Diagnostic Information: -

Following information shall be provided at the Electrical Engineer’s

station and Operator workstation.
1. Motor Controller Real Time status,
2. Warning Status,
3. Time to Reset,
4. Trip Status,
5. Time to overload trip,
6. History and Cause of previous trips (minimum 5)
7. Communication failure

17.4.15 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

(a) Provide power factor correction capacitors to improve the overall

power factor to between 0.93 logging to unity. Provide reactors in
series, as per the DEWA requirement.

(b) Where there is a large number of smaller drives, up to and including

11 kW, a single power connection unit shall be used to improve the
power factor, as indicated on the Drawings. A minimum of four
connection stages shall be provided for common MCC capacitors.
(c) For motors above 11 kW, individual power factor correction equipment
shall be provided to improve the power factor to between 0.93 lagging

Page 204 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

and unity when the drive is operating at its duty point.

(d) Each motor shall be provided with a three-phase capacitor. Capacitors
shall be mounted in the motor control center either within the starter
compartment or in an adjacent and fully interlocked compartment
(e) Capacitors shall be controlled by a contactor arranged to connect the
capacitor only when the starting sequence is complete and when the
motor current has attained its normal value.
(f) The size of capacitor shall be selected to correct the power factor of
the motor at its duty point. Should soft starter or speed controller be
used, capacitor shall meet harmonic limitation requirements.
(g) Provide power factor correction capacitors as specified in Section
17.17.

17.4.16 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.4.17 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

17.4.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4.19 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4.20 DEMONSTRATION

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4.21 TRAINING

(a) Provide training to Employer’s staff under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.4.22 MAINTENANCE

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5 SOFT STARTERS

17.5.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section provides specification requirements for the “Soft Starter”
for a standard three-phase squirrel cage motor.
(b) The Starter and associated control equipment including the power
factor correction items shall be housed within a cubicle forming a part

Page 205 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

of the relevant motor control center. The cubicle shall be considered

as a starter and generally comply with the requirements for motor
starter cubicles.
(c) The load characteristic shall be considered to be “pump type” and
suitable for variable torque operation.

17.5.2 REFERENCES

(a) BS EN 60439 - Low voltage switchgear and

control gear assemblies.
(b) BS EN 60947-4 - Contactors and motor
starters.
(c) BS EN 60 529 - Degree of protection for the
soft starter modules.
(d) IEC 68-2-6 NFC 20706 and BV1 - Vibration resistance.
(e) IEC 1000 -4-2 level 3 - Resistance to electro static
discharge.
(f) IEC 1000-4-3 level 3 - Immunity to radio electric
interference.
(g) IEC 1000-4-4 level 4 - Immunity to rapid electrical
transients.
(h) IEC 947-4-2 - EMS conducted radiated
emissions.
17.5.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) The starter as required are to form part of a motor control center
(MCC) and as such circuit connections, protection devices and the like
shall comply with BS EN 60439. The starters shall comply with BS EN
60947-4. The cubicles shall be easily accessible for maintenance
purposes and shall be damp-proof and dust-proof.
(b) The starter manufacture shall coordinate with the motor control center
manufacturer to ensure provision of adequate space, ventilation
requirements etc. for trouble free operation of the starters.

17.5.4 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the

Page 206 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Engineer’s comments.
(c) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.

17.5.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5.7 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.

17.5.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing of Motor Starters under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5.9 WARRANTY

(a) All components shall be warranted to be free from defects in

materials, design or workmanship for 24 months from the date of
taking-over of the works.
(b) Individual warranties by component manufacturer in lieu of single
source responsibility by the drive manufacturer shall not be
acceptable.
(c) Items, which fail during the warranty period, excluding expendable
items, shall be replaced without cost to the owner.
(d) Manufacturer’s guarantee and warranty certificates shall be provided
prior to equipment startup.

17.5.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.

17.5.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1.

17.5.12 PRODUCTS - ENCLOSURES

(a) The enclosed product in motor control center cubicle shall be

complete with controller equipment, motor protection circuit breaker
incorporating thermal and magnetic protection, contactor, control

Page 207 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

supply transformer and in separate compartment the power factor

correction items as per the drawing. The protection rating for the MCC
cubicle shall be as per the General Specification for MCC.
(b) The soft starters shall be mounted in an enclosure to be installed
inside MCC cubicle. Ventilation louvers with filters shall be provided
along with a suitable rating enclosure
(c) The enclosures shall be provided with a door mounted digital keypad
for facilitating fault annunciation, parameter adjustment, and
programming of the soft starter, without opening the enclosure door.
(d) Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a thermostat and
have OFF/ON control on the cubicle front door. The heater shall not
be in operation when the motor is functioning.

17.5.13 RATINGS

(a) Rated input system is 380 volts ± 10%, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz ± 5%.
(b) The starter for specified motor shall be rated to work in the shaded
ambient temperature of 50o C. having relative humidity of 95% (non-
condensing).
(c) The starter shall be rated for the continuous maximum rating of the
motor and not its running load.
(d) The soft starters shall be derated for operation at 500C ambient
temperatures. Soft starter shall be suitable for starting and stopping of
3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motor.
(e) Power factor correction capacitor shall be provided to keep the power
factor of the system within 0.93 lagging to unity over the entire
operating range.

17.5.14 DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS

(a) General

1. Solid-state, reduced voltage motor starters shall be closed

transition, shunt duty type with shorting contactor, for full speed
operation. When the motor and load reach full speed, the shorting
contactor by-passes the SCR power section. The solid-state
power section shall consist of six silicon controlled rectifiers (two
per phase connected back-to-back, in reverse parallel
configuration) to provide a soft start for the indicated pump motors.
2. At turn-on, the control ramps up to the current limit in set time and
maintain that current until the motor comes up to full speed. If a
problem exists and the motor fails to reach rated speed within a
predetermined period of time, the control will shutdown. The
starter shall provide a smooth, stepless acceleration and
deceleration of the load from start to full speed and from full speed
to stop.
3. The starter shall be equipped with metal oxide varistor type surge
suppressors across the SCR’s to protect against voltage transients
and resistor/capacitor scrubber networks to protect against false
firing of the SCR’s. Each SCR heat sink shall have a temperature
sensor that shall shut the starter down in the event of an over

Page 208 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

temperature condition. When a starter failure occurs, the actual

problem shall be indicated by an LED on the control panel front.
4. The starters shall be equipped with microprocessor controlled
motor protection relays to control, monitor and protect the motors.
The relay shall monitor three phase current and voltage and make
trip and alarm decisions based on pre-programmed motor current
and voltage conditions.
5. Control functions shall include start detection, starter transition,
incomplete sequence and number of starts per hour. The relay
shall monitor and display load current of each phase, percent of
full load current of each phase and running time. The relay shall
protect the motor against time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent, underload, phase unbalance, earth fault, phase loss
and phase reversal.
6. The manufacturer shall supply certified test results to confirm that
the controller has been tested to substantiate designs according to
applicable standards. The tests shall verify not only the
performance of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the
suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In
addition, the unit shall be factory tested in accordance with
applicable standards.
7. Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having
tested for noise immunity on both input and output power
connections.
8. The soft starter shall provide torque for perfect linear acceleration
without external feedback (via tachogenerator) independent of
motor load or type of application.
9. The soft starter shall be by-passed at the end of the starting cycle,
the soft starter shall be designed to provide thermal and other
motor protective functions during both the soft starting mode and
running mode on by-pass.

17.5.15 DISPLAY UNIT

(a) All the dialogue functions shall be accessible on the front panel of the
unit via:

1. digital key pad for operation and programming.

2. LED display.
3. terminal block with serial interphase.

17.5.16 ESSENTIAL FEATURES

(a) shall provide linear acceleration and declaration to protect both

equipment and personnel.
(b) shall provide control of the operating characteristics during starting
and stopping.
(c) shall limit starting torque to protect the driven mechanism.
(d) shall provide gradual starting of high inertia machines.
(e) thermal overload protection of both the motor and the starter, with

Page 209 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

microprocessor motor temperature monitoring.

(f) torque control system (TCS) shall incorporate torque feedback, torque
estimation and torque reference calculation and adopt the motor
torque profile for application.
(g) soft starter shall be of rigid construction and shall incorporate an
integral ventilation fan. The fan operation shall be controlled by the
soft starter through the thermo contact fixed on the SCR system.
(h) soft starter shall be factory set for the specified application and ready
to use. Configuration and display parameters shall also be possible to
be modified at site.

17.5.17 ADJUSTMENTS AND CONFIGURATION

(a) All dialogue functions, display units, remote functions, terminal blocks,
configuration switches shall be accessible on the front of the control
module without any exposure to control circuit boards and electrical
power devices during routine adjustments.
(b) The starter shall be preset to the following for normal operation,
unless specified otherwise:

1. torque acceleration ramp of 10 seconds.

2. current limitation to 200% of the motor full load current rating.
3. class 10 overload protection.

(c) Digital display unit shall indicate the following minimum conditions,

1. soft starter status - Ready, starting/stopping, run.

2. motor status - Current, Torque, Thermal Status, Power factor.
3. fault Status - Motor thermal overload, starter thermal overload,
over current, phase failure, phase inversion, supply failure, locked
rotor fault, maximum starting time exceeded, internal fault.

(d) Keypad shall provide the facility to configure the following operating
parameters:

1. current limitation on starting adjustable from 150% to 250% of

rated motor current.
2. adjustable soft start torque ramp time from 1 to 60 seconds.
3. adjustable soft stop torque ramp time from 1 to 60 seconds.
4. initial torque adjustable from 10% to 100% of nominal motor
torque.
5. torque limit adjustable from 10% to 200% of nominal motor torque.
6. maximum start time adjustable from 10 to 300 seconds.
7. selection of class 10 or 20 motor thermal overload protection.

(e) The following facilities shall be available through the keypad:

1. assignment of controller input and outputs.

2. reset of the motor thermal state.
4. return to factory settings.

Page 210 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(f) Output relays shall provide the following status indications.

1. contact for indication of fault or position of incoming breaker.

2. contact for the indication that the torque ramp is complete.
3. contacts to indicate that the shorting contactor has operated.

(g) Additional opto-isolated type input and outputs shall be available to

provide the following status indications:

1. logic output for indication of motor thermal overload pre-alarm.

2. analog output selectable for motor current, motor torque, thermal
state and power factor.

17.5.18 PROTECTIONS

(a) The soft starter shall be designed for TYPE 2 protection co-ordination.

(b) A microprocessor controlled digital thermal protection system shall be

included which continuously calculates the temperature rise of the
motor and the soft starter and provides:

1. overload pre-alarm, which indicates by relay contact that the motor

has exceeded its rated temperature, set at 110% of the rated
motor thermal capacity.
2. thermal fault condition, which stops the motor if the temperature
exceeds 120% of the motor thermal capability.
3. analog electronic circuit with a time constant adjustable to the
motor's thermal cooling time-constant ensuring the memorization
of the thermal state even after power supplies disconnection or
shorting out of the power semiconductors.

(c) The soft start shall provide phase loss, phase reversal, under load,
stall, and jam protection.

17.5.19 SHORTING CONTACTOR

(a) A microprocessor shall control the operation of the Shorting contactor.

(b) The Shorting contactor shall close, bypassing the thyristors after the
motor current is at least below 130% of the motor full load current, at
the completion of ramp and open on a stop command to allow a
deceleration ramp.
(c) Overload protection integral to the soft starter shall continue to protect
the motor when bypassing is utilized.

17.5.20 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

Page 211 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.5.21 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

17.5.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5.23 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5.24 DEMONSTRATION

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5.25 TRAINING

(a) Provide training to Employer’s staff under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.5.26 MAINTENANCE

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.6 ELECTRIC MOTORS

17.6.1 SUMMARY

(a) This Section outlines the electrical requirements for squirrel-cage

induction motors. Motors shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the
driven equipment as specified in this section, and specifically outlined
in the driven equipment specifications.

(b) The motors shall be completely fabricated, assembled, checked and

tested at the factory in accordance with specification requirement as
outlined in this Section.

17.6.2 REFERENCES

(a) BS 2048 - Specifications for dimensions of fractional

horse-power motors
(b) BS 4999 - General requirements for rotating electrical
machines.
(c) BS 5000 - Rotating electrical machines of particular types
or for particular applications.
(d) BS 5345 - Code of practice for the selection, installation
and maintenance of electrical apparatus for use
in potentially explosive atmospheres (other than
mining applications or explosives processing).
(e) IEEE 112
(f) NEMA M 61
(g) NEMA MG 1
(h) IEC70 / BS1650 - Specification for capacitors for connection to
power-frequency systems.

Page 212 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.6.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) The motors shall be supplied preferably by the manufacturer of the

driven equipment. Where motors form an integral part of the driven
machine and for equipment in hazardous locations, the manufacturer
of the driven equipment shall supply the motors.
(b) The type and rating of the motors shall be confirmed to be suitable by
the manufacturer of the driven equipment.
(c) Motors shall operate continuously and satisfactorily in ambient
temperatures from 0 degrees Celsius to plus 55 degrees Celsius at a
maximum elevation of 1000 meters above sea level without exceeding
nameplate horsepower rating.
(d) Due to larger power cable lengths feeding motors, large cable sizes
will be required for all motors. Motors shall have terminal boxes
suitable to accommodate these cables. Alternatively higher size
terminal boxes shall be provided. The cost of such higher size
terminal boxes or other suitable approved method shall be deemed to
be included in the Contractor’s rate for such motors or related
equipment.

17.6.4 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Speed – Torque characteristics matched with load.
8. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
9. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments
(c) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
(d) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
(e) Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section
17.1.

Page 213 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.6.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.6.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.6.7 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.

17.6.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.

17.6.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.

(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1.

17.6.10 PRODUCTS - LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS

(a) Voltage rating

1. Motors 0.37kW (0.50 HP) and larger shall be 400 volts, 3 phase,
50 Hertz unless otherwise indicated.
2. Motors smaller than 0.37kW (0.50 HP) shall be 220 volts, 1 phase,
50 Hertz unless otherwise indicated.

(b) Voltage and frequency variation

Motors shall be capable of withstanding voltage and frequency

variations as follows
- Voltage - + 10% of rated voltage

- Frequency - + 3% of rated frequency

(c) Motor starting – Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating

the driven equipment to rated speed with 80% of Rated Voltage at its
terminals.

Motor rating

1. Torque and slip characteristics shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer of the driven equipment and as specified. Motor
manufacturer shall confirm motor capability to the specifications.

Page 214 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(d) Power factor rating

1. Motors with the following minimum power factors, at full load, shall
be provided:

i.0.82 for motors up to 11kW (15 HP).

ii.0.83 for motors from 11kW (15 HP) through 37kW (50 HP).
iii.0.85 for motors from 37kW (50 HP) through 75kW (100 HP).
iv. 0.87 for motors from 75kW (100 HP) through 150 kW (200
HP).
v. 0.88 for motors from 150kW (200 HP) through 300kW (400
HP)
vi. 0.89 for motors larger than 300kW (400 HP)

(e) Motor Efficiency

1. Motors with the following minimum efficiencies, at full load, shall

be provided:

i. 84 percent for motors through 4kW (5 HP).

ii. 87.5 percent for motors from 4kW (5HP) through 11kW (15 HP).
iii. 91 percent for motors from 11kW (15 HP) through 30kW (40
HP).
iv. 93 percent for motors from 30kW (40 HP) through 93kW (125
HP)
v. 94.1 percent for motors larger than 93kW (125 HP)

(f) Service factor

1. Open and TEFC motors of rating 187kW (250 HP) and less and
vertical motors shall be provided with service factor 1.14. All
horizontal motors larger than 187kW (250 HP) shall have a 1.0
service factor.

(g) KVA/HP code

1. The maximum locked rotor KVA/HP code letter for motors smaller
than 11kW (15 HP) shall not exceed the requirements for NEMA
Design B motors as indicated in NEMA MG 1-1.15.1.2. The
maximum locked rotor KVA/HP code letter shall be Code G for
motors 11kW (15 HP) through 187kW (250 HP) unless otherwise
indicated. The maximum locked rotor KVA/HP code letter shall be
Code F for motors 224kW (300 HP) and higher as indicated in
NEMA MG 1-10.37.2.

(h) Insulation

1. Motors shall have NEMA MG1-1.65 Class F insulation. The

maximum temperature rise by resistance for windings and for each
of the various parts of the motor shall not exceed the values of the
NEMA MG1-1.65 Class B insulation system as indicated in NEMA
MG 1-12.42.This is in addition to any adjustments necessary for
high ambient temperatures at site.

Page 215 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(i) Windings

1. Motors shall have stator windings copper only.

(j) Anti-condensation heater

1. The motors shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters of a size
to maintain the temperature of the windings 5 degree Celsius
above ambient. Each heater shall be provided with a switch and
automatic control to disconnect it when its motor is in operation. A
condensate drain hole shall be provided on all non-explosion proof
enclosed motors, open motors shall be self-draining.

(k) Bearings

1. The motors shall run in ball and/or roller bearings and the weight
of the motor shall be carried by thrust bearings incorporated in the
motor body.
2. Bearings shall be grease lubricated using hydraulic type nipples,
which are freely accessible without any dismantling, or otherwise
piped out to a readily accessible location.
3. “Sealed for Life” bearings shall not be used except for small
motors.
4. The motors shall be commercially silent in operation and run
free from vibration and the rotors shall be perfectly balanced
both statically and dynamically and shall be tested and adjusted
for dynamic balance in an approved manner.
5. Additional temperature sensors shall be provided for bearing
temperature monitoring for motors rated 30kW and above.

(l) Noise level

1. Motors shall have a guaranteed maximum noise level in

accordance with NEMA MG1-12.49 for integral horsepower motors
and NEMA MG1-20.50 for large motors, except where more
restrictive requirements are outlined in other Sections of the
Specifications.

(m) Duty

1. Motors shall be rated for S1 duty on full rated capacity. All motors
shall be capable of starting 10 times per hour. The stalled motor
current shall not exceed 6 times full load current.

(n) Arrangements shall be made with the manufacturer so that the

Engineer may witness motor tests if so desired.

(o) The maximum continuous rating (MCR) of each motor shall be as set
out in Table 1 and shall be rated and designed to suit the site climatic
data as specified. This reserve power requirement shall be added to
the calculated power prior to any other adjustments e.g. high ambient
temperatures at Site.

Page 216 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

TABLE 1
Maximum Continuous Ratings (MCR)
Application Up to 75 kW drive Above 75 kW drive
All pump motors 10% above that 5% above that
(excluding positive required under all required under all
displacement type) conditions of conditions of
operation operation
Positive displacement 25% above max. duty 12.5% above max.
pumps and compressors requirements duty requirements

(p) Motors shall be selected from the following to satisfy the Contract's
performance requirements and comply with the Utility Company
(DEWA) starting current restrictions: -

1. Motors shall be squirrel cage and sizes up to 11 kW (15 hp) shall

be suitable for DOL starting having a starting current not greater
than 5 x full load current (FLC).

2. Motors larger than 11 kW (15 hp) and up to 37 kW (50 hp) shall

have their starting current restricted to 2 x FLC and shall use one
of the following starting methods: -

i. Solid state reduced voltage (SOFT) start with torque

characteristic suitable for the operation
ii. Auto transformer starting
iii. Rotor resistance starting
iv. Star-delta starting

3. Motors larger than 37 kW (50 hp) shall have their starting current
restricted to 1.5 x FLC and shall use one of the following starting
methods as shown on contract drawings:-

i. Solid state reduced voltage (SOFT) start with torque

characteristic suitable for the operation
ii. Auto transformer
iii. Rotor resistance
iv. Star-delta starter

(q) Centrifugal pumps on unscreened sewage shall give at least 100% full
load torque on starting and therefore only squirrel cage rotor machines
utilizing direct-on-line (DOL) starting or slip ring wound rotor machines
with rotor resistance starting will be acceptable for these drives.

(r) Motors shall be suitable and certified for the zone hazard in which they
are to be installed. Motors for use in all categories of potentially
explosive atmospheres as defined in BS 5345 or equivalent shall have
the appropriate BASEEFA/CENELEC or other similar National Testing
Organization Certificate. Copies of the certificates shall be submitted.

17.6.11 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP MOTORS

(a) Motors shall be 400 V, 3 Phase, 50 Hz, rated at 10 % above the

maximum power requirement. Motor performance shall conform to the
requirement as per IEC 34-1

Page 217 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) Motors shall be squirrel cage, induction type, totally sealed, suitable
for the maximum immersion depth likely to be encountered. Motor
shall be capable of start up and operation in the event of completely
flooded well to the maximum level.
(c) Motor shall be air filled. Degree of protection against ingress shall be
IP 68 complying with EN 60529.
(d) Motor insulation shall be Class F (maximum working temperature 155
degree Celsius), limited to a Class B temperature rise (maximum 80
degree Celsius rise) complying with specification standard EN 50017.
(e) Motor temperature shall be monitored using a thermistor, one in each
phase of the winding, set to stop the motor when the monitored
absolute temperature reaches 130 °C.
(f) Motor shall be suitable for class S1 duty, even when it is not
submerged. Motor shall be capable of starting up to 10 times per hour
(minimum).
(g) The motor shall be capable of operating continuously in a totally dry
condition (non-submersed) of 50 degree Celsius ambient temperature
under full load without damage.
(h) Power and signal cables shall be connected to the motor through a
watertight terminal box, sealed off completely from the surrounding
liquid and the motor windings.
(i) Leak detector shall be provided for each motor for detecting liquid leak
into sealing/motor casing, for connection in motor control circuit for
tripping.

17.6.12 MOTOR CONSTRUCTION

(a) Enclosures for induction motors shall be approved for the installation
and as indicated. The enclosure types shall be one of the following as
outlined in the driven equipment specifications unless otherwise
indicated.

1. Totally-enclosed fan cooled.

2. Totally-enclosed non-ventilated.
(b) All motor enclosures shall satisfy and be selected from:

1. IP54 for general purpose drives.

2. IP55 for outdoor use or machines subject to splashing or washing
down.
3. IP68 for submersible machines.

(c) Motor enclosures shall be suitable and certified for the zone of hazard
in which they are to be installed.
(d) All motors mounted outdoors shall be fitted with appropriate sunshade
to maintain motor environment at ambient temperature.
(e) Housing, end brackets and all outside components shall be cast iron
except WP II or open drip-proof enclosures, which may be, fabricated
steel.
(f) A condensate drain hole shall be provided on all non-explosion-proof
enclosed motors. The drain hole shall be provided in each end
bracket on horizontal motors. A single drain hole shall be provided in

Page 218 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

the lower bracket of vertical motors. Open motors shall be self-

draining. A U.L. approved breather/ drain shall be provided on all
explosion-proof motors.

17.6.13 TERMINALS AND TERMINAL BOXES

(a) Terminal boxes shall be provided with glands suitable for XLPE or
PVC armored cable. The motor stool base where appropriate shall be
drilled at works vertically below the terminal box gland for the passage
of the cables and the edges of the hole slightly countersunk or the
hole bushed.
(b) Terminal boxes shall be cast iron and shall be designed to accept the
cables as detailed by the contract. On non-submersible motors,
terminal boxes shall be mounted on the right hand side when viewed
from the driving end of the motor, unless otherwise required by the
contract.
(c) All three phase motors, rated 2.2 kW and higher, shall have six
winding leads brought out into the terminal box to allow connection for
star-delta type reduced voltage starting.
(d) Terminals shall be stud-type, substantially designed, anchored to a
carrier terminal block and insulated from the motor frame. Terminals
shall be identified in accordance with BS 4999 Part 108 or equivalent.
A separate earth stud shall be included on each terminal box. Heater
terminals shall be shrouded.
(e) Adequate space and glanding arrangements shall be provided,
particularly on smaller motors requiring glanding and termination of
steel wire armored cable for star/delta starting, anti-condensation
heating and thermistor winding protection devices.
(f) Where a common terminal box is used for main, heater and thermistor
cable terminations, a permanent warning label shall be fixed to the
terminal box cover. In addition, heater and thermistor cable
terminations shall be clearly marked to identify their separate functions
and operating voltages.
(g) Terminal box covers shall be gasketted to provide a degree of
protection equivalent to or better than that of the motor.

17.6.14 NAMEPLATE

(a) Provide stainless steel fasteners and nameplate of ample size with
clear numerals and letters.
(b) Nameplate shall indicate the manufacturer, serial number, model
number, type, horsepower, phase, hertz, volts, design, full load
amperes, locked rotor code letter, service factor, speed, insulation,
class, temperature rating, information required by NEMA MG 1-10.38
and other essential data.
(c) Nameplate data shall be in the English language and metric units.
(d) Nameplate shall be secured to the motor frame with corrosion
resisting pins in accessible locations.

Page 219 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.6.15 ACCESSORIES

(a) Additional accessories for motors 75 kW (100 HP) and larger shall
include the following:

1. Two (2) sets of non-linear, resistance temperature detectors, “PTC

thermistors” or equal, shall be embedded in the windings. The
detector relays shall have one normally open and one normally
closed contact, and shall be mounted in box with cover on the
motor frame. One relay shall have a normally open contact to
actuate an alarm when the temperature rise reaches 15 degrees
centigrade below the motor insulation temperature rating when
operating in an ambient temperature of 55°C. One relay shall
have the a normally closed contact to de-energize the motor
controller holding coil when the temperature reaches the motor
insulation temperature rating when operating in an ambient
temperature of 55°C. The detectors shall protect the motor
against overheating caused by overloads, loss of cooling medium
and single phasing.
2. Space heaters, 220 volt, 1 phase, and adequately sized to raise
the temperature inside the motor to a minimum of 5 degrees above
ambient.
3. All of the above accessories shall have wires brought out to a
terminal box or boxes other than the main motor power terminal
box.
(b) Accessories for motors larger than 187 kW (250 HP) shall include the
following in addition to the above accessories:
1. For motors with oil sump lubrication systems, a cold starting oil
immersion heater shall be provided with an auxiliary temperature
switch preset for a temperature, which will allow safe starting.
2. A full thermostatically controlled immersion heater shall be
provided if the motor is not capable of maintaining proper oil
viscosity while running at the minimum specified operation ambient
temperature.
3. Immersion heaters may be eliminated entirely if the motor is
suitable for start and run at temperature extremes specified. A
summer/winter oil change is allowed.
4. As required, motors shall be provided with surge capacitors.
Surge capacitors shall be mounted in the main motor terminal
boxes and connected to the motor leads by the motor
manufacturer. Adequate space shall be provided in the terminal
boxes for stress cone termination.
5. High thrust vertical motors shall have a motor mounted dial
temperature indicator with a dual normally open/normally closed
temperature switch for the thrust bearings. All 3600 RPM motors
shall have this device for both thrust and guide bearings.
Temperature switch shall be either adjustable or factory sized for
the maximum allowable lubricant operating temperature. The
sensing probe of the device shall be in contact with the bearing
outer race or bearing mount.

Page 220 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) All of the above accessories, except the surge capacitors, shall have
wires brought out in a terminal box or boxes other than the main motor
power terminal box.

17.6.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing of Motors under provisions of Section 17.1- Provisions

for Electrical Requirements.
(b) Electric motors shall be subjected to the following tests at the
manufacturer’s works, which may be witnessed by the Engineer and
or Department’s representative. Motor tests shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of BS 4999: Part 142 or IEEE 112a
and b or NEMA MG 1-12.51 or other approved equivalent standard.
The tests shall obtain the overall efficiency and other figures in
accordance with the guarantees given in the tender submission.
1. Motors over 5.5 kW site rating shall be subjected to full ‘basic’
tests, and in addition to noise level tests to BS 4999: part 109 or
other approved equivalent standard. Where two or more identical
motors are being provided, one motor shall be subjected to full
‘basic’ tests and the remainder subjected to ‘duplicate’ tests.
2. Motors under 5.5 kW site rating shall be subjected to ‘duplicate’
tests providing that a Type Test Certificate for a full ‘basic’ test and
noise level tests to BS 4999: Part 109 or other approved
equivalent standard on a similar motor is available. Where no such
certificate is available testing shall be as (1) above.
(c) Testing of motors shall be carried out at the Works test ambient
temperature at the machine frame size power output rating prior to the
application of derating factors for site temperatures, duty factor and
site power supplies.
(d) Verification of Guaranteed efficiencies and power factors shall be
carried out using site nameplate power output rating.
(e) Certificates complying with the above shall include the following
information and shall be provided for all motors: -
1. Manufacture to BS or other approved equivalent standard.
2. Class of Insulation.
3. Type of cable fittings.
4. Type of bearings, sizes and lubricant.
5. Type and rating of heaters.
6. Brush sizes and Maker if fitted.

17.6.17 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

Page 221 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.6.18 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

17.6.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.6.20 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.6.21 DEMONSTRATION

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.6.22 TRAINING

(a) Provide training to Employer’s staff under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.6.23 MAINTENANCE

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.7 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER

17.7.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section specifies the equipment, accessories and materials for
lighting and small power requirements.
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings.

17.7.2 REFERENCES

(a) BS 1363 - Specification for 13 A fused plugs and

switched and unswitched socket-outlets.
(b) BS 4293 - Specification for residual current-operated
circuit breakers.
(c) BS 4678 - Cable Trunking.
(d) BS 5266 - Emergency Lighting.
(e) BS 5486 Part 12 - Specification for particular requirements of
type-tested miniature circuit-breaker boards.
(f) BS 5486 Part 13 - Specification for particular requirements of
consumer units.
(g) BS 7671 - Requirements for electrical installations
(h) BS EN 60309 - Plugs, Socket-outlets and couplers for
industrial purposes.
(i) BS EN 60439 - Specification for low-voltage switchgear and
control gear assemblies.

Page 222 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(j) BS EN 60898 - Specification for circuit breakers for

overcurrent protection for household and
similar installations.
(k) Approved equal American Standards.

17.7.3 GENERAL

(a) Luminaires shall be provided to give illumination levels in accordance

with Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers’ (CIBSE) Code
of Lighting or equivalent.
(b) Lighting levels shall be measured at a plane 1000 mm above finished
floor level in the plant room and 600 mm in office/control room areas.
Two way switching shall be provided for areas where access may be
gained via two physically separate doors.
(c) Design the lighting system to provide maintained illumination level of
200 lux in the plant room and 300 lux in the MCC room, control room
and electrical instrument & equipment rooms.
(d) The Contractor shall prepare lighting layout drawings of sufficient
detail to enable duct requirements to be ascertained prior to the
casting of roof beams and columns. Lighting conduits shall be surface
mounted on ceilings and walls except in tiled areas where the conduits
shall be concealed beneath the tiles.
(e) Control gear of lighting fitting shall be suitable for prolonged and
continuous service in ambient temperature of 50 Degrees Celsius and
corrosive atmospheres usually present in Dubai.
(f) Internally mounted light fittings not liable to splashing shall have a
minimum Ingress Protection of IP 54. Internally mounted fittings liable
to splashing and all externally mounted fittings shall have an IP rating
of IP 67 BS EN 60529, unless indicated otherwise.

17.7.4 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The

Page 223 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the

Engineer’s comments.
(c) Product Data: Provide catalogues of all lighting and small power
devices to be installed under the project.

17.7.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.7.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.7.7 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.

(b) Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section

with minimum five years documented experience.

17.7.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.
(b) Regulations of ETISALAT.
(c) Regulations of The General Directorate of Civil Defense.

17.7.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.7.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1 – Provisions
for Electrical Requirements.

17.7.11 PRODUCTS - LUMINAIRES

(a) Lighting luminaires shall be listed and labeled by the Underwriters

Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM) or the Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Other labels or listings shall require approval by
the Engineer. Such certifications shall originate from an independent
third party laboratory and shall state either the luminaire meet
appropriate design standards or have been tested and found suitable
for use in a specified manner.
(b) Full-spectrum, energy saving LED lamps with compatible energy-
efficient electronic or electromagnetic ballasts shall be used.

Page 224 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) Light Loss Factors as provided by the luminaire manufacturer shall be

used in computing illumination levels.
(d) All lighting fittings shall be supplied complete with appropriate control
gear where necessary, lamps, mounting and fixing accessories etc.
whether explicitly mentioned in the description of each light fitting or
not. All the fittings shall have the same appearance, material,
technical details and approximate dimensions.
(e) Luminaires shall be connected to the main circuit wiring with heat
resistant flexible cables of a minimum conductor size of 2.5 mm2
insulated with silicon rubber.
(f) Break joint rings shall be used in conjunction with batten holders,
ceiling roses or back plates mounted onto a flush installation.
(g) Standard LED luminaires shall have two suspension or fixing points.
(h) All lamp-holders for flexible pendants shall be of the all insulated
skirted pattern with code grips and for batten or wall mounting shall be
of similar pattern. All lamp holders shall be of the bayonet cap
pattern.
(i) The point box suspensions and other parts of the lighting fittings shall
be provided to be erected at festival time to suit the building
programmed for decoration as per the requirements of the Project
Documentation.
(j) The glassware diffusers, shades and lamps shall not be fitted until all
building work is complete.
(k) All fittings shall be easy to clean inside and outside, when mounted.
(l) All LED fittings shall be suitable for instant start irrespective of any
catalogue or list numbers quoted.
(m) Diffusers on LED luminaires shall be poly-carbonate unless otherwise
specified in the Project Documentation.

17.7.12 PLANT ROOM

(a) General – LED moisture proof Luminaire for plant room areas shall
be ceiling mounted surface type. Number of the luminaires and the
locations for the installation shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
Mounting height shall be 2.5 meter measured from the bottom of the
luminaire to the floor directly beneath it.
(b) Suspension type luminaires shall be provided complete with all
accessories similar to Whitecroft hibay type B1150S/HBSR or
equivalent and protected to minimum IP42 having one 150 watt SON
lamp per luminaire
(c) Construction Details - Luminaire housing including guard shall be
made of diecast aluminum. Reflector material shall be of galvanized
steel roll-formed with white enameled finish. Luminaire shall have
diffusers with crystal glass of optical texture. Luminaire housing color
shall be white unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
(d) LED luminaries used for plant room lighting shall meet the relevant
BS requirements. Degree

Page 225 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

of Ingress Protection of the luminaries shall be IP 55 as per IEC

60529. Fittings shall be corrosion resistant, surface ceiling mounted
luminaire, complete with control gear and with impact resistant GRP
body, Polycarbonate/Acrylic prismatic diffusers, and polycarbonate
clips. The control gear mounting internal tray shall be zinc coated
steel, with epoxy powder coating, Gaskets shall be of polyurethane.
The diffuser shall be prismatic structured inside and smooth surface
outside for easy cleaning.
(e) Provide 150 watt GLS wall mounted bulkhead fitting having polyester
powder coated die cast aluminium alloy frame, injection moulded opal
vandal resistant polycarbonate diffuser and porcelain bayonet lamp
holder. These luminaires shall be suitable for external wall mounting,
designed and manufactured to comply with BS 4533 (IP67)
(f) 24-volt red weather proof flashing xenon beacon warning light
producing flashing pulses at one-second intervals.
(g) Mounting method shall be based on the best arrangement for
illumination, as well as easy and safe access during installation and
maintenance. Where applicable, use of existing structure is desirable.
(h) Lighting poles/columns shall be manufactured from steel in excess of
3mm thickness and shall be
- Hot dip Galvanized as per BS 729, or
- Zinc sprayed to BS 2569, Part 1
1. The minimum zinc coating thickness of 125 microns shall be
achieved, Poles shall be heavy duty, octagonal cross-section,
tapered construction complete with base place for mounting on
concrete foundation, or pedestal root type.
2. For pedestal root type poles, the depth of root into the ground
shall be at least 650mm, with suitable cable slot approximately
350mm below ground level.
3 The poles shall be designed and manufactured to relevant BS
Standards.
4. Poles shall be complete with top mounted bracket,
weatherproof JBs, earth terminals etc.. Pole mounted fittings
shall be with 150W or 250W lamps as indicated in the
drawings.

17.7.13 CONTROL BUILDING AND MCC ROOM LIGHTING

(a) LED luminaires installed in the control room shall provide shadow
less illumination. The LEDs shall have a color rendering index of
greater than 70 at a corrected color temperature of 4000 K or higher.
(b) Provide recessed type LED luminaires complete with all accessories
and control gear as shown on drawings.
(c) Lighting for control room shall be designed for maximum flexibility to
permit flicker-free variation of illumination levels above each group of
operator stations. Luminaires shall be installed to minimize reflections
and glare at operating screens.
(d) Manual switches located at the entrance of every room shall control

Page 226 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

lighting luminaires for offices and equipment rooms.

(e) Outside lighting circuits shall be controlled with automatic photocell
control units. A hand-off-automatic switch shall be provided for manual
control.
(f) Emergency lighting shall be provided as specified later in this section.

17.7.14 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

(a) General

1. Emergency lighting installations shall be complete with emergency

batteries, chargers, luminaires and wiring, all as described in
Specifications and as indicated on the Project Drawings,
complying with BS 5266 Part 1.

2. The operation of the system shall be such that on loss of one or all
phases of the main electricity supply, a set of central batteries or
individual battery packs shall provide power for 3 hours to
illuminate emergency luminaires throughout the building. On
restoration of the mains supply the batteries shall be charged by
an integral charger such that the system supplies not less than
85 % of its rated voltage after a period of 12 hours.
(b) Self Contained Emergency Battery Packs

1. Individual emergency luminaries shall consist of individual power

packs installed within or remote to the luminaries.
2. Battery pack units shall consist of converter/inverter devices, with
nickel-cadmium batteries to provide three hours operation under
mains failure, unless the main supply is restored prior to this.
3. Luminaries with self-contained battery packs shall be connected to
the ‘live side’ of the local lighting circuit and lamps shall operate
automatically under mains failure conditions.
4. Units shall have the capability of sustaining high temperature so
that they can be accommodated in fittings with high internal
temperatures. However, if the internal temperature of the fittings
exceeds 50 degrees Celsius, the battery unit shall be mounted
remote to the luminaries. In the case of remote mounting, a
purpose made remote mounting box shall be provided.
5. Key operated switches shall be provided, at the locations indicated
on the Project Drawings, for all self contained emergency pack unit
luminaries, to control the operation of the luminaries manually for
testing purposes. Test key switches shall be clearly labeled
“Emergency Lighting”.

(c) Luminaries and Lamps

1. Clauses relating to luminaries and lamps shall also apply to

emergency luminaries and lamps.
2. Slave luminaries shall comply with BS 4533 Section 102.22 and
BS 5225 Part 3 and be as specified.
3. Exit sign luminaries lettering shall be both in Arabic and English.

Page 227 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The Arabic text shall be above the English text.

4. Maximum viewing distance for minimum legend height shall be
guided as follows:
H > L/200
H = Height of Legend
L = Distance of viewer from the sign
5. Self-contained emergency luminaries shall have a red light
emitting diode installed on the luminaries so that the red light is
visible.
6. Generally, marking of emergency luminaries shall comply with
BS 5266 Part 1.

17.7.15 LAMPS Refer to Section 13 Particular Specification and Section 7 General

Specification for LED Specifications

17.7.16 LOW VOLTAGE LUMINAIRES

(a) Low voltage luminaires shall be provided with its integral step down
transformers, unless indicated otherwise.

17.7.17 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

(a) Low voltage power supply shall be provided for control,

instrumentation, portable items as indicated.
(b) All power supplies for portable tools shall be 110V and the socket
outlets color-coded yellow.
(c) Socket outlets shall be manufactured from polycarbonate and
protected from the ingress of dust and moisture to an IP rating of 44.
All socket outlets shall be color coded in compliance with BS EN
60309/IEC 309
(d) All hand lamps shall be 110V and the socket outlets color-coded.

17.7.18 SOCKET OUTLETS

(a) Internally mounted socket outlets shall be connected to a ring circuit

with minimum wire 2.5 Sq. mm PVC insulated, with each 30 ampere
circuit feeding a maximum floor space of 100 Sq. m. Radial circuits for
served area not more than 50 Sq. m. shall be provided with minimum
wire size of 4 Sq. mm, PVC insulated. And radial circuits for served
area not more than 20 Sq. m. shall be provided with minimum wire
size of 2.5 Sq. mm., PVC insulated.
(b) Provide “Dado Trunking” system to run cables and include socket
outlets as shown on the drawings for pre-engineered building pump
stations.
(c) General purpose Socket Outlets:

1. to BS 1363
2. 3 rectangular pin (2P+E) shuttered, with combined switch, rated
13A, 250 V
3. to be supplied with plug complete with fuse

(d) 15A Socket Outlet:

Page 228 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. to BS 546
2. 3 round pin (2 P + E) shuttered switched pattern complete with
plugs.
3. Neon indicator lamp, unless specified otherwise in the Project
Documentation.

(e) Weather proof Sockets:

1. 13A Sockets: to BS 1363

2. 3 rectangular pins, Un-switched type to be complete with weather
proof plugs
3. plugs: 13 Amps
4. sockets: fused type with single pole cartridge fuse link of same
rating as plug
5. sockets and plugs:
i. to have minimum IP 55 grade protection
ii. housing parts: brass or pressure die-cast finished in gray
hammered stove enamel
6. plugs:
i. cable grips shall have rubber compression rings
ii. there shall be rubber gasket between plug and socket to ensure
weather tightness.
7. sockets shall have screw on caps that close tight on socket when
plugs are not inserted.
(f) Socket Outlet Plates:

1. socket outlet faceplates shall be finished as indicated in the

Project Documentation.

(g) Industrial Sockets:

1. combined Socket
i. to be a combined unit comprising two sockets, rated 16A,
220V, 1 phase and 32A, 380V, 3 phase
ii. to be equipped with 16A SP and 32A TP MCB, or as indicted
iii. three phase socket to be 5 pin type, single phase socket to be
3 pin type
iv. plugs of the same manufacturer to be provided
v. sockets and plugs to conform to BS 4343
vi. to have minimum IP 55 ingress protection.

2. plugs and sockets for hazardous area:

i. to be suitable for zone 0, zone 1 or zone 2 applications, as
relevant, and indicated on the Project Drawings and/or Project
Documentation
ii. to conform to IEC 60309-3
iii. to be corrosion resistant
iv. protection to IP 66.

Page 229 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.7.19 SWITCHES

(a) Internally mounted switches shall be of the "multiple phase" type with
the switches arranged in multigang boxes where possible.
(b) Special care shall be taken to ensure that all switches are securely
fixed truly vertical and that flush mounted switches are flush with the
wall finish so that the overlapping cover plates seat onto the rims of
the boxes.
(c) Light Switches

1. to BS 3676
2. to be rated 10, 15 or 20 amps depending on connected load, as
stipulated in the DEWA regulations
3. recessed with concealed conduit, surface pattern elsewhere
4. quick make and break type
5. single pole, double pole, one way, two way or intermediate as
indicated
6. surface mounted switches to be either poly-carbonate, or metallic
and as indicated in the Project Documentation
7. flush mounted switches to be of the grid fixing type with finish as
noted in the Project document.
8. switches shall be certified for AC-23A duty
(d) Waterproof Switches:

1. to be watertight IP 56 or as indicated in the Project Documentation

2. to be made of poly-carbonate for indoor application in damp and
wet areas.
3. to be metallic suitable for AC-23A duty and have sunshades fitted
where exposed to direct sunlight.

(e) Switch Plates

1. where two or more switches are grouped together and connected

to the same phase, multi-gang devices and common plates shall
be used.

(f) Double Pole Switches:

1. the double pole switches shall be with neon indication lamps and
shall be rated 20, 30 or 45 Amps. as indicated on the drawings
2. the faceplate shall be of matt chrome, unless specified otherwise
in the Project Documentation and shall be engraved ‘WATER
HEATER’, ‘WATER COOLER’ etc. as required.
3. switches shall be certified for AC-23A duty.

(g) Push switches for lighting contactor control:

1. push to make momentary contact switch

2. suitable for inductive load
3. surface mounted type shall be either poly-carbonate, metallic,
protected to IP 56 or as indicated in the Project Documentation

Page 230 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
4. where two or more switches occur in one position they shall be
contained in one case and each shall be appropriately labeled to
indicate its function
5. switches shall be certified for AC-23A duty and contactors shall be
certified for AC-3 duty.

17.7.20 CEILING ROSES

(a) Ceiling roses shall be of the all insulated type conforming to BS 67

with a white finish.
(b) Ceiling roses shall be provided with insulated terminals for the
switched live, neutral and protective conductors; loop-in facilities shall
be provided.
(c) Plug-in ceiling roses shall be used in large buildings, with extensive
false ceiling systems, as detailed in the particular specification.

17.7.21 TIMER

(a) Timers shall be electronic type, unless specified otherwise in the

Project Documentation.
(b) Timers shall be suitable for operation from supply voltage of 220V, 1-
phase, 50Hz system.
(c) Timer output contacts shall be suitable for both a.c. and d.c. control
circuits. The contacts shall be suitable for duty of AC-2 or DC-3
utilization category. The rating of output contacts shall be co-
coordinated with the application requirements.
(d) Timers shall be provided with 2 independent timing scales with sets of
change-over output contacts:

1. 10 ....................200 seconds
2. 0.10 .................. 20 seconds

(e) ON/OFF indicator shall be provided to monitor the circuit status.

(f) Timers shall be either:

1. delay on energization or
2. delay on de- energization type, as per the application requirements
3. Upon supply of rated voltage to the input terminals, the timer shall
start, the output relay remains in rest position. After the set
time, the output relay pulls in.
4. The relay resets after the input supply has been cut-off.

(g) Timers shall be suitable for minimum 10 million operations.

(h) The timer shall require a pozi-drive screwdriver for changing of the
settings.
(i) Degree of protection shall be minimum IP 20.

17.7.22 TIME CLOCKS

(a) Time clocks to control circuits depended on time and hours of the day,
may be either

1. Synchronous motor operated, or

2. Quartz controlled motor operated, as per Project Documentation.

Page 231 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications
(b) Time clocks shall be suitable for operation from supply voltage of
220V, 1-phase, 50Hz system.

(c) Output contacts shall be suitable for both AC and DC control circuits.
The contacts shall be suitable for duty of AC-2 or DC-3 utilization
category. The rating of output contacts shall be co-coordinated with
the application requirements.
(d) The no. of output contacts and the duration of contact closing shall be
decided as per the application requirements.
(e) Time clocks shall be provided with a time dial setting for 24 hours and
7 days program.
(f) Each time clock shall be provided with a minimum running reserve
energy for 1 day.
(g) Accuracy of clocks shall be better than 1 second per day.

17.7.23 WIRING

(a) Wiring for lighting in Ancillary Buildings shall be carried out in PVC
cable to BS 6004 or equivalent enclosed in high impact PVC conduit
or steel conduit as specified or indicated on drawings.
(b) Wiring may also be carried out where required in high impact PVC or
Metal trunking to BS 4678 with prior approval from the Engineer.
(c) The minimum copper conductor size used shall meet current Dubai
Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) requirements.
(d) The use of junction boxes between fittings shall be kept to a minimum
and where practicable all connections shall be made at the fitting.
(e) Where used junction boxes shall be rectangular pattern and where
possible their position shall be hidden from immediate view but not
made inaccessible.
(f) Circuit wiring shall not be connected directly onto the terminals of
lighting fittings but shall be made off in point boxes consisting of a
standard box containing shrouded pinch screw connectors to which
connections shall be made to the light fitting by heat resistant flexible
cables.
(g) Through wiring for luminiares using luminiares are not acceptable.
(h) .

17.7.24 JUNCTION, PULL AND TERMINAL BOXES

(a) The Junction Box shall be completed with a terminal block suitable for
connecting up to 10mm2 copper conductor (phase, neutral and earth)
and an all insulated moulded white cover plate with removal covers.
(b) The cover plate shall be raised for connecting outgoing cable.

Page 232 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.7.25 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.7.26 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

17.7.27 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.
(b) Arrange and carry out such witnessed and unwitnessed tests and
inspections as may be required by the Dubai Electricity and Water
Authority (DEWA) and obtain and handover to the Engineer their
certificate of approval of the complete electrical installation.

17.7.28 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.7.29 DEMONSTRATION

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.7.30 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

(a) Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 17.1 energization.

17.7.31 MAINTENANCE

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.8 CABLES

17.8.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for cables to used in this project
work.
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings.

17.8.2 REFERENCES

Latest editions of following standards

(a) BS 5308 - Instrumentation cables.

(b) BS 5467 - Specifications for cables with thermosetting
insulation for electricity supply for rated
voltages up to and including 600/1000 V and

Page 233 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

up to and including 1900/3300V.

(c) BS 6004 - Specification for PVC-insulated cables (non-
armored) for electric power and lighting.
(d) BS 6007 - Specification for rubber-insulated cables for
electric power and lighting.
(e) BS 6121 - Mechanical cable glands.
(f) BS 6207 Part 1 - Mineral Insulated cables.
(g) BS 6234 - Polyethylene insulation and sheath for
cables.
(h) BS 6346 - Specification for PVC-insulated cables for
electric supply.
(i) BS 6360 - Copper conductors for cables.
(j) BS 6746 - PVC insulation and sheaths.
(k) BS 7671 - Requirements for electrical installations, IEE
UK.
(l) BS 6387 - Performance Requirements of cables
required to maintain circuit integrity under
fire conditions.
(m) DEWA Regulations
(n) IEC-332-3 - Specification for fire propagation test on
cables.
(o) BS EN 10257-1 - Zinc Alloy coated steel wire for armoring
power or telecommunication cables.
(p) BS-7655-2 - Low Smoke Insulation for cables.
(q) BS-7870-6 - Cables with thermosetting insulation and
non-halogenated sheath.
(r) IEC 331 - Fire resisting characteristics of electric
cables.

17.8.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) All LV cables shall be 600/1000V grade copper cored and

manufacturer's test certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer
before the cables are installed.
(b) All cables used inside pedestrian bridge shall be fire resistant, low
toxic and corrosive gas emission and low smoke cables and shall
meet requirements of relevant section BS standard/ IEC-332-3 & 331.
(c) Where a neutral conductor is required this conductor shall be in the
form of a core of the same section as the other cores.
(d) The Contractor shall ensure that each cable is of sufficient rating for
its normal and fault conditions. To assess the rating and cross section
required for each cable the following factors shall be considered: -

1. Fault level.
2. Conditions of ambient temperature relevant to method of laying.
3. Voltage drop.
4. Voltage drops in motor circuits due to starting.
5. Over-current settings of circuit breakers.

Page 234 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

6 Disposition of cabling whether in air ducts or grounds.

7. BS 7671 requirements
8. DEWA Regulations
9. IEE Regulations

(e) Cable ratings shall be calculated in accordance with BS 7671 and for
direct buried cables ERA publication 69-30.
(f) The Contractor shall submit details of the cable sizing calculations for
the Engineer's approval before ordering.
(g) The Contractor shall be responsible for measuring the length of cable
required.
(h) Each cable shall be supplied in a suitable length and be continuous
through its run. Through joints will not be permitted without written
permission from the Engineer.
(i) The earthing conductor shall be of adequate cross sectional area and
shall either be one core of a multicore cable or a separately run single
core cable. The use of conduit, water or other service pipes in any part
of the earth continuity conductor is not permitted.
(j) The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary cable glands and
sealing boxes required to complete the installation. All materials used
in the manufacture of the glands etc. shall have no deleterious effect
on the cable core or armoring and shall not be susceptible to
corrosion.
(k) The cores of each cable shall be taken direct to the terminals of the
equipment to be connected. Cable ends shall be sealed in suitable
chambers bolted to terminal boxes. Compression glands with armor
clamps where required are to be supplied as an integral part of
switchboards, distribution boards, switches, motor starters and similar
equipment, unless otherwise stated.
(l) The general routing of cables may be indicated on the Drawings but
the final routes and duct locations shall be agreed with the Engineer
before any work in connection with the cable installation is
commenced. All cables shall be installed in strict accordance with the
requirements of this Specification.
(m) All cables used shall bear the manufacturer's original guarantee and
all cables shall be delivered to Site in their original wrappings. The
Contractor shall obtain the permission of the Engineer before any
wrappings removed or cables are installed.
(n) The Contractor shall ensure that no more than one phase will occur at
switch lighting or power outlets where these outlets are less than 2.5m
apart unless guarded by a wall partition or other barrier. If this is
impracticable the Contractor shall obtain the advice of the Engineer
before proceeding.
(o) The scheme of wiring shall conform to the color code requirements of
BS 7671.
(p) A minimum length of 250 mm tails shall be left on all cables at outlet
positions for connection of the lighting fittings or other apparatus fed
by the outlet.
(q) The installation of multi-core and single core cables or bunching of
cables in conduit is to be carried out on the assumption that such

Page 235 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

cables will carry alternating current.

(r) The excessive bunching of small cables in large conduits will not be
permitted and the contractor shall not exceed the requirements of the
Regulations.
(s) Conduits shall not be more than 40% full.
(t) The Contractor shall include for terminating each cable in a pressure
operated mechanically crimped leg terminal or terminal socket.
(u) Copper conductors shall be stranded for sections 4 Sq. mm and over.
(v) Copper conductors for all cables shall be high conductivity annealed
copper, to BS 6360, unless otherwise indicated.

17.8.4 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.
(c) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.

17.8.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Record actual locations of all cable runs.

17.8.6 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.

17.8.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.
(b) Regulations of Etisalat.
(c) Regulations of The General Directorate of Civil Defense.

Page 236 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.8.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.8.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1- Provisions
for Electrical Requirements.

17.8.10 PRODUCTS - XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES

(a) Power cables shall be as follows:

1. To BS 5467, 600/1000V grade. XLPE/SWA/PVC cables.

2. Plain annealed stranded copper conductor to BS 6360.
3. Insulation shall be XLPE with adequate thickness.
4. Conductors shall be laid up together and wrapped circular with
suitable preformed non-hygroscopic fillers, bound with Polythene
Terepthalete (PTP) tape and covered with an extruded PVC
sheath.
5. Multicore cables shall have steel wire armoring and extruded black
PVC Fire resistant low smoke outer sheath with low toxic and
corrosive gas emissions.
6. Single core cables shall have aluminium wire armoring.
7. Design electrical stress at any point shall not exceed 3kV/mm.
8. All such cables shall be terminated with mechanical glands in
accordance with BS 6121:2005 which shall be of a type to provide
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armor and shall at
the same time give high earth continuity.
9. All cables shall satisfactorily meet IEC-332-3, requirements for
flame/fire non-propagation tests.
10. .

17.8.11 PVC INSULATED WIRING CABLES

(a) PVC insulated wiring cables shall comply with BS 6004 or BS 6346
and shall be 600/1000 V grade. The cable used shall not be less than
1.5mm2 cross-sectional area.

17.8.12 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES

(a) All Instrumentation, Control and Automation cables (Analogue/Digital)

shall be in accordance with BS 5308 Part 1 or equivalent, applied as

Page 237 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

follows: -

1. Instrumentation Cables – Analog Signals

i. To BS 5308 Part 1, type 2, 300-500V.

ii. Stranded copper conductor 1.0mm2 (7 strands/0.43mm).
iii. Polyethylene insulation.
iv. Individual screen of aluminium backed polyester type with
tinned copper stranded drain wire 0.5mm2 (7 x 0.3mm).
v. Collective screen of aluminium backed polyester tape with
tinned copper stranded drain wire 0.5mm2 (7 x 0.3mm).
vi. Extruded PVC bedding.
vii. Galvanized steel wire armor.
viii. Fire resistant low smoke PVC outer sheath, with low toxic and
corrosive gas emissions, gray.
ix. Core identification as BS 5308 Part 2.

2. Instrumentation Cables – Digital Signals

i. To BS 5308 Part 1, type 2, 300-500V.

ii. Copper conductor 1.0mm2 (7 strands/0.43mm).
iii. Polyethylene insulation.
iv. Collective screen of aluminium backed polyester tape with
tinned copper stranded drain wire 0.5mm2 (7 x 0.3mm).
v. Extruded PVC bedding.
vi. Galvanized steel wire armor.
vii. Fire resistant low smoke PVC outer sheath, with low toxic and
corrosive gas emissions, gray.
viii. Core identification as BS 5308 Part 2.
3. Control Cables

Control cables shall meet following:

i. Multicore PVC/SWA/PVC, 600/1000V Grade, to BS 6346.
ii. Stranded copper conductor 2.5mm2 minimum.
iii. Insulation – PVC, colour coded to BS 6746. For more than 5
cores, provide core numbering.
iv. Extruded PVC sheaths – to BS 6746.
v. Armour – Single layer of galvanized steel wire for multicore
cables.
vi. Outer sheets shall be fire resistant low smoke extruded PVC.

17.8.13 RUBBER INSULATED CABLES

(a) Rubber insulated cables shall be EPR insulated, Niplas sheathed,

flexible, 450/750 volt grade, with tinned annealed copper conductors
in accordance with BS 6007. Where used in submersible applications,
the cable shall be brought directly out of the water in unjointed runs.
EPR insulated cables shall be used for submersible pump or other
locations where cables are expected to remain under water for a

Page 238 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

considerable time period.

17.8.14 FLEXIBLE CABLE

(a) to BS 6007, or BS 6500, rated in accordance with manufacturer’s

tables
(b) flexible cables subject to excessive heat shall be insulated as per
Clause a above, and as indicated.

17.8.15 EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTORS

(a) Provide single core, yellow/green PVC insulated, earth continuity

conductors for all power circuits, as per DEWA regulations.

17.8.16 DIRECT BURIED CABLES

(a) Cables for direct buried application shall have outer sheath suitable for
installation of cables in ground having highly corrosive chemicals. An
additional HDPE jacket shall be provided for locations where cable is
expected to remain under water continuously for long period.

17.8.17 OPTICAL FIBER CABLES

(a) All optical fiber cables shall be suitable for industrial communication
networks and shall meet the following requirements:

1. Each fiber optic cable shall be single mode or multimode, graded

index optic fiber type as specified in Project Specifications.
2. Fiber core, cladding and coating sizes for loose-buffered cables
shall be 50/125/250 or 62.5/125/250 microns or as specified in the
Project Specifications.
3. Fiber core, cladding and buffer sizes for tight buffered cables shall
be 50/125/900 or 62.5/125/900 micron or as specified in the
Project Specifications.
4. Number of fibers in each cable shall be eight, unless otherwise
specified elsewhere. Fibers shall be color coded.
5. Construction shall be tight-buffered fibers or loose-buffered fibers,
selected based on the installation conditions and shall be as
specified in the Project Specifications.
6. Shall have black polyethylene inner jacket.
7. All cables shall be single tube type with jelly filled for protection
against moisture.
8. Shall have Corrugated steel mechanical armor and anti rodent
dielectric protection over the tube if specified in Project
Specifications. Shall also be provided with a ripcord.
9. Operating temperature range –20 Deg C to +70 Deg C.
10 Outer jacket shall be flame retardant with low smoke properties
thermoplastic.
11. Each run of cable shall have 100% spare fibers.
12. Shall be impact resistant and crush resistant. Provide Aramid yarn
covering for impact resistance.

Page 240 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

13. Shall have non-rigid, high tensile central strength element to

provide proper strength to the cable.
14. Operating wavelength shall be 850/1300nm, unless otherwise
specified.
15. Bandwidth shall be 160/500 MHz-Km
16. Maximum Attenuation shall be:

i. 3.5/1.0 dB per Km for 62.5 micron fiber cables.

ii. 3.0/1.0 dB per Km for 50 micron fiber cables.

17. The control system (DCS/PLC/SCADA, as applicable)

manufacturer shall confirm the suitability of the selected fiber optic
cables for intended application.
18. All components including the fiber optic cables, patch cords,
connectors, receivers, etc, within the system, shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall demonstrate that
all components have successfully been used in networks similar in
size to the proposed installation.
19. All fiber optic cables shall be:

i. laid in dedicated uPVC ducts for below ground installation, and

ii. on trays for aboveground installation.

20. Shall meet relevant NEC and UL Standards where applicable.

21. Shall have length marking at every 10meters.

17.8.18 JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

(a) Joints

1. straight through joints for copper conductors: Where permitted by

the Engineer, conductors shall be jointed by approved type
compression connectors using the appropriate tools and
connectors
2. joints shall be made core-to-core.

(b) Joints Boxes and Termination Boxes

1. malleable cast iron boxes for joints in all power cables shall be
compound filled and of adequate size. The boxes shall be fitted
with suitable armouring clamps and glands. The armoring of the
cables shall be terminated at the armouring clamps and the inner
sheath shall pass through the gland. Self amalgamating tapes
shall be applied to give fully screening insulation reinstatement
where the insulation is screened
2. the box and compound shall be at the correct temperature before
the compound is poured to allow total adhesion between the
compound and the box. The compound shall then be allowed to
cool and topped up before the box is closed. No air locks shall be
formed within the box
3. with the consent of the Engineer, plastic shells fitted with suitably

Page 241 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

sized armour bond and filled with an approved type of cold pouring
encapsulating compound to BS 6910 may be used as an
alternative to the compound filled cast iron joint boxes for jointing
PVC-insulated power cables. In such cases, the complete jointing
kit, including plastic shell, compound, insulating tape etc. shall be
from the same proprietary manufacturer who is specialised in
manufacturing products for this purpose. The jointing methods
and procedures, as laid down by the manufacturer, shall be
followed in strict accordance
4. ferrules, compression connectors and bare portions of cable core
resulting from a jointing or terminating process shall be insulated
with an approved type of insulating tape or heat shrinkable tubing
after completion of process. Such insulating tape or heat
shrinkable tubing shall have equal or better electrical and
mechanical properties than those of the original insulation
removed, and shall be adhered to the cores etc. securely and
permanently. The final thickness shall be in smooth contour
throughout the whole length
5. every compression joint shall be of a type which has been the
subject of a test certificate as described in BS 4579. When a
compression joint is made, the appropriate tools specified by the
manufacturer of the joint connectors shall be used.
6. a circuit protective conductor having adequate cross sectional area
and of same material as the phase conductors shall be installed
and connected to maintain the effectiveness of the earth continuity
across every cable joint

(c) Cable Glands

1. cable glands shall be used for terminating cables to switch gear,

switch boards, motor control centres, motors and other equipment
2. glands for armoured or screened cables shall have suitable
clamps
3. external compression glands shall have close fitting PVC shrouds
4. earthing for armouring and metallic sheaths: suitable brass or
copper clamps, and copper strip conductor in accordance with
DEWA requirements, and not less than 2.5 sq. mm

(d) Cable Sockets:

1. shall be correct size for type of cable

2. shall be sweating type, or an approved crimping type used with an
approved crimping tool
3. sweating sockets for conductors 70 sq. mm. and over shall be
machined cast brass.

17.8.19 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing of cables under provisions of this section.

(b) Provide routine tests in accordance with the relevant British Standard
or other approved equivalent standard.
(c) Provide test certificates against each drum and /or cable length.
These shall include: -

Page 242 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. High voltage D.C. insulation pressure test, between cores, each

core to earth, metallic sheath or armor as applicable.
2. Insulation resistance test.
3. Core continuity and identification.
4. Conductor resistance test.

17.8.20 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.8.21 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to meet the

requirements of Section 17.10.

17.8.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.
(b) Inform the Engineer prior to the testing of the cables and be
responsible for liaising with any other contractor to whose equipment
the cables may be terminated to ensure that all parties concerned are
aware of the impending tests, to guarantee the safety of personnel
and that the isolation of any equipment has been completed. Any
special isolation or preparation required to be carried out before cable
testing can be completed, will be carried out by the Contractor
responsible for that equipment. All tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor but shall be supervised by the Engineer.
(c) Provide D.C. test equipment and apply (after isolation) in the presence
of the Engineer, the following D.C. test voltages on all cables between
cores, cores and sheath and cores and armor: -

1. PVC SWA PVC and XLPE SWA PVC 1,000 volt grade cable
between cores 3,500 volt
between core and armor 7,000 volt

(d) Demonstrate correct phasing of cores in all cables throughout the

works and test the insulation of all cables, both between the cores and
between the cores and earth, during installation with a 500-volt
insulation tester.

17.8.23 TESTING FOR FIBER OPTIC CABLES

(a) Manufacturer shall provide factory routine test reports for all the
cables being supplied.
(b) OTDR testing shall be carried out for all the fiber optic cables at site.
(c) The Contractor shall provide all special tools, testing instruments,
connectors, etc. for carrying out tests on fiber optic cables at site.
(d) Fiber optic cables shall be tested immediately after laying, before
connection and also after complete installation of the entire network.

Page 243 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(e) Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

Contractor shall take corrective measures as per Engineer’s
instructions if the cables fail to meet the required test results.

17.8.24 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

(a) Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.9 CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

17.9.1 GENERAL REFERENCE

(a) The work of this section is integral with the whole of the Project
Documentation and is not intended to be interpreted outside that
context.
(b) Co-ordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this
section.

17.9.2 REFERENCES

(a). The following references are referred to in this Section:

1. BS 731 Flexible steel conduits and adapters for the

protection of electric cable.
2. BS 4607
Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical
installations rigid PVC conduits and conduit fittings,
metric units
3. BS 4568 Steel conduits and fittings, metric units
4. BS 2782 Method of testing plastics
5. BS EN 60423 IEC 423-A, Conduit diameters and threads for
conduit and fittings.

17.9.3 DESCRIPTION

(a) This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of

all conduit works in accordance with the Project Documentation.
(b) General:
1. Light and power circuits, fire alarm, telephone, signal and other
low current system wiring shall be drawn in conduits unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Conduit system shall generally be concealed and installed as
indicated, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Light and power circuits, fire alarm wiring, telephone wiring, signal
wiring and low current system wiring shall each be run in separate
conduit and wire way.
4. Cable insulated for two different categories of circuit shall be
segregated
5. Irrespective of service, conduit and fitting used shall be:
i Where embedded: heavy gauge rigid PVC complying to BS
4607, BS 6053 and BS 6099 Part 2, section 2.2.

Page 244 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

ii Where surface mounted, exposed: epoxy coated galvanised

steel conduit as per BS 4568.
iiiWhere installed above false ceilings and in voids: galvanised
steel through out the circuit.
iv Where installed in flame proof and hazardous areas:
galvanised steel.
v From terminal box to machine: flexible steel conduit as per BS
731.

17.9.4 SUBMISSIONS

(a) Samples:
1. Cut-away samples of all sizes of conduits, conduit boxes and
fittings of each type shall be fixed to a board and submitted to the
Engineer.

(b) Product Data:

1. At the time of submitting samples submit manufacturer’s details,
catalogues and copies of test certificates confirming that offered
types comply with the Specification.

(c) Shop Drawings:

1. Submit drawings of proposed conduit layout and obtain approval
before commencing work.

17.9.5 RIGID PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

(a) Standards:

1. Conduit and fittings shall comply with BS 4607: Part 1 and CEE
Publication 26. In addition, conduit and fittings shall comply with
this specification where requirements are more stringent.
2. Conduit diameters shall comply with DEWA regulations.

(b) Physical Properties:

1. Conduit and fittings shall be:

i Resistant to high temperatures
ii Non-hygroscopic
iii Self-extinguishing
iv Of adequate insulation resistance and electric strength.
v Inert to all liquid normally discharged from residential,
commercial and industrial premises.
vi Suitable for installation, storage and transportation at
temperature not normally below -5°C or above 85°C and at
these temperatures shall not:
• Soften or suffer any structural degradation.

Page 245 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

• Show signs of cracking, or deform so that cables cannot

be easily drawn in or are likely to be damaged when
drawing in, when bent, compressed or exposed to extreme
temperature.
vii Of adequate mechanical strength and thermal stability.
viii Suitably and indelibly marked and identified. Markings shall
include nominal size and be easily legible.
ix Smooth inside and outside and free from burrs and sharp
edges. Surfaces and corners over which cables may be drawn
shall be smooth and well rounded.

17.9.6 SIZES OF CONDUIT

(a) Minimum 20mm, internal diameter unless otherwise indicated. Where

size is not indicated: select in accordance with the regulations and as
proper to the number and size of conductors.
(b) Fittings:
1. Conduit entries shall be designed to ensure a watertight joint.
(c) Expansion fittings:
1. Type to be approved.
(d) PVC Conduit Boxes:
1. PVC Conduit Boxes can be used through PVC Conduit raceway
system and shall comply with BS 4607.
2. Metallic conduit boxes as specified elsewhere in this section can
be used alternatively if required for PVC conduit raceway system.
3. All boxes shall be provided with tapped brass inserts for fixing the
screws.
4. All boxes for switches, sockets, outlets, etc., shall be rigid PVC or
metallic type and their dimensions shall be suitable for fixing the
switches, sockets and other accessories.

17.9.7 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

(a) Rigid Steel Conduit:

1. All metallic conduits shall comply with BS 4568 and of Class 4
rigid steel screwed type having an interior and exterior zinc
coating of uniform quality and appearance throughout all surfaces.
2. Conduits shall not be less than 20mm diameter size, and shall be
complete with all necessary threaded fittings, couplings and
connecting devices having galvanized equivalent finish.
3. Conduits and fittings shall be manufactured specially for electric
wiring purposes. When manufactured by a continuous weld
process, weld heads both inside and outside the tube shall be
completely removed prior to galvanizing.
4. All conduits and fittings shall be free from rust or other defects on
delivery to the site and shall be properly stored in covered racking
so that it is protected from mechanical damage and damage by
weather and water whilst stored on the site.
5. All conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wires using
brass male bushes. All such bushes shall be hexagon headed,

Page 246 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

heavy duty long threaded type.

6. All conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from
material equal or equivalent to that of the conduit with which the
coupling is to be used, having factory installed packing ring and
pressure ring to prevent entrance of moisture. All coupling shall
be equipped with earthing ring or earthing conductor.
7. All conduit runs shall be fixed using spacer bar pattern saddles
giving not less than 3mm clearance between the conduit and the
surface to which it is fixed. Saddles shall have finish to match the
conduit and saddle clips shall be secured to the bar by means of
brass screws.

(b) Metallic Conduit Boxes:

1. Metallic conduit boxes shall be used throughout metallic conduit
raceway systems, and shall comply with, or be of demonstrated
equivalent quality and performance to BS 4568 requirements. All
boxes and covers shall be galvanised, zinc plated or rust-
proof finish equivalent to conduit finish.
2. Circular and/or rectangular boxes shall be used for pull boxes and
terminating boxes, according to size and number of conduits
connected to box. Boxes shall be either malleable iron or heavy
duty steel construction with welded joints and tapped holes to
receive metal threaded cover retaining screws. Self tapping
screws will not be permitted.
3. All boxes, other than those to which a fitting or accessory is to be
directly mounted shall be fitted with covers screwed to the box by
brass screws. Malleable iron covers shall be used with malleable
iron boxes and heavy gauge steel covers shall be used with sheet
steel boxes.
4. All cover and accessory fixing provisions shall be so positioned
that the fixing screws lie completely clear of cable entering the
box. All fixing screws shall be of brass.
5. All boxes installed in exterior locations, plant rooms, ducts, etc.,
shall be fitted with approved type gaskets to provide a waterproof
seal between box and cover or other items fitted to the box.
6. All boxes provided as junction boxes where cable joints are
specified or permitted, shall be provided with fixed terminal blocks.
Such boxes shall be of suitable size to contain the terminal block
and sufficient cable to allow neat connections to be made. The
terminal blocks shall be fixed to the box by brass screws and shall
comprise brass conductor connectors, with brass clamping screws
enclosed in porcelain or other heat resisting insulation material
which will not distort or otherwise have its properties damaged by
temperatures below the highest temperature at which the
insulation of any cable connected to it is destroyed.

17.9.8 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND CONNECTIONS

(a) Flexible conduit shall be of low smoke & zero halogen material as per
NFPA-502.

Page 247 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) Flexible Conduit:

1. To BS 731, Part 1, watertight, Fire resistant, spiralled metal type.
The conduit shall be terminated at boxes and equipment by
means of approved compression glands.
2. To be of the unpacked type for normal atmospheric conditions and
non-asbestos
packaged for damp situations. Adapters shall be of the solid type.
3. Flexible conduit shall be used for the final connection of rigid
conduit to the terminal boxes of machines fitted with a means of
drive adjustment and/or where vibrations is likely to occur.

(c) Flexible Connections:

1. Where connections to electrical machines are to be by multicore
glands, the final termination shall be by ring type universal glands
and locknuts, and adequate slack cable in the form of a loop or
spiral being left to allow for the movement of motors necessitated
by belt retensioning, vibration, etc.

17.9.9 GRP CONDUITS

(a) Conduits used inside pedestrian bridge shall be fire resistant, low
smoke & halogen free GRP conduits.
(b) Exposed GRP conduits shall be extra heavy duty with minimum 0.25
inch wall thickness.
(c) GRP conduits shall meet requirements of following standards
- BS 476 Part 7, ISO 4589, NFPA-502 & IEC 695-2-1.

17.9.10 PREPARATION

(a) Sets and Bends:

1. Conduits up to 32mm diameter; form on site with an approved
bending machine
using proper formers, guides, springs, etc., taking care not to
deform conduit.
2. Conduits over 32mm diameter: use coupling fittings.

17.9.11 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT

(a) General
1. Run conduit in square, symmetrical lines, parallel to or at right
angles to walls and in accordance with the accepted practice.
2. Conduit system shall be mechanically continuous and watertight
after installation. All conduit system shall be arranged wherever
possible to be self draining.
3. Conduit runs between draw-in positions shall conform to DEWA
Regulations regarding no. of bends and lengths of straight run
4. Installation shall permit easy drawing in of cables.
5. Keep conduits at least 100mm from pipes and other non-electrical
services.
6. Where conduit runs are to be concealed in the structure or are to

Page 248 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

pass through floor slabs, the Contractor shall be responsible for

marking the accurate positions of all chases and holes on site.
The Contractor shall arrange the conduit routing to make
maximum use of any preformed conduit holes and slots provided
in structural beams. Conduit installation on shear walls shall be
kept to a minimum. All routings necessary on shear walls shall be
agreed with the Engineer before work is put in hand.
7. Install conduits so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or
ventilation outlets.
8. All conduits sealed with suitable sealing compound, after
installation is completed to make a watertight installation.

(b) Runs in Reinforced Concrete:

1. Obtain approval for placing PVC conduits before pouring concrete.
2. Run conduits in concrete slabs parallel to main reinforcing steel.
3. Additional openings in finished slabs, where approved, shall be
made by drilling, not by breaking.
4. Conduit boxes shall not be nailed to shuttering boards.

(c) Horizontal or Cross Runs:

1. To be avoided in partitions and side walls.
2. Surface Mounted Conduit (including conduit installed above false
ceiling):
i Fix with distance spacing saddles to allow conduits to be taken
directly into accessories without bends or sets.
(d) Concealed Conduit:
1. Fix securely to prevent movement before casting of concrete and
screeds, application of plaster and the like.
2. Spacing of clips shall be not greater than as follows:
Conduit Size Spacing
up to 25mm 600mm
32-38mm 900mm
50mm 1000mm
3. Supports for exposed conduit shall be fixed at each side of bends.

(e) Expansion Fittings:

1. Fix in conduit wherever it crosses as expansion joint in the
structure to which it is fixed.
(f) Terminations:
1. Make with a flanged coupling, lead washer and hexagonal male
brass bush, where conduit runs terminate in cable trunking,
distribution boards or any sheet metal structure.

(g) Conduit Boxes:

1. fix at all outlet points

17.9.12 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

(a) All conduits must be secured to outlet boxes, junction boxes or

cabinets by placing locknuts on outside of box and locknuts and
bushings on the inside of box.

Page 249 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) Conduits connecting recessed fixtures and their adjacent junction

boxes must be flexible metallic conduit 20mm minimum size and shall
be of sufficient length to permit dropping of the fixture below the
ceiling and to gain access to the junction box.
(c) Conduit to motors shall be terminated in the conduit fittings on the
motors, the final connection being made with liquid tight flexible
conduit and suitable liquid tight connectors.
(d) A green insulated 4mm2 (minimum) tinned copper earth connection
shall be made between the solid conduit or cable sheath and the
equipment, the copper cable being run inside the flexible conduit.
Couplings fitted to removable covers or non-metallic equipment etc.,
shall be bonded to the earthing terminal of the equipment etc. Where
changes to flexible conduits occur, a watertight outlet box with
threaded entries shall be inserted and the earth connection made to
an internal terminal. The cover screws shall not be used for earthing
connections.

17.9.13 CLEANING

(a) The conduit outlets when installed and before wiring shall be
temporarily closed by means of well fitting wooden plugs, and
immediately before cables are drawn in, conduit systems shall be
thoroughly swabbed out until they are dry and clean.

17.10 CABLING METHOD

17.10.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for works related to cabling in the
project area in general
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings

17.10.2 REFERENCES

(a) BS 6121: Mechanical cable glands.

17.10.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Every cable shall be installed in accordance with the relevant codes of
practice and shall be neatly run in all situations.
(b) All cables shall be run on trays or brackets either secured to walls,
ceilings and building structures or run in ducts and trenches.
(c) Every cable whether in or out of sight shall be neatly run vertically,
horizontally or parallel to adjacent walls, beams or other structural
members.
(d) Spacing of clips, saddles and cleats shall be such to prevent sagging
of the cable at all times during their installed life
(e) All cable hangers, cleats, saddles, brackets and similar supporting
devices shall be of an approved type and of adequate strength for the
cables they are supporting. They shall be treated to withstand site
conditions without corroding.

Page 250 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.10.4 SUBMITTALS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.10.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Record actual locations of all cable runs.

17.10.6 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Installer: All cable work shall be installed by personnel trade tested
and approved by Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA).

17.10.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.
(b) Regulations of Etisalat

17.10.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.10.9 PRODUCTS - SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing of cables under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.10.10 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.10.11 CABLING METHODS

(a) Fixing and laying

1. Run cables in indoor trenches shall be segregated and run on

trays or brackets secured to the trench wall. No cables shall be run
on the bottom of trenches
2. Provide suitable protection from the radiation of the sun by means
of covers or canopies, where cables are surface run on the
external faces of structures or above ground level
3. Provide protection covers or canopies of approved design,
securely fixed to the structure or ground and fully ventilated
4. Pull cable into position by hand, where possible using an adequate
number of operative roller guides suitably positioned along cable
length
5. Obtain approval of pulling cables by winch or similar appliance

Page 251 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

6. When pulling by winch or the like, fit a suitable tension gauge into
the haulage line between winch and cable. Pulling tension shall
not exceed the limit recommended by the cable manufacturer
7. Do not allow cable to twist or rotate about its longitudinal axis
8. Lay 3 phase groups of single core cables in trefoil formation. If
this is not possible obtain instructions from Engineer.
9. Install cables to allow any one cable to be subsequently removed
without disturbing the remainder.

(b) Underground cables in uPVC ducts

1. Cables shall be installed in ducts where there is hard standing or

vehicular passage. Provide concrete encased ducts while
crossing vehicular passage
2. Cable duct size shall be as specified in the Drawings, to BS 3506
Class B or BS 4660
3. Run cables at least 300 mm clear of other services, whether the
latter run parallel or transversely to cable trench. use pulling
compound, or lubricant to avoid excessive stress on the cable, if
required
4. Run cables below intersecting piped services, unless the cable
would be at a depth exceeding 2 m, in which case seek
instructions.
5. Ducts shall not be filled with cables to more than 40 % of their
capacity
6. Nylon draw cords shall always be left in ducts
7. Cable duct pits shall be provided at each change in direction and
in any case at distances not exceeding 30 m
8. Ducts shall be suitably sealed with polyurethane foam or
proprietary cable sealing arrangements if specified
9. Empty ducts shall be plugged with removable plugs
10. Ducts shall have a minimum diameter of 100 mm.

(c) Cable on trays

1. Install cables on trays in a single layer, unless otherwise indicated

2. Use purpose made straps or saddles to maintain cables in a neat
regular disposition
3. Secure cables with load bearing cleats securely fixed to the tray,
where trays do not directly support the cables. Special precaution
shall be taken to arrange and secure the single core cables laid in
parallel while changing direction
4. Space cleats, saddles and straps at maximum centres
recommended by cable manufacturer

(d) Identification

1. Each and every cable shall be permanently identified at each end

by its cable number. Cable markers shall comprise oval markers
with semi-rigid black PVC carrier strip and shall be fixed axially by

Page 252 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

means of two PVC covered aluminium strips with buckles.

2. All power shall be connected to main switchboards and other items
of plant so that the correct phase sequence and phase color-
coding are preserved throughout the system. All such cables shall
be identified with phase colors for 3 & 4 wire systems and blue and
brown for single phase. On rotating plant where to achieve the
required direction of rotation it is not possible to connect the phase
cores to the appropriately identified terminals then special core
ferrules shall be fitted to identify each core with the terminal to
which it is finally connected.
3. Permanent corrosion resistant identification labels shall also be
installed on cables at each and every entry and exit points of
buried ducts, exists and entry to any structure and in such other
positions as are necessary to identify and trace the route of any
site cable. The use of punch type adhesive labels (Dymo-tape)
shall not be permitted.
4. Control cables shall have individual cores identified by means of
suitable permanent ferrules bearing the same numbers at both
ends. Core identification shall occur at every point of termination
using an approved system of ferrule markers. Numbering shall
read from the terminal outwards on all cores. At those points of
interconnection between wiring where a change of number cannot
be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire. The
change of numbering shall be shown on the wiring diagrams of the
equipment at which the change is made.

5. Where the termination of control cable cores or the supervision of

termination of cores is specified as being the responsibility of
another contractor (e.g. the termination of certain control and
instrumentation cables) any necessary temporary means of core
identification shall be agreed with that contractor. Should the
Contractor propose to use junction boxes in auxiliary control cable
circuits for the purpose of marshalling a number of cables feeding
to a common item of equipment full details shall be given to the
Engineer and the Contractor shall only proceed after receipt of the
Engineer's written approval. Any such junction box shall be of the
wall mounting pattern with double terminals with cores ferruled and
identified in accordance with the system schematic and cable
diagrams.

(e) Sealing

1. Cables entering or leaving ducts shall be sealed. Power and

Control cables shall be sealed where they enter and leave ducts at
all points and in cable chambers including intermediate pulling
chambers. The sealing compound shall exhibit the following
properties: -

i. adheres to all metal surfaces, unplasticised, PVC, polyethylene

and glazed earthenware and to cable sheath materials.
ii. unaffected by water.
iii. withstands at least 14 kPa (2psi) air pressure for a minimum of
15 minutes.
iv. withstands up to 5 kPa (0.5 meter head) water pressure for 30

Page 253 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

minutes.
v. self-supporting, non-setting and removable.
vi. accommodates movement due to settling, subsidence or
vibration.
vii. vermin proof.

2. The sealing compound shall be packed into the annulus to a depth

at least equal to the diameter of the sleeve.
3. Seal both ends of cables immediately after tests
4. Seal plastic sheathed cables with a plastic cap embracing the
wires and outer sheath
5. Mark cable ends in accordance with the relevant BS
6. Where the water table is identified as a problem the use of a
sealing compound that adheres to wet surfaces shall be utilized.
7. A Cable Transit System shall be used where positive sealing is
required against fire, gas or liquid. The system shall have been
tested and approved by BS 476 part 20 or equivalent by the Fire
Insurer’s Research and Testing Organization (FIRTO) or other
national testing organization.
8. The contractor shall be responsible for temporarily sealing all
cable ducts into structures during the installation stage to prevent
accidental flooding of the structures.
9. Wherever it is necessary to remove the PVC sheath of a cable
(e.g. at a joint) the minimum length necessary shall be removed
and a PVC tape or sleeve or other suitable means shall
adequately cover the exposed copper sheath or armor.
(f) Termination

1. All cables shall be terminated with air insulated dry type

terminations. The contractor shall supply complete heat shrinkable
termination kits of an approved make with cable lugs, compression
cable gland and clamps etc.
2. PVC or XLPE insulated cables shall be terminated with
mechanical glands in accordance with BS 6121 and shall be of the
type to provide adequate support to the cable by under and over
locking on to the cable armoring, giving a high earth continuity.
Each and every mechanical cable gland shall be supplied and
installed complete with brass earthing tape and a PVC gland
shroud, which shall provide an effective seal on both the cable
over sheath and gland.
3. All cable conductors shall be terminated in suitable copper lugs or
brass thimbles which shall be attached to the conductors by use of
a pneumatic crimping machine using the correct crimping dies for
each size of cable core. The size of hole in the cable lug shall
match with the size of the bolt. Site drilling or punching at site is
not acceptable.
4. Where more than one cable is to be terminated at an item of
equipment, particular care should be taken to ensure that all
cables to that equipment are routed from a common direction and
each is terminated in an orderly and symmetrical fashion.

Page 254 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(g) All cables shall be delivered on robust cable drums with cable ends
treated to form an effective seal. When a cable is cut from a drum the
cable end left on the drum shall be immediately sealed in an approved
manner to prevent the ingress of moisture.

17.10.12 CABLE TRENCH WORK

(a) The contractor shall carry out the excavation and backfilling of cable
trench work.
(b) The contractor shall supply and lay the sand bedding, cables, sand
blinding, cable cover tiles and marking tape. He shall also supply and
lay cable route marker posts after the backfilling and compaction, has
been carried out.
(c) The sanding and laying of all cables shall satisfy the following
requirements:

1. Cable depths shall be assessed from the finished ground level

unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2. L.V. cables shall be laid at a depth of 0.6 meter.
3. Cables of different voltage rating may be run in the same trench
but should be staggered. However where necessary to pass
through ductwork, cables shall be laid vertically above each other
with the H.V. cables at the lowest level with good sand blinding
forming the sand bedding for the L.V. cables.
4. Before laying in cables the contractor shall inspect the trench work
to ensure that the trench bottom is of a smooth and firm contour
and free from all sharp materials or obstructions.
5. Before the cables are laid, the trench shall be partly filled with
pebbles-free sand to a depth of 100 mm. Another 100 mm deep
layer of sand shall be filled after laying the cables. At road
crossings and other places where cables enter pipe sleeves,
adequate sand bed shall be provided so that the cables do not
slack or suffer damage from pipe ends after back filling.
6. Cables shall be laid with adequate separation and shall be
“snaked” to avoid tension during backfilling operations and
subsequent settlement.
7. Before sanding and backfilling, all laid cables shall be inspected by
the Engineer, and a further inspection following sanding and tiling,
shall be made by the Engineer before backfilling.
8. After sanding, cable cover tiles shall be placed in position to
overlap the cables by a minimum of 50 mm either side of the
cables.
9. The contractor shall carry out backfilling and shall ensure that
cable cover tiles are undisturbed and that large rocks, stones and
the like are eliminated from backfill spoil.
10. After backfilling the contractor shall reinstate to finished ground
level. The contractor shall lay in position the necessary cable route
markers at a maximum of 10 meters apart and at any change in
direction.

(d) The contractor shall provide cable route markers to the approval of the

Page 255 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Engineer and engraved “Electricity Cables”, or other suitable legend,

with the appropriate voltage.

17.10.13 CABLE SEGREGATION

(a) Only conductors carrying signals of the same instrumentation signal

category shall be contained within any one multi-core cable.
(b) In each instrumentation signal category, a further segregation is
required to ensure that conductors forming part of an intrinsically safe
circuit are contained within multi-core cables reserved solely for such
circuits.
(c) High integrity signals such as data transmission or critical shut down
signals shall be contained in separate cables.
(d) ICA/Telemetry cables sharing a cable tray, duct or route with power
cables shall be avoided. Power cables are defined as a.c. cables
above 50 volts with a 10 amp rating. Where this is not practicable, a
minimum maintained separation between cables shall be provided in
accordance with Table A.
(e) The segregation distances shall be maintained by positive means and
shall apply to both above ground and below ground installations.
(f) Where a crossover between power and ICA/Telemetry cables is
unavoidable the cable shall be arranged to cross at right angles. The
number of crossovers shall be kept to a minimum.
(g) Where cable installations are of a restrictive nature such as entries
into buildings, panels etc. relaxation of the minimum segregation
distance requirement from a power cable(s) is acceptable. The
minimum segregation distance shall then be the distance, determined
by the length of the parallelism at the restrictive section of the
installation.

TABLE A
Distance over which parallelism Minimum Segregation Distance
exists between signal and power Requirement in mm
cables in meters Power cable
Instrumentation Signal Classification
Category to BS 6739 or equivalent
Cat. 2 Cat. 3
Maximum current 0 - <3 50 50
10 amps at any 3 - <10 100 100
phase voltage up 10 - <25 100 150
to 250 volts a.c. 25 - <100 150 200
or d.c. 100 - <250 200 250
250 - < 500 250 300

Maximum current 0 - <3 100 150

50 amps at any 3 - <10 150 200
phase voltage up 10 - <100 200 250
to 650 volts a.c. 100 - <250 275 350
250 - < 500 350 450

Page 256 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Distance over which parallelism Minimum Segregation Distance

exists between signal and power Requirement in mm
cables in meters Power cable
Instrumentation Signal Classification
Category to BS 6739 or equivalent
Cat. 2 Cat. 3
Maximum current 0 - <3 175 250
100 amps at any 3 - <10 200 300
phase voltage up 10 - <100 250 450
to 650 volts a.c. 100 - <250 350 525
250 - < 500 500 650

(h) Where a manufacturer’s installation specification requires greater

segregation than detailed in Table A such as for data highway cables
etc. the Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer’s segregation
specification.

17.10.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.11 TRUNKING

17.11.1 GENERAL REFERENCE

(a) The work of this section is integral with the whole of the Project
Documentation and is not intended to be interpreted outside that
context.
(b) Co-ordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of
this Section.

17.11.2 REFERENCES

(a) The following standards are referred to in this Section:

1. BS 729 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron

and steel articles
2. BS 3382 - Zinc on steel components
3. BS 4678 - Steel surface trunking
4. BS 4678 - Cable trunking of insulating materials
5. BS 4607 - Fittings and components of
insulating materials
6. BS EN 10142 - Hot dip zinc coated sheet steel

17.11.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

(a) The Contractor shall supply and install the complete trunking
system as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.

17.11.4 SUBMISSIONS

(a) Samples: submit samples of trunking and accessories.

(b) Product Data: at the time of submitting samples submit

Page 257 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

manufacturer’s details, catalogues etc.

(c) Shop Drawings: submit drawings showing route of trunking system
and obtain approval before commencing work.

17.11.5 PRODUCTS TRUNKING

(a) General:

1. Trunking, associated parts and accessories shall be fabricated

from hot dipped galvanized sheet steel not less than 16 SWG/
Heavy Duty GRP/ Stainless Steel SS 316 as shown on project
Drawings.
2. Trunking shall be supplied in 3m lengths or bigger, each length
complete with lid, coupler and coupler screws and shall provide
adequate earth continuity throughout the whole trunking run.
3. Shall be complete with necessary fittings and accessories. All
accessories and fixing materials shall also be of galvanised sheet
steel of not less than 1mm thickness.
4. If specified in the Project Documentation, trunking, associated
parts and accessories shall be fabricated from high impact uPVC
material, having thickness not less than 1.5mm and shall be
complete with necessary fittings and accessories made from the
similar material as for the trunking.
5. Trunking shall not be smaller than the minimum size stated on the
Drawings or specified later and shall be so sized, if not specified,
that a space factor of 35 % is not exceeded. The Contractor shall
check that the minimum size of trunking specified is large enough
for his requirements, without exceeding this space factor.
6. Trunking and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely
corrosive environments shall be heavy duty GRP or 316 S31
grade stainless steel.

(b) Trunking and Connectors:

1. Shall be to BS 4678: Part 1, but thickness of metal for body and

cover material may not be less than those in Table 1. The PVC
trunking system shall satisfy the requirement in Part 4 of BS 4678
providing smooth internal and external finishes.
2. Metal thickness for trunking and connectors exceeding 150 x
150mm external dimensions shall be to approval and shall not be
less than that specified in BS 4678 Part 1 for the largest trunking
detailed.
3. Finish for steel trunking:
i. For internal use: Class 3 heavy protection internally and
externally (e.g. galvanised steel to BS EN 10142; protection to
BS 4678: Part 1)
ii. For external use: Class 3 protection.
4. Lids shall be clipped and fixed at regular intervals not exceeding
2m on straight runs, by quick release cam type fasteners. In PVC

Page 258 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

trunking installations the lids can be slide-in type of proper

lengths.
5. Partitions shall be at least 1mm thick, finished to same standard
as trunking. The means of fixing partitions shall prevent them
being misplaced and shall not cause corrosion or electrolytic
action.
6. Connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the
trunking. Trunking sections shall have butt joints.
7. Accessories for bends and tee-off shall be supplied from the same
manufacturer and provided with lids as necessary. Reduction type
tee-offs shall be provided where smaller size branch trunking is
required.

(c) Bonding Links and Fastenings:

1. Shall satisfy continuity conditions of BS 4678.
2. Shall not cause corrosion
3. Separate protective conductor of size not less than 4mm2 shall run
in the PVC trunking system.

(d) Braided Copper Tape:

1. Shall be 15 x 2mm minimum having a resistance from fixing to
fixing equal to or less than the links used in standard trunking
joints.

(e) Steel Screws and Fasteners:

1. Shall have a zinc coating finish to BS 729 or BS 3382 : Part 2, or
equivalent.
2. Fixings used for securing or fitting shall not cause corrosion or
electrolytic action. Black screws are not acceptable.
3. Brackets, mild steel angle or channel finished to same standard as
trunking.

(f) Vertical Trunking:

1. Shall have cable support units with insulated pins at centres not
exceeding 3 meters.

(g) Horizontal Trunking:

1. Sizes exceeding 100 x 50mm shall have cable separators with
insulated pins at maximum centres not exceeding 2m.

17.11.6 EXECUTION - INSTALLATION

(a) Fixing Trunking:

1. Trunking shall be properly aligned, and securely fixed at maximum
2 meters centres on straight runs. At bends, angles and offsets fix
with additional fixings at centres not exceeding 150mm on each
side of the fitting
2. Only manufacturers bends, T-offsets and accessories shall be
used. Site fabrication shall not be permitted.

Page 259 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) Settlement and Expansion Joints:

1. Make a trunking joint where trunking crosses such joints.
2. Make connection through slotted holes allowing a 10mm
movement horizontally and vertically.
3. Earth continuity link across joints shall be braided copper tape
which is long enough to allow for the maximum movement of
trunking. Fold braid ends.

(c) Fire Barriers:

1. Where specified, install non-combustible, non-metallic fire
barriers.
i. Where trunking passes through walls, floors and ceilings.
ii. At each floor level when trunking is installed in riser ducts.
(d) Connections:
1. Make connections to conduits, multiple boxes, switchgears,
switchboards, motor control centers and distribution boards with
flanged units.

(e) Cable Retaining Straps:

1. Fix at not exceeding 1m centers.

17.11.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT

(a) Making Good:

1. Make good cutting and damages of the steel trunking systems,
remove burrs and rough edges and corrosion and treat with a rust
proofing agent, followed by an application of zinc epoxy.
2. Provide a coat of paint to match adjacent surface for PVC system
3. Provide the paint after application of the zinc epoxy for steel
trunking system.

17.12 CABLE TRAYS

17.12.1 GENERAL REFERENCE

(a) The work of this section is integral with the whole of the Project
Documentation and is not intended to be interpreted outside that
context.
(b) Co-ordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this
section.
(c) .

17.12.2 REFERENCES

The following standards are referred to in this Section:

(a) BS 729 - Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles.
(b) NEMA FG1 NEMA standard for Fiberglass cable tray system.

Page 260 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) BS476 Part 7: Fire test on building materials and structures.

(d) ISO 4589 Determination of burning behavior by oxygen index.
(e) NFPA 502 Standard for Road tunnels, Bridges, and other limited
access highways.
(f) IEC695-2-1 Glow wire test.

17.12.3 DESCRIPTION

(a) Provide all labour, materials, equipment, services and accessories

necessary to furnish and install the work of this Section, complete and
functional, as indicated in the Project Documentation and as specified
herein.

17.12.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

(a) Reference standards as detailed above.

17.12.5 SUBMITTALS

(a) All submittals to be in accordance with Section 17.1.

17.12.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store and handle materials and products in a manner to

prevent damage.
(b) Reference Section 17.1.

17.12.7 CO-ORDINATION

(a) The work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the
work of other services.

17.12.8 PRODUCTS - GENERAL

(a) The cable tray system shall be of one manufacturer and shall include
factory-made trays, tray fittings, connectors and necessary
accessories and supports to form a complete cable support system.
(b) The cable tray system shall include the following factory-made tray
elements:
1. Straight cable trays and ladders.
2. Fittings as horizontal and vertical bends of various angles,
crosses, tees, wyes, reducers, vertical riser elements.
3. Connectors.
4. All necessary fixing accessories.

(c) Manufacturer’s standard accessories shall be used and site

fabrication shall not be permitted.
(d) Horizontal run of cables laid on cable tray and exposed to direct
sunlight shall be provided with covering at higher level to allow for

Page 261 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

ventilation. Cable tray shall be raised 15cm from finished floor level.

17.12.9 MATERIALS

(a) Cable trays and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely

corrosive environments shall be heavy duty GRP or 316 S31 grade
stainless steel or Fire Resistant Vinylester, as indicated on project
drawings.
(b) The whole of the tray work, trays, fittings, supports shall be of mild
steel hot dipped galvanized after manufacture to BS 729 if indicated
on project drawing. The thickness of the protective sheath on any
element shall not be less than 55 microns.
(c) Cable trays constructed from mild steel hot dip galvanized/SS316 and
of minimum thickness of 1.5mm.
(d) Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins, etc., shall be mild steel cadmium
plated.
(e) Tray work shall have oval perforations. Ladder type trays shall be
used for vertical runs as approved by the Engineer.
(f) All trays (straight and fittings) shall be welded construction and be a
heavy duty returned flanged, perforated type, unless specified
otherwise. The minimum thickness of heavy duty returned flanged
cable trays shall be 1.5mm.
(g) Tray components shall be accurately rolled or formed to close
tolerances and all edges rounded. Flanges shall have full round
smooth edges.
(h) Ladder racks shall be of similar construction. The rungs shall be
spaced at maximum 300mm. The system shall allow for installing
additional rungs and for replacement of rungs.
(i) For all trays, flanges shall be a minimum of 50mm deep, unless
otherwise specified.
(j) Cable tray width and radius of curved sections shall be selected to suit
the number of cables as shown on drawings and to the approval of
the Engineer.
(k) GRP/Vinylester trays shall be made from 0% Halogen low smoke
material and shall possess self-extinguishing properties.
(l) All supports and hardware for GRP/Vinylester/SS316 trays shall be
SS315.
(m) GRP cable trays shall not present any risk of dangerous
accumulation of electrostatic charges.

17.12.10 EXECUTION - INSTALLATION

(a) Drilling, machining or cutting shall not be carried out after application
of protective coat, unless previously agreed by the Engineer. If
cutting or drilling is necessary, edges shall be cleaned up and painted
with zinc based paint before erection.
(b) Installation of vertical runs of tray along the line of vertical expansion
joints in structure of the facility shall not be allowed.
(c) Cables shall be fixed to the trays by means of PVC covered saddles

Page 262 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

or straps secured with brass or cadmium plated bolts, nuts and

washers.
(d) 20% spare capacity shall be maintained once all cables have been
installed on trays. Double banking of cables shall not be permitted.
Space between adjacent cables shall be not less than the radius of
the larger cable.
(e) Trays shall not be smaller than the minimum size stated on the
Drawings or specified later and shall be so sized. If not specified, the
Contractor shall calculate the size of the tray and submit to the
Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall check that the minimum
size as specified is large enough for his requirements and provide
20% spare capacity for future use.

17.12.11 ERECTION

(a) Cable trays arranged one above the other shall have spacing in
relation to their width not exceeding a ratio of 1:2 with a minimum
distance of 150mm.
(b) Supports:
1. Install fixings and supports.
i. At 3 metre centres or as shown on drawings
ii.150mm from bends, tees, intersections and risers
iii.As close as practicable to joints
iv.Each side of expansion joints.
2. Supports shall be selected from the following types, to suit the site
conditions:
i. M12 steel threaded drop rods fixed to ceilings complete with GI
channels or brackets
ii. Wall support brackets
iii. Cantilever arms
iv. Steel channels.
(c) The cable trays shall be fixed in accordance with site conditions and
manufacturer’s recommendations.
(d) Join cable tray and accessories with hardware per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
(e) Avoid mid-span joints.
(f) The Contractor shall submit, as required, all calculations relating to
tray work and tray supports, demonstrating acceptable mechanical
stresses and sag.
(g) Cable trays installed on roofs shall be supported using GI brackets or
concrete blocks. Removable cable tray cover shall be fitted.
(h) Access shall be available at all times to remove or replace cables with
a minimum of 400mm between trays and physical obstructions, A/C
ductwork etc.
(i) Provide adequate ventilation while tray installation is in progress.

Page 263 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.12.12 EARTHING

(a) Cable trays and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically

continuous throughout their length.
(b) The entire cable tray system shall be bonded and 12mm x 2.5mm
tinned copper links shall be bolted across each joint in the system by
means of bronze nut and bolts, complete with flat and spring washers.
(c) All cable trays shall be provided with earth continuity copper tape
along the whole route of cable trays which shall be bonded to the
main earthing system of the facility. The earth continuity copper tape
shall be fixed on cable tray by means of PVC covered saddles or by
other means approved by the Engineer.

17.12.13 TEST & INSPECTION

(a) Provide all type test reports of cable trays for Engineer’s review before
order placement.
(b) Provide routine factory test reports of cable trays for Engineer’s
approval before despatch of trays.

17.13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

17.13.1 Scope

(a) This section specifies the requirements for lightening protection

17.13.2 References

(a) The following standards are referred to in this Section:

1. BS 7430 - Code of practice for earthing
2. BS 6651 - Code of practice for protection of structures
against lightning.

17.13.3 Quality Assurance

(a) Design Criteria:

1. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with DEWA
Rules and Regulations.

17.13.4 Submittals

(a) Submit full technical details and conductor size calculations of each
type of cable or wire proposed
(b) Submit exact route of each cable or wire proposed.

17.13.5 Products - Materials

(a) Generally:
1. Products used in the lightning protection system shall be copper or
an approved copper alloy, unless otherwise specified, specifically
manufactured for the purpose.

Page 264 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) Air Termination Conductors and Down Conductors:

1. Lightning air terminals and down conductors for lightning air
terminals shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Where
vertical air terminations are used, they shall be min 15mm
diameter tinned copper (air termination rod) 0.8 meter long with
top spike, unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation
2. Generally, roof conductors and down conductors shall be PVC
sheathed 3mm x 20mm (minimum) copper tape. PVC colour to be
approved by the Engineer. However, bare copper tape may be
used, unless indicated otherwise on the Project Drawings or
Specification.
3. Air termination rods shall be securely anchored and welded.
4. Down conductors shall be run along the outer surface of the wall
or column of the building.
5. Down conductors shall be as short as possible, protected and
directly connected to earthing system through test links (refer to
item 7 below).
6. Anchoring bolts shall be used to hold roof conductors and down
conductors firmly position.
7. Lightning conductor connectors shall be provided for conductor
splice connections and conductor terminal connections.
8. The connectors shall be heavy duty, cast metal and shall have
hex-head screws in the bodies and holes in the tongues for bolts.
9. TV antenna, HVAC equipment, handrails and structures in the
vicinity of the lightning protection system, if any, shall be bonded
to the system by 3mm x 20mm (minimum) PVC sheathed copper
tape.

(c) Main Earth Loops:

1. 25mm x 3mm tinned copper tape, unless otherwise indicated on
the Project Drawings or Specification.

(d) Earth Electrodes:

1. Shall be the earth rod electrode type (unless impracticable to drive
deep into the particular soil) and shall be driven to a depth of at
least 2m below summertime water table.
2. Earth rod electrodes: 16mm diameter steel core copper jacketed
type, comprising a high strength steel alloy core with a molten
welded copper covering, minimum 0.25mm thick. Rods shall be
not less than 3.6m long, in 1.2m sections, coupled by strong
bronze couplers.

(e) Plate Electrodes

1. To be either:
i. Copper; or
ii. Cast iron, where artificial treatment of soil is necessary
because of high soil resistivity.

(f) Earth Connectors:

1. Connection of rod electrodes shall be bolted type.

(g) Removable Earth Links:

Page 265 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. To comprise a bolted copper link, fixed on porcelain insulators and

complete with studs, nuts and washers, to take the earth tape and
a bolted lug adequately sized for the final connection of the earth
electrode.

(h) Bolts, Washers And Nuts In Bolted Connections:

1. High copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not
acceptable.

(i) Earth Pit Cover

1. Shall be of heavy duty cast iron cover
2. Shall have a recessed lifting hook
3. Shall have a brass plate, engraved “Electrical Earth Below” – in
Arabic and English

17.13.6 Execution - Installation

(a) Removable Earth Links

1. Fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be
disconnected for testing.
2. Install in an accessible position, above ground as close as
possible to the earth electrode.
(b) Bolted Connections:
1. Multiple bolt type
2. Where bare copper is bolted in connections, contact surfaces shall
be silver electroplated.
(c) Brazed Connections:
1. Where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to
equipment, thoroughly clean metal prior to brazing and repaint
impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.
(d) Connections Between Dissimilar Metals:
1. Protect by:
i. Painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or
compound, or
ii. Wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
(e) Earth Rod Electrodes:
1. Drive extensible rods of the same diameter into the ground, either
manually or by power driven hammer, to a suitable depth to obtain
low resistivity in the particular soil.
2. Weld earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number
to make connection with all incoming cables.
(f) Earth Plate Electrodes:
1. Use where:
i. Ground resistivity is low but increases with depth;
ii. It is not possible to penetrate deeply into the soil.
iii. Protect terminations against corrosion.

(g) Earth Pit:

1. Construct a small concrete pit complete with removable heavy
gauge cast iron cover with recessed lifting hook, at the head of the
earth rod, to protect the rod and allow access to connections for
testing.

Page 266 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.13.7 Testing

(a) Test earthing systems by the earth megger test.

(b) The resistance of any one point in the lightning protection earth
continuity system to the main earth electrode shall not exceed 10
ohms, unless allowed otherwise by DEWA, without taking account of
any bonding to other services.
(c) Install additional earth electrodes in parallel, if these figures are not
met.

17.14 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

17.13.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for steel cabinets for motor control
centers and distribution boards. This section also includes the
specification for GRP enclosure cabinets for motor control centers and
distribution boards for outdoor installation.
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings.

17.13.2 REFERENCES

(a) NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors

Association).
(b) NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum).
(c) NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and
Systems.
(d) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
(e) EN 60947-7-1: Terminal blocks for copper conductors.
(f) Other national standards pertaining to Cabinets and Enclosures as
directed by the Engineer.

17.13.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

(a) Section 17.1 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

(b) Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures
and cabinets.

17.13.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

(a) Section 17.1 - Submittals: Submittals for information.

(b) Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

17.13.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

Page 267 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, USA

2. BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.
3. Other national standards as approved by the Engineer.
4. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)
regulations.

(b) In the case of conflict the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
(DEWA) requirements shall take precedence.

17.13.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1.

17.13.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

(a) Section 17.1.

(b) Furnish three of each key.

17.13.8 PRODUCTS - MANUFACTURERS

(a) Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum five years documented experience.
(b) Substitutions: Refer to Section 17.1.
(c) Limitations to use: The use of following types of Hinged Cover
Enclosures and Cabinets shall be limited to enclosing terminal blocks
and electrical devices rated less than 600 Volts and excluding high
voltage motor drives.

17.13.9 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES

(a) Construction: Galvanized steel with minimum sheet steel thickness of

2mm with panel fronts of thickness 2.0mm minimum.
(b) Covers: Lift-off hinge, held closed by lockable car type handles. Doors
shall close on to neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips held in place
mechanically.
(c) Provide interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical
components; finish with white enamel.
(d) Enclosure Finish: Epoxy powder coated.
(e) Enclosure Protection: Dust and vermin proof. Environmental
protection to IP 54 minimum.

17.13.10 STEEL CABINETS

(a) Boxes: Galvanized steel or stainless steel of grade 316 with minimum
sheet steel thickness of 2mm with panel fronts of thickness 2.0mm
minimum.
(b) Box Size: To suit equipment requirements.

Page 268 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) Backboard: Provide interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks
and electrical components; finish with white enamel.
(d) Fronts: Lift-off hinge, held closed by lockable car type handles. Doors
shall close on to neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips held in place
mechanically.
(e) Knockouts: To suit conduit and circuiting arrangements.
(f) Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of
different systems and voltages.
(g) Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.
(h) Finish: In accordance with epoxy powder coated.
(i) Protection: Dust and vermin proof. Environmental protection to IP 54.

17.13.11 OUTDOOR STEEL CABINETS

(a) General: The cabinet shall be of NEMA 4X or IP55 corrosion proof

construction of welded steel frame and sheet steel panels with a
baked enamel finish. Provide sheet metal sunshade panels on
enclosure sides, back and top. Provide 50mm sunshade stand-offs
permanently bolted to the enclosure to allow ambient airflow around
the enclosure. Provide canopy on roof top to provide protection
against rain water.
(b) The cabinet shall be a door-in-door structure, with hinged, dead front
outer door with print pocket. Hinged inner door shall contain
pushbuttons, indicating meters, selector switch, lights etc. Motor
starters, relays, contactors, terminal blocks etc., shall be mounted
inside on an inside frame. The panel disconnect switched shall be
mechanically interlocked with the inner door. The outer door shall be
provided with pad locking arrangement.
(c) Cable glands and gland plate shall be provided ensuring the integrity
of the IP requirement of the cabinet. Gland plate shall not form a part
of the enclosure.
(d) All the enclosures and Cabinets, whether recess mounted and or
surface mounted shall be IP65 rated and shall be made from SS316L
materials. Provide enclosures for all equipment such as Emergency
telephones, Sockets for maintenance, FHC, FEC cabinets, CCTV
camera controllers, VMS/LUS Controllers, Emergency Exit signs and
Emergency Equipment Identification signs, jet fan Motor termination
boxes, etc.

17.13.12 GRP ENCLOSURE

(a) General

1. GRP enclosure shall be installed on a concrete plinth or floor

trenches, which shall incorporate ducts for incoming and outgoing
cables. The enclosure shall be suitable for outdoor installation,
and suit site temperature and humidity conditions specified. The
degree of protection against ingress of foreign matter and moisture
shall be to IP 55 or better. The Tenderer shall submit details of the
GRP enclosure including drawings and locations where it has
successfully been installed.
2. The enclosure shall be constructed from minimum 6mm thick

Page 269 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

double walled GRP having polystyrene thermal insulation

sandwiched in-between. Proper stiffening with cross members
shall be provided to prevent deformation. Doors shall be with box
section steel encapsulated into the edges and frames. Stainless
steel pins and through bolts shall be used. Battens shall be
mounted into the inside walls to support wall mounted equipment.
Walls and roofs shall be continuously internally bonded and the
enclosure cabinet developed fully built with lifting points. Roof,
walls and doors shall be thermally insulated as specified in Section
17.1.
3. Doors shall be fitted with self-locking stays top and bottom
arranged to hold them open at 90°. Doors shall be secured by
means of externally fitted locking handles together with a securely
fitted lock. Door catches and locks shall be latch onto steel
reinforced surfaces. Hinges shall be stainless steel. Door seals
shall consist of all around channel recessed gasket of non-fatigue
age resistant material.
4. Enclosure shall be constructed to offer fire resistance (retention of
stability, integrity and insulation) as required in BS 476 Part 7
Clause 2 and tested to BS 476 Parts 20 to 23, in excess of half an
hour. The Contractor shall supply 3 copies of the necessary test
certificates for approval by the Engineer.

(b) Enclosure Lighting

1. Enclosure shall be fitted with a suitable corrosion proof LED

luminaire for general use, arranged to illuminate all internally
installed equipment. It shall be complete with “seal type” on/off
switch, inside the cabinet, adjacent to the cabinet door.
2. An external weatherproof bulkhead light fitting complete with “seal
type” on/off switch shall be fitted above the door.
3. One 230 volt 13 ampere switched socket outlet shall be provided
inside the enclosure cabinet.
(c) Enclosure Heating

1. An anti-condensation heater shall be installed in each cabinet.

Heaters shall be wall mounted and of robust construction. Heaters
shall be supplied from 230 V a.c. and controlled by a wall-mounted
humidistat.
2. Mechanical guards shall be fitted to all heaters.

(d) Air conditioning

1. Provide split type unit air conditioning for the enclosures with
MCC. The condensing unit shall be installed outside the enclosure
on concrete floor or separate foundation. Piping from the
enclosure shall be properly sealed to ensure the integrity of
protection IP classification.
2. Controlling of the unit shall be provided by internally installed
thermostat.
3. The doors shall be properly sealed with gaskets to prevent
leakage of cool air from inside the cabinet.

Page 270 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(e) Installation

1. Enclosure shall be supplied without defects. Enclosure showing

signs of any defects or repair work will be rejected by the
Engineer. Cabinet shall be mounted on a prepared surface in an
approved position. Cabinet shall be installed in full accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
2. Holding down bolts shall be of appropriate size and quantity not
less than six (6 No.) unless otherwise advised by the cabinet
manufacturer. The Contractor shall not damage any reinforcing
steel, and any abortive holes shall be grouted with 3:1 sand-
cement mixture. Holes shall be drilled to the minimum depth
required by the bolt and in any case shall not penetrate a slab or
cause any undesirable cracking or other damage.

3. The enclosure base shall be sealed to the bearing surface in a

manner recommended by the cabinet manufacturer to provide long
lasting protection to IP 55. Existing concrete surfaces shall be
carefully cleaned and prepared to ensure a proper bond to the
sealing material. The mastic seal shall be applied before and after
the cabinet is in place.

(f) Cabling

1. The following cabling shall be provided:

i. Internal cabling of the cabinet.

ii. External cabling including telecommunications cables, power
cables, and control and instrumentation cables.

2. Provision of cabling shall include:

i. Installation of above cabling including ducts as specified,

laying, glanding and terminating at both ends. The external
cable routes shall be determined at each respective Site by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
ii. Testing and commissioning of cables. Control and
instrumentation cables shall conform to BS 5308.

3. Segregation between power, and control and instrument cables

shall be maintained. External cabling shall be armored with a
termite resistant sheath.

i. Cables shall enter the cabinet below the ground via pre-cast
ducts within the plinth.
ii. All ducts entering the cabinet shall be sealed to the approval of
the Engineer. All ground areas shall be reinstated.

(g) Foundation/plinth

1. Provide suitable concrete foundation/plinth in coordination with the

Page 271 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

dimensions and weight of the MCC and enclosure. Provide trench

below the panel and 150/100 mm uPVC entry ducts for cable
entry. Submit the design to the Engineer for approval

(h) Earthing and Bonding

1. An earthing terminal shall be provided within the cabinet of

sufficient length to accommodate connections for the earthing of
all electrical circuits. Cable armoring shall not be used as the earth
conductor. All exposed and extraneous conductive parts shall be
equipotentially bonded.

(i) Notices and Labels

1. Enclosure shall be provided with a notice engraved in English and

Arabic with black letters on a yellow background, as follows:

“STATION NAME”
DANGER
400-VOLT ELECTRICAL APPARATUS

2. The notice shall be manufactured from a durable plastic material

with dimensions not less than 200 mm x 150 mm, and shall be to
the approval of the Engineer. The notice shall be fixed in a
prominent position on the exterior of the enclosure cabinet.
3. All external labels shall be in English and Arabic. Internal labels
shall be in English.
4. Labeling inside the cabinet shall be by means of rear engraved
perspex back-washed to match external color. Labels shall be
fixed by means of screw thread with countersunk heads.
5. Warning and danger notices shall be engraved labels with red
letters on white background in Arabic and English.
6. Every internal component including MCBs shall be labeled with
identification. Compartments with doors or covers, not interlocked
to an isolator shall have an external label affixed there to as
following:

“DANGER, LIVE TERMINALS”

7. with flash and voltage in red letters on white background in Arabic

and English. All live terminals shall be covered with 2 mm thick
plastic cover.
8. Stainless steel plates to grade 316 engraved in English and Arabic
with the words

“DANGER, CABLE ENTRY BELOW”

9. shall be permanently fixed to the outer side of the cabinet plinths

above where the cables enter.

17.13.13 TERMINAL BLOCKS

(a) Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

Page 272 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

specified in this section with minimum five years documented

experience.
(b) Terminal Blocks: EN 60947-7-1: Terminal blocks for copper
conductors.
(c) Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular
pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts.
(d) Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for
channel mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600
volts.
(e) Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to
enclosure.

17.13.14 ACCESSORIES

(a) Plastic Trunking:

1. Description: Plastic channel with hinged or Snap-On cover.

17.13.15 STANCHIONS

(a) Stanchions shall be provided for mounting local isolators for extract
fans, which are installed on the roof and local emergency control of
pump motors. The support structures for the stanchions shall be made
of stainless steel of grade 315. The structure shall be extended to
support the control isolators and switches at an approximate height of
0.5 meter from fixing level. The cables shall be top or bottom entry, as
per application arrangement.
(b) Stanchions for emergency stop push buttons, control devices etc.,
shall be mounted on a plinth and or bolted through roof structures or
directly to the floor. Provide canopy on the top of the switch assembly.
(c) Structures and equipment shall be weatherproof to IP 65.
(d) Heights of stanchions and mounting position of control devices shall
be uniform within same or similar areas. Where mounting height is not
shown or specified, instructions shall be obtained from the Engineer.
(e) All support structures, in general, for electrical fittings shall be made of
stainless steel grade 315. Fastenings shall be of the same material as
the support structures.

17.13.16 STEEL CHANNEL

(a) Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 17.1.
2. Description: Galvanized or Painted steel as specified.

17.13.17 EXECUTION - INSTALLATION

(a) Section 17.1 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation" and other
standards as directed by the Engineer.

Page 273 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and
structural supports at each corner under the provisions of Section
17.1.
(d) Install cabinet fronts plumb.

17.13.18 CLEANING

(a) Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work.

(b) Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials.
(c) Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
(d) Clean finishes and touch up damage.

17.15 GROUNDING AND BONDING

17.14.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes the specification for the grounding system and
provision for bonding all the conducting parts to the grounding system.
(b) A new grounding system shall be provided for the facilities being
constructed under this contract and shall incorporate the features as
described in this section. The grounding system shall provide
protection and safety to personnel against electric shock and
protection of equipment against damage due to ground fault in the
electrical system.

17.14.2 REFERENCES

(a) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

(b) BS 7671: Code of practice for earthing

17.14.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Products used in the grounding system shall be copper or an

approved copper alloy, unless otherwise specified, and specifically
manufactured for the purpose. All connectors, couplers, etc. shall
preferably be made of Bronze. For use with dissimilar materials,
suitable bi-metallic connectors shall be used.
(b) Contractor shall carry out Ground soil resistivity checks prior to
finalizing the sizes and lengths of the Earth Electrodes.

17.14.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

(a) Grounding System Resistance: 2 ohms or to meet Dubai Electricity

and Water Authority (DEWA) requirements.

17.14.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

Page 274 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.

2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.
(c) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
(d) Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.
(e) Submit full technical details and conductor size calculations suitable
for short circuit levels.
(f) Submit route of each cable or conductor as proposed.

17.14.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

(a) Section 17.1- Submittals: Submittal for information.

(b) Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of
each electrode.

17.14.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

(a) Section 17.1.

(b) Section 17.1.
(c) Project Record Documents: Record actual route of conductors, exact
locations of components and grounding electrodes.
(d) Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by the
Engineer and Water and Electricity Distribution Company (DEWA)
where required.
(e) Provide grounding test results

17.14.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, USA
2. BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.
3. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)
regulations.
(b) In the case of conflict the DEWA requirements shall take precedence.

17.14.9 PRODUCTS - ROD ELECTRODES

(a) Shall be the ground rod electrode type, unless impracticable to drive
deep into the particular soil.

Page 275 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) Ground rod electrodes: 20mm diameter comprising a Solid Copper rod
with hardened tips and threaded top ends.
(c) Shall be 3.6m long, in 1.2m sections coupled by strong bronze
couplers.
(d) Ground electrodes shall be solid copper or steel cored copper with a
metallic bonded outer surface. Electrodes shall be provided with
special hardened tips and caps to avoid distortion being driven into the
ground. Approved non-ferrous clamps for connecting the electrodes
to the copper strips leading to the disconnecting links shall be
provided.

17.14.10 PLANT ELECTRODES

(a) Shall be either Copper; or Cast iron where artificial treatment of soil is
necessary because of high soil resistivity.
(b) Description: Metallic-salt-filled tube electrode.
(c) Shape: Straight or as specified.
(d) Length: 2400 mm or as specified.
(e) Connector: U-bolt pressure plate.

17.14.11 EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTORS

(a) Sizes shall be as specified by DEWA, unless otherwise indicated, but

in no case shall size be less than half that of the associated phase
conductors.
(b) Insulation shall be of the same material as insulation in associated
sub-circuits, colored green and yellow.

17.14.12 MAIN CONDUCTOR

(a) Main grounding conductors shall comprise tinned copper tapes of hard
drawn, high conductivity copper strip or stranded copper conductor.
(b) Sized to meet requirements of latest edition of BS 7671 and to meet
DEWA regulations.
(c) Grounding conductors shall be adequately sized for the maximum
fault current and in no case shall be smaller than:
1. 38mm x 4mm for Low Voltage equipment.

17.14.13 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS

(a) Provide multiple bolted type Bronze connectors, purpose

manufactured for electrode and conductor connection. Where bare
copper is bolted in connections, contact surfaces shall be silver
electroplated.
(b) Disconnecting bolts, nuts, locknuts and washers shall be made from
phosphor bronze.

17.14.14 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS

(a) Welding materials and suitable moulds manufactured by Company

specializing in the Products specified in this section for grounding
system shall be used.

Page 276 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.14.15 PIT COMPONENTS

(a) A concrete disconnecting chamber having a removable cover and

containing a disconnecting link for test purposes shall be provided
over each earth electrode. The top of the chamber shall be at finished
ground level, and the head of each electrode shall be within the
disconnection chamber.
(b) Concrete pit: 300 x 300mm any 500mm deep or preformed concrete
chamber shall be provided at locations for electrode.
(c) Pit Cover: Cast iron or concrete with legend "EARTH" embossed on
cover and to be furnished with recessed lifting hook.
(d) The disconnecting link shall be of tinned copper, be not less than the
connecting strip cross sectional area and have a generous contact
area.

17.14.16 EXECUTION - EXAMINATION

(a) Co-ordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to

beginning work.
(b) Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before
driving rod electrodes.

17.14.17 INSTALLATION

(a) Provide a complete new grounding system for complete electrical

facilities. Existing grounding system shall be connected to the new
system, if found suitable at locations of existing facilities.
(b) Electrode System
1. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod
electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
2. Provide grounding pit with cover at each rod location. Install
grounding pit top flush with finished grade.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for any rock drilling necessary for
the installation of the electrodes, for the supply and installation of
the concrete disconnecting chamber, and the provision of any
chemicals required to assist in obtaining a satisfactory earth.
4. The ground electrodes interconnection shall be an electrically
unbroken ring using P.V.C. insulated stranded copper conductor
grounding cable sweated to the test links. The cable be adequately
sized and of sufficiently low resistance to carry the maximum fault
current for the clearing time of the protective equipment without
undue temperature rise.
5. Each group of ground electrodes shall be connected to the station
grounding system by stranded copper conductor grounding cables
or copper tapes. The cables shall be sweated to opposite ends of
the earth ring and to two different points on the station grounding
system.

Page 277 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

6. Groups of ground electrodes shall generally be located as close to

the building housing the switchgear as practical, and where two
groups are required they shall be located at opposite ends of the
building.
7. Each group shall comprise one or more interconnected electrodes,
driven to a depth of 2m below the summer water table and with
heads located at a depth to suit the disconnecting chamber
position.

(c) Grounding system

1. All connections to the ground tape and any joints in the run of the
tape shall be, tinned, riveted, sweated and electrically continuous.
The minimum overlap of any connection be equal to the width of
the larger of the two tapes. When less than four rivets are used,
they shall be located diagonally across the joint. Final earth
connections to motors shall be made by a bolted copper
disconnecting link to facilitate removal of the motors without the
need for bending the tape. Links shall be located for ease of
inspection and testing. Ground tapes shall be fixed by means of
non-ferrous spacer saddles, drilling of the conductors will not be
permitted. Ground conductors within buildings shall be run in
ducts or on the underside of control room floors where possible.
2. Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and
branch circuit trunking. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or
bushing.
3. Earth bars and earthing equipment shall be provided for each
grounding system and all main earth electrodes, grounding leads,
neutral earth connections, etc., shall be connected to these.

(d) Bonding

1. Provide grounding conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in

foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together.
2. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
3. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure;
and bond to ground.
4. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and
fountain structures.
5. Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal
object entering space under access floors. Bond to underfloor
ground grid. Use 35mm2 copper conductor.
6. The non-conducting metal work of all electrical equipment shall be
effectively earthed. Electric drives rated at 7.5 kW and above shall
be provided with an ground conductor comprising tinned copper
tape of 25mm by 3mm minimum cross section and connected to
the main earth system. On drives of less than 7.5 kW a separate
insulated copper cable may be used for grounding purposes,
providing the total impedance of earth continuity system do not
exceed one ohm. Cable armoring or sheath shall not be used as
sole ground conductor.
7. Install ground grid under access floors where indicated. Construct

Page 278 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

grid of 38mm x 4mm bare copper tape installed on 600mm centers

both ways. Bond each access floor pedestal to grid.
8. Conduit or trunking shall not be used for earth continuity, but all
conduit or trunking shall be connected to earth. All joints for cable
trays, ladders and trunking shall be bonded for continuity using 6
sq. mm. Y.G. stranded copper cable. Flexible conduits shall have
an additional external earth connection adequately bonded at both
ends. Where conduit and/or trunking is used to connect equipment
not separately bonded to the grounding system a separate internal
ground conductor shall be run, which shall be securely bonded
directly to the respective equipment by means of a separate
recognized earth terminal.

(e) Equipment grounding

1. Motors Grounding: Connect the motor terminal box to the relative

ground loop. The terminal must be mechanically connected to the
frame or, where this is not feasible, extend the grounding
conductor through an insulated bushed opening in the connection
box and connect to the frame.
2. Main Switchboards, Switchgears and Motor Control Centers
Grounding: Connect the special grounding lug or busbars inside
the cabinet to the main earth copper tape. Connect all parts of the
switchboards, switchgears and motor control centers other than
“live” parts, to the ground bar in the board in an approved manner.
3. Distribution Boards Grounding: Connect grounding conductor from
the main distribution earth busbar to an earth connector welded to
the cabinet and earthing bushings on the incoming and outgoing
feeder conduits.
4. Bus-Duct Feeders Grounding: Connect the green coded ground
busbar directly to the ground bus-bar in main switchboard with
ground copper tape.
5. Fire Fighting Equipment: ground on a separate ring system.
6. Provide separate grounding conductor for circuits supplying
electronic cash registers, personal computers and other sensitive
electronic equipment as directed the Engineer.

(f) Cable system

1. The lead sheath and/or Armour wires on main cables shall be

solidly bonded and grounded to provide additional ground paths.
Particular care shall be taken on cable termination boxes to ensure
that the cable sheath and Armour is adequately bonded to the
associated item or plant.
2. Particular care shall be taken to ensure grounding continuity
across items of equipment situated within a cable run. Should the
design of such equipment not give an adequate and lasting
continuity through its structural body, then additional grounding
and conductors shall be provided to independently bond the cable
sheaths together.
3. Joints and terminal boxes in underground cables (if approved by

Page 279 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

the Engineer's Representative) shall be bridged by tinned copper

of adequate cross section, bonded to the cable sheath.
4. Where armored cables are installed, then the armoring must be
bonded to ground using suitable glands with earthing tails. The
armoring must not be used as the sole grounding conductor.
Additional grounding shall be provided by means of a separate,
insulated P.V.C. copper cable whose insulation is green or green/
yellow. This cable shall follow the same route as the supply cable
and be taped to it at regular intervals. Alternatively an integral
ground conductor shall be provided where multicore cables are
provided.

(g) Interface with lightning protection system installed for buildings under
Section 17.1.

17.14.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Section 17.1 - Starting of Systems: Field inspection, testing, adjusting.

(b) Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13 and
other standards as directed by the Engineer to meet Dubai Electricity
and Water Authority (DEWA) requirements.
(c) The resistance of any point in the earth continuity system to the main
earth mass shall not exceed 2 ohm.
1. Measure grounding resistance at each electrode location
2. Measure overall grounding resistance of the complete system.
3. Install additional earth electrodes if these figures are not met.

17.16 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE

17.15.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for supporting devices to be used

with electrical apparatus and accessories.
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings

17.15.2 REFERENCES

(a) NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.

(b) ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

17.15.3 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.

Page 280 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

6. List of spare Parts to be provided.

7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) (b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.
(c) Product Data:

1. Provide manufacturer's catalogue data for fastening systems.

(d) Manufacturer’s Instructions:

Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

17.15.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, USA

2. BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.
3. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)
regulations
In the case of conflict the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
(DEWA) requirements shall take precedence.

(b) Products:

1. Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing

firm acceptable to the Engineer as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.

17.15.5 PRODUCTS - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

(a) Materials and Finishes:

1. Provide adequate corrosion resistance.

2. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and
supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider
weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
3. Anchors and Fasteners:
i. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system,
expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset
inserts as specified. Use of expansion anchor is not allowed in
the structure which has contact with water.
ii. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded
fasteners as specified.

Page 281 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

iii. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion

anchors.
iv. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use
toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.
v. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset
inserts.
vi. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
vii. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

17.15.6 STANCHIONS

(a) Stanchions shall be provided for mounting local isolators for extract
fans, which are installed on the roof and local emergency control of
pump motors. The support structures for the stanchions shall be made
of stainless steel of grade 315. The structure shall be extended to
support the control isolators and switches at an approximate height of
0.5 meter from fixing level. The cables shall be top or bottom entry, as
per application arrangement.
(b) Stanchions for emergency stop push buttons, control devices etc.,
shall be mounted on a plinth and or bolted through roof structures or
directly to the floor. Provide canopy on the top of the switch assembly
(c) Structures and equipment shall be weatherproof to IP 65.
(d) Heights of stanchions and mounting position of control devices shall
be uniform within same or similar areas. Where mounting height is not
shown or specified, instructions shall be obtained from the Engineer.
(e) All support structures, in general, for electrical fittings shall be made of
stainless steel grade 315. Fastenings shall be of the same material as
the support structures

17.15.7 STEEL CHANNEL

(a) Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.

1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 17.1.

(b) Description: Galvanized or Painted steel as specified.

17.15.8 EXECUTION - INSTALLATION

(a) Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA
"Standard of Installation" and other standards as directed by the
Engineer.
(c) Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and
conduit.
(d) Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
(e) Obtain permission from Engineer before using powder-actuated
anchors.

Page 282 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(f) Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural

members.
(g) Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld
members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with
adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all
nuts.
(h) Install surface-mounted cabinets and panel boards with minimum of
four anchors.
(i) In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand
cabinets and panel boards 25 mm off wall.
(j) Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets
and panel boards recessed in hollow partitions.
(k) Do not fix G.I. cable trays/ladders/trunking direct to the floor. Maintain
50 mm. Space over the floor.

17.17 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

17.16.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section specifies the system to provide identification of electrical

items in the related items
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings

17.16.2 REFERENCES

(a) ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

17.16.3 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.
(c) Product Data: Provide catalogue data for nameplates, labels, and

Page 283 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

markers.

17.16.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, USA

2. BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.
3. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)
regulations.

In the case of conflict the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority

(DEWA) requirements shall take precedence.

17.16.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

(a) Furnish under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.16.6 PRODUCTS - NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

(a) Nameplates:
1. External labels: Clear perspex back engraved in Arabic and
English with chamfered edges fixed with chrome plated nuts and
bolts with slotted holes to allow for expansion of the label.
2. Internal labels: Multi-layered plastic to an approved design
engraved in Arabic and English, and fixed with chrome plated nuts
and bolts or a permanent adhesive.
3. Adhesive labels will not be acceptable for internal components and
fuses.
4. Labels for internal components and Fuses shall have circuit
designations, which can be correlated with the drawings.
5. Labels shall not be attached to trunking covers or other readily
removable items.

(b) Locations:

1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment compartment -

Title Label.
2. Each door mounted component - Function Label.
3. Every internal component - Identification Label.
4. Each Fuse - Identification Label (Fuse type, rating).
5. Communication cabinets - Title Label.
6. Compartments with doors and covers not electrically interlocked to
an isolator, external label - “ DANGER, LIVE TERMINALS ” with
flash and voltage in red letters on white background in Arabic and
English.
7. Each group of terminal blocks - Function description Label.

(c) Letter Size:

Page 284 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. To the approval of the Engineer

17.16.7 WIRE MARKERS

(a) Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 17.1 - Material and Equipment.
(b) Description: Interlocking ferrules of white insulating material engraved
in black. Letters and symbols to IEC 446.
(c) Locations: Each conductor at pull boxes outlet and junction boxes
and each load connection.
(d) Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number
indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and
interconnection diagrams on drawings.

17.16.8 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

(a) Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 17.1.
(b) Description: 100 mm wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow
with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
(c) Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) requirements

17.16.9 EXECUTION - PREPARATION

(a) Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

17.16.10 APPLICATION

(a) Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.

(b) Secure nameplate to equipment front as specified.
(c) Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is
recessed in finished locations.
(d) Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape.
Install one tape per trench at 150mm below finished grade.

17.18 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

17.17.1 SUMMARY

(a) This specification section covers the supply and installation of power
factor correction equipment operating on electrical power systems up
to 600-volt ac 50 Hz.
(b) Coordinate the work with other relevant items as specified in the
related sections below.

Page 285 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.17.2 SCOPE

(a) Provide factory-assembled and pre-wired equipment consisting of unit

capacitors, power factor sensing and control equipment, integral
disconnect switch, and switching contactors to provide variable
correction within discrete steps to maintain preset value of power
factor.
(b) Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and accessories
necessary to furnish and install the work of this Section, complete and
functional, as indicated in the Contract Documents and as specified
herein.
(c) P.F. correction capacitors shall be installed in a panel separate from
MCC/LV Panel.

17.17.3 REFERENCES

(a) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)

(b) IEC 70 / BS 1650 - Specification for capacitors for connection to
power-frequency systems.
(c) IEC 831 - Automatic capacitor banks
(d) BS 88 - Cartridge fuses for voltages up to 1000 volt
ac
(e) BS 1650 - Capacitors for connection to power
frequency systems
(f) BS 5424 - Control gear for voltages up to 1000 volt ac

17.17.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Power factor improvement equipment shall be provided in LV (400 V)

Motor Control Centers. Correction shall be automatic and be capable
of correcting the power factor to within the range 0.93 lagging to unity
as required by the design.
(b) Individual power factor capacitors shall be provided for the larger
motorized drives, as indicated on the drawing. Otherwise provide
central capacitor banks as per DEWA requirement
(c) A common unit shall be provided for locations where a number of
motors smaller than 11kW are connected from the same bus, as
indicated on the drawing.
(d) All capacitors must be arranged so that they are connected to the
motor control center/ MDB in stages. The PF correction shall be in
minimum seven steps. These stages shall be sized to prevent system
over-voltage during light loads conditions.
(e) Contractor shall submit the Capacitor sizing calculations fro
Engineer’s review prior to starting the procurement of PFC panels.

17.17.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:
1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive

Page 286 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

literature on the equipment.

3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and
power requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.
(c) Product Data - Provide outline and mounting dimensions, weights,
voltage and capacity ratings, fusing and accessories.

17.17.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

(a) Section 17.1: Submittals for information.

(b) Manufacturer's Instructions - Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

17.17.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

(a) Operation and Maintenance Data:

(b) Submittals for project closeout.
(c) Record actual locations of capacitors in project record documents.
(d) Maintenance Data - Include cell and fuse replacement instructions.
(e) Include maintenance and trouble shooting instructions for electronic
components.

17.17.8 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
(b) Design power factor correction under direct supervision of a
Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed.

17.17.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), USA

2. BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.

Page 287 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

3. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

regulations.
(b) In the case of conflict the DEWA requirements shall take precedence.
(c) Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or
testing firm acceptable to the Engineer as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.

17.17.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1 – Provisions
for Electrical Requirements.

17.17.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

(a) Section 17.1 - Contract Closeout.

(b) Furnish number of each size and type of capacitor fuse as specified in
the Schedule of Spare Parts.

17.17.12 PRODUCTS - UNIT CAPACITORS

(a) Capacitors shall comply with BS 1650 and shall be of a dry metalised
film construction, containing no liquid and must have low losses
(typically 0.5 Watts/kVAr).
(b) Each capacitor shall be housed in a sealed container and be fitted
with a fail-safe, pressure sensitive disconnect device.
(c) Each capacitor shall be equipped with suitable discharge resistors to
reduce the voltage to less than 50V in one minute, or less, after supply
disconnection.
(d) The capacitors shall be housed in a metal enclosure, forming part of
the motor control centers. The enclosure size should allow enough
space and cabling etc., for at least one additional capacitor unit to be
fitted at a later date.
(e) Provision shall be made to ensure that a connection point is available
for a series connected, de-tuning reactor in case of problems with
harmonics.
(f) The equipment must comply with BS 800 with respect to electrical
interference.
(g) The capacitors shall be protected by a fused switch-disconnector or
circuit breaker on the LV motor control center.
(h) The capacitor manufacturer must recommend the maximum fuse or
circuit breaker that will ensure the protection of each capacitor bank.
(i) All power and control cables used within the capacitor bank enclosure
must be in accordance with BS 6231 Type BK.
(j) Capacity: Approved kVAR at rated voltage and frequency to meet
Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) requirements.
(k) Operating Temperature Limits: 110 percent rated voltage in ambient
air temperature between 0 degrees C and 55 degrees C.

Page 288 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(l) Finish: As per this section - General Equipment Provisions.

17.17.13 POWER FACTOR CONTROLLER UNITS

(a) The switching of capacitor units on each section of switchgear must

be controlled by a single relay.
(b) Reactive current sensing and solid-state electronic controller connects
appropriate correction capacitors to line through contactors, with time
delay to accommodate capacitor resistor discharge and to prevent
hunting.
(c) The relay shall:
1. have stage indication
2. be fitted with hand/off/auto controls for each capacitor unit
3. have a time delay between the switching of stages
4. have setting range from 0.9 lagging to unity power factor
5. be capable of switching all fitted capacitor units and have provision
for switching at least one additional capacitor unit
6. be fitted within the capacitor bank enclosure;
7. have provision to switch all capacitors out of circuit when the
essential alternator is operating, by operation of a remote relay
contact.
(d) Switching contactors must have a minimum duty category AC4 to BS
5424 and a minimum current rating of 1.3 times the current consumed
by the capacitor bank. (See BS 1650).
(e) Due account must be taken of system harmonics when selecting
capacitors.

17.17.14 EXECUTION - INSTALLATION

(a) Install capacitors in accordance with the NECA Standard of

Installation or other standards as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Provide equipment supports in accordance with 17.1.
(c) The capacitor shall be connected after the line contactor but before
the motor protection overloads and ammeter so that the motor current
only is indicated.
(d) PF correction system shall be automatically disconnected from load
circuit, should standby generator be connected to it to avoid over
voltage.

17.17.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Section 17.1 - Starting of Systems: Field inspection, testing, adjusting.

(b) Inspect and test as directed by the Engineer.

17.19 FUSES

17.19.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for fuses for protection of

equipment against fault in the system and overloading of particular

Page 289 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

circuits.
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings.

17.19.2 REFERENCES

(a) NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.

(b) NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
(c) BS 88/IEC 269 - Cartridge Fuses for voltages up to and
including 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c.

17.19.3 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.

(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The

Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.
(c) Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics
including time-current curves.

17.19.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Record actual fuse sizes.

17.19.5 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
(b) Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.19.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, USA

Page 290 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.

Latest issue of Dubai Water and Electricity Authority (DEWA)
regulations.

In the case of conflict the Dubai Water and Electricity Authority

(DEWA) requirements shall take precedence.

(b) Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. or testing firm acceptable to the Engineer as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.

17.19.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1 – Provisions
for Electrical Requirements.

17.19.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

(a) Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Provide two insulated fuse pullers where specified.

17.19.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

(a) Furnish under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Provide number of each size and type fuse installed as specified in the
Schedule of Spare Parts.

17.19.10 PRODUCTS - FUSE REQUIREMENTS

(a) Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, IEC 269, BS 88 or other

approved standard, Class as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and to meet Dubai Water and Electricity Authority
(DEWA) regulations.
(b) Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-
phase voltage.
(c) Main Incoming Service Switches

Conforming to one of the following as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer and to meet Dubai Water and Electricity Authority
(DEWA) regulations:

1. NEMA Class L time delay / fast-acting

NEMA Class G
EC 269
BS 88

(d) Power Load Outgoing Feeder Switches and Branch Circuits:

Conforming to one of the following as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and to meet Dubai Water and Electricity Authority
(DEWA) regulations:

Page 291 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. NEMA Class L time delay/fast-acting

NEMA Class G
IEC 269
BS 88

(e) Motor Load Feeder Switches and Branch Circuits:

Conforming to one of the following as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer and to meet Dubai Water and Electricity Authority
(DEWA) regulations:
1. NEMA Class M
NEMA Class J time delay
IEC 269
BS 88

(f) Lighting Load Feeder Switches and Branch:

Conforming to one of the following as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer and to meet Dubai Water and Electricity Authority
(DEWA) regulations:
1. NEMA Class L time delay/fast-acting
NEMA Class T
IEC 269
BS 88

(g) Small Power Branch and Control Circuits:

Conforming to one of the following as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer and to meet Dubai Water and Electricity Authority
(DEWA) regulations:
1. NEMA Class G
IEC 269
BS 88

17.19.11 FUSE AND FUSE-CARRIER MANUFACTURER

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the both fuses

and fuse-carrier specified in this section with minimum five years
documented experience.

17.19.12 SPARE FUSE CABINET

(a) Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet, suitably sized to store

spare fuses and fuse pullers specified.
(b) Doors: Hinged, with hasp for Owner's padlock.
(c) Finish: In accordance with Section 17.1 – Provisions for Electrical
Requirements.

17.19.13 EXECUTION - INSTALLATION

(a) Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size

Page 292 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

are easily read.

(c) Install spare fuse cabinet where specified or indicated.

17.20 FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES OF SWITCH/CONTROL GEARS

17.20.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for switchboards which are factory
built and supplied as assembled item.
(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings.
(c) This section shall be applicable to all LV Switchgear and Main LV
Distribution Boards (MDBs) being supplied for this project.

17.20.2 REFERENCES

(a) BS 88/IEC 269 - Cartridge fuses for voltages up to

and including 1000 V a.c. and 1500
V d.c.
(b) BS 89/IEC 51 - Direct acting indicating analogue
electrical measuring instruments and
their accessories.
(c) BS 142 - Electrical Protection Relays.
(d) BS 1650/IEC 70 - Specification for capacitors for
connection to power frequency
systems.
(e) BS 3535 - Isolating transformers and safety
isolating transformers.
(f) EN 60898 - Specification for circuit breakers for
over current protection for household
and similar installations.
(g) BS 7626/IEC 185 - Specifications for current
transformers.
(h) BS 3939/IEC 617 - Graphical symbols for electrical
power, telecommunications and
electronics diagrams.
(i) BS 6231 - Specification for PVC-insulated
cables for switchgear and control
gear wiring.
(j) IEC 298 / BS 5227 - Specification for a.c. metal-enclosed
switchgear and control gear for rated
voltages above 1 kV and up to and
including 52 kV.
(k) EN 60947/IEC 947 - Specifications for low-voltage
switchgear and control gear.
(l) EN 60439/IEC 439 - Specification for low-voltage
switchgear and control gear
assemblies.
(m) BS 4800 - Schedule of paint colors for building

Page 293 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

purposes.
(n) EN 60529 - Specification for degrees of
protection provided by enclosures
(IP Code).
(o) BS 159 - Specification for high voltage
busbars and busbar connections.
(p) EN 60073 - Specification for coding of indicating
devices and actuators by colors and
supplementary means.
(q) BS 7625 - Specification for voltage
transformers.
(r) BS 921 - Rubber mats for electrical purposes.
(s) EN 60903 - Specification for gloves and mitts of
insulating material for live working.

17.20.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

(a) Factory Built Assemblies of Switchgear and Control gear made up of a

number of cubicles of equal height and depth mounted side by side to
form a composite board of uniform appearance as required for motor
control centers.

17.20.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

(a) Design low-voltage assemblies to conform to requirements of BS EN

60439 (IEC 439) for Type tested Multi-cubicle-type Assemblies or
other approved equivalent standard, in order to provide fully
segregated self-contained compartments. Ventilated cubicles are not
acceptable.
(b) Design high-voltage assemblies to fully conform to BS 5227 and BS
6581 or other approved equivalent standards for metal clad
switchgear and control gear.

17.20.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) All FBA's shall consist of a number of cubicles of equal height and
depth mounted side by side to form a composite board of uniform
appearance.
(b) Assemblies shall be front access only, unless specified otherwise;
constructed such that doors and covers are flush with one another and
aligned to a common vertical plane; manufactured from mild steel
having the following minimum thickness:

1. Plinth/bed frame - 3.0mm

2. Frames - 2.0mm
3. Covers and Doors - 2.0mm
4. Mounting Plates - 2.0mm

(c) All except mounting plates shall be stove enameled to BS 4800 shade
18E51, 0.075mm enamel thickness minimum.

Page 294 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(d) The assembly shall have sufficient strength to ensure that:

1. it can be transported and installed without damage
2. during operation/maintenance no part of the assembly shall distort
or resonate.

(e) All assemblies shall be vermin proof, and dust and damp protected to
BS EN 60529 (IEC 529) Type IP54

17.20.6 SUBMITTALS

(a) Submit under provisions of section PS-10/1.

(b) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
(c) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
(d) Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of section PS-
10/1.

17.20.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

(a) Submit under provisions of section PS-10/1.

17.20.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of section PS-10/1.

17.20.10 QUALIFICATIONS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
(b) Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum five years documented experience.
(c) Design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this Work.

17.20.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.

17.20.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
section PS-10/1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under section PS-10/1.

17.20.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Provide equipment suitable for climate specified under this section.

Page 295 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.20.14 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.20.15 PRODUCTS - CONSTRUCTION

(a) Site Considerations

1. The maximum height of assemblies shall be 2300mm above

finished floor level.
2. Site consideration including safety and maintenance shall be taken
into account in the design of assemblies. These considerations
shall include:

i. Clear space in front: at least 900mm with largest cubicle door

open at right angles or 1500mm minimum.
ii. Clear space at both ends and to the rear: 750mm
iii. Provision of sufficient space to allow for doors to open fully
without fouling other items of equipment or other open doors.
iv. Limit the size and weight of assembly sections to those
imposed by transportation, site access and permitted levels of
site floor loading.

(b) Mounting

1. Floor

i. Floor mounted assembles shall either be provided with an

integral plinth or a separate rolled mild steel channel bed
frame, at least 50mm high.
ii. Fixing shall be by not less than four holding down bolts per
assembly section, located around the periphery of the section.
The fixing shall not be visible from outside the section, but
shall be readily accessible from within.
2. Wall

i. At least four lugs shall be provided for bolting to the wall.

Fixing holes shall not be provided inside the assembly, which
shall stand at least 10mm off the wall surface.

3. Post/Column

i. Fixings shall be provided outside the enclosure. The back of

the enclosure shall not be drilled to accept fixings.

(c) Cubicles

1. The type of cubicle construction shall normally be multi-cubicle

type unless specified otherwise.
i. Multi-cubicle assemblies shall be designed to provide fully
segregated self-contained compartments. Each cubicle shall
have its own door.
ii. If Wardrobe cubicles are specified they shall be provided with

Page 296 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

a means of ensuring that equipment can be adequately

isolated for maintenance purposes without interrupting
essential drive units, which may continue to operate whilst
maintenance is being undertaken.

(d) Doors and Covers

1. Doors shall be adequately sized to accommodate readily and

neatly all mounted equipment, open at least 120 degrees, be
rigidly constructed, suitably braced and provided with at least two
substantial hinges which shall be captive when the door is closed.
2. Each door shall be provided with chromium plated ‘T’ type catches
at least one of which shall be lockable.
3. Locking combinations shall be provided as specified. Three keys
for each key type shall be provided on individual key rings having
a nametag showing identify details.
4. Where padlocking facilities are specified, the padlocks will be
supplied and fitted by the Employer.
5. Equipment shall not be mounted on covers. Covers shall not weigh
more than 30kg, and any cover over 7.5kg shall be provided with a
means of supporting the lower edge when its securing bolts are
being inserted or removed.
6. Removable back covers shall be provided.
7. Each door shall be provided with an internal welded earthing stud,
and shall be bonded to the assembly main earth bar.
8. Doors and covers giving access to potentially live conductors shall
be provided with prominent warning labels, in English and Arabic.
9. Doors on outdoor assemblies shall be retained in the open position
by the provision of adequately fixed stays.

(e) Component Mounting

1. Each cubicle shall be provided with a removable steel component

mounting plate located clear of the cubicle rear panel.
2. All components, other than door mounted, shall be located on the
component mounting plate by bolting into tapped holes or by using
self-tapping screws. Nuts used for securing components shall be
captive. Rail type fixings may be used where appropriate.
Components shall not be mounted on any other surface.
3. No components shall be located within the assembly at a height
greater than 2000mm or less than 500mm above finished floor
level.
4. It shall be possible to replace and maintain any component without
first removing other components.
(f) Bolts, Nuts and Screws
1. All bolts, nuts, screws and washers used in the construction of the
assembly shall be stainless steel of grade 316 L
2. Bolts and nuts for cover fixing shall be captive and provided with
protective washers to prevent damage to paintwork.
3. Floor fixing bolts shall be manufactured from stainless steel.

Page 297 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(g) Protection and Finish General

1. Component mounting plates shall have a semi-matt light color.

The protection of externally mounted components shall be no less
than that of the assembly on which they are mounted subject to a
minimum of IP54.

(h) Outdoor Gear

1. Externally mounted assemblies shall be protected to BS EN 60529

IP67 (weatherproof), with a rear sloping weather canopy
projecting over the front by at least 75mm. Door-mounted
components shall be protected by a vandal resistant secondary
glazed door so that all controls and indicators are clearly visible.

(i) Indoor Gear

1. Protection classification shall be IP54, unless the Contractor

considers a specific cubicle requires louvered ventilators, in which
case its classification shall be not less than IP31. Louvers shall be
provided with fine mesh screens.

(j) Auxiliary Supplies - Control

1. Unless specified otherwise control supplies shall be 110V a.c.

derived from a transformer within the assembly, fused on its
primary and secondary windings with a removable neutral link in
the secondary circuit; each cubicle being separately sub-fused so
that a fault in one cubicle does not affect others.

(k) Cubicle Heaters

1. Each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed

compartment heater. Apart from those in motor starter
compartments the heaters shall be controlled by means of
individual "OFF/AUTO" switches. Auto operation shall be by
means of adjustable panel mounted humidistat covering the range
of humidity envisaged. Each circuit shall be fused and taken from
the load side of the compartment isolator where applicable.

(l) Future Extensions

1. Boards shall be arranged for ready extension at each end.

(m) Mains Monitoring

1. A mains monitoring unit shall be provided for each incoming

supply unless specified otherwise. Each unit shall be separately
fused, connected to all phases and neutral and shall de-energize
at or below 90% of rated voltage on any one or more phases. The
unit shall incorporate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute timer.

(n) Automatic Restart

Page 298 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. All plant shall be designed for direct manual operation, as well as

automatic operation, which shall be as specified in the Particular
Specification.
2. The control system shall be arranged so that following the loss of
any phase of the power supply, as detected by the mains
monitoring unit, the plant shall stop. The control system shall self
reset and the plant be brought back into automatic operation when
the supply had returned and been healthy for an adjustable preset
time period.
3. Timers shall be incorporated so that drives start in an orderly
manner.

17.20.16 MAIN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD (M.D.B.)

(a) General

1. The Main Low Voltage Switchboard shall be of Indoor

construction, purpose made, floor standing, dead front, totally
enclosed, cellular cubicle type, dust protected, verminproof and of
clean and modern appearance containing the main components
shown on the Drawings and/or specified.
2. The switchboards shall be fabricated, assembled, wired, checked,
tested and coordinated at the factory by one manufacturer using
the same make for all internal switchgear components and shall be
constructed in accordance with BS 5486; Part 1 or IEC60 439.
3. The switchboard shall be equipped with Air Circuit Breakers,
moulded case circuit breakers, relays, instruments, transformers,
ancillary devices necessary for operation protection or
measurement purposes and Auto Transfer Switch with Manual by
pass arrangement as indicated on the Drawings.
4. The Normal Components, Fittings and Accessories required for
safe and proper operation of switchgear shall be provided, whether
specifically mentioned herein or not.
5. To withstand thermal and mechanical stresses set up by short
circuit conditions in accordance with the fault through current of
the feeding transformer. In general minimum fault breaking
capacity shall be as follows unless otherwise specifically indicated
on the drawings. Higher breaking capacities may be required at
no extra cost to satisfy calculation/analysis.
i 50KA R.M.S. for MDB and MCC if fed directly from transformer
“1000 KVA Transformer”.
ii 35KA R.M.S. for MSB, MCC and SMSB if fed from MDB.
iii 25KA R.M.S. for SMSB and MCC if fed from MSB.
iv 14KA R.M.S. for Individual MSB if mentioned specifically. For
higher rating Transformers the breaking capacity shall be as
per DEWA Requirements.

6. Spare ways indicated on the Single Line Diagram shall be fully

equipped.

Page 299 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) Construction

1. Switchboard shall be factory built, totally enclosed, and rear

accessible. Size, rating arrangements shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.
2. The switchboard shall consist of standard cubicles assembled
together on continuous base channels to form a rigid in line flush
fronted free standing continuous switchboard assembly. Frames
are constructed from 2.0mm thick folded sheet steel strengthened
wherever necessary. The cubicle shall be sufficiently rigid to
withstand all operating forces without deformation or damage.
3. Each cubicle shall be divided into segregated busbar section and
circuit section. The circuit section shall be further divided into
segregated compartments for housing main and emergency circuit
breakers and other devices. Access to internal components of any
compartment must be feasible by isolating its particular switch.
The hinged door shall be mechanically interlocked with the switch
in such a manner that the door can be opened only in the ‘OFF’
position.
4. The switchboards shall be totally enclosed, all hinged doors,
covers shall be gasketed to provide protection against dust.
5. Cabinet shall have adequate means of lifting and shall be capable
of being rolled or moved into the installation position and bolted
directly to the floor.
6. The switchboards shall be provided with suitable cable glands to
suit the type, size and number of cables as indicated on the
Drawings. The cable glands or bracket where required shall be
adequately mounted inside the switchboard. The switchboards
shall be provided with the proper cable fixing clamps and terminal
lugs for incoming and outgoing cables as well as earth bonding
connections.
7. After fabrication, steel work shall be cleaned, zinc sprayed and
stove enamelled with one prime coat, two under-coats and one
finishing coat, the surface being rubbed down after each coat.
8. Finished colour : light grey or as approved by the Engineer.

(c) Labels

1. All the components in the switchboards shall be identified by

means of white labels of an approved design engraved with 5mm
black lettering adequately describing the function of the unit to
which it is attached and shall be secured by screws to the outside
of each item. Special outlets and equipment shall be fitted with
labels in a similar manner. Labels secured by adhesive are not
acceptable.

2. All labels shall be engraved in both Arabic and English and shall
be approved by the Engineer.

(d) Switchboard Wiring

Page 300 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. Switchboards shall be furnished completely wired including all

cleats and terminal blocks.
2. Control and instrument wiring shall be made with a standard
switchboard colour coded cable with fire resistant braid. No cable
sizes smaller than 2.5 sq.mm shall be used.
3. The wiring on instrument panels shall have flexible connections to
the terminal blocks.
4. The end of every wire shall be numbered with the number as
stated in the control circuit wiring diagram of the manufacturer,
also number the terminal blocks.
5. A sufficient number of terminal connections including 15% spare
terminals shall be provided for all control and instrument wiring.

(e) Safety Measures

Circuit breakers shall be provided with suitable means to prevent

unauthorised and accidental operations. Interlocks to prevent
dangerous operations shall be provided wherever necessary. High
voltage parts shall be protected to prevent accidental human contact.
Warning signs of durable type fixed on visible place shall be provided
on high voltage parts. Earthing of metal parts shall be provided.

(f) Panel Lighting

Each cubicle, where a door is required to be opened for access, shall

be provided with LED lighting which shall be automatically switched
on when the panel door is opened.

(g) Annunciation

Audible and visual annunciation for each panel shall be provided. The
audible annunciation for minor fault and major fault shall be
differentiated by separate tones.

(h) Lamp Test and Re-setting

Each panel shall be provided with lamp testing switch and re-setting
facility.

(i) Lamp Indication

A pilot lamp for each panel shall be provided. The lamp shall light up
when the input cable is live irrespective of the position of the circuit
breaker in the panel.
(j) Busbars

1. The busbars shall be electro-tinned hard drawn, high conductivity

99.9% purity, suitably sleeved for phase identification to BS 158.
2. All busbars shall extend through the length of the board with same
cross section throughout unless indicated otherwise.
3. A Copper Earth Busbar sized at least 50% of the phase busbars
shall be provided along the full length of the board.

Page 301 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

4. Busbars shall be adequately supported by porcelain or moulded

insulators spaced on suitable centres so that the complete
assembly can withstand the maximum mechanical stresses to
which it may be subjected to under fault conditions.
5. Busbars shall be housed in separate adequately ventilated
compartment which shall not contain any wiring or apparatus other
than that required for connections for busbars.
6. Rating : As indicated on the drawings.

(k) Main Air Circuit Breakers

1. To IEC 157-1 or BS 4752 : Part 2, suitable for triple pole service

and shall have breaking capacity of 50 KA symmetrical for 1
second at 415 Volts.
2. The Air Circuit Breakers (the conventional type and not moulded
case circuit breaker) shall be 500 V, 50Hz, triple pole with neutral
link on ratings as shown on the Drawings. They shall be air break,
trip free, drawout type with mechanical and electrical ON/OFF
indicators.
3. All air circuit breakers shall be electrically operated by automatic
motor wound spring mechanism. A standby manual operating
handle shall be provided for operating the circuit breaker in case of
power or motor failure.

4. The air circuit breaker shall be provided with over current, short
circuit and earth fault protection having the following
characteristics:
i Adjustable long time delay current setting (50% - 150%) with
varied tripping time.
ii Adjustable short time delay current setting (400% - 1000%)
with variable tripping time.
iii Instantaneous tripping for heavier over current adjustable from
400% - 1600% of base current.
iv Adjustable earth fault trip current setting (20% - 60%) with
variable tripping time.

5. The circuit breaker shall have three position on the drawout

mechanism, namely service position where all main and auxiliary
contacts are made, test position where main contacts are open but
auxiliary contacts are closed and isolated position where all
contacts are open. An indicator shall clearly show these positions
and provisions shall be made for locking the breakers in any
position. ON/OFF indicator shall be provided.
6. Mechanical Interlocks shall be provided to prevent withdrawing or
inserting of the breaker when it is ‘ON’. Any attempt to do so shall
trip the breaker automatically.
7. The withdrawable part of the circuit breaker shall be effectively
connected to earth through scraping contacts that shall make
before and break after the main and auxiliary contacts.
8. The moving contacts comprising the main and arcing contacts

Page 302 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

shall be of the spring loaded, self aligning type. The arc contacts
shall be arranged to make before and break after the main
contacts.

9. Each ACB shall be included but not limited with following

components and accessories:
i Auxiliary Contacts
ii Arc Chutes
iii Folding Extension Rail
iv Charging Handle
v Open and Close Pushbuttons
vi Over Current Trip Indicator
vii Keylock on Trip Button
viii Spring Charge Condition Indicator
ix Breaker Position Indicator
x Making Current Release
xi Automatic Shutters for the B/B Terminal
xii Carriage for every size of ACB exceeding 25 KG in Weight
xiii Operation Counter.

10. The Main Incoming Circuit Breakers shall be provided with cable
boxes to suit the incoming cables from the transformers which are
supplied and installed by the Dubai Electricity & Water Authority
(DEWA).
11. Circuit breakers shall be tropicalized to operate continuously in an
ambient temperature of 55°C and high relative humidity.
12. Type test certificate for each size of circuit breakers and MCCB’s
from an internationally recognized testing authority acceptable to
the Engineer shall be provided.

(l) Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.

1. Shall have a combination of thermal and magnetic tripping giving

an inverse time delay protection against sustained overloads and
instantaneous tripping under heavy overloads and short circuits.
2. Breakers shall have a quick make, quick break over-center
switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle
so that contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and
abnormal current.
3. Tripping due to overload or short circuits shall be clearly indicated
by the handle assuming a position mid-way between the manual
ON and OFF position.
4. Latch surfaces shall be polished.
5. Poles shall be constructed to open, close and trip simultaneously.
6. Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible.
7. Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case to IEC
No. 157 - 1A, suitable for installation inside switchboards.
8. Non-interchangeable trip breakers shall have the trip unit sealed.

Page 303 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

9. Breakers with earth leakage relay protection shall be provided with

shunt trips.
10. Frame sizes:
i Frame sizes shall be as per manufacturer’s standard size and
as approved by the Engineer.
11. The magnetic trip shall be adjustable type for rating 200 Amp. and
above.
12. MCCBs shall be motor operated whenever shown on drawings.

(m) Earth Leakage Relay.

1. The relay shall comprise a core balance transformer, tripping

mechanism and reset testing buttons.
2. The relay shall operate within 0.2 sec, when the fault current
exceeds specified sensitivity as detailed on the Drawings.
3. The relay shall be connected to the load side and the testing
device shall be connected to the supply side.
4. The relay shall withstand available short circuit. In case of using
with the MCCB’s integrated E/L Relay in MCCB can be accepted.

5. Audible and visual alarm earth leakage relay shall be provided

where specified on the Drawings.
i. Similar in construction to Earth Leakage Relay except it
operates an audible and visual alarm located in the board and
remotely positioned in lieu of shunt trip of the breakers.
ii Audible Alarm shall be of sufficient level and may be cancelled
by suitable reset button but visual indicator shall remain ON
until fault is Cleared.

(n) Instruments.

The Measuring Instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, KWH

meters, selector switches and associated accessories as indicated on
the Drawings and described herein as follows:

Ammeter, Voltmeter and Power Factor Meter:

1. The measuring instruments shall be moving iron vane type, flush
pattern with dust and moistureproof enclosure. Anti-glare glass
front, anti-parallax scales and white faces with black numerals and
marking shall be used. All instruments shall be of long scale 240
Degree with full load indicating approximately at 180°.
2. The dial size shall be 10 x 10 sq.cm.
3. Accuracy shall be one percent of full scale values.
4. Moving elements shall be provided with zero adjustments located
at face of dial.
5. The Ammeter shall be capable of withstanding twice of rated
current for 10 minutes and overload sustained under fault
conditions without damage or loss of accuracy.
6. Voltmeter shall have a measuring range from 0 to 500 V and shall

Page 304 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

withstand twice the rated full scale voltage for 1.0 minute without
damage.
7. Three Ammeters or a single ammeter with selector switch shall be
provided to read the current of each phase, as indicated on the
Drawings.
8. The voltmeter selector switch shall be of the rotary type with cam
operated contactor and shall have (7) positions off, R-Y, Y-B, R-N,
Y-N, B-N.
9. Single and poly phase power factor meters with associated current
and potential transformers shall be provided as required and
specified herein.

Current Transformers:
1. Current transformers shall be of the bar primary type, air cooled
and suitably insulated. The current transformers shall be of Class
C accuracy for indication and Class CM accuracy for metering
purposes.
2. Current transformers shall be rated not less than 5 VA and shall
have thermal and mechanical rating at least equal to those of the
main circuit breakers.

KWH Meters:

1. The KWH meters shall be suitable for operation on 415/240 Volt, 3

phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz supply and shall conform to BS 37 Part 1 and
BS 5685.
2. The meters shall be dust-proof and verminproof, protected from
corrosion due to high humidity and compensated against the effect
of temperature up to 55°C.
3. The meters shall maintain their accuracy over many years service
under Kuwait climatic conditions. The counter shall be of the cycle
meter type with six figures, the lowest figure being unit. Pointer
type counters are not acceptable.
4. The meter cover and cases shall be of metal.
5. Meters shall not have less than 5mm diameter terminal holes and
shall be operated through three 3000/5A current transformers and
the counter of the meter should be calibrated to read the primary
KWH.
6. All meters shall be handled over to the Ministry of Electricity and
Water for calibration prior to final installation and connection.

(o) Automatic Transfer Switch (A.T.S.)

1. The A.T.S. shall consist of 4 pole, 3 phase, rated as shown on the
Drawings.
2. With the A.T.S. provide manual change-over switches to by-pass
the A.T.S. in case of emergency, maintenance or repair.
3. The arrangement, wiring and components shall satisfy the
requirements of the Diesel Generator Manufacturer. His written
approval shall be submitted.
4. Control voltage of A.T.S. shall be normally fed from the main

Page 305 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

supply, in case of failure of the main supply it shall be fed

automatically from the emergency supply.
5. In addition to transfer switches the A.T.S. arrangement shall be
equipped with the following:
i A selector switch to control the operation of A.T.S. on normal,
emergency, automatic and OFF.
ii Adjustable - 3 phase voltage sensing relays sense failure in a
phase/phases and voltage drop below 70% of the normal
voltage (pick-up and drop-out voltages and adjustable within
the range 70 - 100% of the normal voltage).
iii Visual Mechanical Indicator for transfer switch position.
iv Indicator lamps to show transfer switch position normal,
emergency and OFF.
v An adjustable time delay relay of 1 - 3 seconds for starting
signal to the Generator set after cutting of main supply.
vi An adjustable time delay relay of 0 - 3 minutes which allows
A.T.S. from Normal to Emergency after the voltage build up
relay of the generator has sensed 90% rated voltage when
frequency within 90% rated of rated frequency.
vii An adjustable time delay relay of 1 - 10 minutes to allow A.T.S.
from Emergency to Normal.
viii An adjustable time delay relay of 0.5 - 5 seconds to prevent
instantaneous transition from EMERGENCY to NORMAL i.e.
the delay allows time sufficient for the residual motor voltage to
decay to a safe switching level.

17.20.17 MATERIALS

(a) Busbars

1. Busbars and connections shall be identified by phase color

marking and adequately supported by suitable insulators the whole
to be mechanically and electrically designed to withstand the full
fault capacity as specified herein.
2. All busbars and connections shall be rated for continuous
operation at the specified ambient temperature. The mechanical
and dielectric strength of busbars and supports shall be capable of
withstanding the worst conditions of electrical surge, which can
occur in the installation.
3. Busbars and primary connections shall comply with BS 159 and
BS EN 60439 as appropriate and shall be housed in air-insulated
enclosures with a time rating compatible with the switchgear.
4. Connections from the main busbars to MCCB's controlling main
motor starters and outgoing distribution shall be via solid copper
busbars and NOT cables.
5. Busbars shall be of tinned copper with a PVC sleeving or its
enclosure fully insulated. Moulded PVC shrouds shall be provided
over joints.
6. Bolted copper busbar links shall be provided where specified and
shall be used for maintenance purposes only. The link section

Page 306 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

shall be easily accessible from the front or top of the board and
shall have a lockable cover. Provision for storing the links nuts
and bolts shall be made in the switchboard.

(b) Labels

1. In accordance with section PS-10/16.

(c) Fuses

1. In accordance with section PS-10/19.

2. All fuses shall be High Breaking Capacity (HBC) type and one
spare fuse for each fuse fitted in the panel shall be supplied
clipped adjacent to the position in which it would be in service. A
complete schedule of all fuses in the panel shall be affixed in a
convenient position in the panel.
3. Neutral links shall not be arranged in fuse holders but shall be
separately bolted copper links with one link for each fuse.

(d) Cable Terminations

1. All terminals for outgoing connections shall be located at a low

level in the compartment adjacent to the cable gland trays. Direct
termination on equipment such as Distribution Board Fuses or
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB's) is not acceptable.
2. All live terminals shall be covered with a 2mm thickness plastic
cover, or suitably shrouded.
3. All cable entries shall be affected using glands.
4. Cabling shall enter assemblies through not less than 3mm thick
removable steel or brass (for single core cables), gland plates
fitted at least 200mm above finished floor level. Gland plates shall
be rustproofed and provided with a welded and bonded earthing
stud, and adequately sized to accommodate present and known
future cabling requirements. Access to both sides of each gland
plate when it is in position shall be possible from within the
assembly. Cables shall enter at the top or bottom of assemblies
as specified and have a suitable means of fixing.
5. Gland plates are not necessary on small individual starters where
access shall be by “knock outs”.
6. Cableways shall be provided as necessary to ensure that apart
from inter-connections no cable routed to one cubicle shall pass
through any other cubicle.
7. Gland plates shall be removable for drilling.
8. For cable sizes above 300mm2 and above insulated glands shall
be fitted.
9. Provision for accommodation of rising armored cables shall be
provided with adequate cable supports and a form of cable entry
via approved cable glands secured to a steel glanding plate.
10. Space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of
appropriate size for incoming and outgoing circuits and non-
ferrous gland plates shall be supplied where single core cables are

Page 307 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

terminated. All glands, plates and trays shall be adequately

earthed.
11. Cable disconnecting links shall be provided where specified and
shall be used for maintenance purposes only. The links shall be
fitted to the busbar risers immediately before the cable
terminations and shall be easily accessible. The links shall be
labeled 'ISOLATING LINK' and the circuit or cable reference shall
be quoted.

(e) Auxiliary Switches

1. Auxiliary switches for indication protection interlocking and

supervisory purposes shall be readily accessible and enclosed in a
transparent dust proof cover.
2. Adequate secondary disconnection shall be included between the
fixed portion of a circuit breaker and the moving portion.
3. Spare auxiliary contacts (two normally open and two normally
closed) shall be provided on each unit and wired to suitable
accessible spare terminals.
4. Selector switches shall be of the rotary type, spring loaded to
ensure clean controlled operation, with all switch positions fully
and clearly identified.
5. Operating actuators shall be interchangeable and securely fixed to
the switch mechanism.
6. Where lockable switches are provided it shall be possible to lock
them in any position and withdraw the key.

(f) Panel Earthing

1. Each assembly containing busbars shall be equipped with a

suitably rated full-length earth bar of high conductivity solid copper
and minimum cross-section of 25mm x 6mm, and in accordance
with the recommendations of BS EN 60439/IEC 439.
2. Within each assembly, all metal parts of all equipment supplied,
other than those forming part of an electric circuit, shall be bonded
to the earth bar. Metalwork may be used for this purpose provided
that earth continuity conductors are fitted at all joints and other
discontinuities, and that connections to metal work are made using
welded or bolted terminals or screws. Earth continuity conductors
shall be at least 2.5mm Sq. in section.

(g) Small Wiring And Terminal Blocks

1. Types

a. Wiring shall generally be of the multi-stranded high

temperature flexible PVC insulated, 600/1000V single core
stranded copper type cable, with a minimum cross sectional
area of 1.5mm Sq.

Page 308 of 417

Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Color-coding shall be:

Red - Red phase
Yellow - Yellow phase
Blue - Blue phase
Black - Neutral
Green and Yellow - Earth/Protective conductors
Grey - 110V ac
White - dc
Orange - Control interconnections between
cubicles
Purple - <50V ac
Brown - Current Transformers (secondary
windings)

2. Terminations

i. All wiring shall have crimped terminations, only one wire being
held by any one crimp. Crimped lugs shall be of the insulated
type without conductor exposure between the crimp and wire
insulation.
ii. The type of crimp used shall be appropriate for the type of
terminal to which it connects.
iii. Terminations shall be neatly arranged leaving adequate length
for one termination.
iv. All terminal blocks for the connection of small wiring shall
comprise shrouded anti-tracking moulding of melamine
phenolic or comparable material with provision for securing
conductors either by high tensile screws and clamps or
alternatively in the case of small telephone type conductors by
solder tag connection.
v. Terminal blocks shall be arranged to facilitate easy access to
both terminals and wiring ends. Connections for outgoing
circuits to auxiliary pilot cables shall be provided with test links.
vi. Removable rail terminals shall be provided for all wiring,
mounted at an angle to provide ease of access.
Disconnecting- link type terminals shall be provided for
analogue signal circuits, external control devices and all
alarm/telemetry signals. Sufficient, suitably sized earth
terminals and end stops shall also be provided.
vii. The gap between gland plates and associated terminals shall
be such that conductors can be safely manipulated and
connected without damage. Terminals shall face the door of a
cubicle for ease of connection.
viii. Barriers shall be provided on all terminal banks, to group
terminals into logical divisions. Power terminals of different
phases shall be barriered from each other and separated from
control terminals.
ix. In all cases care shall be taken to ensure that terminals are
easily accessible after all wiring and plant cabling has been
installed and terminated. All connections shall be made on the
front of terminal blocks.
x. No more than two conductors shall be connected to one side

Page 309 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

of a terminal. Outgoing cables shall be wired so that all

assembly wiring is connected to one side only.
xi. The terminal numbers, voltage grouping and terminal block
layout shall correspond precisely with wiring diagrams so that
quick and accurate identification of wiring can be made.
xii. All terminals shall show the circuit wire number reference.
xiii. All telemetry terminals shall be located on a common rail, in a
separate common telemetry section, which shall be provided.

3. Manner of Installation

i. Wiring shall be neatly laid and run in limited compression

insulated cleats, insulated straps or, where more than ten
wires follow the same route, in plastic slotted-sided trunking
with clip-on covers. Where trunking is used, the effective
overall cross-sectional area of cables shall not be greater than
70% of the trunk cross sectional area.
ii. Wiring to items of equipment mounted on hinged doors or
subject to movement shall run in helical binding or flexible
conduit, being securely anchored at both ends; leaving ample
slack to prevent wiring strain.
iii. Holes in steel work through which cables pass shall be
protected using grommets or bushes, suitable for the size of
hole.
iv. Cables used for control, extra low voltage and instrument
signal transmission, likely to be affected by interference, shall
be screened and/or spaced from each other and from heavy
current power cables. The separation distance shall ensure
that the resultant electrical noise is insufficient to cause any
form of malfunction of associated equipment or give false
readings.
4. Ferruling and Marking

i. All wiring shall be identified at each end by means of glossy

plastic ferrules showing the wire number as on the schematic
diagrams. Ferrules shall be color coded, ‘Z’ type and indelibly
marked.

(h) Indicating Lamps/Pushbuttons

1. Indicating Lamps

i. All indicating lamps shall be low voltage and connected from

the transformer secondary. Bulbs shall be voltage rated 10%
higher than the transformer secondary voltage to ensure long
life
ii. Lamps shall be well ventilated and the design shall permit
removal of lamp glass and bulbs from the front of the unit
iii. Indicating lamps shall be supplied by individual fused circuits
iv. All pilot lamp bulbs shall be of the same voltage regardless of
transformer primary voltage

Page 310 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

v. The color of indicating lamp lenses shall comply with BS EN

60073. Lens shall be self-colored. LED lamps shall not be
used except where they form an integral part of the proprietary
equipment

2. Pushbuttons

i. plated or similar bezels. They shall generally match indicating

lamps in style; start pushbuttons being recessed to prevent
accidental operation. Stop pushbuttons shall not be recessed.
ii. Illuminated pushbuttons, where used, shall be of a design that
allows easy replacement of the lamps from the front of the
panel.
iii. Emergency stop pushbuttons shall be of the “stay put”
mushroom headed type.

(i) Cable Connections

1. Where single core cable is to be accommodated a non-magnetic

gland plate shall be provided. For cable size 400mm Sq. and
above insulated glands shall be fitted.
2. Undrilled gland plates shall be provided for the reception of
conduits and threaded glands. Boxes and glands shall be within
the cubicles except where otherwise approved.
3. Prior to manufacture the Contractor shall confirm cabling
termination requirements with the Engineer.

(j) Isolating Switches

1. The compartment isolating switch shall interrupt all supplies into
the compartment to enable safe maintenance to be undertaken.
Isolators shall have "ball and stick" type handles and a fixed post
shall be provided to enable the isolator to be padlocked in the off
position only. One padlock with 4 keys shall be supplied for each
isolator on the board.

(k) Instruments

1. All indicating instruments shall be of 270 Degree scale type flush

mounted and generally of the same appearance throughout. They
shall comply with BS 89 and be of industrial grade accuracy. They
shall be sealed against ingress of moisture and dirt and shall be
hermetically sealed or tropicalised.
2. Instruments shall have an external zero adjustment and have
black bezels. They shall be positioned so that they can be easily
read and the dial centers shall be not less than 400mm and not
more than 2000mm above finished floor level. Meters shall be
fitted with an adjustable pointer or shall be inscribed on the scales
to indicate the normal circuit rating of the associated plant.
3. Instruments shall have a square front appearance with minimum
dimensions of 96mm x 96mm or as indicated and shall be selected
from a standard size.

Page 311 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

4. Ammeters fitted in a motor circuit shall have a suppressed scale to

indicate the maximum starting current. Ammeters shall be selected
such that the ampere reading under normal running load is
approximately 70 to 80 percent of their rated scale.
5. Where the motor full load current exceeds 15A, ammeters shall be
connected via current transformers.
6. Kilowatt-hour meters shall be arranged to register 3 phase 4 wire
unbalanced loads except as otherwise indicated.
7. All instruments shall be mounted adjacent to the relevant circuit
breaker switch or starter unless separate panel suites are
specified herein.
8. At points of connection of potential circuits to busbars etc. HBC
fuses shall be provided to protect the auxiliary wiring. For cubicle
gear these fuses shall be housed inside and readily accessible.
Additional fuses to clear individual instrument faults shall be
provided and accessible from the front of the cubicle unless
otherwise specified.
9. Secondary injection testing equipment shall comply with the
relevant requirements for instruments above.

(l) Current Transformers

1. Current transformers shall comply with BS 7626 and should be

suitably rated and designed to carry out appropriate function viz.
metering and protection where called for in the detailed Electrical
Specification.
2. The Short Time Current Rating should not be less than 3 seconds.
3. Identification labels giving type, ratios, accuracy, limit factor, rating,
output and serial numbers shall be fitted. Duplicate rating labels
are to be fitted on the exterior of the mounting chambers suitably
located to enable reading without removal of any cover. Labels
shall be supplied for multi ratio current transformers indicating the
connection required for alternative ratios.
4. Bar type current transformers shall be supplied in preference to
those with wound primaries. Short time current factors shall relate
to the full fault level for one or three seconds as applicable. For
over-current protection the product of VA rated burden and rated
accuracy limit factor shall be less than 150 unless otherwise
agreed with the Engineer.
5. One secondary terminal of each current transformer shall be
earthed through a removable link at the switchgear.

(m) Voltage Transformers

1. Voltage transformers for instrumentation shall be of the isolatable

type with a secondary three-phase voltage of 110 volts and shall
comply with BS. 7625.
2. Epoxy resin insulated or oil filled types will be acceptable.
3. The primary winding shall be protected by H.R.C. fuses which
together with the connections between the fuses and the primary
conductors shall be adequately rated to withstand the short circuit

Page 312 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

rating of the switchgear. It shall not be possible to obtain access to

the H.R.C. fuses unless the transformer is fully isolated.
4. Fuses shall be provided to protect the secondary winding and be
safely accessible.
5. In the case of HV, automatically operating shutters shall be
provided to conceal the HV orifices when the transformer is
withdrawn. A padlock with non-interchangeable key shall be
provided for the shutter.

(n) Protective Devices

1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protective devices,

which shall comply with BS 142, and he shall be responsible for so
designing the protection that it is entirely suitable for the
equipment being protected and relates correctly to the whole
supply system.

(o) Interlocking

1. Mechanical interlocking shall be provided where possible. All

electrical interlocking shall be of the double interlocked type having
separate permissive and prohibitive interlocks. Thus to allow a
device to operate there must be an absence of prohibitive signals
and a presence of permissive signals from the remaining devices
in the interlocked system i.e. fail-safe.
2. Suitable equipment shall be provided mechanically to prevent a
device being manually operated when a prohibitive signal from
another part of the interlocked system is present.

(p) Control Relays/Auxiliary Relays/Interposing Relays And Timers

1. Timers and Relays shall be suitable for operation on a nominal

110V AC or 110V DC supply or in special cases 24V AC/DC (i.e.
float switch control if necessary). Relays shall be suitable for
operation at plus 10% and minus 15% of their nominal rated
voltage.
2. They shall be of the plug-in type only complete with plastic cover
and shall be fitted with normally open/normally closed or
changeover contact combinations as necessary.
3. The contact material shall be suitable for its specific application.
4. Mixed voltages must not be used on the different contacts of a
particular relay. If necessary additional relays shall be used.
5. Coils shall be vacuum impregnated or guaranteed suitable for the
adverse climatic conditions specified.
6. Termination's to the relay bases shall be of the front connected
screw clamp type. The relay mounting panel shall be drilled and
tapped to accept 20% future spare bases.
7. Relays shall be secured to their bases by retaining bar or clip to
prevent malfunction due to the relay being loosened in its base.
8. Care shall be taken to ensure that relay contacts and associated
wiring are suitably fuse protected.

Page 313 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

9. DC operated relays shall have a miniature light emitting diode

mounted within their clear covers which shall be connected directly
across the relay coil to indicate when supply is connected. These
indicators shall be easily seen when the relay compartment door is
opened. AC operated relays shall in a similar manner be fitted
with a neon indicator.
10. Relays having different contact configurations or different coil
voltages shall under no circumstances be interchangeable.
11. A permanent means of identification shall be affixed to both relay
and base in line with the circuit diagram reference.
12. Where remote supply voltages are used then care shall be taken
to ensure that all relays and any other equipment involved
(terminals fuses etc.) are completely shrouded and where possible
segregated. A warning label engraved in English and Arabic shall
be fitted onto or adjacent to any such equipment. Similarly where
voltages exceeding 55V to earth are employed in relay
compartments or non door-interlocked sections then shrouding
segregation and warning labels shall be applied.
13. Timers shall have linearly calibrated scales, in units of time, each
scale division being a maximum of 5% of full scale. Repeat
accuracy shall be within 0.5% of full scale.
14. Electronic and synchronous timers shall be of the plug-in or block
type, provided with “energized” and “timed out” indicators. They
shall be surface mounted when within cubicles but shall be flush
mounted where front mounted to give operator access and
provided with a lockable cover to prevent unauthorized
interference.

(q) Protection Relays

1. Protection relays and associated devices shall be provided as

specified herein. All switchboard relays shall be of the
withdrawable pattern in dust-proof cases. Protective relays shall
comply with BS 142 or other approved equal standard.

2. voltage and/or current plug-in type test terminal blocks which

automatically open circuit or short circuit the integral voltage
transformers or current transformers respectively and provide
terminations for the test supply. Disconnection of any permanent
wiring will not be acceptable.
3. All signal transfer between the MCCs and the central control
system (PLC/SCADA) shall be through communication bus using
high speed communication protocol. All the starters and main
Incomer breakers shall have electronic solid state, multifunction,
microprocessor based relays with communication capabilities.
These relays shall perform all the functions such as Status
Indications, Motor parameter monitoring, allow for local and
remote control, protective functions, and shall provide diagnostic
information about the motor and the relay itself.

All Intelligent MCCs and LV switchboards shall be time

synchronized with the PLC/SCADA. PLC/SCADA will be the

Page 314 of 417

Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

master clock.
The details of the functions are as follows. Signals /Information to
be provided for each breaker

i. Indications to be provided at the Starter Module (on front door)

and at the Operator Station through SCADA.
• Open
• Closed
• Tripped
• Auto /Manual Mode selected
• Emergency Stop P.B. activated
• “Test” Position of Breaker
• Phase Currents

ii. Commands from the operator station and from the Breaker
Module.
• Open / Close Command.
• Fault Reset at Breaker module, at the System Engineer’s
station and Electrical Engineer’s station.

iii. Monitoring Functions: -

Following parameters shall be available for monitoring at the
Operator workstation and Electrical Engineer’s station.
• Phase Currents
• Average Current
• Full Load Current
• Current Imbalance percent
• Percent Thermal capacity utilized / available
• Power Factor
• Voltage
• Running Hours
• Trends, Graphic Displays for monitored parameters

iv. Protective Functions:-

Following Protective functions with programmable trip level,
warning level and time delay shall be available at the System
Engineer’s Workstation and at the dedicated Electrical
Engineer’s Station.
• Under load
• Current Imbalance
• Phase Loss
• Zero Sequence ground fault
• Under voltage Protection

v. Diagnostic Information: -
Following information shall be provided at the Electrical
Engineer’s station and Operator workstation.

Page 315 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

• Breaker Real Time status

• Warning Status
• Time to Reset
• Trip Status
• Time to overload trip
• History and Cause of previous trips (minimum 5)
• Communication failure

(r) Circuit Breakers

1. In accordance with section PS-10/2.

(s) Fuse Switches

1. In accordance with section PS-10/3

(t) Motor Starters

1. In accordance with section PS-10/4.

(u) Battery Units

1. The battery and charger shall be housed in a single sheet steel
floor mounted ventilated cabinet with batteries housed in the lower
part of the cubicle.
2. The unit shall be complete with a self-adjusting constant potential
trickle charger suitable for operating from a 400V three phase or
220V single phase AC supply. The charger shall be rated to
continuously energize relay coils and lamps as applicable. The
charger shall be oversized by 50% and designed to maintain a
constant voltage within 3% irrespective of mains voltage or
frequency variation. Booster charge facilities shall be included.
3. The unit shall be fitted with the following: -
i. 1 No. Supply ON indicating lamp
ii. 1 No. ON/OFF switch
iii. 1 No. Charger ammeter
iv. 1 No. OFF/FLOAT/BOOST switch
v. 1 No. Charger failure alarm relay and lamp
vi. 1 Set of cable terminals and a.c. and d.c.fuses.

4. All battery cells shall be either nickel iron or nickel cadmium

structure with an alkaline electrolyte and be provided with a
suitable drip tray to protect the cabinet from corrosion caused by
accidental spillage of the battery medium.
5. Batteries shall be of the correct voltage and of adequate capacity
to operate the equipment with which they are associated. Separate
battery/charger combinations shall be provided for each function,
i.e. alarm batteries shall not be used for breaker tripping, etc.
6. For each battery/charger unit supply a set of maintenance tools,
equipment and spares, and for non-sealed batteries include a
resealable, 2 liter container of electrolyte, a siphon pump, a
squeeze top-up bottle, a face mask, a pair of chemical resistant

Page 316 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

rubber gloves, and a hygrometer; Secure within the charger

cabinet.
7. Batteries for the operation of control, instrumentation, alarm and
monitoring equipment shall be provided in accordance with
Section.

17.20.18 ACCESSORIES

(a) For each switchboard the Contractor shall supply the following
equipment:

1. 1 No. electrical grade rubber mat to BS 921 1000mm wide

extending the full length of the switchboard.
2. 1 No. pair of electrical grade rubber gloves to BS EN 60903.
3. 1 No. notice in English and Arabic advising treatment for a person
suffering from electric shock.
4. A wall mountable lockable key box complete with tags and
numbering.

17.20.19 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(a) Provide testing of Factory Built Assemblies under provisions of section

PS-10/1.
(b) The whole of the switch and control gear shall be witness tested as
integral units for a complete sequence of operation and as laid down
in BS EN 60439 for L.V or other approved equivalent standard and
based on the completeness of the circuits in the final manufacturer’s
works. The following tests shall be carried out: -

1. Primary injection tests to ensure correct operation of the current

operated protection relays and direct acting coils, over their full
range settings.
2. Balanced Earth fault stability tests by primary current injection.
Care must be taken to reproduce accurately the burdens of inter-
connecting cables. A further test to ensure correct polarity must be
made after assembly.
3. Tests on auxiliary relays at normal operating voltage by operation
of associated remote relays.
4. Correct operation of sequencing and control circuits at normal
operating voltage by operation of local control switches, and
simulation of operation from remote control positions.
5. Other routine tests as laid down in BS EN 60439 or BS5227, as
appropriate, or other approved equivalent standard.

(c) Type Test Certificates shall be submitted to prove that similar

equipment has been successfully tested to the Type Test
requirements of BS EN 60439 for L.V. Switchgear or other approved
equivalent standards, by ASTA, KEMA or other equal and approved
independent testing authority.
(d) The panels shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until they have

Page 317 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

been approved by the Engineer and written permission given for their
dispatch to site.

17.20.20 EXECUTION - INSTALLERS

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.20.21 INSTALLATION

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Commissioning of LV Switchgear shall be carried out by the
manufacturer.

17.20.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section

PS10/1.

(b) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of section PS-
10/1.
(c) Each control panel shall be tested to demonstrate correct operation of
relaying, fault protection and control equipment. All isolators, fuse
switches, oil and air circuit breakers shall be tested for correct
operation and fault operation. All associated cabling shall be tested for
correct phase connection and insulation resistance.

17.20.23 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section PS-10/1.

17.20.24 DEMONSTRATION

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of this section.

17.20.25 TRAINING

(a) Provide training to Employer’s staff under provisions of section PS-

10/1.

17.20.26 MAINTENANCE

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of section PS-10/1.

17.21 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

17.21.1 SUMMARY

(a) This section includes specification for motor control centers including
their controls and accessories.

Page 318 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) This shall be read in conjunction with other related sections of the
specification and contract drawings.

17.21.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

(a) Furnish, install and test the intelligent type, communications capable
motor control centers as shown in the drawings in accordance with
these specifications.
(b) Motor control centers shall be sized to include all equipment, spares
and future provisions as shown in the drawing.
(c) Commissioning of the Motor Control Center shall be by the
manufacturer.

17.21.3 REFERENCES

(a) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

(b) UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current
Limiting Type.
(c) BS EN 60947-2 - Air Circuit Breaker.
(d) NEMA AB 1 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
(e) NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and
Assemblies.
(f) BS EN 60947 - Specifications for low-voltage switchgear
and control gear.
(g) BS EN 60439 - Factory Built Assemblies for low-voltage
switchgear and control gears.
(h) BS EN 60529 - Degree of protection of enclosures.
(i) BS 88/IEC 269 - Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and
including 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c.
(j) Other national standards pertaining to motor control centers as
directed by the Engineer.

17.21.4 SUBMITTALS

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with
overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and
requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per
phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including
voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and
time/current curves of all equipment and components.
(c) Conduit entrance drawing and cable routing to motors etc.
(d) Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test
results.
(e) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application
conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation,
and starting of Product.

Page 319 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.21.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

(a) Submit under provisions of 17.1.

(b) Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and
current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.

17.21.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

(a) Perform Work in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3 or ISO 9002 or other
standards as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Maintain one copy of each document on site.

17.21.7 MANUFACTURERS

(a) Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
(b) Substitutions: Under Section 17.1 – Materials and Equipment.

17.21.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code, USA
2. BS 7671 – Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.
3. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority regulations.
4. In the case of conflict the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
(DEWA) requirements shall take precedence.

(b) Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. or testing firm acceptable to the Engineer as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.

17.21.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1.
(c) Deliver in 1.2m maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped
for protection, and mounted on shipping skids.
(d) Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from
dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
(e) Handle in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3 or other approved standard.
Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid
damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish.

17.21.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Page 320 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(a) Conform to NEMA ICS 2 or other approved standard service

conditions during and after installation of motor control centers.

17.21.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.21.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

(a) Furnish under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Provide number of each size and type fuse installed as listed in the
Schedule of Spare Parts.

17.21.13 PRODUCTS - MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

(a) Multi-cubicle suite, free standing floor mount type motor control
centers shall be provided according to BS EN 60439 for factory built
assemblies consisting of units for incoming feeder, outgoing feeders,
variable frequency drives, motor starters, integral distribution boards,
PLC/SCADA interfaces and VDU etc. and other associated items.
(b) Single cubicle panel up to 1200 mm high by 900 mm wide shall be
designed for wall mount for indoor installations. Bigger cubicles shall
be free standing floor mount type.
(c) Ratings and references: BS EN 60439 (IEC 439).
(d) Incoming circuit isolation: Circuit breaker.
(e) Voltage Rating: 400 volts three phase, four wire, 50 Hz or as specified
for other voltages.
(f) Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating: 31 MVA (43 KA) at 400
volts for 1 second duration.
(g) Horizontal Bus: Copper, with a continuous current rating of specified
amperes. Include copper ground bus entire length of control center.
(h) Vertical Bus: Copper.
(i) Configuration: Units front mounting only, accessible from the front.
(j) Feeder Tap Units: Circuit breakers or Fusible switches as indicated.

17.21.14 MOTOR STARTERS

(a) Motor starters as per specification Section 17.4.

(b) Provide Control Modules to perform the input/output control functions.
Module shall incorporate faceplates having membrane type
pushbuttons and LEDs. All pushbutton and LED functions shall be
furnished with clearly written identification. Modules shall replace
conventional start, stop, hand, auto, and control functions and
overload reset function. Modules shall replace conventional indicating
lights for status of run, off, selector switch position, and overload
alarm and trip of motor.

17.21.15 SOFT STARTERS

(a) Soft starters as per specification Section 17.5.

Page 321 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.21.16 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

(a) Variable frequency drive controllers as per specification Section 17.22.

17.21.17 INTEGRAL DISTRIBUTION BOARD

(a) The distribution board shall be an integral part of the motor control
center as specified in this section and as shown in the drawing. A
separate compartment in the cubicle shall be assigned for the
purpose.
(b) The distribution boards shall be provided with fixed cover and a
hinged door with padlock, which can be, opened without any
obstruction about 120 Degree and conduit knockouts from the top and
bottom. The hinged door with a lock and key shall be integral part of
the fixed cover.
(c) The cabinet shall be constructed so that it is necessary to open the
door to operate Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) or ELCB.
(d) A circuit label shall be provided to indicate the circuit served by each
MCB.
(e) Ratings:

1. voltage: 400/230 volts.

2. configuration: Three phase, four wire, grounded.
3. main Bus: To suit load and fault level characteristics.
4. bus material: Tinned copper, standard sizes suitable to rating.
5. bus connection: Bolted, accessible from the front for maintenance.
6. Integrated Equipment Rating: To suit Dubai Electricity and Water
Authority (DEWA) Fault Levels. 43 kA for Main Boards connected
directly from transformer secondary and 25 kA for Boards
connected from subsystem; duration 1 second.

(f) Lighting Contactors

1. contactors shall be single coil, electrically operated, mechanically

held (latch type) and shall be rated for Tungsten, Fluorescent,
LED or discharge lighting load.
2. contactors rating and number of poles: as indicated in the
Schedule of Points.
3. operating coil: suitable for 230V, 50Hz. supply. Continuous rating
without overheating or noise.
4. main Contacts: double break silver to silver type protected by
arcing contacts
5. contacts: self aligning, renewable from the front panel.
6. solenoids: shaded pole pattern of such construction that
lamination noise is eliminated.
7. control of contactor: by remote push switches as indicated. A
manual operating lever shall also be included.
8. lighting contactor’s controlling lighting circuits of distribution
boards shall be mounted in the board enclosure.

Page 322 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.21.18 INTERFACE WITH CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM (SCADA)

(a) All signal transfer between the MCCs and the central control system
(SCADA) shall be through communication bus using high speed
communication protocol. All the starters and main Incomer breakers
shall have electronic solid state, multifunction, microprocessor based
relays with communication capabilities. These relays shall perform all
the functions such as Status Indications, Motor parameter monitoring,
allow for local and remote control, protective functions, and shall
provide diagnostic information about the motor and the relay itself.

All Intelligent MCCs and LV switchboards shall be time synchronized

with the SCADA. SCADA will be the master clock.

The details of the functions are as follows.

Signals /Information to be provided for each motor starter

1. Indications to be provided at the Starter Module (on front door)

and at the Operator Station through SCADA.
i Running,
ii Stopped,
iii Tripped,
iv Auto /Manual Mode selected.
v Emergency Stop P.B. activated.
vi “Test” Position of Main Switch.
vii Phase Currents.
viii Running hours.

2. Commands from the operator station and from the Starter Module.
i Start / Stop Command.
ii Fault Reset at Starter module, at the System Engineer’s
station and Electrical Engineer’s station.

3. Monitoring Functions: -
Following parameters shall be available for monitoring at the
Operator workstation and Electrical Engineer’s station.
i Phase Currents,
ii Average Current,
iii Full Load Current.
iv Current Imbalance percent.
v Percent Thermal capacity utilized / available.
vi Power Factor,
vii Voltage,
viii Running Hours.
ix Trends, Graphic Displays for monitored parameters

4. Protective Functions:-

Following Protective functions with programmable trip level,

warning level and time delay shall be available at the System
Engineer’s Workstation and at the dedicated Electrical Engineer’s

Page 323 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Station.
i Thermal Overload- Trip Class adjustment.
ii Under load,
iii Jam protection,
iv Stall Protection,
v Current Imbalance,
vi Phase Loss,
vii Zero Sequence ground fault,
viii Start Limitation,
ix Under voltage Protection,
x PTC Thermister input,

(b) Also comply with the requirements specified under Control and
Instrument section.

1. Diagnostic Information: -
Following information shall be provided at the Electrical Engineer’s
station and Operator workstation.
i Motor Controller Real Time status,
ii Warning Status,
iii Time to Reset,
iv Trip Status,
v Time to overload trip,
vi History and Cause of previous trips (minimum 5)
vii Communication failure.

(c) Also comply with requirements specified under Control and Instrument
section.

17.21.19 CONSTRUCTION

(a) General

1. motor control center (MCC) shall be type-tested assemblies (TTA)

complying with the performance requirements of BS EN 60439
(IEC 439).
2. motor control center shall be constructed to Form 4a type 3
(unless indicated otherwise) separation requirements complying
with BS EN 60439 Part 1. Provide separate busbar chambers and
separate compartment for each functional unit. Provide separate
termination for each functional unit having its own integral
glanding facility.
3. motor control center rated for total connected loads less than
100kW shall be constructed to Form 2b type 2 (unless indicated
otherwise) separation, complying with the requirements of BS EN
60439 Part 1. Provide separate chamber for the busbars. Provide
suitable chassis-mount for withdrawable starter unit.
4. motor control center shall be multi-cubicle or single cubicle type.
5. motor control center shall be of the flush fronted, sheet steel,
freestanding (or wall mounted type), and extensible at both ends
unless otherwise specified.

Page 324 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

6. operation of the MCC shall be from the front with all switches
being accessible from floor level.
7. shipment shall be made in sections to facilitate field handling, and
the shipped sections shall be joined together to form a complete
back-to-wall or back-to-back unit assembly as indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
8. transit sections of the MCC shall be fitted with removable lifting
lugs.
9. at one end of each MCC, an empty panel shall be provided, of the
wardrobe type, suitable for mounting electronic control equipment,
PLC. etc. Where necessary, (e.g. to allow extension), the busbars
shall be carried through the enclosure in a purpose made steel
plate trunking. This panel shall be provided in addition to any
panels required for an intelligent motor control center.
10. MCC frames, covers, doors and mounting plates shall be
fabricated from a minimum 2 mm thickness mild steel pressed or
rolled to shape and neatly finished and free from any joints or
sharp edges. The MCC plinth/bed frame shall have a 3 mm
thickness minimum.
11. MCC shall have a minimum protection rating of IP54 to BS EN
60529 unless otherwise indicated. The MCC shall be vermin-proof.
12. individual starter shall be housed in separate
compartment/section.. All full voltage starter units for sizes up to
and including 100 kW shall be of the drawout type (unless
indicated or specified otherwise). Draw-out provisions shall include
a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to absolutely ensure
alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Draw-out units shall have
a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No
wiring to these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment. The
MCC shall include a set of main copper busbars and the required
number of dropper busbars to suit the columns of starters. Interior
of all units shall be painted white for increased visibility. Units shall
be equipped with side-mounted, positive latch pull-apart type
control terminal blocks rated 600-volts. All drawout units shall be
secured by a spring-loaded quarter turn indicating type fastening
device located at the top front of the unit. Each unit compartment
shall be provided with an individual front door.
13. an arrangement shall be incorporated which will ensure that, when
the starter is withdrawn, the aperture can be padlocked to prevent
unauthorized insertion of starters.
14. arrangements of starters in the MCC shall be organized to suit the
most practicable arrangement with regard to temperature rise and
location of Duty 1 and Duty 2 starters.
15. main busbar ratings above 200A, the busbar arrangement shall be
third party certified by an independent testing authority (e.g.
ASTA). Busbar arrangements for 200A and below need not be
certified.
(b) Mounting

1. Floor

Page 325 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Floor mounted assembles shall either be provided with an integral

plinth or a separate rolled mild steel channel bed frame, at least
50mm high.

Fixing shall be by not less than four holding down bolts per
assembly section, located around the periphery of the section.
The fixing shall not be visible from outside the section, but shall be
readily accessible from within.

2. Wall

At least four lugs shall be provided for bolting to the wall. Fixing
holes shall not be provided inside the assembly, which shall stand
at least 10mm off the wall surface.

(c) Doors and Covers

1. doors shall be adequately sized to accommodate readily and

neatly all mounted equipment, open at least 120 degrees, be
rigidly constructed, suitably braced and provided with at least two
substantial hinges which shall be captive when the door is closed.
2. each door shall be provided with chromium placed ‘T’ type catches
at least one of which shall be lockable.
3. padlocks will be supplied and fitted by the Contractor to the
approval of the Engineer.
4. each door shall be provided with an internal welded earthing stud,
and shall be bonded to the assembly main earth bar.
5. doors and covers giving access to potentially live conductors shall
be provided with prominent warning labels, in English and Arabic.

(d) Component Mounting

1. each cubicle shall be provided with a removable steel component

mounting plate located clear of the cubicle rear panel.
2. components, other than door mounted, shall be located on the
component mounting plate by bolting into tapped holes or by using
self-tapping screws. Nuts used for securing components shall be
captive. Rail type fixings may be used where appropriate.
Components shall not be mounted on any other surface.
3. components shall not be located within the assembly at a height
greater than 2000mm or less than 500mm above finished floor
level.
4. it shall be possible to replace and maintain any component without
first removing other components.

(e) Ventilation and Cooling

1. provide arrangement for ventilation, when required, without

sacrificing the IP rating requirement.
2. provide cooling arrangement for panels accommodating heat
producing drives and controllers. Provide calculations to justify the

Page 326 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

proposed cooling capacity.

(f) Bolts, Nuts and Screws

1. bolts, nuts, screws and washers used in the construction of the

assembly shall be stainless steel.
2. bolts and nuts for cover fixing shall be captive and provided with
protective washers to prevent damage to paintwork.
3. Floor-fixing bolts shall be manufactured from stainless steel.

(g) Anti-condensation Heater

1. each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed

compartment 230V anti-condensation heater.
2. apart from those in motor starter compartments, the heaters shall
be controlled by means of individual “OFF/AUTO” switches. Auto
operation shall be by means of adjustable panel mounted
hygroscope/thermostat units covering the range of humidity and
temperature envisaged.
3. each circuit shall be fused and taken from the load side of the
compartment isolator where applicable.

(h) Cable Terminations

1. terminals for outgoing connections shall be located at a low level

in the compartment adjacent to the cable gland trays. Direct
termination on equipment such as Distribution Board Fuses or
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s) is not acceptable.
2. live terminals shall be covered with a 2 mm thickness plastic
cover, or suitably shrouded.
3. cable entries shall be affected using glands.
4. cabling shall enter assemblies through not less than 3 mm thick
removable steel or brass (for single core cables); gland plates
fitted at least 200 mm above finished floor level. Gland plates shall
be rustproof and provided with a welded and bonded earthing
stud, and adequately sized to accommodate present and known
future cabling requirements. Access to both sides of each gland
plate when it is in position shall be possible from within the
assembly. Cables shall enter at the bottom of assemblies as
specified and have a suitable means of fixing.
5. gland plates are not necessary on small individual starters where
access shall be by ”knock outs”.
6. gland plates shall be removable for drilling.
7. provision for accommodation of rising armored cables shall be
provided with adequate cable supports and a form of cable entry
via approved cable glands secured to a steel glanding plate.
8. space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of
appropriate size for incoming and outgoing circuits and non-
ferrous gland plates shall be supplied where single core cables
are terminated. All glands, plates and trays shall be adequately

Page 327 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

earthed.
9. cableways shall be provided as necessary to ensure that apart
from inter-connections no cable routed to one cubicle shall pass
through any other cubicle.

(i) Labels

1. external labels shall be clear perspex back engraved in Arabic and

English and shall have chamfered edges shall be affixed with
chrome plated nuts and bolts with slotted holes to allow for
expansion of the label.
2. internal labels shall be multi-layered plastic to an approved design
engraved in Arabic and English affixed with chrome plated nuts
and bolts or a permanent adhesive.
3. each compartment door shall have a title label and each door
mounted component or control shall have a function label.
4. every internal component shall be identified and each fuse shall
be labeled with identification (fuse, type, fuse current capacity).
Adhesive labels will not be acceptable for this purpose. Labels
shall have circuit designations, which can be correlated with the
drawings.
5. each group of terminals shall have a “function description” label.
6. compartments with doors or covers not interlocked to an isolator
shall have an external label affixed thereto as follows:

“DANGER, LIVE TERMINALS” with flash and voltage in red letters

on white background in Arabic and English.

7. labels shall not be attached to trunking covers or other readily

removable items.
(j) Panel Earthing

1. MCC shall be equipped with a suitably rated full-length earth bar

of high conductivity solid copper and minimum cross-section of
25mm x 6mm, and in accordance with the recommendations of BS
EN 60439/IEC 439.
2. within the MCC, all metal parts of all equipment supplied, other
than those forming part of an electric circuit, shall be bonded to
the earth bar. Earth continuity conductors shall be at least 2.5mm
sq. in section.

17.21.20 BUSBARS

(a) All busbars shall extend through the length of the board with same
cross section throughout unless indicated otherwise.
(b) A Copper Earth Busbar sized at least 50% of the phase busbars shall
be provided along the full length of the board.
(c) Busbars shall be adequately supported by porcelain or moulded
insulators spaced on suitable centers so that the complete assembly
can withstand the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may be
subjected to under fault conditions.

Page 328 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(d) Busbars shall be housed in separate adequately ventilated

compartment, which shall not contain any wiring or apparatus other
than that required for connections for busbars.
(e) Busbars shall be continuously rated, with ratings as indicated on the
drawings, at an ambient temperature of 500C.
(f) Connections from the main busbars to outgoing circuit breakers or
fuse switches shall be via copper busbars. Cable connections shall
not be acceptable.
(g) The busbars shall be electro-tinned hard drawn, high conductivity
99.9% purity copper, suitably PVC heat-shrink sleeved for phase color
identification to BS 158. Moulded PVC shrouds shall be provided over
joints.
(h) Busbars shall be suitable for extension at both ends.

17.21.21 INTERNAL WIRING AND TERMINATIONS

(a) Wiring Types

1. internal wiring for control and instrumentation purposes shall

generally be carried out using 600/1000 V grade, single core, PVC
insulated, multi-stranded copper cables to BS 6231.
2. minimum size of cable shall be 2.5mm2 for power circuits and
1.5mm2 for control circuits.
3. cable color identification shall be:
Red - Red phase
Yellow - Yellow phase
Blue - Blue phase
Black - Neutral
Green and Yellow - Earth/Protective conductors
White - 60 V d.c.
Orange - Control interconnections between
cubicle
Purple - < 50 V a.c
Brown - Current Transformers (secondary
windings)
(b) Wiring Terminations

1. wiring shall have crimped terminations, only one wire being held
by any one crimp. Crimped lugs shall be of the insulated type
without conductor exposure between the crimp and wire insulation.
2. type of crimp used shall be appropriate for the type of terminal to
which it connects.
3. terminations shall be nearly arranged leaving adequate length for
one re-termination.

(c) Terminal Blocks

1. terminal blocks for the connection of small wiring shall comprise

shrouded anti-tracking moulding of melamine phenolic or

Page 329 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

comparable material with provision for securing conductors either

by high tensile screws and clamps or alternatively in the case of
small telephone type conductors by solder tag connection.
2. terminal blocks shall be arranged to facilitate easy access to both
terminals and wiring ends. Connections for outgoing circuits to
auxiliary pilot cables shall be provided with test links.
3. removal rail terminals shall be provided for all wiring, mounted at
an angle to provide ease of access. Disconnecting-disconnecting
link type terminals shall be provided for analogue signal circuits,
external control devices and all alarm/telemetry signals. Sufficient,
suitably sized earth terminals and end stops shall also be
provided.
4. gap between gland plates and associated terminals shall be such
that conductors can be safely manipulated and connected without
damage. Terminals shall face the door of a cubicle for ease of
connection.
5. barriers shall be provided on all terminal banks, to group terminals
into logical divisions. Power terminals of different phases shall be
barriered from each other and separated from control terminals.
6. in all cases care shall be taken to ensure that terminals are easily
accessible after all wiring and plant cabling has been installed and
terminated. All connections shall be made on the front of terminal
blocks.
7. no more than two conductors shall be connected to one side of a
terminal. Outgoing cables shall be wired so that all assembly
wiring is connected to one side only.
8. terminal numbers, voltage grouping and terminal block layout shall
correspond precisely with wiring diagrams so that quick and
accurate identification of wiring can be made.
9. terminals shall show the circuit wire number reference, as stated
in the wiring diagrams of the manufacturer.
10. telemetry terminals shall be located on a common rail and a
separate common telemetry section shall be provided.
11. sufficient number of terminal connections including 15% spare
terminals shall be provided for all control and instrument wiring.

(d) Wiring Installation

1. wiring shall be neatly laid and run in limited compression insulated
cleats, insulated straps or, where more than ten wires follow the
same route, in plastic slotted-sided trunking with clip-on covers.
2. where trunking is used, the effective overall cross-sectional area
of cables shall not be greater than 70% of the trunking cross
sectional area.
3. wiring to items of equipment mounted on hinged doors or subject
to movement shall run in helical binding or flexible conduit, being
securely anchored at both ends; leaving ample slack to prevent
wiring strain.
4. holes in steel work through which cables pass shall be protected
using grommets or bushes, suitable for the size of hole.
5. cables used for control, extra low voltage and instrument signal

Page 330 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

transmission, likely to be affected by interference, shall be

screened and/or spaced from each other and from heavy current
power cables. The separation distance shall ensure that the
resultant electrical noise is insufficient to cause any form of
malfunction of associated equipment or give false readings.

(e) Ferruling and Marking

1. wiring shall be identified at each end by means of glossy plastic
ferrules showing the wire number as stated in the control wiring
diagram of the manufacturer.

17.21.22 CIRCUIT BREAKERS, FUSES AND FUSE SWITCHES

(a) The MCC shall contain incoming and outgoing circuit breakers and
fuse switches, as indicated on the Contract Drawings as specified in
Section 17.2 and Section 17.3.
(b) Main circuit breaker shall be externally operated and interlocked with
the cubicle door. The unit shall also be capable of being padlocked in
the ”OFF” position.
(c) Fuse switches used in MCCs shall comply with BS EN 60947-3, be of
the double-break design and meet utilization category AC23.

17.21.23 DISCONNECTS

(a) Low Voltage Combination Controllers: Combined motor controllers

with circuit breaker disconnect in common enclosure. Provide means
for locking disconnect handle, and means for defeating cover
interlock.
(b) Circuit Breakers complying with BS EN 60947-2 shall be provided as
isolation and protection means for every motor controller incoming
circuit.

17.21.24 AUXILIARY SWITCHES

(a) Auxiliary switches for indication protection interlocking and

supervisory purposes shall be readily accessible and enclosed in a
transport dust proof cover.
(b) Adequate secondary disconnection shall be included between the
fixed portion of a circuit breaker and the moving portion.
(c) Spare auxiliary contacts (two normally open and two normally closed)
shall be provided on each unit and wired to suitable accessible spare
terminals.
(d) Selector switches shall be of the rotary type, spring loaded to ensure
clean controlled operation, with all switch positions fully and clearly
identified.

17.21.25 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

(a) Current transformers shall comply with BS 7626.

(b) Current transformers shall be of the bar primary type, air cooled and
suitably insulated. The current transformers shall be of Class C

Page 331 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

accuracy for indication and Class CM accuracy for metering purposes.

(c) Current transformers shall be rated not less than 5 VA and shall have
thermal and mechanical rating at least equal to those of the main
circuit breakers.

17.21.26 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS

(a) 110-volt secondary, 100-va minimum, for each motor

controller/starter. Provide fused primary and secondary. Secondary
side center-tapped and earthed via a removable bolted earth link.

17.21.27 INDICATING LAMPS AND PUSHBUTTONS

(a) Indicating Lamps

1. indicating lamps shall be low voltage and connected from the

transformer secondary. Bulbs shall be voltage rated 10% higher
than the transformer secondary voltage to ensure long life.
2. lamps shall be well ventilated and the design shall permit removal
of lamp glass and bulbs from the front of the unit.
3. indicating lamps shall be supplied by individual fused circuits.
4. pilot lamp bulbs shall be of the same voltage regardless of
transformer primary voltage.
5. color of indicating lamp lenses shall comply with BS EN 60073.
Lens shall be self-colored. LED lamps shall not be used except
where they form an integral part of the proprietary equipment.
(b) Pushbuttons

1. plated or similar bezels. They shall generally match indicating

lamps in style; start pushbuttons being recessed to prevent
accidental operation. Stop pushbuttons shall not be recessed.
2. illuminated pushbuttons, where used, shall be of a design that
allows easy replacement of the lamps from the front of the panel.
3. emergency stop pushbuttons shall be of the “stay put” mushroom
headed type.

17.21.28 INSTRUMENTATION

(a) The measuring instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, power

factor meters, selector switches and associated accessories as
indicated on the Drawings and described herein as follows:

Ammeter, Voltmeter and Power Factor Meter

1. measuring instruments shall be moving iron vane type, flush

pattern with dust and moisture-proof enclosures. Anti-glare glass
front, anti-parallax scales and white faces with black numerals and
marking shall be used. All instruments shall be of long scale 240
Degree with full load indicating approximately at 1800.
2. dial size shall be 10 x 10sq. cm. (96 x 96 mm)
3. accuracy shall be one percent of full scale values.

Page 332 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

4. moving elements shall be provided with zero adjustments located

at face of dial.
5. ammeter shall be capable of withstanding twice of rated current
for 10 minutes and overload sustained under fault conditions
without damage or loss of accuracy.
6. voltmeter shall have a measuring range from 0 to 500 V and shall
withstand twice the rated full-scale voltage for 1.0 minute without
damage.
7. three ammeters or a single ammeter with selector switch shall be
provided to read the current of each phase, as indicated on the
Drawings.
8. voltmeter selector switch shall be of the rotary type with cam-
operated contractor and shall have (7) positions off, R-Y, Y-B, B-
R, R-N, Y-N, B-N.
9. single and poly phase power factor meters with associated current
and potential transformers shall be provided as required and
specified herein.

(b) Power Monitoring Unit: The unit shall be microprocessor based and
shall be capable of measuring and indicating incomer currents on
each phase, voltages between phases and phase to neutral, active
and reactive powers, power factor and total energy consumed. The
kWH meter reading shall be stored in password protected non-volatile
memory. The unit shall be mounted on the incomer cubicle at a height
not above 1.6 meter from floor level. The backlit display unit shall be
high contrast type, having light emitting characters of height not less
than 15 mm. The unit shall work on the system voltage without the
need for any separate auxiliary power. The function of power
monitoring unit for remote indication and alarm shall be included.

(c) Kilowatt meter shall be provided, as indicated on the Contract

Drawings, as per DEWA specification, irrespective of the facility
available in the multi-function unit.

17.21.29 PROTECTION RELAYS

(a) Protection relays shall comply with BS 142.

(b) Secondary injection shall be easily possible by means of purpose-
made voltage and/or current plug-in type test terminal blocks which
automatically open circuit or short circuit the integral voltage
transformers or current transformers respectively and provide
termination’s for the test supply. Disconnection of any permanent
wiring will not be acceptable.
(c) Thermal overload relays shall be used for motors ratings up to and
including 11kW, giving protection against:

1. Overcurrent unbalance
2. Single phase
3. Earth fault

(d) Solid-state electronic protection relays shall be used for motors rated

Page 333 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

above 11kW, having the following protection features:

1. Overload
2. Overcurrent
3. Single phase
4. Earth fault
5. Under voltage
6. Over voltage

Plus digital indication of:

7. Relay settings
8. % of FLC that the motor is taking
9. Continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
10. Thermal capacity used during start of motor
11. If tripped, how much time before restart to take place
12. Stall or short circuit trip
13. Earth fault trip
14. Starting
(e) Documentary evidence must be produced showing the current/time
characteristic of each overload at its setting (hot/cold for the thermal
overload) overlaid on the motor manufacturers thermal stability
time/current characteristic for comparison. Consideration must be
given as to the requested method of starting (DOL, star delta, etc.).

(f) All motor overload relays shall include a manual resetting facility.

17.21.30 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS

(a) All the starters and main Incomer breakers shall have electronic solid
state, multifunction, microprocessor based relays with communication
capabilities. These relays shall perform all the functions such as
Status Indications, Motor parameter monitoring, allow for local and
remote control, protective functions, and shall provide diagnostic
information about the motor and the relay itself. All Intelligent MCCs
and LV switchboards shall be time synchronized with the SCADA.
SCADA will be the master clock.

The details of the functions to be carried out by the motor protection

relay/ motor manager are as follows.

1. Signals /Information to be provided for each motor starter

i. Indications to be provided at the Starter Module (on front door)
and at the Operator Station through SCADA.
• Running,
• Stopped,
• Tripped,
• Auto /Manual Mode selected.

Page 334 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

• Emergency Stop P.B. activated.

• “Test” Position of Main Switch.
• Phase currents indication on the front door of the starter
module.

(b) Commands from the operator station and from the Starter Module.
1. Start / Stop Command.
2. Fault Reset at Starter module, at the System Engineer’s station
and Electrical Engineer’s station.

(c) Monitoring Functions: -

Following parameters shall be available for monitoring at the Operator
workstation and Electrical Engineer’s station.
1. Phase Currents,
2. Average Current,
3. Full Load Current.
4. Current Imbalance percent.
5. Percent Thermal capacity utilized / available.
6. Power Factor,
7. Voltage,
8. Running Hours.
9. Trends, Graphic Displays for monitored parameters
(d) Protective Functions:-
Following Protective functions with programmable trip level, warning
level and time delay shall be available at the System Engineer’s
Workstation and at the dedicated Electrical Engineer’s Station.
1. Thermal Overload- Trip Class adjustment.
2. Under load,
3. Jam protection,
4. Stall Protection,
5. Current Imbalance,
6. Phase Loss,
7. Zero Sequence ground fault,
8. Start Limitation,
9. Under voltage Protection,
10. PTC Thermister input,

(e) Diagnostic Information: -

Following information shall be provided at the Electrical Engineer’s

station and Operator workstation.
1. Motor Controller Real Time status,
2. Warning Status,
3. Time to Reset,
4. Trip Status,

Page 335 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

5. Time to overload trip,

6. History and Cause of previous trips (minimum 5)
7. Communication failure

17.21.31 CENTRAL MONITORING UNIT (CMU)

(a) Where shown on the drawing, provide a Central Monitoring Unit

(CMU). The CMU shall be a microprocessor-based, self-contained
device (NEMA 3R/12 faceplate) suitable for door mounting and shall
perform the following listed functions. Each assembly shall have
provisions for a communications module to provide for remote
computer monitoring.

(b) Monitoring and display parameters of up to 16 starters or controllers

equipped with product operated network interface card (PONI).
Communications over the local area network shall be 9,600 baud.
Parameters locally displayed at the CMU for each starter and
controller shall also be capable of being communicated to a PLC.
Information displayed at the CMU shall include the following:

1. Status - On, Off, Tripped, NOT available

2. Starter/controller description and identification
3. Three-phase current
4. Control voltage
5. Overload condition (alarm)
6. Cause of device trip
7. Operations count
8. Run time
9. Set points

(c) The CMU shall pass data to a PLC from the starters, controllers and
overload relays. The master or the host network's baud rate (speed of
upper network passing data to PLC) shall be independent of the
CMU's subnetwork baud rate. The master or host network's baud rate
shall be established via the PONI communications module while the
CMU's sub-network baud rate shall be switch selectable at CMU.
(d) The program directing the functions or the CMU shall be permanently
stored in the CMU. The addresses, types of devices and descriptions
shall be stored in memory during the learn mode and shall also be
retained throughout a power loss. Unless there has been a change, it
shall not be necessary to re-enter the learn mode after a power loss.
(e) CMU shall have an 8-digit alphanumeric display to monitor active
data, trip data or set points, which are available from the individual
Motor Control devices. CMU shall have separate LEDs to indicate
which group of data is being displayed, as selected through
membrane-type alphanumeric pushbuttons by the user. CMU shall
have alphanumeric display to indicate the address of the control
device for which data is being displayed. CMU shall have membrane
type push buttons to allow the user to step up or down to select the
control device to be displayed. CMU shall have separate LEDs to
indicate “operational status” of CMU and "alarm" status on any one of

Page 336 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

the motor control devices. CMU shall have an "acknowledge/reset"

membrane-type pushbutton to permit the user to reset the CMU
following a motor control device trip.
(f) The CMU shall have a "Help" button function, which shall scroll
English explanations in the alphanumeric window for any condition or
abbreviations.
(g) Provide an addressable communication card capable of transmitting
all data, including trip data over a compatible two-wire, local area
network to a central personal computer for storage and or printout.
Provide data and time-stamping for all starter/contactor operations.
Reprogramming of the CMU shall not be required when adding a
communication module. The network shall also be capable of
transmitting data in RS232c format via a translator module.

17.21.32 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

(a) Each motor control center shall contain power factor correction
capacitors to improve the overall power factor to between 0.93 logging
to unity. Provide reactors in series, as per the DEWA requirement.
(b) Where there is a large number of smaller drives, up to and including
11kW, a single power connection unit shall be used to improve the
power factor, as indicated on the Drawings. A minimum of four
connection stages shall be provided for common MCC capacitors.
(c) For motors above 11kW, individual power factor correction equipment
shall be provided to improve the power factor to between 0.93 lagging
and unity when the drive is operating at its duty point.
(d) Each motor shall be provided with a three-phase capacitor. Capacitors
shall be mounted in the motor control center either within the starter
compartment or in an adjacent and fully interlocked compartment.
(e) The rating of the capacitor must not exceed 60% of the magnetizing
KVAR of the motor. A separate contactor shall be provided. Dual
speed, pole change, PAM and reversing motors shall also have
separate contactors to switch the capacitors out of circuit
independently of the motor. Additional capacitors and contactors may
also be required by some of these drives to correct the power factor
throughout the speed variation.
(f) Capacitors shall be connected after the line contactor but before the
motor protection. All capacitor connections shall be fused at the take-
off point.
(g) Capacitors shall comply with BS 1650 and shall be of the dry
metalised film construction type, as specified in Section 17.18,
complete with discharge resistances. A metal enclosed terminal box
with screw fixed cover and cable entry sealing shall be provided.
(h) A label shall be provided warning that discharge resistances are fitted.
(i) Capacitors containing polychlorinated biphenyls or askarels will not be
acceptable.

17.21.33 ACCESSORIES

(a) For each MCC, supply the following equipment: -

Page 337 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. 1 No. electrical grade rubber mat to BS 921, 1000 mm wide

extending the full length of the switchboard.
2. 1 No. pair of electrical grade rubber gloves to BS EN 60903.
3. 1 No. notice in English and Arabic advising treatment for a person
suffering from electric shock.
4. 1 No. wall mountable lockable key box complete with tags and
numbering.

17.21.34 EXECUTION - EXAMINATION

(a) Verify conditions under the provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Verify that surface is suitable for motor control center installation.

17.21.35 PREPARATION

(a) Provide housekeeping pads under the provisions of Section 17.1.

17.21.36 INSTALLATION

(a) Install motor control centers in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
(b) Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after
placing motor control center.
(c) Install fuses in fusible switches.
(d) Select and install heater elements in motor starters controlled by
‘Off/Auto’ switches and humidistat to match specified humidity range.
(e) Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section
17.16.
(f) Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter door
identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes,
code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating
(g) Provide minimum clearances form the walls/structures to floor
mounted MCC and Panels as follows.

1. In front: - at least 900mm with largest cubicle door open at

right angles, or 1500mm minimum.
2. At both sides and rear: - 750mm.
3. For MCC/Panels with rear access doors, provide clearances as
specified in latest DEWA regulations.

(h) Provide sufficient space to allow for doors to open fully without fouling
with other items of equipment or other open doors.

17.21.37 COMMISSIONING

(a) MCC panel shall be commissioned by the manufacturer only. Once

the installation is complete in all respects, the manufacturer’s
representative shall verify the correctness of installation and then
carryout the commissioning.
(b) All parameters of motor manager/motor protection relays / feeder

Page 338 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

protection relay shall be programmed and shall be demonstrated to

the Engineer / DM personnel.
(c) All system documentation such as wiring diagrams of starters, use
manuals for various parts, parts list etc. shall be available at the
Electrical Engineer’s workstation and system Engineer’s workstation.

17.21.38 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of

Section 17.1.
(b) Inspect and test motor control center and each controller as directed
by the Engineer.

17.21.39 TRAINING

a. Provide training to Dubai Municipality assigned personnel in all

aspects of Motor Control Centre during a five (5) working day period
during normal working hours. Allow for all costs in connection with
above.
b. Minimum of one week written notice shall be given to the Client and
Client’s written consent shall be obtained prior to such
training/demonstration.
c. The training shall include programming / parameterization for all
programmable devices/protection relays within MCC.

17.22 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

17.22.1 Summary

(a) This section provides specification requirements for variable speed

drives; adjustable frequency drives or herein identified as AC drives
for use with standard three-phase asynchronous motors.

17.22.2 Scope Of Supply

(a) Provide labor, equipment, supervision and materials for the

installation, testing and start-up of the variable frequency drive (VFD)
as shown on the drawing as an unit for motor control centers and as
specified in this section
(b) Provide a factory trained technician to start-up and commissioning of
each VFD during field acceptance tests
(c) Verify that the motor to be used is suitable for use with the VFD
(d) Provide harmonic analysis, test and any necessary harmonic
mitigation

17.22.3 References

(a) IEC 146.1 – Semiconductor Converters - General Requirements and

Line Commutated Converters Part 1-1: Specifications of Basic
Requirements.
(b) EN 60439 – Low Voltage switchgear assembly

Page 339 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) EN 60947 – Switches and contactors

(d) EN 60529 – Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosure.
(e) EN 50081 – Electromagnetic Compatibility.
(f) EN 50082-1-2 – Immunity Tests
(g) IEEE 519-1992 – Guide for harmonic control and reactive
compensation of static power converters

17.22.4 Submittals

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data and samples.

2. Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
6. List of spare Parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage, prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram showing required components, routing
through in-plant duct bank system.
(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.
(c) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1 - Provisions for Electrical
Requirements.
(d) Submit equipment outline drawing and front panel arrangement.
Indicate the options included, mention special features, indicate
ratings and identify any deviations from the specification
(e) Power and control schematics for external connections to field
controllers and sensors including the accessories and options.
(f) Submit theoretical harmonic analysis calculation based on IEEE 519
with the bid. The analysis may use the system data as specified in
Section 17.1. However, all calculation to predict the harmonic
distortion shall be the responsibility of the VFD supplier.
(g) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
(h) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
(i) Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 17.1
- Quality Control.

17.22.5 General Requirements

(a) The variable speed drives shall be of the electronic, pulse width
modulating (PWM), variable frequency type with an output suitable for
controlling standard industrial squirrel cage motors, with a
synchronous speed as specified in the pump section.

The AC Drive and associated control equipment shall be housed

within a cubicle forming a part of the relevant motor control center.
The cubicle shall be considered as a starter and generally comply with

Page 340 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

the requirements for motor starter cubicles.

The load characteristic shall be considered to be “pump type” with

variable torque. The supplier shall be responsible for coordination with
the motor manufacturer and provide a properly matched drive-motor
system for the specified duty. The drive-motor system shall take into
consideration of the following:

1. Load torque requirements and drive capability

2. Motor rating (amperes) and loading
3. Motor efficiency
4. Motor insulation
5. Effects of power factor capacitors
6. Motor thermal protection

17.22.6 Project Record Documents

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1 - Contract Closeout.

(b) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1 - Provisions for Electrical
Requirements.

17.22.7 Operation And Maintenance Data

(a) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

(b) Submit under provisions of Section 17.1.

17.22.8 Quality Assurance

(a) Only manufacturers operating under an accredited ISO 9000 Quality

System shall be considered
(b) Manufacturers shall have a minimum 5 years manufacturing
experience with the type of equipment being proposed
(c) Prior to the despatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, in sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives
to inspect and test the equipment or witness the test, if so desired

1. All notification shall be made by written “Inspection Request” in

accordance with Section 17.1 – “Quality Control, Inspection and
Testing”

a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineers office, but the

original must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection

2. Minimum notification time shall be as follows:

a. 48 hours within Dubai city and surrounding areas
b. 72 hours for other areas within UAE
c. 1 week outside Dubai

(d) The contractor shall provide certified test results to confirm that the
controller has been tested to substantiate the designs according to
applicable standards. The test shall verify not only the performance of
the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of the
enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, the unit shall

Page 341 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

be factory tested in accordance with the applicable standards

(e) The AC Drive shall be designed, constructed and tested in

accordance with NEMA, and/or IEC standards.

(f) Every power converter shall be tested with an actual ac induction

motor, 100% loaded and temperature cycled within an environment
chamber.

(g) The AC Drive shall be submitted to a Hi-Pot test with all enclosed
devices mounted and wired, prior to shipment

(h) Manufacturer shall be ready to show proper evidence of having tested

for noise immunity, acceptable limits for harmonic distortion and line
notching on both input and output power connections

17.22.9 Rating

(a) Rated input system is 400 volts 10%, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz 2%

(b) The power factor of AC drive shall be kept within 0.93 lagging to unity
over the entire operating range.
(c) The controller for specified motor shall be rated to work in the shaded
average ambient temperature of 50 C. having relative humidity of
95% (non-condensing)
(d) The AC drive shall be rated for the continuous maximum rating of the
motor and not its running load. Evidence shall be provided to confirm
that the drive rating is sufficient for the motor rating (input current).
(e) The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall not be
less than 95%.
(f) The drive shall be designed for variable torque. The drive shall be
capable to supply 115% of rated current for up to 1 minute
(g) The output carrier frequency of the AC Drive shall be randomly
modulated and selectable within the range from 2 kHz to 8 kHz
depending on Drive rating. The drive shall provide a low noise quiet
operation.
(h) The output frequency shall not exceed 200 Hz.

17.22.10 Enclosure

(a) The enclosed product in motor control center cubicle shall be

complete with controller equipment, motor protection circuit breaker
incorporating thermal and magnetic protection, contactor, control
supply transformer as per the drawing
(b) The enclosure for the AC drive unit shall have a protection rating of
minimum IP 20 to BS EN 60947-1 or NEMA 1. Note that the overall
enclosure protection shall satisfy the requirements as specified for
Motor Control Center (MCC) cubicle.
(c) Ventilation grills with sand traps shall be included.
(d) Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a hygro/thermostat
and have OFF/ON control on the cubicle front door. The heater shall
not be in operation when the driver is functioning.

Page 342 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.22.11 Regulatory Requirements

(a) Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)

Regulations.
(b) Regulations of Etisalat

17.22.12 Delivery, Storage, And Handling

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
Section 17.1 - Material and Equipment.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under Section 17.1 – Provisions
for Electrical Requirements.

17.22.13 Maintenance Spares

(a) Provide the following spare parts for each type and size drive
specified for each pump station (cost included in the drive price):
1. printed circuit board – one of each type
2. power diode – two
3. power transistor – one pair
4. fuse of each type and rating – 100 percent (power and control)
Spares shall be packaged for long-term storage. Identify each item
with manufacturer name, description and part number on the exterior
of the package. Include description of drive reference to which the
spares belong.

17.22.14 Project/Site Requirement

(a) Under normal operating conditions, harmonic currents introduced into

the power system supply network from the drives shall not exceed the
distortion limits for a general system as defined in IEEE standard 519:
1. Maximum individual frequency voltage distortion of less than 3
percent of the local fundamental frequency
2. Notch depth, total voltage harmonic distortion, and notch area less
than the limits for a general system per table 10.2 of IEEE 519
3. Maximum harmonic current distortion less than the values
indicated in table 10.3 of IEEE 519 for a system where the ratio of
maximum short circuit current to full load current is less than 20, at
the point of common coupling (PCC)

Provide necessary isolation transformer, harmonic filter as necessary

to achieve these limits at no extra cost.

Contractor is responsible to collect the local supply system data at

PCC as necessary to comply to the IEEE 519 requirements.

It is not the intention of this specification to include harmonic filters, if

the drive harmonic level is maintained within the prescribed limits.
Ensure that

Page 343 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. Use of filter shall not degrade the plant power factor

2. Use of filter shall not cause critical resonance under normal
operating condition
3. Use of filter shall not increase the plant bus voltage by more than
five percent

Conduct field test to measure the harmonics with all the drives
(excluding dedicated standby unit), regardless of whether filters,
chokes etc., are installed or not, running at 100 percent and 50
percent loads, for at least 3 hours duration under each loading
condition. If drives do not meet the specified performance, Contractor
shall provide an acceptable solution at no additional cost to the owner.

The testing agency shall be certified by international authority (IETA)

or the drive manufacturer and shall provide materials and equipment
for the tests.

17.22.15 Coordination With Others

(a) Coordinate with the pump-motor manufacturer to ensure that a

complete reliable and compatible system is provided. Collect from the
pump manufacturer the allowable limits within which the pump is
expected to operate.

17.22.16 Warranty

(a) All components shall be warranted to be free from defects in

materials, design or workmanship for 24 months from the date of
taking-over of the works.
(b) Individual warranties by component manufacturer in lieu of single
source responsibility by the drive manufacturer shall not be
acceptable.
(c) Items, which fail during the warranty period, excluding expendable
items, shall be replaced immediately without cost to the owner.
(d) Manufacturer’s guarantee and warranty certificates shall be provided
prior to equipment startup.

17.22.17 Products - General

(a) The AC Drive shall convert the input ac mains power to an adjustable
frequency and voltage as defined in the following sections.
(b) The input power section shall utilize a full wave bridge design
incorporating diode rectifiers. The diode rectifiers shall convert fixed
voltage and frequency, ac line power to fixed dc voltage. This power
section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the ac input line.
(c) The output power section shall change fixed dc voltage to adjustable
frequency ac voltage. This section shall preferably utilize 3rd
generation insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) or intelligent
power modules (IPM) with current source design as required by the
current rating of the motor.
(d) A DC link choke smoothing reactor shall be included to limit fault
throughput

Page 344 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(e) The AC drive shall be designed for both manual and automatic speed
control. The manual speed control shall be by means of a hand-
adjusted potentiometer.
(f) The starting arrangement shall include a ramp for speed control so
that the starting current remains within the limit of normal rated current
of the motor.
(g) The drive shall incorporate facility to allow the connection of an
Emergency Stop Push Button to ensure effective direct stopping of the
drive, if dangerous situations arise. The means provided shall include
an air-break on-load contactor suitable to open directly by operation of
the emergency push button. The arrangement shall not:
1. inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the controller
2. produce additional safety hazards
3. cause damage to the controller

17.22.18 Protection

(a) Upon power-up the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid
operation of memory, option module, loss of analog reference input,
loss of communication, dynamic brake failure, dc to dc power supply,
control power and the pre-charge circuit.

The Power Converter shall be protected against short circuits,

between output phases and ground; and the logic and analog outputs.

The AC Drive shall have solid-state I²t protection that is UL Listed and
meets UL 508 C as a Class-10 overload protection and meets IEC
60947.
The protection shall be provided for TYPE 2 co-ordination.

For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit or internal
fault, an auto restart function will provide programmable restart
attempts. The programmable time delay before restart attempts shall
be adjustable from 10 second to 10 minutes.

A microprocessor controlled digital thermal protection system shall be

included which continuously calculates the temperature rise of the
motor, independent of the drive and provides:

1. An overload pre-alarm, which indicates by relay contact that the

motor has exceeded its rated temperature, set at 110% of the
rated motor thermal capacity
2. A thermal fault condition, which stops the motor if the temperature
exceeds 120% of the motor thermal capability.
3. An analog electronic circuit with a time constant adjustable to the
motor's thermal cooling time-constant ensuring the memorization
of the thermal state even after power supplies disconnection or
shorting out of the power semiconductors.

The AC Drive shall provide SCR heatsink construction for heat

transfer.

Page 345 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The AC Drive shall have a programmable fold-back function that will

anticipate a controller/motor overload condition and fold back the
frequency to avoid a fault condition.

The AC Drive shall include Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) for

protection against voltage surges.

17.22.19 Configuration And Setting Range

(a) The AC Drive shall self-configure to the main operating supply voltage
and frequency.
(b) Upon power-up, the AC Drive shall send a signal to the connected
motor and store the resulting electro-mechanical resistance data into
memory. The inductance data will be measured during no-load
operation when operating at a frequency equal to power frequency.
The AC Drive shall automatically optimize the operating
characteristics according to the stored data.
(c) The AC Drive will be factory pre-set for the application
(d) A choice of three types of acceleration and deceleration ramps will be
available in the AC Drive software; linear, S curve and U curve.
(e) The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from
.1 to 500 seconds.
(f) The memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of the
past 8 faults (minimum).
(g) Slip compensation shall be a software-enabled function.
(h) The starter shall have a PID control system integrated as standard to
accept the external signals coming from sensors and transducers in
the pumping application.
(i) Following configurable inputs and outputs, as minimum, shall be
provided which can be used to interface the drive with the control
system for remote applications:

Analogue input output

1. 0(4) to 20 mA, 2 nos. 2 nos.
2. 0(2) to 10 V, 2 nos. 2 nos.
3. Digital 2 nos. 2 nos.
4. Relay (dry contacts) 2 nos. 2 nos.

(j) Provide communication interface and facility for control to integrate the
operation of the system. The facility shall be compatible with the
arrangement for other equipment in the MCC and suitable for
operation of the drive with PLC through RS485 serial interface.
(k) The drive controller shall incorporate a user friendly programmer
keypad having LCD panel in “Plain Language Text in English” with
help feature to enable easy setting up of parameters, and running the
drive diagnostic program with out referring to the instruction manual.
Parameter setting shall be password protected. The man/machine
interface facility for parameter setting shall include:

1. menu selection

Page 346 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2. parameter setting
3. speed potentiometer

(l) The display will be a high resolution, LCD backlit screen capable of
displaying graphics such as bar graphs as well as alphanumeric
characters, simultaneously. The display panel shall be used to monitor
the electrical metering parameters by menu driven selection.
This shall include:
1. input/output currents
2. input/output voltages
3. Input/output frequencies
4. kilowatt
5. running hours
(m) The following operator devices, either door mounted or unit mounted
but accessible without opening the door, shall be included:
1. start
2. stop
3. emergency stop
4. fault reset
5. local/remote selector
6. hand/off/auto selector
7. heater on/off

(n) The AC Drive shall have LEDs mounted on the front panel to indicate
functional status
This shall include:
1. green LED – system healthy
2. red LED – drive faulty
3. red LED – motor faulty (Thermal)
4. white LED – motor running
5. amber LED – overload alarm
6. red LED – emergency stop

17.22.20 Control

(a) Terminal strip shall be provided to connect external devices for

starting/stopping the AC Drive, speed control and displaying operating
status. All control inputs and outputs will be software assignable.

2-wire or 3-wire control strategy shall be defined within the software.

External relays or logic devices will not be required.

The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be rated for
24 VDC.

The internal power supply unit shall incorporate automatic current fold-
back protection facility to protect it, if incorrectly connected or shorted.
The transistor logic outputs shall be current limited and shall be
protected, if shorted or excess current is pulled.

All logic connections shall be furnished on pull-apart terminal strips.

Page 347 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.22.21 Cables

(a) Cables between the drive and motor shall be sized and insulation
grade selected based on the manufacturer recommendation for the
particular installation considering the distance between them. Multi-
core power cables shall be armored and XLPE insulated. The armor of
the cable shall be cross-bonded to earth. All signal and control cables
shall be shielded.
Any restriction on the length of the cable shall be taken into care and if
required, output reactors shall be provided with suitable compensation
for output torque.

17.22.22 Source Quality Control And Tests

(a) Provide testing of Variable Speed Controllers under provisions of

Section 17.1- Provisions for Electrical Requirements.

17.22.23 Execution - Installers

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.22.24 Installation

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

17.22.25 Field Quality Control

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1 -
Quality Control.
(b) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 17.1 -
Provisions for Electrical Requirements.

17.22.26 Manufacturer's Field Services

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 17.1 - Quality
Control.
(b) Prepare and start systems under provisions of this section - General
Equipment Provisions.
(c) The manufacturer’s trained service test technician shall perform start-
up and commissioning of the VFD. He shall perform all the adjustment
and settings as per the field requirements.

17.22.27 Demonstration

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 17.1 -

Starting of Systems.

(b) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of this section -

General Equipment Provisions.

Page 348 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.22.28 Training

(a) Provide training to Employer’s staff under provisions of Section 17.1 -

Operation and Maintenance Data.
(b) Provide training to Employer’s staff under provisions of Section 17.1 -
General Equipment Provisions.

17.22.29 Maintenance

(a) Provide maintenance under provisions of Section 17.1 - Contract

Closeout.

17.23 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

17.23.1 Summary

(a) This specification section covers the supply and installation of

uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system equipment

17.23.2 Scope

(a) Provide Two independent UPS systems, site rated for maximum site
ambient temperature of ratings as indicated on the drawings.
(b) Provide factory-assembled and pre-wired equipment consisting of
rectifier, inverter, battery charger, battery, control equipment, static
switches etc. to provide an uninterruptible power supply system.
(c) Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and accessories
necessary to furnish and install the work of this Section, complete and
functional, as indicated in the Contract Documents and as specified
herein.

17.23.3 References

(a) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)

(b) BS 5424 - Control gear for voltages up to 1000 volt ac
(c) BSEN 60146 –1–1 - Basic requirements of electrical
power converters
(d) BSEN 60146 –1–3 - Transformers and rectifiers
(e) IEC 623 - Nickel Cadmium rechargeable single cells
(f) EN50091-1-2

17.23.4 General Requirements

(a) The static uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system shall provide
high quality sinusoidal AC power required for loads such as
1. Emergency lighting
2. CCTV System
3. Control & Instruments
4. SCADA System

However, it shall have full compatibility for all types of loads.

(b) The UPS system shall provide true uninterrupted supply against

Page 349 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

power disturbances and power failure.

(c) The UPS system shall provide intelligent information about the battery
condition and the critical life situation.
(d) The UPS system shall provide high RFI filtering and shall be
manufactured according to EMC directives. The system shall be
designed and constructed to provide Electromagnetic Interference
compatibility as per the requirement of standard EN 61800-3/IEC
1800-3.
(e) UPS shall be coordinated with the systems which use UPS power to
meet all requirements of loads.

17.23.5 Submittals For Review

(a) Section PS10 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

(b) Product Data - Provide outline and mounting dimensions, weights,
voltage and capacity ratings, fusing and accessories.

17.23.6 Submittals For Information

(a) Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittals for information.

(b) Manufacturer's Instructions - Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements
(c) instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.

17.23.7 Submittals For Closeout

(a) Contract Closeout and Operation and Maintenance Data: Submittals

for project closeout.
(b) Record actual locations of capacitors in project record documents.
(c) Maintenance Data - Include cell and fuse replacement instructions.
(d) Include maintenance and trouble shooting instructions for electronic
components.

17.23.8 Qualifications

(a) Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience.
(b) The UPS manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality
Assurance Program. In particular the main equipment manufacturing
stages sanctioned by appropriate tests such as: incoming components
inspection, discrete sub-assembly tests and complete functional
checks on the final product. Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in
leaving the factory. Final inspection and calibration operations shall
be documented in a report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality
Inspection department.

17.23.9 Regulatory Requirements

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

Page 350 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.

2. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)
regulations.
In the case of conflict the DEWA requirements shall take precedence.

(b) Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or

CE labeled or testing firm acceptable to the Engineer as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.

17.23.10 Site Condition

(a) Maximum Site Ambient Temperature: 50 degree Celsius

(b) Maximum relative humidity: 95 percent

17.23.11 Delivery, Storage, And Handling

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site to meet site ambient
requirements specified elsewhere.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under this section - General
Equipment Provisions.

17.23.12 Maintenance Materials

(a) Contract Closeout.

(b) Furnish a list with unit price in the Schedule of Spare Parts.

17.23.13 Products - System

(a) The UPS system shall comprise of rectifier, battery charger and
inverter modules.

1. The UPS system shall be designed in such a way that any spare
part, printed circuit board, sub-assembly or component, can be
replaced without any adjustment.
2. It shall supply clean, uninterrupted power to the critical loads and
meet the following specifications.
3. Transformers shall be manufactured using vacuum pressure
impregnated insulation.

(b) During normal operation, shall be powered from the mains through the
rectifier and the inverter. The rectifier shall also supply current to
charge and maintain the battery in a fully charged state.
(c) When the mains is outside the operation limits or has failed, the
battery supplies the inverter, which in turns supplies the load. On
restoration of normal condition of the mains supply, the UPS shall
automatically return to its normal mode of operation
(d) A static switching arrangement shall be included to bypass the UPS
system for maintenance or outage, and supply power to load from
mains without power break.
(e) The UPS cabinet shall be designed such that all components are
removable from the front, cable entry by floor mounted gland plates.
(e) Include communication interface to connect to the existing SCADA

Page 351 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

system. Provide an additional RS232C port.

(f) Include automatic testing sequence for testing UPS at operation
adjustable intervals with override facility to disable testing.

17.23.14 Rectifier/Charger

(a) The rectifier/charger shall be of solid-state type with fully controlled 6-

pulse thyristor bridge and anti-harmonic chokes. It shall have 10 sec
walk-in ramp for input current, adjustable battery current and voltage.
It shall recharge a fully discharged battery in 24 hours. A boost
charge facility shall be provided. A normally open contact rated at 240
Vac, 2A, close on boost charge, shall be provided.

Input systems
Voltage 400 volts +/- 10%
Wiring 3-phase, 4-wire + Earth
Frequency 45 to 55 Hz
Grounding systemTNS

17.23.15 Battery

(a) The battery shall be of sealed lead acid maintenance free type and
sized for the pre-selected time with the UPS operating at rated load.
The battery set shall be installed in similar cabinet finish as the UPS
unit.
(b) The battery system shall be sized to maintain full load for a period of
30 (thirty) minutes. However, it shall be possible to supply 50% load
for two hours.

17.23.16 Inverter

(a) The inverter shall be of transistorized PWM type, rated power at 0.8
p.f.

Output
Rated Voltage 220/400 volts (+/- 1%), 50Hz (+/-0.25 Hz).
Wiring 3-phase, 4 wire + Earth
Transient voltage and Regulation:
Voltage transients shall not exceed +/- 5% for a 100% load step
change and the return to steady state value shall be in less than 20
milliseconds.
Harmonic distortion: Less than 4% THD
Efficiency: For 100% to 50% load > 90%
Audible noise: 65 dBA @ 1.5m

(b) Overload Capabilities

Inverter shall sustain 125% overload for at least 10 minutes and 150%
overloads for 1 minute. After delay, if overload persists, the load shall
be transferred to bypass supply without break if Mains voltage is
within tolerance limits. The UPS shall check the load and if the load is
below overload threshold, inverter shall restart automatically and load
shall be transferred back to inverter. Facility to inhibit automatic re-
transfer shall be provided. The inverter shall be rated for site ambient

Page 352 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

temperature without derating.

17.23.17 Static Switch

(a) The static switch shall have anti-parallel connected thyristor bank for
instantaneous load transfer between the inverter and the reserve
mains supply.

(b) Maintenance manual By Pass.

Manual bypass switch system of full UPS shall be integrated into the
UPS so that load can be transferred to mains supply WITHOUT break
for maintenance of UPS. Procedure for transfer to maintenance
bypass and back to UPS shall be controlled by the bypass menu of
the UPS, thus eliminating possibility of causing disturbance of load by
operator who may be unaware of correct procedures.

Include automatic adjustment of inverter output and synchro-check

arrangement for switchover to the reserve power source.

17.23.18 Monitoring And Control

(a) Monitors
The following status information shall be monitored by indicating lights
on the front panel of the UPS

rectifier-charger on
load on inverter
load on Mains bypass
alarm
inverter shutdown imminent
boost charge
battery high temp. alarm

(b) Alarms
An audible alarm shall warn the user of faults or operating problems.
The system shall be equipped with an alarm off button. Metering
values displayed on an alpha-numeric display.

(c) Meter
The following measurements shall be available:
inverter output voltage (L-L)
inverter output frequency
inverter output currents
voltage across battery terminals
battery current (charge/discharge)
mains input voltages (L-L)
rectifier/charger input currents.

(d) Remote Control And Monitoring

Remote transmission shall be possible for all controls, monitors and
measurement indication on the UPS unit to the site SCADA system,
over communication bars.

Page 353 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.23.19 Protective Devices, Controls And Monitors

(a) The UPS shall be built on modular basis.

(b) The UPS shall include protection against input over voltages, load
short-circuits, external or internal over temperature, vibration and
impacts during transport, etc. The UPS shall stop automatically if the
DC voltage drops below a preset minimum value.

(c) Controls shall be micro processor based and the following main
controls shall be possible:

rectifier/charger on/off
inverter on/off
forced shutdown
forced transfer upon forced shutdown of inverter when the bypass
power supply (mains 2) is outside tolerances
self-test

17.23.20 Execution - General

(a) Install the UPS system including battery cabinet at location in the UPS
room of Ancillary Buildings as decided by the engineer at site.
Provide minimum clearance as per manufacturer’s recommendation
and DEWA regulations.

(b) Submit method statement for commissioning of the UPS system and
transferring load from the mains to the UPS system.

17.23.21 Works Tests

(a) Tests carried out at the manufacturers’ works shall be the

manufacturers’ standard tests and shall demonstrate compliance with
specified requirements and compatibility of interconnected equipment.

(b) The Contractor shall provide a record of all tests carried out including
records of abortive tests.

17.23.22 Site Tests

(a) Before the positioning/bolting down into the final UPS location at site a
visual inspection shall be carried out.
(b) Tests shall be carried out utilizing the plant wiring and voltage source.
(c) The UPS manufacturer’s commissioning engineer shall supervise the
site tests to ensure that the installation and testing complies with the
manufacturer’s specification.
(d) A full system test shall be carried out utilizing all the plant UPS
services and final plant loads and as a minimum shall include:
1. Load test for a minimum of 24 hours with the UPS loaded with all
plant running, whether connected to the UPS or not, in its normal

Page 354 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

and failure modes.

2. During the load test the mains / input shall be failed a minimum of
three times, the test shall be carried out with a fully charged
battery.
3. Synchronization test to check frequency variation tolerance.
4. Voltage test to check voltage variation tolerance.
5. Harmonic analysis of the UPS ac input and output supplies.
6. A Crest factor test shall be carried out with the UPS in its on-line
mode and bypass mode.
(e) In case of failure of any test, the contractor shall replace the faulty
parts and carryout retest of UPS as above to the satisfaction of
Engineer / Client.

17.23.23 Training

Provide training on all aspects of UPS specifically including operation,

maintenance and troubleshooting for Client’s representatives.

The training shall be carried out by UPS manufacturer’s competent

representatives.

17.23.24 Spares

Include recommended spares for two years of maintenance for all parts of
UPS system.

17.24 AUTOMATIC DELAYED-TRANSITION TRANSFER & BYPASS-

ISOLATION SWITCHES (ATS)

17.24.1 Summary

(a) This section specifies requirements for automatic delayed transition

transfer & bypass-isolation switch with number of poles, amperage,
voltage, and withstand current ratings as shown on the plans. Each
ATS system(s) shall consist of a delayed transition transfer switch
and a two-way bypass/isolation switch. All ATS and control modules
shall be the product of the same manufacturer.

(b) The ATS shall transfer the load in delayed transition (break-before-
make) mode. Transfer is accomplished with a user-defined
interruption period in both directions adjustable from 1 second to 5
minutes in at least 15 increments.

17.24.2 Scope

(a) Provide Automatic delayed Transition Transfer and bypass switches as

shown on the drawings.
(b) Provide factory assembled pre-wired tested equipment to meet the

Page 355 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

functional requirements.

17.24.3 References

The automatic delayed transition transfer & bypass-isolation switches and

accessories shall conform to the requirements of latest revisions of
following standards

(a) UL 1008 - Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment

(b) IEC 60947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear;
Multifunction equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
(c) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
(d) NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems
(e) IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications
(f) NEMA Standard ICS10-1993 (formerly ICS2-447) - AC Automatic
Transfer Switches
(g) UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment

17.24.4 Products – General Requirements

(a) All ATS shall be housed in vertical free standing panels similar in
construction to MCCs on Low Voltage switchboards and shall comply
with requirements of 17.20.
(b) ATS shall be designed and constructed such that inspection
maintenance and replacement of parts can be easily possible at site.
Manufacturer’s detailed instructions shall be incorporated in the
maintenance manuals. ATS requiring their complete return to the
manufacturer for service will not be acceptable.
(c) ATS shall have only front access.
(d) ATS shall be of indoor construction, IP 54 degree of protection suitable
for installation in non-vented substations and shall be capable of
operation in the specified ambient conditions without any adverse effect
on ATS.
(e) ATS shall have communication capability for communication with the
central SCADA system through fiber optic network.

17.24.5 Submittals

(a) Submit under provisions of this section.

(b) Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with overall
dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements;
nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and
ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip
ratings, withstand ratings, and time/current curves of all equipment and
components.
(c) Conduit entrance drawing and cable routing to motors etc.
(d) Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test
results.

Page 356 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(e) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

17.24.6 Project Record Documents

(a) Submit under provisions of this section.

(b) Submit under provisions of this section.

17.24.7 Operation And Maintenance Data

(a) Submit under provisions of this section.

(b) Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current
prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance
procedures and intervals.

17.24.8 Quality Assurance

(a) Perform Work in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3 or ISO 9002 or other
standards as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Maintain one copy of each document on site.

17.24.9 Regulatory Requirements

(a) Conform to the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code, USA

2. BS 7671 – Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.
3. Latest issue of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority regulations.
4. In the case of conflict the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
(DEWA) requirements shall take precedence.

(b) Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. or testing firm acceptable to the Engineer as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.

17.24.10 Delivery, Storage, And Handling

(a) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of
this section.
(b) Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with particular
reference to Dubai climatic conditions under this section.
(c) Deliver in 1.2m maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped
for protection, and mounted on shipping skids.
(d) Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from
dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
(e) Handle in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3 or other approved standard.
Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid
damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish.

Page 357 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.24.11 Field Measurements

(a) Verify that field measurements are as indicated on contract drawings.

17.24.12 Maintenance Materials

(a) Provide products, spare parts and maintenance materials as specified

in the technical Sections of this specification.

1. Include itemised list of all items furnished, describing each item

and citing the appropriate specification section and paragraph.
2. Package each item for long term storage.
3. Mark or tag each item for easy identification.

(b) Deliver items to the project site.

1. Inventory items with the Engineer and obtain a receipt prior to final
payment.

(c) Provide complete listing of all consumable stores and spare parts
used by the Contractor during the maintenance period.

17.24.13 Extra Materials

(a) Furnish under provisions of this section.

(b) Provide number of each size and type fuse installed as listed in the
Schedule of Spare Parts.

17.24.14 Mechanically Held Transfer Switch

(a) The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically
held. The electrical operator shall be a solenoid mechanism,
momentarily energized. The transfer switch unit shall include both
electrical and mechanical interlocks to prevent both sets of main
contacts from being closed at the same time. Main operators which
include overcurrent disconnect devices OR do not include electrical and
mechanical interlocks will not be accepted.

(b) All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease
of maintenance and commonality of parts.

(c) The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary

outages, so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and
contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and
operating life.

(d) All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600
amperes and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high
withstand and close-on capability and be protected by separate arcing
contacts.

(e) Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch
without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of
power conductors. Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front

Page 358 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable

contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or
bus bars.

(f) Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers,

contactors, or parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty,
repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources are not
acceptable.

(g) Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the

plans, a neutral conductor plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure
connectors shall be provided.

17.24.15 Bypass-Isolation Switch

(a) A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the

load to either source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch
from all source and load power conductors. All main contacts shall be
manually driven.
(b) Power interconnections shall be silver-plated copper bus bar. The only
field installed power connections shall be at the service and load
terminals of the bypass-isolation switch. All control interwiring shall be
provided with disconnect plugs.
(c) Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear
distinction between the functions. Handles shall be permanently affixed
and operable without opening the enclosure door. Designs requiring
insertion of loose operating handles or opening of the enclosure door to
operate are not acceptable.
(d) Bypass to the load-carrying source shall be accomplished with no
interruption of power to the load (make before break contacts). Designs
which disconnect the load when bypassing are not acceptable. The
bypass handle shall have three operating modes: "Bypass to Normal,"
"Automatic," and "Bypass to Emergency." The operating speed of the
bypass contacts shall be the same as the associated transfer switch and
shall be independent of the speed at which the manual handle is
operated. In the "Automatic" mode, the bypass contacts shall be out of
the power circuit so that they will not be subjected to fault currents to
which the system may be subjected.
(e) The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: "Closed,"
"Test," and "Open." The "Test" mode shall permit testing of the entire
emergency power system, including the automatic transfer switches with
no interruption of power to the load. The "Open" mode shall completely
isolate the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power
conductors. When in the "Open" mode, it shall be possible to completely
withdraw the automatic transfer switch for inspection or maintenance to
conform to code requirements without removal of power conductors or
the use of any tools.
(f) When the isolation switch is in the "Test" or "Open" mode, the bypass
switch shall function as a manual transfer switch.

17.24.16 Microprocessor Controller

(a) The controller’s sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in
microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the
ability to communicate serially through a serial communication module.

Page 359 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for
maximum application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements.
Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to 1% of
nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to 0.2%. The
panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of - 20 to
+60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C.

(c) The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an

interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed
disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the
transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall
be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall
be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers. The panel shall be
enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the
transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. The protective
cover shall include a built-in pocket for storage of the operator’s
manuals.

(d) All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to

simplify field-wiring connections.

(e) The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as follows:

1. IEEE472 (ANSI C37.90A) Ring Wave Test.

2. ENC55011 1991 Class A Conducted and Radiated Emission.
3. EN61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity, Direct Contact &
Air Discharge.
4. EN61000-4-3 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Immunity.
5. EN61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient Immunity.
6. EN61000-4-5 Surge Immunity.
7. ENV50141 HF Conducted Disturbances Immunity.

17.24.17 Enclosure

(a) The ATS shall be furnished in a IP54 protector enclosure unless

otherwise shown on the plans.

(b) All standard and optional door-mounted switches and pilot lights shall
be 16-mm industrial grade type or equivalent for easy viewing &
replacement. Door controls shall be provided on a separate
removable plate, which can be supplied loose for open type units.

17.24.18 Operation - Controller Display And Keypad

(a) A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral
part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired
operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be
available for viewing and limited control through the serial
communications input port. The following parameters shall only be
adjustable via DIP switches on the controller:

1. Nominal line voltage and frequency

Page 360 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2. Single or three phase sensing

3. Operating parameter protection
4. Transfer operating mode configuration
(Open transition, Closed transition or Delayed transition)
All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable
and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction
manuals.

17.24.19 Voltage, Frequency And Phase Rotation Sensing

(a) Voltage and frequency on both the normal (N) and emergency (E) sources
(as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following
pickup, dropout and trip setting capabilities (values shown as

% of nominal unless otherwise specified):

Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset

Undervoltage N&E,3 70 to 98% 85 to 100%
Overvoltage N&E,3 102 to 115% 2% below trip
Underfrequency N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100%
Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip
Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1% below dropout

(b) Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an

operating temperature range of -20 C to 60 C.

(c) Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1%

increments either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via
serial communications port access.

(d) The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or

through the serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the
normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered
unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation
selected (ABC or CBA).

(e) Source status screens shall be provided for both normal and
emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all three phases,
frequency and phase rotation.

17.24.20 Time Delays

(a) An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to

override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and
engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this
time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 24 VDC power
supply.

(b) A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable

from 0 to 60 minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to
emergency.

Page 361 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds to override momentary

emergency source outage to delay all retransfer signals during initial
loading of engine generator set.

(d) Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be
provided on re-transfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual
normal power failures and the other for the test mode function. The
time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall
be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the
normal source is acceptable.

(e) A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for
cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes.

(f) A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an
external relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. The controller
shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute time delay
in any of the following modes:

1. Prior to transfer only.

2. Prior to and after transfer.
3. Normal to emergency only.
4. Emergency to normal only.
5. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.
6. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.

(g) The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for
Delayed Transition & Bypass-Isolation operation:

1. 0 to 5 minute time delay for the load disconnect position for delayed
transition operation.

(h) All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments

(i) All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or
with a remote device connected to the serial communications port. The
time delay value displayed on the LCD or remote device shall be the
remaining time until the next event occurs.

17.24.11 Accessories

(a) A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test
/ automatic / reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal source
failure. The reset position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer
to emergency or retransfer to normal. Switches which require utilizing the
keypad and display function or have no manual time delay bypass
means are not acceptable.

(b) A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps, 32 VDC shall be

provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall
prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to
reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting,
regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is
transferred.

Page 362 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(c) Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting
of one contact, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source
and one contact closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency
source.

(d) LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided;
one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green)
and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source
(red).

(e) LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided
and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source
availability of the normal and emergency sources, as determined by the
voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source.

The following features shall be built-in to the controller, and capable of

being activated through keypad programming or the serial port.

(f) Provide the ability to select “commit/no commit to transfer” to determine

whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the
normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.

(g) Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal
the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to
inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these
inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port.

(h) The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that
will allow the transfer switch to function in a non-automatic mode using
an external control device.

(i) Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine

exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to
seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user shall be able
to:

1. Enable or disable the routine.

2. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine.
3. Set the start time,
1. time of day
2. day of week
3. week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every)
4. Set the duration of the run.

At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load
back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down
period. A 10- year life battery that supplies power to the real time clock
in the event of a power loss maintain all time and date information.

(j) System Status - The controller LCD display shall include a “System
Status” screen which shall be readily accessible from any point in the
menu by designated key. This screen shall display a clear description of

Page 363 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

the active operating sequence and switch position. For example,

Normal Failed Load on Normal

TD Normal to Emerg 2min15s

Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or

display “coded” system status messages, which must be explained by
references in the operator’s manual, are not permissible.

(k) Self Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for
the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide
information on the status input signals to the controller which may be
preventing load transfer commands from being completed.

(l) Communications Interface – The controller shall be capable of

interfacing, through a serial communication module, with a network of
transfer switches, locally (up to 1800m). Standard software specific for
transfer switch applications shall be available by the transfer switch
manufacturer. This software shall allow for the monitoring, control and
setup of parameters.

(m) Data Logging – The controller shall have the ability to log data and to
maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The
following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a
non-volatile memory:

1. Event Logging
i. Date and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency.
ii. Date and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal.
iii. Date and time and reason for engine start.
iv. Date and time engine stopped.
v. Date and time emergency source available.
vi. Date and time emergency source not available.

2. Statistical Data
i. Total number of transfers.
ii. Total number of transfers due to source failure.
iii. Total number of days controller is energized.
iv. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are
available.

(n) Communications Module - A full duplex RS485 interface shall be

installed in the ATS controller to enable serial communications. The
serial communications shall be capable of a direct connect or multi-
drop configured network. This module shall allow for the seamless
integration of all communication transfer devices.

17.24.22 Additional Requirements Withstand And Closing Ratings

(a) The ATS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS
symmetrical short circuit current at the ATS terminals with the type of
overcurrent protection shown on the plans.

Page 364 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(b) The ATS and bypass switch shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008
and be labeled in accordance with that standard's 1½ and 3 cycle, long-
time ratings.

17.24.23 Source Quallity Control And Tests

(a) The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of
the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation
and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and
time delay settings are in compliance with the specification
requirements.
(b) ATS shall be subject to all witness tests in compliance with the specified
standards.
(c) The test reports shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment
involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those
stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the
certification.
(d) The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International
Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party
certification verifying quality assurance in design/development,
production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001.

17.24.24 Execution - Installers

(a) The Contractor shall use competent persons to install the equipment
and shall provide them with documentary evidence of their
competence, which the Engineer or Employer, or their nominees, shall
be entitled to see at any time.

17.24.25 Installation

(a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

17.24.26 Field Quality Control

(a) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of Section PS-
10/1
(b) Conduct field inspection and testing under provisions of this section.
(c) Each control panel shall be tested to demonstrate correct operation of
relaying, fault protection and control equipment. All isolators, fuse
switches, oil and air circuit breakers shall be tested for correct
operation and fault operation. All associated cabling shall be tested for
correct phase connection and insulation resistance.

17.24.27 Manufacturer's Field Services

(a) Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01400.

(b) Prepare and start systems under provisions of this section.

17.24.28 Demonstration

(a) Provide systems demonstration under provisions of this section.

Page 365 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.24.29 Training

(a) Provide training to Employer’s staff under provisions of this section.

17.25 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

17.25.1 Description

(a) The work of this Section is integral with the whole of the Contract
Documents and is not intended to be interpreted outside that context.
(b) Coordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this
Section.

17.25.2 Description of Work

(a) This Section shall include all labour, materials and accessories for the
complete performance of all distribution boards in accordance with the
Specifications and Drawings.

17.25.3 Related Sections

(a) Section 16 General Electrical Requirements

17.25.4 Applicable Standards Referred To In This Section

(a) BS 5486 PT. 11, PT. 12 Particular Requirements for

HRC Fuses, Miniature Circuit Breaker Boards.
(b) BS EN 60898, IEC 157-1A Miniature Circuit Breakers.
(c) BS 4293 Current Operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker.
(d) BS 6231 PVC Insulated Cable for Switchgear and Control Gear
Wiring.
(e) BS EN 60529-1, IEC 529 Degree of Protection for Enclosures.

17.25.5 Submittals

(a) Submit fully detailed specifications for the enclosures and components
of distribution boards with relevant sheets of manufacturer’s
catalogues.
(b) Submit confirmation that proposed boards comply with relevant
Specifications, Drawings and Schedule of Points.

17.25.6 General

(a) Distribution boards shall be provided to serve lighting, fans, socket

outlets and other appliances. Board shall be arranged in banks of
ways, as indicated on the schedule of points.
(b) Distribution boards shall be flush mounted type, surface mounted
type, or mounted in motor control centres, as indicated. The boards
shall be totally enclosed, dust protected, vermin proof type.
Distribution boards installed in all plant rooms and other general areas
shall be IP65 and shall be corrosion resistant. Enclosure shall be of

Page 366 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

glass fibre reinforced polycarbonate, with transparent polycarbonate

cover.
(c) When installed in air-conditioned electrical/MCC rooms, enclosure
shall be fabricated from robust galvanised sheet, fully rust-proofed,
stove enamelled, of minimum thickness 1.5mm and shall be protected
to IP32 for internal use, with neoprene gaskets for the doors.
(d) The distribution boards shall be provided with fixed cover and a
hinged door with padlock, which can be opened about 120 Degree
without any obstruction and with conduit knockouts from the top and
bottom. The hinged door with a lock and key shall be integral part of
the fixed cover.
(e) The cabinet shall be constructed so that it is necessary to open the
door to operate Miniature Circuit Breakers or ELCB. Access to interior
components and internal wiring shall be gained by removing a
separate barrier within the enclosure.
(f) All distribution boards shall be controlled by an adequately rated ON
load isolator, or circuit breaker to interrupt the supply to the entire
distribution board.
(g) A circuit label shall be provided to indicate the area served by each
M.C.B.

17.25.7 Busbars

(a) Shall be of appropriate current carrying capacity, at least equal to the

rating of the main incoming isolator or circuit breaker.
(b) Shall be of high electrical conductivity copper.

17.25.8 Moulded Circuit Neutral Connector Block

(a) Shall be of ample size to ensure a separate way is available on the

connector block for the neutral conductor of each circuit.

17.25.9 Miniature Circuit Breakers (Mcb)

(a) The M.C.B. shall comply with BS EN 60898 Part 1 and amendments
and shall be of category M6 Type 3.
(b) The M.C.B. shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the
breaker on a faulty circuit and shall be engraved to indicate “ON/OFF”
position and rated current.
(c) Trip Settings: As indicated on schedule of points.
(d) Shall have a minimum symmetrical RMS interrupting capacity of 6 kA.
(e) Shall have the thermal overload trips to operate at 125% rated current
and instantaneous magnetic trip to operate at:
i 500% rated current for single pole
breakers. ii 800% rated current for triple pole
breakers.

(f) Shall be arranged so that it is possible to replace three single phase

units with one three phase unit.
H. Triple pole miniature circuit breakers shall have inherent
characteristics, to prevent single phasing and shall be fully suitable for
motor duty.

Page 367 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.25.10 Current Operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (Co-Elcb)

(a) Current operated earth leakage circuit breakers shall provide accident
protection, by interrupting dangerous contact with voltage, which may
be present in faulty electrical equipment as a result of frame faults,
insufficient insulation or misuse.
(b) The ELCB shall also provide a high degree of protection against earth
leakage, fires and electric shock and can withstand at least 6kA. The
breakers shall generally comply with BS 4293, 1983 and the
recommended specification CEE 227 of the IEC on Rules for the
approval of electrical equipment.
(c) The breaker shall consist of a core balance transformer, a tripping coil
with contact assembly, main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, a test
button and a trip free mechanism, all enclosed in a robust body of all
insulated material.
(d) Degree of Protection against earth leakage throughout the electrical
installation shall be as indicated on the Drawings
(e) The breaker protecting lighting and/or power circuits shall be mounted
in the panel board enclosure.

17.25.11 Contactors

(a) Lighting Contactors

1. The contactors shall be single coil, electrically operated,
mechanically held (latch type) and shall be rated for Tungsten,
Fluorescent, LED or discharge lighting load.
2. Contactors rating and number of poles: as indicated in the
Schedule of Points.
3. Operating coil: suitable for 220 V, 50 Hz. supply. Continuous rating
without overheating or noise
4. Main Contacts: double break silver-to-silver type protected by
arcing contacts.
5. Contacts: self-aligning, renewable from the front panel.
6. Solenoids: shaded pole pattern of such construction that
lamination noise is eliminated.
7. Control of contactor: by remote push switches, as indicated. A
manual operating lever shall also be included.
8. Lighting contactor’s controlling lighting circuits of distribution
boards shall be mounted in the board enclosure.

17.25.12 Installation

(a) Distribution boards shall be supplied and installed as indicated on the

Drawings, as approved by the Engineer.
(b) Distribution boards shall be located as indicated on the Drawings. The
top end of the distribution board shall not be higher than 180cm above
finished floor level.
(c) The distribution board shall be properly earthed by connecting an
earthing conductor from the main distribution earth bus bar to an earth
connector, welded to the metallic framework.
(d) Drawings showing the proposed distribution boards construction and
layout, including a diagram of all internal connections on which the
proposed identification markings for all cables and terminals are

Page 368 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

shown, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, before

construction commences.

17.26 PANEL MOUNTED AND MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS

17.26.1 SCOPE

(a) This Part specifies the panel mounted and miscellaneous instruments
and equipment to perform the required functions in conjunction with
instrumentation and equipment specified in other parts of this Section.
(b) Enclosures of front panel mounted instruments shall be of uniform
design and colour scheme wherever possible. Front of enclosure
colours shall be compatible with panel colours and subject to final
approval by the Engineer. Normally, compatible standard colours of
the manufacturer shall be acceptable.

17.26.2 REFERENCES

(a) BS 5863, Analogue d.c. Signals for Telemetry and Control.

(b) BS EN 60529, Ingress Protection
(c) EN 50014 to 50020, Enclosure Protection
(d) IEC 801, RF Protection
(e) IEC 61131-3, Programming Languages for Programmable Controllers

17.26.3 SUBMITTALS

(a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

1. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
2. Complete description, specifications, drawings, and descriptive
literature on the equipment.
3. Make and model of each component.
4. Number and sizing of electrical and control wires and power
requirements.
5. Complete wiring and equipment instrumentation diagram.
6. List of spare parts to be provided.
7. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against
damage prior to installation.
8. Complete system diagram, showing required components routing
through in-plant ductbank system.

(b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The

Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on the
Engineer’s comments.

17.26.4 QUALITY STANDARDS

(a) Manufacturer:
1. Instrumentation and control equipment furnished shall
be manufactured by a Company regularly and currently

Page 369 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

engaged in the design and manufacture of similar equipment.

All equipment furnished shall be new and of the most recent
design.
(b) Maintainability:
1. All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and
repair and access to critical parts shall not require major
dismantling. Internal field adjustments, where permitted or
required herein, shall be easily accessible upon removal of a
panel or cover.
(c) Materials and installation:
1. Material and installation shall comply with the requirements of the
current editions of referenced electrical codes and standards. The
codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the
minimum quality of the materials and equipment supplied and
installed. All equipment of the same type shall be produced by the
same manufacturer.

17.26.5 MANUFACTURERS TEST CERTIFICATES

(a) Manufacturers shall test and calibrate each input/output to operate

within specified limits. Calibration and compliance certificates provided
by the manufacturer shall be authenticated by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer.

17.26.6 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

(a) All equipment shall be provided from internationally recognised

manufacturers.

17.26.7 TRIP AMPLIFIERS

(a) Trip Amplifiers shall be surface or rack mounted with 220 V a.c. 50 Hz
power supply. Input shall be 4-20 mA d.c. with 1 or 2 independently
adjustable set points, provided as specified in the Project Drawings or
schedule . Outputs shall be SPDT relay contacts rated 220 V a.c. 5A.

17.26.8 RELAYS-ELECTROMAGNETIC TYPE

(a) Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions

required for control panels and other control circuits.
(b) Control Relays. Control relays shall be provided for the control and
alarm circuits, as indicated in the Project Drawings or schedule. The
relays shall be electrically held, 50 Hz, continuous duty, multiple
connected to 220 V a.c. control circuits and mounted inside control
panels or separate metal enclosures as indicated. Enclosures shall
be IP66. The relay base assembly shall accept from 1 through 8
convertible poles. Relays shall be attached to pre-shaped mounting
channels with captive screws.

17.26.9 TIMERS

(a) Timers shall be provided as specified herein or indicated in the Project

Page 370 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Drawings. Timers shall have four types of operation: (1) On Delay (2)
Off-Delay (3) Single Shot, and (4) Duty Cycle timers. Time ranges
shall be as shown in the Project Drawings.
(b) Panel mounted timers shall be of the motor driven adjustable type
with dials and presentable pointers. The timers shall operate from
220 V, single-phase, 50 Hz power and shall be of the square bezel
type for flush panel mounting. Output contacts shall be double throw
and rated for 10 A at 220 V a.c. The number of contact sets shall be
sufficient to perform the required control functions. Where more
contacts are required than are supplied as commercial standards,
control relays of equal rating shall be used to supplement the timer
contacts. When specified, relay contacts shall be supplied as part of
the timer and shall be operated by the timer control power
independently of the timed contacts. Repeatability of the preset time
delays shall be within ±2%. Timers shall be of the plug-in type and
enclosed in dust-proof cases. Connection shall be by numbered
screw terminals in the rear of the timer connector.
(c) On Delay Timers. When a start signal is applied, the timing cycle
begins. Output contacts change state after the time delay is
completed. Contacts shall return to original state when a reset signal
is applied, or power is removed. The timing cycle shall be adjustable.
(d) Off Delay Timers. When a start signal is applied, the output contacts
change state immediately. When the start signal is removed, the
timing cycle begins and the output contacts return to the original state,
when the cycle is completed. Timer shall be reset by a reset signal,
or by removal of power. The timing cycle shall be adjustable.
(e) One shot timers. When a start signal is applied, the output contacts
change state immediately and the timing cycle begins. The output
contacts return to the original state when the cycle is completed.
Timer shall be reset by a reset signal or by removal of power.
(f) Duty Cycle Timers. Two timer cycles shall be incorporated. When a
start signal is applied, the first timing cycle beings. The output
contacts change state at the end of the cycle and the next timing
cycle begins. When this delay is completed, the output contacts
return to the original state. This sequence is repeated until a reset
signal is applied, or power is removed.

17.26.10 RUNNING TIME METERS

(a) Running time meters shall be of the synchronous motor driven type
having a minimum of 6 (six) decimal digits where the least significant
digit shall represent tenths 1/10's (tenths) of hours. Unless specified
otherwise in the Project Specification, they shall not be equipped with
a reset button. They shall be panel mounted with a minimum 60 mm
square bezel. Motor voltage shall be 220 V a.c. single phase 50Hz.

17.26.11 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC’S)

(a) General:

1. Each PLC System shall comprise of a Central Processing Unit

Page 371 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(CPU), Input/Output modules, serial interface module and

programming units. PLC’s shall be installed inside Local Control
Panels or in separate cubicles. PLC shall be suitable for ambient
temperature of up to 65 C and 95% relative humidity. Power
supply shall be 230 V a.c. 50 Hz. The system shall include at
least 25 % spare capacity for future expansion. Panel mounted
display units shall be provided for man machine interface where
specified or shown in the Project Drawings. PLC shall be of
modular construction with plug in I/O cards and facility to install
expansion modules when necessary. The PLC shall have a real
time clock with battery backup.

(b) PLC diagnostic indications shall include the following:

1. Power OK
2. Low battery
3. Forced I/O
4. CPU fault
5. I/O status indicators

(c) Central Processing Unit. The CPU shall perform the following
function:
1. Scan all inputs, execute relay ladder logic programmes and
generate outputs for the final control elements.
2. Monitor status of the system hardware and provide diagnostic
information.
3. Process scan time shall be 8 milliseconds/kilobyte maximum.

(d) Memory:
1. Random Access Memory (RAM) for real-time programme
execution with lithium battery backup for data retention and
EEPROM backup for permanent storage of programme shall be
provided. The PLC memory shall be as required for the
programme and future requirements subject to a minimum of [16]
Mb.

(e) Input/Output Module:

1. Analogue input modules shall be for current, voltage, RTD Pt 100

or thermocouple input type, with a 16 bit resolution. Power supply
for 2 wire transmitters shall be provided where specified. Analogue
outputs shall be isolated 4-20 mA d.c with 14 bit resolution, unless
otherwise specified. Digital I/Os shall be optically isolated.
Contacts shall be rated 1A at 24 Vd.c. The systems shall support
on-line replacement of I/O modules, in case of failure.

(f) Programmer/Simulator:
1. Supply one programmer/simulator with PLC software for use by
the Dubai Municipality. Programming shall be through a lap-top
programming unit. Programming shall be user friendly, self-
documenting type, with facility for identification and comments.
PLC programming shall be compliant with IEC 61131-3 standard

Page 372 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

on programming languages for PLC’s.

(g) Serial Interface:

1. PLC shall be provided with serial interface ports for peer to peer
communication, MMI for operator interface, or Telemetry.
Communication protocol shall conform to the seven layer ISO
Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) model, subject to approval by
the Engineer.

(h) Programmer/Simulator:
1. Programming shall be on relay ladder language.
2. Password protected programming through hand held programmer
or personal computer.

(i) A Panel mounted VDU shall be provided for the PLC when specified
in the Project Specification, as per the following specification.
1. A panel mounted CRT or liquid crystal display unit for graphic,
numeric and message display.
2. Membrane keypad with one million cycles minimum operation.
3. 220 V a.c. 50Hz power supply.
4. Enclosure protected to IP65.
5. EEPROM for application program storage.
6. Provide restricted access to the PLC database for simulating or
forcing inputs/outputs.

17.26.12 PENDANT FLOAT TYPE SWITCHES

(a) Float switches are to be the pendant type with the float suspended on
a flexible cable, such that with the float free of the liquid the float and
cable hang vertically, but with a rising liquid level the float will rise and
tend to invert.
(b) Provide float of a robust design that comprise a switch having change-
over contacts encapsulated in a hard plastic foam and connected to a
3 core cable. The whole assembly is to be covered and hermetically
sealed in Hypalon or similar material.
(c) With the tilting action which occurs on rising level, the contacts are to
change-over, but there is to be a dead band between opening one
contact and closing the other, during which period contacts are to be
open. This dead band shall operate over an arc approximately 20o
either side of the horizontal.
(d) In all applications the installation is to be complete with approved
means of preventing the float (and lead) from movement due to draft
or liquid turbulence.
(e) Where float switches are to be used in applications under which they
may be submerged during the normal operation (e.g. pump control
and/or low level alarm); attach them to a weighted stainless steel
chain to minimize movement due to turbulence and to provide a
means of raising the units for maintenance and repair.

Page 373 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.26.13 ULTRASONIC LEVEL MEASUREMENT

(a) General
The system shall comprise of a transducer and a transmitter. Overall
accuracy shall be better than ±1 % of the range with a repeatability of
±0.5 %.
The system shall be intrinsically safe, where required for the
application.

(b) Transducer
Stainless steel 316 construction. Enclosure protected to IP68.
Automatic compensation for changes in ambient temperature shall be
in-built. Transducer shall be supplied complete with mounting
accessories.

(c) Transmitter
Surface or panel mounted transmitter with 220V a.c. 50 Hz power
supply. Microprocessor based transmitter with programmable range
and alarms. Transmitter shall be complete with in-built indication for
level or for flow, if used for open channel flow measurement. 4 Nos.
in-built relay contacts, shall be provided for process and diagnostic
alarms. Transmitter shall be provided with an in-built keypad for
programming the instrument.
(d) Provide a canopy for the transducer and transmitter units, for
protection from direct sunlight.

17.26.14 ELECTRONIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

(a) General
Electronic pressure transmitters shall convert a gauge or absolute
pressure measurement to a 24V d.c. loop powered 4 to 20mA d.c.
output signal. Range shall be as indicated in the Project Specification.
Over range tolerance shall be at least 1.5 times span. Accuracy shall
be ±0.5 percent or better. Isolating diaphragms shall be provided when
specified in Project Specification. A process variable indicating meter
shall be provided. Zero and span adjustments shall be provided.

(b) Construction
The transmitter enclosure shall be IP65, unless explosion proof is
specified in Project Specification. Enclosure and wetted surface
material shall be stainless steel to BS 970.

17.26.15 PRESSURE GAUGES

(a) Provide gauges in the suction and discharge of each pump and
blower.
(b) Gauge: To BS 1780 Stainless Steel glycerine filled
Bourdon type pressure gauge, black scale on white background.

1. Stainless Steel bourdon tube and case.

2. Dial Size: 150mm diameter.
3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: 1/2 percent.

Page 374 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

4. Scale: Both Bar and psi.

5. Process Connections:
i. 1½" flanged for sludge/waste water applications.
ii. ½" NPT for clear fluids.

6. Complete with Micrometer point

7. All wetted parts: Stainless steel 316
8. Accessories Required:
i. Needle Valve (petcol).
ii. Adjustable pressure snubber.
iii. Diaphragm seal isolator.

(c) Where equipment and pipe mounted gauges are inaccessible for
reading and are subjected to vibration, gauges shall be mounted
remote with stainless steel tubing connecting to equipment with shut
off valve at equipment and gauge.
(d) Discharge gauge ranges shall be a standard commercially available
range with the maximum reading not less than 5 bar greater than the
pump rated shut off pressure.
(e) Use compound type suction gauges with a minimum range of 750mm
of mercury.
The gauges shall be of first class construction, tropicalized with dust
and damp proof approved non-corroding solid (not plated) materials.
The mechanism shall be of robust design, capable of withstanding the
degree of vibration, shocks and pressure fluctuations normally
encountered with pump operation when protected by snubbers.

17.26.16 PRESSURE SWITCHES

(a) Pressure switches shall have a diaphragm type sensor with a

switching differential adjustable within 25% of the range. Contact
shall be micro switch SPDT rated 220V a.c. 5A, 30V d.c. 2A.
Accuracy shall be ±1% of span. Stainless steel enclosure certified
explosion proof where specified in the Project Specification.
17.26.17 FLOW MEASUREMENTS

(a) To avoid inaccurate flow measurement the format of the flowmeter

installation shall be determined after due consideration is given to
specific hydraulic conditions that exist on the plant. The flowmeter
shall be installed so that the approach flow has a symmetrical
velocity profile, it is free of swirl and is non pulsating.
(b) A sufficient number of straight pipe lengths shall be installed
between the flowmeter and an unavoidable downstream or
upstream disturbance, in accordance with the appropriate British
Standards or equivalent. Differential pressure primary elements -
BS 1042 or equivalent applies. Electromagnetic Detector Heads -
BS 5792 or equivalent applies.
(c) The flowmeter shall not be installed in pipework where the ingress
of air is likely.

Page 375 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(d) Where metering orifices are installed in vertical lines the direction
of flow shall be upwards.
(e) The flow measurement primary element shall have adequate
isolation facilities to allow it’s removal and zero flow checking. To
facilitate the installation or removal of a flow measurement primary
element, the primary element or associated pipework shall be
fitted with a minimum of one flange adaptor/coupling.
(f) Where a control valve (multiposition or on/off) is fitted upstream of a
flowmeter the requirements for symmetrical velocity profile and
lack of swirl shall be exhibited throughout the total range of
movement of the valve.
(g) Where the flow measurement accuracy for an application is specified,
the flow measurement technique utilised shall be as follows:-

OVERALL
APPLICATION WATER FLOW SEWAGE FLOW
ACCURACY
1.0% Electromagnetic Electromagnetic
Flowmeter Flowmeter
Enclosed 1.0% Electromagnetic
Pipelines Flowmeter, Dall tube/ Electromagnetic
insert or orifice plus Flowmeter
D.P. Cell
Open Channel by 1.0% Float Driven shaft
Level encoder/Potentiometer Ultrasonic (level)
Characterisation or Level Transducer
& Ultrasonic (level)
1.0% Float Driven
Potentiometer, Ultrasonic (level)
Ultrasonic or Level
Transducer/Transmitter
& Ultrasonic (level)

(a) The output from an electronic flow integration device shall be

factored to provide a count rate between 200 and 1000 counts per
hour at the full scale flow rate.
(b) The totalising impulse counter shall be a 6 or 8 digit module,
without manual reset. The counter shall be driven by a nominal
24V d.c. pulse generated by the flow totalizer card.
(c) Counters utilising semi-conductor techniques shall incorporate a
battery back-up to protect the reading during electrical mains
power failure.
(d) The count factor (counts per hour) and the equivalent flow rate
factor (unit flow per hour) shall be detailed on the counter
description label.
(e) Where a separate counter display is required, it shall utilise a 6 or
8 digit display without manual reset.

Page 376 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.26.18 MAGNETIC FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT

(a) Flowmetering System

1. Each flowmetering system is to consist of the primary transducer
(sealed to IP68), earthing rings, the necessary signal converter
and power supply unit and all cabling between the primary
transducer and signal converter and power supply unit.
2. Each of the signal converters/power supply units are to be
supplied for remote mounting and sealed to IP65, unless
otherwise specified.
3. Provide signal converters/power supply units with a 4-20mA output
signal, linear with flow and suitable for retransmission to remote
instrumentation. The above units are to operate from a 220V 50Hz
mains supply. The supply voltage may vary by ±15% and
frequency between 48 and 52Hz.
4. The signal converter supply is to have a modulated direct current
excitation and inherent total zero stability.
5. Provide sufficient suitable cable to allow for the primary
transducers to be situated up to 25 metres from their signal
converters, unless a longer length is specified.
6. Provide full details of the proposed cable.
7. Transmitter/signal converter shall have in-built digital flow rate and
total flow display.

Sensor to transmitter cable shall be fitted and potted by manufacturer.

Screened and armored cable shall be used.

(b) Accuracy
1. The flowmeter accuracy is to be ±0.2% of reading in the velocity
range of 10 metres/sec down to 0.5m/s and ±0.05% of reading
down to 0.2m/s.
2. The repeatability of the flowmeter is to be ±0.05% down to 0.5m/s
velocity increasing progressively to ±1% at 0.25m/s.
3. Manufacturer shall calibrate all flowmeters on NAMAS accredited
flow calibration rigs and submit calibration certificates for each
flowmeter.

(c) Signal Output

The following output formats are required and must be isolated from
any common connection to the instrument to prevent common mode
interference. The magnetic flowmeter shall also have field bus
interface to communicate with another field bus device.

1. The analogue signal output is to be a 4-20mA direct current loop.

The output is to be short circuit protected and capable of
supplying a load of up to 1000 ohms.
2. The Contractor is to state to what limit over-scale currents may be
guaranteed to represent flow to ±5% in the event of pipeline bursts

Page 377 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

occurring downstream of the meter (i.e. to what current is the

circuit reasonably linear for overscale flows).
3. For integration, one pulse is to be generated for a specific volume
of water passing the meter. This is to be achieved by the closure of
volt-free contacts. This function need only be applied to forward
flows, unless available bidirectionally as a standard feature. A
socket is to be provided such that a portable data logger may be
connected to the flowmeter.
4. Electrical noise may occur from sources such as electromagnetic
induction, electrostatic or capacitive coupling and electrical
coupling or electrical conduction. Provide sufficiently high signal to
noise ratio to prevent spurious signals affecting the signal and the
instrument and associated cables must be so screened as to
operate without degradation of performance in the following
conditions:-
i. Radio Frequency.
ii. Portable or mobile radio
iii. Power 0-25 watts
iv. Frequency 49-150 MHz, AM and FM
v. Proximity >5 metres
5. Incorporate electrode(s) to detect when the pipe is not full. Display
the pipe not full signal on the flowmeter converter.
6. Provide programming software/hardware for complete
parameter setting for flowmeters.

(d) Electrodes
1. The flowmeter is to be of a type that prevents polarisation of
electrodes.
2. The primary transducer electrodes are to be capable of being
removed for cleaning. The Contractor is to provide details of the
working space required to allow the electrodes to be removed.
3. The Contractor is to advise on the suitability of cleaning the
electrodes and if it is required for the flowmeter application, then
such device or method of cleaning shall be provided.

(e) Vibration
1. The flowmeter is to be able to endure vibration, when in service,
without any degradation in performance. When flowmeters are
installed in areas where vibration exists, then a suitable anti-
vibration pad is to be provided.

(f) Wetted Parts

1. All wetted parts are to be non-toxic and suitable for use with
sewage, or potable water, as appropriate, at the specified ambient
temperatures.

(g) Labelling and Nameplates

1. Mark the primary device in a permanent manner with the following

information:-

Page 378 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

i. Manufacturer's name
ii. Serial number
iii. Nominal internal diameter
iv. Maximum operating pressure
v. Calibration factors
vi. Type of enclosure
vii. Forward flow direction
viii. Weight
ix. Power

(h) Installation
1. The flowmeter is to be suitably flanged to meet the plant maximum
operating pressure. Each flowmeter is to be individually pressure
tested by the manufacturer to at least 1.5 times its flange pressure
rating. A Certificate of Conformity for pressure testing will be
required.
2. Fit the flowmeter with permanent lifting eyes (minimum 25 mm
internal diameter) and provide all relevant test certificates.
3. The Contractor is to include a dimensional arrangement drawing
showing details of length, clearance dimensions and any special
support arrangement. A flange adapter is to be incorporated to
allow removal of the flowmeter.
4. Provide the flowmeter with mating flanges in conformity with the
pipeline.
5. Protect the flowmeter head from direct sunlight if installed in an
exposed location.

17.26.19 HYDROCARBON MONITOR

(a) The continuous monitoring system for detection of floating aromatic

hydrocarbons on water, shall comprise of a floating sensor, surface
mounted transmitter and the necessary interconnections cables. The
instrument shall be suitable for continuous operation in the aggressive
ambient conditions. The sensor shall operate on the principle of high
frequency electromagnetic absorption. The technology shall be a
proven one for drainage applications and the instrument shall not
generate any false alarms. The measurement shall be reliable,
continuous and not affected by suspended solids, salinity, temperature
and water level variations in the measurement chambers.

1 Sensor

i. Sensor shall be capable of detection of hydrocarbons from

0.3mm to 25mm. Prevailing surface velocities shall have no
impact on the measurement. The sensor shall be certified
intrinsically safe. Perforated stilling wells shall be used.
Appropriate mounting arrangement shall be provided for the
applications.

2. Transmitter

i. The transmitter shall be microprocessor based with

Page 379 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

programmable range and alarm functions. Transmitter

enclosure shall be protected to IP65 and suitable for surface
mounting. Transmitter power supply shall be 240 Va.c. 50Hz.
The transmitter shall be provided with an integral LCD display
for local monitoring. Output shall be 4-20mA dc. A lap-top
programming unit shall be provided, complete with the
necessary programming and logging software and inter-
connection cables.

(b) Necessary calibration equipment shall be provided.

17.26.20 DIAPHRAGM SEALS

(a) Provide a diaphragm seal where shown. Fill with glycerine or silicone.
Provide nickle or zinc plated carbon steel upper housing, 316
stainless steel lower housing, and 316 stainless steel diaphragm.
Provide a filling connection and a flushing connection. Provide 12mm
NPT instrument connection and 25mm NPT or 38mm flanged process
connection as shown.

17.26.21 INSTALLATION

(a) Installation, testing, calibration, validation, start-up, and instructions

shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Mount pipe and connect field devices in accordance with contract
drawings, specification and manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Avoid tubing, piping and conduit interferences. Verify dimensions
in field, prior to fabrication and installation.
3. Locate equipment to be accessible for operation, maintenance and
replacement. Examine contract drawings and shop drawings for
equipment, in order to determine the best arrangement for work
as a whole. Mount field transmitters between 1000mm and
1300mm above floor or work platform. Where specifications and
contract drawings do not delineate precise installation procedures,
use API RP550 as a guide to installation procedures.
4. Where field devices are shown as yoke mounted on a floor stand,
a wall bracket, fabricated from two 40mm channel sections,
mounted to a wall or column is considered to be equivalent. Make
channel section long enough to mount at least two field devices.
The channel sections shall be hot-dipped galvanised, in
accordance with ASTM-153 and shall be PVC coated after cutting.
5. Where field devices are shown as wall mounted, provide a wall
bracket, fabricated from either two 40mm channel sections or a
pipe elbow mounted to a wall or column. Make bracket long
enough to mount at least two field devices. The bracket shall be
hot-dipped galvanised in accordance with ASTM-153 and shall be
PVC coated after cutting.
6. Locate instrument mounting stands within 1500mm of primary
element, unless otherwise indicated. Make stands freely
accessible.
7. Indicating instruments, which must be visible for automatic control

Page 380 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

adjustment or manual operation, shall be located so as to be

visible from the adjustment or operating point. If plot or piping
arrangements preclude this, make other provisions for indication
at the adjustment or operation point.
8. Install instrument mounting stands after all conduit and pipe has
been installed, except conduit, which serves devices on stand.
9. Install instrument process piping and tubing from each primary
shutoff valve to appropriate gauge, sensor, meter, control panel
connections, etc.
10. Clean piping, tubing and components thereof, prior to installation,
in accordance with other sections of this specification.
11. Provide all exterior mounted field instruments with sun shades.

17.26.22 OPERATING ACCURACY CHECK

(a) The Engineer reserves the right to have any device, including any
required meter runs, shipped to an independent laboratory for an
operation accuracy check at conditions including upstream and
downstream piping geometry as close as possible to specified
operating conditions. Extra shipping costs shall be paid for by the
Dubai Municipality if test results conform to specified operating
accuracy. If test results indicate that the operating accuracy is not in
accordance with specifications, shipping costs and calibration cost will
be paid for by the Contractor. In such an event, the device will be
returned to the manufacturer for replacement, the replacement device
will be shipped to the independent laboratory for an operation
accuracy check and returned to the manufacturer if it fails the check.
This will continue at no cost to the Dubai Municipality, until a
replacement device passes the check.

17.26.23 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

(a) Provide a built-in or external on-off switch for each instrument

requiring power from an external power source. Locate the switch
within 1 metre of instrument.

17.26.24 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Factory Testing:

1. Wet flow calibrate flow meters to within specified accuracy. Submit

a certified calibration report for each metre, showing results of
calibration at a minimum of three points evenly spaced throughout
range.

2. Each transmitter or electronic signal converter shall meet or

exceed the Surge Withstand Capability test, as defined in
Sections 2 and 4 of ANSI C37.90a-1974, applied to each power
supply circuit, battery circuit, signal circuit, output circuit and input
circuit.

Page 381 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.26.25 TUBING

(a) Run all tubing parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or

intersections of vertical planes and ceilings and without dips or rises.
Supports shall be at points not more than 1 metre apart. Route all
tubing so that tubing is accessible and is protected from spills or
mechanical damage. It shall be clear of controls, access doors, bolts
and equipment that must have access for maintenance. Do not
support tubing from piping or equipment except at process taps or
final operators. Space Tubes supported directly from concrete shall be
spaced at least 3mm from concrete. Use 1-hole clamps with clamp
backs as required in accordance with pipe specifications for the area.
Avoid running tubing under concrete slabs on grade, underground, or
within concrete. Where such a condition is unavoidable, install tubing
within a rigid metallic raceway, so that tubing may be removed and
new tubing installed. Arrange tubing for ease of removal and
maintenance of instruments and so that any single tube can be
removed without disturbing other tubing. Allow free axial movement of
tubing.
(b) Stagger and offset fittings and install fittings in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Install expansion loops to prevent
tension stresses and allow for temperature expansion.
(c) Form bends with proper tools, to uniform radii, without flattening the
tube. Cut tubing squarely, remove burrs, and clean ends before
inserting in fittings. Keep tubing round during cutting. Use
compression fittings for splices and turns or connections near
instruments. Provide bulkhead assemblies in panels. Blow down
instrument line before final connection to instruments. During
installation, periodically test tubing for leaks.
(d) Apply protective covering to any part of copper tubing which is
exposed for reasons suchas the attachment of tubing fittings. As a
covering, use either corrosion-resistant compound or self-sealing
plastic tape. Wrap threads of all fittings with a single wrap of Teflon
tape in place of doping. Coat threads of all stainless steel connections
with thread protective dope before connections are made up. Do not
make tubing connection prior to completing the make-up of the pipe
connection. Install expansion loops, to prevent tension stresses and to
allow for temperature expansion.
(e) Tubing support structure. When channel, enclosed trough, or conduit,
are required as specified below, provide channel in accordance with
Clause 2.02 B above, conduit in accordance with Electrical
Specifications, or an approved enclosed trough. Support from building
structure with suspension rods, structural shapes, or Unistrut. Provide
support sufficiently strong and adequately braced to carry static load
plus a safety margin, which allows tubing to be worked in support. Do
not attach supports to equipment that may be removed frequently for
maintenance, or which may impart vibration or expansion forces.
Install supports so that they will not become a trough or trap. Provide
painted, or galvanised support members in conformance with the pipe
specifications for the area. Apply coatings before tubing is installed.
Reprime and paint field welds or cuts on painted members, after
installation. Protect welds or cuts on galvanised members with

Page 382 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

approved proprietary coating compound, after fabrication. Reseal vinyl

coatings with an approved coating material. Support weight of valves,
filters, regulators, etc., independently of the tubing. Mount valves so
that no strain is placed on tubing, when valve is operated.

17.26.26 GROUNDING AND ISOLATION

(a) Ground all field instrument components. Unless otherwise required by

the field device manufacturer, isolate all signal conductor shields from
the electrical power source ground system.
(b) The AC power source safety ground systems and the instrument
reference ground systems installed under 16, are specified to be
tested and the dry season resistance of the systems is required not to
exceed five ohms.
(c) If the power source safety ground systems are used for grounding field
instrument components, a specific statement of approval is required
with the submittal. If the power source safety ground systems are not
acceptable to the instrument manufacturer for proper functioning of his
equipment, then a separate safety grounding system meeting the
manufacturer's requirements shall be installed under this contract, at
no additional cost to the Dubai Municipality.

17.26.27 COMMISSIONING

(a) Field instruments are to be commissioned under the direct supervision

of a qualified representative of the field instrument manufacturer. The
Engineer or his representative shall have the right to witness any test,
inspection, calibration or start-up activity.

(b) Test and exercise each device to demonstrate correct operation, first
individually, then collectively, as a functional network.

(c) Apply continuously variable analog inputs, to verify proper operation

and setting of analog devices and discrete devices (i.e., switches,
etc.). Make provisional settings on relays and pressure switches.

(d) Unless otherwise specified, commissioning of field instruments shall

include testing against: volumetric displacement for flow and level,
dead weight testers for pressure, hand held tachometer for shaft
speed, test blocks of varying thickness on conveyor belts for cake
level and laboratory determinations for suspended solids.

(e) Unless otherwise specified, tests shall be made to cover at least five
points: approximately 0 per cent, 25 per cent, 50 per cent, 75 per
cent, and 100 per cent of range. Individual device accuracy
requirements shall be as specified by contract requirements, or by
published manufacturer accuracy specifications, whenever contract
requirements are not specified.

(f) Prepare a Test Report showing actual value, instrument value, 4-20
mA value for each test and range of the instrument. If test results
conflict with calibration, then recalibrate and repeat test, until test
results prove calibration to be correct. Each test report shall bear the

Page 383 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

signature of the Contractor’s representative who supervised the tests

and also that of the manufacturer's representative. Three copies of
these reports in bound sets labelled "CALIBRATION DATA" shall be
furnished to the Engineer.

17.27 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

17.27.1 System Description

The electric power generating system shall have a site capability of 1500
ekW, 1850 kVA, Standby rated, 0.80 power factor, 400 Volt, Wye
connected, three phase, 50 hertz. This power shall be applied for
STANDBY emergency operation.

17.27.2 Generator Set Consist

(a) The system shall consist of:

1 Diesel engine driven generator units
2 Electric cabling for power, control and communication between
different panels and equipment
3 LV switchboards
4 Control panels, load transfer/load shedding panel
5 Neutral Earthing.
6 System earthing and equipment bonding.
7 Heat exchanger cooling system including radiators and water
piping connections to supply and discharge systems
8 Ductworks for radiator cooling units
9 Exhaust systems
10 Fuel system day tanks, fuel line piping and appurtenances.
11 Fuel oil pumping and filter system including valves and
instrumentations
12 Engine mounted electric starters, battery and battery charger.
13 Spare parts and special tools
14 Services of manufacturer’s representative.

17.27.3 System Function

(a) The generator set(s) shall include the capability of automatically

controlling generator set operation. After starting, the unit(s) will
attain rated speed and voltage, and accept rated load. The engine
governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output
voltage regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic
voltage regulator. Manual adjustment of generator speed and voltage
shall be provided.

1 General:
i The operating philosophy for the Stand-by generator sets has
been indicated on the single line diagram. An outline is given
below:

Page 384 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2 Normal status:
i Diesel Generator sets shall normally be on standby and
available for automatic instant start-up and switching of the
appropriate circuit breakers on receipt of a remote signal or
manual control. When at rest, those parameters, which affect
its availability to start and operate, shall be continuously
monitored and if a malfunction occurs, suitably alarmed at the
generator control panel situated adjacent to the generator set
and communicated to the remote control room.
3 Automatic start
i When a loss of normal power occurs and provided automatic
mode is selected, the generator set shall be started
automatically by means of an signal over communication link
or under voltage signal from the electrical distribution system.
ii A test facility shall be provided to simulate the under voltage
signal.
iii Interlocking system shall be initiated to prevent paralleling of
DEWA power sources; prior to connection of load.
4 Manual start
i Provided the manual mode is selected the generator set shall
be capable of being started manually by means of a local
initiation and also from remote control room. When running in
this mode a normal power failure shall result in an automatic
connection of the generator to the switchgear busbars.
5 Test mode
i Starting of the Diesel Generator set shall be by manual
means. This mode shall be used for engine exercising and
test running operations.
6 Shutdown
i Shutdown of the Diesel Generator set shall be manual from
either the local generator control panel or remote shutdown
switch.
ii The Diesel Generator set shall automatically shutdown on
malfunction of its essential auxiliary systems.
iii Emergency and mechanical shutdown facilities shall be
provided.
iv Provision shall be made for remote emergency shutdown.
7 Remote operation and monitoring
i Communication modules and facilities to start and stop each
unit through a personal computer at local panel and also from
control room including monitoring of engine and generator
parameters on real time basis via communication network shall
be included.
ii Provide all necessary hardware and window-based software to
be included.

17.27.4 Site Conditions, Diesel

(a) The operating environment of the power generating system shall be:

Altitude: 500 m
Max Ambient Temperature: 50 C
Fuel Type: Type 2 Diesel

Page 385 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.27.5 System Performance, General

(a) The power generating system shall conform to the following

performance criteria:

1 Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full

rated generator set kW/kVA when operated at rated rpm and
equipped with all engine-mounted parasitic and external loads
such as radiator fans and power generators.
2 Conditions - The rating shall be based on ISO 3046/1 standard
conditions of 100 kPa and 27C (29.53 in Hg, 81F and derated for
site conditions); BS 5514, DIN 6271, SAE J1349 and API 7B-11C
also apply.
3 Fuel - Diesel engines shall be able to deliver rated power when
operating on type 2 diesel fuel having 35 degree API (16C, 60F)
specific gravity.
4 Fuel Consumption - Diesel fuel rates shall be based on fuel having
a low heating value (LHV) of 42,780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when
used at 29C-(85F) and weighing 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs./U.S. gal).
5 Start Time and Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve
rated voltage and frequency, and be capable of accepting load
within 15 seconds when properly equipped and maintained.
6 Block Load Acceptance - Transient response shall conform to ISO
8528 requirements.

17.27.6 Performance, System

(a) The power generating system shall satisfy the following performance criteria
at site conditions:

Quantity
Power Capability: 1800 ekW/2250kVA, Standby rated
3 Phase Volts: 400 volt
Frequency: 50 Hz
Average Power Factor 0.8
Speed 1500 RPM
Steady state speed +/- 0.50 %
band
Voltage transient Within +/- 10% of rated voltage against
response application of 50% rated kVA

17.27.7 Responsibility

The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided

among individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely
by the primary manufacturer.

This included generating system design, manufacture, test, and having a

Page 386 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total
system.

17.27.8 Subassembly And Packing

Generator set mounted sub-assemblies such as cooling system, base, air

intake system, exhaust outlet fittings, and generator set mounted controls
and switchgear shall also be designed, built and assembled as a
complete unit by the engine – generator manufacturer.

17.27.9 Quality Assurance

(a) The complete power generation system, including engine, generator,

Generator control panel shall be supplied by same manufacurer and
their authorized dealer who has been regularly engaged in supply of
complete Diesel Generator Power System products. All components
shall have been designed to achieve optimum physical and
performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated
design capability. The complete system shall have been factory
fabricated, assembled, and production tested. The naming of a
specific manufacture does not waive any requirements of this
specification. Any exceptions or variations must be individually listed
as part of compliance statement.

1 Production Tests
The system manufacturer shall perform postproduction tests on
the generator set supplied. A certified report of these tests shall
be available when requested at the time of the generator set
delivery.

2 Drawings/Schematics
All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set,
controls, and switchgear must conform to a common format.

17.27.10 Submittals

Submittals shall include but not be limited to:

Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or

data sheet identifying make and model of engine and generator, and
including relevant component design and performance data.

(a) Engine:
1. Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle
2. Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders
3. Engine lubricating oil capacity
4. Engine coolant capacity without radiator
5. Engine coolant capacity with radiator
6. Coolant pump external resistance (maximum)
7. Coolant pump flow at maximum resistance

(b) Alternator:
1. Model

Page 387 of 417

Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

2. Frame
3. Insulation class
4. Number of leads
5. Weight, total
6. Weight, rotor
7. Air flow

(c) At rated voltage:

1. Efficiency at 0.8 power factor for:
2. 50% load
3. 75% load
4. 100% load
5. Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D)
6. Time constants, armature short circuit (TA)
7. Reactance, subtransient - direct axis (X"D),
8. Reactance, transient - saturated (X'D)
9. Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD)
10. Reactance, negative sequence (X2)
11. Reactance, zero sequence (X0)
12. Fault current, 3 phase symmetrical

(d) Radiator:
1 Model
2 Type
3 Fan drive ratio
4 Coolant capacity, radiator
5 Coolant capacity, radiator and engine
6 Weight, dry
7 wet

(e) System:
1. Dimensions:
2. Length
3. Width
4. Height
5. Weight, dry
6. Wet

Performance - Based on SAE J1349 standard conditions of 100

kPa (29.61 in Hg) and 25C (77F); also at conditions of ISO
3046/1, DIN 6271 and BS 5513. Fuel rates are based on ISO
3046 and on fuel oil of 35 degrees API (16C or 60F) gravity,
having a LHV of 42780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29C-
(85F) and weighing 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs./U.S. gal).

Power rating at 0.8 power factor kVA rating

Fuel consumption at standard conditions for:

50 % load
75 % load
100% load
Combustion air inlet flow rate Exhaust gas, flow rate

Page 388 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Stack temperature

Exhaust system backpressure (maximum) Heat rejection to:

Coolant After cooler Exhaust
Atmosphere from engine Atmosphere from generator

Auxiliary Equipment - Specification or data sheets, including 400

Volt switchgear requirements, vibration isolators, and day tank.

Drawings - General dimensions drawings showing overall

generator set measurements, mounting location, and interconnect
points for load leads, fuel, exhaust, cooling and drain lines.

Wiring Diagrams - Wiring diagrams, schematics and control panel

outline drawings published by the manufacturer in Joint Industrial
Council (JIC) format for controls and switchgear showing
interconnected points and logic diagrams for use by contractor
and owner.

Warranty Statements - Warranty verification published by the

manufacturer.

Service - Location and description of supplier's parts and service

facility including parts inventory and number of qualified generator
set service personnel.

17.27.11 Warranty Qualifications

(a) The manufacturer shall have a local authorized dealer who can
provide factory-trained servicemen, the required stock of replacement
parts, technical assistance, and warranty administration.

1 Proximity to Job Site

The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall have a parts and
service facility within 300 kM of the jobsite.

2 Warranty Administration
The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall be capable of
administering the manufacturer and dealer's warranty for all
components supplied by the selling dealer (who may or may not be
the same as the servicing dealer).

3 Warranty Terms
The manufacturer's and dealer's warranty shall be for a period of
one year from date of initial start-up or 18 months from the date of
delivery of the unit, whichever comes first.

4 Mechanics and Equipment

The generator set supplier shall have factory trained service
representatives and tooling necessary to install, test, maintain,
and repair all provided equipment.

5 Parts Availability - 90%

Page 389 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

The generator set supplier shall have sufficient parts inventory to

maintain over the counter availability of at least 90% of any
required parts.

6 Oil Sampling Service

The generator set supplier shall provide a scheduled oil sampling
service to monitor engine condition on an ongoing basis

The oil samples shall be analyzed at the generator set supplier's

facility by factory trained personnel.

17.27.12 Product Requirements

The engine shall be stationary, Jacket water after cooler, STANDBY

RATED, STANDBY OPERATION, 1500 RPM, four cycle design with DRY
exhaust manifolds. It shall be manufactured in the United States,
Western Europe or in Japan. It shall not be manufactured with any Class I
ozone depleting substances (ODS) as defined by Federal Register Vol 57
No. 86.

(a) Engine Equipment

The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure
gauge, lubricating oil cooler, filters, and pressure gauge, water pump
and temperature gauge, service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel
housing when applicable.

(b) Lubrication System

The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is
integral with the engine and gear driven from the engine gear train.
The system shall incorporate full flow filtration with bypass valve to
continue lubrication in the event of filter clogging.

The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or
receptacle. Systems where bypass valves are located in the
replaceable oil filter are not acceptable. Pistons shall be oil cooled by
continuous jet spray to the underside or inside of the crown and piston
pin.

The filter shall incorporate a self-lubricating, free rotating seal and

have a nonmetallic core sufficiently rigid to minimize movement or
shifting of the filtration media.

(c) Diesel Fuel System

The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of
fuel filter, transfer pump, injection pumps, lines, and nozzles. The
transfer pump shall deliver fuel under low pressure to individual
injection pumps - one for each cylinder.

(d) Electronic Unit Injection

A unit fuel injector shall be mounted in each cylinder head, with
external feeder lines requiring less than 5-bar (75-PSI) fuel pressure.

Injection timing and duration shall be electronically controlled with

Page 390 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

injection pressure accomplished by a piston pump driven from the

engine camshaft.

(e) Governor
The engine governor shall control engine speed and transient load
response within commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances.

(f) Engine Control

The engine controller shall be of Electronic Programmable type and
shall control engine speed while optimizing both steady state and
transient engine performance. The controller will monitor all
significant engine parameters, and adjust engine performance
according to speed, altitude, temperature, and engine condition. It
shall incorporate revisable control software capable of reconfiguring
engine operation to desired performance levels.

In the event of system faults, which do not require immediate

shutdown, the engine shall be programmed to continue operation at
power levels sufficient to remain within performance limits. It shall
display real time and historical data to allow user to optimize operation
and provide accurate service information in the event of a malfunction.

(g) Primary Fuel Filter

In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a primary
fuel filter between the fuel tank and transfer pump to screen large
contaminants.

(h) Fuel/Water Separator

A fuel/water separator shall protect the fuel system from water
damage.

(i) Fuel Cooler

Fuel shall be piped from the filter/water separators to the intake of the
engine fuel pump, and then to the engine. Excess fuel shall be piped
through the fuel cooler and returned to the fuel tank with less than 60
kPa (8.7 PSI) restriction. The fuel cooler shall be capable of
exchanging heat rejected at full load with the cooling medium,
including 10% reserve to accommodate fouling.

(j) Fuel Priming Pump

A manual fuel-priming pump shall facilitate priming and bleeding air
from the system.

(k) Fuel Lines

Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed to
isolate vibration.

(l) Day Fuel Tank

An indoor type free floor standing rectangular shape fuel tank of
capacity for 8 hour full load operation shall be provided as shown on
the drawing. The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections;
float switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact. A manual
shutoff valve on the fuel line to the engine and a tank drain valve shall
also be included. A raised bund wall shall be constructed around the

Page 391 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

indoor tank.
(m) Cooling System
The engine jacket water cooling system shall be a closed circuit
design with provision for filling, expansion, and deaeration. The
cooling pump shall be driven by the engine. Coolant temperature shall
be internally regulated to disconnect external cooling systems until
operating temperature is achieved.

1 Radiator
Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the
atmosphere through a shaft mounted fan cooled radiator. The
radiator shall be sized to cool the engine continuously while
operating at full rated load and at site conditions.

(n) Inlet Air System

The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element
requiring replacement no more frequently than 250 operating hours or
once each year. If external ducting is required, maximum restriction
to the combustion air inlet shall be 0.06 kPa (0.25 in H2O Gauge).

(o) Turbo Charging

Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine
exhaust gases and direct - connected to a compressor supplying
engine combustion air.

(p) Exhaust System

The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion
gases quickly and silently with minimum restriction. System including
silencer shall be designed for minimum restriction, and in no case
shall backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa (27 in H2O).

Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal

growth being transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings
provided to accommodate thermal growth. Support dampers and
springs shall be included where necessary to isolate vibration.

Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water
traps installed at the lowest point. Exhaust stacks shall be extended
to avoid nuisance fumes and odors, and outlets cut at 45 to minimize
noise.

Exhaust piping shall be insulated and aluminium cladded with

consideration to limit the surface temperature on aluminum cladding
within 65 deg.C.

1 Silencer
The silencer shall be of industrial grade.

2 Exhaust Thimble
An exhaust thimble shall be installed at the point where the
exhaust pipe penetrates the building.
3 Jacket Water Heater

Page 392 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Jacket water heater(s) shall be provided to maintain coolant

temperature of 32C (90F) while the engine is idle. Heaters shall
accept 240 AC single phase power and include thermostatic
controls. Hoses to and from the heater shall be industrial quality,
which exhibit long life in operational environments. Manual shutoff
valves shall be incorporated to isolate the heater during servicing.

(q) Electrical Starting System

The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor(s),
starter relay, and automatic reset circuit breaker to protect against
butt engagement. The system shall be capable of starting a properly
equipped engine within 15 seconds at ambient temperatures greater
than 22C (70F).

1 Batteries
Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by
the generator set manufacturer. They shall be Nickel cadmium
type. Batteries should be sized to provide upto 4 starts at an
ambient temp. of 0 deg. C.

Batteries shall be located as close to the starting motor as

practical, away from spark sources, in a relatively cool ambient,
and permit easy inspection and maintenance. Battery warranty
shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer.

(r) Alternator
The alternator(s) shall be rated for Standby service at 1800 ekW, 2250
kVA, 0.80 PF, 400.V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, 1500 rpm.

The alternator(s) shall be capable of withstanding a three-phase load

of 300% rated current for 10 seconds, and sustaining 150% of
continuous load current for 2 minutes with field set for normal rated
load excitation. It shall exhibit less than 5% waveform deviation at no
load. Alternator to be driven by a synchronous driver.

Alternator is to be hot, equivalent to the stabilized temperature band

between the alternator's 75% and 100% continuous load rating.

1 Alternator Specifications
As minimum the alternator shall be designed, manufactured to
meet following specification.

Rating 1850 kVA, 400 VOLT, 3 phase, 50Hz,

0.8 pf at 50 Deg. C ambient. Insulation
Class Class F design, class B operation
Number of Poles 4
Excitation Permanent Magnet
Configuration 2-Bearing with 1 platinum RTD installed
in each bearing (close coupled)
Stator Form wound, 2 platinum RTDs in each
phase

Rotor Salient pole, fully

Page 393 of 417

Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

laminated
Overspeed 125%
capability
Paralleling Provided with cross current
capability
compensation
Voltage Regulation Less than + 0.5% THD Less than
5%
TDF Less than 5%

2 Operating Environment

The alternator shall be of class IP 23 designed to operate in a

sheltered drip-proof environment.
i Space Heater
Alternator(s) shall be equipped with 240volt AC single phase
space heaters to minimize condensation while the alternator
set is idle. The heaters shall be capable of easily mounting in
the assembled alternator.

3 Excitation

The alternator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting

of a three-phase armature and a three-phase full wave bridge
rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge suppressors shall be
included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage spikes.
i Exciter - Permanent Magnet
The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive
excitation current from a pilot exciter mounted on the rotor
shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of rated
current for ten seconds during a fault condition.

4 Voltage Regulator

Voltage regulator shall be Digital Programable type. As installed,

the voltage regulator shall meet the applicable sections of the
following standards:

i. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

ii. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
iii. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
iv. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

• Voltage Regulator - Digital

The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with

fully programmable operating and protection characteristics. The
regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS in three phases of
alternator output voltage, or operating in single phase sensing
mode. It shall exhibit the following operational characteristics:

Alternator output voltage maintained within +/- 0.25% at steady

state conditions.

Page 394 of 417

Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

Alternator output voltage maintained within +/- 0.25% of rated

value for any load variation between no load and full load.

Alternator output voltage drift no more than +/-0.25% of rated

value at constant temperature.

Alternator output voltage drift no more than +/- 0.5% of rated value
within a 40 change over ambient temperature range of -40øC to
70øC.

Voltage buildup with alternator output as low as 6 volts.

At full throttle engine starting, output voltage overshoot no more

than 5% of its rated value, with respect to the volts/Hz curve.
Meets ISO 8325-3 class G2 specifications.

Power dissipation 55 W at 15 amps; <100 ma at rest. Telephone

Influence Factor (TIF) of less than 50.

Electronic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI)

suppressed to MIL STD 461C Part 9 and VDE 875 level N.

Maintain stable voltage control with 20% total harmonic distortion.

The regulator shall include the following features:

Potentiometer to provide alternator output voltage adjustment of -

10% to +10% of nominal. This shall be in addition to a
programmable output voltage level of -25% to
+10%

Automatic gain adjustment to provide output voltage

compensation for changes in load or frequency.

Manual gain adjustment 0 - 10% to provide compensation for line

losses between alternator output terminals and the load.

Reactive droop adjustment programmable to allow paralleling

without interconnect wiring between alternators, with 10%
minimum droop at full load and 0.8 PF.

It shall allow system parameter setup and monitoring, and provide

fault alarm and shutdown information through a keyed LCD
display. A PC-based user interface shall be available to allow
viewing and modifying operating parameters in a windowed
environment. The regulator shall be factory preset but field
programmable for:
voltage output voltage, minimum voltage droop/crosscurrent
adjustment voltage gain (IR compensation) voltage gain, internal
current, output
field current variation

Page 395 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

sensing, single or three phase dual voltage/frequency slopes

slope intersect (knee) frequency underfrequency setpoint
over/under voltage trip over/under voltage trip time

Alarms and fault shutdowns shall include: Under/over voltage

Overexcitation Loss of Excitation
Rotating Diode failure
Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip (IST) Loss of Sensing
Loss of Frequency EPROM failure

Protection shall be provided for the regulator against long term

overcurrent conditions. Alternator output shall shut off when
output is shorted, or excitation current exceeds normal for 15
seconds. The regulator shall not be damaged or result in unsafe
operation when subjected to open or shorted input due to sensing
loss, or sensing source shorted to ground or adjacent conductor.

The regulator shall be capable of operating while mounted within

the alternator assembly, or 300m (985 ft) from the alternator. It
shall have provision for remote voltage level control, using 16
gauge-shielded wire.

The regulator module sealed in a waterproof and airtight shock

resistant plastic housing and shall withstand:

Operating temperatures between -40øC to 70øC. Shock tolerance

to 20 g's

Vibration of 4.5 g's (peak) between frequencies of 18 to 2000 Hz

in three perpendicular planes, and mechanical shock of 15 g's in
all three planes.

Salt spray resistant as described by MIL STD-810C, Method

509.1 and ASTM-B116.

Pressure sealed to withstand 35 kPa (5 PSI).

The regulator shall be manufactured by the manufacturer of the

engine-alternator set.

(s) Mounting
The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by
the engine-generator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be
designed and built by the engine-generator manufacturer to resist
deflection, maintain alignment, and minimize resonant linear vibration.

1 Vibration Isolator – Spring Type

Factory supplied steel spring isolators shall be installed between
the generator set based and the mounting surface. The isolators
shall be bottled to the foundation and have a waffled or ribbed pad
on their bottom surface. The pads should be resistant to oil,
water, antifeeze, diesel fuel and cleaning compounds.

Page 396 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

(t) Day Tank Interconnection

Necessary fuel transfer connection to feed D.G Set day fuel tank shall
be provided. The tank shall incorporate pipe connections, float
switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact wired to an
indicating light on the generator set control cubicle. A manual shutoff
valve on the engine supply line and a drain valve shall be included.

(u) Controls, Protection, and Monitoring

The controls, protection, and monitoring systems of the generator set
and its operation shall be the responsibility of the generator set
manufacturer. All subsystem components, interfaces, and logic shall
be compatible with engine mounted devices.

1 Generator Set Control Panel

The generator set control panel shall control, protect, meter and
annunciate all functions necessary to confirm the operational
status of the generator set. It shall be designed and built by the
engine - generator manufacturer, mounted on the generator with
options of facing each side or rear, and incorporate 100% solid
state microprocessor based control circuitry, with circuitry, keypad
controls, and digital metering. Annunciation shall include individual
alarm lights, which will allow fault identification while retaining a
view of generator operating parameters, and a silencable audible
alarm. Fault condition set points shall be verified without exposing
the generator set to the actual condition.

Engine governing and overspeed fault circuitry shall utilize

individual circuitry to assure speed control protection. Governor,
voltage regulator, or complete panel shall be capable of mounting
remotely, and shall be compatible with controls of various
manufacturers. Circuitry shall be sealed in a dust tight and
watertight module with sealed wire entries into the enclosure.
Internal terminal strips shall be both crimped and soldered to
assure circuit integrity. Panel module shall comply with IP 42 and
NEMA 4 for environmental protection, while the total panel shall
qualify for IEC 144, IP 22 and NEMA 12. Panel functions shall be
identified by ISO labels.

As minimum the generator set mounted shall have following

features:
i Phase selector switch ii Voltage adjust rheostat iii
Speed adjust rheostat
iv Auto / Manual start stop control
v Engine control switch for off/reset, auto start, manual start &
stop
vi Panel Light vii Alarm Module
viii Cycle cranking ix Cool down timer
x interface module with Potential Free contacts for remote
alarms

Safety shut down protection and LED indication for: i Low oil
pressure

Page 397 of 417

Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

ii High coolant temperature iii Overcrank

iv Overspeed
v Over / Under frequency vi Over current
vii Reverse Power
viii Over / Under Voltage

Digital display for:

i Ammeter,
ii Voltmeter
iii Frequency meter
iv Power Factor meter (average total & per phase) v kW meter
(total & per phase)
vi kVA meter (total) vii KVAR meter (total) viii kWh meter (total)
ix KVARh meter (total) x % rated power
xi Coolant temp. xii Oil pressure xiii Service hours xiv Engine
R.P.M.
xv System DC volts
xvi System diagnostic code

2 Engine Monitoring Devices:

Backlit LCD to sequentially rotate display of operating hours
(reprogrammable), engine RPM, battery DC volts, oil pressure,
and jacket water temperature. A momentary switch shall be
provided to continuously display a selected operating parameter.
The display shall provide specific codes for fault shutdowns, cycle
programming, and diagnostic codes for trouble shooting. Set
points shall be programmable through a front mounted keypad,
and sensor operation confirmed by a verification procedure.
Engine monitoring signals provided by pulse width modulating
(PWM) lubricating oil pressure and coolant temperature sensors
and communicated directly to the panel control module. The
safety logic shall alarm or shut the engine down if the signal is
lost.

3 Controls:
Alternator voltage level rheostat and frequency control shall be
mounted on the panel face. The engine start-stop switch shall be
door mounted and include positions for off/reset, run/start, stop,
and automatic mode. Start-stop logic shall have provisions for
cycle cranking programmable from 5 to 60 second cycles, for total
crank time of 5 to 120 seconds. Cooldown operation shall be
programmable from 0 to 30 minutes, with a signal to allow removal
of the load from the generator set during cooldown.

4 Shutdowns/Annunciation:
The generator set shall shut down and red flashing LEDs shall
signal operational faults of overcrank, overspeed, high water
temperature, and low oil pressure. High water temperature, low
coolant level, and low oil pressure shall be programmable for
shutdown or alarm. A minimum of three (3) spare fault inputs
shall be available which can be programmed for alarm or
shutdown, with 0-250 second time delay. There shall be a lamp
test switchpad accessible from the front of the panel.

Page 398 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

5 Safety Devices:
ISO red emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, and all
controls, annunciation, and monitors labeled with ISO symbols.

6 Service:
Complete viewing and programming of panel functions shall be
possible from the panel face. Features shall include a fault history
log, engine alarm and shutdown set points, password protection,
spare input programming, hourmeter programming,
voltmeter/ammeter programming, and AC calibration.

7 Remote monitoring interface:

Following minimum interface signals for remote monitoring shall
be provided:
i Diesel Fuel oil high level ii Diesel Fuel oil low level iii
Ready to start
iv Not available to start v Failed to start
vi Running
vii Load accepted viii Common fault ix Common trip
x. No of starts,
xi. Temperature of Alternator and Bearings. xii . Speed,
xiii Voltage
xiv Battery voltage

The signals shall be communicated to the main control room Central

Surveillance and Control System (CSCS) over a communication link.
Necessary modems and communication module to match with the
CSCS shall be included.

(v) Battery Charger

Minimum 10A Battery charger (suitable for Nickel – cadmium
batteries) shall be provided to charge Engine starting batteries.

(w) Switchboard
1 Standby power supply LV switchboard distribution panel shall be
included in the scope of the generator manufacturer as indicated
on the drawing
2 Provide switchboard with all protection relays for generator and
outgoing feeders with facility for control and monitoring over
communication links using fiber optic cables.

(x) Sound Attenuators

Suitable sound attenuators to be provided in the Generator room, to
restrict the noise level outside the room to 85 dbA at 3.0 meters.

17.27.13 Execution

The following articles and paragraphs are intended to define acceptable

procedures and practices of inspecting, installing, and testing the
generator set and associated equipment.

(a) Pre-delivery Inspection

Page 399 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

A pre-delivery inspection must be performed by the system

manufacturers' local dealer at the dealer's facility to insure no damage
occurred in transit and all Genset components, controls, and
switchgear are included as specified herein.

(b) Shipment to Jobsite

Delivery shall be to the jobsite by the system manufacturer's

authorized dealer.

(c) Installation

The installation shall be done by the Generator set supplier or

installation approved by the Generator set supplier, after approval of
installation and shop drawings.

(d) Post-Installation Start up & Commissioning.

Following installation, the unit shall be started up & commissioned at
site using available site load. Startup shall performed by the system
manufacturer's local dealer representative(s) in the presence of the
owner's engineer or designated appointee:
1 Pre-start Checks: i oil level
ii water level
iii day tank fuel level
iv battery connection and charge condition v engine to control
interconnects
vi engine generator intake/exhaust obstructions
(e) Load test on generator
Following the satisfactory installation the Diesel generator shall be
tested for the full load conditions to verify its performance. The test
shall be witnessed by the Engineer and Client.
During the load test a Resistive and Inductive load shall be applied to
the Generator in steps and the results of all the parameters shall be
recorded. Also a step load of 50 % shall be suddenly applied and the
resulting performance shall be demonstrated. The test shall be carried
out for at least 8 hours continuously and parameters listed below shall
be checked.

1. Voltage,
2. current,
3. Frequency,
4. Temperature,
5. Bearing Temperature,
6. Losses,
7. Efficiency,
8. Fuel Consumption
9. Other parameters as suggested by Manufacturer.

(f) Service Manuals and Parts Books

1 The system manufacturer's authorized local dealer shall furnish
one copy each of the manuals and books listed below for each
unit under this contract:
i Operating Instructions - with description and illustration of all
switchgear controls and indicators and engine and generator

Page 400 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

controls.
ii Parts Books - which illustrate and list all assemblies,
subassemblies and components, except standard fastening
hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.).
iii Preventive Maintenance Instructions - on the complete system
that cover daily, weekly, monthly, biannual , and annual
maintenance requirements and include a complete lubrication
chart.
iv Routine Test Procedures - for all electronic and electrical
circuits and for the main AC generator.
v Troubleshooting Chart - covering the complete generator set
showing description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested
remedy.
vi Recommended Spare Parts List - showing all consumables
anticipated to be required during routine maintenance and test.
vii Wiring Diagrams and Schematics - showing function of all
electrical components.

All manuals and books described above shall be contained in rigid

plastic pouches.

17.28 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System

The contractor shall supply a UPS and/or battery backup system with sufficient
capacity to maintain power to the supplied equipment, its peripherals remote
terminal units on main power supply for a minimum period of 4 hrs.

The batteries shall be Ni-Cad.

In the event of power failure, the master central system shall be supported by
the uninterrupted power supplies as specified.

The system equipment shall be programmed to fail safe without corruption

once UPS power is exhausted or execute a shutdown routine after present time
from the original mains failure.

The UPS system shall be monitored by the SCADA and a fault in the UPS
system shall be accorded a grade 1 priority status.

The functional design specifications shall detail modes of failure and itemize
signals to be supported by UPS if deemed appropriate.

17.28.1 GENERAL

17.28.1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The bidder shall furnish a complete uninterruptible power system as

specified herein and hereafter referred to as the "UPS", to provide
continuous, regulated AC power to critical loads under normal and
abnormal conditions, including loss of the utility AC power.

B. The following shall be furnished along with the equipment:

Page 401 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

1. Operations and Maintenance Manual.

2. Installation Information.

17.28.1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The UPS shall be installed by others in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

17.28.1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The UPS system shall consist of a UPS module and a battery. The AC
output of the UPS module shall be connected to the critical loads. The
battery shall be connected to the DC input of the UPS.

1. UPS modules shall be available with internal or external batteries for 3

hours. Longer runtimes will require an external battery, and the internal
battery will be omitted.
2. UPS modules rated at 30kVA and above shall have external batteries
only.

B. Definitions

1. UPS Module: The portion of the UPS system which contains the
rectifier/charger, inverter, static bypass switch, maintenance bypass
switch, controls, monitoring, and indicators.
2. Rectifier/Charger: The portion of the UPS module which converts the
normal source AC input power to DC power for the inverter input and
for charging the battery.
3. Inverter: The portion of the UPS module which converts DC power,
from either the rectifier/charger or the battery, to regulated and filtered
AC power which is supplied to the critical load.
4. Automatic Bypass Switch: The portion of the UPS module which
automatically transfers the critical loads, without interruption, from the
inverter output to the bypass AC power source in the event of an
overload or degradation of the inverter's performance.
5. Maintenance Bypass Switch: The portion of the UPS module which is
used to connect the bypass AC power source to the critical loads
while electrically isolating the static bypass switch, rectifier/charger
and inverter for maintenance purposes.
6. Battery: The battery system that provides DC power to the inverter
input when the normal AC input power to the UPS module fails or in
the event that the rectifier/charger should fail.
7. Critical Loads: Those loads that require regulated continuous AC
power and which are connected to the output of the UPS module.

C. The UPS configuration shall be a single module or multiple paralleled UPS

modules rated to supply the load as specified herein. Special paralleling
cabinets, control cabinets and bypass circuits shall not be required for

Page 402 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

parallel systems. Up to eight modules may be paralleled in any combination

for capacity or redundancy.

D. Maintenance and servicing of UPS shall not be restricted by proprietary

software or external interface devices. Any factory trained service provider
shall be capable of performing maintenance and repair of the UPS.
Calibration and diagnostics of the UPS shall be capable either remotely or
thru the front display and shall be facilitated thru programmable parameters
only.

17.28. 1.04 SINGLE MODULE SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Normal: The inverter shall supply AC power continuously to the critical

loads. The inverter output shall be synchronized with the bypass AC power
source provided that the bypass AC power source is within the specified
frequency range. The rectifier/charger shall convert the normal AC input
power to DC power for the inverter and for charging the battery.
B. Loss of Normal AC Input Power: The battery shall supply DC power to the
inverter so that there is no interruption of AC power to the critical loads
whenever the normal AC input power source of the UPS module deviates
from the specified tolerances or fails completely. The battery shall continue
to supply power to the inverter for the specified protection time.
C. Return of Normal AC Input Power Source: The rectifier/charger shall start
and assume the DC load from the battery when the normal AC input power
source returns. The rectifier/charger shall then simultaneously supply the
inverter with DC power and recharge the battery. This shall be an
automatic function and shall cause no disturbance to the critical load.
D. Transfer to Bypass AC Power Source: If the control circuitry senses an
overload, an inverter shutdown signal or degradation of the inverter output,
then it shall automatically transfer the critical loads from the inverter output
to the bypass AC power source without an interruption of power. If the
bypass AC power source is above or below normal voltage limits, then the
transfer shall be inhibited.
E. Retransfer to Inverter: The automatic bypass switch shall be capable of
automatically retransferring the load back to the inverter after the inverter
has returned to normal conditions. Retransfer shall not occur if the two
sources are not synchronized. The automatic bypass control circuit shall
have the ability to lock the critical load to either the inverter output or the
bypass source (selectable) after multiple transfer-retransfer operations.
This lockout condition shall be reset automatically (after an adjustable delay
period) or under manual command through remote communications
software.
F. Downgrade: If the battery is taken out of service for maintenance, it shall
be disconnected from the rectifier/charger and inverter. The UPS shall
continue to function and meet the performance criteria specified herein
except for the battery reserve time and step load performance.

17.28.1.05 REDUNDANT-PARALLEL ARCHITECTURE (RPA)

A. The UPS system shall be capable of operating with up to eight UPS

Page 403 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

modules in parallel. This parallel configuration shall not require special

paralleling switchgear, external control cabinets, external static bypass or
external maintenance bypass. Redundant communication cables shall be
used between modules to ensure reliability.\
B. edundant control electronics: Each UPS module shall have it’s own totally
independent controller. The individual controllers will intercommunicate
continuously to manage the overall system in a democratic way. A
programmed “Master-Slave” arrangement shall not be used. If any
module’s controller malfunctions, the remaining controllers shall manage
the UPS system’s operation.
C. Load sharing: The module controllers shall continuously monitor the power
exchange between UPS modules. Individual module regulation shall be
based on an index value related to the power exchange between, and the
total number of active modules in the system, thus reducing the load
sharing error to virtually zero.\
D. ynchronization: Enhanced high speed, high precision tracking shall
maintain the synchronization error between UPS modules and between the
modules and the bypass source to no more than 0.05 milliseconds.
E. Decentralized bypass: Each UPS module shall contain it’s own automatic
and maintenance bypass circuits. Operation of each UPS modules
automatic bypass circuit will be controlled through the RPA system.
External, centralized static bypass circuits shall not be used.
F. Failure handling: Functionality and redundancy shall be maintained at the
sub-system level. If a given UPS module suffers a sub-system malfunction,
other sub-systems within the module will remain active and available for
system operation. An automatic bypass failure in a given module shall not
remove that module’s inverter from system operation, nor shall an inverter
failure remove a module’s automatic bypass from system operation.
G. Intelligent Energy Management (IEM): Energy-saving mode shall be
available to the user. Individual inverters that are not required in order to
support the actual load or programmed redundancy level shall be
automatically switched off to conserve energy. This feature shall be fully
programmable, with individual inverters being switched off cyclically to
balance operating hours over a period of time. The IEM feature shall be
programmable to minimize energy consumption during non-critical hours by
reducing or eliminating redundancy or switching the UPS system to off-line
operation. The user shall be able to choose the level of load protection and
redundancy under this mode of operation.

17.28.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The manufacturer shall have a quality assurance program with checks on

incoming parts, modular assemblies and final products. This quality
program shall meet ISO-9001 requirements.
B. The UPS module shall be "burned-in" without failure for a minimum of eight
hours.
C. A final test procedure for the product shall include a check of performance
specifications before and after the 8-hour "burn-in."
D. An on-site test procedure shall include a check of controls and indicators
after installation of the equipment.

Page 404 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

E. Approved Manufacturers - The following manufacturers shall be approved

for use. No substitutions shall be permitted.

1. GE Digital Energy

17.28.1.07 STANDARDS

A. The UPS shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with

the applicable portions of the following standards:

1. UL 1778 - UPS Standard.

2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
3. IEEE 446 - Recommended Practice for Standby Power Systems.
4. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice for Surge Withstandability.
5. NEMA PE 1 - Uninterruptible Power Systems.
6. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Association.
7. FCC Class A (optional)

17.28.1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. With Proposals: Catalog cuts describing the proposed equipment shall be

submitted with the proposal. All deviations to this specification shall be
listed and included with the proposal.
B. After Construction of Equipment:
1. An Operations and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished with the
UPS, and shall include as a minimum the following:
a. General information.
b. Safety precautions.
c. Installation instructions.
d. Operating instructions.

2. One certified copy of the factory test report shall be furnished upon
request.

C. After Installation of Equipment: A signed service report describing start-up

and on-site testing shall be furnished after start-up of the equipment.

17.28.1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The UPS module shall be palletized and shipped via air ride or common
carrier, as specified by the customer.
B. Shipping splits shall be provided such that no section is more than 48"
long.

17.28.1.10 SITE CONDITIONS

A. The UPS shall be designed for indoor installation with ambient

temperatures from 32° - 104°F (0 - 40°C), 77°F ±5°F (25°C) for the battery
and relative humidity from 0 - 95% non-condensing.

Page 405 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.28.1.11 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall state his warranty of the equipment. In no case

shall it be less than twelve (12) months after start-up or fifteen (15) months
after shipment, whichever occurs first.

B. The battery cell manufacturer's standard warranty shall be passed through

to the end user.

17.28.2 ELECTRICAL

17.28.2.01 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. UPS Module Input.

1. Voltage: 480 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire + ground.

2. Voltage Range: -20% to +15% without discharging the battery.
3. Frequency: 60 Hertz ±10% continuous.
4. Current Walk-In: Over 30 seconds to full load rating.
5. Maximum Input Current: 115% of nominal full load current.
6. Power Factor: 0.80 lagging at nominal input voltage (0.9 PF with
optional input filter).
7. current harmonics: 25-30% THD at nominal conditions and at full UPS
load (<7% THD with optional input filter).
8. Input transient protection: ANSI C62.41.
9. EMI filter: FCC Class A compliance (optional)

B. UPS Module Output

1. Voltage: 480 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire + ground
2. Frequency: 50 Hz
3. Power rating: As per project requirement
4. Voltage regulation: ±1% of nominal for any of the combined effects:

a. No load to full load.

b. Minimum to maximum output power factor.
c. Minimum to maximum AC input voltage.
d. Minimum to maximum DC input voltage.
e. 0 to 40°C ambient temperature.

5. Dynamic regulation:
±3% from nominal for 100% step load.
±2% from nominal for 50% step load.
Recovering to within 1% in less than one cycle

1. Voltage adjustability: ±5%

2. Voltage unbalance: ±3% of nominal for 100% unbalanced loads.
3. Phase separation: 120° ±1% of nominal for 100% balanced loads
120° ±2% of nominal for 100% unbalanced loads.
4. Voltage distortion: <2% THD at 100% load.
(Linear load)
5. Voltage distortion: <3% THD at 100% load.
(Non-linear load - IEC62040)

Page 406 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

6. Frequency stability: 60 HZ ±0.01% free running.

7. Phase-lock window: 60 HZ, +/- 4% (adjustable).
8. Frequency slew rate: 0.1 Hz to 20 Hz/second, selectable in 0.1 Hz
increments.
9. Overload capability
a. inverter: 125% for 10 minutes
150% for 60 seconds
b. Automatic bypass: 110% continuously
200% for 5 minutes

10. Fault clearing capability

a. Inverter: 220% for 100 milliseconds
700% for 1.2 milliseconds
b. Static bypass: 1000% for 1/2 cycle (non-repetitive)

11. Crest factor: 3:1 maximum.

12. Battery
1. Voltage: 480VDC nominal (240 cells)
2. End of discharge voltage: 396VDC, adjustable

17.28.2.02 RECTIFIER/CHARGER

A. The rectifier/charger shall consist of an input switch, an input

EMI/transient suppressor network, output filter and a solid-state, three-
phase rectifier with control circuitry to provide constant voltage/constant
current regulation and a current walk-in on start-up of the rectifier/charger.
The rectifier/charger shall be a full wave controlled type using SCR's in
both the positive and negative legs to eliminate even ordered harmonics.

B. Over-current/Transient Protection
1. The input of the rectifier/charger shall be protected from noise and
transients by an input EMI/transient suppressor network. The
suppressor network shall be fused in order to minimize damage to the
UPS in the event that input transients exceed the rating of the
suppression network.
2. The rectifier/charger shall be electronically regulated and current
limited to protect the connections to the inverter input and to prevent
damage to the battery.

C. Control Circuitry

1. The rectifier/charger shall be equipped with Digital Signal Processor

(DSP) control circuitry to provide constant DC voltage regulation of
±1% for +15% to -15% AC input voltage change, for ±10% input
frequency change, or for 0% to 100% load variations. The rectifier
shall be capable of operating at –20% AC input voltage without
discharging the battery.

2. Battery charge current is normally limited to the lesser of:

a. 20% of the battery amp-hour rating (expressed in amps) and

b. The difference in maximum rectifier output current and actual
inverter input current.

Page 407 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

This will assure minimal battery recharge time while ensuring

maximum battery life by limiting charge current to a safe level.

Allowable battery charge current may be increased beyond 20% of

the battery amp-hour rating for those applications requiring faster
recharge times. Actual available charge current will still depend on
output load level and power factor.

Battery charging may be disabled via external contact closure,

signaling operation on engine generator.

3. The control circuitry shall enable continuous rectifier/charger

operation from an engine generator with output frequency transients
of up to 5 Hz.
4. Whenever AC power is applied to the rectifier/charger, the current
limiting control circuitry shall walk-in over a period of at least 15
seconds to allow gradual loading of the normal input AC power
source
5. The control circuitry shall automatically provide battery recharge at a
pre-selected elevated voltage after return from failure of the normal
input AC power. The control circuitry shall monitor the battery
charging current and automatically return to a pre-selected float
voltage when the battery current decreases to a preset level thus
preventing overcharging or undercharging the battery.
6. The control circuitry shall automatically turn off the rectifier/charger
without opening circuit breakers if any of the following conditions
occur:
a. High DC voltage.
b. AC over voltage of 110% of normal AC input.
c. Loss of a phase on normal AC input.
d. Loss of normal AC input.
7. The control circuitry shall be capable of additional rectifier/charger
features with future DSP control software releases.

D. Input Filter

The rectifier/charger shall be furnished with input filtering to reduce

reflected harmonic currents from the UPS input to less than 7% THD at
full UPS load and to improve the input power factor to 0.93 lagging. This
input filter shall be programmable to automatically disconnect from the
input source at reduced load levels or when signaled from the UPS
controller for coordination with engine-generator operation. This input filter
will be located inside the main UPS enclosure and shall not increase the
required footprint.

E. Output Filter

The rectifier/charger shall be furnished with output filtering to limit output

ripple voltage to 1% RMS for 0 to 100% load.
F. Capacity

The rectifier/charger shall have sufficient capacity to supply the inverter at

Page 408 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

100%, 0.8 PF load plus recharge a battery (sized for up to 30 minutes) to

95% of full capacity within ten (10) times the discharge time.

17.28.2.03 INVERTER

A. The inverter shall utilize fast-switching IGBT transistors, pulse width

modulation (PWM) and space vector modulation (SVM). It shall consist of a
switching bridge, DC input, output filter and control circuitry to provide
precise AC voltage regulation, harmonic cancellation/conditioning and
superior transient response.

B. Control Circuitry

1. The inverter shall be provided with Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

control circuitry to provide constant AC voltage regulation and transient
response as specified. The high-speed DSP controls shall sample the
output continuously to provide precise voltage control.
2. The high speed DSP control shall determine the phase and amplitude of
the output voltage 5th, 7th, 11th and 13th harmonic components. The
results shall be used by a software harmonic conditioner algorithm in
controlling the inverter by injecting into or withholding energy from the
output to develop a clean output AC voltage sine wave when driving
non-linear loads.
3. The circuitry shall provide low voltage initial start-up of the inverter and
ramp-up to full voltage.
4. The control circuitry shall automatically synchronize and phase lock the
inverter output to the bypass AC power source as long as the bypass
source is within the synchronization range. The synchronization range
shall be adjustable from ±1/8 Hz to ±5 Hz, selectable in maximum
increments of 0.1 Hz. If the bypass AC power source is not within these
preset limits, then the control circuitry shall break synchronization and
lock to an internal crystal oscillator.
5. The control circuitry shall automatically send a signal to the static
bypass switch to transfer to the bypass AC source and then turn off the
inverter for any of the following conditions:
a. Blown inverter fuse.
b. Over-temperature.
c. Overloads per specified limits.
d. High/low DC voltage.
e. Inverter over voltage or under voltage condition of ±5%
(adjustable).
6. The control circuitry shall automatically turn off the inverter when the
battery reaches the end of discharge. The UPS shall automatically
restart and return to normal when input AC power returns. The user
shall be able to disable this feature.
7. The control circuitry shall be capable of additional inverter features with
future DSP control software releases.

C. Inverter Output Transformer

1. The inverter output shall be furnished with a three-phase, delta/wye

isolation type output transformer.
2. The transformer windings shall be vacuum impregnated to reduce

Page 409 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

audible noise and increase heat dissipation.

3. The transformer shall have a UL recognized insulation system and
shall be so located within the equipment to ensure that the hottest
spot shall not exceed the rated insulation temperature and to ensure a
low center of gravity.

17.28.2.04 AUTOMATIC BYPASS

The input of the automatic bypass shall be protected from noise and
transients by an input EMI/transient suppressor network. The suppressor
network shall be fused in order to minimize damage to the UPS in the
event that input transients exceed the rating of the suppression network.

a. The automatic bypass shall consist of one pair of Silicon Controlled

Rectifiers (SCR's) per phase (with each pair connected in inverse
parallel) with a parallel connected contactor, and shall be rated to
continuously carry a minimum of 110% of the UPS's rated output
current. The automatic bypass shall be connected between the
bypass (input) AC power source and the inverter output.
b. Inverter Failure: If the inverter is out of normal limits due to under
voltage or over voltage, or is shut down for any reason, the automatic
bypass switch shall turn on to provide power to the load from the
bypass AC power source without interruption.
c. Retransfer to Inverter: The automatic bypass switch shall be capable
of automatically retransferring the load back to the inverter after the
inverter has returned to normal conditions and stabilized for a preset
period of time. Retransfer shall not occur if the two sources are not
synchronized.
d. Automatic Retransfer Lockout: In the event of multiple transfer -
retransfer operations within a short time period (adjustable up to 5
minutes), the automatic bypass switch shall lock to the bypass AC
power source after the third transfer. The lock period shall also be
adjustable up to 5 minutes. The UPS shall return to normal operation
after the lock period has expired. The user shall be able to disable the
lockout feature, and/or modify it’s function to enable lock to inverter
instead of bypass.
e. Overload: If an inverter overload is detected, the automatic bypass
switch shall operate as described in 2.04.B. and C. above. A transfer
shall not occur unless the inverter overload ratings and time duration
described in paragraph 2.01.B.14 are exceeded.

f. Over current Protection

1. Input over current protection shall be provided upstream from the
UPS.
2. The automatic bypass switch shall be rated to carry 200% of the
UPS's rated output current for five minutes and 1000% of the
UPS's rated output current for one half cycle.
g. Transfer Conditions
1. The automatic bypass switch shall transfer the critical load from
the output of the inverter to the bypass AC power source for the
following conditions:
a. Inverter voltage less than 95% of nominal (adjustable).
b. Inverter voltage greater than 105% of nominal (adjustable).

Page 410 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

c. Inverter overload period expired.

d. Inverter shutdown for any reason.
2. The automatic bypass switch shall inhibit transfer to the bypass
AC power source for the following conditions:
• Bypass AC power source voltage less than 90% of nominal
(adjustable).
• Bypass AC power source voltage greater than 110% of
nominal (adjustable).
• Inverter not phase-locked to the bypass AC source.
h. Automatic Retransfer Conditions: The system shall automatically
retransfer the load to the inverter provided all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The inverter logic and the bypass AC power source are
synchronized and in phase.
2. Inverter conditions are normal.
3. The UPS output is not overloaded.
i. Transfer Time: Maximum transfer time to switch from inverter to
bypass AC power source shall be 100 microseconds.
j. Dual Input Configuration: The rectifier and internal bypass (automatic
bypass switch and maintenance bypass) shall be connected to the AC
power source through separate terminals at the UPS input. This dual
input configuration shall enable the UPS primary and bypass AC
power sources to be provided from separate input feeds for
redundancy. The bypass AC power source shall match the UPS
output in voltage, frequency, phase rotation sequence and
configuration.

17.28. 2.05 MAINTENANCE BYPASS SWITCH

The input of the maintenance bypass switch shall be protected from noise
and transients by an input EMI/transient suppressor network. The suppressor
network shall be fused in order to minimize damage to the UPS in the event
that input transients exceed the rating of the suppression network.

A. An internal, manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be provided

to enable bypassing the critical loads to the bypass AC power source without
interruption of power to those loads. The maintenance bypass switching
arrangements electrically isolates the static bypass switch, rectifier/charger
and inverter from the bypass AC power source. The switch shall be
physically isolated from the electronics within the UPS enclosure to ensure
safety during maintenance.

17.28.2.06 FRONT PANEL AND USER INTERFACE

A. The UPS front panel shall include a mimic diagram with active LED
indicators showing the actual power path through the UPS.

B. The front panel shall also include the following LED indicators:
i. Summary Alarm
ii. Service Check
iii. Stop Operation
iv. Battery Level (bar graph)
v. Load Level (bar graph)

Page 411 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

C. The front panel shall include the following buttons for system operation
and control of the LCD display:
i. System operation buttons:
1. Inverter ON
Inverter OFF
2. Mute (Alarm Silence)
3. Test
4. Load OFF
ii. LCD display control buttons:
1. Metering
2. Alarms
3. Parameters
4. +
5. -
6. OK

D. The UPS shall include an audible alarm-warning device. This alarm shall
sound whenever any abnormal condition occurs. Pressing the Mute
button shall silence the audible alarm. Any subsequent alarm shall cause
reactivation of the status indicator and audible alarm.

E. The following parameters shall be measured and displayed by an

alphanumeric LCD display on the Front Panel. Each display shall have
the nomenclature of the parameter indicated with the associated value.
AC voltage and current values shall be measured in true RMS units.

1. Battery Display
i. Battery voltage.
ii. Battery current with flow direction.
iii. Battery temperature.
iv. Battery charge level.
v. Estimated backup time at present load.
2. Bypass AC Display
i. Bypass AC voltage - phase to phase.
ii. Bypass frequency.

3. Rectifier Display
i. AC input voltage - phase to phase.
ii. DC output current.
iii. Input frequency.
4. Inverter Display
i. Voltage - phase to neutral.
ii. Output frequency.
iii. Synchronization status.
5. Load status display.
i. Overall load kVA.
ii. Overall percentage load.
iii. Load on Bypass/Inverter.
6. Phase load display 1.
i. Voltage – phase to neutral.
ii. Phase current - amperes.
iii. Phase current – percentage.

Page 412 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

7. Phase load display 2.

i. Phase kW.
ii. Phase kVA.
8. Miscellaneous display.
i. Heatsink temperature.
ii. UPS operating hours.
iii. Inverter operating hours.
9. Utility/Load fault display.
i. Total minor utility faults.
ii. Total major utility faults.
iii. Total overloads.

F. UPS alarm/event history shall be available through the alphanumeric

display on the front panel. The event history shall store a minimum of
256 previous status and alarm events with the date and time of each
occurrence. No software or external remote monitoring equipment shall
be necessary to access the alarm/event history.

17.28.2.07 EXTERNAL INTERFACE

A. The UPS shall have 6 alarm contacts for remote signaling. These alarm
contacts shall each be programmable with any of the following signals:

- No information - Low battery - Manual bypass on

- Audible alarm* - Overload - Rectifier on
- Summary alarm* - Over temperature - Inverter on
- Load on utility* -Inverter not synched - Boost charge
- Stop operation* -Bypass locked - Battery ground fault
- Load on inverter* -Bypass utility failure - Battery fault
- Utility failure* -Rectifier utility failure -User input 1
- DC over voltage -Battery discharge -User input 2

Programming of the alarm contacts requires access with the appropriate

password. The six voltage free alarm contacts shall be accessible through
a 37-pin plug or a standard wiring terminal block. Signals marked '*' are
the default selections. As an option, the UPS can be furnished with 12
programmable contacts.

B. The UPS shall have two inputs for connection to external contact closures.
The status of these external contacts can be monitored from the front
panel of the UPS. The default configuration for these external signals
shall be as follows:
i. Aux. Input No. 1 ‘On Generator’
ii. Aux. Input No. 2 not defined

The ‘On Generator’ signal shall be used to optimize operation of the UPS
while AC power is being supplied from an engine-generator. The following
parameters shall be programmable in this mode:

1. Inverter synchronization with generator (enable/disable). This

parameter (disabled) shall protect the critical load from all frequency
transients associated with engine-generator operation.
2. Automatic bypass to generator (enable/disable). This parameter

Page 413 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

shall allow the user to prevent transfer of the critical load directly to
the output of the engine-generator.
3. Inverter output frequency slew-rate. This parameter shall allow the
user to specify the maximum frequency rate-of-change when the
inverter is phase-locked to an engine-generator. Adjustment range
shall be 0.1 to 20.0 Hz/second, in 0.1 increments. This adjustment
shall be independent of normal operation slew-rate.
4. Recharge capability (enable/disable/delay). This parameter shall
allow the user to select whether or not, and/or when the battery will
be recharged while the UPS is powered from an engine-generator.
This parameter shall be programmable directly in minutes, with zero
disabling battery charging. This will conserve fuel and allow closer
sizing of the engine-generator.
5. The UPS rectifier shall also include a soft-start circuit to limit inrush
current and apply load to the engine-generator gradually.
6. The optional input current distortion filter shall be programmable to
disconnect when the UPS AC source is the output of an engine-
generator.

17.28.2.08 RS232 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS

A. The UPS shall include two RS-232 ports. These ports shall allow full
remote monitoring, control and management of the UPS system. All
access to control functions through these ports shall be protected from
unauthorized access.

1. Port 1 shall allow access to critical UPS measurements, functions and

historical data through the optional IRIS or PowerJUMP Universal
Management software. This software shall also enable access through
the internet, enabling the UPS to notify service personnel of any
problems.
2. Port 2 shall allow access to critical UPS measurements, functions and
historical data via direct connection or modem using the optional
ARGUS Control Network software. This port shall also allow
connection to a LAN through an optional LINC box and SNMP
adaptor. Connection to a serial printer shall be allowed for local
access to internal system parameters and measurements.

17.28.2.09 DESIGN

A. Parameters: In order to increase accuracy and reduce Mean Time To

Repair (MTTR) the UPS must be fully adjustable and have the ability to be
calibrated with the use of programmable parameters. Access to these
parameters shall be available remotely to facilitate remote servicing and
diagnostics or thru the front display. Manual adjustments using
potentiometers or dipswitches will not be acceptable. The parameters shall
have different levels of access with each level being password protected.
Special interfacing equipment or proprietary software shall not be required
for UPS service or maintenance.

Page 414 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

B. Maintenance: Control circuits shall be capable of being tested while the

critical loads are bypassed to the bypass AC power source. All
adjustments and tests shall be possible from the front of the UPS with the
use of standard test equipment (volt-ohm-milliampere meter and
oscilloscope). Control circuits shall utilize plug-in connections for ease and
speed of repairs. Special extender boards shall not be required. All control
logic shall be contained on a single control board for ease of
troubleshooting and to minimize spare parts requirements.

C. Logic Power Supply: The logic power supply shall receive power from the
battery and AC power sources. It shall be capable of supplying logic power
from any of the available sources.

17.28.2.10 CONSTRUCTION

A. Enclosure: The UPS electronics shall be housed in a standard indoor

enclosure. The enclosure shall be primed and painted inside and outside
with manufacturer's standard paint. The enclosure shall be freestanding,
with castors and leveling feet.

B. Mobility: The equipment shall be suitable for location directly on computer

room raised flooring. Maximum dimensions (not including batteries) shall
be:
i. 10-40 kVA 26.8"W x 31.5"D x 70.9"H
ii. 50-80 kVA 31.5"W x 31.5"D x 70.9"H
iii. 100-150 kVA 47.3"W x 31.5"D x 70.9"H
C. Layout: Modules and subassemblies shall be mounted in open
construction style so that each may be easily serviced or replaced from the
front of the enclosure. The equipment shall be constructed so that each
power assembly can be replaced without a soldering iron or special tools.
Cable and conduit connections shall be through the top or bottom of the
UPS enclosure.
D. Material and Workmanship
1. Workmanship shall be first class in every respect.
2. All material shall be new and of best industrial grade.
3. Internal wiring conductors shall be combined into cables or bundles,
and shall be tied securely together
4. All bundled wiring shall be identified by color codes or by wire
numbers. Power cables shall be identified at each end.

17.28.2.11 COOLING

A. The UPS shall be forced air-cooled with redundant fans. Inlet air
temperature shall be monitored and displayed.

B. The cooling shall be adequate for operation at altitudes up to 1,000 meters

(3,281 feet).

Page 415 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

17.28.2.12 NOISE REDUCTION

A. The UPS shall be designed and constructed such that the audible noise
level is reduced to a typical 65 decibel, measured on the A scale at one 5
feet (1.5 meters) from the front of the cabinet.

17.28.2.13 BATTERY

A. The UPS shall be designed to operate with any common lead-acid or

nickel-cadmium battery type. The installed battery type and rating shall be
programmed into the UPS at start-up, and the UPS rectifier shall select the
proper charging regimen based on the actual installed battery type. This will
maximize the life of the battery. The UPS shall include a programmable
battery test feature. This test will perform a partial discharge of the battery
with the UPS on line in order to isolate open or weak battery cells. Pass or
fail results of test will be logged into the history of the UPS and failures will
activate an alarm on the front panel. The user shall have the ability to
enable fully automatic, as well as manual battery testing.

17.28.2.14 EMERGENCY POWER OFF

A. The UPS shall include an Emergency Power Off (EPO) circuit. Activating
this circuit shall cause immediate shutdown of all UPS operations. This
operation will shut down the critical load.
B. The UPS module shall include provisions to activate the EPO circuit
remotely by a contact closure.

17.28.3 EXECUTION

17.28.3.01 MANUFACTURING

A. The manufacturer shall design, build, test and arrange for shipment of the
UPS.
B. The manufacturer shall prepare and deliver the required installation
drawings and operation and maintenance manuals with the equipment.

17.28.3.02 SITE PREPARATION

A. The owner shall prepare the site for installation of the equipment.
B. The owner shall arrange for installation of the equipment.
C. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as well as in accordance with local and national electrical
codes.

17.28.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The equipment shall be commissioned and energized by an authorized

representative of the equipment manufacturer. A signed service report
shall then be submitted after equipment is operational to initiate the
warranty.

Page 416 of 417

 Mechanical and Electrical Design Guidelines and Specifications

• RTA Approved CCTV System Vendor List

1. Najmat Al Kawn Technologies LLC, PO Box 43302, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
2. Star Technology FZCO, P.O Box : 18697, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
3. Transguard Group LLC, P.O Box : 22630, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
4. Scientechnic LLC, P.O. Box 25490, Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Page 417 of 417

 Appendix B
Cycle Digital Display
Counter
SECTION 20 ANCILLARY WORKS

Appendix B

CYCLE DIGITAL DISPLAY COUNTER

General Description

The below is technical specifications for guidance for Cycle digital display counters and the
Contractor to propose as approved or equivalent.

**
Counter Arrangement Sensors Arrangement

General Specifications

Installation Installation with an anchor base

Waterproofness IP55
Temperature Resistance - 30°C / + 50°C (-22°F to 120°F)
Design Fully customizable
Settings Embedded Web server for maintenance and sensor settings on site
or
remotely (through WIFI or Ethernet communication)
Sensors Embedded in Pavement, magnetic sensor associated with local and
international approved suppliers.
Warantee The Contractor shall provide a minimum warranty period of 10 years
from the date of commissioning for all equipment, components and
services

Physical Specifications

Dimensions 239 x 47 x 16cm (94 x 18.5 x 6.25 inches)

Weight ≈ 110kg (242.5 lbs)
Wind Resistance Zone 5 according to NV65 standard
Display Surface LED lights
Automatic adjustment to ambient light levels
Material Aluminum frame and shock-resistant polycarbonate
Graffiti-proof and rust-proof powder coating
Frame Color Graffiti-proof painting - Customizable color
Power Input 110 VAC or 220-240 VAC power source must be available on site

Page B-1
SECTION 20 ANCILLARY WORKS

Power Consumption Max. 360W

Average: 80W
Hole Dimensions for the H x L x W = 550 x 700 x 600mm (21.65 x 27.5 x 23.5 inches)
Anchor Base

**
Approximate Dimensions

Page B-2
 Appendix C
Landscape Specifications
LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL AND PRELIMINARIES 1
1.1 General 1
1.2 Standards, materials, goods and workmanship 1
1.3 Approved trade names / manufacturer/ suppliers 2
1.4 Samples & testing of materials 2
1.5 Manufacturer’s instructions 3
1.6 Ordering materials 3
1.7 Scaffolding 3
1.8 Cutting and Patching 3
1.9 Protection of the works 3
1.10 Site Hoarding 4
1.11 Water for the works 4
1.12 Electricity for the works 4
1.13 Existing site services 4
1.14 Pricing generally 4
1.15 Site facilities and facilities for engineer’s representatives/ temporary services 5
1.16 Maintenance of offices 7
1.17 Delivery, handling and storage of materials 7
1.18 Control and test equipment to be provided by contractor 7
1.19 Site offices for contractor 8
1.20 Contractor's site area 8
1.21 Site progress meetings 8
1.22 Progress photographs 8
1.23 Setting out 9
1.24 Notice boards 9
1.25 Defective work 9
1.26 Erection equipment or other plant 9
1.27 Loading in excess of design load 9
1.28 Building permit & NOC 10
1.29 Permanent irrigation, drainage, water and electricity connections 10
1.30 Handing over 10
1.31 Safety regulations 10
1.32 Accidents 10
1.33 Mobilisation period - contractor's work 10
2 METALWORK AND GLAZING 12
2.1 General 12
2.2 Standards 12
2.3 Finished coating 12
2.4 Aluminium 13
2.5 Storage and protection 15
2.6 Materials 16
2.7 Shop painting materials 16
2.8 Shop coatings for ferrous and galvanised surfaces 16
2.9 Workmanships 17
2.10 Installation 18
2.11 Samples 19
2.12 Sealing joints 19
2.13 Glazing 19
2.14 Glazing materials 20
2.15 Glass openings 20
2.16 Glass installation 20
2.17 Cleaning 21
2.18 Expansion joint trims, etc. 21
3 PAINTING AND DECORATING GENERAL 22
3.1 Materials 23
3.2 Workmanship 25
3.3 Guarantees 27
4 SITE AND STREET FURNITURE 28
4.1 Description 28
4.2 Quality assurance 28

TOC 1 of 5
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

4.3 Submittals 28
4.4 Delivery, storage and handling 29
4.5 Site conditions 29
4.6 External timber features. 29
4.7 Street furniture 30
4.8 Product specification sheet 31
4.9 Installation 31
4.10 Maintenance 31
4.11 Maintenance manual 31
5 SOFT LANDSCAPING 32
5.1 Description 32
5.2 Quality Assurance 32
5.3 Quality control program 32
5.4 Submittals 32
5.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling 33
5.6 Site conditions 34
5.7 Certificates 34
5.8 Planting soil 34
5.9 Planting soil constituent criteria 35
5.10 Soil conditioner 36
5.11 Organic compost 36
5.12 Soil moisture retention additives 36
5.13 Soil mixes 37
5.14 Plants 37
5.15 Tree stakes & support 38
5.16 Landscape edging 38
5.17 Tree ties 39
5.18 Geotextile membrane 39
5.19 Root barrier 40
5.20 Drainage composite barrier 40
5.21 Drainage cell/ composite 40
5.22 Advanced trees to 2m 40
5.23 Regular size trees to 1.5m 40
5.24 Medium palms 40
5.25 Regular size palms upto 2.5m 41
5.26 Shrubs, Herbaceous plants, groundcovers 41
5.27 Annual plants 41
5.28 Lawn areas – green grass carpet 42
5.29 Plant supply 43
5.30 Plant substitutes 43
5.31 Soft landscape programme 44
5.32 Planting period 44
5.33 Planting bed preparation 44
5.34 Planting pit excavation 45
5.35 Transporting plants 46
5.36 Plant handling 46
5.37 Planting operations 46
5.38 Completion 49
5.39 Defects liability period 49
5.40 Defective work or materials 49
5.41 Landscape maintenance 50
5.42 Maintenance objectives 50
5.43 Scope of works 50
5.44 Maintenance reports 51
5.45 General maintenance operations 51
5.46 Horticultural maintenance operations 52
5.47 Planting areas 53
5.48 Maintenance period: herbicides and pesticides 54
5.49 Maintenance period: replanting operations 55
5.50 Operations and maintenance manual 55
5.51 Plant supply 55

TOC 2 of 5
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.52 Maintenance 57
6 HARD LANDSCAPE WORKS 58
6.1 Description 58
6.2 Specifications are to be read in conjunction with the whole document. 58
6.3 Materials not specified in this document 58
6.4 Related references & standards 58
6.5 Levels, ref. points and setting out 59
6.6 Related work 59
6.7 Quality assurance 59
6.8 Source 60
6.9 Mock-ups 60
6.10 Submittals 60
6.11 Delivery, handling and storage 60
6.12 Project conditions 60
6.13 Substrates 60
6.14 Extra material 60
6.15 Samples 60
6.16 Materials specified by client 61
6.17 Materials and quality 61
6.18 General 61
6.19 Concrete Paving 61
6.20 Pre-cast concrete pavers, edgings & kerbs. 62
6.21 Natural stone (including travertine, granite, slate, quartzites and sandstone) 64
6.22 Natural stone gravel 65
6.23 Soil separator/ Geotextile fabric 65
6.24 Drainage Cell & Composite 65
6.25 Execution and workmanship 65
6.26 Concrete unit paving 66
6.27 Pre-cast concrete slabs 68
6.28 Natural stone (including but not limited to, granite, slate and sandstone) 70
6.29 Natural stone gravel – laying 72
6.30 Hard landscape maintenance 73
7 IRRIGATION 74
7.1 General concept of the design 74
7.2 Irrigation system, general 75
7.3 Silence of specification 79
7.4 System explanations 79
7.5 Layout of work 80
7.6 Clean-up 80
7.7 Warranty 80
7.8 Product storage and handling 80
7.9 Operation and maintenance 80
7.10 Irrigation system, materials 81
7.11 Pipes and fittings 81
7.12 Valves 88
7.13 Valve boxes 91
7.14 Basket strainer 91
7.15 Pressure compensating emitters & dripper lines 91
7.16 Pressure compensating bubblers 93
7.17 Pop-up sprayers 93
7.18 Rotor pop up sprinklers 94
7.19 Filtration chamber (not applicable) 94
7.20 Filters (not applicable) 95
7.21 Pressure gauges (not applicable) 95
7.22 Underground warning tape 96
7.23 Electrical equipment (not applicable) 96
7.24 System controlling equipment (not applicable) 99
7.25 Exhaust fan (not applicable) 101
7.26 Valve chamber covers 101
7.27 Pump/filtration chamber (not applicable) 101
7.28 Chamber identification plate (not applicable) 101

TOC 3 of 5
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.29 Electrical control panel (not applicable) 102

7.30 Filtration chamber lighting (not applicable) 102
7.31 Ducting 102
7.32 Execution 102
7.33 Excavation and back-filling 102
7.34 PVC pipe installations 103
7.35 Drip line pipe 104
7.36 Valves 104
7.37 Irrigation equipment 104
7.38 Irrigation control equipment 104
7.39 Testing 105
7.40 Road crossings 105
7.41 Thrust blocks 106
7.42 Electrical codes 106
7.43 Electrical tests 106
7.44 Electrical installations (not applicable) 106
7.45 Control panel installations (not applicable) 107
7.46 Controller installations 107
7.47 Automatic irrigation system, commissioning 108
7.48 Flushing 108
7.49 Fieldwork 108
7.50 Irrigation control system 108
7.51 Operation and maintenance manual 108
7.52 As built drawings 109
7.53 Sweet soil filling, contouring and plantation 109
8 ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES 111
8.1 Balustrade 111
8.2 Railing 111
9 ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES - SHADE STRUCTURES 112
9.0 Shade structures 112
9.1 Shade structure Schedule - Canopy option 1 (WIP) 112
9.2 Shade structure schedule - Slats option 2 (WIP) 112
9.3 Shade structure schedule - Perforated sheet option 3 (WIP) 113

TOC 4 of 5
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL AND PRELIMINARIES

1.1 General

The Conditions of Contract, Bill of Quantities and the Drawings shall be read in conjunction with
the Specifications and matters referred to, shown or described in the former are not necessarily
repeated in the latter.

Notwithstanding the subdivision of the Specifications into various headings, every part is to be
deemed supplementary to every other part and the various parts are to be read with each other, so
far as it may be practicable to do so, or when the context so permits.

1.2 Standards, materials, goods and workmanship

In various places throughout this specification and the Bills of Quantities reference is made to the
Standards, Specifications and Bye-Laws issued by the British Standards Institution and other
similar organisations. These references shall in every case be deemed to include the latest edition
or issue of such Standards, Specifications and By Laws including all revisions, amendments and
addenda subsequently issued. Where materials are not specified to be to a particular British
Standard and a British Standard exists in respect of such materials, then the materials shall in all
respects comply with the relevant and current British Standard. In such cases where British
Standards do not exist, the materials used shall be of the best type available and shall generally
be to the Engineer's satisfaction. Reference to British Standards shall not preclude the use of
materials from sources where other standards apply, but no material shall be in any respect, inferior
to those which specifically complies with the relevant British Standard.

Wherever the specifications are stated, they shall comply with latest edition or as specified
therein with the priority of standards as follows:

- UAE and DM Standards

- International Standards such as ISO
- National Standards such as BSI and DIN

Materials, goods and workmanship shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds and, as far
as applicable, shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the quoted Standards, Codes
of Practice and Specifications or any other National Standard approved by the Engineer. Preambles
and descriptions of materials, goods and workmanship given in any one section of the
Specifications shall apply throughout the whole of these Specifications unless otherwise described.
The substitution of materials, goods, workmanship and the like from that specified shall only be
permitted with the written approval of the Engineer.

Where the quality of materials is not specified or supplier/manufacturer is not named, the quality
shall be the best obtainable and the workmanship shall be of the highest possible standard to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer a list of names and addresses of the
manufacturers and trade-marks or names of all the various types of materials and goods he
proposes to use in the Works. This list shall include reference to the Specifications Clause or Article
to which the materials and goods apply.

All materials used in the Works shall be new and of the appropriate quality all to the Engineer's
approval.

Materials shall be obtained from approved sources and used in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions. In the absence of a specification all materials shall comply with a relevant
standard. The Engineer shall order the removal of any materials which he has not approved.

Page 1 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

No orders for materials and goods shall be placed until approval has been obtained for the materials
and goods from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall note that it is his responsibility to include in his price for the cost of the materials
and products as specified and no adjustment will be allowed should the alternatives be rejected by
the Engineer. Where material is to be imported, the Contractor shall produce documentary
evidence that the materials have been ordered within 8 weeks after the contract has been signed
provided that such imported materials are not needed during the 8 weeks period. Copies of such
orders shall be submitted to the Engineer. Unless such proof has been produced, no claim shall be
considered for extension of time due to non-availability of the materials and it shall be assumed
that all materials necessary for the completion of the works were readily available for purchase
locally.

1.3 Approved trade names / manufacturer/ suppliers

In these documents, Trade names or manufacturer's/supplier's names have been provided to

identify materials, equipment and products of an acceptable standard, fabrication and finish.

During the Contract the Contractor shall provide one of the named products and only in exceptional
circumstances where the named products are not available, the Contractor may offer alternatives
from other manufacturers or suppliers. The Contractor shall submit details as required to
substantiate the equivalence of these alternatives. The burden of proof as to the equivalence of the
alternatives to the materials/products specified shall remain with the Contractor.

All products/materials shall have approved National Certificates of conformance similar to BSI
quality Kite Mark or National Agreement Certificate such as BBA for non-standard products and
systems supplied for approval by the Engineer

1.4 Samples & testing of materials

The Contractor shall furnish for approval within six weeks of commencing the works, all samples
as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall check and approve such samples with reasonable
promptness only for conformance with the design concept of the Works and for compliance with
the information given in Contract Documents. The work shall be in accordance with the approved
samples.

1 All samples of hard and soft landscape materials including but not limited to; paving,
cladding, timber, aggregates, mosaics, glass, street furniture and control samples of all
specified plant material shall be delivered to the Engineer's office with all charges in
connection therewith paid by the Contractor and deemed to be included in the Contract price.

2 Where identified in the specifications or as directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall
provide mock up samples of areas of paving, cladding, changes in levels, walls, steps,
ramps, water features etc either in isolation or in conjunction with adjacent items, for
example with street furniture, for the approval of the Engineer. Approved mock up areas
shall be retained either as control samples for work continuation and/or to demonstrate to
the Engineer a clear understanding of the requirements of the specification or to identify
areas requiring further clarification.

3 Duplicate final approved samples, in addition to any required for the Contractor's use, shall
be furnished to the Engineer, one for office use and one for the Site.

4 Samples shall be furnished so as not to delay fabrication, allowing the Engineer reasonable
time for consideration of sample submitted.

5 Each sample shall be properly labelled with the name and quality of the material,
manufacturer's name, country of origin, name of the project, the Contractor's name and date
of submission, and the specification article number to which the sample refers.

6 If required by the Engineer, the samples shall be tested for compliance at the Contractor's
expense in an independent laboratory designated by the Engineer.

Page 2 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7 Testing of materials and completed works shall be carried out in accordance with DM
Administrative Decision No. 16/2000

8 Monthly Progress Report as well as Final Materials Report both containing the prescribed
summary of minimum testing frequency shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

1.5 Manufacturer’s instructions

All items or materials shall be delivered to the Site in the manufacturer's original unopened
containers with the manufacturer's brand and name clearly marked thereon.

All items or materials shall be assembled, mixed, fixed, applied, or otherwise incorporated in the
Works in accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer of the items or materials
unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Engineer.

1.6 Ordering materials

The Bills of Quantities shall not be used as a basis for ordering materials and the Contractor is
entirely responsible for assessing the quantities of materials to be ordered. Upon receipt of the
Engineer's order to commence the Works, the Contractor shall immediately place orders for all
required materials and will be held responsible for any delays occurring due to the late placing of
such orders. Prior to finalising material orders, the Contractor shall advise the Employer and await
the Employer's written approval to complete the same.

The Contractor shall pay all expenses, taxes and dues etc. incurred on the procurement of materials
from aboard.

1.7 Scaffolding

The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, dismantle, and clear away at completion proper and
adequate scaffolding including that required for Sub-Contractor and Suppliers. Putlog holes shall
be made good to match the adjacent surface as the scaffolding is dismantled. The Contractor shall
be entirely responsible for all safety precautions in connection with the scaffolding including the
provision of all bracing, scaffold boards, toe boards and the like and for its entire sufficiency for the
work.

If in the Engineer's opinion scaffolding is considered dangerous then the Contractor shall rectify the
same at his own expense. All work utilising scaffold shall be halted until the scaffold is corrected all
to the Engineer's written approval.

1.8 Cutting and Patching

The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching and making good required for all
trades for all work and his prices will be deemed to include for all such cutting and patching and
making good.

1.9 Protection of the works

The Contractor shall cover up and protect the Works from the weather and from damage by his
own or other workmen performing subsequent operations. He shall provide all necessary dust
sheets, barriers and guard rails and clear away same at completion.

The Contractor shall take all reasonable and proper steps for the protection of all places on or about
the Works which may be dangerous to his workmen or any other persons or to traffic. The
Contractor shall provide and maintain warning signs, red warning lamps and barricades as
necessary in all such places. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of structure to be
loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety.

Page 3 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

1.10 Site Hoarding

The Contractor shall provide a site hoarding at the boundary of the Site as shown on Drawing MP-
03 where required by the Municipality By Laws and to the entire satisfaction of the Municipality and
the Engineer. The Contractor shall allow for applying murals / graphics to 20% of the hoarding
length. All murals and graphics to be to Engineer’s approval. The Site hoarding shall be maintained
during the progress of the Works and shall be dismantled and cleared away upon completion.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the security of the Site, for protecting same from
trespass and providing all necessary watching and lighting in connection therewith. All temporary
buildings and work areas shall be constructed within the Contract limit.

1.11 Water for the works

The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provide all water for the proper
execution of the Works, together with all transport, temporary plumbing, storage and distribution,
pay all charges and alter, adapt and maintain temporary work as necessary and remove and make
good at completion. Extension of time shall not be granted due to failure of and dependence upon
a mains water supply.

1.12 Electricity for the works

The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provide all artificial lighting and power
(maintaining a generator if necessary) for the proper execution and security of the Works including
that required for Sub-Contractor's works and its protection, with all meters, temporary wiring and
fittings, pay all charges and alter adapt and maintain the temporary work as necessary and remove
and make good at completion. Extension of time shall not be granted due to failure of and
dependence upon a mains electricity supply.

1.13 Existing site services

The Contractor shall follow up and obtain all the required information relating to any existing site
services, telephone, electrical, water, irrigation and drainage and the like on the site before
commencing excavation or piling. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all
existing services within the site and shall make good at his expense any damage to existing
services resulting from his carrying out of the Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer and relevant
authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for giving notice to the relevant authority where
temporary or permanent re-routing or diverting of existing services is found to be necessary and
shall complete same at his own expense to the Engineer's and respective Authorities' approval.
Works in relation to locating, diverting, repairing or replacing existing services are to be inclusive
of making good the surrounding area and disposal of arisings to the approval of the engineer and
the relevant authority.

Where diversions of services as aforementioned are not required in connection with the permanent
Works, the Contractor shall uphold, maintain and keep same in working order in existing locations.

1.14 Pricing generally

The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the scope of the Work shown on the drawings and
described in these Contract Documents and his price shall be deemed to cover all his obligations
under the Contract and all matters and things necessary for the proper construction, completion
and maintenance of the Works. The price shall include for all material, labour and plant - whether
mechanical or non-mechanical - required for the completion of the Contract in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications, and removing at completion and making good any surfaces disturbed
and if not included in any prices inserted in the Preliminaries for the insurances and bonds required;
for the costs of preparing a tender; for the work in connection with measurements and the final
account; for profit; and for all other establishment charges and on costs of whatever nature. No
claim for additional payment will be allowed for any error or misunderstanding by the Contractor in
these respects.

Page 4 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

The Contractor has to allow in his pricing for all fees required to obtain the building permit and the
DEWA. approval for all electrical works based on shop drawings presented by him and approved
by the Engineer including obtaining the permanent electricity, water and other service connections
necessary for the completion of the Works and paying the respective fees. Refer to item 24 (iv) of
SICET 3.

1.15 Site facilities and facilities for engineer’s representatives/ temporary services

Locations: Inform Resident Engineer of the intended siting of all spoil heaps, temporary works and
services.

Maintain, alter, adapt and move temporary works and services as necessary. Remove when no
longer required and make good.

1.15.1 Resident Engineers facilities: (2 nos. 1 for RE, 1 for Client)

- Lockable office suite 20 sq. m

Equipment for each office:

• Office desk with six lockable drawers and swivel chair.
• Meeting room table to an approved design and 10 no upright chairs
• Upright plan chest
• Shelf unit
• Computer to an approved standard
- Windows 10 or 8, 2 or more gigahertz processor, 2 GB (64-bit) RAM minimum, ample
hard disk space, graphics card: Microsoft DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM driver,
17’ Monitor with modem for Internet connection and A3 size laser printer (HP LaserJet).
- Pre-loaded licensed software, Windows 8 or 10 MS Office Package, MS Project,
AutoCAD 2017
• Telephone with outside line to UAE locations
• Lighting Min 350 lux.
• no. 13 amp power points to office suite and meeting room
• AC units to each room of appropriate type.
• Pin up board to one wall.

1.15.2 Landscape Architect / Architect / Service Engineer (2 Nos. Office)

- Lockable office suite 15 sq.m

Equipment for each office:

• Office desk to approved pattern with swivel chair
• Drawing board, stand, and accessories
• Upright plan chest.
• Pin up board to one wall.
• Shelf unit
• Telephone with outside line to UAE locations
• Lighting Min. 350 Lux.
• 2 No. 13 amp power points
• AC unit to approved pattern and capacity
• Computer to an approved standard
- Windows 10 or 8, 2 or more gigahertz processor, 2 GB (64-bit) RAM minimum, ample
hard disk space, graphics card: Microsoft DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM driver,
17’ Monitor with modem for Internet connection and A3 size laser printer (HP LaserJet).
- Pre-loaded licensed software, Windows 8 or 10 MS Office Package, MS Project,
AutoCAD 2018 etc.
• HP Design Jet Full Colour Plotter (1 No.)
• Full time draughtsman with experience with CAD software & relevant applications.

Page 5 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

1.15.3 Office for Landscape Inspectors

- Lockable office suite 20 sqm

Equipment for each office:

• 3 no. office desks with 3 no. swivel chairs to approved pattern
• Upright plan chest.
• Pin up boards to two walls.
• 2 no. shelf units
• 2 no. telephones
• Lighting Min. 350 lux.
• 4 no. 13 amp power points
• 2 no. AC units to approved pattern and capacity

1.15.4 Office for building / material inspectors

- Lockable office suite 15 sqm

Equipment for each office:

• 2 no. office desks with 2 no. swivel chairs to approved pattern
• Upright plan chest.
• Pin up boards to one walls.
• 2 no. shelf units
• telephone
• Lighting Min. 350 lux.
• 4 no. 13 amp power points
• 2 no. AC units to approved pattern and capacity
• 1 x computer to an approved standard with internet connection

1.15.5 Meeting room

- Meeting table for 12 people with upholstered chairs

1.15.6 Secretary & Filing Clerk

- Lockable office and file store of 20 sqm

Equipment for office:

• Large desk with computer chair plus desk and chair for Filing Clerk.
• Windows 10 or 8, 2 or more gigahertz processor, 2 GB (64-bit) RAM minimum, ample hard
disk space, graphics card: Microsoft DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM driver, 17’
Monitor with modem for Internet connection.
• Pre-loaded licensed software, Windows 8 or 10 MS Office Package
• File storage units of appropriate sizes
• Shelf units
• Pin-up boards
• Telephone with outside line to UAE locations
• Copier of approved quality
• Lighting Min. 350 Lux.
• 3 no. 13 amp power points
• Two AC units of appropriate pattern

1.15.7 Kitchenettes (1 no. required)

- Small room of 5 sq. m

Equipment for room

• SS double sink and drainer
• Water Cooler

Page 6 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

• Large Fridge to approved pattern

• Electric kettle
• Electric Toaster
• Hot Plate
• Fixed storage units and drawers
• All appropriate and approved crockery and kitchen utensils
• Provision of a hot water supply
• Electric fan
• Lighting

1.15.8 Toilets

- Small area of 7 sq. m x 2

Equipment for room

• One WC pan with low level cistern and cubicle enclosure
• One urinal bowl
• One small WHB to approved pattern
• Liquid soap dispenser, towel rail, toilet roll and small shelf
• 900x600mm mirror
• Exhaust fan.
• Lighting

Provide for 10 shaded car parks for exclusive use by the Consultant’s representative.

1.16 Maintenance of offices

The Contractor shall, for the duration of the Contract, supply sufficient stationary attendance to the
Engineer and shall maintain and pay all water, electricity and telephone charges associated with
the running of the Contract and shall keep the site offices and their surroundings, together with the
furniture, fittings and equipment, in a clean condition and in good repair at all times.

1.17 Delivery, handling and storage of materials

All materials or manufactured items that are liable to damage shall be delivered in the original
package, containers, etc., bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand.

Materials or manufactured items shall be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded and protected
from damage and exposure to weather or dampness during transit and after delivery to the Site.
Once on site, materials (hard or soft landscape), shall be stored in an appropriate manner, relative
to the individual requirements of the specified item and to the approval of the Engineer. Damaged
material or manufactured items shall not be used in the Work. Any material or manufactured items
damaged during and after fixing in position shall be removed, repaired or replaced by and at the
Contractor's expense as required by the Engineer.

1.18 Control and test equipment to be provided by contractor

During the Contract, the Contractor shall provide, maintain and clear away on completion the
following listed items of control and test equipment. All items shall be to the Engineer's approval.
The items listed hereunder are indicative and not limited to the items that the Engineer may request
during the Contract.

1 Three sets of six number, 150mm cast iron or steel concrete cube moulds.
2 Slump Apparatus
3 Metric weighing scales.
4 Water tank with thermo-statically controlled heating and cooling for curing concrete test
cubes.
5 Concrete thermometer and replacements.
6 Further the Contractor shall arrange for an independent laboratory approved by
Consultant to do all testing required as per specification.

Page 7 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

1.19 Site offices for contractor

The contractor shall provide maintain and clear away on completion of the Contract all necessary
site offices, canteens, messing, temporary buildings, toilets and the like for all site staff employed
by the Contractor and required by subcontractors and suppliers. The offices shall be open at all
normal working hours to receive instructions, notices and other communications.

The contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer of the proposed site layout, type and
drainage arrangement of all the buildings prior to erection of same. All buildings shall be supplied
and maintained in good condition and of neat appearance, all maintenance to same as instructed
by the Engineer shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense.

Under no circumstances shall overnight accommodation be permitted on Site except for the site
watchman in carrying out his duties.

1.20 Contractor's site area

Throughout the period of the Contract the Contractor shall maintain the area of his operation within
the limits of the Site in a clean, tidy and safe condition by arranging materials and the like in an
orderly manner. All rubbish, debris, waste materials and the like shall be systematically cleared
from the Site as it accumulates.

The Contractor shall take all steps necessary as directed by the Engineer to minimise or eliminate
dust, noise or any other nuisance which may occur. Plant emitting dust, smoke, excessive noise or
other nuisance shall not be permitted.

The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the means of access to the Site and other relative items
affecting same for both himself, his Sub-Contractors and Suppliers.

1.21 Site progress meetings

During the course of the Works, Site progress meetings shall be held at fortnightly intervals for the
purpose of co-ordinating the Contractor's works and to ensure that full compliance is maintained.
Minutes of such Site meetings will be recorded, copies will be distributed to all persons concerned
and full effect shall be given to all instructions contained therein.

Prior to such meetings the Contractor shall give to the Engineer's Representative details in writing
of that portion of the Works he proposes to construct during the coming two weeks with details of
the plant and method he proposes to employ. These proposals shall be discussed at the meeting
and no work based on such proposals shall proceed without the approval of the Engineer's
Representative.

The Contractor shall submit all reports as instructed by the Engineer in connection with Site
progress meetings and the day to day management of the Works.

1.22 Progress photographs

The Contractor shall supply once a month, at the time of submitting his Valuation, thirty six
photographs from 108 exposures showing the progress of the Works. The times and position from
which the photograph are to be taken shall be directed by the Engineer.

The photographs shall be submitted in three copies unmounted of a size not less than 15 x 10
centimeters with the description of the viewpoint stamped in ink on the back. The negative shall
have the date on same and remain the property of the Engineer and no prints from these negatives
may be supplied to others unless previously authorised in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall include for six photographs per month to a size of 25 x 20 cm as directed by the Engineer.

Page 8 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

1.23 Setting out

The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the Works to the specified positions,
dimension, levels and Building Lines and also checking the site surveys for dimensional and level
accuracy and reporting any discrepancies before building work commences.

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all facilities, equipment and labour to enable him to
check the setting out and levels of the Works at all times. The checking of any setting out point,
line or level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.

All setting out points, benchmarks, site rails, pegs and other survey points shall be clearly marked
and protected from damage or disturbance during the execution of the Works.

1.24 Notice boards

The contractor shall provide and maintain two number notice / sign board each shall conform to the
requirements and design guidance of authorities and client Marketing Department.

The boards shall consist of graphic or photographic representations of the project and shall be
lettered in both Arabic and English by skilled sign-writer to include:

- The Project name and images as required

- The Owner’s name and corporate logo
- Consultant’s name, address and corporate logo
- The Contractor’s name, address and corporate logo

A large-scale layout shall be prepared and submitted for the Clients Marketing Departments and
Engineer’s approval prior to fabrication. No advertising material other than that expressly required
by the client shall be permitted anywhere on the site. The siting and layout of Sub-Contractors or
Manufacturer’s sign boards, if allowed, must be submitted for the Clients and Engineer’s approval.

On completion of the works the name boards shall be submitted to the consultant.

1.25 Defective work

Any defective work materials and also deviations from the working details in respect of setting out,
correct lines and levels, verticality, sizes, thicknesses of members and/or any other dimensional
variation of any kind whatsoever, shall be removed and reconstructed or otherwise rectified without
undue delay to the approval of the Engineer and the Contractor shall be responsible for all
additional costs incurred.

1.26 Erection equipment or other plant

If cranes or any other type of plant which places any load on the structure are proposed, all details
of such plant shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before the work is actually
commenced. If approved by the Engineer and architecturally acceptable, permission may be given
for the structure to be strengthened, in order to carry out loads, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for any resulting additional costs.

The Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Engineer any damage
to the permanent structure which may be caused by his plant and equipment.

1.27 Loading in excess of design load

No loading in excess of the design loading shall be placed on any portion of the structure without
the written permission of the Engineer.

If such permission is granted, all beams or other members of the structure which are subjected to
loading other than the designed loading shall be strengthened and supported to the satisfaction of
the Engineer, and the Contractor shall be responsible for any resulting additional costs. The

Page 9 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Engineer any damage to
the permanent structure which may be caused by such excess loading.

1.28 Building permit & NOC

The Contractor shall allow for obtaining the building permit and relevant NOC and allow for paying
all fees in connection therewith.

1.29 Permanent irrigation, drainage, water and electricity connections

The Contractor shall allow for arranging and obtaining the permanent irrigation, drainage, water
and electricity connections to the proposed development and he shall be responsible for making all
payments in connection therewith. Refer to clause 24 (iv) of SICET 3 and page 1/5 of this document.

1.30 Handing over

Prior to handing over the proposed development the Contractor shall gain the approvals and
respective Completion Certificates from all the local government departments, authorities and the
like that the work has been completed in accordance with their requirements. Any payments in
connection therewith shall be paid by the Contractor.

1.31 Safety regulations

The Contractor and all persons employed by him on the site in or about the execution of the Works
shall conform in all respects with the provisions of all Acts and Orders and Regulations made by
any competent authority that shall be applicable to the Works or any temporary works and binding
upon the Contractor or persons employed as aforesaid and in particular, but without prejudice to
the generality of the foregoing, much matters as concern the safety, health or welfare of persons
working on the Site. The Engineer may require the immediate removal from the works of any person
who, in the opinion of the Engineer, fails properly to observe the provision of this Clause and such
personnel shall not be again employed upon the works without the permission of the Engineer. The
provisions of this Clause shall apply to and be binding upon any Sub-Contractor employed by the
Contractor.

1.32 Accidents

The Contractor shall promptly report by telephone and in writing to the Engineer and concerned
Authorities any accident whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the performance of the
work whether on or adjacent to the Site which caused death, personal injury or property damage,
giving full details and statements of witnesses.

If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor on account of any
accident, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Engineer giving full details
of the claim.

1.33 Mobilisation period - contractor's work

The Contractor shall submit the following items for approval and perform the work described below
during the mobilisation period. Permission to commence permanent works will not be given until
the following is completed. The items listed are intended to be the minimum required. The Engineer
may instruct the Contractor to carry out additional work within the mobilisation period.

1.33.1 Submission for Approval

1 Performance bond bank guarantee

2 Insurances
3 Programme of Works
4 Plan of Contractors temporary works
5 List of materials for the works
6 List of sub-contractors

Page 10 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7 No objection certificates from Etisalat, Water Department, Electricity Company, Drainage

Department and other service authorities as required.
8 Testing of aggregates, sand, cement, steel reinforcement and blocks.
9 Concrete mix design after approval of material tests.
10 Material ordering schedule giving date of ordering and expected time of arrival
11 Cash flow chart of curve
12 Soil Investigations
▪ borehole inspection for water table level
▪ standard penetration test
▪ any other tests or analysis which may be required.
13 TPD approval for related drawings

1.33.2 Works to be performed

1 Clear the site of rubbish and superficial obstructions.

2 Erect temporary site hoarding and security gate as required by Municipality By-laws
3 Erect temporary offices, workshops, stores etc.
4 Provide temporary water, electricity and telephone
5 Erect sign board
6 Bring to the site sufficient materials to immediately commence the works.
7 Bring to the site plant and equipment for the permanent works.
8 Acquisition of relative permits, NOC’s and approvals.

The above submission and works to be performed shall first be approved by the Engineer.

Page 11 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

2 METALWORK AND GLAZING

2.1 General

The Contractor is required to employ approved specialists to supply, or supply and erect all
metalwork items. Working drawings are to be prepared and issued to the Engineer in quadruplicate
for approval in good time to afford no delay to the project and in no case less than eight weeks
before work needs to be put in hand. No work at site or fabrication in factory shall commence prior
to any approval by the Engineer.

2.2 Standards

Materials used in this Section shall comply with British Standards, the British Codes of Practice,
DIN Standards, American Standards and American Society for Testing and Materials, or Local
Authority Standards and Codes whichever are the more stringent.

Applicable provision of the following British Standards shall apply to these works as follows:‑

1 Mild Steel shall comply with BS 4360, sections generally shall comply with BS 4: Part 1, hollow
sections with BS 4848: Part 2 and angles with BS 4848: Part 4. Steel plate and sheet shall
comply with BS 1449: Part 1 and steel tubes to BS 1775.
2 Stainless Steel Tubes shall comply with BS 3014, and stainless steel plate with BS 1449: Part
2.
3 Aluminum alloy extruded sections shall comply with BS 1161 or BS 1474 and aluminium alloy
drawn tube with BS 1471. Anodising process when applicable to comply with BS 3987.
4 Brass work as indicated on the drawings shall comply with the various appropriate Standards.
5 Fastenings unless otherwise specified shall be of the same metal as the item being fixed, with
matching coating or finish. Wood screws shall comply with BS 1210. Bolts, Screws and nuts to
BS 4190, machine screws and nuts to BS 4138 and self‑tapping screws to BS 4174.
6 Plugs shall be proprietary fibre plastics or other approved type.
7 Bitumen solution for cold application shall comply with BS 3416, Type 1.

2.3 Finished coating

2.3.1 General

The finished coating shall be as stated on the Drawings and applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

The colour of the coating shall be selected from available ranges if not stated elsewhere in these
Documents. The Contractor shall offer samples for approval prior to the final selection and the
manufacturer of these elements.

2.3.2 Anodised coating

The aluminium anodising shall comply with BS 3987 and be integral colour hardcoat anodising
550kp/mm² hardness, minimum 25 microns thick.

The colour of anodising shall be as described on the drawings. Samples of colour including limits
of colour variation shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval before work commences. The
Engineer reserves the right to reject the products of any supplier who cannot guarantee a
reasonable limit of colour variation, the acceptable limit of variation being at the Engineer's
discretion.

2.3.3 Polyester powder coating

All aluminium sections that are to receive a polyester powder coating shall be given a caustic etch
followed by an anode oxide treatment to obtain an architectural class 1 anodic coating. Anodization
should be not less than 20 micron thickness.

Page 12 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

All aluminium works shall be finished in coloured electrostatic polyester powder coating as per DIN
standard 53151, 53152, 53153, 53156 or equal and approved to RAL colour subject to the
Engineer's approval.

Powder coating of all mild steel elements shall be as per relevant the British Standard and to the
approval of the Engineer.

2.3.4 Epoxy paint coating

Unless otherwise stated mild steel shall be spray coated with Epoxy based paint to be factory
applied in two layers, primer coat 0.3 mils dry film thickness and finished colour coat minimum 1.0
mils dry film thickness, minimum overall thickness of 1.3 mils dry film thickness. Inside corners,
channels and the like shall be visually covered to the extent possible. The Engineer shall select the
colour from the range available.

The coating shall be applied to properly cleaned and pre‑treated galvanised steel sections.
Application shall be by approved applicators and the Contractor shall provide certified details of
same. The pretreatment and application of the coating shall conform to all ASTM, BS, DIN
Standards and the like as stated in the Supplier's printed Specifications.

2.3.5 Coating thickness

As and when instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide certificates from independent
laboratories that the minimum thickness as stated in these Documents has been applied to all
sections. Failure to provide such information shall result in the complete installation being rejected
and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

2.3.6 Dissimilar materials

All aluminium surfaces that are to be in contact with cured concrete, mortar, steel and other metals
shall have the contact surfaces protected wherever they may entrap moisture or corrosive
elements. Metals that are to be in contact with mortar or concrete shall be protected with a two coat
bituminous coating.

Prime paint steel parts of anchors, anchor inserts, reinforcement, supports, and all parts after field
welding or bolting with zinc chromate. Minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for zinc chromate.

2.4 Aluminium

2.4.1 General

All aluminium elements i.e. doors, windows, frames, transoms, mullions, etc, where shown on the
drawing shall be manufactured of extruded section of aluminium alloy to B.S. 1474. Heat treatable
free from defects type, 11.9. They shall be supplied by a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
Fittings shall be aluminium alloy in accordance with B.S. 1473.

All exposed surfaces shall be light etched and anodised in a satin or matt finish to the colour
indicated on the drawings. The thickness of anodising shall be guaranteed to be 20 microns (.020
mm) by the manufacturer and shall be polished to a mirror-like surface.

Aluminium coated materials shall not be permitted in lieu of the aluminium items specified herein.
Samples of the anodized finish must be offered for approval before proceeding.

All aluminium sections shall present clear, straight and shapely defined lines and shall be free from
defects and imperfections that may impair their strength.

Samples of aluminium shall include a corner joint and glazing gasket.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminium work until the completion of
the Works, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect condition will be accepted. All

Page 13 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

hardware, screws, bolts and other necessary accessories shall be of aluminium or other non-
corrodible material and shall match in colour and consistency the finish of the anodised aluminium.

Where aluminium is in contact with wood, the wood shall be treated with pentachlorophenol or
equal and approved, 5% minimum concentration, followed with the protective measures described
for aluminium in contact with wood or other absorptive materials.

The aluminium work shall be fabricated and anchored so that work will not be distorted nor the
fasteners overstressed from the expansion and contraction of the metal.

2.4.2 Protection

Before shipment from the factory, aluminium surfaces requiring protection shall be given a coating
which will protect the metal during construction. In areas where appearance of the finish on
aluminium items is important a coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied.

Apply two sprayed coats or water-white methacrylate lacquer having a total minimum thickness of
0.125 mm, which when applied to the aluminium surface shall be capable of withstanding the action
of lime mortar for a period of at least one week in an atmosphere of 100% relative humidity at 100
degree F and the action or 10% (by weight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 70 degree F
and the action of atmospheric weathering for a period of 12 months. Alternatively a thick adhesive
tape may be used. The coating or tape shall be applied in the manufacturers plant to the exposed
surfaces of all aluminium components subject to staining from alkaline mortar and plaster abrasion
and other construction abuses.

2.4.3 Workmanship

The Contractor shall furnish all aluminium units as indicated on the drawings.

Workmanship and installation shall be in accordance with recommended standards of First Class
Aluminium Manufacturers.
The Contractor shall furnish all labour materials and equipment to complete the aluminium work
indicated on the drawings or specified herein to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Work shall include all parts and accessories for all variations of fabrication techniques required for
a complete installation, caulking, priming and back coating and shop drawings.

All aluminium work shall be performed in a shop where grade of metal work is of recognised quality
acceptable to the Engineer. All items shall be installed plumb, straight, square, level and in proper
elevation, plane, location and alignment with other work. All work shall be fabricated for adjustment
to field variations, fitted with proper joints and intersections and adequately anchored in place.

All workmanship and finishes shall be first class, strictly in accordance with the best practice. All
work shall be complete in every detail. Finished work shall be approved by the Engineer before
the job will be accepted.

Where aluminium surfaces come into contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc, white
bronze or small areas of other metal compactable with aluminium, they shall be kept from direct
contact with such parts by painting the dissimilar metal with a primer, followed by one or two coats
of aluminium metal and masonry paint of other approved suitable protective coating, excluding
those containing lead pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall be placed between
aluminium and dissimilar metals. Steel anchors and connecting members shall be hot dip
galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication.

Aluminium in contact with wood or other absorptive materials which may become repeatedly wet
shall be painted with two coats of aluminium metal and masonry paint or a coat at heavy bodied
bituminous paint. Alternatively paint the wood or other absorptive material with two coats of
aluminium house paint and seal joints with a good caulking compound.

Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabrication compounds, moisture,
dirt accumulations and other foreign materials to ensure proper lacquer adhesion.

Page 14 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminium work as required by removing protective
tape and other coating, using mild soap or detergent and clear petroleum spirits. Acid, caustics
and abrasives shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove excess sealing compounds
care shall be taken to prevent damage to seal or staining or damage to adjacent work.

2.4.4 Aluminium windows and doors

General

All windows and doors are to be constructed by approved specialist suppliers of light, medium or
heavy section to suit location, local building regulations, and particular requirements noted on the
drawing as to weight and profile.

All frames should be made to fit the actual openings with a 5mm clearance all round. Discrepancies
in overall width or height exceeding 5mm will not be allowed and the frames will be rejected in such
cases. Any small discrepancies shall have the gaps suitably backed and then filled with gun‑applied
water repellent mastic sealant.

All nuts, bolts, washers and screws used for assembly and fixing shall be of adequate strength for
their purpose within the and shall be stainless steel grade 18/8.

All sealants used in the assembly of, and in the fixing of cladding and window framing, shall be
non‑setting to allow thermal movement without detriment to those joint sealants used for peripheral
caulking and shall be one part silicone sealant and shall conform to BS 4245. All spliced joints
between mullions will be sealed with an approved silicone product, compatible with other sealants
and packings used.

All ironmongery shall have the same finish as the frames and shall be approved by the Engineer.

At all opening windows and doors and where there are louvred screens and doors, a flyscreen shall
be provided to the approval of the Engineer, constructed following the principles and specifications
as described elsewhere in this specification.

Glazing sections shall be set in special heat resisting PVC and of channel type. Separate glazing
sections on each side of the glass will not be permitted.

The following table indicates the basic requirements for window construction. The weights of
framing make no allowance for beads, glazing bars, opening light framing, coupling mullions or
transoms.

Table 4.1 Basic requirements for window construction

Classification Min. weigh of Max. superficial Max. dimension Remarks

basic frame area of window either
Kg/m run way in m2 mm
Light 0.60 1 1500
Medium 1.50 5 2500
Medium 2.00 9 3000
Heavy 2.50 12 3500
Heavy 3.00 12 3500 with door

2.5 Storage and protection

All materials shall be stored in protected areas on site and shall be fully protected against the effects
of weather.

Page 15 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

All materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in a manner to prevent deformation
and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent rusting and the accumulation of
mud, dirt or other foreign matter on the metal work. All such damage and accumulation shall be
corrected prior to erection.

2.6 Materials

All materials shall be new stock, free from defects, impairing strength, durability or appearance and
of best commercial quality for each intended purpose.

Provide all anchors, bolts, sleeves, spigots and other parts required for securing each item of work
of this Section to the construction, including furnishing to concrete workers all required inserts and
sleeves for use in concrete and furnishing to masons of all anchors, bolts, and other items required
to be built‑in masonry.

All exposed fastenings shall be of the same material finish as the metal to which applied, unless
otherwise noted.

Welding rods shall conform to British Standards and the recommendations of the metal welding rod
manufacturer.

Bolts and nuts where used, shall be in accordance with B.S. 1400 or 1769. Bolts shall be of
sufficient length to show at least one full thread beyond the nut after tightening. Bolted joints subject
to vibration shall be securely locked.

Washers, where used, shall be in accordance with B.S.4320. The size of the holes shall not exceed
the bolt diameter by more than 2mm.

2.6.1 Cramps, wall tiles, anchors etc.

The cramps for fixing wood frames to walls shall be 200mm long 30mm wide and 3mm thick and
shall have one end bent and twice countersunk drilled for screwing to the frame and the other end
fishtailed for setting into walling.

All fixing cramps, wall tiles, anchors etc., shall be galvanised mild steel proprietary type such as
Pepcon International (Al Tayer), Harris and Edgar or equal and approved. The Contractor is
responsible for submitting suitable samples to Engineer for approval.

2.6.2 Galvanised steel channels and chequered plate

Where Site Electrical Rooms or Substations are required, the Contractor must allow for all
necessary galvanised steel channels and chequered plate as directed by the Engineer including
framing, supports, handrailing etc., as necessary.

2.7 Shop painting materials

Shop paint for un-galvanised ferrous surfaces shall be a high quality, lead free, rust‑inhibitive
primer, as approved by the Engineer.

Shop paint for galvanised metal shall be high quality, zinc rich, metal primer especially formulated
for use on galvanised metal, as approved by the Engineer.

Shop paint for aluminium shall be Dichromate based primer.

2.8 Shop coatings for ferrous and galvanised surfaces

2.8.1 Galvanising

- All ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use in addition to any other interior items
specifically so specified, shall be of hot dip galvanized, including all bolts,

Page 16 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

- Hot‑dip galvanising process shall comply with BS 729 as applicable. After galvanising,
processed items shall be straightened free of all warpage and distortion caused by the hot dip
process.
- Galvanised surfaces to receive paint coatings shall be given hot phosphate (bonderizing) shop
pretreatment.
- Furnish to the Engineer, a certified statement that galvanising and hot‑phosphate pre-
treatments comply fully with this Specification.

2.8.2 Shop painting

- All materials (plain and galvanised) (including non‑ferrous where specified for paint finish) under
this Section shall be given a shop coat of primer as specified, using the appropriate primers
specified previously in this Section.
- Immediately before painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter and
other foreign material with wire brushes or steel scrappers. Remove all grease and oil by use
of detergent or solvent as recommended by the manufacturer of the proposed painting system.
- Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to dry
film thickness recommended. Apply thoroughly and evenly and work well into corners and joints
taking care to avoid sags and runs.
- Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete, or to be welded in the field.
- After erection, sand smooth and retouch all portions of the shop coats chipped or damaged
during erection, and coat all field welds and connections with the same paint used for all the
shop coat.
- All aluminium surfaces in contact with cement or concrete surfaces are to be given two coats of
bitumen based paint before being fitted.

2.9 Workmanships

- Co‑ordinate and provide details of the work as necessary to ensure co‑ordination with related
building elements and services. Liaise as necessary to ensure co‑ordination of the work with
related building elements and services, provide fabrication/installation drawings and other
information requested, submit sufficient copies of drawings, etc., for approval. Make any
necessary amendments in accordance with any comments of the Engineer and without delay
and re‑submit unless it is confirmed that this is not necessary and submit sufficient copies of
final version of drawings, etc., for distribution to all parties.
- Take site dimensions and submit Drawings as detailed elsewhere in these documents, showing
elevations, plans and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed methods of
forming joints, any proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.
- Prepare control samples as requested and obtain Engineer's written approval of appearance
before proceeding with manufacture.
- Fabricate metalwork carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with and performance
requirements, using types and grades of metal appropriate for the purpose. Finished work must
be free from distoration and cracks. Use proprietary products to manufacturer's
recommendations.
- Pre‑finished metal may be used if the finish complies with this specification, the methods of
fabrication do not damage or alter appearance at finish and the finish is adequately protected
during fabrication.
- Cold formed work, use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profiles with straight
arrises. Unless specified otherwise, mitre junctions of identical sections. Remove all burrs and
sharp arrises which would be visible after fixing or a hazard to the user. After thermal cutting
stainless steel grind off material which is liable to corrode.
- When assembled all moving parts must move freely and without binding.
- Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mechanically or
chemically and form bond under pressure. Use adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
- Mechanical joints shall be tight with no visible gaps. Where screw heads will be visible after
component is fixed, or raised screw heads would interfere with any moving part of component,
use countersunk machine screws unless specified otherwise. Mechanical joints of components

Page 17 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

which will be located externally shall be bedded in bedding compound, including all mating
surfaces, cleats and other fixings.
- Thoroughly clean surfaces to be welded and ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where
practicable. Use tack welds only for temporary attachment unless specified otherwise. Make
joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or
cracks. Completely remove all traces of flux residue and slag. Prevent weld spatter falling on
surfaces of materials which will be self-finished and visible in completed work. Butt welds which
will be visible in completed work shall be finished smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.
- Metal arc welding shall be to BS 5135 or other methods subject to approval. Welding of stainless
steel shall be TIG welding to BS 3019: Part 2, or other methods subject to approval. Use double
bevel butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any other measures
necessary to minimise distortion.
- Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to damage surface finish. Welding
of aluminium alloys shall be TIG welding to BS 3019: Part I, or MIG welding to BS 3571: Part I,
or gas welding to BS 1126, or other methods subject to approval. Welding of copper alloys shall
be fusion welding to BS 1077 for copper, or other methods subject to approval.
- Apply metal coatings after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have been drilled, unless
otherwise, specified. Before applying coating remove all welding slag, weld spatter, anti‑spatter
compounds, paints, grease, flux, rust, burrs, and sharp arrises and make good all defects which
would show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.
- Galvanising shall comply with BS 729, sherardising to BS 4921, zinc spraying of iron and steel
surfaces shall comply with BS 2569: Part I and Vitreous enamelling of steel surfaces with BS
3830. Surfaces of stainless steel, bronze and brass which will be visible in the completed work
shall be finely polished.
- All sections shall be protected to prevent distortion of metalwork during transit, handling, storage
and fixing and damage to arrises, projecting features and surfaces which will be exposed in the
finished work. Prevent contact with mud, ashes, plaster and cement and provide protective
coverings as necessary and remove on completion.
- Position metalwork accurately, plumb, level and true to line. Fix securely to prevent pulling
away, deflection, or other movement during use. Do not distort when tightening fastenings and
the like.
- Do not use railings or balustrades as strutting or supports after fixing for other works. Do not
weld, braze or solder on site without approval.
- Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness or metal and details of assembly
and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed
to exclude water. Do all cutting, punching, drilling and tapping required for attachment of
hardware and of work by other trades.
- Generally metalwork shall conform to all Local Authority By‑Laws, and, in lieu of other specific
legal requirements, shall support any live loads which may normally be imposed plus a safety
factor of 2.5.

2.10 Installation

- All work shall be installed adjusted by experienced workmen all in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions and in full conformity with the approved shop drawings,
samples and other submitted data. Under no circumstances shall materials be installed on
surfaces that contain condensation, dirt, grease or other foreign encountered materials that
would hinder or prevent proper installation and functioning for the use intended.
- All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled with proper and approved provision for
contraction and expansion and set in correct locations as per approved detailed shop drawings,
all level, square, plumb and aligned with other work. All joints between framing and structural
building shall be sealed in order to be watertight and weatherproof and to satisfy all other
requirements of the Engineer.
- Frames shall be site verified and manufactured with a maximum 2.5mm tolerance around the
opening in the structure. These joints are to be finished by applying an approved sealant into a
polystyrene foam backing strip.
- All works are to be fully protected for the duration of the contract from damage by other trades.
The Engineer shall approve the method of protection.

Page 18 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

- If for any reason final finishes become scratched, abraded or damaged during transport,
delivery, storage or erection, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove or repair those
defective areas or components as directed and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
- Repair work shall be identical to the manufacturer's applied finish with regard to gloss, finish
and visual appearance. Field touch up of painted metalwork is permitted only with the written
permission of the Engineer. Where touch up is not an authorised means of repair the damaged
materials must be replaced by new.
- Upon completion of work all protective coverings from all exposed surfaces shall be removed.
All surfaces shall be cleaned using soap or detergents as recommended by the aluminium
manufacturers to remove sealants, discolouration and any other foreign material. Defection of
any type determined by the Engineer shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
- Extreme care shall be taken when cleaning the exterior portion to protect all other adjacent
works.

2.11 Samples

Submit duplicate samples of all finished materials for approval by Engineer. The samples will show
the full range of finishes and mechanical properties to be expected in the finished product. Where
physical samples would otherwise be too large, examples will be given that can be readily inspected
locally, or the Contractor will provide facilities for the Engineer's inspection at the Contractor's
expense.

Unless specifically called for, size and form of each sample shall be as directed by the Engineer.

2.12 Sealing joints

The Contractor shall ensure that joints are dry and remove all loose material, dust and grease.

Joints shall be prepared in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations using

recommended solvents and primers where necessary.

Adjoining surfaces which would be impossible to clean if smeared with sealant shall be masked.

Backing strips shall be inserted in all joints to be pointed with sealant. When using backing strips,
the Contractor shall not leave gaps and shall not reduce depth of joint for sealant to less than the
minimum recommended by the manufacturer.

Cavities shall be filled and jointed with sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

Sealant shall be tooled to form a smooth flat bead. Excess sealant shall be removed from adjoining
surfaces using cleaning materials recommended by the sealant manufacturer, and shall be left
clean.

2.13 Glazing

All glazing work shall be installed by skilled workmen experienced in this work in accordance with
BS 6262.

The Contractor shall fix all glass with the required gaskets, clips, beads, etc.

All glass shall be of the type, shape and size indicated on the drawings and/or specification
hereunder. All types of glass shall be free waves, bubbles, and other defects. All glass panels shall
have rounded edges to prevent any damage to gaskets.

The Contractor shall produce on request all invoices or advice notes from suppliers to confirm that
the glass is of the standard specified.

Any scratched, broken or otherwise defective glass is to be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at his cost during or on completion of the Works.

Page 19 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

2.14 Glazing materials

2.14.1 General

The Contractor shall submit representative samples of all glass he proposes to install in the Works.
On receipt of the Engineer's approval of same the Contractor shall commence the procurement of
the glass.

All glass shall comply with the Specification given below and shall be delivered to the site in cut
sizes and in packages marked as to the quality of the content.

2.14.2 Mirrors

Mirrors shall be of uniform thickness, free from waviness, air bubbles and the like. Representative
samples of mirror shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. The mirror glass shall be clear
and silvered by nitrate precipitation, protected by copper plating with a protective plastic coating on
the reverse side. The mirrors shall be 6 mm thick and cut to sizes as shown with ground and
polished edges. The mirrors shall be set on 20 mm thick plywood backing plugged and screwed to
wall.

2.15 Glass openings

The glass framing shall both structurally support and adequately cushion the glass. To prevent
mechanical and thermal stresses on the glass, the framing system shall provide openings that are
within the tolerances for squareness, corner offset and bow.

These tolerances are listed below.

- Squareness ‑ 3mm difference in lengths of the diagonals.
- Corner Offsets ‑ 0.8mm maximum offsets at corners.
- Bow ‑ 1.6mm bow in a 1.22m length of frame

If the variations from these tolerances are anticipated, details of same shall be advised to the
Engineer. If site conditions are found to be outside these tolerances corrections must be made
before the openings are glazed.

2.16 Glass installation

Workmanship shall generally be in accordance with CP 152 and respective British Standards.

The glass is to be delivered to the site with adequate protection to prevent damage and where
possible it is to be fixed in position immediately after delivery. When fixed the Contractor is to take
all necessary precautions to prevent damage during succeeding building operations and will be
entirely responsible for the replacement of any broken or damaged glass at his own cost.

The Contractor is to be solely responsible for determining the exact sizes of glass required,
including a tolerance of 2mm to each edge and he is recommended to check the necessary
dimensions on site.

No glazing is to be carried out until rebates have been painted with primer. Glazing beads as
applicable are also to be primed before fixing.

All mastic is to be neatly struck off to agree exactly with site lines inside and out.

Rates are to include for all necessary Spriggs, clips, setting blocks, location blocks and distance
pieces and for taking off and later re‑fixing loose beads.

Glass apertures in timber doors are to be bedded in chamois leather glazing strip, black ribbon
velvet or P.V.C. glazing strip to the approval of the Engineer.

Page 20 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

2.17 Cleaning

All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished on both sides and all paint spots and the like
completely removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.18 Expansion joint trims, etc.

The Contractor is to provide, at all expansion joints in floors, roofs, ceilings, walls and columns,
appropriate extruded aluminium expansion joint cover system as appropriate and as shown on the
drawings and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions including all
necessary components and fixings.

Floor, wall, roof and ceiling joint covers shall be approved joint seals 50 mm deep. Butt joints within
continuing runs shall be a maximum of 6 m apart and will be sealed during installation using patent
butt joint sealing method and be finished standard grey.

Transition pieces at changes of direction and at joints between horizontal and vertical joint covers
shall be factory fabricated.

Page 21 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

3 PAINTING AND DECORATING

GENERAL

The painting materials shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer (but priority shall be given
to local manufacturers when complying with the required specification) and shall be supplied ready
mixed in the manufacturer's sealed and branded containers. Each container shall bear the maker's
brand name, identification of contents and directions for its proper use. All material must be
thoroughly stirred before use.

All sealers, primers, undercoats and thinners shall be the products recommended by the
manufacturers of paint used for the finishing coat.

Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings colours shall be selected by the Architect.

The term "Paint" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, lacquers, sealer and other coating
or inorganic finish, whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats.

The Contractor shall protect all painting and decorating work and shall provide adequate dust
sheets, canvases, etc., in order to protect adjacent work.

All painting and decorating shall be applied by skilled workmen experienced in this work.

The Contractor shall repaint at his own expense any work where the paint is found to be incorrectly
applied.

Brushes, pails, kettles, etc. used in carrying out the work shall be clean and free from foreign matter.
They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of materials.

The Contractor is to submit to the Engineer for approval the brand and quality of the paints he
proposes to use. If approval is given to a brand of paint the contractor shall use the primers
undercoat, etc., manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of that brand and
notwithstanding anything herein contained shall prepare the surface and carry out the work in
accordance with the manufactures specification to give the best finish required on the surface to
be painted.

All paints to be used under this Contract shall be delivered to and stored on the Site in sealed
labeled containers a minimum of 30 days prior to application. Upon notification by the Contractor
that the material is at the Site. Samples of each material shall be obtained at random from sealed
containers by the Engineer in the presence of an authorized representative of the Contractor.

Samples shall be clearly identified by commercial name, type of paint and intended use. If judged
necessary by the Engineer the paint sample may be tested for compliance at the Contractor's
expense in a laboratory designated by the Engineer.

Complete colour charts for the paints to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
and the preparation of the colour schedules.

Paints shall be factory manufactured and delivered to the site in unbroken containers which shall
show the designated name, formula, colour, manufacturer's directions and name of manufacturer
all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use.

Pigmented paints shall be supplied in containers not larger than 25 kg. All paints shall be products
that have a minimum of 2 years satisfactory field service.

All paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use.

Mixing and applications of paint shall be in accordance with the specification of the manufacturers
concerned and to the approval of the Engineer. The mixing of paints, etc., of different brands before
or during painting materials shall be allowed except strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and
as approved by the Engineer. Spraying will only be allowed with the Engineer's written approval.

Page 22 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 Materials

3.1.1 Materials in general

The materials to be used as required by the Schedule of Finishes and the drawings shall be of the
best quality and of approved types, obtained from an approved manufacturer.

All paints shall comply with the following requirements:

- The product shall be thoroughly mixed and ground. It shall not be settled, caked or thickened to
such a degree that it cannot be mixed easily with a paddle by stirring to a good uniform brushing
consistency.
- The colour of the paint shall match the approved sample.
- Paint shall show no evidence of cracking, chipping, flaking or dusting.
- Paint shall not skin (form a thin membrane surface on the top of the liquid) within 48 hours in a
filled closed container.
- Paint in the containers during and after application shall not be abnormally pungent, offensive
or disagreeable.
- Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing and spreading and good levelling properties.
Those properties shall be demonstrated on test specimens at the request of the Engineer. Coats
that have any noticeable pull under a large brush and that show poor spreading and flowing
properties will not be acceptable.
- Paint shall dry to a uniform, smooth, flat or semi-gloss appearance under conditions of
illumination and wearing. There shall be no laps, skips, highlighted spots or brush marks. Tinted
paints shall dry to a uniform colour.
- Relocating of a previous painting surface shall produce no lightening softening or other film
irregularities.

3.1.2 Knotting

Knotting shall be composed of dissolved shellac or other resin which remains unaffected by the
resinous materials in the wood or the following paint coating, thereby preventing the resinous
materials in the timber leaching into the paint film and causing discoloration or defective drying, it
shall be in accordance with B.S 1336.

3.1.3 Filling

Filler shall be "Polyfilla", "Alabastrine" or other equal and approved.

3.1.4 Stopping

Stopping for woodwork to receive clear finish shall be tinted to match surrounding woodwork, to
approval.

Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardboard, and fibreboard shall be linseed oil putty to BS
544. tined to match the colour of the undercoat.

Stopping for external woodwork shall be white lead paste and gold size well mixed.

3.1.5 Thinners

Thinners shall be approved turpentine or white spirit to BS245 where paints are specified to be
water thinned, in which case fresh water shall be used for thinning.

3.1.6 Satin

Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain complying with B.S.1215.

Page 23 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

3.1.7 Etch Primer

The etch primer shall be mordant solution, slightly acidic in nature and containing solvents, for
applying to new smooth metallic surfaces to remove grease, organic soaps and provide a physical
key, or other equal and approved.

3.1.8 Polyurethane Lacquer

Polyurethane lacquer for woodwork shall be of an approved manufacture.

3.1.9 Varnish

Varnish for interior woodwork shall be an approved brand, oil varnish. Varnish shall form a hard
flexible transparent and quick drying film.

3.1.10 Linseed oil

Linseed oil for woodwork shall be refined linseed oil to comply with B.S 246.

3.1.11 Priming paints

Priming paints shall be the primer recommended by the manufacturer of the finishing paint or:

- For woodwork lead based or priming paint to comply with B.S 2521 and 2523.
- For steel work red oxide priming paint to comply with B.S 2524.
- For galvanized, zinc or aluminium work grey zinc chromate priming paint.
- For concrete, blockwork, plaster, plasterboard and the like alkali priming paint.

3.1.12 Undercoating

Undercoating shall be:

- Zinc oxide based undercoating paint.
- White lead based undercoating paint in accordance with B.S 2525 7. Colours shall
approximately match the finishing paint.
- Synthetic alkyd based undercoating in accordance with the recommendations of the paint
manufacturer.

3.1.13 Rust inhibiting primer

The rust inhibiting primer shall be calcium plumbate red head, chromate, zinc chromate or other
equal and approved primer.

3.1.14 Finishing paints

Finishing paints shall have either a matt, eggshell, semigloss or gloss appearance as indicated on
the schedule requested by the Engineer or these Specifications. Allowance must be made for a full
colour range.

3.1.15 Clear finish

The clear finish is to be polyurethane matt lacquer or other equal and approved. To external timber
works the clear finish shall be clear (unstained) preservative oil

3.1.16 Vinyl emulsion paint

Emulsion paint shall have either a matt or eggshell appearance as indicated on the schedule or
requested by the Engineer or these Specifications.

Allowance must be made for a full colour range.

Page 24 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

3.1.17 Special decorative finishes

External walls and other surfaces indicated on the drawings shall be painted with proprietary paint
as stated in the Particular Specification. The paint shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.2 Workmanship

3.2.1 General

The Contractor shall carry out all tests necessary for determining the colours and shades of the
finishes and the appropriate methods of application. Sample panels shall be completed in
accordance with Architect's instructions.

All work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

Before application of any paint or finish all surfaces shall be cleaned, dried and prepared as
specified hereinafter, all to the Architect's approval, no work shall commence until this approval is
given in writing to the Contractor.

The Contractor shall coordinate work to ensure that factory primed items are primed or painted as
required in the Specifications.

All metal fittings such as hardware and fastenings, etc., not required to be painted shall first be
fitted and then removed before the preparatory processes are commenced. When all painting is
completed the fitting shall be cleaned and refixed in position.

Before painting floors must be washed and every possible precaution shall be taken to keep down
dust before and during the painting processes. No paint shall be applied to surfaces structurally or
superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation,
efflorescence, etc., before the application of each coat.

No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions such as rain
, extreme humidity, dust storms, high temperature of surface etc.
All coats of paint must be thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied, and rubbed down
with fine waterproof abrasive where necessary.

All coating shall be well applied, leaving no sags, laps, brushes or other defects. Each coat must
thoroughly dry before next coat is applied. All work must be carefully cut into a true line and left
smooth and clean.

Details of mixing and application shall be in accordance with the Specifications of the manufacturer
concerned and to the approval of the Architect. The mixing of paint, etc., of different brands before
or during application will not be permitted. No dilution of painting materials shall be allowed except
strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by the Architect.

On surfaces which are not accessible to paint brushes or rollers paint shall be applied by spraying
or with sheep skin daubers. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly covered with paint.
Method of paint applications shall be approved by the Architect prior to the commencement of the
work.

Brushes, pails, kettles and all other tools and equipment used in carrying out the work shall be
maintained in good working order, and shall be clean and free from foreign matter. They shall be
thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of materials.

The Contractor will be required to repaint, at his own expense any work on which the paint is found
to be incorrectly applied. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting from damage the paint
work and all other work during and after operations including the provision of all necessary dust
sheets, covers, etc. All paints dropping shall be cleaned up as the work proceeds.

Page 25 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

All loose and defective paint shall be removed from previously painted surfaces before re painting.
All burning off must be done by skilled workmen. The blow lamp must not be used on surfaces
adjoining glass. Damage to adjacent surfaces shall be made good at the Contactor's expense.

Prior to hand over the Contractor shall carry out all remedial painting work due to damage caused
by others, adjustment and easing of joinery and metal work testing and commissioning of service
installations and the like all as instructed by the Architect. On completion, leave Works clean and
tidy to the Architect's approval.

3.2.2 Painting to concrete, block or plaster

Concrete, blockwork and plaster surfaces to be painted or decorated shall have all cracks cut out
and made good to the satisfaction of the Architect.

Plasterboard surfaces shall have taped joints and the surface puttied to the satisfaction of the
Architect. The surfaces shall be completely dry and shall be brushed free of impurities immediately
prior to the commencement of the painting work.

Efflorescence shall be completely removed by rubbing down with dry coarse cloths followed by
wiping down with damp cloths and allowed to dry. All surfaces shall be rubbed down with fine glass
paper and brushed free of dust before applying any form of decoration.

Concrete blockwork and plastered surfaces which are to receive paint shall be given one thin coat
of oil putty and allowed to dry for at least two days. The surfaces shall then be rubbed down with
fine glass paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and when completely set shall be rubbed
down again with fine glass paper before applying the painting system.

Emulsion paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of primer and two full coats of
paint.

Texture paint shall be uniformly applied at a rate of not less than a 4m² per litre by overlapping,
crisscross rollers or spray in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where finished
surfaces are described as having smooth texture finish, the overall thickness of the applied finish
shall be less than 1.5 mm. Where finished surfaces are described as having rough texture finish,
the overall thickness of the applied finish shall be not less than 2 mm. Finished surface shall be
uniform in sheen colour and texture, free from runs, sags, crawls or other defects.

Oil paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of a priming coat, two undercoats and
one finishing coat of paint. Fire resistant paint shall be applied in three coats over a primer all in
strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

All plastered or rendered surfaces shall be twice stopped with approved putty filler. The first coat
of stopping shall be applied after the primer coat has dried out completely. And the second coat
after the first undercoat application. Each coat of stopping shall be allowed to dry and harden
thoroughly and shall then be rubbed by sandpaper until smooth surface is achieved.

The emulsion or P.V.A paint is to be applied in three coats, the first a thinned coat and the other
two full coats. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly before the next coat is
applied.

3.2.3 Lacquer to woodwork

Woodwork to be lacquered shall be cleaned of impurities.

Knots shall be treated with two coats of knotting.

Where shown on the Drawings or required by the Architect the wood shall be stained with a water
or spirit stain to the approval of the Architect.

The coats of lacquer shall be applied on joinery by brush or spray, either in the joinery shop or on
Site as directed by the Architect.

Page 26 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

3.2.4 Oil stain finish to woodwork

The stain finish to woodwork shall be an approved manufacturer's oil stain system applied strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All surfaces are to be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sanded down and all nail holes or similar
defects shall be filled and levelled up with approved stopping. The finish shall be applied in two
coats. The first coat shall be pigmented stain wax brush applied. The surface shall be allowed to
dry for 2 10 minutes and then rubbed with a cloth in a rotary motion to remove excess stain and
produce an even surface.

The first coat shall be allowed to dry completely before application of the second coat. The second
coat shall be natural (clear) stain wax, buffed. The Architect shall select the stain colour and the
Contractor shall allow for preparing sample panels for approval and these sample panels will
provide the standard for the work.

3.2.5 Varnishing

All surfaces to be varnished shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sanded down and all nail
holes or similar defects shall be filled and levelled up with approved hard stopping. Sanding shall
follow the line of the grain. Knots shall be treated with two coats of knotting.

Two or three coats of clear varnish shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer of the
varnish or as directed by the Architect.

3.2.6 Painting to woodwork

Woodwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities. Knots shall be treated with two coats of
knotting.

Priming paint shall be applied by brush. Two coats shall be applied to end grain. Priming paint shall
be applied on Site after the Architect has approved the joinery and before it is fixed. When the
priming paint is dry, all cracks, holes, open joints and the like shall be filled with stopping and rubbed
down with fine floss paper.

Two undercoats and one finishing coat of paint shall be applied by brush. The priming paint and
undercoats shall be lightly rubbed down with glass paper to remove blemishes, and all dust
removed before the application of subsequent coats.

3.2.7 Painting to metalwork

Steelwork delivered to the site un-primed shall be cleaned of impurities, scrapped and wire brushed
to remove rust and painted with one coat of priming paint applied by brush.

Steelwork delivered to Site primed shall be cleaned of impurities and damage to the priming paint
and made good with priming paint.

Galvanized metalwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities. Where rusting has occurred the
rust shall be removed by wire brushing and made good with an approved rust inhibitor. The surfaces
shall be coated with a mordant solution, washed with clean water and painted with two coats of
priming paint applied by brush.

Metal which is concealed shall be prepared and primed as above and shall be painted with two
priming coats and one finishing coat of paint applied by brush.

3.3 Guarantees

For all external and internal painting works, the Contractor shall provide a guarantee for material
and workmanship to be valid for a period of five years from the date of practical completion
certificate.

Page 27 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

4 SITE AND STREET FURNITURE

4.1 Description

4.1.1 General Requirements

Division 1, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

This section includes but is not limited to the following work:

Provision of labour, materials, accessories, equipment and services required to supply and install
exterior furnishings, as indicated on drawings and specified herein.

4.2 Quality assurance

4.2.1 Sampling and testing

Sampling and Testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed at no
additional cost to the Employer. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that
materials and performance meet the specified requirements and as detailed in the specifications.

Unless accompanied by certification from an international standards organization approved by the

Engineer, representative samples of materials shall be tested in an approved commercial testing
laboratory, or by the Contractor, subject to approval. Laboratory testing shall be in accordance with
DM Administrative Decision No. 160/2000.

Samples for testing shall be collected as approved by the Engineer and each sample shall be
divided in two parts, one part shall be submitted to the Engineer, and the other part shall be
submitted for testing. Copies of test results shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval. Trial
mix of every class of concrete shall be verified by DM-DCL.

Product certification shall be as described in clause 1/12.16 in page GS 1/11 of Volume 2 –Part
DM General Specifications of Roads Department.

4.2.2 Quality control program

The Contractor shall submit his proposed work method statement for approval prior to commencing
each item of work. The Statement shall detail proposed sequence of work, hold points, testing
frequency and document control.

Quality control program shall be detailed in the Monthly Progress Report as well as in the final
Materials reports and submitted to DCL for review as stated in clauses no. 1.2, 1.3, 1.4 and 1.6 in
Page 1/1 of this specification.

4.3 Submittals

4.3.1 Samples

Samples and chemical analysis of the following shall be submitted to the site in accordance with
the General Conditions, or as directed from time to time to confirm compliance with specification
requirements:

Paint/ preservative finish samples and colour options.

- Keep approved samples on-site, in an approved, protected location, until work has been
inspected, approved and accepted.
- Work shall conform to approved samples.
- Shop drawings and calculations. Shop drawings shall include all installation layouts, and show
all necessary allowances and components.

Page 28 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

4.3.2 Manufacturer's documentation

Before commencing work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all catalogue cuts, diagrams,
drawings and such other data as may be required to demonstrate compliance with the
Specifications for review and approval.

4.3.3 Manufacturer's recommendations

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's recommendations for installation and commissioning
of each material and piece of equipment for approval prior to commencing work.

Recommendations shall include testing methods, storage requirements, (if applicable)

maintenance and operational data. The Contractor shall follow these instructions unless otherwise
authorized to deviate by the Engineer.

4.3.4 Spare parts

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's listing of spare parts for approval prior to
commissioning any piece of equipment.

4.3.5 As built drawings

The Contractor shall maintain As Built drawings of all works carried out.

4.3.6 Maintenance procedures

Submit manual of maintenance procedures 30 days before end of maintenance period for
Employer's use.

4.4 Delivery, storage and handling

All products shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original protective packaging and shall be
inspected at the time of delivery.

Any products, which are found to be damaged, not in accordance with Specifications, or date
stamp, expired, shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced.

Sensitive materials shall be properly protected during transport from point of manufacture or
production and during storage prior to delivery to the site.

All products shall be handled and stored in accordance with printed recommendations of the
manufacturer.

All site storage areas shall be shaded, at all times. Precautions shall also be taken to protect items
sensitive to sunlight or heat prior to placement. All furniture shall be protected with heavy duty
plastic (bubble wrap) from the time of installation until handover following an inspection and
approval by the Architect. Any damage during construction is at the Contractors risk.

4.5 Site conditions

Ensure that the location of buried utilities and other services have been clearly identified during
installation and confirmed by investigation.

Immediately repair damage to utilities, structures, and permanent buried and above ground
services, should it occur, at no additional cost to Employer.

4.6 External timber features.

Material: Comply with latest relevant ASTM, BS, U1.

All external timber to be used for furniture shall be kiln dried hardwood unless otherwise noted.
Hardwood shall be Plantation grown Teak or approved equivalent. All timber shall be new, sound,

Page 29 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

free from bows, twists, crooks and waves that cannot be corrected in the works process. The
Contractor shall submit warranties as to origin of the timber.

Moisture content shall not exceed 5%

4.6.1 Origin

The Contractor shall furnish certificates indicating the origin of the timber.

4.6.2 Preservative treatment

All timber shall be pressure treated with an approved preservative to protect against rot and insect
attack. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with Certification of the preservative process.

4.6.3 Fire retardant

All timber shall be treated with an approved fire retardant in accordance with the requirements of
the relevant Municipality Department. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with Certification
of the process.

4.6.4 Hardware

Rough hardware such as nails, screws, clips etc shall be hot dipped galvanised.

Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM including embedment length, hooked end shall be used in all
situations of concrete embedment.

Provide standard steel washers and nuts. Field welding shall not be permitted.

Joints shall be tight and so formed to conceal shrinkage. All nail heads in finished work shall be
countersunk

4.6.5 Quality

It is not the intent of this specification to define the types, sizes and installation methods for each
item of work. The methods of detailing and construction shall be equal in quality of similar details
as may be shown on the drawings. The work that is finished shall be coated/stained and shall be
free from defects or blemishes on the surfaces exposed to view that will show after the finish coat
has been applied.

4.7 Street furniture

4.7.1 Certificates

Copies of the following certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to acceptance of
materials.
- Importation, transportation and any other certificates for furniture and materials required by
national or local laws.
- Any other certificates required by the Engineer.

4.7.2 Warranties

All components of each product/system shall be protected against failure and/or performance
deficiencies by the manufacturer’s warranty. All warranties shall be specific and non-pro-rated and
shall guarantee against material and labour defects for a minimum of five (5) years.

4.7.3 Quality and grading

All materials and fabrication shall be of the highest quality available and shall be identified by the
official grade mark of the appropriate regulatory or testing authority and the manufacturers name.

Page 30 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

4.8 Product specification sheet

Refer to drawings Furniture Details.

4.9 Installation

For each of the products/system specified and requiring a manufacturer’s warranty and Contractors
maintenance bond, the proposed installation contractor must provide evidence of the
manufacturers license to install and evidence of a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the
installation of similar products on projects of similar complexity and size.

All furniture to be installed strictly in accordance with manufacturers specification unless otherwise
instructed.

4.10 Maintenance

During the period from installation to handover the Contractor shall maintain the furniture in
accordance to the manufacturers specification including cleaning, repairing and reapplication of
paint/preservative treatments as required.

4.11 Maintenance manual

The Contractor shall compile a comprehensive Maintenance Manual, which will include the
following:

- General Maintenance requirements including a programme of reapplication of paint and

preservative treatments as per the manufacturers recommendations or engineers approval.
- Equipment Inventory and full manufacturer’s maintenance manuals.
- This manual shall be submitted for approval at least two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

Page 31 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5 SOFT LANDSCAPING

GENERAL

5.1 Description

Division 1, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. BS
3936-Part 1 Nursery Stock, Trees and Shrubs and BS 4428 General Landscape Operations apply
to this Contract.

This Section includes but is not limited to the following work:

Provision of labour, materials, accessories, equipment and services required to install trees,
shrubs, hedges, soil, soil ameliorants, as indicated on drawings and specified herein.

5.2 Quality Assurance

5.2.1 Sampling and testing

Sampling and Testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed at no
additional cost to the Employer. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that
materials and performance meet the specified requirements and as detailed in the specifications.

Unless accompanied by certification from an international standards organization approved by the

Engineer, representative samples of materials shall be tested in an approved commercial testing
laboratory, or by the Contractor, subject to approval.

Samples for testing shall be collected as approved by the Engineer and each sample shall be
divided in two parts, one part shall be submitted to the Engineer, and the other part shall be
submitted for testing. Copies of test results shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval.

5.3 Quality control program

The Contractor shall submit his proposed work method statement for approval prior to commencing
each item of work. The Statement shall detail proposed sequence of work, hold points, testing
frequency and document control.

5.4 Submittals

5.4.1 Samples

1 Samples and chemical analysis of the following shall be submitted to the site in accordance with
the general requirements, or as directed from time to time to confirm compliance with
specification requirements.
▪ Dune sand, organic and inorganic amendments
▪ Soil conditioner & Organic compost
▪ Fertilizer
▪ Soil additives & ameliorants
▪ Salt Barrier / geotextile
▪ Drainage materials / Root barrier/ items
▪ Tree support / staking materials

1 Keep approved samples on-site, in an approved, protected location, until work has been
inspected, approved and accepted.

2 Submit for approval the following:

▪ Written analysis of planting soil, soil conditioner and organic compost before importing to
site.
▪ A report on the suitability of the proposed planting soil for intended soft landscape works.

3 Work shall conform to approved samples.

Page 32 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.4.2 Contractor documents

Submit the following documents for approval:

▪ Shop drawings of landscaping incorporating the proposed ground, planting sections
and support requirements.
▪ Equipment to be used.
▪ Setting out plans.
▪ Detailed program showing timelines for procurement and installation.

5.4.3 Shop drawings and calculations

The contractor shall prepare full shop drawings detailing location, size, density, specification and
final quantities of plant material, together with method of support, planting method and planting pit
details as detailed in the tender drawings and described in this specification. The shop drawings
shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer prior to works commencing.

5.4.4 Manufacturer's documentation

Before commencing work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all catalogue cuts, diagrams,
drawings and such other data as may be required to demonstrate compliance with the
Specifications for review and approval.

5.4.5 Manufacturer's recommendations

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's recommendations for installation and commissioning
of each material and piece of equipment for approval prior to commencing work.

Recommendations shall include testing methods, storage requirements, (if applicable)

maintenance and operational data. The Contractor shall follow these instructions unless otherwise
authorized to deviate by the Engineer.

5.4.6 Sources name

▪ Tree and Palm supplier.

▪ Other plant material supplier if different from tree and palm supplier.
▪ Source of planting soil, soil conditioner and organic compost.
▪ Source for fertiliser.
▪ Source of pesticide and herbicide to be used.
▪ Spare Parts

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's listing of spare parts and obtain approval prior to
commissioning any piece of equipment.

5.4.7 As Built drawings

The Contractor shall maintain As Built drawings of all works carried out.

5.4.8 Maintenance procedures

Submit manual of maintenance procedures thirty (30) days before end of maintenance period
for Employer's use.

5.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling

All products shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original protective packaging and shall be
inspected at the time of delivery.

Any products, which are found to be damaged, not in accordance with Specifications, or date
stamp, expired, shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced.

Page 33 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Sensitive materials, such as fertilisers, plants, etc. shall be properly protected during transport from
point of manufacture or production and during storage prior to delivery to the site.

All products shall be handled and stored in accordance with printed recommendations of the
manufacturer.

All site storage areas shall be shaded, at all times. Precautions shall also be taken to protect items
sensitive to sunlight or heat prior to placement.

5.6 Site conditions

Ensure that the location of buried utilities and other services have been clearly identified
during installation and confirmed by investigation.

Immediately repair damage to utilities, structures, and permanent buried and above ground
services, should it occur, at no additional cost to Employer.

5.7 Certificates

Copies of the following certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to acceptance
of materials.

▪ Importation (including identification of point of origin), transportation and any other

certificates for plants and materials required by national or local laws.
▪ Fertilizer analysis certificates.
▪ Analysis of planting soil mix, soil conditioner and organic compost by an approved soil
test laboratory
▪ Salt barrier geotextile
▪ Any other certificates required by the Engineer.

5.8 Planting soil

Remove from site immediately any soil which is not to specification or is insufficiently clean.

For all purposes, on site dune sand of less than 1000 TDS shall be provided, mixed and spread
or placed in mixture.

The soil shall be free draining, non-toxic and capable of sustaining healthy plant growth. The soil
shall not contain calcium carbonate, subsoil, refuse, roots, heavy clay, noxious weeds, phytoxic
materials, coarse sand, rocks, brush, litter or any other deletrious materials.

The soil shall have the following characteristics:

▪ PH 6.0 to 7.5 of saturated soil
▪ EC less than 2500 mmhos in saturated extract
▪ Chlorides <220 ppm in saturated extract
▪ Sulphates <15 ppm in saturated extract
▪ SAR <5 %
▪ Nitrates 76 ppm in saturated extract
▪ Phosphorus 10-25 ppm in 1.5% ammonium nitrate, 1 hour shake
▪ Potassium 100-400 ppm in 1.5% ammonium nitrate, 1 hour shake
▪ Magnesium 25-100 ppm in 1.5% ammonium nitrate, 1 hour shake
▪ Boron <1% ppm hot water soluble
▪ Free carbonates <0.5 % air dried soil
▪ Exchangeable sodium <15 % in neutral normal ammonium extract
▪ Organic matter shall meet the requirement of soil ameliorant

The planting medium shall consist of dune sand mixed with soil conditioner or organic fertiliser
composed of pasteurised compost and inorganic amendments, thoroughly mixed.

The Contractor shall prepare as built drawings for soiling and submit to the Engineer for approval.
Four sets to be submitted at handover.

Page 34 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.9 Planting soil constituent criteria

5.9.1 Physical loamy made up by particle size as follows:

Sand (2mm to 0.05mm) 70% to 80% Silt (0.05mm to 0.002mm) 25% to 30% Clay (<0.002mm)
5% max

5.9.2 Organic matter

- 4-20 % (by weight) at 18ºC (65 ºF) using Walkley-Black method RB427.
- No roots larger than 15mm diameter or longer than 200mm shall be allowed.

5.9.3 Conductivity

- Not more than 1500 micro Siemens using 1:2:5 extract.

5.9.4 Limit of toxic

Table 5.1 Limit of toxic

Threshold Concentration (Lower Strength)

Arsenic <40 mg/kg
Cadmium (total) <15 mg/kg
Chromium <1000 mg/kg
Lead (total) <2000 mg/kg
Mercury (total) <20 mg/kg
Solenium <6 mg/kg
Boron (water soluble) <3 mg/kg
Copper (total) <130 mg/kg
Nickel (total) <70 mg/kg
Zinc (total) <300 mg/kg
Phenols <5 mg/kg
Total Cyanide <25 mg/kg
Complex Cyanide <250 mg/kg
Thiocyanate <50 mg/kg
Sulphate (water soluble) <1.2 mg/kg
Sulphide <250 mg/kg
Sulphide (elemental) <5000 mg/kg
Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons
<100 mg/kg
(EPA16)
All units are mg/kg unless otherwise specified.

Acidity
pH: 5 – 7.5

Page 35 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.10 Soil conditioner

Soil conditioner shall be an organic compost or other fibrous approved organic matter suitable for
mixing with planting soil to make a friable growing medium for plants. It shall be resistant to rapid
decay, free of soluble salts below 900ppm, pH 6-7 and free of large lumps of debris.

Submit 1-litre sample with back up test data before applying on site.

5.11 Organic compost

Organic compost shall be cleaned vegetable compost produced by a thorough horticultural or

industrial composting process, free from decomposed smell, vermin, any rotting substances,
debris, refuse, clay or visible fungus.

Submit samples and test data for approval before applying on site. All composts are to be sterilised
before being packed for transport. Odorous materials shall be subject to rejection.

5.12 Soil moisture retention additives

5.12.1 Fertilisers

Inorganic slow release fertilizer

Shall be non-toxic to human, birds and animals under normal use. The approved product shall be
delivered to site in original unopened containers. Fertilizer shall be in the form of slow release
granular, tablets or spikes as dictated by plant type. Each shall be coated with Urea and/or sulphur
31%. Compound fertiliser (Osmocote, Emirates Bio- fertilizer or equivalent) shall be composed of
16% soluble Nitrogen, 18% Phosphoric acid and 5% water soluble potash plus iron. Available
equivalents are subject to Engineers approval.

Slow release fertilizer shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

Organic Fertiliser

All organic fertilisers shall be balanced and certified fertilizer with 40-50% Organic Matter (OM), PH
6-7, smell-free and retains moisture up to 30% of its weight. It shall be heat treated and free of
weeds, nematodes, Fusarium, bacteria and any other harmful microorganisms. Samples of organic
fertiliser to be used must first be submitted to the Client’s Landscaping Unit for approval.

The organic fertilizer shall be applied as per the following quantities:

▪ Palm pits 35 kg (post-application)

▪ Trees 25 kg/tree pit
▪ Shrubs 5 kg/shrub
▪ Ground cover <8kg/m2 Mulching

5.12.2 Plant container

Pine bark Nuggets shall be used as mulching to all planting in potted plants. Average 25mm pine
bark nuggets shall be at 40-50mm depth mulch above soil level. Recommended colour for the pine
bark nuggets shall be dark brown. Typical pine bark nuggets shall be Metpap Trading or equivalent
brands.

5.12.3 Planter boxes

Mulches shall be free from soluble salts or toxic materials, resistant to rapid decay, an approved
friable-composted organic material or an approved mix and shall have a pH of between 5.5–7.
Initial mulching is to take place within two (2) days of installation of plants.

Submit samples and pH values for approval, before applying on site. Hydroponics

Page 36 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.12.4 Plant containers

All plant containers shall be equipped with a sub-irrigation system. Sub-irrigation system shall
include a water supply shaft for water and liquid fertilizer, a reservoir that holds up to 26.5 litres of
water depending on the size of the planter and a water level indicator to show the water level left
in the reservoir. Plant containers shall be fixed with a removable plug to its drainage outlet.

5.12.5 Light weight aggregate (if applicable)

Light expanded clay aggregate shall be approved low-density inert material such as expanded clay
or volcanic scoria or other porous aggregate capable of being compacted within the soil zone to
90% compacted without being crushed. Free from dust and debris, pH 6 – 6.5 and free of soluble
salts.

A 2-litre sample shall be submitted and tested, as part of soil mix, for physical and chemical
performance.

5.12.6 Water retention material layer

Refer to Section 13 Part 10 for particular specification of green roll layer and green flocks.

5.13 Soil mixes

Unless otherwise agreed, the Contractor shall apply the following soil mixes as appropriate for
planting, subject to Engineer’s confirmation and approval.

5.13.1 Soil mix use composition

For use in planter boxes, planter beds, roof planter and plant containers/ pots. This shall be
prepared under controlled mixing conditions such as on a concrete floor to ensure even mixing and
free from contamination. Planting

▪ Soil 40%
▪ Soil Conditioner 20%
▪ Organic Compost 25%
▪ Light Weight Aggregates 15%

For use on open ground plant beds in a park this will be the ratio. Ensure even mixing and free
from contamination. Planting medium to meet DM standard and inclusive of 10% water saving
material as specified in section 13

The soil shall have the following chemical characteristics:

▪ 1. PH 6.0 - 7.5 of saturated soil

▪ 2. EC < 2500 micro mhos in saturated extract
▪ 3. Chlorides < 220 ppm in saturated extract

5.14 Plants

All plants shall be from an approved source. Samples of all plants to be used in this contract shall
be submitted for approval with the height and girth of all trees/shrubs matching the specification in
the tender documents. All imported plants shall be acclimatized for a minimum period of 4 months
prior to delivery to site. All plants shall be free from disease, infestation and infection.

All plants shall be first class representation of their normal variety or species, having strong growth.
Drawn plants with soft growth requiring additional supports other than specified are not acceptable.

All trees shall be free from disfiguring knots, abrasions of the bark or wind injury or other
disfigurements and shall bear evidence of proper pruning.

Page 37 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.15 Tree stakes & support

5.15.1 Palms in planted areas

Unless otherwise specified, three tree stakes shall be provided for all newly planted palms and
shall be sawn timber treated with an approved preservative applied by the vacuum pressure
impregnation method.

All stakes shall be 2.50m free of projections and pointed at one end. Stakes shall be 50 x 50 mm
(net section); the length below ground to be 1.0 m minimum and the length above to be 1.5m,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Smaller stakes to 1.0m may be required for some
situations as determined by the Engineer.

The palm shall be supported by 10mm gauge galvanized steel cable and tensioned via a galvanized
steel turnbuckle. The cable shall be fixed to each stake and create a loop around the truck (see
13.2.27 Tree Ties below). Cables shall be spaced equally around the trunk at 120º, the angle of
support shall be 45º.

5.15.2 Palms and Trees in concrete lined pits and planters

Unless otherwise specified, individual palms shall be supported by 10mm gauge galvanized steel
cable fixed to the interior face of the concrete palm pit / planter and tensioned via a galvanized steel
turnbuckle. The cable shall be secured to the internal face of the palm pit / planter using galvanized
steel bolts and hooks, and then looped around the truck (see .27 Tree Ties below). Cables shall
be spaced equally around the trunk at 120º, the angle of support shall be 45º.

5.15.3 Trees in planted areas

Unless otherwise specified, two tree stakes shall be provided for all newly planted trees and shall
be sawn timber treated with an approved preservative applied by the vacuum pressure
impregnation method.

All stakes shall be 3m free of projections and pointed at one end. Stakes shall be 50 x 50 mm (net
section); the length below ground to be 1.0 meter minimum and the length above to be 1.2m, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Smaller stakes to 1.5m may be required for some plants as
determined by the Engineer.

▪ Specification -Tree Stakes

▪ Size:2500mm x 50mm diameter
▪ Timber: Softwood
▪ Treatment: Arc Tanalith treated
▪ Form: Machine rounded 50mm dia
▪ Ends: Chamfered Top & 4 pointed bottom end
▪ Color: Pale Green (Tanalith Treated)

Appearance: Note: Tanalith pressure treated timber offers protection against fungal and insect
attack, including termites, for both in and out of ground contact, interior and exterior applications
when treated to the correct end use specification. Tanalith treated timber has an initial natural green
coloration.

Upon external exposure, the green color slowly weathers to a warm, honey brown and in the longer
term becomes a natural silver grey. This weathering process does not indicate any compromise in
preservation protection.

5.16 Landscape edging

5.16.1 Description

Landscape edging as a border between planting beds, pathways, drives, mulch & rock division, or
anywhere separation and definition is required.

Page 38 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.16.2 Delivery

Material should be ordered and accepted in original shipping cartons of standard size. Please note
quant-ties per box on inside of brochure. Material should be stored in a flat area with boxes
protected from rain.

5.16.3 Material

Edging to be manufactured from aluminium as per drawings and schedules.

5.16.4 Installation and locking system

Preparation
Ensure that all underground utility lines are located and will not interfere with the proposed edging
installation before beginning work. Locate border line of edging with string or other means to assure
border straightness and curves as designed. Dig trench 1 inch deeper than set of edging bottom.

Placement
Set edging into trench with top at 1⁄2 inch above compacted finish grade on turf side with side
having loops for stakes placed on opposite side of turf. Drive stakes through edging loops until
locked in place. Requires 5 stakes evenly spaced for each 16’ section, or 3 stakes evenly spaced
for each 8’ section with a total of 8 stake loops available in each 16’ section if necessary. Provide
additional stakes at approximately 24 inches apart, longer stakes, heavier gage stakes, or any
combination of
previously mentioned as necessary to firmly secure edging for permanent intended use.

Corner/angles
Where edging sections turn at corners or at angled runs, cut edging partially up through its
height from bottom and turn back to desired angle.

Backfilling and clean-up

Backfill both sides of edging, confirm and adjust if necessary that sections are securely held
together, and compact backfill material along edging to provide top of edging at 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
above turf finish grade. Clean-up and remove excess material from site.

Sections to lock together without offset or double thickness at the joints and secured with two 12"
stakes at every joint.

All aluminium landscape edging shall be at least 3.2mm thick X 100mm deep X 20-60cm long.
Finish Mill 9 natural aluminium) or as specified in the drawings.

5.17 Tree ties

Rubberised flexible tree ties shall be used to tie the tree to the stake; ties shall be manufactured
specifically for the purpose of tying trees and shall allow appropriate flexibility and adjustment as
the tree grows.

Ties shall be placed at no higher than 1/3 the total height of the plant. Plants requiring staking at a
higher level may be rejected.

5.18 Geotextile membrane

5.18.1 Planting beds area

Salt Barrier (hydrophobic), geotextile material (non-woven composite geotextile) laying on all sides
and base of planting beds and lawn areas, to prevent fluctuating tidal underground water being
drawn into root zone. Typical geotextile shall be Terram (Hydrophobic), Salt Barrier or equivalent
brands.

Page 39 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.19 Root barrier

Surround root barrier shall be used to protect plant roots from penetrating and damaging concrete
slabs or walls for all planter boxes and extensive green roofs. Typical root barrier shall be DeepRoot
or equivalent brands.

5.20 Drainage composite barrier

5.20.1 Palm and tree pits

Drainage Composite Barrier geotextile material (non-woven thermally bonded composite

geotextile) laying on all sides and base of planting pits, to prevent fluctuating tidal underground
water being drawn into root zone. Typical geotextile shall be Terram Salt Barrier or equivalent
brands.

5.21 Drainage cell/ composite

Refer to Hard Landscape Works Specification Item 14.2.13

5.22 Advanced trees to 2m

Advanced trees are large size container grown trees pruned during growth to produce a tight well-
rounded head, and a straight stem clear of leaves or twigs. Trees shall be 40-60 mm circumference
of stem when measured 1.0m from ground level and shall have a clear straight stem of minimum
1.0m. The head shall be well balanced and rounded and contain at least four main branches, giving
an overall height of 2m at the time of planting. Pruning at the time of removal from the nursery will
not be permitted. In dry weather conditions, trees are to be sprayed with approved anti-transpirant.
Rootball dimensions: Diameter 400mm x 350mm deep minimum.

5.23 Regular size trees to 1.5m

Regular sized trees are container grown with a 40-60 mm circumference of stem when measured
100 cm from ground level.

The head shall be well balanced and contain at least four main branches, giving an overall height
of 1.5m at the time of planting. Pruning at the time of removal from the nursery will not be permitted.
In dry weather conditions, trees are to be sprayed with approved anti-transpirant. Rootball
dimensions: diameter 300mm x 300mm deep minimum.

Note: All trees and palms are to be purchased and stored in suitable nursery conditions within 1
month of the start of the contract.

Note: All dimensions shown with tolerances (i.e. 120-150mm) refer to maximum and minimum
dimensions that will be accepted. Measurement of all plants of one species shall, as a minimum,
average between the upper and lower figures (i.e. in the above case 135mm).

5.24 Medium palms

Palm shall be covered by the minimum requirements of this specification -

Palms shall be a minimum of 900mm circumference of stem when measured 1m from ground level,
and shall have a clear straight trunk of at least 4m with minimum 8-12 fronds. All plants are to be
selected to give a maximum height variation between plants of 300mm in stem height between soil
level and the base of the lowest leaf at the time of planting. The heads of the palms shall be well
balanced and evidence of one new growing shoot, all free from pest or disease attack. No dead
leaves are to be present, and all leaves on the plants shall be free from yellowing, tears or splits,
and cut leaves will not be permitted.

Any flowers, fruits and suckers shall be removed before being brought to site, and cut cleanly from
the base of their stems. Imported material shall be acclimatised for at least six months before
removal from the nursery.

Page 40 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Rootball dimension: 850mm x 600mm deep minimum

▪ Palms shall be balled and burlapped unless container grown are available.
▪ Offshoots will not be acceptable. They shall have a vigorous root system, crown of new
leaves, proper colour of leaves of an adult palm and sufficient hardiness.
▪ Prior to transporting for transplanting, all suckers, flowering and fruiting parts and
approximately thirty percent of fronds shall be removed. The remaining fronds shall be
sprayed with an anti-desiccant during transplanting, lifted to enclose and protect the
growing tip, wrapped in Hessian and securely tied in position. The roots shall be balled
and the Hessian tied.
▪ The crown shall be protected at all times and shall be burlapped for transport and until
the palm is growing successfully in its final location.

5.25 Regular size palms upto 2.5m

Small Palm shall be covered by the minimum requirements of this specification:

Rootball dimension: 650mm x 400mm deep minimum

These are as above, but of smaller size. Palms shall be a minimum of 300mm circumference of
stem when measured 1m from ground level, and shall have a clear straight trunk of at least 2.5m
with a minimum 5-8 fronds. The heads of the palms shall be well balanced and evidence of one
new growing shoot, all free from pest or disease attack. Imported material shall be acclimatised
for at least six months before removal from the nursery.

5.26 Shrubs, Herbaceous plants, groundcovers

5.26.1 Shrubs

Shrubs shall meet requirements for spread or height indicated in the drawing and/or specified in
this contract. Shrubs shall be new season stock having been transferred to the current container
size a minimum of twelve (12) weeks prior to inspection in the nursery. Measurement of height and
stem calliper for shrubs shall be taken from the ground level to the average height of the shrubs
and not the longest branch or stem. Shrubs, unless otherwise specified, shall have at least three
(3) stems and shall be well balanced and bushy with strongly developed fibrous root system, free
from pest and disease. All shrubs shall be grown in containers of appropriate dimensions suitable
for the size of the plant (minimum size 4 litres).

5.26.2 Herbaceous plants and grasses (excluding lawn grass)

Herbaceous plants are non-woody perennials of clump forming habit. Such plants shall have well-
developed stems with good symmetry and a healthy root system, free from pest and disease.
Herbaceous plants shall be container grown with evidence of growing shoots emerging above soil
level. All shrubs and herbaceous plants shall be cultivated in containers of appropriate dimensions
corresponding to the size of the plants and the requirements of the species. Clumps of herbaceous
plants may include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots. Multi stemmed species such as Cyperus sp.,
Raphis sp., etc. shall have a minimum of five (5) stems.

5.26.3 Groundcovers

Groundcovers are low growing, 500mm or less, or prostate shrubs or herbaceous plants whose
habit is to totally cover the soil. All ground cover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal
growth in all directions. Plants shall have fully developed root system and leaves. Rooted cuttings
will not be accepted. All plants shall be container grown.

5.27 Annual plants

To be well grown in 120mm pots (jiffies or plastic containers) and shall have minimum of 4 flowers
at planting.

Page 41 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.28 Lawn areas – green grass carpet

5.28.1 Grass stolons

- Grass stolons shall be vigorous, and healthy, free from disease, insect pests, weeds, other
grasses and any other harmful or deleterious material
- Grass stolons shall be 75mm to 150mm length, with 3 to 6 buds.
- Grass stolons shall be as identified on the Planting plans.

Grass stolon installation

Complete fine grading and all specified soil preparation before installing grass stolons. The
procedure for planting grass stolons shall be as follows:

1 Prior to beginning planting operations the irrigation system must be completely operational
ensuring 100% coverage.
2 Bring the water content of the area to be planted to field capacity and allow water to percolate
until standing water disappears.
3 Apply complete fertilizer at the rate of 0.25 kg nitrogen per I00m2 prior to planting stolons.
4 Cultivate to a depth of200mm.
5 Keep dry dormant stolons refrigerated 0-3 C until the area to be planted is prepared. Do not
exceed two weeks of refrigeration. Soak stolons in water after removing from cold storage and
prior to planting.
6 Do not exceed two days of storage on job site. Stolons are to be kept moist, shaded and
ventilated during such storage.
7 Plant during the time of year when day time temperatures do not exceed 38°C and night time
temperatures are not below 15°C. Mean temperature should exceed 26 C. Water within 15
minutes of planting at 38 C, 30 minutes at 28°C, 60 minutes at 21 C, and 120 minutes at l6 C.
8 Plant utilizing a disc to cut in stolons and followed by a cultipacker roller, or other technique
approved by the Engineer.
9 Water as necessary to keep the stolon bed moist until germination. Once grass is up begin
lengthening intervals between irrigation.
10 Sow at 6 bushels per 100 square meters.

5.28.2 Grass turf

- Turf shall be well-established lawn grass, vigorous, well rooted and healthy, free from
- disease, insect pests, weeds, other grasses and any other harmful or deleterious material
- Turf sods shall be 60cm x 30cm and shall be as identified on the Planting plans.
- Turf sods shall have full coverage and root development that will support its own weight without
tearing when suspended vertically by holding the upper two comers.
- Damaged turf sods shall not be accepted.

Grass turf installation

Grass Turf installation as follows:

1 The procedure for planting turfsods shall be as follows:

2 Prior to beginning planting operations the irrigation system must be completely operational
ensuring I00% coverage.
3 Bring the water content of the area to be planted to field capacity and allow water to percolate
until standing water disappears.
4 Apply complete fertilizer as specified prior to planting turfsods.
5 Cultivate to a depth of 200mm. °
6 Plant during the time of year when day time temperatures do not exceed 38 C a°nd night time
temperatures are not below 15 °C. Mean temperature should exceed 26 C. Water within 15
minutes of planting at 38 C, 30 minutes at 28°C, 60 minutes at 21 C, and 120 minutes at l6 C.
7 Complete fine grading and all specified soil preparation before installing turf.
8 Subgrade shall conform to the turf grower's recommendation
9 The Contractor shall not operate heavy equipment over the subgrade after grading is
completed.
10 The subgrade shall be moist but not wet when the turf is laid.

Page 42 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

11 Turf shall be laid with closely fitted joints and the ends of the strips staggered. Plug openings
with turf.
12 The area shall be thoroughly watered to penetrate the subsoil to at least a 30cm depth.
13 Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep the turf moist and until the turf has rooted in
the subgrade.
14 Once the laying of the turf is complete, the area shall be rolled to settle and firm the surface.

5.29 Plant supply

To be read in conjunction with the Plant Supply Schedule 10.30

Plants shall be obtained from an approved source. Plants in transit shall be adequately and
carefully packed and protected against mechanical damage, extremes of temperature and wind.
Transport shall be in fully covered vehicles.

Plants must be first class representatives of their species or varieties and must have normal, well-
developed stem, branch or cane systems. Plants must be free from sun damage, abrasions of bark,
wind injury or any other disfigurement. Trees must have straight trunks, be well branched with
symmetrical tops, and intact leaders.

Pot-grown plants shall be well-developed and have sufficient well-formed roots to hold together
intact after removal from containers but at the same time not to be root- bounded.

The Engineer shall, at random, inspect plant root balls prior to planting. Any root balls that are
damaged, root bound or circulating shall be rejected.

It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the specified plant species and sizes (refer
plant schedule) are held in a local nursery are correctly labelled and are available for inspection
prior to delivery to site and prior to installation.

When indicated on the drawings or bill as "matched" shall mean trees of the same species that are
all within a range of + or - 300mm in height measured to the top of the crown of the tree and within
5mm in overall diameter of the trunk measured at 1000mm from grade level. "Matched" shall mean
trees are similar in height, shape and form. All plants of the same species shall be of a uniform size
(according to Plant Schedule) and shape.

5.30 Plant substitutes

The tender must be based upon plants that are available. If plants are unobtainable or in sizes that
vary from the specified size, alternatives may be submitted with the Tender, stating how they differ
from the Specification. Such substitutions may not be acceptable and submission of further
alternatives may be required. Approval shall be obtained from the Landscape Architect prior to any
substitution.

After the tender period, no substitutions will be considered and specified plants will have to be
procured by whatever means are necessary in order to meet the completion date set.

The Contractor shall ensure that adequate replacements are available for any losses during the
Contract Period.

5.30.1 Execution

The works in this section shall be executed by a firm with extensive experience, and currently
actively engaged in successfully constructing and maintaining similar landscape projects in the
UAE and to a Municipality approved standard.

The site superintendent in charge of the work shall have at least ten (10) years landscape
construction experience on high standard projects.

Page 43 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Schedules are required prior to works starting showing program of implementation for each type of
landscape work. Planting plans and schedules shall be submitted with documentation of plant types
and sizes, together with dates anticipated for each type of planting.

5.31 Soft landscape programme

Plant in sufficient time to ensure all plants are well established at the time of project handover. The
contractor shall submit a planting program for approval by the Engineer before any planting begins.
The programme shall provide a phased planting schedule beginning a minimum of:

- Six (6) months before completion of contract for trees and palms.
- Three (3) months before completion of contract for shrubs.
- Two (2) months before completion of contract for ground covers and sedums.

Plants which are not to be planted on the day of delivery to site are to be stored as follows (or by
other approved methods):

- Store plants in an approved well-ventilated and shaded area, protected from excessive heat (or
early morning cold), wind and sun.
- Plants shall be stored in an upright position; care should be taken to provide enough space
between plants so that light reaches all around to the bottom of the plant in order to avoid
burning when planted out.
- Special attention should be given to plants with balled and burlapped roots (earth balled and
Hessian ‘burlap’ i.e B&B). Root ball shall be protected by a cover of burlap. Cover shall be kept
wet at all times to prevent drying out of rootball.
- Plants not intended to be planted within three days shall not be stored within a building or any
area of low intensity lighting. Plants shall be kept well-watered and protected from wind or sun
damage.
- For all stored plants apply an approved anti-desiccant before moving plants to the final location.

5.32 Planting period

Plant palms, trees, shrubs, bushes and groundcovers only during periods that are normal for such
work as determined by local weather conditions, within the following months:

- Palms late May to early September

- Trees, shrubs and groundcover mid-September to early May

Do not plant when persistent cold or drying winds are likely to occur or when the soil is waterlogged
or excessively dry. Obtain approval to vary planting schedule if exceptional conditions are
expected. Provide forty eight (48) hours’ notice prior to commencing planting, maintenance or
replacement works.

5.33 Planting bed preparation

Planting medium for trees, shrubs, bushes and groundcovers is to be composed of dune sand,
compost and organic fertiliser well mixed together.

Prior to the placement of Dune Sand all planting beds shall be fully lined with Terram Salt Barrier
to the depths specified in this specification, which shall be jointed to ensure an unbroken barrier
coverage to the whole planting bed area. The Salt Barrier shall be jointed in accordance with
manufacturers lap seam and stapling method.

The planting medium shall be free of plants or their roots, sticks, building materials, chemical
pollutants, subsoil, or any other deleterious matter. Planting medium shall not be prepared or
handled in a wet condition. Planting medium shall be examined and approved on site before
placing.

Subsoil under planting beds shall be retained and used as subsoil for landscape works. Subsoil
shall be made free from any builders waste or other material that might impede or otherwise

Page 44 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

negatively effect root development. Subsoil shall be separated from dune sand by the salt barrier
lining to the planting bed area. Any deleterious material removed shall be replaced with approved
dune sand.

Approved landscape soil additives shall be mixed evenly with existing dune sand top soil to provide
the specified soil mix. In some cases this can be done insitu i.e. for grass and ground cover areas.
Care shall be taken to ensure salt barriers to planting beds are not damaged or penetrated during
soil mixing and placement procedures.

Setout and construct planting areas to the specified shape and levels, position plants using pegs
and obtain approval before commencing planting. Adjust positions if instructed. Mowing strips are
to be installed prior to the commencement of planting as identified on the drawings and to the
approval of the Engineer.

Peg out individual tree and palm positions in accordance to Drawings.

Minor refinement to the design with adjustments to lines, levels and grouping of plants during
planting process is required.

Planting shall not commence until setting out positions have been approved. Any planting where
positions were not approved prior to planting may require adjustment.

Plants shall be spaced evenly to ensure when established, the plants will completely fill the areas
indicated.

5.34 Planting pit excavation

Planting pit dimensions or soil depths for beds shall be as follows:

- Palm trees: 1.5 x 1.5m x 1.85m deep (minimum)

- Trees: 1.2 x 1.2m x 1.55m deep (minimum)
- Large Shrub Pits: 500mm deep
- Shrub beds: 500mm deep
- Groundcover beds: 300mm deep

Preparing for tree/planting pits and ground cover beds

Excavate pit to a minimum depth of 1.85m, and break up base to a depth of not less than 200mm,
line all sides and base with drainage composite terram 1BZ geotextile material. Lay a 40-70mm
layer of wadi pebbles to pit base and firm, lay 50-70mm layer wadi gravel over pebbles and firm.

Excavate pit to a minimum depth of 1.55m, and break up base to a depth of not less than 200mm,
line all sides and base with drainage composite terram 1BZ geotextile material. Lay a 40-70mm
layer of wadi pebbles to pit base and firm.

For shrubs and bushes; excavate whole planting area to a depth of not less than 0.5m below
finished grade and lay Terram Salt Barrier to full extent of planting bed. Excavate individual planting
pits not less than 0.5m diameter (must be greater than diameter of the rootball by a minimum of
twice the root ball width). Break up bottom of pits to a depth not less than 200mm, ensure salt
barrier is not penetrated or damaged during this process.

For groundcovers; excavate whole planting area to a depth of not less than 300mm below finished
grade and lay Terram Salt Barrier to full extent of planting bed. Excavate individual planting pits not
less than 300mm diameter (must be greater than diameter of the rootball by a minimum of twice
the root ball width). Break up bottom of pits to a depth not less than 200mm, ensure salt barrier is
not penetrated or damaged during this process.

All excess excavated material shall be removed from site. Do not mix excavated subsoil with topsoil.
Planting pits shall be tested by filling with water. Conditions permitting the retention of water for
longer than two (2) hours shall be reported prior to proceeding with work.

Page 45 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Soil Mix (Planting Medium) Placement

Soil mix to be placed as follows:
- As backfill and for date palms and trees.
- As backfill for shrubs and groundcover not in actual planter beds.
- Planter beds: as soil mix to depth 500mm.

5.35 Transporting plants

Transporting time should be programmed to commence very early each day to avoid excessively
hot weather. Immediately prior to transporting plants are to be inspected then, prepared and packed
with care in accordance with recognised standard practice for the kinds of plants concerned.

During transportation, plants are to be packed adequately to ensure protection from damage of any
kind. Covers are to be placed over plants when transported. For short transit period (2 hours or
less), use a covered truck using tarpaulin or similar material in order to protect the leaves from
damage.

For more than two (2) hours transit period, the foliage needs to be sprayed with an anti- desiccant.

At all times roots should be protected from wind and direct sun, using wet straw or other suitable
material. Root systems are not to dry out at any time. Earth balls are to be firm and intact and
contained in Hessian (Burlap).

Plants will be inspected upon arrival at site. Any plants damaged during transport will be rejected.

5.36 Plant handling

Plants should be moved by handling the container only in order to reduce breakage of
branches/leaves.

Balled and Burlapped (B & B) plants should be handled with caution to maintain the firmness of the
balls. Protect against damage to stems and branches.

All plants should be unloaded and checked immediately upon arrival to the site and should be
watered, and kept in a moist condition at all times until they are planted on the site.
Check ties of each tree or shrub to prevent fracture of branches.

5.37 Planting operations

5.37.1 Planting Palms, Trees, Shrubs, Ground Covers and Annuals

- Planting height, and/or presentation shall be sufficient to achieve the size and condition detailed
on the drawings at or before project handover.
- Planting shall be ordered, regular, neat and tidy and in accordance with good horticultural
practice and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
- Prior to planting, check soil level in planting pits and make even allowing for root ball to be
positioned according to correct level.
- Cut back broken and damaged roots to sound growth, treat cut ends with an approved tree
wound dressing.
- For trees, shrubs or bushes: thoroughly spray with anti-desiccant soon after planting (do not
apply in rainy weather). Ensure full coverage of underside of foliage.
- Plant palms, trees, shrubs or bushes upright in centre of pit and at original soil depth unless
otherwise instructed.
- For all plants:
· Plants shall be planted so that after settlement they will be at the nursery (original) growing
medium depth (the soil mark on the stem is an indication of this). Therefore the planted
finished level is to be 30 mm above surrounding level to allow for settlement.
- Plants shall set in the centre of the pits.

Page 46 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

- Approved topsoil shall be placed in layers around the root ball, by hand. Each layer shall be
carefully tamped so as to avoid injuring the roots or the root balls, or disturbing the position of
the plant.
- For balled trees: when growing medium is up to 2/3 of the root ball height, ties shall be cut and
the top portion of burlap on B & B plants shall be folded back carefully, not disturbing the root
ball integrity. Soil should be watered in plant pits at this stage, and allowed to settle around the
roots. After the water has been absorbed, the backfilling shall be completed and tamped lightly.
Any settling shall be brought up with soil mixture medium.
- Position root ball and backfill with approved top soil mix, placed around root ball in layers not
greater than 100mm using water to ensure proper compaction and elimination of voids.
- Immediately after planting trees, shrubs or bushes, carefully cut back damaged, dead or
diseased branches, remove weak, thin or malformed growth and treat with an approved tree
wound dressing.

Watering
Plants should be watered immediately after planting.

A circular watering basin slightly larger than the planting hole shall be formed. Immediately after
planting, all plants shall be thoroughly watered in.

Palms, trees, shrubs, ground covers and annuals should be watered thoroughly immediately after
planting. First watering must be with sufficient amount to saturate the growing medium.

Intervals and timing between watering is to be determined by Irrigation Engineer.

Fertilising
Inorganic fertilisers and the like are to be:

Non-toxic to humans, birds and animals under normal use. Approved and delivered to the site in
original unopened containers.

All inorganic fertilisers shall be in slow release sulphur coated granular or tablets, and shall be dry,
free-flowing and free of lumps.

The fertilisers shall have a guaranteed N.P.K (15 – 15 – 15) plus trace elements – Iron and Sulphur
or available equivalent analysis for palms, trees, shrubs and ground covers.
Fertilizer shall be packed in standard waterproof containers, clearly marked with the name of the
manufacturer, weight and analysis.

All fertilisers shall be stored in a weatherproof storage place and in such a manner that it will stay
dry and its effectiveness is not impaired.

For beds, spread approved organic fertilizer to planted area and cultivate to 200mm depth.

Apply fertiliser at the following rates:

- Palm pit: 250gm (post planting application)
- Tree pit: 200 gm
- Shrub pit: 30-50 gm per shrub
- Ground cover: 15-20 gm per m2

5.37.2 Support trees and shrubs

Establish necessary supporting system (e.g. stakes for trees and shrubs), use proper ties,
thickness and height to match plant to be supported (subject to Engineers approval).

Immediately following planting, trees and shrubs shall be braced upright in position, preventing
excessive motion, by guy wires or by stakes with ties or by both as per detail drawings. Ensure that
stakes do not penetrate the Salt or Drainage Barriers.

Page 47 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Removal of tree stakes should occur once the trees are stable (tree stakes and tree guys should
remain for a maximum of twelve (12) months).

In some cases, stakes might be left in place to protect the trees or the shrubs, but ties should be
removed.

Stakes, guy wires and ties shall be checked at least every four (4) months to ensure that they are
not causing a depression in the bark of the tree or the shrub and shall be loosened, repaired or
replaced as necessary.

Stake trees using a minimum of two (2) tree stakes to protect from wind action, while allowing
flexibility. Maintain palm tree fronds in a wrapped condition using hessian. Ensure plants are
upright.

After planting, irrigate, and spray with pesticides or fungicides as required, to achieve optimal
growth free from pests and as approved by the Engineer.

5.37.3 Plant Inspection

The Engineer reserves the right to inspect plants either at place of growth or on site before planting
to verify compliance with requirements for name, variety, size and quality, condition of balls and
root systems, presence of insects and/or disease infections, injuries, and latent defects.

Any plants that do not show healthy growth, shall be replaced. Plant in sufficient time to achieve
performance requirements at handover.

5.37.4 Fertilising plants after planting

Three months after planting or during the months of March to April or October to December spread
sulphur coated slow release fertiliser at rates according to manufacturer’s directions for plant type.

5.37.5 Water for irrigation

Water suitable for irrigation will normally be supplied to the project free of charge. The Contractor
shall ensure adequate supplies of sweet water are available, and make arrangements to
compensate for any shortfalls.

5.37.6 Drought Conditions

If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation, inform the Engineer without
delay and ascertain availability and additional cost of second class water from an approved source.
If planting has not been carried out, do not plant until instructed.

If planting has been carried out, obtain instruction on supplying water.

5.37.7 Drainage

Ensure planting areas and tree pits are well drained.

5.37.8 Leveling and cleaning

After planting, the area surrounding the plant shall be restored to finish grade and excess soil,
empty containers and rubbish disposed of properly.

5.37.9 Monitoring Plants

Check all plants one week after planting for signs of windshake and loosening due to soil
subsidence, firm and make good as necessary. Prune any weak or dead branches according to
good horticultural practice. Check stakes and ties to ensure they are properly positioned and
functioning correctly.

Page 48 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Plants that are found to be missing, defective or in poor condition, prior to Substantial Completion
of the works, shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor.

5.37.10 Wind Deflecting Fences

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all plants, lawn and planted areas are protected
from the ingress of sand and exposure to windblown sand.

Wind deflecting fences consisting of black shade cloth doubled over a three wire fence 1.2m in
height are to be erected as and when required and to the approval of the Engineer.

5.38 Completion

5.38.1 Substantial completion

The Engineer shall certify the date when, in his opinion, Substantial Completion of the works has
been achieved. Substantial Completion will not be awarded until at least 95% of all plant material
is in living, healthy condition and is planted as per specification quantities.

5.38.2 Failure of plants (Pre-substantial completion)

Plants that are found to be missing, defective or in poor condition, prior to Substantial Completion
of the works, shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor.

5.39 Defects liability period

The first thirteen (13) weeks (or the period specified in the Bill of Quantities) of the Defects Liability
Period is considered as the ‘Consolidation Period’.

Generally Consolidation includes all maintenance of the landscape works in this Contract for
a period of thirteen (13) weeks from the Date of Substantial Completion.

Defects Liability includes all repair, amendment, rectification, reconstruction and making good of
defects, imperfections, shrinkages or other faults as may be required by the Engineer during the
twelve (12) months Defects Liability Period or within fourteen (14) days after its expiration as a
result of an inspection made prior to its expiration.

The thirteen (13) week (or the period specified in the Bill of Quantities) Consolidation Period will
commence after an inspection of the Works by the Engineer that finds all the works satisfactory to
grant Substantial Completion for the entire project or agreed portions thereof.

During the Consolidation Period, any plants or grass areas that are dead, or which do not show
healthy growth and satisfactory foliage condition are to be replaced by the Contractor at his
expense.

Such items shall be replaced immediately upon discovery and shall be replaced again, if necessary,
at the Contractor's expense to ensure that (theft and vandal damage excepted) the site remains in
peak condition throughout the Consolidation Period.

At the end of Maintenance Period and Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall conduct a joint
inspection of the works with the Engineer, Resident Landscape Architect, etc.

5.40 Defective work or materials

Record all defective works with the Engineer.

Submit program for replacement works to the Engineer as soon as defective works are identified.

Planting rates deem to include cost of replacement.

Page 49 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.41 Landscape maintenance

5.41.1 Generally

The Contractor shall maintain the whole of the landscape and irrigation works as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified in this Contract from the completion of the Consolidation Period until the
completion of the Defects Liability Period.

Undertake all works and provide all tools, equipment, plant and machinery necessary to maintain
the landscape works as specified and in accordance with good horticultural practice.

The cost of all such equipment and machinery together with the cost of fertilizers, pesticides,
herbicides, mulch and any other equipment and/or materials required on a regular and scheduled
basis to fulfill the requirements of the Specification shall be included in the tender price.

Where loss/damage has not resulted from negligence on the part of the Contractor, the cost of
supply and planting of replacement plants; repair of theft, vandal and other damage caused by
agencies beyond the control of the Contractor; and, the cost of supply and installation of irrigation
(and other electrical equipment) replacement parts and/or repairs not covered by warranties are to
be submitted to the Engineer and approval obtained prior to carrying out the works. Such works
will be valued on the basis of the Bill of Quantities/Schedule of Rates and/or on a "cost plus"
percentage basis as submitted as part of the Tender. All other works shall be included in the Tender
price.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor
to perform urgent maintenance works. Should the Contractor fail to carry out the work within seven
(7) days of such notice, the Engineer reserves the right without further notice to employ others to
carry out such work at the expense of the Contractor.

5.42 Maintenance objectives

It is the objective of the Employer to maintain the landscape of the development in peak condition
at all times.

The Contractor shall allow for completing the maintenance operations, specified in accordance with
the approved Maintenance Manual and Programme as submitted by the Contractor together with
all other works he considers necessary to achieve this objective throughout the Contract Period.

5.43 Scope of works

The ‘Maintenance Period’ shall be the thirty nine (39) weeks period (or the period specified in the
Bill of Quantities) following the end of the thirteen (13) week Consolidation Period until the end of
the twelve (12) months Defects Liability Period. During the Maintenance Period, the Contractor
shall have a full time presence on site and shall be responsible for:

The satisfactory maintenance of all soft landscape, irrigation and nominated hard landscape works
and parts thereof, including, but limited to;

- Making good all defects as notified by the Engineer in writing;

- Mowing grass areas and line trimming around all obstructions;
- Edging around garden beds, paths, kerbs, bollards and the like;
- Fertilising all trees and planted areas;
- Control of pests and diseases;
- Monitoring, maintenance and periodic adjustment as required to the irrigation system;
- Pruning of trees, shrubs and groundcovers;
- Removal of weeds, rubbish, litter and any other undesirable objects from all planted and
grassed areas;
- Topping up mulch;
- Checking and repair or removal of tree stakes and ties;
- The immediate replacement of dead or failing plants and grass/turf areas;

Page 50 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

- Maintaining hard paved and walled areas free of graffiti, dirt, litter, weeds and any other
undesirable material;
- Adjustment, cleaning and minor repairs to paving, site furniture, structures, fences,
sculpture, etc;
- Mechanical sweeping of all nominated roads;
- Reporting on and making good theft and vandal damage, as instructed;
- Inspection and reporting on potential safety hazards on play equipment.
- Maintenance and monitoring of all park lighting
- Maintenance and monitoring of all water feature
- The Contractor will train the Employers’ personnel during this period as specified in order to
enable a smooth handover of the works upon completion.
- Presenting the site at all times during the Contract in a clean and tidy condition to the satisfaction
of the Engineer; and
- All other work necessary to maintain a healthy, clean, neat and tidy landscape in accordance
with the objectives stated above.

5.44 Maintenance reports

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a weekly Maintenance Report detailing operations and
areas covered and identifying any problems or issues that require further action. Payment may be
withheld if maintenance reports are not submitted every seven days. The Contractor shall submit
a sample format for approval during the first week following Contract award.

5.45 General maintenance operations

5.45.1 Rubbish Collection and Removal

Generally: All landscaped areas shall be kept clear of litter at all times and collection frequency
shall be adjusted as necessary to achieve this objective.

Rubbish and litter

Generally: Collect and remove to a central locality all rubbish deposited in litterbins. Ensure all bin
inserts are thoroughly cleaned and disinfected once per month. Collect and remove all cigarette
butts, bottles, cans, litter, vegetative matter (dead leaves, grass cuttings, etc) and any other
undesirable material from all landscaped areas and paved areas/paths/roads and collect from site
for recycling and / or remove from site.

All rubbish to be carted to an approved waste / recycling collection area. The Contractor shall meet
all fees for haulage and dumping.

Leaf litter
Generally: Leaf litter, twigs and grass cuttings shall be raked up from lawn, grass and paved areas
on the occasion of each mowing and collected separately for re- use/composting where possible
or removed from site.

Windblown Sand
Generally: Windblown sand shall be removed from lawn and paved areas as per the general
maintenance operations and/or immediately following a storm event. All areas of open sand liable
to become windblown are to be screened with a 1.2m high wind-deflecting fence to be installed at
the Contractor expense to the approval of the Engineer.

Street sweeping
Generally: Sweep all nominated roads and pathways within the site by mechanical means once per
month to remove all sand, litter and other debris.

Paving
Generally: Sweep to keep free from rubbish, dirt, grass clippings, leaf litter, etc. Mechanically clean
paved areas as necessary to maintain the highest standards of presentation.

Page 51 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Weed Control
Maintain free from weeds and grasses by hand weeding or by application of approved herbicide.

5.45.2 Replacement

Report any obstructions, areas of ponding, serious staining or defects in the paving and provide
quotation for making good. On receipt of approval, replace paving as instructed.

5.45.3 Safety

Erect safety barricades to enclose areas of defective paving that may constitute a hazard until
repairs have been completed.

5.45.4 Site furniture, structures and fences

Generally: Ensure all site furniture, structures and fences are well presented and maintained in
good working order at all times.

Bollards and other Vertical Elements: Re-set levels of elements that deviate from alignments and
re-paint/re-stain any damaged elements. Replace components or whole items where repair is not
possible. Provide quotations for replacement and obtain approval before proceeding.

5.45.5 Theft and Vandalism

All damage or theft occasioned to the landscape (hard and soft) shall be reported immediately upon
discovery together with a quotation for repair/replacements as required. Repair works shall
commence immediately upon receipt of instruction to proceed.

All graffiti shall be reported to the Engineer immediately upon discovery. Submit quotations for
removal of any other graffiti and obtain approval to proceed.

5.45.6 Electrical Equipment

Attendance and rectification of electrical equipment: Temporary or permanent repairs to be carried

out within eight (8) hours of disruption to power supply. Re-start and re-set timers, etc as necessary
to ensure equipment is operating correctly.

5.46 Horticultural maintenance operations

5.46.1 Trees

Generally: Inspect all trees to ensure that irrigation system is operating effectively and trees are
not exhibiting signs of stress. Remedy any problems evident by repairs to irrigation system, pruning
or other appropriate action as required.

5.46.2 Stakes and ties

Inspect stakes and ties (including guard ties) and adjust and replace as necessary to prevent trees
being damaged by wind or chaffing. Loosen ties regularly to prevent strangulation and damage to
bark. Replacement stakes and ties shall match those installed at planting.

Remove stakes and ties as soon as trees are wind firm.

5.46.3 Pruning

Prune to remove dead, diseased, damaged and dying limbs; to remove obstructions to pedestrian
circulation; to shape as appropriate to species; and as directed. Refer also to Section 13.20 Item
4 Pruning and Dead Heading.

Page 52 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.46.4 Replacement

Remove any dead or dying trees (salvaging stakes for re-use) and report to Engineer.

5.46.5 Watering basins

Maintain watering basins around trees to ensure effective watering.

5.46.6 Trees in grass

Maintain a weed and grass free area of 600mm diameter around each tree in grass.

5.46.7 Damage by line trimmers

The Contractor shall replace any trees that are permanently damaged by line trimming operations
at his own expense.

5.47 Planting areas

Generally: Maintain garden beds free from litter, grass, weeds and any pest/disease infestations.
Remove any dead, diseased or dying plants immediately upon discovery and report to Engineer.

5.47.1 Mulch to garden beds

Rake mulch to maintain even coverage and top-up as necessary with mulch as specified, to
maintain minimum depth of 50mm.

5.47.2 Plant replacement

Obtain the Engineer's approval prior to proceeding with replacement planting. Replace any
individual plants that have failed to thrive with species of the same type and cultivar. Any
widespread failures of one species are to be reported so that an appropriate substitute can be
identified prior to replacement. Fertiliser – refer also to Section 13.20 Item 3.

5.47.3 Fertilising and soil amelioration

Soil tests
To maintain a suitable pH level of 6.5-7 for growth and to optimise the fertiliser application regime,
soil test shall be conducted once a year in February. Obtain two samples from locations as directed
by the Engineer and obtain full analysis with recommendations. Records shall be kept of soil test
results. Specialist advice shall be sought for application rates of soil ameliorants and fertilisers, to
adjust the pH and nutrient levels in accordance with recommendations.

Adjustment of Fertilising Regime

The fertilising regimes specified below shall be adapted as necessary to make good any
deficiencies identified by soil testing and analysis procedure.

Palms and Trees

Apply six (6) months slow release fertiliser (Osmocote, Emirates Bio- Fertiliser or equivalent) in
early October and again in early March in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

Garden Beds
Fertilise every six (6) months using slow release fertiliser (Osmocote, Emirates Bio-Fertiliser or
equivalent) applied in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

5.47.4 Pruning and dead heading

Generally: The main objective is to maintain as natural an appearance as possible, including the
removal of excess dead and degenerating material and regular tip pruning to encourage new
growth and maintain form.

Page 53 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

All work is to follow correct horticultural techniques and, is to be implemented at such a time and
in such a way to avoid the loss of any foliage or floral colour.

In cases where odd shaped, woody plants have developed, heavy pruning may be necessary,
unless the shape is desirable according to the Engineer. The Contractor shall cut back the dead
branches towards the main stem, removing small portions of the branch at a time until a satisfactory
result has been achieved.

Shrubs and Groundcovers

Pruning to shrubs and groundcovers shall be carried out in such a way to promote the effect of an
interlocking cover of plant growth. In no circumstances shall the plants be pruned to create a mass
planted area of 'individual' specimens.

Groundcovers shall be allowed to spill onto the edges of paths, kerbs and recalls. Where plant
growth inhibits the use of paths, roads, etc or extends over mowing edges, trimming shall be carried
out to produce informal wavy edges, not hard straight lines.

Trees
Selectively prune low level lateral growth on street trees to prevent sight lines from being obscured
and to allow unrestricted pedestrian movement. Pruning shall be gradual, always leaving ample
branch and foliage coverage typical of the growing habit of the tree species.

5.47.5 Dead heading

Dead head in appropriate season.

5.47.6 Arisings

Collect all debris arising from pruning and dead heading operations and remove from site.

5.47.7 Pests and diseases

Generally: Identify the problem and advise the Engineer of the proposed treatment. Employ
approved treatment method until the problem has been eliminated.

Major Infestations
Infestations in unacceptably high levels shall be treated by an approved pesticide of low toxicity.
Pesticides shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at minimum rates.
Biodegradable pesticides shall be used wherever possible. Mechanical applicators shall be
precisely calibrated and care taken when applying to minimise the effect on plant and animal life.

5.48 Maintenance period: herbicides and pesticides

5.48.1 Post Planting Weed Control

Maintain all planted areas in a weed-free condition at all times without injuring the plants. Use only
qualified and experience staff when employing herbicides and shall ensure that herbicide
applications are carried out in accordance with current safety regulations and manufacturer’s
instructions.

5.48.2 Approval

All chemicals proposed for use must be to the approval of the Engineer.

5.48.3 Application

Chemical sprays shall be used only in still conditions and during weekday early mornings or when
public use of the site is at a minimum. Chemicals shall only be applied strictly in accordance with
the Manufacturer's recommendations.

Page 54 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

5.48.4 Public Safety

Take all precautions necessary to protect other users of the site (be they other Contractors, the
public, residents or the like) and private property from any harmful effects of herbicide and pesticide
applications.

5.48.5 Notification

Give the Engineer, Employer and adjacent residents at least 24 hours’ notice of the intention to
apply chemicals, clearly stating the reason for their use and expected date and time of application.
Obtain their written approval prior to proceeding with the chemical applications.

5.49 Maintenance period: replanting operations

Costs for the supply and installation of replacements for vandalised or stolen plants shall be
prepared in accordance with the Schedule of Rates and shall be submitted to the Engineer and
approval obtained prior to carrying out the works.

No replacements or modifications felt necessary by the Contractor shall be implemented prior to

the written approval being received from the Engineer.

Any plants that degenerate due to Contractor's negligence will be reinstated at the Contractor's
expense.

5.50 Operations and maintenance manual

The Contract shall compile a comprehensive Operations and Maintenance Manual, which will
include the following:

1 Pesticide/fungicide/Herbicide applications-including safety application rates and procedure,

schedules of pesticides/fungicides/herbicides.
2 Irrigation- including water application rates and maintenance procedures.
3 Landscape Maintenance– including fertilizer description, application rates and programs.
Recommend maintenance periods and planned preventive maintenance procedures.
4 General Maintenance-including pruning, stakes and ties, plant replacement and clean up.
5 Equipment Inventory- including copies of maintenance procedures, warranties and full
manufacturer’s maintenance manuals.
6 Training procedure- for handing over the works to the Employer at the end of the maintenance
period. On-site training is required for two (2) Client/Employer staff of supervisor level on the
full maintenance procedures and programme detailed in this specification.
7 Reporting procedure.
8 Outline description- installation and detailed description of specific items and species.
9 Recommended replacement plants - A name list of suppliers.

This manual shall be submitted for approval at least two (2) weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

5.51 Plant supply

The Contractor shall provide all necessary attendance to facilitate the procurement, delivery,
storage, installation and maintenance as is required according to the General Specification and
under the terms of the following Supply Schedule.

5.51.1 Supply categories

General
This section details the supply categories for the supply of plant material for this contract. In the
event that the Client supplies plants this section shall apply. There are three types of plant supply
and installation categories detailed as follows.

Category A - Plant supply and installation by the Contractor,

Category B - Plant supply only by the Client with installation by either party

Page 55 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

The client shall advise which type of plant supply and installation category shall apply.

Client to provide plant materials

- If the Client is to supply and or install plant material the Contractor shall immediately notify the
Client of the requirement for the supply of plant material. This request shall be set out as per
the Supply Schedule inclusive of, but not limited to, supply size, species and hybrid
specification, and any special conditions.
- If the Client is to supply and or install plant material the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of
the program of works specifically in relation to the requirement for delivery of plants to the site
and the proposed staging of plant installation. The program shall also detail a schedule of
periodic inspections by all parties to confirm the quality and quantity of the plant material held
by the Client. Copies of the above program shall be forwarded to the Client for confirmation.
The Client shall confirm in writing the undertaking to supply the nominated material to the
approved program.

Unavailability of stock
Any delays due to the unavailability of species or specific plant sizes are to be reported immediately
to the Engineer. Where required substitute species or additional quantities may be sourced by the
Client through commercial nurseries. The Engineer shall instruct the Contractor where this is the
case.

Acceptance of plant stock

- As part of the program of periodic inspections the Contractor shall advise the Engineer
immediately if in his opinion any plant stock is not according to specification or will not be
according to specification by the time delivery to site is programmed. The Engineer will make a
determination and advise both parties accordingly.
- Upon acceptance of plant material on site the Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the
health of the plants. If the Contractor has any concerns regarding the nature of the plant stock
he shall advise the Engineer in writing immediately and prior to accepting delivery.

Soil works and site preparation

The Contractor shall be responsible for the completion of all site preparation and soil works
including fertilizer and soil amendments prior to delivery of plants to site. All tree pits, garden beds
and lawn areas shall be prepared for planting by the Contractor. Site preparation and soil works
shall be completed according to the agreed program of works.

Planting and backfill

The Contractor shall be responsible for procurement, storage, delivery, planting and backfilling
including fertilizer and soil amendments as per the specification. The Contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring the specified soil mix is available for backfilling as per the Specification.

Consolidation period
- The consolidation period determines the liability for replacement of plant materials.
- The consolidation period is twelve (12) weeks from the time the plants are supplied.
- Any dead, dying, diseased or unhealthy plant material supplied by the client that under the
maintenance of the Contractor, is deemed to be unsuitable by the Engineer or the Contractor,
shall be replaced by the Client at his expense.

Category A
- This category covers the plant supply and installation by the Contractor.
- The Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, delivery, storage, installation and
maintenance as is required according to the Contract documentation and relevant
Specifications.
- The Contractor is responsible for the maintenance of the plant material for the duration of the
contract.

Category B
- This category covers the plant supply only by the Client with installation by either party.

Page 56 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

- The Client shall be responsible for the replacement during the consolidation period.
- The Contractor must provide irrigation to all plant material supplied and installed by the Client
as if it were the Contractors.
- Should the plant species die during the Client’s consolidation period as a result of lack of
irrigation; the Contractor shall replace the item for the Client at the Contractors expense.
- Should the plant species die during the Client’s consolidation period as a result of accident /
vandalism or any other uncontrolled acts, the Client shall replace the item at the Client’s
expense.

5.52 Maintenance

All maintenance regardless of the Supply Schedule Category is to be carried out by the Contractor
for the period specified under the General Specification and Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor is responsible for the maintenance of the plant material for the duration of the
contract.
Date for submission of monthly activity report indicating record of maintenance carried out during
contract period.

Page 57 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

6 HARD LANDSCAPE WORKS

6.1 Description

The work included in this Section covers the various types of paving finishes and their installation.
The section includes but is not limited to concrete kerbs, concrete unit pavers & slabs, natural stone
paving, joint materials, gravel courses.

6.2 Specifications are to be read in conjunction with the whole document.

Where materials are referred to in this and other sections of this document (i.e. concrete), no one
section shall take priority over another: All relevant clauses shall apply.

6.3 Materials not specified in this document

Materials that have not been individually specified in this document shall be of international
standard: The minimum acceptable standard shall be the relevant British Standard (if applicable),
Australian Standard, American Standard or ISO.

6.4 Related references & standards

6.4.1 Related references

Related British Standards, American Standards, and other references :

6.4.2 Reference standards

The following reference standards included in this section shall apply as specified in section 01090.

6.4.3 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

- AASHTO M17-77, Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
- AASHTO M20-70, Standard Specification for Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement.
- AASHTO M140-70, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.
- AASHTO M208-72, Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt.
- AASHTO M226-78, Standard Specification for Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement.

6.4.4 The American Society for Testing and Materials

- ASTM C33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

- ASTM C88, Test Method for soundness of aggregate by use. Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium
Sulphate.
- ASTM D242-85, Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
- ASTM D692-85, Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
- ASTM D946-82, Specification for Penetration - Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement
Construction.
- ASTM D977-85, Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.
- ASTM D1073-81, Specification for Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
- ASTM D1557-78, Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures using 10 lb. (4.54 kg.) Rammer and 18 in. (457mm) Drop.
- ASTM D2397-85, Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt.
- ASTM D3381-83, Specification for Viscosity - Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement
Construction.
- ASTM D3515-84, Specification for Hot-Mixed, Hot Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
- ASTM D4253-83, Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
- ASTM D4254-83, Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative
Density.

Page 58 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

6.4.5 British Standard Specification

- BS 435:1975(1993) – Specification for dressed natural stone kerbs, channels, quadrants and
setts
- BS 5931:1980 – Code of practice for machine laid, in situ edge details for paved areas
· Part 1:1986– Specification for pavers
· Part 2:1986– Code of practice for design of lightly trafficked pavements
· Part 3:1986– Method of construction for pavements
- BS6717– Precast concrete paving blocks
· Part 1:1993 – Specification for paving blocks
· Part 3:1989 – Code of practice for laying
- BS7263 – Precast concrete flags, kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants
· Part 1:1990 – Specification
· Part 2:1990 – Code of practice for laying
- BS7533:1992 – Guide for structural design of pavements constructed with clay or concrete
block pavers
- BS 340 : 1979, Specification for precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants.
- BS 434 : Bitumen road emulsions (anionic and cationic)
· Part 1 : 1984 Specification for bitumen road emulsions.
· Part 2 : 1984 Code of practice for use of bitumen road emulsions.
- BS 598 : Sampling and examination of bituminous mixtures for roads and other paved areas.
· Part 1 : 1974 Sampling.
· Part 2 : 1974 Methods for analytical testing.
· Part 3 : 1985 Methods for design and physical testing.
- BS 1446 : 1973 Specification for mastic asphalt (natural rock asphalt fine aggregate) for roads
and footways.
- BS 1447 : 1973 Specification for mastic asphalt (limestone fine aggregate) for roads and
footings.
· Latest editions of all relevant British Standards shall be used with current amendments and
additions.
· Any differences between their requirements and this specification shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his ruling.

6.5 Levels, ref. points and setting out

- The works are to be set out from primary datum levels and setting out points indicated on the
drawings or from information provided by the Engineer
- The Contractor shall submit his proposals for setting out and controlling the alignment of the
works, to the Engineer and obtain his approval prior to the start of construction. The Contractor
shall supply to the Engineer details of the value and location of all temporary benchmarks and
reference points he establishes.
- Should the Contractor dispute the original ground levels shown on the drawings he shall agree
these with the Engineer before disturbing the original ground

6.6 Related work

Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this
section.

6.7 Quality assurance

Paving works shall be carried out only by skilled workers, with suitable machinery, and supervised
by foremen experienced in the type of paving specified.

Paving shall be performed by a firm who has equipment adequate for the project, and skilled
tradesmen so that placing is performed expeditiously; and is known to have been responsible for
satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of at least five years.

Page 59 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Requirements of Regulatory agencies: Perform pavement placing on public property in accordance

with design and material requirements imposed by applicable local authorities, in addition to
requirements specified in this section.

6.8 Source

Provide kerb/paving units which are the products of one supplier and one quarry as specified. Stone
material shall comply with the standards of the National Granite Quarries Association (NGQA).

6.9 Mock-ups

Before beginning primary work of this section, provide mock ups of paving and edging types (min.
area 3.0m x 3.0m) at locations acceptable to The Engineer and obtain Engineer's acceptance of
visual qualities. Protect and maintain acceptable mock ups throughout the work of this section to
serve as criteria for acceptance of this work. Acceptable mock ups may be incorporated into
finished work.

6.10 Submittals

- Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and
recommendations. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements.
- Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each element that is to be used in the
finished work, showing the full range of colour and finish variations expected. Provide at least
four unmounted units.
- Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication and installation of all kerb, paving, wall and
structure work to include plans and details showing exact size, shape, profile, curvature, finish
and installation method.

6.11 Delivery, handling and storage

Deliver, store and handle kerb/paving units in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations. Store above ground and protect from damage and soiling.

6.12 Project conditions

Weather: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits
established by International Masonry All Weather Council Guide Specification and the mortar
admixture manufacturer.

6.13 Substrates

Proceed with work only when substrate construction is complete and accepted.

6.14 Extra material

Provide wrapped, packed and labeled extra material to construct 10m2 of each type, size and
configuration of paving used on the Project. Deliver to the clients store, location to be advised by
the Engineer.

6.15 Samples

- Samples of all materials to be used shall be submitted for approval before construction
commences. Samples shall be submitted in a timely manner allowing for manufacture and / or
procurement times. Rejection of a sample submitted by the contractor shall not be an excuse
for delay of any sort, nor justification for extension of any kind.
- The approved samples shall be clearly labelled and retained on site for the duration of the
project as the standard for all material or work of that type.
- In addition to the individual samples of all paving materials, a sample area of 3.0m x 3.0m shall
be prepared for approval by the Engineer for each paving layout as described in Clause 14.1.8.

Page 60 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

6.16 Materials specified by client

This specification may contain information regarding materials that may be supplied by the client.
However, it remains here for the purpose of information only.

6.17 Materials and quality

6.17.1 Scope

The following section deals with individual materials under the following headings:
- Description of materials
- Quality required

The following materials are covered:

- Concrete Unit Paving
- Precast Concrete: Pavers and Edging
- Natural Stone (including Granite, Slate & Sandstone)
- Natural Stone Gravel
- Soil Separator/ Geotextile fabric
- Mosaic & Ceramic Pool Tiles
- Composite Timber Decking & Cladding & Engineered bamboo
- Rubberised Surface Safety Play Mat
- Screen Cladding Panel
- Reinforced Stone Pool/ Drain Grates
- Drainage Cell/ Composite

6.18 General

Where materials used in this section have been specified elsewhere in this document, the relevant
clauses shall apply to this section. Materials that have not been individually specified shall be of
first class quality and the minimum standard acceptable shall be the relevant British Standard
where applicable.

This section shall conform to requirements for granular fill specified in: General Specification (Civil
works - Section 3)

This section shall include performance of concrete work as specified in: General Specification (Civil
works - Section 4)

6.19 Concrete Paving

6.19.1 Description of Material

Shape, size, colour and finish of units shall be as described in the material schedule, refer to
Particular Specification section13, Part 2.

Contractor shall be required to provide shop drawings indicating colour and pattern for Engineers
approval.

Cut blocks to be sawn not guillotined.

When using cut units to fit pattern or area the Contractor shall ensure that not less than one third
of full size units shall be used. Paving which uses units below this size or those which in the opinion
of the Engineer do not achieve the requirements of this specification shall be rejected by the
Engineer.

Colours shall be as specified on the drawings or as specified by the Engineer. Discoloured or faded
blocks shall not be accepted.

Page 61 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Samples on site are to be prepared in advance of work commencing. Sample panels are required
to ensure that the colours, textures and finishes are to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

No work will be accepted that fails to meet the standards of the approved samples.

As much of the above will be propriety products approved by the consultant, they can only be
changed with the consultant’s approval of a proprietary product that is supported with its own
technical data sheets and has a proven record of being used in similar circumstances.

6.19.2 Quality required

All pavers must be manufactured according to British Standards and complying with BS.6617
19116 and BS6717: Part 3 19119. Required BS values are as follows:

Water Absorption <7.0 %

Compressive strength >70 N/mm2
Transverse Breaking Load >7 N/mm2
Texture Smooth
Mean Wet Skidding Res. Greater than 60
Permissible Size Tolerances Length + 2 mm
Width + 2 mm
Thickness + 3 mm

Pavers shall be delivered to site packaged, complete with original manufacturer seals and
warranties.

Under no circumstances shall pavers that fail to meet these requirements be incorporated in the
Works.

6.20 Pre-cast concrete pavers, edgings & kerbs.

6.20.1 Description of material

Units should be made using either ordinary Portland cement to BS12 or white cement binder, using
drinking quality water. Aggregates shall be approved natural aggregate complying with BS882
Granite or Marble chips. Pigments should be used in powder form and should conform to BS1014.

Units should be treated with a solvent based silane siloxane solution, which penetrates the pores
of concrete and reacts with moisture to form a hydrophobic polysiloxane lining to capillaries leaving
a permanent, hard wearing and dust free surface.

6.20.2 Quality Required

Units should be textured where required on the drawings, and processed in a fully automated Shot
blasting machine to expose the natural colour of the aggregate.

The tolerances should be a maximum dimension deviation of; Thickness- 3mm, Length and Width
2mm, Difference between diagonals -2mm, Flatness winding and bowing 1mm.

Compressive strength of pavers should be tested in accordance with BS6717 and shall not be less
than 30N/mm2 at age of seven (7) days.

Transverse strength, when sampled and tested as described in annex B of BS 7263: Part 1: 1994
shall not be less than 14kn. Pavers should conform to BS 7263, wet press process, as
manufactured by CONSENT LLC or Transgulf Cement Products LLC or similar approved to the
following specification.

- Paver Size- refer to Particular Specification 13, Part 2.

- Paver Colour/Texture- for details refer to the Hard Landscape Materials Schedule, Particular
Specification 13, Part 2.

Page 62 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

- Sides – Smooth
- Edges – Sharp
- Surface Treatment – Anti stain
- Compressive strength >30 N/mm2
- Water Absorption 1-4%

All precast units delivered to site shall have a Certificate of Compliance issued by the manufacturer
in accordance with item no. 12 of BS 6073 where the independent laboratory mentioned therein
shall be the local Municipality Construction Quality Control and Research Section or the relevant
local Municipality equivalent.

Precast units shall be delivered to site packaged, complete with original manufacturer, seals and
warranties.

Under no circumstances shall slabs that fail to meet these requirements be incorporated in the
Works.

All pre-cast Kerbs are to meet the specification requirements of the local Municipality Roads
Department.

Table 6.1 Aggregates for concrete

Test Type of Cement Standard Specifications

Concrete used
Fine Coarse
Acid soluble Reinforced SRC BS 812: P 0.03% max 0.01% max
chloride concrete 117: 1988
OPC & 0.03% max 0.02% max
MSRPC
Mass SRC 0.03% max 0.02% max
concrete
OPC & 0.03% max 0.04% max
MSRPC
Pre-stressed 0.03% max 0.01% max
& stream
cured
concrete
Acid Soluble Any Any BS EN 1744- 0.3% max
sulphate 1: 1998
Chloride Reinforced SRC BS 1881: P 0.06% max
Concrete 124: Ad-01
1988
OPC & 0.30% max
MSRPC
Mass SRC 0.12% max
Concrete
OPC & 0.60% max
MSRPC
Pre-stressed 0.10% max
& steam
cured
concrete
Sulphate Any Any BS EN 1744- 3.7% max
1: 1998
Chloride All types of concrete ASTM 2000 Coulombs max
Permeability C1202
(1997)

Page 63 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Refer to Engineer’s specification for details of the pre-cast concrete kerbs to be used within this
contract.

Pre-cast concrete units shall be supplied by an approved supplier:

6.21 Natural stone (including travertine, granite, slate, quartzites and sandstone)

6.21.1 Description of material

Stone slabs, cladding, pavers or copings are to match the approved sample obtained from the
approved quarry / source.

The contractor shall confirm in writing that the quarry can supply the quantity required for the project
to the dimensions and quality stated in the project documents and this confirmation shall be
provided at the time of submitting the sample for approval.

The Contractor shall ensure that samples provided of natural stone are from supplies, sufficient
and continuous to meet the requirements of the Project. The Engineer must be notified in writing
if the materials are not readily available in sufficient quantities to meet the specification prior to
placing orders or arranging samples.

The Contractor shall expedite the samples of natural stone for the approval of the Engineer
following his appointment, to take account of the long lead-time and delivery schedules associated
with procuring natural stone items.

6.21.2 Quality required

Stone slabs, cladding, pavers or copings are to be free from any defects that could adversely affect
the integrity of the material. They shall be free from any mark or defect on the face visible in the
completed works that could, at the landscape architects discretion, mark the integrity or appearance
of the finished work

Samples submitted for the Engineer’s approval shall not be smaller than 3.0m x 3.0m and in the
case of slabs for use in work where the patterning, colour, or matching of pieces is of particular
importance larger samples shall be provided upon the Engineer’s instruction.

Size, colour and finish of all granites and natural stones shall be as described in the material
schedule (Refer to Particular Specification 13, Part 2.)

Mortar / Grout Materials for granite paving, sets and copings:

- Portland Cement: Provide ASTM C-150 Portland Cement, Type I or II, of natural colour or white
as needed to produce colour selected
- Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
- (Aggregates: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below:
· For joints narrower than 6mm use aggregate graded with 100 % passing the No. 8 sieve
and 95 % the 16 sieve.
· For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 % passing the No. 16 sieve.
- Coloured Mortar / Grout Pigments: Natural and synthetic oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of range of manufacturer's
standard colours and shall to Consultants approval. For Hardscape grouting and mortar refer to
section 13, part 9
- Water: Clean, non-alkaline, potable. Do not use water in latex modified grout or mortar mixes.

Granite, Slate, Travertine, Quartzite & Sandstone should be supplied by an approved supplier.

Page 64 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

6.22 Natural stone gravel

6.22.1 Description of material

Natural Stone Gravels are to match the approved sample obtained from the approved quarry /
source.

The Contractor shall confirm in writing that the quarry can supply the quantity required for the
project to the dimensions and quality stated in the project documents and this confirmation shall be
provided at the time of submitting the sample for approval.

The shape, size, colour and finish of all natural stone gravels shall be as described in the material
schedule. Refer to Particular Specification 13, Part 2.

Gravel should be supplied by an approved supplier.

Colour and grade samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

6.23 Soil separator/ Geotextile fabric

Soil separator/Geotextile fabric shall be non-woven 75% polypropylene / 25% nylon, weight 10g/m²,
0.3mm thick, with good permeability to water. It shall be resistant to all naturally occurring soil
acidities and resistant to tearing and stress, manufactured by an approved supplier.

6.24 Drainage Cell & Composite

6.24.1 Description of Material

Drainage cell/ composite should be manufactured by durable and resistant to chemicals high
impact polystyrene material with compressive strength of >300kN/m2. Individual sections shall be
close butted.

6.24.2 Raised Planters

Horizontal and vertical drainage cell should be manufactured from perforated high impact
polystyrene sheet bonded with a non-woven filter fabric on both sides.

Drainage cell drains excess water only. Water flow rate of 80 litres/min. or more is recommended.

6.25 Execution and workmanship

6.25.1 General

- The Contractor shall employ only appropriately skilled operatives in the laying of the specified
finishes.
- All work shall be carried out in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
- Damaged or disfigured units shall not be used.
- Finished work shall have an even overall appearance with even joint widths and free from any
discolouration.
- In-situ concrete infill in any area of work shall not be accepted unless approved by the Engineer.

Reconstruction of existing pavements

The existing paving shall be removed back to an unfractured subbase. The sub-base shall be
regraded, supplemented, compacted and blinded all as necessary to achieve the required bedding
surface.

Concrete blocks and pavement tiles shall be bedded as detailed and specified or shall match the
existing bed to the approval of the Engineer.

Page 65 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Service Covers
The levels of any existing and proposed service covers in pedestrian or vehicular hard landscape
areas shall be adjusted as necessary to marry in with the proposed paving levels.
In all areas of pedestrian paving, recessed man hole covers shall be used as specified and shall
be appropriate for infilling with the specified surface finish. Covers shall be infilled to match the
adjacent paving pattern and joint lines. In pedestrian areas where occasional vehicle over-run is
expected all covers hall be heavy duty type to accommodate vehicle point loading.

In areas of vehicular paving the Engineer will advise the Contractor which service covers shall be
heavy duty recessed type.

Paving shall be laid right up to the edge of the service covers. Any existing concrete surrounding
the covers shall be broken out.

Concrete Trim Foundations

Accurately cast concrete foundation for paving trims shall be laid as detailed and in accordance
with the Specification for concrete kerbs.

Protection of Completed Works

The Contractor shall provide adequate protection of all finishes until Substantial Completion of the
Works.

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring all works are adequately protected and, if the Contractor
is working in the vicinity of works completed by others, which these too are adequately, protected.

Particular attention shall be made to protecting areas of natural stone prior to the application of
stone sealant to ensure that stone is free of all dirt, debris and surface markings and that these are
not sealed within the finished surface of the stone, post sealant application.

All pavings bedded on mortar shall be kept free from pedestrian traffic for a minimum of four (4)
days and vehicular traffic for 10 days after laying.

All pavings with dry, semi-dry or plastic mortar jointing shall be protected from rain, dust storms,
chemical attack and the harmful effects of heat, wind, flowing water, vibrations and shocks by
appropriate means for at least three (3) days immediately after filling the joints.

In the event of a dispute over standards of materials, reparation and workmanship, it is the
responsibility of the contractor to be aware of the above British Standards copies and ensure that
the contractor is aware of his contracted responsibilities as described in said standards. The above
British Standards form part of the contract documentation and, as such, are deemed to be included
in the rates for the works.

6.26 Concrete unit paving

6.26.1 General

Finished unit paving to have an even overall appearance with no visible joints showing, free of
mortar and any other unnatural stains.

Movement joints in the paving and bed should be sited every 10m or as approved on working
drawings to suit patterns or fixed objects.

Perimeter and intermediate movement joints shall be incorporated in the paving in accordance with
the recommendations of BS 6213 Part 5; 1990 Section 6.

Lines and levels of finished surface shall be smooth and even to prevent ponding.

Lay paving units upwards from the bottom of slopes where creep may occur.

Unit paving bedded on mortar must be kept free from pedestrian traffic for 4 days and vehicular
traffic for 10 days after laying.

Page 66 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Restrict access to paved areas as necessary to prevent damage from site traffic, especially oil and
diesel spillage.

6.26.2 Paver cutting

Cutting of pavers shall be carried out with a mounted cutting saw with a diamond tipped blade. No
mechanical splitters are to be used.

Cuts must be clean and free of chipping or splits of any kind.

6.26.3 Setting out

The setting out of paving and related features is to be submitted in detailed Contractors shop
drawings which shall take into account actual site conditions.

6.26.4 Levels of paving

Permissible deviation from specified levels to be +-6mm over 3m. Paving to be set 6mm above
drainage outlets and 3mm above kerbs to allow for settlement.

6.26.5 Acceptance of base

The base for concrete unit paving shall be a concrete bed and screed as covered in the general
specification.

Before starting work ensure that the base is sound, clean, suitably close textured, free from
movement under compaction and free from compaction ridges, cracks and loose material, and the
levels and falls of the base are as detailed, within the tolerance specified.

6.26.6 Mortar bedding

Mortar bedding shall consist of freshly mixed moist mortar 1:3 cement: sand mortar with plasticiser
as required, using sand complying with BS 882 grading M or F.

The mortar shall be spread to achieve a nominal compacted thickness as shown in drawings, to
reach a total finishes profile (paver thickness and mortar) of 90mm.

Mortar which has been mixed for more than 1 hour shall be discarded.

Units shall be laid on a full mortar bed and bedded down to line and level with a pavers maul.

Where units are laid with close joint (i.e. 2 to 4mm) jointing sand shall be brushed into the joints.

Where units are laid with a wide joint (i.e. 6 to 10mm) the whole of the joints shall be filled with
mortar.

6.26.7 Mortar pointed joints

Mortar mix shall be semi dry cement: sand to BS 882 grading limits M, proportions as specified and
coloured as required by the Engineer.

The paving shall be dry prior to joining. The joints shall be carefully and thoroughly filled with mortar
using a proper pointing tool and slotted masking shield.

The joint shall be flush, recessed or raised as detailed or as required by the Engineer.

Any mortar stains or droppings on the face of the paving shall be removed.

Immediately after jointing the paving shall be covered.

Page 67 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

6.26.8 Regularity

Sudden irregularities shall not be permitted.

Where appropriate in relation to the geometry of the surface, the variation in gap under a 3m straight
edge placed anywhere on the surface to be not more than 6mm.

On completion the finished surface level shall be within 6mm of the design level and the maximum
deviation within the compacted surface, measured by a 3m straight edge, shall not exceed 6mm.
The level of any two adjacent pavers shall not differ by more than 2mm. Any areas of paving which
do not comply with these tolerances shall be removed, and sand laying course lifted and re-laid
and the paving blocks re-laid to the correct levels.

Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall be checked after
paving the first three rows of pavers and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin to open, the
pavers shall be knocked together using the hide mallet.

6.26.9 Construction tolerances

Table 6.2 Construction tolerances

Tolerance of surface levels

Layers of pavement Maximum permissible deviation from the
design level mm
Sub-layer Sub-base +20
-15
Road-base 0
-12
Surface course Overall +6
-6
Tolerance of laying course thickness
Thickness mm Tolerance mm
50 +15
-20
30 +12
0
Surface regularity
Flatness 10mm under 3m straight edge
Level 2mm between adjacent joints
The surface course should be between 5mm and 10mm above adjacent gullies and between 3mm and
6mm above surface drainage channels and outlets. It is important to avoid ponding at these locations.

6.26.10 Post construction procedures

During the period immediately following completion and up to handover, paving shall be
maintained. Any mortar stains or droppings on the face of the paving shall be removed.

6.27 Pre-cast concrete slabs

6.27.1 General

Finished slab paving to have an even overall appearance with no visible joints showing, free of
mortar and any other unnatural stains.

Page 68 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Movement joints in the paving and bed should be sited every 10m or as approved on working
drawings to suit patterns or fixed objects.

Perimeter and intermediate movement joints shall be incorporated in the paving in accordance with
the recommendations of BS 6213 Part 5; 1990 Section 6.

Lines and levels of finished surface shall be smooth and even to prevent ponding.

Lay paving slab upwards from the bottom of slopes where creep may occur.

Slab paving bedded on mortar must be kept free from pedestrian traffic for 4 days and vehicular
traffic for 10 days after laying.

Restrict access to paved areas as necessary to prevent damage from site traffic, especially oil and
diesel spillage.

6.27.2 Laying

Precast paving slabs used for vehicular and pedestrian carriageways will be laid to the pattern
shown on the drawings. Any change to the drawings is to be agreed with the Engineer prior to such
change.

The paving slabs shall be laid on the sand in a manner so as not to disturb those slabs already laid.

Each slab shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they fit closely together.

Slabs to be laid butt jointed with maximum 3mm gap.

6.27.3 Paver cutting

Where slabs do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such as manholes or up stands
the gaps shall be filled using cut slabs. Any damaged or broken slabs shall not be laid.
In all cases cutting shall be undertaken using a diamond tipped masonary saw. Mechanical splitters
may no be used.

Any slabs damaged during compaction shall be replaced at the direction of the Engineer.

6.27.4 Setting out

The setting out of paving and related features is to be submitted in detailed Contractors shop
drawings which shall take into account actual site conditions.

6.27.5 Levels of paving

Permissible deviation from specified levels to be +-6mm over 3m. Paving to be set 6mm above
drainage outlets and 3mm above kerbs to allow for settlement.

6.27.6 Acceptance of base

The base for concrete slab paving shall be a concrete bed and screed as covered in the general
specification.

Before starting work ensure that the base is sound, clean, suitably close textured, free from
movement under compaction and free from compaction ridges, cracks and loose material, and the
levels and falls of the base are as detailed, within the tolerance specified.

6.27.7 Mortar bedding

Mortar bedding shall consist of freshly mixed moist mortar 1:3 cement: sand mortar with plasticiser
as required, using sand complying with BS 882 grading M or F.

Page 69 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

The mortar shall be spread to achieve a nominal compacted thickness as shown in drawings, to
reach a total finishes profile (paver thickness and mortar) of 90mm.

Mortar which has been mixed for more than 1 hour shall be discarded.

Units shall be laid on a full mortar bed and bedded down to line and level with a pavers maul.

Where units are laid with close joint (i.e. 2 to 4mm) jointing sand shall be brushed into the joints.

Where units are laid with a wide joint (i.e. 6 to 10mm) the whole of the joints shall be filled with
mortar.

6.27.8 Mortar pointed joints

Mortar mix shall be semi dry cement: sand to BS 882 grading limits M, proportions as specified and
coloured as required by the Engineer.

The paving shall be dry prior to joining. The joints shall be carefully and thoroughly filled with mortar
using a proper pointing tool and slotted masking shield.

The joint shall be flush, recessed or raised as detailed or as required by the Engineer.

Immediately after jointing the paving shall be covered.

6.27.9 Regularity

Sudden irregularities shall not be permitted.

Where appropriate in relation to the geometry of the surface, the variation in gap under a 3m straight
edge placed anywhere on the surface to be not more than 6mm.

On completion the finished surface level shall be within 6mm of the design level and the maximum
deviation within the compacted surface, measured by a 3m straight edge, shall not exceed 6mm.
The level of any two adjacent pavers shall not differ by more than 2mm. Any areas of paving which
do not comply with these tolerances shall be removed, and sand laying course lifted and re-laid
and the paving blocks re-laid to the correct levels.

Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall be checked after
paving the first three rows of pavers and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin to open the
pavers shall be knocked together using the hide mallet.

6.27.10 Edge Restraints

The edge restraints to the paved area shall be laid in advance of the laying course and all obstacles
within the area, such as manhole covers. Shall be constructed to the correct finished levels.

6.27.11 Post Construction Procedures

During the period immediately following completion and up to handover, paving shall be
maintained. Any mortar stains or droppings on the face of the paving shall be removed.

6.28 Natural stone (including but not limited to, granite, slate and sandstone)

6.28.1 General

Finished paving to have an even overall appearance with no visible joints showing, free of mortar
and any other unnatural stains.

Movement joints in the paving and bed should be sited every 10m or as approved on working
drawings to suit patterns or fixed objects.

Page 70 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Perimeter and intermediate movement joints shall be incorporated in the paving in accordance with
the recommendations of BS 6213 Part 5; 1990 Section 6.

Lines and levels of finished surface shall be smooth and even to prevent ponding.

Lay paving units upwards from the bottom of slopes where creep may occur.

Paving bedded on mortar must be kept free from pedestrian traffic for 4 days and vehicular traffic
for 10 days after laying.

Restrict access to paved areas as necessary to prevent damage from site traffic, especially oil and
diesel spillage.

6.28.2 Stone cutting

Stone slabs, cladding, pavers or copings are to be sawn cut or as otherwise stated on the drawings.
They shall be worked fully square from faces for the full width and thickness of the piece or as
otherwise shown on the drawings for particular pieces

Cut paving units neatly and accurately with a diamond tipped masonry saw to give true junctions
with edgings and adjoining finishes. Edges shall not be chipped or corners broken, and will be
rejected if chipped or broken. Repair with silicones, glues, masticks or any other method will not be
accepted.

6.28.3 Sealant

Prior to laying any natural stone paving the Contractor shall apply to all surfaces and edges a coat
of premium, no-sheen, natural look, water based penetrating sealer/impregnator. Any edges which
have been sealed and then sub-sequentially cut shall be resealed to the approval of the Engineer,
prior to installation. An additional coat shall be applied to the exposed surface after installation.

Sealant to be applied in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions, and shall be by an
approved supplier.

6.28.4 Setting out

The setting out of paving and related features is to be submitted in detailed Contractors shop
drawings which shall take into account actual site conditions.

6.28.5 Levels of paving

Permissible deviation from specified levels to be +-6mm over 3m. Paving to be set 6mm above
drainage outlets and 3mm above kerbs to allow for settlement.

6.28.6 Acceptance of base

The base for natural stone paving shall be a concrete bed and screed as covered in the general
specification.

Before starting work ensure that the base is sound, clean, suitably close textured, free from
movement under compaction and free from compaction ridges, cracks and loose material, and the
levels and falls of the base are as detailed, within the tolerance specified.

6.28.7 Mortar bedding

Units shall be laid on a full mortar bed.

Also refer to Section 13, Part 9 (hardscape grouting and mortar)

Page 71 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

The units shall be solidly bedded on a mortar mix of 1 part cement to 5-6 parts clean sharp sand
by volume. Alternatively the units may be bedded on a semi-dry mix consisting of 1 part cement to
3 ½ - 4 parts sand by volume (12:4-4 ½ by weight) to BS 882.

The mortar shall be spread to achieve a nominal compacted thickness as shown in drawings, to
reach a total finishes profile (paver thickness and mortar) of 90mm.

Mortar which has been mixed for more than 1 hour shall be discarded.

The units shall be dampened on the back with clean water and tapped into position with a mallet.
Any bed material brought to the surface at the joints shall be wiped from the face of the stone with
a damp sponge or cloth immediately the stone is in position.

Mortar pointed joints:

All natural stone paving shall be laid with a 5mm wide joint, unless shown otherwise on the
drawings. The whole of the joints shall be filled with mortar.

Mortar mix shall be semi dry cement: sand to BS 882 grading limits M, proportions as specified and
coloured as required by the Engineer.

The paving shall be dry prior to jointing. The joints shall be carefully and thoroughly filled with mortar
using a proper pointing tool and slotted masking shield.

The joint shall be flush, recessed or raised as detailed or as required by the Engineer.

Any mortar stains or droppings on the face of the paving shall be removed.

Immediately after jointing the paving shall be covered.

6.28.8 Regularity

Sudden irregularities shall not be permitted.

Where appropriate in relation to the geometry of the surface, the variation in gap under a 3m straight
edge placed anywhere on the surface to be not more than 6mm.

6.29 Natural stone gravel – laying

6.29.1 Loose gravel

Where detailed the fill areas shall be regraded, filled with suitable matching material and compacted
as specified to the approval of the Engineer.

The subgrade shall be graded to even running falls to achieve the detailed levels against paved
and planted areas.

The surface of the subgrade shall have all stones and similar material larger than 25mm removed.
The subgrade surface shall be free from all rivulets, crusting and caking.

The sub-grade shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to the laying of the gravel.

Laying of gravel shall be to the depths as indicated on the drawings. All gravels are to be laid on
an approved geotextile fabric over a compacted subgrade.

The subgrade and if required a 50mm layer of levelling sand shall have sufficient cross fall to ensure
adequate drainage.

Gravels shall be raked, rolled, and watered as necessary to achieve a smooth surface of even
depth to even running falls in accordance with the layout detailed on the drawings and on the
approval of the Engineer.

Page 72 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

6.30 Hard landscape maintenance

6.30.1 Maintenance literature

Upon completion of all work specified within the Specification, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Employer, manufacturers literature on the "Care of all areas of external Hard Landscape" for future
maintenance use. This literature will be included as a section within the Hard Landscape O & M
Manual.

6.30.2 Operations & maintenance manual

The Contract shall compile a comprehensive Operations and Maintenance Manual, which will
include the following:

- General Maintenance-including general clean up and treatment of particular situations i.e.

removal of oil / chemical and food stains.
- Hard Landscape Maintenance – including application of sealants, cleaning of stone surfaces
and programs.
- Equipment Inventory - including maintenance procedures, warranties and full manufacturer’s
maintenance manuals.
- Training procedure - for handing over the works to the Employer at the end of the maintenance
period. On-site training is required for two (2) Client/Employer staffs of supervisor level on the
full maintenance procedures and programme detailed in this specification.
- Replacement procedure.
- Reporting procedure.

This manual shall be submitted for approval at least two (2) weeks prior to substantial completion.

The handover of a completed document to the satisfaction of the engineer shall be a condition of
substantial completion.

Page 73 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7 IRRIGATION

7.1 General concept of the design

7.1.1 Water requirement for the plantation shall be as follows

Table 7.1 Water requirement

Plant Type Irrigation water Consumption

Palm Trees 150 lit/day
Trees 80 lit/day
Shrubs 18 lit/m2/day
Ground covers, flowers & creepers 12 lit/m2/day
Hedges 15 lit/m2/day
Lawn 12 lit/m2/day

7.1.2 Maximum daily operation timing for irrigation system to be as follows:

Table 7.2

Palm trees 20 minutes

Ornamental Trees Shrubs, & hedges 2 hours
ground covers, , creepers 1 hour
seasonal flowers 36 minutes
Lawn (Popup Sprayers) 14 minutes
Lawn (Popup Sprinklers) 1 hour

Type of irrigation system for each type of plantation shall be as per the section 2 (Irrigation System,
Materials) of this specifications and contract drawings for Installation details.

Contractor can arrange the area in different blocks with individual solenoid valve.

Each block (solenoid valve) shall serve only one type of irrigation head or system used.

Daily Operation time for the proposed irrigation system shall not exceed 10 hours.

For pipe sizing mean velocity of flow in Main or lateral pipes shall not exceed 1.5 m/sec. The total
head loss in Main line not to exceed 4.0 meter.

Contractor to provide ring Main with suitable no. of isolation valves to the approval of the Engineer.

Total friction loss from the far end of the lateral up to solenoid valve shall not exceed 2.5 metre.
The total head loss in solenoid valve assembly not to exceed 3.0 meter.

Arrangement of sprayers shall be in such a way that water spray from sprayer should not hit the
stems of the palm trees.

All materials and execution of the works shall be as per Dubai Municipality (DM) Drainage and
Irrigation Department Specifications and standards and to the approval of DM Irrigation Engineer.

Page 74 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.2 Irrigation system, general

7.2.1 Scope

This contract is for construction, completion and statutory maintenance of Automatic Irrigation
System as shown on the Contract drawings.

The contract shall include for the complete installation, testing and commissioning of the automatic
irrigation system summarized below and as per this specification and contract drawings:

1 Laying the Main , Submain and lateral lines for Automatic Irrigation scheme;
2 Laying of Ducts for Mains, Submains, Laterals and Control cables under footpaths and roads.
3 Laying Bubblers and Drip Systems as shown on the contract drawings;
4 Laying of Sprayer system for grass areas as shown on contract drawings;
5 Providing Automatic control system for irrigation network through Controllers, Communication
& Power supply cables, electric remote control valves, etc.;
6 Providing Control Panels required for the system as specified.
7 Providing tie-in Connection to existing TSE irrigation main and irrigation water supply line
complete with all required valves and fittings.
8 Removing of the existing soil, filling of fresh Sweet soil & gravel and the levelling & contouring
shall be done as per landscape drawings.
9 Reinstatement of the affected areas and as required during the progress of the project;
10 Arrange for permanent power supply

The Contractor shall include for all materials, labor, plant and tools.

Contractor shall propose and construct a tie in connection chamber as per the drawings and shall
make the connections to DM effluent line complete with all fittings (Tee, flange adapters), valve,
valve chamber etc to engineers approval.

Location of tie in connection to be approved by engineer andDM roads and planning departments.
Connection of power supply and signal cable for irrigation controller from nearest DM filtration
chamber / DM Irrigation controller is part of the contract.

All crossings across major roads/dual carriageways and U-turns shall be either through ducts or no
dig method.

It shall be done strictly as per DM specifications and to the Aprroval of the concerned Departments.
Back filling and road base to be tested by an approved independent laboratory at least one test per
200 mtr. interval and part thereof & 30 mtr interval and part thereof respectively or as per the
request at specific location by DM Roads Department Services Co-ordination Office & by the
Engineer.

Sweet soil filling, levelling and contouring for landscape areas shall be as per the landscape
drawings and also providing the tree pits is part of the contract. The sweet soil shall be taken from
Khawaneej borrow pits. The landscape patterns should be marked with lime powder, stakes and
nylon ropes. Shapes and dimensions of these patterns are shown in detail in the landscape
drawings.

The contractor to modify all the existing manhole chambers; in the proposed Landscape area (if
required); to the approval of the Engineer and the concerned service authorities; in order to match
its top levels with the proposed landscaping levels.

The contractor shall reinstate all roads and footpath where affected by the installation of irrigation
system to the approval of the engineer and DM Roads Department.

Refer to the attached “ Particular specification and relevant application of Administrative order No.
16 and 22 for Drainage, Sewerage and Irrigation Projects.”

Page 75 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.2.2 Submittals

The contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following documentation for review and approval,
before commencing work:

7.2.3 Materials and equipment schedule

All catalogue cuts, diagrams, samples, drawings and such other data may be required to
demonstrate compliance with the specification.

7.2.4 Existing services and no objection certificates

Prior to start of any work at site the contractor has to approach all Service Authorities in Dubai to
get their no objection for the work included in this contract and a record drawings for their existing
services. Copy of these drawings and no objection certificate should be submitted to the Engineer
before starting the actual work at site.

7.2.5 Shop drawings and verification of dimensions

Please note that the contractor to make detail survey of existing levels in the contract area. Trial
pits should be taken at every 50 meter interval, mark all the existing services in reference to the
road edge & building line along with its depth from existing the ground level & the proposed
Landscape finish level.

Contractor to check availability of all the existing ducts that are marked on the tender drawings.
Contractor to propose the route of Irrigation piping based this information.

All this information regarding trial pits, existing and proposed levels, availability of existing ducts
shall be made available to DM Engineer within mobilisation period of the contract. All this
information shall be made available on hardcopy & in Digital format to DM as it is required for
adjusting landscape and pipes/services alignment.

Any delay to provide the above-mentioned information regarding trial trenchs, existing services &
levels which affects the progress of works shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Dubai
Municipality keeps the right to take necessary action and penalise the Contractor in such
circumstances.

The successful contractor shall submit shop drawings, for approval by the Engineer, for the
following:

1 In case of any conflict between contract drawings and any existing or future services which may
necessitate re-routing proposed irrigation Main or laterals, the contractor has to prepare the
shop drawings accordingly and submit it to the Engineer for approval. This should be considered
as integral part of the contract.
2 The Filtration Chamber mechanical, electrical and civil works shop drawings. Necessary
modifications to the existing feeding chambers (civil and mechanical). Valve chambers including
valves, pipe works and civil works. Electrical control equipment with circuit diagrams.

3 Details of mainline, Profile drawings for Mainline, lateral pipes and other typical connections.
4 Wiring diagrams including conduits, pull boxes, sizing and calculations to verify that cable sizing
is in accordance with DEWA regulations and equipment manufacturers recommendations.
5 Electrical power and control wiring diagrams for irrigation controllers, field wiring and grounding
including all interfaces.
6 Sketch plans for drip line layout.
7 Sketch plans for Sprayer and Sprinkler layouts.
8 Detail of valve chambers and any modification to the existing feeding chambers.

The approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibility under the contract for
successful completion of the work.

Page 76 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.2.6 Manufacturers certifications

uPVC Pipe and fittings

Certification by a recognized certification mark scheme such as "The Kitemark " or by an
independent third party testing organization approved by the Engineer, that production has been
carried out under a system for supervision, control and testing, applied during manufacture, in
accordance with BS 5750 or an approved equal procedure.

Valve, and Special Steel Fitting

Manufacturer's certificate for pressure testing, and coating, including holiday and DFT test reports
for each valve, fitting, spool if applicable.

Emitters
Certification of coefficient of manufacturer's variation.

7.2.7 Recommendation of the manufacturers

The contractor shall submit manufacturers’ recommendations for installation and commissioning of
each material or piece of equipment for approval prior to commencing work. Recommendations
shall include testing methods, storage requirements, (if applicable) maintenance and operational
data. The contractor shall have a copy of the manufacturers' instructions available on site at all
times while works in progress and shall follow these instructions unless otherwise authorized to
deviate by the Engineer.

7.2.8 Spare parts

The contractor shall submit manufacturer's list of spare parts for approval prior to commissioning
any piece of equipment. Recommendations shall include stocking recommendations, exploded
assembly diagrams illustrating location and spare parts to be utilized and all relevant operational
data.

7.2.9 Installations and testing

The contractor shall submit his proposed work method statement for approval prior to commencing
work. The statement shall detail proposed sequence of work, hold points, testing frequency and
document control.

7.2.10 Program/progress reports

The contractor shall submit a program of works as per the clause 14 of the condition of the contract
for approval.

The contractor also shall submit monthly progress report at the end of each month including all the
works constructed during the month with photographs, numbers of staff and laborers, cash flow,
test reports, overall progress and general details as per engineer approval.

7.2.11 Manufacturer's literature

At such time as the list of materials has been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
four (4) sets of manufacturer's technical and maintenance literature to the Engineer. Data sheets
shall provide sufficient technical information to identify each product and shall include the name
and the address of the nearest supply firm which should have a local representative in the Emirates
of Dubai.

7.2.12 Circuit diagram

Contractor Must Submit All Circuit Diagrams Of Electrical Installation Along With Samples And
Specifications Of Materials Proposed In Order To Obtain Approval Prior To Fabrication Or
Installation.

Page 77 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.2.13 As-built drawings and operation & maintenance manual

As-built drawings
The Contractor shall maintain one set of contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording
accurate changes made; as the work progresses ("As-Built" conditions) of the irrigation system. All
changes previously approved and all completed work shall be recorded on these drawings.

The contractor shall prepare as-built drawings clearly showing all location, depths, slopes, heights,
shapes and dimensions of all the works as executed. All valve locations and piping shall be
dimensioned and recorded (except that wire locations, common to pipe ditches, need not to be
dimensioned). The contractor should clearly mention location of lines, chambers etc. in reference
to building line and center line of the roads. The contractor must submit as built drawings for all
electrical installations.

Sizes of the all the as-built drawings should same as that of DM Drainage & Irrigation Department
Standard (approx. 120cm X 60cm) size.

All as built drawings should be prepared using Micro-station program (latest version for windows).
Mainline layouts to be on DM survey sheets (scale 1:1000) as per Dubai municipality Drainage &
Irrigation Department requirements and approval. As-builts drawings of Mainline layouts of
Automatic Irrigation system Main and Irrigation Network Mains should on separate drawings for
each.

Contractor should prepare and submit as-builts drawings for the pipeline profiles of the Mainlines
which are of size 4” and above. Pipeline profile drawings should be in Horizontal scale of 1:1000
and Vertical scale of 1:100. Pipeline profiles to be submitted on separate drawings with clear
references to Mainline layout drawings marked on the same.

The Contractor to follow the Standards (regarding Legend, linestyles, colours, levels, size of
drawings etc.) of DM Drainage and Irrigation Department while preparing As-built Drawings.

Chambers Schedule are to be prepared indicating all relevant Construction items and giving co-
ordinates for each manhole in compliance with DM gird System.
The contractor must submit as built drawings for all the electro-mechanical installations. All the
details of the installed equipment regarding Manufacturer and Model No., type, size etc. shall be
provided in the legend of the drawings.

Pipeline profile drawings should be in Horizontal scale of 1:1000 and Vertical scale of 1:100.

Lateral line Layouts for Sprinklers/sprayers, Drip and bubblers shall be in Scale 1:500.

All the Layout drawings should be shown on background of light coloured Landscape as-builts, for
easy reference.

The Contractor should follow the Standards (regarding Legend, linestyles, colours, levels, size of
drawings, title block etc.) of DM Drainage and Irrigation Department while preparing As-built
Drawings.

After final approval to the As-built drawings, contractor to submit the following before the final taking
over of the project.

1 Three complete sets of "As-Built Drawings" folded properly and provided in Plastic folders as a
part of Operation & Maintenance Manual.
2 A set of mother prints (on heavy grade Polyester) and
3 A copy of computer discs: CDs (with proper titles and plastic enclosure box) please note that
zip files will not be accepted.

Provisional acceptance will not be considered unless contractor submits all the above-said as built
drawings.

Page 78 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Notes
1 Contractor to check all existing irrigation system within the contract area (along with existing
filtration chambers) and shall record those details in the as-built drawings of the project.
2 Contractor to prepare & submit the detailed records results of trial pits and trenches. All such
information shall be submitted to DM in digital format and hard copies.
3 Contractor to prepare & submit the detailed results of trial pits and trenches for records. Record
of all trial holes executed under this contract shall be made available in the form of drawings
(Scale 1:1000 for Plans & 1:100 for sections) to be the part of as-built set of drawings. These
drawings shall be made available to Services Co-ordination Unit of Roads Department, Dubai
Municipality. All such information shall be submitted to DM in digital format and hard copies.

Operation And maintenance manuals

Assemble three (3) copies of manuals containing operating & maintenance nstructions for each
piece of equipment and systems requiring service and Prints of As-built drawings as described
above. O & M manuals shall be bound in a hard cover 3-ring binder of suitable size and properly
indexed. Cover & Manual shall be as per DM standards and to be approved by DM.

O & M manuals shall include the following information

- Description of equipment.
- Operation of equipment.
- Maintenance of equipment & lubrication Schedule
- Servicing of equipment
- Control Diagrams.
- Irrigation Valve Operation Schedule c/w Controller station No., Valve no., size, flows, operating
time etc.
- Diagrams of the system.
- Logic of Operation of the Systems.
- Valve Charts.
- Performance characteristics: Curves and charts for equipment (Data shall refer to, and identify
specific modelling service and shall not be general advertising data)
- Spare parts list
- Names, Contact numbers & Addresses of Spare part suppliers.
- Test reports.
- Certificates
- Bill of Quantities of Material used in the Contract.
- Letter of Satisfaction
- Guarantees.

A digital copy of Operation & Maintenance manual complete with Valve operation Schedule, Circuit
& control diagrams shall be submitted to DM along with As-built drawings

Submit one copy of the manual to the Engineer for review and Three final copies to the Client after
the final approval of the Engineer. Provisional acceptance will not be considered unless contractor
submits complete O & M manuals and as-built drawings.

7.3 Silence of specification

The apparent silence of the specification, drawings or other contract documents as to any detail or
the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded
as meaning that only the best general practice is to be used. All interpretations of the specifications
will be made by the Engineer on this basis.

7.4 System explanations

During site visits by the Engineer, operation of the system will be delineated to all authorized
persons desiring such information.

Three copies detailed system operation and maintenance brochure will be provided to the Client at
the completion of the project by the Contractor.

Page 79 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.5 Layout of work

The Contractor shall stake out the irrigation system in accordance with the scaled plans. Staking
shall be erected in such a manner as to insure permanency of the staked locations until such time
as the irrigation system is installed. Stakes shall be placed to show location of valves, pipelines
and control head. Stakes shall be flagged with bright flagging for ease of location. All staking by
the Contractor shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall stake the landscape patterns as shown on the landscape drawings. These
patterns shall be marked with lime powder and nylon ropes for future use by DM Horticulture section
during plantation phase.

7.6 Clean-up

During the course of construction, the Contractor shall remove waste material from the site
continually as is necessary to keep the site in an orderly manner. Waste material shall be removed
from the work site and not to be used as back-fill material. Upon completion of the contract, the
Contractor shall remove all waste equipment and parts and leave the site in a neat and orderly
condition.

7.7 Warranty

All work included under this contract shall be warranted by the Contractor against all defects and
malfunction of materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of completion of
works. Should problems arise with the system during the warranty period, all necessary repairs
and/or replacements shall be made by the Contractor in an expedient manner at no additional
cost to the Client.

The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the system for a period
of one year from the completion date.

7.8 Product storage and handling

All products shall be delivered in the manufacturers’ original protective packaging and shall be
inspected at time of delivery. Any product which are damaged and not in accordance with
specifications, or date stamp expired, shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced.

Evidence must be submitted to verify materials, such as uPVC pipes, solvent cement , rubber
gaskets etc., have been properly protected during transport and storage prior to delivery to the site.

All products shall be handled and stored in accordance with printed recommendations of the
manufacturer.

All site storage areas shall be shaded at all time. Pipe stacks shall be designed to ensure that pipes
and especially pipe sockets are not deformed during storage and/or effected by sunlight.

Precautions shall also be taken to protect items sensitive to sunlight or heat prior to backfilling
operation. uPVC pipes shall on no account be exposed to sunlight for more than two days in
summer, or one week in winter. Any pipe, whether installed or not, which is observed to be
sunburn, or oval, shall immediately be removed from the site and replaced.

7.9 Operation and maintenance

The contractor will be responsible for operation, scheduling, and inspection of the system for one
year till completion of end of defects liability period. Contractor should provide a skilled operator,
a pipe filter and a helper who are experienced in widely irrigation requirements over various planting
times and climatic conditions for the optimal performance of the irrigation system. All these staff
should be available for full time on the site. Operating the system should be combined with the
instructions of the designer to formulate a set of standard operating procedures for the system.
During the planting and establishment time of the plantation Irrigation operation should be provided

Page 80 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

as per the requirements of Horticulture Department in co-ordination with DM Irrigation Maintenance

Section.

Complete inspections are necessary during the operation of the irrigation system as follows:

Inspections of all the irrigation equipment line sprayers, sprinklers, dripper lines, injection system
etc., should be done regularly during the operation of the system for their proper and optimal
operation. Each zone should be inspected for excessively wet areas that might indicate leaks and
dry patches which indicate improper coverage of the sprayers / sprinklers.

Equipment should be adjusted and corrected to give the optimum performance.

Drip lines, and irrigation pipes should be inspected for breakages and attended immediately to
repair the same.

Arc and throw of sprayers and sprinklers should be inspected and adjusted in such a way that it
will not throw the water on the roads and stems of the palm trees. All the pressure regulators of
solenoid valves should be adjusted to give the recommended pressures.

Filters and Basket Stainers must be inspected and cleaned periodically.

7.10 Irrigation system, materials

7.10.1 Scope

The scope of this section includes a description of materials and methods for the hydraulic element
of the system.

All materials covered by this specification shall be from an approved local representative in the
Emirate of Dubai qualified to provide the appropriate level of technical support.

All equipment, fittings and accessories shall be suitably rated to comply with the system design and
operating parameters.

Note: Following are general specifications of D.M. for the Irrigation materials, the items which are
not required in this project shall not be considered in the scope of the works.

7.11 Pipes and fittings

7.11.1 uPVC Pipe and fittings

uPVC piping shall be fabricated from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride according to BS 3505:1968
and BS 3506:1969. Rating and size shall be as shown on the drawings but not less than class D.
Pipe shall be supplied in lengths no smaller than six (6) meters. Each length of pipe shall bear
markings of identify type and grade. All piping shall show no evidence of blisters, grooves or other
extrusion marks. The Contractor shall provide three (3) samples of each size, one meter in length
for approval prior to supply and installation. All pipes three inches ( 3") and above to be with Lock
Ring Socket. The socket to be integral part of the pipe and in accordance to BS 4346 part 2 : 1970
and it should incorporate a triple compression rubber seal complying with BS 2494 : part 2 and
when jointed offers three-fold hydraulic security under both positive and negative pressure heads.
The socket should have the same wall thickness as the pipe with an extra sleeve to maintain the
correct pressure rating at the joint.

All joints in pipe shall be made by solvent welding using adhesive solvent and primer as
recommended, in writing, by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. All cans of solvent
and primer shall have labels intact and shall be stamped with date of manufacture. No cans dated
over two years old will be permitted. No thinning of solvent or primer will be permitted. Lubricant
and solvent cement used to make joints shall be approved in writing by the pipe manufacturer or
his designated representative and the Engineer. Only male joints may be used up to 2".

Page 81 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Joints larger than 2" shall not be threaded. All threaded joints shall be made up using PTFE tape
or an approved equal thread sealant.

Pipes sized 1-1/4 " and larger shall be of class D (12 bars working pressure) and smaller pipes
shall be class E ( 15 bars working pressure ). Fittings shall be fabricated from UPVC according to
BS 4346.

For sizes upto 6” uPVC fittings shall be used. All uPVC pipes and fittings should be covered by
licensed Kite mark. All uPVC fittings shall be of pressure ratings not less than 15 bar at 20 deg.
Celcius and 9 bar at 50 deg. Celcius.
For sizes 8” and above GRP fittings with 15 bar pressure ratings shall be used in chambers.

On no account saddle and cross type connections be made to uPVC pipe should be used. All uPVC
pipes passing through ducts shall be solvent weld joints.

Flange adopters & couplers shall be PN 16 and in accordance with BS 4504. All Bolts and nuts
(whether part of the coupler or for fixing) shall be A4-70 stainless steel.

Threaded riser pipe used to support valves and sprinklers and fittings may be galvanized steel, or
brass. All galvanizing shall be carried out after threading.

7.11.2 Polyethylene pipe and fittings

Polyethylene pipes for drip lines shall be manufactured from linear low-density polyethylene
incorporating a minimum of 2.8% carbon black and shall have a working pressure of 4 kg/cm2.

A random samples of drip pipes shall be subjected to the Teepol crack resistance test. The
samples shall be immersed in a bath containing a solution of 10% Teepol and 90% water
maintained at 50 degrees C. The pipe should resist the solution without showing any fatigue or
crack for a period of 150 hours.

The test should be carried out in an independent laboratory within U.A.E.

All fittings for drip line shall be compression type. Insert barbed type fittings secured by plastic
ratchet clips shall not be used.

For the trees planted (in planters) in the tiled areas and in grass areas; a common drip line (with
single dripline riser for several trees) running through conduit is not allowed. A separate dripline
riser from PVC lateral line shall be provided for each tree/planter.

The pipes for bubbler and dripline risers connections shall be as per BS. 1972-67 class C.

The fittings for the above pipes should be of compression quick joint type with minimum 12 bar
nominal pressure.

7.11.3 Steel pipe and fittings

Steel pipe shall conform to API standard schedule 80 or other equal and approved. Welded fittings
shall be schedule 80 and weldneck. Flanges shall be in accordance with BS4504 PN16. All bolts,
nuts and washers used for flange assembly or integral with bolted couplers shall be stainless steel
(A4-70).

All Pipes and fittings to be coated inside and outside by electrostatic fusion bonded epoxy to
average DFT 150 microns, or by fusion bonded plastic powder coating to average DFT 500
microns.

7.11.4 Threaded steel pipes & fittings (for 3” and below)

Threaded steel pipes and fittings used for risers shall be hot dip galvanized mild steel class ( C ) in
accordance with BS 1387.

Page 82 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

All G.I. & Steel Pipes and fittings to be coated, inside and outside with electrostatic fusion bonded
epoxy to average DFT 150 microns or by fusion bonded plastic powder coating to average DFT
500 microns.

Any galvanized pipe installed in contact with the soil shall be wrapped with at least two layers of an
approved petrolatum impregnated tape of min. thickness of 1.15mm and applied with 50% over lap.
The wrapping tape shall extend a minimum of 100 mm above the soil. Steel piping and fittings
shall only be installed above ground or otherwise specified.

Joints shall be threaded and sealed with PTFE tape or some other approved method. Connections
to the flanged equipment shall be via threaded flanged adopters. All bolts, nuts and washers used
for flange assembly or integral with bolted couplers shall be stainless steel A4-70.

7.11.5 Ductile iron pipe and fittings

Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with BS 4772 or ISO 2531. They shall be
supplied by an internationally known and approved manufacturer. Ductile iron pipes and fittings
shall be supplied, stored, laid, back-filled and tested in accordance with CP 2010. The pipes shall
not exceed 5.5 meters in length and push-in or flexible mechanical joints shall be used unless
otherwise stated .

Where flanged joints are used, the flanges shall be faced and drilled to PN16 as defined in BS
4504, unless directed otherwise. Flanged joints shall be made with inside bolt circle gaskets as
described in BS 4865 part 1, and gaskets from plain rubber to BS 1737. Bolts shall be stainless
steel Grade A4-70, complete with nuts and washers. The threaded portion of bolts shall be of such
length that at least two threads shall protrude beyond the nut when tightened.

Pipe barrels shall be class K9, tapers, bend and pipes with cast on flanges shall be class K12, and
tees shall be class K14.

The internal and external surfaces of all ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be coated according to
one of the following methods:

- Fusion Bonded Plastic Powder Coating (average 500 microns)

- Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating (minimum 300 microns)

7.11.6 Asbestos cement pipes

Asbestos cement pipes shall be class 18 confirming to the requirements of ISO 160:1980 with 5m
length. The cement shall be sulfate resistance to BS 4027. The joints shall be of Reka type coupling
or approved equal. All AC pipes and joints shall be coated externally with bitumen.

Couplers shall be made from the same materials as the pipe and shall be flexible allowing a
deviation of 1 to 5 degrees under normal circumstances. Jointing couplers shall be multi-toothed
EPDM rubber seal. Rubber seals should conform with BS 2494.

Copies of all test reports and certificates of compliance shall be submitted to the Engineer for each
consignment delivered to the site. Witnessing of factory testing by the Engineer may be required
prior to delivery. The AC pipes and couplers should be manufactured by the same manufacturer in
Dubai Emirate and to be approved be the Engineer.

7.11.7 GRP pipes and fittings

All pipes and fittings shall have a resin rich inner layer, having a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm and
a resin rich outer layer having a minimum thickness of 0.25mm incorporating one layer of "C" glass.
The remainder of the liner shall consist of at least one layer of 450 g/m powder bound acid resistant
chipped glass strand mat having a glass content between 25 and 30 % by weight.

All glass reinforcement shall be of the "ECR" type. All pipes and fittings shall have an stiffness of
not less than 7500 N/M and satisfy the requirement of ASTM D 3262-87. Pipes shall withstand
longitudinal tensile force of 100 N/mm of circumference. All the flanges shall be PN16.

Page 83 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

All fittings (including bends, tees, reducers and flanges) used with AC pipelines shall be GRP (glass
fibre reinforced plastic) fittings and shall comply with the following specification:

AWWA C 950 - 88 AWWA Standard for “Fibreglass”

(Glass Fibre Reinforced Resin) Pressure Pipe

BS 5480 : 1990 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (GRP) pipe and Fittings for use for water
supply Sewerage; parts 1&2.

General
This specification covers the design manufacture and testing of glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP)
pressure fittings for use with Asbestos cement pressure pipe in nominal sizes 80mm and larger.
GRP fittings and pipe shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C950-88
and the requirements herein. All components shall be produced by one manufacturer.

The manufacturer shall be approved by Dubai Municipality and must demonstrate the experience
and capability to produce fittings of the same diameter and pressure range as those required. The
manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9002 or BS 5750 Part : 2. Full range of fitting diameters used
for the project must be manufactured and delivered by the same manufacturer.

Construction
GRP fittings shall have the following principal construction:

A corrosion resistant, resin rich having a minimum thickness of 0.5mm. The liner surface in contact
with water shall be reinforced with “C” glass veil or mat impregnated with Vinylester or Epoxy Resin.
The liner shall be continuous along the circumference of the pipe and shall be of uniform thickness
and composition.

A structural wall consisting of continuous glass filament findings and/or woven rovings and chopped
glass reinforcement and may include fine fillers, all impregnated with Isophethalic, Vinylester or
Epoxy resin as required.

A resin-rich exterior surface having a minimum thickness of 0.025mm.

No dark pigments shall be allowed in the GRP fittings.

GRP fittings and flanges shall be designed in accordance with AWWA C950 for service at the
following conditions:

Maximum operating pressure 16 Bar

Maximum allowable vacuum 1 bar
Minimum depth of water 1.0 meter
Maximum depth of cover 3.0 meter
Truck loading (wheel load) 90 KN
Service temperature (Maximum) 40 deg. C

Flange X flange fittings shall be designed for installation above ground (in chambers) without thrust
blocks. Flange branches on Spigot Tees shall be designed to resist end thrust from closed valves.

Spigot joints, where specified shall have the same outside diameter (OD) as approved by Dubai
Municipality for Asbestos cement (AC) pipe to which it is to be joined. The joint dimensions and
tolerances shall be equal to AC pipe spigots such that joint remains watertight under all normal
operating and surge conditions. The spigot ends shall be clearly marked with a “homeline”
indicating the proper insertion limit for the AC couplings. The spigot width shall not be less than
half the AC coupling joint width.

Flanged joints, where specified shall be GRP filament would flanged manufactured from Epoxy or
Vinylester resin and glass reinforcements. Flanges shall be flat faced and drilled to BS 4504 PN 16
drilling pattern.

Page 84 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

GRP Flange gasket (full face) design and thickness shall be as recommended by the GRP fitting
manufacturer. Hand lay-up flanges shall not be acceptable.

Laminated or adhesive joints used in the fabrication of fittings shall be equal or superior in strength
to the sections they join. The thickness of laminated joints shall not be less than the wall thickness
of the adjoining pipe section. All hand laminations or windings shall utilize only one type of resin
throughout.

Chemical requirements
GRP fittings shall be not impart any date, odour or colour to drinking water. GRP pipe/fittings shall
be certified and listed for portable water use by the water research center (WRC) U.K., in
accordance with BS 6920 or by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) - USA in accordance with
NSF standard 14.

Dimensions
GRP fittings shall be produced in Metric sizes and shall be classified by their nominal inside
diameter (ND). The actual fitting inside diameter shall not be less than that shown in the table
below:

Table 7.3 Dimensions

Nominal diameter (ND) (mm) Minimum inside diameter (mm)

80 78
100 98
150 148
200 198
225 223
250 245
300 298
350 348
400 397
450 447
500 497
550 547
600 597
700 696
800 795
900 895
1000 995
1200 1195

All standard fittings up to and including diameter 300 mm used in the distribution system shall be
filament wound on precision steel moulds. Standard 90 and 45 degree bends of nominal diameter
300mm and smaller shall be of the smooth radius type, having a turning radius of 1.5 times the
bend nominal diameter. Fittings diameter 350mm and larger may be of the moulder or mitered
(manufactured from GRP pipe sections) construction and internal surfaces shall be finished
smooth.

The thickness of GRP flanges shall not be less than shown in the table below:

Page 85 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Table 7.4 Thickness of GRP flanges

Nominal diameter (ND) (mm) Minimum GRP flange thickness (mm)

800-100 38
150-200 44
225 46
250-350 54
400 58
450 64
500-60 68
700 72
800 78
900 85
1000 88
1200 108

The wall thickness of GRP fittings shall be determined by the manufacturer to meet the design
requirements of this specifications but shall in no case be less than the minimum thickness shown
in the table below:

Table 7.5 Wall thickness of GRP fittings

Nominal diameter (ND) (mm) Minimum pipe thickness (mm)

80-400 6.0
450 6.7
500 7.5
550 8.2
600 9.0
700 10.5
800 12
900 13.5
1000 15
1200 18

Flange drilling shall be as per BS 4504 PN 16

Mechanical properties

GRP fittings shall meet the following minimum strength requirements:

Page 86 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Table 7.6

Property test method Minimum value as per

table
Hoop tensile stress ASTM 2290 Portable 10 of AWWA C950 for class 250
psi
Axial tensile stress ASTM D 638 Portable 11 of AWWA C950 for class 250
psi
Axial Tensile Stress for flg. X flg. ASTM D638 70 Mpa
fittings
Stiffness (E1/D3) ASTM D2412

Dia 300 1000 Pa

Dia 300 5000 Pa

Visual Requirements
GRP fittings shall be free from delamination, crazing, dry areas or cracks. Spigot ends shall be
free from end delamination, torn edges and gauges and shall be finished smooth to ensure water
tightness. All laminates shall be fully cured with a minimum Barcol hardness of 33 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2583.

Testing
Routine tests
The following test shall be carried out by the GRP pipe/fittings manufacturer at the frequency
specified. Test results and certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for each consignment
delivery. Witnessing of factory testing by the Engineer may be required. The Dubai Municipality
and the Engineer shall have the right to retain up to 2% of the material delivered back to the factory
for inspection and /or testing by their representative at no additional cost.

Test method shall be in accordance with AWWA C 90 5480.

Table 7.7 Test

Test Frequency
Visual Inspection every item
Dimensions every item
Hydraulic pressure at 24 bars once per 10 Flg. x Flg. for 30 seconds
items
Stiffness once per 100 items
Barcol hardness (resin cure) every item
Axial & Hoop Tensile stress once per 100 items
All GRP pipe used for fitting fabrication shall be factory
pressure tested at 24 bars for 60 seconds.

Qualifications (type) tests

The following tests shall be carried out on actual pipe/fittings produced by the manufacturer to
establish and accept the design basis for the products. These testes are not routine quality control
tests.

1 Long-term hydrostatic design pressure of the GRP pipe or fitting shall be established in
accordance with AWWA C950 Section 2.4.2.
2 Short-term hoop tensile strength shall be within the ultimate strength of the pipe fittings.
Laminated joints and flanged joints shall withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 3.5 times the
rated working pressure with no signs of leakage or weep. For Flanges joints, the flanges shall
be blinded and the ends unrestrained during the test.

Page 87 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Submittals/drawings
Prior to start of production, the fittings manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer detailed drawings
of each fitting required for approval. Design calculations, samples and sample testing may also
require by the Engineer for approval at no extra cost to the client.

For flanged fittings, the manufacturer shall submit before delivery, the recommended gasket details,
the bolt torque sequence and maximum recommended torque for each flange shall be supplied.

Markings
Each fitting shall be indelibly marked with the following:
- Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
- Nominal diameter (ND) in mm (inside and outside)
- Pressure rating in bars
- Manufacturing date, month & year
- Inspection mark
- Coupling “homeline”, “position” position on spigot end.

Tangential Flanged Tee

This shall be used as Washout tee which shall have a bottom tangantial flanged outlet. Tee shall
be Spigot X spigot X Branch Flange. The size and the configuration of the Tee shall be as detailed
on the drawings. The detail of the product and engineering data shall be submitted.

7.11.8 Dust cap

Dust cap should be fixed at the end of each 4mm tube to prevent insects and dirt from entering
the tube. The cap should be durable plastic and heat resistant.

7.11.9 Staple Stake

All drip tubes tubes shall be hold on the soil by Staple stake. The stake should be polypropylene,
minimum 220mm long, durable and heat resistant. Tails of the stakes shall be provided with integral
barb type flaps to increase retention in soil. The drip line shall be hold on the soil by the same
length staple stake at 10 m interval. The stake shall be featured separated surface to grip the drip
line.

7.12 Valves

7.12.1 Solenoid valves

Automatic remote control valves shall be of the sizes prescribed on the plan. The valves shall be
normally closed diaphragm type with slow opening and closing action for protection against surge
pressure. Actuation shall be by encapsulated type solenoids and rated 24 volts, 50 cycle unless
otherwise specified.

Construction shall provide for convenient access to functional parts without removal of valve from
system plumbing. A manual flow control adjustment, with shut-off capability, shall be furnished on
all valves. Valve pressure rating shall not be less than 200 PSI.

The diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced BUNA-N rubber, and provide for a positive seal
between bonnet and body. The solenoid functional parts shall be of stainless steel, brass or bronze
for corrosion resistance. Diameter shall be as shown on plan. A mechanism shall be provided for
bleeding of the diaphragm chamber for manual operation. Valves shall be fabricated from heavy
cast brass or bronze. The valve shall be capable of working under dirty (Treated sewage) water
conditions. Inlet and outlet shall be threaded B.S.P.

All valves shall be provided with a pressure regulator capable of regulating downstream pressure
between 15 to 100 PSI ( within an accuracy of +or- 5PSI) regardless of upstream pressure. It shall
provide full and accurate pressure regulating capabilities irrespective of whether it is operated
electrically or manually. The pressure measurement should be possible via schrader valve or
integral pressure gauge.

Page 88 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

All the solenoid valves shall have its dedicated unique nos through a decoder system. This decoder
shall be water proof and works on low power signal from irrigation controller. Decoder shall be
compatible to irrigation controller.

In each distribution chamber there shall be master solenoid valve. It shall be connected to irrigation
via compatible decoder. Material of construction shall be glass wool nylon (3”- female threaded) &
ductile iron (4” – flanged PN 16).

7.12.2 Check valve

Check valves three inches ( 3") and above shall be double flanged single door swing type
having ductile iron body and gunmetal seat to BS1400 .Pressure Rating to be PN 16 or more. All
valves shall be coated with epoxy internally and externally to average DFT 300 microns for
protection against corrosion of body components. All nut bolts to be of stainless steel grade 316/
A4-70.

Check valves of two inches (2") and smaller shall be spring type manufactured from Brass or
Bronze. Inlet and outlet to be BSP female threaded. The spring to be of stainless steel. Pressure
rating to be PN16 or more.

7.12.3 Gate valve

Gate valves three inches ( 3") and larger shall be double flange, ductile iron waterworks valves,
with wedge type gate and non-rising stem. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with
DIN3352. All valves shall be coated with epoxy internally and externally to average DFT 300
microns for protection against corrosion of body components. Valves installed below ground
shall be provided with stem cap for key operation.

Valves to have non rising stem of stainless steel , stem nut brass or cast aluminium bronze with
gun metal. Body components shall be of Ductile cast iron SG GGG-50 . Stem sealing by elestomer/
NBR rubber ‘O’ rings.

Up to size DN 400 resilient seated Gate valves are preferred with ductile iron wedge fully covered
with special grade elastomer EPDM rubber. Heavy duty steel keys with head configuration to
fit operating nut and handle length as required for proper above ground operation shall be provided
in numbers specified by the Engineer.

Valves above ground shall be provided with hand wheel. Nominal pressure for the valves shall be
16 bar or more. All bolts and nuts to be stainless steel grade A4-70.

Gate valves two inches (2") in diameter and smaller shall have non-rising stem and be
manufactured from brass or bronze according to BS 5154. Inlet and outlet to be screwed BSP.
Rating to be PN16 or above.

7.12.4 Air valve

Provide automatic double orifice air vents at all high points on the pressure mains. Air valves and
other similar items shall confirm to BS 2591. Automatic air valves shall have non corrosive floats in
chambers with clear space ensuring blockage free operation. All components for the air valve
actuating mechanism including lever shall be stainless steel.

The body and cover of the valve should be of bronze or ductile iron with phenolic primer coating.
Nozzles with seals and actuating mechanism to be located in the removable upper plate connected
to the valve body using stainless steel (grade 316/A4-70) bolts. Valves shall be coated with epoxy
internally and externally to average DFT 300 microns for protection against corrosion of body
components. All nut bolts to be of stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70

Pressure rating of the valve shall be 16 bar. The internal components shall be stainless steel. The
valve size and installation shall be as per site conditions and engineer instruction.
7.12.5 Electrically actuated Butterfly valve

Page 89 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Electrically actuated Butterfly valves shall comply in all respects with DIN 3354 - PN16 Body of
Ductile cast iron SG GGG-40 Valve disc shall be of Stainless steel 316.

All valves shall be coated with epoxy internally and externally to average DFT 300 microns for
protection against corrosion of body components.

Butterfly valve shall be flanged type to DIN 250 , part 1 for PN 16 , face to face dimensions to DIN
3202-K1 corresponds to ISO 5752 , concentric type , streamlined design.

With replaceable seat ring , fusion bonded on backing ring , leak tight closure on both directions.
For operation at differential pressure at maximum 16 bars with operating gears with eletric part
turn actuator .

Variant DN-40-300 ,K1, Seat ring NBR (BUTA N ) , Shaft S.S. 1.4005, Maximum working
temperature +80 degree celcius with maximum working pressure 16 bars.

All nut bolts to be of stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70

Electric actuators shall have to open and close of at least 60 seconds and shall be provided with
an auxiliary operating wheel. The motor control should allow for stepped closing of valve pausing
at ½ closed and ¼ closed.

Motor and electrical protection shall be in strict accordance with the electrical specifications and
DEWA regulations; motors shall be rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 50 degrees
centigrade, and a relative humidity of 100 %.

Electrically actuated butterfly valve shall be connected to low pressure cut-off switch for automatic
closing of valve in case of low pressure (downstream of valve) due to any breakage in the system.
But valve should not be closed if both downstream and up- stream pressure is low.(due to
shutdown/ breakage of TSE Network Main). For this purpose Contractor should arrange a
differential pressure switch and arrange required control in combination with other controls.

Complete control of the valve including partial closing of valve should be possible.

Electrical components shall be protected from condensation.

7.12.6 Pressure reducing, pressure sustaining & check valve

These valves shall be installed as indicated on drawings to maintain a constant downstream

pressure regardless of demand fluctuations. The valve shall be automatic, fluid actuated, with a
flexible non-wicking, FDA approved, nylon fabric reinforced elastomer diaphragm. The pilot shall
be brass and tubing of copper/brass. The valve shall be flanged and of ductile iron body. All internal
and external exposed surfaces shall be FDA approved epoxy coated to minimum DFT 300 microns.
Valve sizes 4” and above shall be standard with an externally mounted Y stainer for protection of
control circuit and ball valves to isolate the pilot system from Main valve. All nut bolts to be of
stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70

The valve shall open and close in modulating action. On pressure reversal, valve shall close tightly.
Adjustable pressure range shall be from 1.0 kg/cm2 to 8.5 Kglcm2

7.12.7 Pressure relief valve

These valve shall be installed in the pump room as shown on drawings to release excess pressure
away from the system.

The valve shall be flanged, diaphragm type , hydraulically operated, pilot controlled, and modulating
type. The pilot shall be brass and tubing of copper/brass. The valve shall be fast opening and slow
closing. The valve shall be flanged and of ductile iron body. All internal and external exposed
surfaces shall be FDA approved epoxy coated to minimum DFT 300 microns. All nut bolts to be of
stainless steel grade 316/ A4-70.

Page 90 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.13 Valve boxes

Air valves (1" or smaller only ), quick coupling valves, solenoid valves and wires pull boxes to be
installed in an access box of sufficient size to permit ready removal of the valve inner assemblies
without removing the box from the ground. Valve names and numbers must be clearly marked
inside and outside of the box with permanent plastic tags.

Valve boxes shall be fabricated from reinforced plastic and minimum recommended size shall be
as follows:

Table 7.8 Recommended size for valve boxes

Cover Depth
Q.C.V. 250 mm (dia.) 230 mm
Pull box, Air valve 1” & Flush valve 430 x 295 mm 300 mm
Solenoid valves up to 2” 590 x 349 mm 380 mm
Solenoid valves above 2” and isolation valves
825 x 495 mm 450 mm
up to 3”

Measurement are taken from the top of boxes. Covers shall be secured by stainless steel (A4-
70)bolts.

Please note - installation of plastic valve boxes in Paved areas and Sikkas are not allowed. All the
valve chambers/pull boxes in paved areas and sikkas shall be in RCC and with heavy duty ductile
iron manhole covers.

7.14 Basket strainer

Ductile iron basket strainer with bolted cover, inlet and outlet to be flanged and drilled to NP 16.
The strainer should be stainless steel with 1/8 inch. perforations. Working pressure is 150 psi. All
bolts and nuts to be stainless steel grade 316 /A4-70. The basket strainer shall be coated internally
and externally with coal tar epoxy 300 DFT micron.

7.15 Pressure compensating emitters & dripper lines

7.15.1 Pressure compensating emitters

Emitters shall be constructed from durable black-heat resistant plastic. The emitters shall be of
barbed configuration which can be inserted easily in to Polyethylene tubing. Pressure
compensation shall be achieved by a flexible orifice located in resilient Silicone Elastomer
diaphragms. The orifice should be self-flushing type and shall clean itself during each irrigation
cycle at the start up and the shutdown. The emitters should have manual flushing capability also.
The emitter exponent shall be 0.10 or less. The body and the diaphragm should be resistant to high
concentration of Chlorine, fertilizers and pesticides.

The capacity of the pressure compensating emitters shall be as follows:

- For palms: a loop of surface dripperline (around tree) with 45.42 lph pressure compensating
emitter spaced equally at the base of the tree. Total number of emiter shall be 3 nos.
- For ornamental trees: a loop of surface dripperline (around tree) with 37.85 lph pressure
compensating emitter spaced equally at the base of the tree. Total number of emitter shall be 3
nos.
- For drought tolerant trees: a loop of surface dripperline (around tree) with 37.85 lph pressure
compensating emitter spaced equally at the base of the tree. Total number of emitter shall be 2
nos.

Page 91 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.15.2 Pressure compensating dripperline

Irrigation equipment. Dripperline shall consists of linear low density Polyethylene tubing with
pressure compensating, self-flushing type integral drip emitters. The tubing shall have an minimum
outside diameter (O.D.) 16mm and thickness of 1.1 mm + 0.05mm. Pipes for drip lines shall be
manufactured from low density polyethylene incorporating a minimum of 2.8% carbon black,
antioxidants in an amount not exceeding 0.5% and shall have a nominal pressure PN 6.

A random samples of drip pipes shall be subjected to the Teepol crack resistance test. The
samples shall be immersed in a bath containing a solution of 10% Teepol and 90% water
maintained at 50 degrees C. The pipe should resist the solution without showing any fatigue or
crack for a period of 150 hours.

The test should be carried out in an independent laboratory within U.A.E.

All fittings for drip line shall be compression type.

The emitters must be pressure compensating according to ISO9260 and emission rate of the
emitter shall remain constant at varying water pressure from 1bar to 4.5 bar. The flow path in emitter
must ensure turbalant flow and emitter must confirm to excellent pressure compensation and self
claning/ Flushing mechanism. The emitter must be clogging resisting and the fitration requirement
not more than 150 mesh. Coefficient of variation shall be less than 5%. the flow of emitter must
remain same /constant at temperatures varying from 0 to 60 deg. celcius.

The product must have warranty against cracking and performance for 7 Years.

Number of dripline risers shall be as per Engineer’s approval. Separate dripline risers shall be for
each planter. Each tree in grass areas shall be provided with separate dripline riser. Drip stakes
shall be provided at eact point of change in direction of drip line and spacing between drip stakes
shall not be more than 10.0 meters

The capacity and spacing of the inbuilt emitters in the surface dripperline shall be as follows:
- For planting shrubs: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 3.5 lph. Spacing between emitters
in the dripperline shall be 50 cm. Spacing between dripper lines should be 30 cm.
- For desert shrubs: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 2.3 lph. Spacing between emitters in
the dripperline shall be 50 cm. Spacing between dripper lines should be 50 cm.
- For ground covers: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 3.5 lph. Spacing between emitters
in the PC dripper line shall be 50 cm. Spacing between dripper lines should be 50 cm; if the
plant density is 3 to 4 plants per square meter.
- For shrubs; on line PC emitters of 8 GPM 2 Nos per plant if if the plant density is 1 to 2 plants
per square meter.
- For desert ground covers: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 2.3 lph. Spacing between
emitters in the dripperline shall be 50 cm. Spacing between dripper lines should be 50 cm.
- For planting hedge: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 3.5 lph. Spacing between emitters
in the dripperline shall be 30 cm x 2 lines with 50 cm spacing.
- For desert hedge: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 2.3 lph. Spacing between emitters in
the dripperline shall be 50 cm x 2 lines with 50 cm spacing.
- For cactus and succulents: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 2.3 lph. Spacing between
emitters in the dripperline shall be 50 cm. Spacing between dripper lines should be 50 cm.

7.15.3 Pressure compensating subsurface dripperline

Material specification of the subsurface dripperline shall be same as the surface dripperline stated
above.

Subsurface dripperline shall have an emitter protection from root intrusion without requiring EPA-
approved handling and shall not use harsh chemicals or treated filters for the protection.

The product shall be dual-layered to provide unmatched resistance to chemicals, algae growth,
and UV damage.

Page 92 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Emitters of the subsurface dripperline shall have extra-wide path combined with self-flushing action
to act as resistance to clogging at the outlet hole.

The product shall contain at least 20% post-consumer recycled polyethylene which qualifies for
LEED credit 4.2.

The capacity and spacing of the inbuilt emitters in the subsurface dripperline shall be as follows:
- For lawn area: discharge rate of each emitter shall be 2.3 lph. Spacing between emitters in the
dripperline shall be 50 cm. Spacing between dripper lines should be 30 cm.

7.16 Pressure compensating bubblers

Bubblers shall be constructed from UL stabilized engineering grade plastic and rubber and shall be
pressure compensating in the range 2.00 to 5.00 bar, delivery shall be umbrella pattern, flow shall
be 0.5 gpm. Inlet shall be 1/2 inch. female threaded.

Stakes for bubblers shall be constructed from strong temperature resistant polypropylene plastic
construction with protective stop collar, length shall be 12 inches each side of inlet with barbed side
inlet suitable for class “ C “ polyethylene pipes, outlet shall be 1/2 inch. external male thread.

7.17 Pop-up sprayers

The sprayers shall have a high level impact strength corrosion resistant body, stem and nozzle.
Pop - up height should be 4". The sprayer shall have a heavy duty stainless steel retraction spring
and piston with slip clutch to facilitate nozzle positioning. The sprayer shall incorporate a wiper seal
to protect the internal mechanism against ingress of foreign material and prevent pressure blowout
and shall have an easily accessible under nozzle screen. The wiper seal should be co-molded type
that ensures flow-by of less than 0.10 US. gpm at low pressure and complete sealing at pressure
greater than 10 psi. The sprayer shall have 12 mm (1/2") threaded inlet.

All sprayers should be provided with built-in seal-a-matic check valve and in stem pressure
regulator to maintain constant outlet pressure of 30 psi.
The sprayer shall have the following performance specification at 2 Bar operating pressure:

Table 7.9 Fifteen (15) series nozzles

Spray pattern Base pressure Radius Discharge

Bars PSI Metres Feet M /HR / US GPM

Full 2.0 30 4.5 15 0.84 3.7

Half 2.0 30 4.5 15 0.63 2.78
Half 2.0 30 4.5 15 0.42 1.85
Quarter 2.0 30 4.5 15 0.21 0.93

Table 7.10 Twelve (12) series nozzles:

Spray pattern Base pressure Radius Discharge

Bars PSI Metres Feet M /HR / US GPM

Full 2.0 30 3.6 12 0.59 2.60

Half 2.0 30 3.6 12 0.44 1.95
Half 2.0 30 3.6 12 0.30 1.30
Quarter 2.0 30 3.6 12 0.15 0.65

Other series nozzles namely 5 and 10 shall also have corresponding discharge rates to have
precipitation rates similar to those above.

Page 93 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

The nozzles shall have precipitation rates matched across sets and across patterns. The standard
nozzle shall be capable of covering 4,5 metre radius at 2.0 bar pressure.

Spacing for the sprayers with standard nozzle shall be 4 meters. For small areas sprayers with low
flow nozzles shall be used as shown on drawings.

7.18 Rotor pop up sprinklers

Turbine or gear drive rotor pop up sprinklers, full and part circle operation with Memory-Arc to
automatically return nozzle stream to set arc. Part circle adjustment shall be from mimimum 40
deg. to 350 degrees. All adjustments of the sprinklers shall be from the top.

The internal mechanism is water lubricated. Heavy-duty plastic case with multi-function wiper seal
and heavy duty retraction stainless spring. All sprinklers should be provided with seal-A-matic
check valve. Bottom inlet to be 3/4" BSP female threaded. Pop up height to be not less than 3 5/8".
The nozzles of all the sprinklers shall be low-pressure models for proper performance even at low
pressures.

The sprinkler shall approx. match the following performance specification a 3.0 bar operating
pressure:

A) Standard (25 deg Trajectory)

Table 7.11 Standard (25 deg trajectory)

Type Radius (meter) Flow (GPM)

Full Circle 12.0 6.0
Three Quarter Circle 12.0 4.4
Half Circle 11.7 3.5
Quarter Circle 9.7 1.6

Spacing for these sprinklers shall be not be more than 10.0 meters.

Table 7.12 Low angle (15 deg trajectory)

Type Radius (meter) Flow (GPM)

Full Circle 6.2 3.56
Three Quarter Circle 6.5 2.46
Half Circle 6.5 1.89
Quarter Circle 6.5 0.92

Spacing for these low angle sprinklers shall be not be more than 6.5 meters.
Sprinklers in tree areas should be with low trajectory angle.

7.19 Filtration chamber (not applicable)

7.19.1 Main pumps

- Centrifugal pumps shall be in-line vertical, multistage, having cast iron body and base. The
pump section (shaft, impellers, guide vanes and chambers) shall be of stainless steel. The
mechanical shaft seal shall have diamond polished Tungsten Carbide or Silicon Carbide seal
faces and heat resistant O-ring. Thrust bearing shall have ample capacity to carry the weight
of all rotating parts plus the hydraulic thrust of the impellers. Motors shall be closed coupled
type.
- Pumps shall be suitable for treated sewage/ brackish water.

Page 94 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

- The inlet and the outlet shall be flanged PN 16.

- Motors shall nominally 2900 rpm, TEFC class F, manufactured generally in accordance with
DEWA regulations and electrical specifications. The power rating for the electric motor should
be 30% above the rated power shown in the manufacturer catalogue.

7.19.2 Sump pump

- Sump pump is required for the Pump Chamber, location and arrangement should be as per
details drawings.
- The pump shall be of robust construction and suitable for pumping corrosive, treated effluent
with high sand content. It should operate at minimum 100mm depth of water.
- Pump body, impellor as well as vital pump components to be of Stainless steel
- Capacity of these pumps should depend on the calculation by the Engineer considering the
whole network of water supply. Delivery line of these pumps to be connected to the nearest
storm water Drainage manhole. This connection shall strictly be as per the specifications & the
requirements of Drainage & Irrigation department.
- Float switch to be provided to operate these pumps automatically if the level of water inside the
filtration chambers comes up.
- All switches and control devices related to these pumps to be fixed in the electric control panel.
- Drain line to be connected from fertilizer room to sump pump pit in Filtration Chambers.

7.20 Filters (not applicable)

Automatic self-cleaning filters specifically designed for use with organic contaminants. Cleaning
shall be effected by a hydraulically powered suction scanner, automatically activated when the
differential pressure across the filter reaches an adjustable level, nominally 5 psi.

The screen shall be stainless steel grade 316 with 200 micron mesh size. Flushing line to be
connected to the soak pits or nearest storm water drainage manhole.

The control system shall feature a failsafe timer to prevent continuous flushing due to malfunction.

The control System for the filters should be such that it will not flush the filters if the pumps and/or
irrigation system is not operating. Filters should flush; only during the operating hours of the
Irrigation System.

The screen area shall not be less than 400 sq. inch.

All the filters shall have isolation valves in the suction as well as delivery side for easy maintenance.
The controller for the filters shall be equipped with timer and pressure differential control unit.
Controller will be fixed in the Electric control panel.

All nuts and bolts shall of stainless steel grade 316 or A4-70.

The filter body and internal parts including flanged connection shall be stainless steel.

Pressure gauges to be connected to suction and delivery side of each filter, pressure gauges to be
mounted in the Electric control panel in isolated compartment.

7.21 Pressure gauges (not applicable)

Pressure gauges for filtration chambers shall be stainless steel, direct reading, Glycerin filled
capable of 0-10 kg/cm2 register with 0.25 graduations.

Gauge shall be of glass or Plexiglas faced drip-proof and minimum dia. of 50 mm.

Gauge cock shall be of same size as pressure gauge and be fabricated from stainless steel.

Page 95 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.22 Underground warning tape

Warning tape shall be laid above main pipes. Tapes shall be durable and detectable by Electro-
Magnetic means using low output generator equipment. They shall remain legible and color fast
in all soil conditions at PH values of 2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.

The tapes shall be flexible and subject to the Engineer's approval. Width of the tape should be at
least 6"(150 mm.).

Tape shall be orange color with black text in Arabic and English as ‘CAUTION: IRRIGATION
PRESSURE MAIN BELOW’. The text on the tape shall be permanent ink bonded to resist
prolonged chemical attack by corrosive acids and alkaline with message repeated at a maximum
interval of two meters. The tapes shall be laid 300 mm above the pipeline.

The tape shall be continuous over pipelines and at joints there should be a minimum of one meter
over lapping.

7.23 Electrical equipment (not applicable)

All electrical equipment shall be in accordance with DEWA regulations and electrical specification.
Enclosures shall be protected in accordance with IP55 for equipment installed above grade and
IP58 for equipment installed below grade.

Wiring to and from control panels shall be routed in pvc conduit below the ground. Above grade
conduit to be liquid tight flex, or galvanized steel, provision to be made for inspection tee's and ells
to facilitate removal in the future.

Name of approved manufacturers for electric components are as follow:

1 SIEMENS
2 TELEMECANIQUE
3 ABB.

7.23.1 Electrical wire for solenoid valves and controllers

All electrical wire for underground use shall be single core soli ‘Underground Feeder” type insulated
with a flame retardant thermoplastic compound, rated for 600 volts and direct burial. Twisted paired
cable shall be laid to communicate between irrigation controller and solenoid valves decoder. The
cable shall be 12/14 AWG single core cable. The maximum coverage from decoder cables shall be
up to 3 Kms. The Contractor shall prepare a wire sizing chart with effective lengths of each station
and common wires, which shall be submitted for approval prior to commencement of work. Cable
markers shall be used for indicating valve number each cable at both ends as well as at splices.
Cables shall be laid in PVC conduits.

Two-way twisted decoder signal cables should be laid in separate conduits between irrigation
Controller and Main control panel for future use. Separate wire to be laid for each solenoid valve,
and valve combination to be arranged at the respective field satellite. Power cables for Irrigation
controllers shall be armoured cables without any conduit for it.

Two-way Signal wire between the Main Control Panel and the Irrigation controllers should be
double jacketed, two conductor cable intended for future central control system.

The cable manufacturer should certify that the insulated conductors have been tested for and meet
the requirements of U.L.

The two conductors shall be colour coded with one conductor BLACK and the other RED. The
conductors shall be tin coated, soft drawn, annealed solid copper conforming to the requirements
of ASTM-33.

The cable shall be suitable for direct burial in the earth, whoever it is required to be installed in
ducts or conduits.

Page 96 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Pull boxes shall be provided in every place of change in direction of conduit piping, near to solenoid
valves. In any case spacing between adjacent pull boxes in a line shall not exceed 50 metres.

Size of the cable depends on the distance between the Main Control Panel and the field Controllers
and according voltage loss calculations.

Sizes of the conduits should be as follows:

- 1” up to 4 wires
- 1½” up to 8 wires
- 2” up to 15 wires
- 3” up to 30 wires
- 4” more than 30 wires
Provide minimum one spare cable for every five cables.

Irrigation control cables shall be color coded as follows

1. Common wire Black
3. Drip valve wire Blue
4 Bubbler valve wire Red
5. Spray valve wire Yellow
6. Sprinkler valve wire Orange
7. Spare wire White

Separate conduit & pull boxes should be used for Two-way signal cables.

7.23.2 Wire connectors

All wire connections at electric remote control valves and all splices of wire in the field shall be
made using wire connectors. The wire connectors shall be specifically designed to ensure water-
proof underground wire connections. The connectors shall be under-writers laboratories listed
water-resistant wire connectors, rated 600 volts for PVC insulated copper wire with insulation
temperature rating of 105 degree C.

The connector shall be insulated with color coded, pliable, vinyl skirt. The shall feature alive spring
which assures a tight grip even on small wire combinations.

All wire connections to be arranged in plastic pull boxes at fixed interval distances of max. 100
meters and/or at any change of direction.

All valve combinations shall be arranged at the controller.

7.23.3 Electric pressure switches

Pressure switches shall be fabricated from die cast aluminium per ASTM B-85 and designed to
meet IP65 specifications. Transducers shall be fabricated from brass and buna N.

The pressure switches shall incorporate an alternating fulcrum balance plate allowing independent
adjustment of both set and reset point over the full range.

Both set and reset points shall be adjustable 1.40 to 14 bar, having a minimum deadband range
less than or equal to 1.40 bar. Repeatability shall be +/-0.5% to 2% of full scale. Switches shall be
vibration resistant and shall have front access to electrical connections and adjustment nuts.

7.23.4 Flow sensing and control system (not applicable)

Flow sensing and control system to sense the flow data and display that data as both flow rate and
volume on digital indicator.

Flow sensing and control system to sense the flow data and display that data as both flow rate and
volume (in US gallons) on digital indicator.

Page 97 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Sensor should be Flanged Electro-magnetic type as specified below.

Digital Indicator displays for both flow rate and total volume to be provided and to be mounted
inside the panel. The digital indicator unit should be powered with external 220 volts AC power
supply and rechargeable Lithium battery. The unit can run of internal or external power and should
have automatic changeover switch which is activated during a power failure. The battery will be
automatically recharged during normal operation.

Flow reading should be on the indicator in the panel at site. Factory Calibration Certificate shall
be provided with the Flow Meter.

Electromagnetic Flowmeter

General
Flow meter shall comprise of a flow sensor and a transmitter unit. The transmitter and Display Unit
shall be remotely mounted in the Main Control Panel. The flowmeter shall be microprocessor
based, modular design. Total measuring system shall be suitable for a minimum ambient
temperature of +60oC. Each meter shall be provided with the validation on site without removing
the sensor. Flowmeter processor unit must be digital to reduce noise level. All inputs, outputs and
power supply shall be galvanically isolated. Overall accuracy should be 0.5% and repeatability
shall be 0.1% or 0.5 mm/s (o.r = of reading)

Each unit shall have electromagnetic compatibility shoud be more than 10 V/m and shall withstand
and isolation test up to 1600 V for 2 sec.min. Complete flowmeter should have good resistance to
shock and vibration. It should withstand acceleration of 2g/2h per day, 10-100 Hz.

Sensor
Submersible, flanged process connection of carbon steel material with zinc aluminium alloy coating
rated suitably for application. Metering tube shall be at least SS 304. Each sensor should have 2
measuring electrodes, 1 empty pipe detection electrode and 1 reference electrode. It is essential
to have additional empty pipe detection electrode for proper detection of pipe condition. Electrodes
material shall be stainless steel SS 316. Sensor housing material should be powder coated die-
cast aluminium. Sensor lining shall be polyeurethane suitable for potable water. Each sensor shall
be protected to IP 67 or IP 68 as required. If the sensor is installed in a flow chamber sensor must
be IP 68. Also, IP 68 protection shall be from the manufacturer, without using any external kit or
gell locally. The conection cable between the sensor and transmitter should be original and fitted
and potted from the manufacturer. The sensor and transmitter shall be connected with 10m cable
from the manufacturer. The coil cable shall be 2x0.75 mm2 PVC braided copper shield and the
signal cable shall be 3x0.38 mm2 PVC braided copper shield.

In case of non-conductive pipe materials grounding rings shall be used for proper grounding or
complete meter must be isolated.

Transmitter
The transmitter must be microprocceor based remote wall mounting type. It shall have modular
design and field configurable by its built-in buttons via matrix. Transmitter housing shall be robast
powder coated diecast aluminium construction with IP 67 protection. It is essential that the
transmitter is of modular design for ease of maintance and future expendability. In case of any
fault in the transmitter one should be able to change individual modules. Outputs shall be analog
output (HART) and pulse/frequency. It should have 2 line, 16 character LC display for flow rate
and totalized flow indication. Transmitter should be configurable for error messages, empty pipe
detection, flow direction etc.

The sensor and transmitter shall be connected with 10m cable from the manufacturer. The coil
cable shall be 2x0.75 mm2 PVC braided copper shield and the signal cable shasll be 3x0.38 mm2
PVC braided copper shield. The meter should be able to operate at the voltage range of 100 – 260
VAC, 45 – 65 Hz supply.

Digital Indicator displays for both flow rate and total volume to be provided and to be mounted
inside the panel. The digital indicator unit should be powered with external 220 volts AC power

Page 98 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

supply and rechargeable Lithium battery. The unit can run of internal or external power and should
have automatic changeover switch which is activated during a power failure. The battery will be
automatically recharged during normal mains operation.

Flow sensing and control system should sense high flow rate (above the max. flow rate for any
combination of valves) and close the butterfly valve in filtration chamber.

7.24 System controlling equipment (not applicable)

7.24.1 Electrical control panel (not applicable)

All control panels should be assembled by one of the following approved companies:
1 Blackburn Sterling.
2 SCIENTECHNIC.
3 Bin Ghalib.
4 ABB.
5 DANWAY
6 Al Ghandi Switchgear Industry

7.24.2 Main control panels (not applicable)

Electrical control panels for this project shall be constructed of mild steel sheet enclosures with
stainless steel 316 lock and hinges front opening door having a protection range not lower than IP
65 according to IEC and to be class 3. The panel shall have provision for connecting to generator.

The Control Panel For Filtration Chamber shall be Form 2 and that for pumping station ,Class3 (
Form 4 ) and all the control panels to be fixed in GRP kiosk on concrete base (300 mm above
ground level)

The panels to be fixed inside the filtration chamber as per the Engineer’s approval and shall include
the followings:
1 Irrigation pump control system
2 Flow meter displays.
3 Sump pump control system
4 Exhaust fan control.
5 Butterfly valves control gear.
6 Lighting system.

Panel shall have main circuit breaker for the power main and earth leakage protection. Each power
circuit should have circuit breaker, earth leakage protection and power indication lamp. Each switch
and light on the exterior of the panel shall be marked with an engraved plastic name identifying
each item. Trunking shall be used when wiring the panel. The panels shall have serially numbered
terminals for terminating all incoming and outgoing cables. Anti-condensation heaters should be
provided inside the panel. The panel shall be installed above Pump or filtration chamber. Pump or
filtration system Control panels shall strictly be as per DEWA and /or DM standard Specifications
in all aspects and subject to the Engineer’s approval. The pumping system controls shall be initiated
from the main pump controller up on defined fall of pressure in the main line network. The pumping
system shall shut down at low flow, under pressure, low water level and motor trip.

None of the pumps shall be operated if water in the tank is below a pre-determined suction level.
This shall be achieved by means of a low-water level shut-off sensor. The sensor shall shut down
the pumps when the water level falls below the situation level and start the pump again when water
level ascends 30cms, above the suction level. The sensing probes shall have working voltage less
than 24 volts AC or as specified elsewhere.

The duty pumps shall start either based on a timer or from a signal given from remote controllers.
The assist pumps shall start and shut-off according to the demand of flow. The irrigation duty pumps
shall start with a time lapse of 0.30 minutes with an electronic timer. The jockey pumps shall operate
by switching in and out according to demand. Pumps shall be controlled by pressure switches,
which shall be adjusted to provide a CASCADE” operation, depending on the amount of water
required on the field. The jockey pumps shall shut down automatically once the main pump starts.

Page 99 of 113
 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Automatic change over to the standby pumps shall be provided. All parameters shall be set to the
requirements of the system and to the approval of the engineer.

Manual and automatic operation of sump pump is to be provided. The sump pump is to be
controlled by a water level sensor. The pump shall start when level in sump rises to a pre-
determined level and shall stop when level falls below a pre-determined level. During abnormal rise
of water level, the sump pump should run continuously and should the pre-set danger level of
water is reached, an alarm system is activated. An audible alarm circuit is be to linked to the sump
pump control panel. Automatic on-off for sump as required by sensing water level in the pump
house shall be provided.

Permit pumps to shut-off when the discharge pressure in main line falls below 1.0 kg/cm² for a
period of one (1) minute continuously. Signal to be given by a pressure switch installed downstream
after check valve. Pressure switch shall work only on “automatic”. A pressure switch of the
diaphragm type with minimum cut-in pressure of one (1) kg/cm² and a cut-off pressure of four (10)
kg/cm² shall be used. All other systems and components of panel shall be as per DM and DEWA
standards. The contractor shall include for all associated costs for all required additions and
modifications to match the electrical installations and programming to DM and DEWA standards
and requirements.

7.24.3 Control panel for fertilizer injection unit (not applicable)

Same as above to accommodate the control system and injection pump switch gear.

7.24.4 Satellite controllers

The irrigation controllers shall be solid-state type and shall have 220 volts power input and 26.5
volts, 50 cycles.

If the input voltage to the controller is other than 220 volts AC, the Contractor must ensure
continuous regular voltage to controllers equivalent to the input voltage marked out on the
controllers. If voltage fluctuations are noted, controllers must be equipped with automatic voltage
regulations.

The controllers shall have 24 stations as mentioned on drawings. The controller should be
weatherproof lockable cabinet with minimum one meter high Stainless steel pedestal. The pedestal
to be fixed on proper concrete base, 300mm above ground level. Irrigation Controller shall be
installed in GRP Kiosk enclosure.

The two way signal cables from the controllers shall be laid up to the Main electric control panel for
future use. The power supply for all Controllers on a filtration chamber should be taken from single
source.

Power supply to the controllers should be by armoured cables. No conduit is required for these
armoured power cables. Contractor to provide calculations for cable sizing for the Engineer’s
approval. Size of the power cables should not be less than 2.5 mm2 x 4 core.

The Contractor has to check the number of electric valves connected to each station, if number
exceeds the manufacturer’s recommendation a multi-station relay has to be included with the
corresponding controller. Lightning protection shall be provided for all controllers.

7.24.5 Filter controller (not applicable)

Allow cascade flushing of filters if differential pressure exceeds 0.30 bar, or on command from
central controller. Flush time to be adjustable. Control panel to be provided with a flush counter
(resettable) and a selector switch to allow manual flushing, and/or cancelling each automatic
function.

Controller to be provided with circuits to flow switch mounted in the flush lines to detect any flow of
water after the flushing cycle has ceased, and linked to the alarm circuit, time delay 2.00 minutes.
The controller will be mounted inside the electric control panel.

Page 100 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.25 Exhaust fan (not applicable)

Extra heavy duty industrial type Aluminium body exhaust fan size 18" to be fixed in the
Pump/filtration chambers, minimum three nos. of 8” dia GRP vent pipes to be fixed in each
Pump/filtration chamber for circulation of the air in the chambers.

7.26 Valve chamber covers

The isolation valves shall be in R.C.C. chambers as shown in the detail drawings.

The Contractor has to propose a design for chambers to suit the site conditions.

The covers shall be double triangular heavy duty ductile iron cover with clear opening 600x900
mm, bitumen epoxy coated. The cover should be loosely coupled by stainless steel bolts and nuts.
Covers to be painted green and should as per DM standard. The word of "IRRIGATION" in English
and Arabic should be casted on the covers.

Valve chambers with depth more than 1.5 meters shall be provided with a heavy duty aluminium
ladder.

There shall be insertion type flow sensor to record real time flow in the tertiary irrigation network.

7.27 Pump/filtration chamber (not applicable)

A R.C.C. filtration chamber has to be constructed by the contractor in this contact. Chamber is
required for filters arrangement, flow sensors and fertilizer injection system .

The filtration chambers shall be in reinforced cement concrete (with Proper finishing including
painting and lights) as per detailed drawings and shall be as per DM general specifications.

The access cover for filtration chamber shall be minimum 1200x1400mm of heavy duty aluminium
checkered plate with stiffeners and lifting handles and painted green. The cover should be lockable
and easy to open and should be tight to prevent dirt or soil into the chamber. The contractor has to
propose a design for the chamber to suit the site condition.

The filtration chamber shall be provided with two spare electrical sockets (Capacity 15 KW) for
future use.

Contractor to provide GRP air vents as shown on the drawings

There should be two covers for the chamber as shown on drawings.

Soak away shall have heavy-duty ductile iron cover 600x900mm.

Flushing pipe line from Filters and discharge line of sump Pump to be ended seperately ten meters
away of the chamber in 2m x 2m x 3m soak pit filled with gravel or to be connected to the nearest
storm water system as per Engineer’s approval

Monitoring facility should be provided to warn against continuous flushing.

The contractor must provide the engineer with structural, mechanical and electrical shop drawings
for approval. These drawings must be presented for approval upon award of contract.

All the chambers shall be in reinforced concrete to the approval of engineer.

7.28 Chamber identification plate (not applicable)

Chamber Identification plate is to be made to sizes shown on drawing and shall be of "DMiralty
Brass" BS Code No.CZ III BS 2871. The plate to be 5 mm thick with two lags 150 mm long 20 mm

Page 101 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

wide by 5 mm thick welded at the back. The plate is to have engraving 2 mm deep as shown on
the drawings for each relevant chamber.

7.29 Electrical control panel (not applicable)

The electrical control panel shall be constructed of mild steel sheet enclosures with stainless steel
hinges and lock front opening door having a protection range not lower than IP 55 according to IEC
and to be class 3. The panel shall have provision for connecting to generator.

7.30 Filtration chamber lighting (not applicable)

The contractor should provide single phase and three phase waterproof power sockets (one each),
and three fluorescent light for filtration chamber.

The fertilizer/chemical injection unit shall comprise of 300 litre rigid polypropylene make tank with
reinforced ribs mounted on a pedestal and dosing pump with a range of 2 to 20 l/h, calibrated in 2
l/h or less increments, complete with valves and fittings, filters and connecting pipes.

The elevated make up tank shall have level marks molded into the side of the tank. A second outlet
complete with stop-cock shall be provided in bottom of tank for draining and washing out. An
agitator shall be provided to ensure that there is no separation of liquids. The agitator unit shall be
removable to allow access for cleaning the tank.

The dosing pump shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material, close coupled to a suitable
splash proof electric motor. The unit shall have an operating head of 70m over the full flow range.
The injection rate shall be set manually to required flow.

7.31 Ducting

uPVC ducts shall be class C to BS3506. Asbestos cement ducts shall be class 12, to ISO-R-160
made with sulfate resistant cement bitumen coated from outside.

Duct markers shall be used and should be aluminium and shall clearly indicated the name in Arabic
and English : IRR " .

7.32 Execution

7.33 Excavation and back-filling

Prior to trenching all services crossing or running close to the line of the trench shall be identified
and exposed. In addition, the line of the trench shall be swept using an approved detection device,
capable of detecting both live and 'dead' cables.

Trenches shall be made as narrow as practicable, but not less than the pipe diameter plus 300 mm,
and shall provide sufficient room for laying jointing and testing. The width of the trench at the crown
of the pipe shall not exceed the pipe diameter plus 600 mm. Sheeting, bracing and shoring shall
be used to provide for the safety of all personnel for all trenches.

The trench bottom shall be composed of stable uniform sand with no protuberances that might
cause point loading of the pipe. The trench formation shall be trimmed to an even finish which will
provide continuous support for the pipe. Additional excavation shall be carried out at the position
of the pipe socket to ensure proper joint assembly and pipe support.

If the existing formation is unsuitable for direct laying, the pipes shall be laid on a bed of
imported sand 100 mm thick ( minimum ). This sand may be sourced from sieved excavated
material, but should not contain any particles larger than 5 mm, and should have good self-
compacting properties.

De-watering shall be provided to remove any surface or ground water entering the excavations.
Ground water level shall be maintained at least 100 mm below the bottom of each excavation.

Page 102 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

The trench should not be excavated more than 3 days production rate in front of pipe laying.

Pipes shall be center loaded leaving joints exposed within three days of laying. Initial back-fill shall
be by hand in 300 mm lifts, and carried out in such a manner as to ensure adequate support
under the pipe and distributed evenly to ensure there are no voids under or to the side of the pipe.

Back-fill material shall be sand and shall be compacted by water tamping once the level of back-fill
reaches the crown of the pipe.

For pipe sizes 4" (dia) and above , back-fill material shall be deposited in 300 mm lifts in general
areas and compacted to relative degree of compaction of 95% ( by approved method )and tested
by large pouring method. In paved areas layers shall be 150 mm and back-fill shall be compacted
layer by layer to reach relative degree of compaction of 95% to DM roads department approval.
Mechanical compactors shall not be used until there is a minimum of 300 mm above the crown of
the pipe.

Back-fill material shall be sand and shall not contain any particles larger than 25 mm for the
first 100 mm above the pipe; thereafter back-fill material shall contain no particles larger than 50
mm.

Whenever ambient temperatures exceed 35 degrees centigrade, center loading for PVC pipes
greater than 3" shall only be carried out in the early morning , or shall alternatively be preceded
by cooling of the pipe string by application of water.

For pipe sizes of 3" and below compaction as mentioned is not required.

7.34 PVC pipe installations

PVC pipes shall be stored on site in a covered pipe store. Pipe stacks shall not be greater than
seven layers or two meters high. Pipes shall be shielded from the sun at all times and shall be
placed on a sand bed, or on supports at least 75 mm wide and placed not greater than 1.50 m
apart; side supports shall be similarly constructed and placed not greater than 3.00 m apart. The
pipe store shall allow for circulation of air. Rubber sealing rings shall be stored inside closed boxes
in a shaded place, and shall on no account be exposed to sunlight for more than a few hours.

Pipes shall be transported on the site on a flatbed trailer, and should never be dropped or dragged
along the ground.

Spigot ends of all pipe shall be chamfered to a depth of half the wall thickness at an angle of 15
degree. Pipes cut on site should be cut square to the pipe axis with a fine-toothed saw. All swarf
and burrs should be removed from the pipe prior to assembly of joints. Pipe cutters may be used
for 1" pipe. Spigot insertion depth shall be measured and marked on all pipe larger than 3" using
indelible ink to allow checking at a later date.

Ring joints shall be made using an approved non-ionic lubricant compatible with the sealing ring .
Pipes sized up to 8" may be jointed using a crowbar and a timber protection piece, joints larger
than 8" shall be assembled using a clamped lever device. Before back-filling joints shall be checked
to ensure that the spigot is inserted to at least 90% of the socket depth in all circumstance.

Solvent welding shall be carried out by experienced fitters who fully understand the technique, and
have successfully made a solvent weld joint in the presence of, and to the approval of the Engineer.
Helpers brought up on site may only be allowed to make solvent joints after inspection of their
technique by the Engineer.

Solvent welded joints made on pipe 3" and above shall be preceded by lightly sanding both surfaces
to be jointed using a medium glass paper or clean emery cloth. Solvent "cleaner" shall be applied
to all mating surfaces using a dauber or brush (application using rags will not be allowed). After
ensuring that mating surfaces are clean and dry solvent cement shall be applied in sufficient
quantities to ensure bonding, but not in excessive quantities that will leave appreciable residues
inside the pipe.

Page 103 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Brush size shall be 3/8" round for 1" pipe, 1" flat for 1-1/2" pipe and 2" flat for larger pipes. Solvent
cement should be applied by two people simultaneously for pipe 3" and above. Immediately after
application of solvent cement pipes shall be pushed together in a smooth continue motion, that
ensures that the spigot is at least 90% inserted into the socket, the joint shall be held for a
minimum of 20 seconds after insertion, and then surplus cement shall be cleaned from the outside
of the pipe using a rag or paper. Solvent cement and cleaner shall be provided in tins with brush
or dauber fixed to the lid of the tin. The lids shall be firmly closed at all times except when the joint
is being made. Any tins of solvent cement that become viscous or hardens shall be disregarded.

On no account shall brushes on which solvent cement has hardened be used for making joints. All
fitters involved in solvent cement jointing shall be provided with safety gloves that prevent solvent
touching the skin, gloves shall be kept in good condition and shall be replaced periodically.

Jointing shall not be carried out in windy conditions (wind speeds greater than 18 km/hour). All
lines shall be capped at the end of the day’s work.

uPVC mains with sizes 8" and above shall have minimum cover of of 1.2 mete over the top of the
pipe. Mainline sizes 6" and below should have minimum cover of 1.0 meter. Pipes should be laid
in such a way it should have minimum clear space as per DM standards & requirements from other
services and trees.

Please note that uPVC lateral lines should have minimum cover of 60 cm over the crown of the
pipe. laterals should be laid in such a way it should have minimum clear space as per DM standards
& requirements from other services.

Minimum distance of uPVC Lateral lines for drip and bubblers system from the centre line of trees
shall be as follows:

- Palm Tres 2.0 metre.

- Trees 1.5 metre.
- Shrubs 1.0 metre.

7.35 Drip line pipe

Surface drip line pipe shall be installed above ground as shown on the drawings and shall be
anchored to the ground with staple stake at every 10m.

Subsurface drip line shall be installed 150mm below the top soil level as shown on the drawngs
and shall be laid on top of the layer of landscape roll on the lawn area.

7.36 Valves

Butterfly valves, Gate valves, air valves and solenoid valves shall be installed as shown on the
drawings. Installation shall be neat tidy. Valve boxes shall be installed level and aligned with the
pavement.

Cover of the valve chambers and valve boxes shall be level and aligned with pavement as
instructed by the Engineer.

7.37 Irrigation equipment

Equipment shall generally be installed to achieve optimal irrigation efficiency and to accommodate
the requirements of the landscaping. All irrigation equipment such as spray heads and emitters
shall be installed only after all the laterals and risers are flushed thoroughly. The half circle spray
heads should be installed at least 50 cm away from kerb stone.

7.38 Irrigation control equipment

The contractor has to follow strictly the instruction of the suppliers and provide the Engineer with
all technical information related to these equipment.

Page 104 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.39 Testing

7.39.1 Pipeline Pressure Test

The length of test section shall be maximum 500 m or as directed by the Irrigation Engineer. The
pipe length to be tested may be blanked off using a blank iron or steel flange previously drilled and
tapped for test equipment connection and strutted as necessary against end thrust. The blank
flange may be attached to the pipeline by a V.J. flange adopter or similar fitting.

Testing should not be carried out against closed valves. All charging and testing should preferably
be carried out from lowest point of the under test section and all testing equipment should be
located at this point.

The pressure gauge also should be located at the lowest point or adjustment must be made for the
level of the pressure gauge relative to the pipes location.

Prior to testing, care should be taken to ensure that all anchor blocks have attained adequate
maturity and that any solvent welded joints included in the pipe system have developed full
strength. Correct support and anchorage of any above ground sections of the pipeline is also
necessary. Underground pipelines should be back-filled, taking particular care to consolidate
around lengths which may have been deflected to negotiate curves.

All joints should be left exposed until testing is completed.

The main pipe should be charged slowly, preferably from the lowest point with any air cock in the
open position. They should be closed in sequence from the lowest point only when water visibly
free from aeration is being discharged through them.

Satisfactorily charged, the main should be allowed to stand overnight to allow any residual air to
settle-out . Re-venting is then necessary and any water deficiency should be made-up.

Pressure testing can then begin by pumping slowly until it reaches to 9 bar. This pressure shall be
kept for 24 hours.

A permissible water loss of 3 litters per 1000 m length per 25 mm nominal bore per 24 hours shall
be considered reasonable for PVC pipe.

For AC pipes the pressure test should be according the manufacturer's recommendation.

7.39.2 Painting

Dry film thickness (DFT) of all painted valves and spool pieces shall be measured on delivery to
site. DFT shall be the average of no less than three measurements, with no one measurement less
than 75% of nominal average DFT.

Holiday tests shall be carried out on internal and external surfaces on delivery, and also on external
surfaces prior to back filling.

7.40 Road crossings

All crossings across major roads/dual carriageways and U-turns shall be either through ducts or no
dig method .

Where it is necessary to cross roads in order to complete the work, the Contractor should first
obtain N.O.C. from service companies and submit where appropriate for road cutting to DM's road
Department. The Contractor should follow strictly DM's regulations. Ducts to laid at least 100 cm
below Asphalt surface.

Page 105 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Road cutting will only be permitted if it can be proved that all forms of non-desruptive method of
crossing is possible. In the event of road cutting is permitted, the reinstatement of wearing course
shall be extended to 15m from each side of the disturbed edge of trench.

Traffic diversions shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements and approval of Dubai
Municipality Roads Department & Dubai Traffic Police. If trench is left open overnight , proper lights
& caution lights shall be provided.

Trenches to be back filled with fine gravel around ducts to minimum depth of 50 cm. Remaining
depth to be back filled with 15 cm thick layers of Subkha or sub grade material with minimum 30%
CBR properly compacted & tested by approved Independent Laboratory.

Asphalt re-instatement shall be as specified by the Municipality road department. Sketches on

traffic diversion shall be provided including road signs to be used and distances between such
signs.
Only a Dubai Municipality Roads Department approved sub-Contractor shall be permitted to carry
out Road reinstatement works(sub-base, base, wet-mix, asphalt, road marking etc.) and non
destruptive crossing works such as the thrust boring, directional drilling etc.

All ducts should be at least 50 mm larger than pipe size.

Road crossings for the main and lateral pipes or cables should be carried out preferably by
horizontal drilling. Wherever it becomes impossible to drill because of existing services or any other
reasons acceptable by Irrigation Engineer, the road cutting shall be done as specified above.

Any tiled area damaged during construction, drilling or road cutting should be reinstated.

Separate ducts shall be used for irrigation pipes, electrical cables, control wires and maxi-com
signal wire.

7.41 Thrust blocks

At each bend, diversion or at the end of pipeline, a thrust block shall be provided. Heavy duty
polyethylene sheet shall be used to wrap the pipe at the point of contact between pipeline fittings
and the thrust block. Design of the thrust blocks shall be done by the Contractor and to be approved
by the Engineer.

7.42 Electrical codes

All the electrical installations shall operate at a system voltage of 380 volts AC three phase four
wire 50 cycles.

The entire works shall be carried out in strict accordance with this specification and instruction as
issued by the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority.

7.43 Electrical tests

Each electrical equipment, cable and complete system shall be thoroughly inspected and tested
before finally placing in service under the full responsibility of the Contractor. All tests shall be
made in compliance with respective regulations, recommendations and standards. Any
modifications or repairs deemed necessary upon completion of the tests shall be executed at the
Contractor's expenses. Further tests shall be carried out on any modified or repaired equipment
until it is certified trouble free and acceptable for its intended service. All testing shall be
demonstrated to the Engineer in a manner to be agreed later.

7.44 Electrical installations (not applicable)

All electrical equipment under these contract documents shall have passed adequate routine
factory tests. Field tests shall be made by qualified personnel, approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall furnish all apparatus, material, labor and facilities for performing the required tests.

Page 106 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Unless otherwise specified the individual electrical equipment shall undergo the following tests in
accordance with the IEC recommendations or other approved standards.

In workshop:
- High voltage test.
- Check on mechanical function.
- Pre-test of functional sequences.

At site:
- Visual inspection.
- Insulation test (megger test).
- Check of functional sequences.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer acceptance test certificates of all tests carried out
in his workshop including all measuring data and subsequent evaluation.

The following tests are to be carried out for all cables as a minimum:
- Resistance measurements
- Insulation test with specified AC power frequency test voltage
- Insulation resistance measurement of every individual cable length at site
- Electrical continuity test for all controls.

The following test shall be carried out upon completion of the earthing system:
- Measurement of the conductance of the earthing wires
- Measurement of the intermediate resistance of the earthing electrodes

The contractor shall provide at his expense the necessary qualified personnel and measuring
instruments of the above measurements.

7.45 Control panel installations (not applicable)

Panels shall be installed onto concrete bases (300mm above ground level). Control wire shall be
color coded, and provided with tags. Control cable shall be bundles and tied with a plastic cable
tie at least every 5 meters, installation of cable bundles in conduit shall be carried out in such a way
as to preclude the possibility of stretching the cable, or damaging the insulation. All cable splices
shall be waterproof, and made inside valve or conduit boxes, leaving at least one meter of spare
cable neatly coiled at each joint, and bend.

Panels shall be individually earthed by an approved copper clad grounding rod minimum length 15
mm x 3 meter rod driven down into the water table and connected to the controller by a brass clamp
and a 4 mm2 grounding wire as per DEWA and engineer approval.

All stages of the control system installation shall be supervised by a factory trained engineer,
recommended by the manufacturer who has previously been in charge of all aspects of installation
of a similar control system and approved by the engineer.

7.46 Controller installations

The field controllers shall be installed as per approved location on the drawing. Controller shall be
installed on the concrete bases (300mm above ground level) and shall be in pedestal enclosure as
specified, control wire shall be color coded, and provided with tags.

Control cable shall be bundles and tied with a plastic cable tie at least every 5 meters, installation
of cable bundles in conduit shall be carried out in such a way as to preclude the possibility of
stretching the cable, or damaging the insulation.

All cable splices shall be waterproof, and made inside valve or conduit boxes, leaving at least one
meter of spare cable neatly coiled at each joint, and bend.

Page 107 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

Controllers shall be individually earthed by an approved copper clad grounding rod minimum length
15 mm x 3 meter rod driven down into the water table and connected to the controller by a brass
clamp and a 4 mm2 grounding wire. Decoders, encoders, and terminators shall be installed in
plastic valve boxes, and their function and reference number shall be clearly indicated in indelible
ink.

7.47 Automatic irrigation system, commissioning

7.48 Flushing

See section 3.0.

7.49 Fieldwork

Commissioning of fieldwork and equipment shall include all works required to bring the system into
service, and to make sure that it is operating efficiently, and shall include but not be limited by the
following:-

1 Adjust valve outlet pressure +/- 10% of nominal.

2 Measure head loss from first to last sprayer in up to 50 different cases.
3 Adjust sprayer to ensure spray onto pavement and paths is minimized. Replacing any spray
nozzles that have uPVC burrs, or sand lodged inside. Adjust spray patterns to ensure optimal
coverage.
4 Ensure that all sprayers and valve boxes are flush with the finish grade.
5 Replacing any clogged or partially clogged emitters (delivering less than 50% of nominal flow)
or any emitter overflowing by more than 50% (squirting). Carrying out emission uniformity test
involving at least 40 emitters on up to 10 valves, as directed by the Engineer.
6 Controllers shall be adjusted to give an optimal flow regime, generally in accordance with the
drawings and as instructed by the Engineer. Valves sequence may be modified to ensure that
valves operate in a logical sequence to facilitate maintenance operations.
7 Irrigation cycles for sprinklers and sprayers should be programmed during night time and early
morning (from 12 mid night up to 5 am).

A full cycle shall be run four times, and total system flow rates shall be recorded, and stations shall
be adjusted in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, based on the results of these trials.

Trials shall only be carried out after all valve's pressure have been adjusted. During these trials
main line head losses shall be verified by installing pressure recorder at the start and the end of
the main line.

7.50 Irrigation control system

Three standard irrigation schedules shall be developed in accordance with the requirements of the
Engineer, and tested per controller schedule as above.

Each particular function of the system shall be demonstrated in accordance with an approved
commissioning procedure developed by the contractor.

7.51 Operation and maintenance manual

Operational and maintenance manuals shall be prepared and submitted for approval in draft form
prior to commencement of commissioning. Manuals shall contain comprehensive operational
schedules, recommended spare parts lists, manufacturers' operating data, Catalogues and
exploded parts diagrams where applicable for the entire irrigation scheme. The materials used for
the system shall be listed in the manual.

Manuals shall be revised in accordance with Engineers instructions, and reflect, and record the
results of the commissioning procedures described above. Three bound copies of the manual shall
be delivered to the Engineer prior to the date of substantial completion certificate issuing.

Page 108 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

7.52 As built drawings

The contractor must submit As Built drawings for all works included in this contract. Completion
certificate will not be issued unless the contractor submits the As Built drawings.

Three complete set of ‘As Built’ drawings along with a negative and all diskettes should be
submitted before handing over of the project.

All as-built drawings to be of DM Drainage and Irrigation Department standard size and prepared
using Microstation for Windows version 5.5 or latest). As built of Mainline Layouts to be prepared
on DM Survey sheets (scale 1:1000) as per the requirements of DM Drainage & Irrigation
Department.

Note: Contractor to check and include all existing irrigation system (along with existing filtration
chambers) in the as-built drawings

7.53 Sweet soil filling, contouring and plantation

7.53.1 Sweet soil filling

The Contractor to remove the existing soil in the proposed plantation area up to 60cm depth &
dispose-off and refill the area with fresh sweet soil. The Contractor has to refer to the landscaping
drawings. Levelling and contouring shall be done as per the Landscape drawings and to the
approval of the Engineer. The minimum acceptable depth of sweet soil filling in proposed planting
area is 50 CM.

Contractor will remain responsible for maintaining the levels of sweet soil against wind erosion till
the final hand over of the project.

Contractor to make tree pits and fill them with fresh sweet soil. The size of tree pits to be as follows:
- Pits for Date Palms: 2m x 2m x 2m
- Pits for Ornamental trees: 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.5m
- Pits for shrubs: 1m x 1m x 1m

The existing sweet soil should not be used for filling the top 50 cm layer and tree pits.

7.53.2 Contouring

The Contractor has to level the landscaped areas and bring it to the contours as shown in the
landscaping drawings. Contractor to make arrangements to prevent the loss/ drifting of soil due to
wind. Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the levels and contours of the sweet soil till the
Final Handing over of the project.

7.53.3 Gravel

The Contractor must use gravel size 20-40 mm / or as specified to fill the areas as shown on
landscape drawings. Depth of filling with gravel shall be at least 100 mm.

The contractor to modify all the existing chambers in the proposed Landscape area (if required); to
the approval of the Engineer and the concerned service authorities; in order to match the proposed
landscape levels.

Page 109 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

8 ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES

All plant and ancillary equipment’s shall comply with the requirements of the contract documents.

The scope as given here under this Section and other relevant related section is the absolute base
minimum requirements of general form and nature to be complemented with the supply of additional
equipment so as to complete the installation in accordance to the best possible international
standard and to the satisfaction of the owner/engineer.

The Contractor should specifically note that the supply of equipment and installation are to be
completed in all respect as specified in the contract. Any additional equipment and works that may
be involved or required to complete the installation as specified and that are required to satisfy the
required performance of the feature shall be supplied, installed and commissioned without any
additional cost or delay to the Contract.

The Main Contactor shall engage a specialist sub-contractor to affect the complete works under
this section to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer

The Contactor shall provide proof of Manufacturer’s warranty for all site furniture items. A minimum
of 5 years warranty shall be provided.

8.1 Balustrade

- Base Material: Steel rectangular hollow sections

- Dimensions: 100x50mm; Height: 4m;
- Dimensions: 200x50mm; Height 2.5m;
- Construction: Welding, bolted to structure
- Warranty: minimum 5 years, as per RTA standards
- Finishing: Aluminium powder coating
- Color: Sand light and sand dark

8.2 Railing

- Base Material: Steel rectangular hollow sections

- Dimensions: 50x50mm upstand every two meter; handrail 50mm circular
- Height: 1.1m
- Construction: Welding, bolted to structure
- Warranty: minimum 5 years, as per RTA standards
- Finishing: powder coated steel upstand, handrail powder coated steel in light color
- Color: Sand

Page 111 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

9 ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES - SHADE STRUCTURES

9.0 Shade structures

All plant and ancillary equipment’s shall comply with the requirements of the contract documents.

The scope as given here under this Section and other relevant related section is the absolute base
minimum requirements of general form and nature to be complemented with the supply of additional
equipment so as to complete the installation in accordance to the best possible international
standard and to the satisfaction of the owner/engineer.

The Contractor should specifically note that the supply of equipment and installation are to be
completed in all respect as specified in the contract. Any additional equipment and works that may
be involved or required to complete the installation as specified and that are required to satisfy the
required performance of the feature shall be supplied, installed and commissioned without any
additional cost or delay to the Contract.

The Main Contactor shall engage a specialist sub-contractor to affect the complete works under
this section to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer

The Contactor shall provide proof of Manufacturer’s warranty for all site furniture items. A minimum
of 10 years warranty shall be provided.

9.1 Shade structure Schedule - Canopy option 1 (WIP)

9.1.1 Fabric specification

- Base Material: Knitted Mesh Commercial Heavy 430 HDPE

- Make: Gale Pacific, Australian Make
- Construction: Knitted Mesh
- Warranty: 15 Years Warranty against UV degradation
- Color: Off-White/ Beige
- Weight: 430g/m²
- UVR Block: 85.9 – 87.9%

9.1.2 Structure Specification

- Base Material: Steel rectangular hollow sections
- Dimensions: 200x300mm
- Height: 6.4m
- Make: AKAA-Tent/Gulffab or similar and approved
- Construction: As per specialist recommendation
- Finishing: Aluminium powder coating
- Color: Sand

9.2 Shade structure schedule - Slats option 2 (WIP)

9.2.1 Pergola specification

- Base Material: Steel rectangular hollow sections
- Dimensions: 150x400mm
- Length: 2.5m
- Height: 3m
- Finishing: Aluminium powder coating
- Color: Sand

Page 112 of 113

 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS

9.3 Shade structure schedule - Perforated sheet option 3 (WIP)

9.3.1 Steel sheet specification

- Base Material: Steel sheeting
- Thickness: 5mm
- Length: 2.5m
- Height: 3m
- Construction: Welding, bolted to structure
- Finishing: perforations, CNC cut
- Color: Sand, three tones. Powder coated steel

Page 113 of 113

 Appendix D
Security Requirements
 Appendix D - A

Security Network Requirements

1. Dedicated Security IDF (6m2) with minimum dimension of 2m. with standard IDF specifications
2. Supply of Firewall Fortinet FG-40F-3G4G with 3 year support
3. Supply of Cisco CBS220 manageable full POE+ switch (or equivalent to specification, subject to
SMD approval) as per the number of end points and minimum 2 Uplink Ports and dual power
supply with 3 year vendor support
4. Supply and installation of 24U 600 x 800 rack equipped with 16A dual PDUs powered 16A
industrial sockets (one of the PDUs through the UPS)
5. Rackable UPS capable of power the entire rack for at least 4 hours, subject for testing and approval
by Security Department of RTA.
6. Supply and installation of copper and fiber patch panels in Security IDF
7. Supply and installation of UTP structured cabling from Security IDF to security endpoints
8. Supply copper and single mode fiber patch cords

Note: A l l pro cu rem e nt o f a ct iv e co m po ne nts fo r N etwo r k an d Ac ce ss Co ntro l m us t

b e p ur ch as ed f ro m v en do r u n der RT A nam e
 Appendix D - B

Access Management System Requirements

1. Civil containment and Electromechanical works for all Physical Access Control devices

2. Single fire interface module must be provided at S e c u r i t y IDF Room near to the Door
Controllers for integrating Fire Alarm system with Access Control system as per the approved drawing

3. Security equipment area must be protected from direct sunlight or water

4. Reinforcement support must be provided if it is required for EM Lock installations

5. Provision (without installation) of Access Control equipment

Note: Main contractor should coordinate directly with Corporate Security engineers for all security
related requirement
 1. Access Control Requirements

 Contractor shall submit material submittal to SMD and get approval prior to supply any
security equipment.
 Contractor shall directly coordinate with SMD Engineers and ensure installations pre-
requisites are complied with RTA’s standards.
 All equipment shall be supplied with three year warranty.

Access control equipment for single door installation as listed below.

# Item Brand Model Qty

1 Door Controller Nedap AP7803 1

2 Card Reader IN HID R10SE- 900NMNNEKEA08C 1
3 Card Reader OUT HID R10SE 1
4 EM Lock YLI YM280N 1
5 EM Lock YLI YM500N 1
6 Smart ACP NA NA 1
7 Backup Battery NA NA 1
8 Sounder Eaton ROLP/SV/R/D 1
9 Emergency Break Glass YLI CPK-860A 1

1.1 Door Controller

Single door controller with two reader interface shall be supplied with single door license.

1.2 Card Readers

HID R10SE readers shall be supplied with below configuration:

900NMNNEKEA08C - RDR, R10, ICLASS, SE E, LF OFF, HF STD/SIO/SEOS/MA, WIEG, PIG,

BLK, STD-1, LED RED, FLSH GRN, BZR ON, CSN 56-BIT LSB, IPM OFF, MOBILE-ENABLED-
FMT
 1.3 EM Lock

 EM Locks shall be supplied according to the door type and holding force.
 EM locks shall be supplied with covered bracket and necessary accessories with built-in
and external door sensor.
 EM Locks shall be able to operate in fail safe mode in operations
 EM Lock shall have status monitoring using built-in NO/NC SPDT contact rated
1Amp/12-24VDC with LED indicators
 EM Locks shall be complied with FR Standards (NFR 60-90minutes)
 EM Locks shall be certified by UL, BS476

1.4 Smart ACP

The Smart Access control Panel with power supply supplies power to the Access Control Module and
peripherals even when the main power supply is interrupted. The internal battery charger keeps the
optional batteries fully charged and checks battery status and performance continuously and
accurately. Smart PSU shall be able to sense power status and battery status to be sent to the Access
Controller when there is an alarm.

 PSU Complies with all relevant build and technical quality requirements and offers class 1
security with 3-year warranty.
 PSU Protected against short-circuit and can be analyzed remotely using on-board
inputs/outputs.
 Automatic battery monitoring, Power consumption monitoring, feed multiple modules.
 When the batteries are fully charged, the unit provides emergency power at maximum load for
8-10hours.
 Clear status indication – LED indicator lights clearly show all of the status information relevant
to the power supply including batteries.
 Power ratings shall be 220VAC-12VDC/5A minimum, light in weight and compact in size.
 Inputs to be available : 1monitored, freely definable, intended for voltage-free contact
 Enclosure shall be able to be customized according to the specifications and RTA’s standards in
terms of size, color coat, logo, lettering, chassis ID, heat dissipation grills, knockouts, etc.
 Access control Panel shall be tamper protected, input shall be volt free dry contact to feed
access controller, key locked, vandal resistant preferably IP65.
 Single ACP to serve PSU, door control units, battery, relays, tamper switch and indicators.
1.5 Backup Battery

Specifications

1. Type of Battery : VRLA, AGM, SMF

2. Application : Online – UPS

3. Design float life : 3 Years or above

4. Terminal Protection : High quality protection cover to avoid short circuit

5. Nominal Rating : 12VDC-17AH

6. Container Design : Fire/Flame retarded type plastic Enclosure (FR/FRP)

7. Operating Temperature : 5-90 degree C

8. Certification : ISO 9001: QS 9000 and ISO 14001

9. Warranty : 3Years

10. Standards : IEC 60896-2, 60896-21, 60896-22

11. Size : Compact to fit inside PSU

1.6 Siren

Specifications:

1. Model : ROLP/SV/R/D

2. Brand : Eaton

3. Voltage : 9-28VDC

4. Current : 10-20mA at 24VDC

5. Temperature : -25C to +70C

6. IP Rating : IP65/IP66

7. Tones : 32 tones minimum

1.7 Emergency Door Release (Break Glass Unit)

1. Model : CPK-860A

2. Brand : YLI

3. Type : Class ‘ A’ type approved by Dubai Civil Defence Authority

4. Colour : ‘Green’ in colour with text “Emergency Door Release” in white lettering.

5. Dual separate contact monitoring type (double pole), providing independent contacts for

power and alarm.

6. Emergency Break Glass unit should be sited adjacent to the door on the secure side when the

break glass is activated this should break the direct power to the magnetic lock giving free exit

and an audible alarm should also sound until reset. BG units should not be visible from outside,

must be in a protected area.

7. A clear plastic removable cover shall protect the unit.